File 914

A
JAPANESE GRAMMAR,
JAPANESE GRAMMAR.
BY
J. J.
HOFFMANN,
SCIENCES, ETC. ETC.
MEMBER OF THE BOYAL ACADEMY OF
SECOND
EDITION.
LEIDEN,
E. J. BRILL.
1876.
533
The work
is
published in Dutch also under the
title of
JAPANSCHE SPRAAKLEER
DOOR
J.
J.
HOFFMANN.
LEIDEN 1868.
And
in
German under the
title
of
JAPANISCHE SPRACHLEHRE.
LEIDKN 1876
JAAI 2 8
B66
^C 7
/
HOMAGE TO THE LATE
J.
J.
ROCHUSSEN
L. L.
D.
INDIA,
GOVERNOR OP DUTCH
EAST
MINISTER
FOR THE DEPARTMENT OP THE COLONIES, MINISTER OP STATE
FOR THE LIBERAL AND ENLIGHTENED MANNER
IN
WHICH HE
HAS PATRONIZED THE STUDY OF THE CHINESE AND JAPANESE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE.
E F
.A.
TO THE FIRST EDITION.
The Grammar of the Japanese language which accompanied with

,
this Preface ,
is
is
simultaneously published in the English and in the Dutch languages,
an
original
work, not a remodelling or an imitation of any other works of that

existing.
stamp at present
literature,
its
it
As
the result of a
or book
many
years' study of the Japanese
describes the
written
its
language,
as
it
really exists in
ancient, as well as in
modern forms.
It also contains the author's
own
observations on the domain of the
spoken
language, which
and
his intercourse with native Japanese in France, in
Engeland
to
especially in the Netherlands has afforded
him ample opportunities
make;
opportunities,
which have been the more valuable to him, in as much as that
they brought him in contact with people belonging to the most civilized and the
most learned, as well
as with those of the inferior classes of Japanese society.

soil
Thence he derives the right, even though he has never actually trodden the
of Japan, to embrace the
spoken language
in the range of his observations,
and to
treat
it
in connection with the written language.

is
The author
convinced that,
is
all
he has quoted from Japanese writings,

relies
whatever their character,
genuine: he
upon
it it
himself, and trusts that

is
the experience of others, unprejudiced, will find that
so.
With
in all
its
regard to the
manner
it
in which he has conceived the language, and
phenomena
treated
analytically
and synthetically, he believes
it
to
be in consonance with the
spirit of this
language, simple and natural, and,
his daily experience confirms this,
thoroughly practical.
PREFACE.
This method of his, was made
known
in general outline ten years ago,

J.
when
CTJR-
he published the Proeve eener Japansche Spraakkunst door Mr.

TIUS,
H.
DONKER
and the
s.
seal of
R.
approbation was affixed to
it
by the judgment of scholars,
whereas Mr.
tion:
BROWN, who, in 1863, published the very important contribu-
Colloquial Japanese or conversational sentences
and dialogues
in English
and
the
Japanese, not only founded his Introductory remarks on the Author's
Grammar, on
its
method, but with
a few exceptions, followed

to
it
in
whole extent.
The Grammar, now published,

followed by a treatise
lay
claim to completeness, ought to be

for
on the Syntax, the materials
which are prepared.
It
will be published as a separate
work, and be of small compass.
By
these aids, initiated in the
treatment
of the language, the student
may,
with profit,
make
use of the Japanese-Dutch-English Dictionary, for the publi-
cation of which the author has prepared all the materials necessary,
and by so
doing he will have at his disposal the most important means of access to the
Japanese literature.
LEIDEN, May 1868.
THE AUTHOR.
NOTICE
TO THE SECOND EDITION.
As
the
first
edition of this
Grammar
is
published in 1867 by
command
E. J.
of His BRILL,
Majesty's Minister for colonial affairs
out of print, the publisher
being
now
proprietor of the Chinese types,

re-issue.
acquired by order of the Dutch
Government, has resolved on a
The Author has found no inducement
to alter or
modify the matter of this

less
work; only a few words have been occasionally inserted, others of
importance
removed in order
grammatical
rule.
to
get
room
for
new
instance
more
fit
to
elucidate the
There are also some notices added, as on page 157 concerning
the Introduction of the Western Calendar, and page 172 some words about the
new
Gold-currency.
PREFACE.
Some
other additions are to be found in the ADDENDA to the book.

is
The paging
of both editions
of words treated
L.
the same; the second, however,

for
is
accompanied by a REGISTER
is
on in the work,
which the Author

used this
indebted to Mess*8
as
SERRURIER and w. VISSERING,
who have
Grammar
a basis for
the study of the Japanese language.
The Author, being now engaged in printing the Japanese-Dutch and Japanese-English Dictionary mentioned in the Preface to the
in
J.
first
edition,
is
happy
recommending
C.
to
the student the valuable Japanese-English Dictionary of

,
HEPBURN, Shang-hai 1872, and the Dictionnaire Japonais-Franâis
public
par LEON PAGES, Paris 1868.

LEIDEN, 26 July 1876.
THE AUTHOR.
CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION
Page
1.
I-,.-.
a.
b.
The Irova
in Fira-gdna
22.
Connection of the Japanese with the Chinese

language.
Synopsis of the Fira-ffdna-ch&mcters most

in use
The
necessity of uniting to the

12.
1.
22.
study of the Japanese, that of the Chinese
Written
or book language
29.
29. 30.
.
language
2. 3.
A. Exclusively Chinese
2.
On
the writing of the Japanese

of the written and the spoken
Chinese dialects in Japan Chinese text with Japanese translation.

3.
Introduction
82. 34.
language of China into Japan

4. Application
B. Books written in the Japanese language.

C.
Style, a.
6.
of the
Chinese
writing, to the
4.
Old Japanese
85.
38.
writing of the Japanese language

5.
New
Japanese
General conversational
The Japanese writing a. The Kdta-kdna

b.
proper.
6.
13.
Language spoken.
language and dialects
89.
The Fira-gdna
6.
Epistolary style
6.
42.
The Japanese phonetic system

A. Systematic arrangement of the 47 sounds ,
expressed by Chinese and Japanese
signs
7.
14.
15.
On
the parts of speech
42-
Kdna7.
Glance at the arrangement and connection of
words in Japanese
44.
B.
The Irova
in
Chinese characters and in

9.
Kdta-kdtia signs
7.
Repetition
signs.
of
syllables.
Stenographic
11.
ETYMOLOGY, NATURE AND FLECTION OP WORDS.

CHAPTER
Mil
I.
IN-
Stops
of sounds,
. .
8.
Remarks on the Japanese system

and the expression of
it
with our letters
12.
18. 18.
$
1.
AS
49. 49.
9.
Doubling of consonants by assimilation

Accent and rhythm
...
The root
Radical or primitive word
Radical in composition
10.
11.
2.
;j.
The Japanese running-hand Fira-gdiM.
49,
CONTENTS.
Page.
l.;.
A. Coordination
B. Subordination
I.
50. 50. 50.
b.
c.
Local
68,
69.
69.
69. 69.
Modal
Casual and Instrumental Dative of the person Dative of the thing
Genitive subordination
Objective subordination.
1.
(1.
II.
e.
direct
indirect
50.
/
g.
2.
50.
Terminative
70.
70.
III.
The
radical form, as definition before

50.
V.
To, Nite,
De
characterized by Yori or by
.
adjectives
VI. Ablative,
Euphonic modification
$ 4.
50.
51.
in
Kara.
71.
Gender
A. Gender logically included
particular
names
B.
1.
51.
prefixes
CHAPTER
II.
Gender indicated by the

and
Me
Ko
and
51.
8.
I.
2.
3.
Gender expressed by Ono and Meno. 52.
Qualifying
nouns, which serve as pro74.
By
and
Me, old-Japanese Ki
52.
nouns
A. For
,,I"
Mi
74. 74.
relations to
C. Application of the ideas of male and fe-
B. For the person spoken to

53.
male to objects without sex

D. Chinese
of sex
$ 5.
Particular
names of human
expressions for the
distinction
distinguish the person concerned 53.

53. 53.
II.
II.
77.
Pronouns proper , formed from the adverbs

of
place
Number
A. Singular B.
I.
Wa, A, Ka, Ko,
To, So,
79.
Da
a.
b.
(Do), Idzu
Plural expressed by repetition of the
Immediate compounds with
Wa ...
(ku),
80.
noun
II.
54.
II.
Immediate compounds of the other adverbs

of
place
Plural expressed by nouns used adjectively
with
Ko
Tsi, 80.
which
signify
quantity,
55. 55. 56.
II.
c.
Tsira and Isutsi
generality
1.
Da-ga, Wa-ga
.82.
Japanese forms
Chinese forms
plural
as
II. d.
Pronouns possessive, formed from radical

fixing
2.
words indicating place, by
suf-
III.
The
words
expressed
by
collective
II.
e.
No
Re
83.
Ra, Tomo (domo), Gara,
Substantive pronouns , formed from ad-
Sara, Nami, Tatti, Siu, Gata and Nado, used

as suffixes
56.
verbs of place, by suffixing

1)
85.
Ware,
2)
Are, Ore,
3)
Kare, 4) Kore. 86.

87.
IV. Plural expressed by adverbs, which

unite the idea of multitude to the predicate verb,
5) Sore, 6) 7)
III.
Tare (Dare), Tore (Dore), Idzure. 88.

.
Mina, Nokordzu, Koto59.
Determinative and reflective pronouns.

A.
1.
89.
gotoku
$
6.
Onore, onodzukdra
89.
Isolating
J7,
of the
rt, ba
noun by the
suffix r\,
va;
60. 61. 01.
62.
63.
2.
Mi, Midsukdra, Waga-mi ....

borrowed from the Chi2.
89.
wa;
B. Expressions
nese:
4.
1.
1.
Declension
I.
Sin,
Zi-sin,
3.
Zi-bwi,
93.
Nominative. Vocative
Accusative
Genitive
1.
Zi-zen
II.
IV. Expressions of reciprocity: Tagaini, Ai. 95.

V. Pronouns indefinite: Tito, Aru-fito,
no.
III.
Mo-
Ga, no index of the subject

Genitives suffixes
....
suffix
64.
Dare mo and Nanimo followed by

95. 97.
2.
No,
Na
and Tsu 66.
a verb negative
VI. Relative pronoun Tokoro
IV.
Dative
and
Terminative.
The
Ve
(ye).
67.
VII. Interrogative pronouns derived from Ta

or To, vulgo
The
a.
suffix,
Ni, as sign of the

.
.
Da
or
Do
97.
Dative or Ablative.
68.
1.
Nani, what?
98.
CONTENTS.
Page.
2.
Page.
Ikd, how?
101.
24. Definition of adjectives by adverbs ,
which
a
. .
Interrogative pronouns with the suffix,
denote
102.
25.
the
presence
of
quality in
mo
VIII. Arrangement of the personal pronouns in
the conversational language
higher
The
1.
degree. Absolute comparative
130.
relative or real comparative.
102.
Attribution of a quality in
equal
de-
gree
...................
higher
131.
CHAPTER
THE
9.
III.
2.
Attribution of a quality in a
degree
ADJECTIVE.
$
26.
The The
absolute superlative
Distinction between the attributive and predicate forms

I.
.'
27.
.................. .......... relative superlative ..........

excess
of a quality
.
132.
134.
135.
105.
28. Expression of the
136.
The adjective
in the written lan-
guage.
A. Joined to a noun substantive B. Adjectives in
1.
CHAPTER
105.
IV.
ki.
NUMERALS.
29. 30.
a.
Ki, termination of the adjective,

used as attributive
105.
The ancient Japanese The Chinese
cardinal
numbers
137.
b.
Adjectives
in
ki,
used as nouns
106.
cardinal numbers
141.
concrete
2.
31.
32.
The ordinal numerals
142. 143.
.
The termination The same,
ku, as adverbial form.
The
iterative
numerals
isolated
by the suffix va. 106.

,
33.
3.
a.
Si , form of the adjective

dicate
as pre-
34.
The doubling or multiplying numerals. The sort numbers

The
distributive
144.
144.
145.
106.
. .
35.
$ 36.
<
numbers numbers
.
.
b.
As such, superseded by Kari
107. 107.
The
fractional, or broken
146.
4.
5.
Sa, forming nouns abstract

List of adjectives in ki
37.
Numeral
I.
substantives
147.
148. 149.
107.
Japanese numeratives
Chinese numeratives
6.
Examples showing the use of the forms

cited
II.
110.
Notation of time.
Enumeration of years
154.
II.
The adjective according tothe ken language

Derivative adjectives.
spo112.
. . .
Chronological notation of years

1.
155. 155.
Examples, showing the use of the forms.
112.
after the cycle after the years of
2.
governments
. .
156. 157.
40. Enumeration of years by year-names.

10. Adjectives in karri 11. 12.
//
and garu
113. 114.
Introduction of the Western Calendar in
aril
Japan
ndrti,
157.
solar year
na and
ka
tarv.
114.
$41- Division of the

116.
42. Enumeration of
.
158.
159.
$13. Derivative
$ 14.
adjectives in
,
months
yaka
keki or koki.
.
.
117. 119.
$43. Enumeration of the days

44. Notation of hours
160.
162.
15.
16.
H ,
nki
kd-nki
119. 124. 12B. 127. 127.
17. 18.
$
//
,>
Measures, weights and coins.

$45. Measures of length
46. Superficial measures
ni-siki
.
166.
168.
19.
beki
20.
21. Adjectives
naki with the negative prefix
$47. Measures of capacity

$
,<
168. 169.
Na,
128.
.
.
48. Weights
U)
or the Chinese Fit

22. Adjectives with a previous definition.
Iron
copper and bronze coins.
171.
171.
172. 172.
129.
50. Silver coins
28. Definition of adjectives by adverbs, which
$51. Gold
coins
demote the presence of a quality

degree
in
full
180.
The new Japanese currency
CONTENTS.
Page.
Page.
2.
CHAPTER
V.
Modifications introduced by the spoken

,
203.
. . .
Examples of the use of the gerund.

52.
I.
205.
Adverbs proper
173.
73.
The verbal root

tive form).
. .
in
the Local
(subjunc-
II.
Improper adverbs, or adverbial expressions

1.
205.
173.
74.
The
tomo
concessive
form expressed by mo or
206.
Nouns
Verbs in the gerund
173. 173.
$
2.
expressed by
75.
domo or iddomo
.
208. 208.
208.
Distribution of adverbs according to their

signification
$ 53.
The form of the Future

I.
173.
The simple Future

Etymology of
this
Adverbs of quality
173. 174.
176. 177.
form
cited.
209. 211.
$ 54.
$ 55. $ 56.
//
//
degree circumstance
place and space
Examples of the use of the forms
The
certain
Future
of the
written
,/
language
II.
212.
$ 57. $ 58.
//
time
//
178.
181.
The periphrastic Future.

A. of the written language, formed by
1.
. .
manner
59.
connecting propositions
182.
aran, arame , ran

. .
212. 213. 213. 213.
Alphabetical synopsis of the adverbs cited. 182.
2.
3.
..naramu, narame, naran.

.
.
aranan
swran
arinan
4.
5.
mast
213.
CHAPTER
VI.
B. The periphrastic Future of the spo-
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION.

76.
ken language
214.
215.
(art,
iri,
The
(POSTPOSITIONS.)
77.
$ 60.
suppositive
form
The continuative verbal form

ori, uri)
Retrospect of the inflexions
185.
217.
.
61. Distinction of the
words expressive of
re-
78.
I.
te ari,
te ori,
..
te iri
218.
219.
lation
62.
185.
II.
.
tari,
taru
of the past tense.
Nouns, used
as expressive of relation.
186.
63. Verbs
in the gerund,
used as words ex192.

$
Forms
79.
.
pressive of relation
tari,
eri,
.
taru, ..ta
.
.
220.
.
.
A.
With
a previous accusative
.
.
192.
$
.
80.
81.
esi,
si,
. .
eru,
ereba
222. 224.
B. With a previous local, or dative
193.
ki,
ken
. .
Alphabetical synopsis of the words expressive of relation treated.

. .
82.
ken,
kesi,
.
.
keru,
.
.
keran
227.
195.
83.
tari-ki,
tari-st,
,
.
.
tan-ken.,
te-ki ,
te-si
ten
228.
84.
[..],
. .
..nu,
.
.
..nan; \_..nun\,
..nuru,
229.
CHAPTER
VII.
nureba ,
nuran
85. ..tsu, ..tsutsii; ..tsur)i, u, eba, fut. an. 231.

86. Synopsis of the inflected forms
$ 64.
233.
.
Voices of the verb
197.
197. 198.
87. Causative or Factive verbs in si or se.
234.
65.
$
Moods
88. Causative verbs in sime
238.
66. Tenses
67. Person
68.
The
89.
Its derivation
I.
passive form.
and number
198. 198.
199.
The verbal root The imperative mood

Closing-form of the verb
and
signification
first class.
. . .
240. 240.
241. 242. 245.
$ 69.
Passive verbs of the

i.
70.
200.
.
II.
second
third
71.
$ 72.
The
substantive and attributive form.
201.
90.
III.
,,
...
.
Gexund.
1.
On
the government of the passive verb.
Origin of the form
202.
Examples of the use of the passive forms. 245.
CONTENTS.
Page.
Pag*.
I.
The negative form

91.
I.
of the Japanese verb.
The root
Na
is
301.
Theory of the Derivation
247.
II.
Nasi, b.Nai, there
not
.
302.
303.
Examples
Jive verbs
II.
of the
formation of nega248.
. . .
III.
Naki, &Nai, the adjective form.
IV. Naku. the adverbial form
304.
. . .
Inflection of the negative verbs.
249. 250.
251. 252.
V. Verbs compounded with

1.
Naku
2.
305.
92. Continuative
form
of the negative verb.

.
NakU-si,
Nakii-se,
4.
Nakari,
93.
94. 95.
Form
Forms
of the forbidding Imperative.

of the negative preterit
3.
Nakeri,
of the
Nakii-nari.
Synopsis
inflectional
forms and
307.
verbs.
Forms
of the negative future
253.
derivatives of Na)si, In, leu
Examples of the use of the negative forms. 254.

Verbs expressing the being, the
Remarks on the compound

110.
I.
becoming
Verbs compounded with substantives. 309. Verbs compounded with verbs
and the
$ 96.
causing
to be.
260. 263. 264.
i.
.
II.
....
309.
Ar)i, w,
to be
97.
Or)i, u, to dwell
98. I, Ite, Iru, to be in

99.
Distinctive verbs and verbal forms
Conjugation of nondeflecting verbs in

Synopsis of nondeflecting verbs in
i.
.
265.
expressive of courtesy.
111. General observation
112.
265.
269.
311. 312.
100.
I.
Ni, Nite, Nan, to

Nar)i, u, to be
be.
The honorary
I.
passive form
II.
270.
.
.
113.
Tamavi,
A Tamai
314. 315. 316.
III.
Nar)e, u, eru, uru, to become.
271.
273. 274.
II.
Tamavari, Uke-tamavari
IV. Nas)i, u, to cause to be

$
114. Mdtsuri, to attend

Distinctive verbs expressing.
101. Mas)i, u,
1.
to abide; 2. to be
102. Samurairi, Sorai, Soro 103. S)i, u, itru, to do

I.
276.
279.
si
115. Being. Famberi,

$ $
5
Moosi
317.
Use of the root-form

Si, acting as verb
279. 280.
116. Doing. Si, Ita&i, Asobasi
318.
etc.
II.
117. Seeing, Showing.

118. Saying. Ivi,
Mi, Mise, Hoi-ken
319.
Synopsis of the conjugational forms

of si
li-masi, Nori-tamai,
Oose,
281.
si
Kikase, Moosi
119. Giving. Age, Sasdge, Kudasare, Tsuke,
319.
Compounds with
III.
282.
On
the government of S)i, u, uru,

285.
$
Tordsime, Tordse,
120. Going
Tan
Mairi,
Ide,
321.
to do
$
and
Coming.
Mairare,
104. Besi, Beki,

I.
Beku, may, can,
shall.
291.
291.
Mairase,
kdri,
Mairasare,
Agari,
Ma323.
Derivation and signification

Inflectional forms of
Tsika-dzuki
II.
Ben
292.
293.
. .
III.
On
1. 2.
the government of Besi
IV.
Tokus}i, u, uru, to be able.
294. 295.
CHAPTER
VIII.
Atavdz)i, u, not to be able.
V. Ahete, Aete, daring
295.
CONJUNCTIONS.
$
VI. Too-sen tar)i, u,

105.
it
should be
...
296.
121. Classification of the Jap. conjunctions.
326.
The
desiderative
verbs,
formed by Ta,
296.
off
desirous
$ 106.
A.
122.
Coordinative conjunctions.
Copulative conjunctions
Disjunctive conjunctions
Verbs expressing the leaving

action
I.
of an
$
I.
327. 329.
.'Wl.
297.
$
123.
II.
formed by Maki
297.
124. III. Adversative conjunctions

j
II.
Tami
//
298. 298.
j
125. 126.
IV. Conclusive conjunctions

V. Explanatory conjunctions B.
334.
335.
III.
Simavi
107.
$
The adverbial form of a verb
299.
300.
.
108.
The
derivative
form meri
to exist.
Subordinativc conjunctions.
I.
109. Nari, Naki,
Naku, not
.301.
127.
Conjunctions of place and time.
336.
CONTENTS.
Page.
$ $
Page.
128.
II.
Conjunctions of quality and manner. 338.

I.
ADDENDA.
On
On
arbitrary grammatical signs in Japanese
129. III. Conj unctions of causality.

a.
b.
Conjunctions
of an actual cause. 339.

II.
books
quotation
349. 350.
Conjunctions of a possible cause

(Conditional conjunctions)
341.
III.
On
Accent
the dialects of
Si
351.
130. 131.
132.
IV. Congunctions of the purpose

V. Conjunctions of concession
....
343.
344.
IV.
V.
On
Han, U, and Tdng.
351. 352. 352.
Remark on
The
relative comparative of propositions.
346.
VI. VII.
Remark on Zari
to kayo,
Alphabetical synopsis of the conjunctions treated. 348.
353.
VIII. Masi in the epistolary style superseded tyMoosi 353.
INTRO 33 TJOTIOIST.
1.
LANGUAGE. CONNECTION OF THE JAPANESE WITH THE CHINESE

SITY OF UNITING TO
THE NECES-
THE STUDY OF THE JAPANESE, THAT OF THE CHINESE

LANGUAGE.
In
its
general character,
it is
true, the Japanese

its
is
cognate to the Mongolian

it is
and Mandju languages, but with regard to
development,
quite original,
admixture of Chinese words, has remained so notwithstanding the later and subjects them to its own consince it rules these as a foreign element,
and
it
struction.
In the Japanese language, as
it
is
now spoken and
written,
two elements,
so doing, form a mixed the Japanese and Chinese alternate continually and, by has followed the same course as, for instance, language which, in its formation, Romance element, which forms a the English in which, the more lately adopted
woof only, in
like
manner,
is
the Anglo-Saxon. governed grammatically by
is
of the two elements, of the Japanese language the distinction (in the study the Chinese element is rooted in the Chiof the importance; and as
greatest
thence is to be explained, the nese language, both spoken and written, and of the Chinese language, as shall student of Japanese ought to know so much
enable
him
to read
and unterstand a Chinese
text.
The Japanese
learns Chinese
by means of
his
mother tongue, thus one, who
INTRODUCTION.
is
not a Japanese and does not understand Japanese, but wishes to learn
it,
must make himself master of Chinese by another way;

obliged to
to do this, he will be
make
use of the resources which already exist in European languages.

that he can learn the Japanese language without, at the
will totally fail of attaining his object either
let
Whoever supposes
same time, studying the Chinese

theoretically or practically.
Even
him be
so far master of the language spo-
ken, as to be able to converse fluently with the natives, the simplest communication from
a Japanese functionary, the price-list of the tea-dealer, the tickets
with which the haberdasher or mercer labels his parcels will remain unintelligible
to
him; because they contain Chinese,
if,
indeed; they are not wholly composed

,
of Chinese.
Thus
is
whoever wishes to learn Japanese thoroughly by means of
this
grammar,
supposed to possess, in some degree, knowledge of the Chinese
written language.
2.
ON THE WRITING OF THE JAPANESE.
The Japanese write Chinese but have,
at the
same time,
their
own
native
writing derived from the Chinese and which they, in imitation of the Chinese,
write in perpendicular columns which follow one another, from the right
to the
left.
hand
Our alphabet,
for that purpose
would have
to be written thus:
INTRODUCTION.
3
adopted the plan of
writing
is
coupled with ours have, in conformity with

left to
it,
writing perpendicularly, and from
right, I likewise
have relinquished the
manner formerly adopted, and now have, together with the Chinese, reduced the
Japanese writing to the rule of ours, and applied to
it
the modification in the
order of the signs already generally in use for the Chinese writing.
The Japanese running-hand, on the contrary,
is
too
much
its
confined to the
columnar system to be susceptible of any modification in
direction.
3.
INTRODUCTION OP THE WRITTEN AND SPOKEN LANGUAGE OF CHINA

INTO JAPAN.
knowledge of Chinese-writing was carried to Japan by a prince of Corea in the year 284 of our era, and after the tutor then,
first
The
immediately
,_
to
that prince,
a Chinese,
named Wang
tin
(3Er),
having been invited, the
Japanese courtiers applied themselves to the study of the Chinese language and
literature.
According to the Japanese historians,

').
Wang
zin
was the
first
teacher
of the Chinese language in Japan
In the sixth century, the study of the Chinese language and system of writing
first
became generaUy spread, by the introduction of the doctrine of BUDDHA.

in polished society, besides being instructed in his mother
Then every Japanese,
tongue, received instruction in Chinese also, consequently read Chinese books of

morality, and aimed at being able to read and to write a letter in Chinese.
The
original pronunciation of the Chinese,
it
is
true, degenerated early
and
that to such a degree, that
new
dialects of it
sprung up, which were no longer
intelligible to the Chinese of the continent; but notwithstanding that the Japa-
nese, on account of their knowledge of the Chinese writing, and their proficiency in the Chinese style remained able, by means of the Chinese writing to inter-
change ideas not only with Chinese, but with

Chinese.
all
the peoples of Asia that write

science in
The Chinese written language has become the language of

It,
still,
Japan.
is
such and will yet long remain such, notwithstanding the in-
fluence which the civilization of the
West
will
more and more exert
there.
The
This historical
fact
is
mentioned iu Japan's Beziigc mil der Koreischen Halbinsel und mit China.
j.
Nach Japanischen Quellen von
HOFFMANN, Leyden, 1839, page
111.
4
Chinese written language
is
INTRODUCTION.
though
the palladium of Japanese nationality
and
the natural tie which will once unite the East against the West!
And, however
slight
be the influence
till
hitherto exerted
on the Japanese
language written as well as spoken, by the study of the Western languages

and, to wit the Dutch, formerly the monopoly of the fraternity of interpreters
and a few
skill
literary
men, who used
this
knowledge
as a bridge, over
which the
of the
or
West was imported and
spread over their country, by means of

just as little will
it
Chinese
if
Japanese translations,
be in future, even
the study of the
Western languages should be ever
so greatly extended, as
the consequence, of Japan's being at last opened to the trade of the world.
4.
APPLICATION OF THE CHINESE WRITING, TO THE WRITING OF THE JAPANESE
LANGUAGE.
When,
after
the introduction of the Chinese written and spoken language

it
into their country, the Japanese adopted

is
to write their native language,

,
which
not in the least cognate to the Chinese

its
instead of resolving the sound of the
words into
simplest
elements, and expressing them by signs, like our letits
ters, they took the sound in
whole, and expressed it syllable for syllable
by Chinese characters.
Every Chinese
posite
radical
word,
it is
known,
its
is
expressed by a more or less com-
monogram
(character)
which has
peculiar ideographic
and phonetic
instance, such
value --its peculiar signification and pronunciation.

is
To choose an
^^
the Chinese word for a

it
thousand. The Chinese
says tsien, the Japanese

tsi.
pronounces
sen,
and the Japanese word
for a thousand is
The Japanese
i.
considers the peculiar pronunciation of every Chinese character

its
e.
the Chinese monosyllable, modified by the Japanese accent, as

calls it
SOUND,
and
Koye
or, by the Chinese
name
,
-^jj~
Yin, which he pronounces won;
the Japanese word ,

nese character,
is
on the other hand
which expresses the MEANING of the Chii.
called
by him
its
Yomi,
e.
the READING or MEANING for which

h
'jjM
he
also
uses the Chinese terms
q/jjf
Kun and
Toktt
).
The
:=
+*
above
1)
The
distinction
between
Koye en
Tomi
agrees
with
this,
as
it
is
made by the compiler and puin $

1
blisher
of the
Siemens de la
G'ammaire Japonaise par
le p.
EODKIGUEZ
of that work, and
it
is,
therefore,
important
to maintain the contents of this
paragraph as quite correct against the misconception,
INTRODUCTION.
quoted,
may
thus stand as an ideographic character, pronounced by the Japanese
as sen or translated
by
tsi,
or
it
is
tsi.
only used as a phonetic sign and expresses That, by such a confusion of Koyd en
this people rests
the
syllable
sen
or the syllable
Yomi, the whole writing-system of

dent at a glance.
<J
on an unfirm
basis is evi-
Departing from the principle, to write Japanese with the Chinese writing,
syllable
and to express the Japanese words

characters,
by
syllable,
by means of Chinese
some hundreds of the Chinese characters most in use were pitched

for
upon and used
phonetic signs, Kdna.

kai*- or
[The Japanese word Kdna, pronounced as Kdnna, has arisen from

kar na by assimilation of the r, and means
e
taken upon trust,
or
borrowed
Ma-na
name,
thus a phonetic sign without farther meaning, in distinction fron
(pC
^=t)i a real
'jUt
name. The word Kdna

,
is
generally expressed by the Chinese
characters
^j
kia
tmng
borrowed name;
the
Kdna sign
is called
^1~~yT^^
^ Kdna-monzi,
^*
first
and the Kdna writing
j^
^^
Kdna-gdki.]
These phonetic signs, just as the Chinese writing generally, were at

written in full, either in the
is
standard-form,
or in a
running hand, which
produced of
itself,
whenever a Chinese character, composed of several strokes,

,
is
written in one continuous pencil-stroke

full
and gives rather a sketch of
it
than
draught.
Running hand forms
for
are
e.
g.
Kt?
*TP
COD \Q)
Ty
The standard-form, written
in full,
commonly
called
J^^;2> Sei-zi,
nese Chronicle
the real,
proper character,
also
mal writing, and

fjj
^T^'-flf
2J
"^.^^^ Sin-si or ^ Kai-sio nor^jj>

,
Gyoo-sw, text-hand, was used in the Japa-
f^ US
Yamdto-bumi or Nippon-sw
till
ki
'),
containing
the oldest history of Japan, from 661 B. C.
696 A. C. and published in 720
A. C. as manuscript in thirty parts.
The running-hand form was used
in the old Japanese Bundle of
Poems
on the ground of which,

against
R.
AI.COCK, pp
9 and 10 of his Elements of Japanese Grammar, takes the

as the Chinese
field
KODRIGUEZ and
of ALCOCK.
is
his publisher.
Yomi, nevertheless, means the same,
word
gfjl
^ Kun,
the
Rung
1)
The work
:
written
in
Chinese, and was one

der
of the principal sources, in the elaboration of
my
treatise
Japan's
Beziige
mil
Koreuchen Hatbinsel
und
mil
Schina
published
in
VON SIEBOLD'S
Nippon-Archief. 1839.
INTRODUCTION.
3
IS V ^ :|
^X
/ 4t|
^ " Man-yov-siu or the Collection of the Ten Thousand Leaves,

called
).
compiled about the middle of the eighth century.
The
first
Kdna-iorm was, consequently,

( !j||
Yamdto-kdna
the other
Man-yov-Kdna
^ ^
'jjjj.
(^ Jfa ^ ^
s
),
5.
JAPANESE WRITING PROPER.
An
another
styled,
abbreviation of the two forms of Chinese writing led to the formation of
writing
as
which,
in
opposition to the
Chinese character writing, was

jj 2JS
the
writing of the Japanese Empire,
IH
^ ^C~^>
Kdta-kdna
Nippon goka no mon-zi.

a.
The Kdta-kdna.
Abbreviation of the Chinese

gdki. It
standard writing gave
rise to the
was, originally, intended
when
placed side
by side with the
Chinese cha-
racters, to express in
,
remarkably smaller writing either their sound

(
(koye), or their
meaning (yomi) and was therefore denominated Kdta-kdna-mon-zi
fr *
-A
^ ^
*
),
^^^!^),
i.
e.
side-letter
is
2
).
According to the Japanese sources

,
the in,
ventor of this writing
unknown
and the invention of
it
has been incorrectly
attributed to the Japanese statesman, KIBI DAIZIN,
who
died in 757.
b.
The Fira-gdna
4
).
The more or
less abbreviated
form of the Chinese running-hand or short
hand
(I^J^^
Sdo-zi)
or,
is
caUed Fira-gdna-gdki (2f>

to
$% ^g
^j*
or the
Jjf jjji
even
letter-writing,
i. e.
according
another
reading, Firo-gdna
),
broad letters,
is
since they take
up the whole breadth of the writing-column.

documents, as well as
are written
letters
It
the running hand in which
official
and by
far
the greatest
number of Japanese books

as the
and printed, and thus

It has the
must be distinguished
popular writing,
proper.
advantage
1)
to
Tamdto, contracted from Tama ato,
behind the mountains,

is
properly jthe
name
of the Province,
which the Mikado's court was removed in 710,

,
at the
same time applied

,
to the Japanese
Empire. See
Fak-buts-zen
2)
under Tamdto, and the Japanese Encyclopedia, Vol. 73
p.
4 verso.
The notion
of some Japanese writers seems less correct , as by Kdta-kdna were meant
half-letters.
3) The Japanese Encyclopedia San-sai-dzu-e. Vol. 16, p. 35 v.

4) People say and write too lira-kana
and Hira-kana.
INTRODUCTION.
over other forms

another.
of writing,
that the letters of a
word can be joined
to
one
6.
ON THE JAPANESE PHONETIC. SYSTEM.
The number of sounds or
syllables in
Japanese was
(
first,
fixed at
47 and
that in imitation of the Brahmanical- writing
^^
_3^ Bon-zi} , which distinguishes

is attri-
12 vowels and 35 consonants
').
The
fixing of the Japanese phonetic system
buted to the Buddhist Priest KOO-BOO DAI-SI

year,
(^ $% ~fc
,
fflj)
wn
h* 8 31st
insti-
went
to
China in 804 A. C. to study more closely the doctrine and

,
tutions of
BUDDHA and who

that
during a stay of three years
acquired there
among
other knowledge,
of the Brahmanical writing (Sanscrit) and the phonetic

2
).
system, as
it
was understood by the Chinese Priesthood
A. SYSTEMATIC ARRANGEMENT OP THE 47 SOUNDS, EXPRESSED BY CHINESE
AND JAPANESE K ANA-SIGNS.
The Japanese phonetic system with
its
Chinese and Japanese Kdna-signs
systematically arranged according to the organs of speech ,
by which the sounds
are produced,
is
as follows:
jjL^"}"'^
i.
}H
'
?;
|=f
f)
\sir<x
1.
Palatal soundsS).
|fcf
f
#
-ty-
ffi -f
^p
^$
^fj
u.
ft
fj-
2
-
6
(ye).
^ 3~
B
_
, <>.
2.
JfflJ
ka.
g|
,ki.
,ku.
ke.
3
)/
,'ko.
3. Lingual sounds 4)
sa
^ ^/
si.
^
X
su.
^
j
-fc
se.
^
TJr
SO.
(tsi).
5.
-J-
na.
(tsu).
ni.
^J
nu.
ne.
no.
1)
The Japanese Encyclopedia San-sai-dzu-e.

in
Vol. 15, p. 85 v.
2) The way
characters,
which the Chinese translators have copied, syllabically only, by means of Chinese
is
the Sanscrit words in the Buddhist writings imported from India,
placed in a clear light by
the work:
Method* pour
dechiffrer
et
transcrire let
noms
sanserifs qvi se rencontrenl dans les livres chi-
nois, inventee et demontree par
M. STANISLAS JULIEN.
Paris 1859.
INTRODUCTION.
6. Labial sounds I).
fa
(va).
fl
fu
(vu).
fe
(ve).
fo
(vo).
(vi).
,
7-
ma.
mi.
mu.
me.
mo.
8. Palatal
sounds.
ya.
-f
i.
3. yu.
,
]g
I
2
ye.
M
-
yo.
9.
Lingual sounds.
ra.
)J
ri.
)ly,ru.
^l/,re.
/X
>
gt7.ro.
'
10. Labial sounds.
wa
wi
(1).
^7 WU.
,
we
wo
We
that the
give this
view from a Japanese source
2),
-we
must, however, remark
Chinese signs of the sounds are not generally those, from which the
it,
Japanese Kdta-Mna sign placed next

properly, the
by way of abbreviation,
is
derived, for,
Kdta-Mna
sign:
answers to the Chinese character

,
,o,
,
vulgo
a
"fa
tsi,
thousand,
Jap.
tsi.
ne,
fa,
the cyclical sign for
mo use, Jap. ne.
..
mi,
three, Jap. mi.
mu
me,
ru,
woman,
Jap. me.
wi,
well, Jap.
ivi.
wo,
According to
this
system,
some
dictionaries,
particularly
those of the un-
mixed old Japanese language have been arranged.
2)
Wa-kan SeU'yoo moe sau bukuro,

is
p.
38,
r.,
where the pronunciation of the Sanscrit phonetic
system
given with Japanese Kdta-kdna.
D=J.>J.JJo/'/7/t
//i/,
-Japanese
Grammar
J A-,-
j->
j j
Jbi >^rt
^r
/'
M
/ /
<ys's/s/'SY
''
'-
<
/S/Y //s/////s /r ///
^'
ss/s
INTRODUCTION.
This system of 47 sounds or syllables, however, and indeed with relation to

the consonants,
is
incomplete.
It is
not
-sufficient to
express
all
the sounds of
the Japanese language.
Therefore, to supply the defect, recourse has been had to
a modification of some Kdta-kdna signs, and for that purpose points, or a small
ring, have been placed next them.
Thus
is
placed
opposite the row of sounds
~fl
;t
?7
A-
~^ the modification
"if
^V
}j*
L*
ge,
~^f
ka, ki,
ku, ke, ko
ga,
gi,
gu,
go.
sa,
si,
su,
se,
so
za,
zi,
zu,
ze,
zo.
ta,
tsi,
tsu,
to,
to
da, dzi, dzu, de, do.
ba,
fa,
fl,
bi,
bu, be, bo.
fu,
fe,
fo.
pa,
pi,
pu, pe, po.
The sounds, thus modified,
are called Nigordru koyd (y||j
"^)
i-
e-
confused
or impure sounds, the points used to indicate the modification Nigori, and
the small ring Mdru.
In the Yamdto- and Man-yov-kdna the modified sounds are expressed by proper
Chinese characters chosen for that purpose.
syllable ka is expressed
While, to give an instance, the

,
.
by one or another of the characters
JfjfJ
fe-
RT
fir-
fr-
ffi,
^r-
m-
m.
to express the syllable ga
one of the characters
^ ^
* *
.
^ ^ ^
. .
BB.
l. .
-t-.
|l^
$jjj
may
be chosen.
B. THE
IROVA
IN CHINESE CHARACTERS
AND IN KATA-KANA
SIGNS.
To
facilitate
the learning of the Japanese
sounds or syllables,
they have
been so arranged as to compose a couple of sentences, and as these begin with

the word Irovd, that
position of the Irovd
name has been given

is
to the Japanese alphabet.
The com-
attributed to the Bonze, KOO-BOO DAISI,

it
(who died in 834)

asserted, running-
already mentioned, the writing-form he used for
was,
it is
hand or Fira-gdna.
10
THE IHOVA.
INTRODUCTION.
TRANSLATION.
THE IROVA WITH CHINESE

TRANSLATION.
Iro va nivovet6 tsirinuruwd.
Color and smell (love and
enjoyment) vanish!
o
? ft
/~\-=3# PS V* V^ y
Waga-y6 dare zo tsune naram.

U-wi no 6ku-yama kevii koyete
Asaki yumemisi, evi
In our world
who
(or what)
wil be enduring?
,
If this day passes
away
into
the deep
mount of its existence,

it
mo
sczu.
Then
was a faint vision;
it
does not even cause giddiness

(it
leaves
you
cold).
The Kdta-kdna
signs of the Irovd, which stand in the place of our alphabet,
and according to which the Japanese dictionaries are commonly arranged, are
derived from Chinese characters,
which are likewise used, and that by way of

are:
Capitals or large letters.
They
wa.
g
7
'j
n
)~\
>.
Jfjn
wi,
i.
^>,
,
fa (ha), va.
ni.
JJS
7J
,
-^
/Jl
^r
,
ta.
o.
^ ^
-^
^1
fo (ho)
fe (he)
vo.
ve.
/jiL
re.
so.
??
ku.
ya.
,.
me.
mi.
si.
^s
^
*
"^
tu, (tsu).
ma.
^))
ti, tsi.
ri.
-y*
,ne.
,
^r,ke.
we,
e.
na.
ra.
y
17
fu.
fl(hi), vi.
ko.
ye.
te.
mo.
se.
mu, m.
n.
*
,
X
7
s
The
characters
tsi
marked * stand
for ideographic signs,
answering to the Ja-
panese word
(a thousand),
(three).
,
ne (mouse),
wi (well), ye (bay), yu (bow), me
(woman), and mi
The sign
2^
mu, which was
also
used in the old Japanese for the final
INTRODUDTION.
11
sound
(at present n)
has
in this quality,
more
lately acquired the sign
2S n
,
as a variation.
7.
REPETITION OF SYLLABLES.
STOPS.
The
;
repetition of a letter is expressed
by
<*>'>
A
,
of dis- or trisyllabic words by

for
,
thus, for instance,
^ stands
for ^>
yay
iro-iro,
As stenographic signs,
for
some Japanese words that frequently occur, in
connection with the Kdta-Mna, the following are to be remarked:
Hi f r
to
sake.
for y*
^
^
,
J3^
~\j
y> ^:
Hs5f
i
fo&i,
time.
_y
/ ^T
*oH
time.
^
(^)
^(
tama.
Stops.
As
stops,
only the
,
comma
is
and the point
or
.)
occur in Japanese.
The use of them

also at
however,
left
wholly to the option of the writer.
Some
use
the beginning of a new period, and thus begin that with a point,
while others with the same object place a somewhat larger ring,
there.
or a
The comma
"
stands on the right of the letter (for instance
^)
while
the repetition sign

stance ^, kuku).
is
placed on the diameter of the column of letters (for in-
The
principle of separating the words from one another in writing

,
is
for the
most part
quite lost sight of in writing with the Kdta-kdna
and the Kdna signs

of
it
of a whole period are written at

that for an unpractised person
,
equal distances. The consequence

is
is,
who
not already pretty well acquainted" with

has to divide some
fifty
the Japanese,
successive
it
is
very doubtful
how he
With
or a hundred
Kdna
signs into words.

shall
a view to perspicuity and not to require

is
from the reader that he

offered
be already acquainted with the period which
him
to read, to enable
him
to read
and understand
it, it is
in the highest
degree desirable that our method of

the Japanese,
as it is
separating
the words should be applied to
done by the author of
this
grammar.
it
If the
method of
separating word for word were adopted by the Japanese,

step in the
would be a great
improvement of
their writing-system.
p.
Note.
For the sign of quotation see Addenda
349.
12
INTRODUCTION.
8.
REMARKS ON THE JAPANESE SYSTEM OF SOUNDS, AND THE EXPRESSION OF

IT
WITH OUR LETTERS.
To promote
characters,
LEPSIUS.
the unity necessary in the reduction of the Japanese to
Roman
we have adopted
this
the
Universal or Standard alphabet, by ROBERT
As
alphabet enables people of various nations to reduce to their

,
own
graphic system
,
the words of a foreign language
in a
manner systematic
uniform
and
intelligible to
every one ; and as
it
has been adopted by the prin-
cipal philologists in all countries, as well as. by the

Societies, its application to the Japanese
most
influential Missionary
language will be welcomed by every one

,
who
prizes a sound
uniform and
at the
same time very simple system of writing.

character the following signs borro-
In reducing the Japanese text to
Roman
wed from the Standard alphabet have been

a.
i.
adopted.
a open as heard in the Dutch vader;

i
English father, art;
Jap.
.
pure as heard in the Dutch

long;
short.
,
t'eder
Eng. he
she
Jap. -f
i.
Jap.
$~
1
u.
u pure
as oe heard in the
.
Dutch goeA
,
Eng. oo in good poor,

,
o in lose ; -
Jap. ^7
At the beginning of
wu.
a word
it is
frequently pronounced with a
soft labial aspiration, as

ii,
short, silent u.
e close
,
e.
e as
heard in the Dutch bgzig

e
meer
geven
Eng. a in face
no-
tion
5. e
German
in
weh
Jap.
2
;
short.
e.
open as heard in the Dutch berg
Eng. a in hat
French
in mere ,
elre;
o.
German Bar,
as
fett.
o close
heard in the Dutch Jong, gehoor;

.
Eng. borne;
German
Ton
6.
Jap. <J"
o short.
a,
a sound between a and o, leaning rather to the a than the o, as heard in
the English water,

p.
all
and oa in broad.
it is
When
In the
the sound a inclines rather to the o than a,

dialect of Ye'do "j*
"$? (flu)
expressed by
o.
an.
changes to ao, because the a, for ease
in rapid pronunciation, inclining to the u changes to a, while the w, to ap-
proach more nearly the a, changes to
o.
INTRODUCTION.
13
In some dialects of Western Japan

to 60,
particularly that of Kiu-siu , au changes

~T
and arau
7
(7) is superseded
7 by aroo (Q,
n).
is
The etymology
preferred.
considered, however the written form au or au
to be
on.
Etymologically ou
()
in the dialect of Yddo sounds oo, being the hard

incli-
open o heard in the Dutch loopen, German mond, followed by the u

ning towards the
as oo
soft o.
,
and
is
written so,
By some Japanese this diphthong is also pronounced as well. On the etymological principle we write ou,
') '
in distinction from au, or au o

eu.
(2
as in
ig
pronounced
eo.
k,
Dutch, German, and English. -
~J]
^,
~)f
^7,
^7
= â
&i
ku, ke, ko.

g.
In Western Japan, particularly in Kiu-siu,
^,
<jrive,
??,
If are
pronounced as ga,
in the
gi,
gu, ge, go, thus g as the medial of k, just as the g
German
</abe,
French âôn, English

,
<jrain,
go.
In the dialects of Eastern Japan
on the other hand
particularly in that
of Yedo , the g has the sound of the ng in the
German
la,ng ,
English singing
thus a really
~ff
,
impure
^r
,
sound, by no means the medial of k; and the series
^*,
^7*,
If, are prononced nga,ngi, ngu nge, ngo according to
the Standard-alphabet, na, ni, nu, ne, no.
Eren might
the pronunciation of Ytdo deserve preference above that of

still
the other dialects,
we
think
we ought
to retain the g for the representais
tion of the impure g, because this form of writing
as good as universally
it,
adopted, and also because the n does not appear with

writing.
even in the Japanese
Therefore without wishing to dispute the freedom of others to write
wanga
for
^7
~)f
and Nangasaki
for -j-
~Jf i}~
4^
>
because people in Ytdo
speak so,
saki,
we adhere
to our already adopted
written form waga and Naga-
and say wdnga and Ndngasdki.

, ,
Te Dutch guttural g (#aan #even) = y of

foreign to the Japanese organs of speech.
s.
the Standard-alphabet
is
quite
sharp, 1j"
^ ^
,
-fe
}/
aa, si, su, se, so.
Si and se, in the pro-
1)
LEON
FAofes,
also
has
kept
this
distinction
in
view,
and expresses
by
and
by 6.
d*
Dictionnaire
la
Japonais- Franfais
traduit
du didionnaire Japonau-Portuyais compote par

Premiere livraisou. 1802.
lex missionaires
compaynie de Jesus.
Public par
LEON PAGKS.
14
INTRODUCTION.
nunciation of Yddo have the sound of the

she, shay,
German
si, se
-fc
schi, sche,
the English
and thus answer
to the written
forms
of the Standard-alphabet.
si
Etymology, nevertheless, requires
for
/ and
the written form
and
se,
leaving she and shay, and sometimes also

z,
tse,
to the pronunciation.
soft s
impure, being heard, in the dialect of Yddo, as a combination of n

also of
and z or
d and
z.
*))"*,
if, ]y =
za, zi, zu, ze, zo (nza,
nzi, nzu, nze, nzo or dza, dzi, dzu, dze, dzo), consequently
^7
oc-
curs as ardnzti or arddzu.

s,
Dutch
s;,
German
is
sch,
English sh, French
ch.
As pronounced
at
Y4do
this
consonant
distinguished as a palatal variety of s which, as such, ought
to be represented
by
of the Standard-alphabet.
this
The combination of
by î
Yedo
,
sound with a, u,
which,
is
o, so sa, su, so, is expressed
*L,
(siya,
,
siyu,
,
siyo),
pronounced by some Japanese of

,
as siya
siyu , siyo
with a scarcely audible y whereas from the mouths

is
of some others, a sound

the
first
heard which inclines rather to sa, su,
so.
Since
pronunciation
lets
the etymological value of these combinations
appear,
leaving
z.
we think
it
to give the preference to the written forms siya, siyu, siyo,
to the reader to
zj ,
pronounce them sa,,su,

s
so or sya, syu, syo.

s.
The Dutch
V'î ^n
French j
English
in measure
the softer pronunciation of
2a, zu, zo.

,
For the sake of etymology, we write ziya, ziyu,

y* =
ta, tsi, tsu, te, to. Properly, -*f~
ziyo.
t.
^(
^-
^r
,^?,ti and
tu are ety-
mological; but these combinations of sound are,

,
at once,
foreign to the
Japanese organs of speech and are whenever they have to be adopted from another language, expressed
by ^
tei
and
tou.
^-
(tsi),
commonly pronounced
tsi as in the English cheer.
d-
^T
"9^1
?*' Y
rfa,
dzi, dzu, de, do, according to the dialect of
Yddo nda, ndzi, ndzu, nde, ndo.
The Coreans express the impure Japanese
d by qi
ts.
(nt.)
tsj,
The Dutch
English ch in
chair.
%, J,
If,
etymologically tsiya, tsiyu, tsiyo,
according to the
audible.
Ydo
pronunciation tsya, tsyu, tsyo, the y being scarcely

it
Some
are heard to pronounce
tsa,
t$u,
tso.
dz.
The Dutch
dzj, English
g in George, j in
,/udge.
^,
*_,
^, etymologically
dziya, dziyu, dziyo, according to the Ye'do pronunciation dzya, dzyu, dzyo,
in the mouths of some also dza, dzu, dzo.

n.
-f, ,
"?
na, ni, nu. ne, no.
INTRODUCTION.
15
;V
final letter ,
serves as well for the dental , as the nasal final sound

faint n at the
which approaches the French
end of a syllable and
is
expres-
sed by ng (n of the Standard-alphabet).
Formerly, instead of the
final letter
3/
the JTana-sign 2^
,
mu was used,
and pronounced
nasal final sound
final
as a
,
mute m. In Japanese words 3/
stands for the faint
in
Chinese words, on
man, dan."
final
the contrary, for the clear dental
sound n as in our
In composition, the
sonants following
z, d, b,
it
sound n has a euphonic imfluence on the conk, s,

t
and changes
and
into the impure sounds

nb.
</,
which are pronounced more or
less like
ny,nz,nd,
(
The combined
is
sound nb, in pronunciation, changes to mb; Tanba
% ;v )Y)
pronounced
),
Tamba; Nanbok
-j-
/ 3J? ty
),
NamboTc; Kenbok ( %-
i$
ty
Kembok.
it is
For the sake of unity in
spelling, although in the dialect of

,
Yedo
pronounced as the French faint n
we
retain for the final sound
3/
the
written form n, since long current, and continue to write Nippon, leaving
it
to the reader to
pronounce
*]>
it
Nippong.
f(h), v.
)^
\^
^7
(X
,
S,
,/a, fi, fu, fe, fo or ha, hi, fu (not /*), he, ho.
Originally the aspirated labial

dialects
,
sound /, which has been retained in some

,
in others
on the contrary superseded by the

,
soft h
phenomenon
which occurs in the Spanish also
in which the
of the Old-Spanish language

h.
has, in later times, passed into the soft aspirated or scarcely audible
In the dialect of the old imperial city of Miyako

vinces, the
and
its
dependent pro-
is
retained, and so
far as
we know,
in Sanuki and Sendai,
where commonly fdna, fit6,

Yddo, on the contrary, the
hito, ftiru (fu
furii, feri, fokd, are heard.
In the
dialect of
has been quite driven out and there, hdna,

said.
remains fu), Mri, h6kd are
This distinction of the two sounds, according to fixed dialects, rests on
communications made to us orally by Japanese.

That, in the language of Miyako, where Japanese
as also in the dialect of Sanuki, the
is
spoken the purest,
occurs to the exclusion of A, I have
been assured by a native of Yddo

while another native of Yido
a
)
who
has passed some years in Sanuki
),
has mentioned to
me
the province of Sendai
1)
OHO-GAVA KITAROO, mechanician,
resident in the Netherlands since
1863.
2)
ENOMOTO KAMADZIROO, un
officer in
the Japanese Navy, also resident in the Netherlands since 1863.
16
INTRODUCTION.
and the North-eastern part of Japan

exclusion of A,
is
as districts, in
which the /,
to the
commonly
in use.
In the middle
or at the end of a
word the
,
or h in the pronunciation
?,
passes over to v or a pure labial (not labio-dental)
and even in writing

kiva, kucd,
is
*7 (wa) supersedes )^
or
also
(ra): ~J]
)^
^ A
,
ty
,
A are heard kava,

4~ >^
,
kawa, kiwa, ktiwd, for which ^/ *7

the contrary the syllables \^
n',
ty *7
,
written.
On
^7
vu,
is
^\,
ve, ifc
ro,
whenever
a vowel precedes reject the aspirate, and

as aw (aw),
y
"f
]^
pronounced as
?l
at,
*\ as
o e*c -
ae
->
T ^ as
,
ll as
"?
as ?M > *?
^7
as
*>
>jj"
as
The
aspirated labial }^
y?
in |^
is
}>
/^d man sounds

,
,
like a ftii or
fwi
hi,
whistled with the mouth, and
easy to be pronounced.
,
In the Yedo
,
on the contrary
it is
the h often occurs as a palatal aspirate
which whenever
pressed through the closed teeth, forms a sound quite strange to Euroit is
pean ears, which

travellers,
not possible to express with our
letters.
What
former
')
GOLOWNIN, MEYLAN and others have said about
this
sound
is
now
confirmed by our observation; and
we have only
(fit6
to add that in the
mouths of some from Yedo the word ]^ y*

even
sto. w/s v
or hit6,
man) became
Since for the syllables )^
\^
^JT
two forms of writing have now

is fol-
come into
existence, in proportion as one or the other pronunciation
lowed, one with /, the other with h, the question becomes important, which
of the two forms of spelling deserves the preference. If Japanese
is
to be
written
according to
the accent of Ye"do, then, naturally, the h must be

its
adopted, just as, to let the dialect of Zeeland enjoy

oofd
rights, Olland
and
must be written
for
Holland and hoofd, or, not to do injustice to the
Berlin dialect, Jabe, Jott and jut must be written for Gabe, Gott and gut.
If,
however the pronunciation most generally in vogue, with the exception
1) ,,No
is
,
European," says GOLOWNIN,

I have practised at
it
,,will
succeed in pronouncing the Japanese
word
for ,,fire,"
it,
it
it
Ji.
two years,
but in vain.
As the Japanese pronounced
seemed to
be fi , hi, psi, fsi, being pronounced through the teeth; however we might wring and twist our tongues
into
every bend, the Japanese

'Marine
still
stuck to
,
their-.
,,not right."" bei
Begebenheiten des Capitains von der
Riusisch-Kaiserlichen
GOLOWNIN
in
der
Gefangenschaft
J.
den Japanem in den Jahren 1811,

p. 30.
1812 und 1813.
Aus dem Russischen
iibersetzt
von Dr. c.
SCHULTZ. 1818. Vol. II,
INTRODUCTION.
17
of Y6do
adopted.
1.
that of
Miyako be preferred
last,
then must the h be put aside and
We
do the
and that
for the following reasons:
The Japanese
philologers themselves have,

,
at all times, characterized

,
the consonant of their series of sounds )^
\^
>"\,
jfc as labial,
and
made
2.
it
equivalent to the labials of the Sanscrit.

signs, fixed
The Chinese Kdna

all
upon
to represent this series of sounds
are
sounds which, after the Chinese pronunciation, begin with a
or
an /, whereas the sharp aspirated h of the Chinese words, just

the Sanscrit,
is
as the h of
expressed by k, and
~)j
-f
kai
is
written and spoken for
the Chinese hai.

3.
In Japanese,
as
in
Dutch and English,
the
sharp
between two
vowels passes over into the soft v or w, and beside the older written form
~J]
~)]
A ^
~}]
"\i
~Jj
*J?
for
which we must write kava, kave, kavo, that of
~}j
~Jj
17
kawa, kawe, kawo, has gradually come into vogue.
4.
From
the beginning Europeans,
who had
intercourse with the Japa-
nese, generally wrote
/
J.
and not h; thus the Portuguese missionaries, and

CARON (1639); also more
lately, E.
their contemporary, FR.

p.
KAEMPFER (1691),
THUNBERG (1775),
TiTsiNGH
(1780),
and
h
others.
All wrote Farima,
Fauna, Firando, Fori.
In
this century the
first
appeared, because then
Europeans came more frequently in contact with interpreters and natives of

Yddo.
If
now we
adopt the
7i,
then will
all
connection with what was forhistory and geography of
merly done for the knowledge of the language,
Japan be broken
off,
a door opened for endless confusion, and for thousands

shall
of Japanese words
we
have a double spelling.

v,
impure
reans,
from the sound arisen from the blending of n with
which the Co-
whenever they write Japanese words in )t, tf

,
their character, express

>
by
mp (nH).py.
7i***>
I
tf?> b
'
bi ^
bu
be > bo -
A%
If
7*1 "î *K> P (I

j;
pi P M
p*i
py.
The Dutch
English y
,
in yard;
//<'
i
French
^
r.
3.
HI
//"
//"
//"
The pronunciation of
is
not fixed
and
fluctuates
between wi,
yi,
ft',
and L
English r in part, art, r of the Standard-
Soft
guttural r, just as the
1)
In
TITSINGH'S Bijzander heden
whenever an h occurs
in
Japanese words,
it
has been placed there,
from a mistake of either the writer, or compositor.
18
INTRODUCTION.
alphabet.
^7
1)
)|^/,
\/
t?
m,
rz,
is
rw, re, ro.
The Japanese
r,
comes
trilling
from the root of the tongue, which

dental r cannot be uttered
kept almost motionless.
Our
by a thorough-bred Japanese of
I;
Ye"do.
This
is
also
the case with our
this
sound too
is
quite foreign
I,
to
the Japanese
mouth
).
Instead of adopting a proper letter for the
the
Japanese, whenever they have had to reduce words of European languages

to Japanese writing, have
made
the foreign
equivalent
to the
r,
and have
used their r for both sounds; a mistake, by which they subjected themselves
to a perpetual mutation of the letters r
and
when writing
a foreign lan-
guage, and induced our philologers to suppose that the Japanese r was
an intermediate sound between

the case.
and r which,
as it
now
appears,
is
not
In combinations of sounds such as \/ "^
ren,
})
^7
riu,
\)
^
is
"$?
riyau (ryoo), the guttural r so nearly approaches the lingual d, that, with
the utmost attention
,
it
remains doubtful
whether the r or the d
meant.
This
is
to be
remarked especially in words adopted from the Chinese, and

Z,
which in that language begin with
which becomes r in Japanese, such
as den for ren (Chinese lien), dyu for ryu (Chinese lung, dragon), dyoo-ri-nin
and doo-sok
wax-candle).
It is
for
ryoo-ri-nin and roo-sok (Chinese liao-li-nin,
cook,
la tsu,
worthy of remark, that with the Chinese just the opposite takes
pronounce the
I
place, that they can
easily,
but the r not at

,
all.
w.
The German pure
labial w.
^7
^7
wa
icu
wo.
9.
DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS BY ASSIMILATION.
If the letter
tsti,
which
k, s,
is
t
mostly pronounced as the

or p, then
it
ts
mute, occurs in a
compound word before a

and
is
passes over to the latter sound
lately expressed
by
^-
1) This has
hecome quite evident to me, from the instruction in the Dutch language which
several Ja-
panese have received under
my
superintendence. After having
first
pronounced the
as the guttural r, they

I.
cequired long practice before being able to utter a sound, that in any degree resembled
SPALDING
sibly
rail
also, has observed that
thorough-bred Japanese of Tedo, with
whom
he met, could not posglove, which they
pronounce his name.

is
,,They cannot say
L"
he adds, ,,they
call it
R.
The word
grove,
too
much
for
them."
J.
w. SPALDING, The Japanese expedition.
Redfield,
1855.
p.
233.
INTRODUCTION.
19
im
"1 itsit-ka
written,
is
pronounced ikkd (one).
20
INTRODUCTION.
10.
ON ACCENT AND RHYTHM.
In Japanese distinction
lables.
is
made between accented and unaccented
syl-
To
the
unaccented belong
chiefly those
ending in
or u, in which these
sounds are scarcely heard at
all,
and that
especially at the
end of the words.
Thus,
e.
g.,
,
2/2
sita
(beneath) sounds as sta,

(let)
^^
Z/%
sime
sounds as smd,
siki (like)
sounds as
,
ski,
I/
^?^
^?3/%
masi, masu, masita sounds as masi, mas, masta,
^?
5 A
tatsu (dragon)
sounds as
tats
yomu
naru
,
(to read) (to be)
sounds as yom,
IT >v,
sounds as ndr,
*? ])
i
tsukuri (to
make) sounds
as tskurt, etc.
it is
The
has, moreover,
i
the peculiarity, that as a final letter
whispered.
As
in Japanese the
and u mute have not ceased to be

to the
real elements of
the words, and to be
necessary
distinguishing
of them, they ought

,
to be expressed in all philological writings.
Even
\i
^r
(rnitsi
way) and
(mitsu,
three) sound as mits,
in
our writing we must, because
the Japanese
do
so
in
theirs,
distinguish both
as
words and write mitsi and mitsu, or chamitsi
racterize the
weak vowels,
weak and mute by writing

1
and
mitsii.
The
also.
is,
form of writing adopted by some, mits and
mits u
answers that purpose
The accented vowel

e.
is
pronounced either long or short-close. Thus

,
g.
the
long
in
~'
mdtsti
(pinetree)
short-close
fy
sake
(strong
drink).
The consonant, following a

ciation,
short-close
e.
vowel
is
often
doubled in pronun-
though not in writing. Thus,
g.
^^,
fdna (flower) sounds as fauna;
7 -$
dsa (the morning) as dssa;

,
^ >"
sake (strong drink) as sdkke.

,
Since
with regard to the correct indication of the quantity of the syllables

is
the Japanese graphic system
defective, it behoves us to keep it in view the
more
carefully, because the accentuation,

is
provided
it
be based on the pro-
nunciation of Japanese,
pronunciation.
an
indispeiisible help in the acquiring of a correct
INTRODUCTION
r.
21
Hitherto the only European
who
a
has paid attention to the accent of Japanese

principle,
,
words, and expressed
it
after
fixed
was
,
E.
KAEMPFEE.
,
From
,
his
,
manner of writing
it
might be gathered
that
3y
dragon
and
^y
l
pine-tree
are pronounced as tats ands mats, thus with

as
an a long,
,
'Y*?, S-l'
visited
and ^f-'^-f
ydmma, mindto and

it,
tatsbdnna. Later travellers
who have
Japan and writ-
ten books about
have been either unable or unwilling to follow his example, and

readers in uncertainty with regard to the
arrival of natives of
thereby have
panese.
left their
rhythm of Ja-
Only recently, since the
Japan in Europe, have
our linguists had the opportunity to hear Japanese spoken by Japanese, and so
to
become acquainted with the rhythm peculiar
to that language.
Availing our-
selves of this opportunity,
we have
already been able to publish the reading of a

p. 350.
1 Japanese text ) supplied with a continuous accentuation. See Addenda II
If
we
cast a hasty glance over
what has previously been
said,
with regard to
it
the Japanese phonetic
system, the writing, the pronunciation,

is
will
appear
most
clearly,
that the Japanese phonetic system

it,
very defective.
It does
not
satisfy the
itself,
requirement of being able, with
to write the Japanese language

its
as it is
spoken,
,
let
alone the possibility of

all
being applied to foreign
languages.
glish,
The Japanese
with
their attempts to write

effect
Dutch French or En,
after their ^Tana-system,
have been able to
nothing
else,
than -
caricatures of those languages.
From
their
defective
syllabic-writing are the Japanese behind not only the

also,
Western nations, but other Asiatic peoples

neighbours
writing
,
and even the Coreans,
their
who
rejoice in the
possession of an original,
and simple character-
not borrowed from the Chinese.
With regard
off.
to the writing of foreign
languages, the Chinese alone are worse
The
sions
intricate, often equivocal

difficulty
writing with which Japanese
is
written , occait,
more
for
those,
who have not grown up with
than the
study of the language

turn comes next.
itself,
witness the Japanese running-hand, whose
l) Thf
version.
Grand Study
(To,
Hio or fiaigaku). Part. I, The Chinese

c/utracter,
text with
J.
an interlinfary Japanfte
Leiden, 1864.
Part. IT,
Reading of the Japanese text in Roman
by
HOFFMANN.
22
INTRODUCTION.
11.
THE JAPANESE EUNNING-HAND FIRA-GANA.
a.
The Irovd in Fira-gdna.

in Fira-gdna- writing
,
The Irovd
with Chinese
signs,
as
it is
learned in schools and, in connection

consists
running-hand,
is
generally in use,
of the following
which are derived by abbreviation from the Chinese characters placed
next them.
A
ka
',
31$
TJr
?J, wi
^), no
sa
fa(ha),va
M
^L
Ijf
yo
|J|
ki
3
^
,fo(ho),vo
t
,
4^'
&
ku
V9^'
j^>,
Jf i,
re
so
^
-{j^
^
^^
me
fe (he),
ve
A
"^
y^, ya
,
/SL, mi
,
jt
^
V)
to
p]
tsu
^ ^
g-j*
ma
ke
fu
ne
,
y,
^ ^
J;fc
si
^*,
^/\,
e
fl
ri
J\
',
na
^>
^j,
(hi),
vi
L,
ko
&.
Synopsis of the /Ym-â'na-characters most in use.

the Fira-gdna- writing confined to the 47 or 48 signs cited,
it
Were
not,
would
to
with a slight exercise in writing with the pencil, be more
difficult
learn, than the Kdta-kdna.
But the
desire for fariety,
change and ornament, has

to read Fira-
rendered this writing so abundantly rich, that to
make learning
gdna
texts
possible,
synopsis
of
these
signs
has become an absolute ne-
cessity.
With
owes
its
the synopsis,
origin.
we
give at once the Chinese character to which each sign
INTRODUCTION.
23
SYNOPSIS OF THE JAPANESE
FIRA-GANA.
Bf
KI.
u.
<
it If
tf>
KO..B
c r T T
24
INTllODUCTION.
TA.
t
si.
TSI.
su.
t X
SO.
TO.
i-jfc
INTRODUCTION.
25
?
r
A
hi
as
NI
=t=
KR
;?
Jt 17?
N0
7) 7>
ft
^T
26
INTRODUCTION.
71
ft
MI.
*H
19>
Y0.3 >>
MA
V
_ i7
V-
=<
INTRODUCTION.
27
r r v
x/>
>
*^
>
la
t
KU
-
RE. w
wo
"V
28
INTRODUCTION.
The synopsis of Japanese running-hand
characters, given
on the preceding
is
in reading Japanese books and manuscripts, pages, collected by ourselves
de-
serving of remark on
account of
its
correctness.
As we
appreciated
its
being
submitted to the criticism of a clever Japanese,
we, some years ago, sent a

1 ),
few proof impressions, to a respected friend in Japan

Mr. MATS MOTO
on whose invitation
was
so
kind as to undertake the revision and correction of
one of them.
This impression being returned to us,

strict
we were
it
enabled to submit
it is
our synopsis to a
revision,
it
and
if
we have given
a place here,
with the conviction that
will
be a faithful guide in the deciphering of Fira-
gdna
texts.
To become
for
basis,
familiar with this .writing, the Chinese character should be taken

to write with a pencil the
it.
and attempts made at learning
more and
more sketchy Fira-gdna forms derived from
By
following this practical way,
the student will most quickly become so conversant with this writing, as to be
able to read without hesitation a text written in
it
,
provided the printing of
it
be not too bad.
In the Fira-gdna writing the
letters are
is
more or
less
obviously
attached to
one another. The way

some Japanese
liarities
in which this
it
done will be best learned by copying

,
texts
2),
in which
will at once be discovered
that some pecu-
in the
manner of attaching them
are only the natural results of a quick
handling of the pencil.
The
pure to
ya,
I
stops (*),
and the sign

sounds
is
by which in the Kdta-kdna the change from

e.
impure
gu, "^
indicated, are used in the Fira-gdna also,
g.
^T
it is
dzi,
^?
dzu, J^l
ba,
bu,
etc.
The point, which in the Kdta-Mna, placed under a
letter
shows that
repeated, in the Fira-gdna runs together with the letter into one stroke. Opposed 2k ^ * to laid and tada, are the Fira-gdna forms <T and ^
>
The
repetition of
two or three
syllables is
shown by
1)
w.
j.
c.
HTJYSSEN VAN KATTENfiYKE, Knight,
Commander
of
the
Naval-detachment
in
Japan in
1857, 1858 und 1859.

2)
the
The Japanese Treaties, concluded at
Tedo in 1855 with the Netherlands, Russia, Great-Britain,
United States and France.
Fac-simile of the Japanese text.
The Hague, MARTINUS NIJHOFF. 1862.
INTRODUCTION.
29
notice
As stenographic abbreviations come under

for
3
l|
koto (sake).
f)
/y
for
*
|||
yori.
12. WRITTEN OB,
BOOK LANGUAGE.
Books among the Japanese are written either in the Chinese, or in the Ja-
panese
language.
A. Exclusively
Chinese
are scientific works, intended for literate persons,
who make
use of the Chinese written language, just as formerly our learned
men
did of Latin.
To
this class of
books belong
among
others
the oldest Chro-
nicle of
Japan (Yamdto-bumi or Nippon-ki), in which the pure Japanese words,
such as the names of persons and places, are expressed phonetically with Chinese characters, the Japanese Encyclopedia
Wa-Kan
san-sai dzu-e, the Chronicle

etc.,
Wa-Kan
nen-kei, the Japanese
Government- Almanac,
while furnishing the
books, which are written for the general public and in Japanese, with at least a Preface in Chinese,
is
still
considered to be in good taste.
Among
tions
chiefly
the pure
Chinese texts must also be reckoned the Chinese translaoriginally
of
Buddhist
works,
written
in
Sanscrit,
which translations,
imported from China, are
hummed by
Japanese Bonzes in a peculiar Chi-
nese dialect.
That a Chinese text can be read aloud with a Chinese pronunciation
(koyd)
by
literate
Japanese
is
a matter of course, for, with the Chinese character, they

its
become acquainted with

dialects;
pronunciation
sentences,
also,
and
this according to certain
but
that
whole
when
read aloud, according to

listeners,
the
pro-
nunciation
of the
characters,
are intelligible to
we have
),
constantly
doubted and now, upon

Chinese text with
to its
is
its
the authority of a learned Japanese

signs
is
dare deny.
The
ideographic
there, to be apprehended according
contents and,
for the Japanese, the translation into his
mother tongue
included in this apprehension.
The apprehension and
translation of a Chinese
1)
Mr. TSUDA SIN-ITSI-ROO.
30
text
INTRODUCTION.
is
therefore very justly called its
reading (Yomi)
or
Wa-kun (^fl
j||l| ),
the
reading in Japanese. Respecting the Chinese dialects, which have been here mentioned,
following ought to be added.
the
In Japan the pronunciation of three

have been
adopted,
1
dialects of the
Chinese written language

)^|
which are
(in the
called
after
the
Chinese dynasties
Han,
^
i.
and
Jjtj
Tang
Japanese pronunciation Kan, Go and Too), Kan-
won (g!*
e.
^f),
Go-won
(^^D
its
and Too-in
(0*^)
till
or Kara-koto,
dialect of
Han,
and T'dng.
,
The dynasty of Han
which had
seat in the country of
Ho-nan-fu thus
,
on the borders of the Hoang-lio, nourished from 202 B. C.

dynasty of U, settled on the Yang-tse-kiang
tuated, existed from 222
till
,
220 A. C. The
is
where at present Nan-king
si-
280 A. C.
The dominion of the dynasty of Tang
embraced the period between 618 and 906.

If with
the Japanese
it
be accepted, that the said dialects were not local
dialects existing
next one another, but changes which the Chinese language has
undergone in the lapse of ages, then the introduction and continued existence
of those dialects in Japan would not be without importance in the knowledge of the old Chinese language.
writing,
it
But
since,
with the defective Japanese Kdna-
is
impossible to represent any Chinese dialect faithfully, those dia-
lects too, that
have wandered to Japan lose

the question of their
all historical
value,
and we therefore and the
confine ourselves to
introduction
into Japan,
use
to
which they have been applied.

the
first
On
point the Japanese works at our

first
command do not
shed
suffi-
cient light.
As the
teacher of the
Kan-won,
^^ ^
which
Piao Sin-kung, a
scholar from the country of
Han
is
mentioned, with the addition, that he came

this
to Fakdta in the country of Tsikuzen; but the time at
happened we
do not find recorded. Such also
is
the case with the introduction of the Go-won,

,
which
is
attributed
to
*
flj||
^
(
Kin
Li-sin
and another Bonze from the
country of U.
at
first
a
).
As both had
settled
on the island of Tsusima, the Go-won was

~?
jjfjj
also
called
Tsusima-won
2^
^ -&
^) or the
Tsimmanian pronun-
ciation
With regard
to
the
second point,
it
may
be assumed as certain, that the
1)
The Japanese Encyclopedia XV, 33
verso.
Fak-buis-zen under
Kan-won and Go-won.
INTRODUCTION.
31
Go-won was the
dialect, in
which the Bonzes read the Buddhist writings, imit
ported from China, and that
still,
with a few exceptions,
is
in vogue
among
them, whereas the Kan-won, the use of which was, in virtue of an edict published
by the Mikado
1
as
early
as
792, made obligatory in the study of the
Chinese language
),
prevailed in the
domain of
III.
science,
and penetrated into the
whole profane
literature.
See Addenda
In the Chinese- Japanese dictionaries the pronunciation of each word

given in both dialects and that,
instances
first
is
found,
in
Kan-won, and then in Go-won. In the

t$J *,
T or
-^ ^
and
I$J
* or ^
? and $ are
placed as
Kan-
won
and
I 1 v
i *
as Go-won.
The
dialect of
T'dng (Too-in), as
it
has been fixed by means of the Kanaofficial
writing approaches more nearly the ordinary Chinese
language (Kwan-hoa),
than the two other

This
dialect
is
dialects,
but
is
just as unintelligible as they, to a Chinese.
found mostly in works about China, used in the description of

it is
the names of places, and
also said to be used
by the monastic order of the
Five
hills
or convents"
3fl
|_L|
Go-san) at Miyako.
dialects
We
Wa-Tcun.
close this digression
on the three
is
with a quotation of the spe-
cimen by which the difference

Too-in.
shown in
te Japanese Encyclopedia.
Too-in.
Kan-won
&
Go-won.
Wa-kun.
Kan-won.
Go-won.
ani otitono gotoku, mala, ivdlcu , fibiki no Japanese translation: Tatove va Flats no koeva
ffotosi,
i.
zivakomago no
finals
e.
The two
dialects, to use
an example , are like brothers. It
is
also said:
The assonances or
are like sons and grandsons.
I)
Wa-nen
kei oder
GeschicMstabeUen von Japan, aus dent Originate
iibersetst
von
i.
HOFFMANN.
32
INTRODUCTION.
Chinese text with Japanese translation.

In Chinese there are books written, which contain a
complete Japanese
translation
at the side of the text.

is
There are also some, in which the Japanese translation
incomplete, and
of words are explained. In this case are only here and there words or fragments
found either only the principal ideas translated, or merely the terminational
inflections
given.
It
is
supposed
here,
that the Japanese reader
knows the
to
it
signification of the Chinese character and the word corresponding

his
in
mother tongue, or not being acquainted- with

all
it,
he resorts to a Chineseis
Japanese dictionary, to supply
that, in
which the translation

it
deficient.
Were
to
the construction
of the two languages alike,

of each Chinese
would
suffice
simply
represent
at
the signification
side
is
character by
a Japanese
as
word
Chi-
placed
nese.
the
of
it,
and to read Japanese in the same order
But there
one point, from which the two languages diverge; to wit,

its
the Chinese verb has
objective (complement, regime), whether a simple
noun
or a substantive phrase objective,
after
it,
the Japanese has
it
before.
To
give an instance,
the Chinese construction
requires
one to say:
He
reads a
book: he desires to go home;" on the contrary, the Japanese:
He
a book reads;
he homewards to go desires."
Thus in the reading aloud of the Japanese translation of a Chinese sentence

a transposition, a skipping over of the Japanese words
as the case in question occurs. This transposition is
is
necessary, as often
left-hand-side
shown on the
of the Chinese text

translation
is
-
the
right-hand one being occupied
by the Japanese
words
by numbers or equivalent
signs. This, transposition of the

i.e.
called
^jjftt'pjl?
IV
Geki-toku-suru
against
(the order) in
reading,
or also Kaytri,
turning back, and the transposition-signs Kaydri-tenor
marks
of going backwards.
These marks are
1)
the hook, ^, which indicates the transposition of two words following each
other
as
05 5
inotte
korewo - korewo motte (thereby)
2)
the Chinese ciphers

skips over
-,
=,-(1,2,3) when
the translation of a character
two or more characters;

J:,
3)
the signs
f,
(above, in the middle, beneath), whenever the parts of
a sentence, that have been already marked, must be again skipped over;
INTRODUCTION.
33
4) the cyclical signs
z,,
Pa
for a further skipping over.
The
ciphers
and signs
c-,
cited
may
&,
occur in connection with the simple transit;

ffi,
position-sign , thus:
&,
B]
ife,
&, &.
A
of the
practical indication of the use of these signs will be found in our edition
Grand Study
(Ta-Aid), a few lines of which are subjoined as a specimen
of Chinese text with a
complete
as well as a
fragmentary
translations in
Japanese,
CHINESE TEXT.
with a complete translation in Japanese.
2, with a fragmentary translation in Japanese.
jHhi
"^T
2 AE &
*5*
-/FT
in
'
r^\
,,Tfc
{J
fc,
^
7
ffii
*
Bif
Jfc,
T
ffi
ffij
B5
BB
-*.
in Japanese: Reading of the translation
Dai-Gaktino mitsiva mei tokuwo akirakani

rttni arl; si-sen ni todomarti ni ari.
siirtiniari;
tamiwo
ardtftni su-
Todomartikoto
notsi
wo
sitte, slkauslte notsi
sadamartikoto
ari.
Sadamatte, slkauslte
Yastiu-
yoku sidzuka
nari.
Sidzuka ni
site,
slkausr^ notsi y6kti yasusi.

3
34
sikauslte notsi yokti
INTRODUCTION.
site,
omdnbakaru.
is
OmOnbakatte
slkaustte notsi yokti
).
If,
as here, the Chinese text

is
in the standard form written in full, then
the
Kdta-Mna
used for the interlinear translation in Japanese, whereas the
Fira-gdna accompanies the Chinese running-hand.

B.
Books
written in the
Japanese
language.
In these, the national writing, whether Fira-gdna or Kdta-kdna, forms the
chain, in which a larger or smaller number of Chinese

In this
case the
side
style,
.characters are
inserted.
the Chinese characters represent ideas, for which the reader, in

at the
meaning of the Chinese character has not been already expressed

it
of
in
Japanese writing, must substitute Japanese words and connect

inflectional forms, also
them with the

character.
which the writer has placed
after the Chinese

,
Here
the
Kdta-kdna accompanies the Chinese standard- writing

In this
and the Fira-gdna the Chinese running hand.

literature
style the whole Japanese
proper
is
written.
Japanese text without an admixture of Chinese
ideographic signs, women's letters excepted, has never yet come under our notice.
To exemplify what has been

style.
said,
we
subjoin a few lines written in
this
In the one specimen the translation in Japanese will be found written

it is
next to each Chinese character, in the other

chiefly in official
left out;
the latter happens
documents.
o
-*-
#
5
t*
^ *
1)
Translation.
The way of the Grand Study

it
consists in illustrating illustrious virtue,
it
consists in reno-
vating the people,
consists in resting in the highest excellence.
The
point where to rest heing
known
the object of pursuit
is
then determined
that being determined
a calm unperturbedness
there
may
be attained.
To
that there will succeed a tranquil repose. That being attained,
may
J.
be careful deliberation, and that deliberation will be followed by the attainment (of the desired
end
LEGGE, Chinese
classics. Vol. I. 220.
INTRODUCTION.
35
Reading of the Japanese
text.
Nagasaki oyobi Hakodate no minato no foka, tsugini nosuru ba-slyo

ki-gen yori akubesi
1 ).
wo sano
The frequent use made of Chinese ideographic
signs in this style of writing
has for consequence, that even people of the lower order are more or less ac-
quainted with
education,
it
and
appreciating a sort of knowledge

use of
it.
which pleads for a good
make ample
We
possess written communications from Jastile,
panese
work-people
which,
written in the prevalent epistolary

letters.
contain
more Chinese characters than Japanese

It
first
stands to reason that, to understand texts written in this style, in the
place,
an acquaintance with the Japanese language
is
necessary, since the
logical
connection between the parts of the proposition and the ideas indicated
is
by the Chinese characters

C. Style.
expressed in Japanese letters, thus in Japanese.
Just as every living language the Japanese too has

turies,
during the lapse of cenis reflected
undergone change and had a gradual development, which
in
a litterature of
more than a thousand
years.
This
is
not the place to investigate
those changes or to indicate specimens of different periods.

direct
We
desire merely to
attention to the difference which exists between the old and
new
Japa-
nese language, written as well as printed.

a.
Old Japanese.
Ftiru-koto,
is
The old language,
an idiom
free
from foreign ingredients,
that has been developed freely and independently in the isolated Nippon. Originally
the language of the ancient Mikado-dynasty, that was settled in Yamdto

C.,
660 years B.
and therefore
also called Yamdto-kotobd or the
language of Ya-
mdto, this idiom had, with the political, intellectual and spiritual power of that dynasty obtained supremacy over the other dialects of the empire and was, for
ages long, the general written language, expressed at one time in Chinese, and
then again in Japanese writing; but

declined,
when
at last the
power of
this
dynasty
this old
and
lost its direct influence in the

its
government of the empire,
language shared
fate:
it
was superseded by a new idiom, and supplanted in
1)
That
is:
Besides
the Ports of Nagasaki and Hakodate, the places mentioned beneath shall be opened
Art. 2 of the Netherlands-Japanese Treaty of the
at the following periods.
18^ August, 1868.
36
the political
forgotten.
its
INTRODUCTION.
life,
but by no means driven from the mouths of the people, or

vehicle of
As the
an extensive
literature,
and
chiefly
its
by the power of
is still
this language has kept poetry and of the old religion,

it,
stand, and
held in respect, since the literature founded on

cient civilization ,
still
,
as the expression of
an an,
and as the witness of a past glorious in the eyes of the nation
finds its admirers ;

is
and the old
service of
Kamis which
,
still
lives
on among
the people,
rooted in this language.

,
Considered from a philological point of view
the Yamdto-kotoba
is
the mirror
which
poses
reflects
its
most
faithfully the
being of the Japanese language, the most ex-
organic structure, and sheds a clear light on the grammatical forms
also of the
new
idiom,
now become
prevalent.
is
The student of the Japanese language, who
not
satisfied
with the mecha-
nical learning of grammatical forms, but wishes to penetrate into the
knowledge
of their origin and being, must, in the etymological and grammatical treatment of that language, take the Yamdto-kotoba for basis, following, in this respect,
the example of the Japanese themselves
who,
to be able to lay
any claim
to
li-
terary proficiency, apply themselves to the study of their old language and read
the old authors
and poets, and sometimes even imitate

literature is rich in
,
their versification.
less rich
The Japanese
works in the Ftiru-koto, but not
in philological resources
chiefly in dictionaries , in
which the old or pure Japa-
nese language
are the
is
illustrated
by
citations of the sources.
The
principal
sources
works on mythology and history, the oldest of which are those which 7 have been designated with the name of the three records" ^n^
(^*
^Q^
^f
San-bu fon-siyo). lg> *"* 3

1.
Original
account of the old events of former times,
"f^^
W^
ip^^^JCf
MUMAKONO
ffit* Sen-dai ku-zi
fon-ki" executed by SIYAU-TOK. DAI-SI and Sogano
STJKUNE,
by order of Mikado SUI-KO, in 10 volumes, beginning with
the god-dynasties, and extending to 620 (the 20th year of the said Mikado).
2.
The
Book of
antiquity,
FUru-koto-bumi or
~^
^.^
jf^l* Ko-zi-ki,"
written by Oho-ason YASU-MARO and presented to the Mikado GEN-MEI in 711 or
712, 3 volumes.
5th
It begins
with the mythological times and reaches to 597 (the
year of the Mikado SUI-KO).

3.
The
Japanese
book,
Yamdto-bumi
or
2Jf
^^Ê*
Nippon
siyo-ki" completed by TONERI NO SIN-WOO and Oho-ason YASU-MARO, in 720, in
INTRODUCTION.
37
l
20
volumes,
beginning
with the creation and ending with the year 697
).
These works, executed before the introduction of the Japanese Kdta-Mnawriting, are, as appears from the copies, that
we have
partly
of them, generally writat the side of

this is
ten with Chinese writing, partly ideogrophic,
phonetic;
which
is
found the reading in Japanese expressed with Kdta-kdna, but

later time.
an addition of
As
a specimen
we
here subjoin the
first
Unas of the
o
0* 0*
mi
45*
ft*
ft
Reading: ÔT^ tsutsino fazimeno toki taka-mano farani ndrimdseru k ami no mi-navd Ante no minaJka-
nusino kami, isugini Taka-mi-musubi no kami, isugini Kami-musubi no kami,

vd mina
fitori garni ndrimdsite, mi-mi
Kono mi fiuirano kami
wo kdkmi-tamdviki.
mi-naka-nusi no kami , Taka-mi-musiibi no kami, and Kami-musubi no
solitary
Translation:
The
three gods
Ame no
kami, at the time of the creation of Heaven and Earth existed in the high expanse of heaven, were
gods and hid themselves.
As
sources for obtaining acquaintance with the FUru-kotQ
the topographical ,
physical and historical descriptions

lected
(^.^ db
nB^
Fuu-to-ki) of Japan, col-
as
early as 713
come further under
notice; the laws
and precepts edited
1)
Of
in
this
work
have made ample use in the elaboration of an historical treatise, which appeared in
,,Nippon-Archiv" under the
Quellen bearbeUet.
style, in
is
1839
TON SIEBOLD'S
title
of Japan's Besiige mil der Korntehen Halbinsel
tmd mil China. Nach Japanischen

It
might be expected, that the

;
which these annals are written, would be characterized by una-
dorned simplicity
but the opposite
the case.
The
oldest Japanese prose

is
is
completely subservient to courtly
manners;
it is
verbose and diffuse, and any one, unless he
penetrated, like the
authors themselves , with
the divine worship,
which they display towards the prince and

lies
his house, will discover but too soon that
behind the richness of courtlike expressions
hid
poverty of ideas.
38
in three different periods
INTRODUCTION.
(En*
^5 ^
titd)
,
Jy^^
San-dai kdku-siki} of 820, 869

-
and 907;
collections
Historical narratives
and romances
($fy^
Intfft
Mono-gatdri}',
of Lyric
poems
^*
as well as the
Bundle of Ten thousand
leaves;
Epic poems and Melo-dramatic pieces (Jll^

philological
Man,
or mai) etc.
As
aids towards illustration of the Ftiru-koto deserving of men-
tion are:
^p
^
n/
^b
Wa-mei-seo, or explanation of Japanese names, collected by

(
MINA-MOTONO siTAGAVU
j||| )
a famous poet,
who
died in 986. 20 volumes.
There are editions of 1617, 1667 and 1851.
w*/
u koto no
bdsi, or
Ladder to the old language." 1765.

,
3M** 'JP*
W^" PI \/
=5*
^fl^ 18^ 7Iv 3. >>t* ^ Ga-gen

*
2^
siyu-ran or Miydvi-koto-atsume
View
of the
correct language,"
#* fl~H
by ISI-GAVA GA-BAU. 1812.
^* -j|^
.
î
<_j *
^.
/
Ga-gen ka-zi kdku
Standard of the correct lan-
in JTa/za-writing, by ITSI-OKA TAKE-FIKO. 1814. guage" O O
H^
TANI-GAVA
6.
|l|
^f^
TFa-^Mwwo siwori, or Guide to the Japanese language ," by
SI SEI.
1830.
New
the
Japanese.
is
Opposed to the FUru-koto

since
the
New
Japanese,
as it has
been in vogue
16
th
century,
for the
newest type of which the style
may
pass, in
which the diplomatic documents of our time, particularly the Treaties concluded
with the Western Powers in 1855, are composed
1
).
The
for this
,
distinguishing characteristic of this style does not lie in the spelling

as the literature of this people
,
, ,
dating more than a thousand years ago
has undergone but few changes,
but in the analytic character,
by wich
it
forms an opposition to the antique-synthetic Japanese, and chiefly in the strong
mixture
of Chinese, or, properly, Japanized Chinese words, wich,
it
is
true,
are governed
by the Japanese element, but play so important a part in

not with injustice, called the Sinico- Japanese.
it,
that
this style has been,
Rising in the opinion of the Japanese, above the popular language proper,
in dignity,
conciseness
and strength of expression,
this style is
more particumore
,
larly a possession of the
more
civilized classes of society
and
at one time
at another less,
impregnated with the foreign element, forms the book-language;
1) See p. 28. note 2.
INTRODUCTION.
39
as
such,
has penetrated to the lower classes of the people, and exercises
its
influence even
on the polite conversational language and the epistolary
style.
It follows
,
as a matter of course , that in our treatment of the Japanese lan-
guage
this style occupies a
prominent place, and

it is
if at
the same time
we
look
back upon the old as well,

view, to illustrate the
but to be able, from a grammatical point of
new
as it requires.
13.
LANGUAGE SPOKEN.
GENERAL CONVERSATIONAL LANGUAGE AND

DIALECTS.
Almost each province of the Japanese Empire has
its
peculiar dialect, and
the difference of dialect becomes greater, in proportion as the provinces are more
distant from one another.
It is a fact
confirmed by the testimony of different Japanese
whom we
have
questioned on the subject, that a native of the southern part of Japan and one
from
the
northern cannot understand each other's
dialect.
The merchant or
functionary passing from Yddo to Nagasaki, understands the dialect spoken there
just as little as,
on the other hand, a native of Nagasaki understands the lan-
guage of the common people of Yddo.
The
lects,
case
is
e.
just the
g.,
same with
dialects of
Japan, as with the
many
dia-
which,
dialects
exist
next one another in Germany.
But
as amidst those
- -
many
one general polite written and

- -
spoken language,
the
High German,
has gained the ascendancy there, so in Japan also, (instead of
the old Yamdto-kotoba) a

mittance.
It is the
general polite spoken language has obtained ad-
spoken language, at present in general use in Miydko and,

it is
with slight modification at Yddo also, but here

ses alone
1
).
spoken by the polite clas-
Since the influence of Ytdo spreads to the most remote parts of

is
the empire, and the instruction in the schools
everywhere given in that lan-
) In confirmation of this assertion,
we here quote the very words
of
OHORAVA KITAROO
as
we noted them down,
when
uttered,
6sik" koimoa bakdri ,,Miydkono st6 bu-menwo yomi-mds toorini handsi-mcu; tdn-Hffa-yubti yor
gozdrimas. Eddono
kotoba wd,
ki-ninica, yorosiki kotoba nite Adnari-mdnt, i.e.
The
inhabitants of
Miyako
speak as one reads in a book, and therefore
have only good language. With regard
to the language of Tedo,
only the polite
man
speaks good language.
40
INTRODUCTION.
use of guage, every well-bred person in the provinces makes
it
in his intercourse
with the educated
and leaves the

to get
local dialect to the
lower classes of the people.
To
at
foreigners,
who wish
at
some knowledge of the spoken language whether

it is
Kandgava or
Nagasaki,
not a matter of indifference to
whom
they
apply for instruction.

the street, he will
is
If they choose for language-master a servant taken
from
sell
them
his patois for
good Japanese, declares what really

it
good Japanese
not good," and, although

to
afford
may
- -
not be his intention, gives
them the means
Japanese functionaries
amusement.
As
in every
language, so in the Japanese also, the dialects have their unquestionable right
to existence,
and knowledge of them
is
of importance, as well for the daily in-
tercourse with that portion of the population that do not rise above their dialect,
as for comparative philology; but to intercourse with the well educated part of
the nation, with

level,
whom
the foreigner will certainly wish to place himself on a
he gains admittance only by means of the general polite

for this
spoken lan-
guage, and
he must look about him.
To take an
instance, he will then
use the word watdk&si for
I," just as the gentleman
and merchant of Yddo,

watdsi" or
and not accept the porter's
wdtski or
wasi" or a servant-maid's
watdi" instead, or please himself with the ataksa from the district of Yosihara.
The ordinary conversational language

in respect of diction and pronunciation.
concise,
differs
from the book-language, both

is
If the book-language
diffuse;
succinct,
and
the conversational
is
more circumstantial and

it
the natural con-
sequence of the task laid on
of
coming up
to the rules of good-breeding,
which prescribe the form of
social intercourse in the different
ranks of society.
These rules require from every one respectful politeness to his superiors,
strict courtesy to his equals.
obtained
From a
people that, like the Japanese, has
among
the Western nations the reputation of being the most civilized

J
and most courteous on the earth
),
it is
to be expected that its conversational

is
language should express that character, and this

liarly
the case: the language fami-
spoken
is
a concatenation of courtly expressions and goes even so far, that
a person,
who
has not been brought up with

it
it,
will not, to use the mildest
expression, acquit
of exaggeration.
With
regard to
pronunciation,
of which
as,
we have
already spoken above
(p. 21), the same
phenomenon occurs
among
the Western languages, in the
1)
In 1862 in the Netherlands we became acquainted with some exceptions to this rule.
INTRODUCTION.
41
this deviation
French: the pronunciation deviates from the written form, and

arises partly
from the original inadequacy of the Japanese phonetic system

all
which
cannot possibly express
the existant combinations of sound, partly from the
development of the language, in which the pronunciation has undergone
many
a change, whilst the once adopted, old orthography, with but slight modifications, has maintained its historical claim.
Specimens of the Japanese conversational style

logues have only very lately reached us.
It is true,
in the form of dia-
about forty years ago, a
Japanese translation
of
Dutch
dialo-
gues found
its
way
*)
,
into a
Museum
in the Netherlands, and later a place in a
book about Japan

Japanese,
in
and every one who attached importance to the study of
the
supposition that that translation was also in the Japanese

to attach
conversational style, had then
no small value to
it;
but,
now
that
we have been
style,
it
able to
become better acquainted with the familiar conversational

is
appears that people were misled: the translation of these dialogues

in the conversational, but in the book style, and therefore loses
not written
its
supposed value.
The
first
specimen of the
genuine
at
conversational language that reached us

,
was a pocket- work published
Nagasaki for the use of Japanese merchants

,
which we, with a view to the wants of the non- Japanese

in 1861 with the
title
recast
and published
of Shopping-dialogues in Dutch, English and Japanese. The

the pure conversational style in use
Japanese
people.
it
contains,
is
among
the trades-
This specimen was in 1863 followed by Familiar dialogues in Japanese with

English and French translations for the use of students; a contribution with which
the names of E. ALCOCK and LEON PAGES are connected.
Now
the
want of aids
and as yet
it
to oral intercourse with

is
Japan
is
daily
becoming more
prominent,
not to be expected, that the Japanese,
who
re-
luctantly see the

their
attempt of the foreigner to become in any degree master of
language, will themselves cooperate therein and publish dialogues, from

profit,
it
which the foreigner may draw
may
be hoped, that for that very
reason the zeal of such Europeans, as apply themselves more particularly to the
study of language in Japan,
or do so in their intercourse
with Japanese out
1)
Bydrage
tot
de kermis van het Japansche Rijk, by VAN OVBHMF.BR FISSCHKR. 1833.
42
of Japan,
for the
INTRODUCTION.
-
Japanese language
is
not grown fast to the Japanese
soil,
will succeed in collecting
new
series of dialogues
and distinguishing in them the
more or
less polite style

*).
of speaking,
the correct and the incorrect
manner of
expression
Epistolary style.
,
The Japanese
language purified;
courtliness
epistolary style
it
^ ^ y Bun
..
?/
siyau)
is
the conversational
is
is
equally
subject to
stamped forms, and

it is
a model of
and deferential
politeness.
Knowledge of
rendered easy, because
every popular encyclopedia contains a series of

difference in
model
letters, in which, the
rank between the writer and the person to
whom
is
the letter
defined.
is
ad-
dressed being considered, the choice of words
and expressions
14.
ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH.

words of their language in three
classes
The Japanese have of

1.
old distributed the

e.
The Noun,
^tNa,i.
name
(nomen).
To
this category
belong besides
the
the noun substantive, the
pronouns,
last,
the adjectives, the
numerals, and
do the
exponents of relation, which
placed as postpositions,
office
of our so called prepositions, as well as, in part, of our conjunctions also.

2.
The Verb,
|^j
Kotoba,
i.
e.
the word (verbum) by eminence, and con-
sidered as the living element (Fataraki-kotoba

3.
working word)
of the sentence.
Particles, formal or constituent words, generally suffixes (suffixa), which

office
do the
iro,
of our terminational inflections (casus) such as the particles
te, ra,
va,
and therefore comprised under the name of Teniwova or Teniva.
Remark
for the
1.
By
the written form
Jfj
fc=
^^
or
jj^J
3|P|^,
used
is
name Teniva by which
the signification of
opening leaves"
at-
tributed to the word,
one must not be misled into the supposition, that
these particles
called
might be actual shoots of words, or what are sometimes

inflections,
organic terminational
is
and not
suffixes.
The form of
writing quoted
buses, in
nothing
else,
than one of the frequently occurring re-
which, to arrive at the truth, the meaning of the characters
employed must be overlooked.
Remark
When
2.
In one European Grammar

first
3 )
these particles are also called
1)
plubishintt
the
edition
of this
grammar we were not acquainted with
S.
R. BROWN'S
Colloquial Japanese, Shanghai 1863, which

2)
may
be recommended to students of the Japanese.
RODRIGUEZ, Mem.
67.
INTRODUCTION.
43
illustration.
Sutegana"
and
Wokiy ," names,
which require a farther

*
Sute-gana
foundling child
(^5
is
111*
^^t^)'
deserted,
or foundling-letters (a
to the
called sute-go) is the
name given
terminations
of Japanese words
expressed with Japanese -STana-writing between, or at

,
the side of .Chinese characters

ideographically by
which words themselves are only indicated

l
Chinese characters
).
The marks J no and
ku in
^L Kou-siNO notamavaKU
(= saying OF Confucius), or
vu in
J^
f, 0,
omoVU
Oki-zi
are
thus foundling-letters that must be taken up in the
translation.
(
jlf
:f
TT
^
^
is
"ffi
^)
the written form Wokiy appears to be an error
of impression
said of those characters of a Chinese sentence which,
in the translation into Japanese, must not be translated separately, but
passed over,
as
in
V
_|
111
San-tsiu-ni asobu (= walking
among
the
-*.
mountains).
The
Oki-zi thus are characters to which, in translating into

is
Japanese, the part of statists or mute players
assigned.
By more
corporal or
}ff
recent Japanese grammarians the
name
of
^<
_j.
_^
~f
p^|
Taino kotoba
bodily word
(substantive) has been given to the noun, and that of

,
P^)
Youno
kotoba, or Fataraki-kotoba
- effective word
to
the verb,
whereas for the particles the name of Teniwova has been retained.
If the
classes of
Japanese grammarians confine themselves to the distinction of three
words
we
to be able to fix the logical
and grammatical value of the
words properly, must apply our grammatical categories, our distinction of the
parts of speech to the Japanese language.
Consequently we distinguish
1.
Nouns,
(under which are included

6.
2.
Pronouns,)
3.
Adjectives, 4. Numerals, 5. Adverbs,
Verbs,
7.
Suffixes (postpositions) simple,
answering to our termi national in8. Interjections.
flections,
and such
as
answer to our prepositions and conjunctions,
1)
Compare pag. 34.
44
INTRODUCTION.
15. A
GLANCE AT THE ARRANGEMENT AND

JAPANESE.
7 NECTION CO1S
OF WORDS IN
The laws
also
for the
arrangement of words, which govern the Japanese syntax,

that
is:
govern the formation of the words themselves,

its
the manner, in
which that language, from

those existing words
monosyllabic roots, has formed words, and from

is
still
has formed, and
forming new ones,
is
subject to
the same laws,

relation to
as
the
manner
in
which the elements of sentences standing in
one another are governed.
concise view of those laws should, there-
fore, precede the theory of the
grammatical forms of words.

is
The Japanese construction of words

Predicative Apposition,
based on two principles
viz
that of
and that of Subordination or order of dependance.
A. Predicative Apposition.
The subject,
if it is
named, precedes, the predicate follows, the subject

(
being mostly separated from the predicate by an isolating particle

reas
)^
),
is
whe-
the predicate, in the absence
of personal inflections of the verb,
not
joined to the subject grammatically.

sign of the nominative, a
As
the subject too
is left
without a
congruency
of predicate and subject properly so called
does not exist.

B. Subordination.
Every modifying word precedes the word

Application
1.
:
to
which
it
belongs.
The attributive
definition, be it a genitive, or adjective, is thus placed

it
be-
fore the word to which
belongs.
rain-fall, raining;
;
Thus Ydma-mori, mountain-wood, Mori-ydma, wood-mountain; Ame ga furu,

tsuno ante, summer-rain; Tsuyokiame, heavy rain;
Nd-
Toku ,
well
Tokuwakdri, understanding well

,
Hdna,
hdda yorosiku , very
well. Consequently the

etc. etc.
connectives
answering to oar in
at , of, through
with, on
under, before, after, for, by
become suffixes
is
to the
word, which
is
their attributive definition.
This takes place also with the noun, which
to be considered as the attributive definition of the inflexion.
2.
The verb
Instead
is
of
placed before the connective (conjunctio), because

I
it is
governed by
j j
it.
go
because he goes ,"
an expression in used answering to
he to yo because
going am."
3.
The adverb precedes the

pendent proposition
proposition.
E.
g.
,
adjective or the verb,
and the subordinate or de,
in quality of adverbial definition
precedes the principal
,,The tun
brightly
ohining
is"
instead of our ,,The sun
is
shining brightly."
INTRODUCTION.
45
4.
The
predicate
is
placed before the copula, because the

is).
meaning included in
the predicate adds a definition to the copula (be,

E. g. ,,The flower in bloom
is"
for our ,,The flower is in
blossom," or ,,the flower blooms.".

its
5.
The
object direct, as well as the indirect,

is
is
placed before
verb; the sub-
stantive phrase objective
placed before the principal proposition governing.

he knows that I
he
\\
Instead of ,,he sends a letter home;

to ,,he
(I
shall
come," expressions are used answering

knowing
it
it."
home(wards)
is
a,
letter
sends;
I come
shall that,
6.
The verb
placed before the auxiliary verb, whether
be affirmative
or, in
consequence of the blending with a negative element (= not), negative.

Instead of ,,he will go
;
I will not go ;" expressions are used answering to ,Jie
go
vntt,
or he
\ \
(to)
go
7.
willing is ;
(to)
go willing not am
is
The verb, by means of which a derivative verb

this verb placed before
it.
is
formed, has the root of
The saying:
! let
him go,"
rendered by an expression equal to
/ him go
let.'"'
The
interrogatives
and certain exclamations
(interjections),
follow the
word
or proposition they characterize.

Instead of ,,Understand you?
Oh
heavens!" we meet with expressions answering to
You understand
eh?
Heavens,
ohT""
When
then the
several definitions independent of one another belong to one predicate ,

less
important precedes the
more important: the
definition of time is
placed before the definition of place; the object indirect (Dative, Local, Instru-
mental, Ablative) before the object direct (Accusative).

Coordination.
In coordination of words, the last alone receives the characteristic of grammatical relationship, while the preceding ones are
left
undefined.
the last only
Thus
if it
be a series of
nouns, which
are linked together,
receives the terminational inflection, that refers to
them
all.
Our saying: ,,The

OF three lightr
(
three lights OF sun,
moon and ;
stars" gets the Japanese form of
***, moon, tlart,
&
^}
**
^
j||
* EELf jfc
** **
sei-NO tan kwoo\

air,
In the saying: ,,Who has made heaven, earth, sun, moon, water,
linked together gets the terminational inflection of the accusative, thus
fire?" only the last of the

ttutti t fi t ttuti,
noun*
Daregaame,
mu/su,
kaze,fi
WO go-zdku
is
nasareta ?
Both examples, corrected, have been taken from RODRIGUEZ
lem. $ 88.
The case
just the
same with propositions linked together, the verb only

in
like
of the last proposition,
manner, receiving the terminational

left
inflection,
while the verbs of the preceding propositions,

dical form.
undefined,
retain their ra-
The Japanese and the Chinese order of words, with regard
to the
attributive
46
INTRODUCTION.
definitions,
agree,
as in both these languages they
precede the word
to
which
they belong; but they differ from each other, in respect of the object (complement),
which, as
it
has been shown on p. 32, in Japanese
is
placed before,
in Chi-
nese after the verb.

Might
etc.
it
be objected that in Chinese there are

placed after
prepositions
also such as
"fc^
-T*
[-ft
which have the word they govern
them, we must observe
that, in our opinion, those pre-
positions are
verbs, and therefore have the complement after them.
Inversion.
Inversion
Japanese.
or
transposed order of words

will show,
plays
an important part in
The Syntax
how
it
can step out of the monotonous march

its
of the regular order of words , and without violating

cipal elements
laws
set off the prin-
and the definitions of a sentence
rhetorically.
ETYMOLOGY, NATURE AND INFLECTION OF WORDS.
NOUNS.
1.
THE BOOT
is
the monosyllabic element of a word. Roots are,

i,
e.
g.
to go, to come,
kik, to hear,
ki,
ag, to ascend,
sag, to descend,
tat,
mi, to see,
tor, to take,
to stand.
2. is
The
verbal form, on which derivative or inflectional suffixes are grafted,
called the
RADICAL or PRIMITIVE WORD.

are the
The Radicals
Kdva,
river,
names
either of objects or qualities, or verbs, as:
Tdka, high,
JFikt,
Itdri,
gone,
Kiki, hear,
Ydma, mountain,
Kuni, land,
Mitsi,
3.
low,
Kitdri, come,
Age,
raise,
Firo, broad,
Miye, seem,
T6ri, hold,
Sdge, abate,
Tdte, fix, place.
way,
Ndga, long,
IN COMPOSITION.
THE RADICAL
word
in
its
If a
radical
form stands before a noun, then both words are either

the second, as a definition, subordinate. In the latter
coordinate, or the
case the rule
is,
first is to
that Japanese words are combined with Japanese, Chinese with
Chinese.
4
50
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. COORDINATION. SUBORDINATION.
3.
A. Coordination takes place in expressions as: Ame-tsutsi, heaven-earth;

Fi-tsuki,
sun (and) moon;

Ten-tsi,
- -
Kusa-ki, plant (and) tree.

J -^ JjJ
^^
^/
Mb^
^C
*
heaven (and) earth;
^ Zit-get, sun (and) moon;
S3
B.
I.
K6ku-ka, country (and) people; jp,
~fc
^ Sau-mok
plant (and) tree.
Subordination.
Subordination by
way
of genitive or adjective definition
takes
place in
compositions, as:
Kava-oso, river-otter;
Oso-gava, otter-river.
Kava-yeda, river-branch;
Yedn-gava = branch-river.
;
Ydma-mori, mountain- wold

Taka-ydma, high -mountain
Naga-sdki, long-cape;
;
Mori-ydma, wold-mountain.
Yoko-hdma, cross-strand.
Firo-no, large
field.
^
Mb
7,
JIJJJJ
^
\/
Ten-zin
heavenly gods
*
JJlfp
Tsi-zin , earthly gods ;

,
H ^ ^ ^ K6ku-zin
5
country-men
inhabitants ;
^j^^J^^
II.
K6ku-zi, country- writing
the Kdta-kdna.
The
object direct
or indirect, if taken in a general sense,

').
is
placed in
its radical
form before the verb

radical
1.
The
form occurs as object
direct (Accusative) in
compounds
as
Ana-
fori, the hole-digger; Kava-watdri, one
who
crosses a river; Srtnd-tori, sand-fetcher ,
sand-skipper; Midsu-kosi, water-filter; Ama-terd*u, heaven-lighting.

2.
The
radical
form occurs as object indirect in Ama-kuddri, (from) heaven
descending; Te-tori, asi-tori, to seize (any one by the) hands, seize (by the) feet;
Me-gake, (in the) eye hold; Me-sasi, (with the) eye show, give a wink; Ana-dori,
(in) holes catch.
m.
The
radical
form as a definition before adjectives,
e.
g.
Te-boya
- hand= leg-
quick, handy, dextrous; Asi-foya,
= foot-quick,
swift of foot, fleet; Asi-taka
high, high-legged; 0-naga,
tail-long, long-tailed.
Remark. In composition rules of euphony are observed and bring about modifications of sound, as well
with regard to vowels, as to consonants, whenever
1;
Comp.
H.
STEIXTHAL, Charakteristik der hauptsacUichsten Typen des SpracKbaues
p.
184, 185.
CHAPTEK
I.
NOUNS. GENDER.
4.
51
their
meeting
is
embarrassing to the pronunciation.
From Asa
-\-ake,
dawn,
is
formed asdke; from
Ydma
-\-dto,
hill-behind, behind the hills,
Yamdto; from
T6yo
u ra
rich-creek,
etc.
the
name
of a place,
Toy6ra; from Abura-miisi,
cock-roach, Aburozi,
As we must draw up
the rules of euphony from the grammatical
phenomena
we
shall, to
be able to refer to them, insert the rules at the end of the Ety-
mology.
GENDER.
4.
Grammatical gender does not
exist.
If the gender
must be
definitely exis
pressed
of objects in which a distinction of sex exists, then this distinction

as in English, in
made, A. either by means of particular words or B.

le-servants and. female-servants,
which maof,
a he-animal" and
a she-animal"
are spoken
by placing ;7 O, man, and
Me, woman,
as attributive before the
word.
A. To the particular names belong: Mi-kddo, - the sublime port, the sove* Kimi-sdki, princely reign, king or emperor. Kl-saM'. originally 3^| ^p
fortune
of
i.
,
the queen or empress
thence in the Mythology which
under the name
Kami, Kan, =
e.
prince, chief, includes the gods, the expression Kisdki-gdmi^

is
higher being (kdrni) that
consort (kisdki), to indicate a goddess,
who
is
the consort of a god.

Tsitsi,
kazo, father.
Fava (haha),
irova, mother.
Mama-tsitsi, stepfather.
0-dsi, uncle.
Mama-fava, stepmother.
0-ba, aunt.
Ani, eldest brother.

Tsitsi-tori,
Ane,
eldest sister.
- father-bird, cock.
the prefixes ;?
Fava-tori,
= mother-bird, brood-hen.
is
B.
1.
By
and ?t
Me
the sex
determined in
0-vi, o-i, nephew.
Afe-vi, me-i, niece.
0-ke-mono
0-ust, ox.
),
male-mammal.
Me-ke-mono, female-mammaL
Me-ust, cow.
0-mumd,
stallion.
Me-m%md, mare.
Me-inu, bitch.
0-inu, dog.
1)
Ke, hair, hairy, mono, being.
52
0-in6-ko, boar.
0-fits%zi, he-goat.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. GENDER.
4.
Me-in6-ko, sow.
Me-Jite&gi. she-goat.
0-sikd, stag.
Me-slkd, hind.
0-ndko, he-cat.
0-kuzira, male-whale.
2.
Me-ndko, she-cat.
Me-kuzlra, female-whale.
Instead of the radical form

also occur.
and
Me
the genitive attributive
Ono and
Mono
Ono-ko, male-child, boy.
Meno-ko, female-child,
girl.
Ono-kami, a god.
Meno-kami, goddess.
Remark.
sounds k,
s,
When
Ono and Meno are contracted
to
On
J
and Men, then the pure

g (n), z (nz), d (nd)
1).
t if following, generally pass to the troubled
From
o<7on
71
ono -\-tori, male-bird, becomes successively

-|- fort,
&
9 ondori
and
(pronounce ondori); from wewo
female bird,
rw
,
9 mendori,
and
!)
medori (pron. mendori); from meno
-j-
female-monkey,
^ ^^/u men^
zdru and
^^n/
mezdru (pron. menzdru); meno
+ <ora,
-J-
female-tiger,
S*>
mendora and ^ K3* medora (pron. mendora); from mewo
kataki, female-enemy,
tf 5*
3.
me-gatdki (pron. mengatdki).
There come under notice also

antecedent attributive definition.
Ko (-^
3
)
and
Me
(jfc*), lad and
lass,
with
Ot6-ko*), lad, man.
Oto-md, virgin, maid.

son.
Musu-k6 = begotten son, (my)

Ftk6, young nobleman.
Musu-m6= begotten maid, (my)

Ftm6, young
lady.
daughter.
Kana-ydma fik6 no kami, the god of

the ore-mountain.
Kana-ydma flmdno kami,

the ore-mountain.
the goddess of
Mi-koto, Sublimity, Highness.
Fim4-gami, goddess.
Ono mi-koto, His Highness.
Flmd no
ki and
mi-koto,
Her Highness.
The
old- Japanese also has
mi
instead of ko and me, probably with
a view to the vocal-harmony; thence Izana-ki and Izana-mi, - male-goer to
and
fro,
female-goer to and fro,
name
of the divine pair that
first
mingled
carnally.
1)
Comp. Introduction,
p.
15, line 8.
2) Ota, old-Japanese for ono, genitive attributive of o
(/ft
), small, young.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. NUMBER.
5.
53
C.
The
ideas of
male and female are sometimes transferred to objects without
sex, for the purpose of characterizing the one as big, strong, rough, the other
as little,
weak and
;
mild, or to indicate other peculiarities of one or the other of

,
the sexes
e.
g.
0-matsu the masculine

firtree,
firtree
or Kurd-matsu , the black firtree

8
).
Me-mdtsu, the feminine
also
Aka-matsu, the red pinetree
Two
islands being next each other,
when they
are of unequal size, are of-
ten denominated 0-sima, man-island, and Me-sima, woman-island.
Me-ikusa, a female-army, means a weak army (= Yowdki

female-rainbow,
is
is
iktisa); me-nizi,
the
name
of the faint by -rainbow. Me-kavdra or feminine-tile

,
the
name given
to flat tile (Jira-kavdra)

tile
on which the rollshaped (mdru-ka-
vdra), as the masculine
(0-kavdra),
,
rests.
D. The Chinese expressions
used in connection with Chinese names for female
and male, are for quadrupeds and yuu,

e.
4b
f ^fc^
fi
n an d bo; for birds $fc^ tffcp
g.
4b
$&*
fin-ba, mare; fljfc^
]$*
yuu-tsi, cock-pheasant.
NUMBER.
5.
The grammatical
in
its
distinction of singular
and plural
is
wanting. The
it
noun used
radical
form expresses the idea generally and leaves

is
undeter-
mined, whether the said object
to be adopted in the singular or plural.
Only when
finite sense as
it
is
strictly necessary to
make
the general idea appear in a de,
something either singular or plural
such
is
expressed in one
way
or another.
A. In Japanese words the singular

Flt6 yo, one night.
tose,
is
expressed by the numeral
t K
/Ifrf,
one;
Ftt6 kddo^ one corner.

> >
one year. one time, once.
katamdri, one clog.
tdbi,
/ana, one flower.
in Chinese words
by
JU*,
ikka or ikkdno, as
'*
,-r
fSi* J9f^
jgJ
^ ka
**y
one p^ ace;
tsi,
J-fk* ikkdno
one piece of ground.
More amply, when
treating of the numerals.
1)
Pinu* motioni*** LAMB.
*w^"
Sin.
et
Zuc.
54
B.
I.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. NUMBER.
5.
The plural
is
expressed:
for so far as
By
repetition of the noun,
a distributive generality
1)
indicated
by the
repetition includes the idea of a plural.
Ydma,
hill;
Ydma-ydma,
every
hill.
The number of such

ciation the accent lies
repetitions
first
is
determined by custom.
,
In the pronun-
on the
part of the
compound while the second occurs

it
as a soft prolongation of the sound,
and the consonant, with which
begins,
undergoes a softening and becomes impure. Examples:
^ kuni
country
province
^ V ^ V
\
r kuni-guni, each country
every
province.
kohori, ko6ri, district;
*
^
^*
koh6ri-goli6ri , every district.
*^ mura, village;
murd-murd, each
,
village.
^
'^f
sato
village
r sato-zato
each village.
mdtsi, ward, street;

2
matsi-matsi, every ward.

y'h.4-'ih6,
hd, 3d, house, family;
V
\
every
house,
each
family.
"
fe
,
he
door
family
fe ~fe
door for door,
every
family.
y ^
i
,
i
;
yasiro
,
chapel
hill
,
^V
;
yasiro-yasiro
every chapel.
5 ydma
mountain
JJJ
ydma-ydma, every hill or mountain.
3 tokoro
place
H^Q X
T tok6ro-dok6ro, every place, eve-
rywhere.
? sumi, corner;
rp|!
sumi-zumi, every corner.
ma,
#:
i',
space, (place and time).
^^ V
V 'nij'x V ig-5 V >\ h V
59 5
ma-ma, every space, every

ai-a?,
time.
space between;
,
meanwhile.
every bridge.
^ fdsi
/
hdsi
bridge
fdsi-bdsi,
or70,
one;
<W-J??tf, each.
/?M
one
man
r ftto-lVtd, every one.
1)
,,Die
Wiederhohmg der Substanzworter

die
oezeichnet nicht den Plural, aueh nicht schlechthin Mehrheit,
sondern distributive Allheit,
wir
am
besten
dorch ,,jeder" wiedergeben."
STEINTHAL, Typen det
Sprachbaues , pag. 158.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. NUMBER.
5.
55
oya, old;
TpLY
\
\
oya-oya, both parents.

y'tkfi.-yaku
,
ydk&,
office;
&7
life;
every
office.
yo, age, time of

tow'i
ift
year;
/, day;
fo&, time, hour;
iro,
1) color,
2) sort;
<>
ft^-***!
2)
.s?yw,
1) degree, rank,
V ^ u V B^p^ V n V jjp|^ V
3
>
"
yo-yo, every age.

tosi-tosi,
i,
each year.
N*
y*-î every-day.
f toki-doki, always, each hour.

{
iro-iro, every color or sort.
^ tina-zina, every quality, every

article.
quality.
^jfflr
,
sort;
T styu-zlyu, every sort.

i*
sama
tafo',
the look
the mien ;
^| 5
journey, turn;
knsuri, medicine;
sound;
V J^ Y ^x ^ ^x V
fama-zama no of every form.

tabi-tabi,
each turn.
f kusuri-gtsuri, every medicine. f koyt-goy4, each sound.
II.
The
plural
is
expressed by nouns used adjectively, which signify a quan-
tity, generality.
1.
In composition with Japanese words (yomi) are used:

flt6,
little
^.^/, oh6kuno, odkiino, many. 06kuno much money, in opposition to sukost no kane,
many
people.
OokH no kane,
money.
Tai-sei no /Wrf,
-^c% ^jlb^s, tai-seino, in great power, in multitude.

people in multitude.
,
tai-sg,uno, tai-soono,
exceedingly.
ill
oV/J? lilt/ t&ku-sanno, abundant.

i
t^Lo
fdna,
all
iro-irono, of every color or sort, of all sorts. Iro-irono

of every rank. ytkn wi, functionaries
sorts of flowers. Iro-irono
pp^ V ^'
1jm%
sina-zinano, of every quality.
^' sama-zamano,
{', kazii-kazuno,
'
of all sorts.
Samn~;mano
all sorts.
teak,
all
the difie-
rent judgements.
Sama-zamano mono,
things of
A E*.
V ^ M IT V
numerous.
su-zu
Pi
siyu-ziyu no
no.ofeverysort.
Slyti-zlyu no
fUo, people
of every sort.
56
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. NUMBER.
5.
',
is-saino, all.
~tj7J
is-saino
stu-zlyau,
all
liying beings.
Moro-moro no
all.
all
[from
3^n'
woro, both]. Moro-morono

all
/W,
all
people;
moro-moro no mono,
things; moro-moro no tsutsi-rui,

,
sorts of earth.
moro-moro no
2.
tori
wo kdsumu
the falcon plunders
all
birds.
In composition with Chinese words (koy) are used:
jgjj^, su,
number, many.
many
generations.
years.
su-dai,
su-man many tens of thou,
su-nen,
|T,
many many
many
sands.
su-sen,
su-get,
su-zit,
months.
days.
many
thousands.
^^
,,
su-bydku nin
many
-,
su-zin,
many
people.
hundreds of men.
siyo, every, all.

,
siyq-kdku, the countries.
slyo-ydku, the functions.
siyo-fau^ the regions.

siyo-buts, the things.
L the arguments.
^^,
I
styo-kei,
the arts.
gfyo-mn, mankind, the

people.
^1^'
siyo-si,y6ku
every trade.
^^,
the warriors.
slyo-siu, the sects.
siyo-si,
III.
The
plural of a
noun
is
also expressed
by one or another
suffix,
which
signifies
a quantity or generality, and either must be considered as coordinate,
as
e.
g.
Co in
/ and Company
e. g.
for we, or with the preceding

suffixes are, ra,
word forming
a col-
lective
word, as
man-kind for men. These
domo, gara, bara,
nami,
1.
e.
tatsi, siu, gata, nado.
Ea
T|^)
signifies a
class of persons or things without any distinctive,

Ydts&kdrerd
(
g.
Ydtsukdre, subject or vassal;
ffi
^),
all
subject
and
class, all
that belongs to the category of subjects, the subjects (or vasals).
Otdko,
man; Otdkord man, men.

(
(^ T0,
man and
class,
that belongs to the ca*
tegory of
Ftyak-tfyo* rd
people,
W%
s j$-
or Nou-min rd g 7 ^jf ^),
;|
'
-7
^f ^
'^
^),
country-
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. NUMBER.
5.
57
Ware, the
I;
Warerd
(^^),
is
and
class,
we. Nandsi, thou; Nandsird
Kort, something that
here, this; Kordrd
(f^^f),
J ).
this
and
class, such.
Korerdno nozomi, such a
desire, a desire of that nature
Koto, matter; Korerd
no koto, such a matter. Sono mono, such a /me; Sono monord a one and
(~& ^&
^fr), such
C.
such persons
2
).
Migi (pronounce mingi), on the

des.
right, in a writing referring to
what prece,
Migird,
all
that precedes,
the aforesaid, yfr
^r
^F '*
8
).
? ' B& P"
= ^ A j XV
im-IS* .^^
gird no sfyo niu-fi, the expenses of
all
the aforesaid
all
Atsi kotsi, there and here; Atsira kotsira,
that
is
included in there and here.

this is the father of the
Kova Wanino
kimi,
Kamono
kimird ga oya nari,
princes (princely houses) of
Wani and Kamo.

word, and then
first,
is
Remark. If we are at
liberty to consider ra as a coordinate
again as a suffix that forms collective words, logic will require the
that such an expression and
case with the expression
2.
seeing
/ and Company
really answers to we, which
not the
my
company, by which
I"
may
be excluded.
Tomo, domo, mate,
fellow,
companion, particularly in the spoken lan-
guage, for persons and things.
Watdkusi no tomo
my
mate or friend
Watdkusi domo
child;
^ ^t
and mate
is
we; Watdkusi domo no hon, our book. Ko,
Ko-domo, a mate who

his) child
a child,
(my (my
or his) child;
Ko-domo ra
or
Ko-domo domo, (my or
and mate,
or his) children. Ke-rai, attendant; Ke-raidomo, attendants, the suite of a
prince.
Sono mono domo
lit ^ "^
y
/
such persons ^jr^ ^^ / \*^),

ourselves;
4
).
Ware,
I;
Ware domo,
we. Mi, I myself;

selves,
Mi domo, we
Mtdomoffa
,
kimi, the prince of us our-
our
own
prince.
Oh6kuno taka domo
falcons in multitude.
Yebisudomo wo
tairakdsimu, he has the savages subjected. Taka no na tomo wo rirfot, to give up"
the different
horse;
3.
names of the
horses.
falcon.
Neko, the
cat;
Nekodomo, the
cats.
.1/tfnuf,
Mumddomo,
Gara,
series,
row; division of objects distributed in
classes.
FM6, man; Fttd-gara

after the
(^
fa
(
Affi)'
series of mett -
Ftto-gara no
yaum,
manner of men. Fi-gara
^.)i
series of days.
Koto, matter; Koto-
1) The treaty between the Netherland* 2) Ibid. Art. VI,

al.
and Japan, concluded at Ttdo, IS* Anyutt. 1868, Art

3) Ibid.
II. al. If.
9.
VIII,
2.
4) Ibid. VI,
10.
58
gara, series of matters.
GHAJPTER
I.
NOUNS. NUMBER.
5.
Tomo
JfQ), fellow, mate; Tomo-gara
W
gara
W)'
(
row
)
,
companions, a
,
series or class (of
men
or brutes). Waga-tomo(
^^
the class of the I
we. Nandsi ga tomo-gara
|||
Tjjj )
the class
of you, you.
4.
Ndzumi no tomo-gara (jj^
^)
*),
the mouse-kind.
Bara, group.
(
Taka-bara
^^
)
,
bamboo-wood. Mdtsu-bara
(
yjyjt )
firtree- wood
(
a
)
,
group of
firtrees.
Nandsi-bara
fy
^jjj )
your group
you. Tono-bara
*&
*jj
they there without.

5.
Nami
series.
Fi-nami, series of days. Tsuki-nami, series of months. Se-ken-nami, the com-
mon
6.
people. Flt6-nami
the people.
Wa-nami
^-
^j$^ )
my
series
we.
Tatsi
3
(
^^;*)
),
row of persons who
are, or
may
be, in an upright posture
for,
or at a given time, host.
Ydku-nin
functionaries.
functionary
Ydku-nin-tatsi
(j[j|j}
*$?
J^ ^^ )
series
row of
functionaries
Kami, god; Kami-tatsi
s^ ),
of gods,
gods.
Kono mi-
fasira-no
Kamiva mina Wataravi-agatam masu
.Kami-tatsi nari, these three gods
are a series of gods residing in the district of Wataravi.
Kono futd
fasira no
kamiva minasokd-ni narimasdru Kami-tatsi nari, both the gods are gods sprung
from the bed of the
friends.
7.
river.
Tomo,
fellow,
friend;
Watdkusi no tomo-tatsi,
my
Siu, Siyn
C^^^)?
women.
su, also
su, in the written
language A^^PJ-lf\
siu-dsyu, company, circle of persons.

Ondgo-siu, circle of
Samurai
sin,
band of warriors, warriors,
Remark. Bot expressions, samurdi-siu and ondgo-siu, already given by COLLADO as forms of the plural, are acknowledged by natives of Yddo, in answer
to our personal inquiry
,
to be good Japanese
in colloquial style.
Thus
it
when
remarbut
in Alcock's Japanese
Grammar
(page 19, line 6 from the bottom)
is
ked: RODRIGUEZ speaks of a fourth (particle expressing the plural),

this appears to
soo,
is
be always a
prefix.
,
It has reference to
number, but
not in-
dicative
as
alleged ,
it
of rank
that
while the other three (5*^

there
K^
JS )
undoub-
tedly
are,"
appears
the difference between
^^
su,
number,
1) Jap.
Encycl. 39, 6, V.
2) Instead of
=Sy
occurs i|||
but only as the phonetic representative of
tatsi.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. NUMBER.
5.
59
not taken
multitude (see page 56), and the

notice
of.
^^
rfu,
m,
used elliptieally
is
}H ^
?V
^^
x the persons who put |fc
their seal (to this docu-
ment and signed

8.
it).
Grata,
pronounced ngata, = no gata,
side of.
Mi-kata, the side or party of the Mikado. Tekino kata, the hostile party. To
indicate the plural gata
is
used for high persons, and characterizes deep respect
towards them.
Dai-miyqu, - great name, nobleman; Dai-miyau-gata

blemen,
the
nobility.
-
(^
^ ^r
),
,
the no-
Tono sama, young nobleman; Tono-sdma-gata

Sir;
young
noblemen.
Te-mae-sdma, you,
,
Te-mae-sdma-gata
you, Sirs or gentlemen.
Ka-nai-sdma-gata
the gentlemen house-mates, your family.
0-ko gata, your
Highness's children, your children.

of quality,
9.
Dzyo
tsiu
gata
("fa*
*
tjj
^*0, women
(
young gentlewomen.
,
Nado from
nani-to , nando
whatever
and so forth
and such
^5
vulgo
-ffi
house and so forth, house and such *\^)' lyt-nadoi
like, houses.
Samirdi-
nado, warriors.
As the grammatical
plural, have
and plural
is
wanting, so the
compound words, which express a
no separate declension.
Remark. With a view to courtesy, which particularly dominates the spoken

language,
it is
not a matter of indifference which of the words given,
is
used
to indicate the plural.
Ra, domo and nado
refer directly to a class of persons or
things and therefore are used
when one
speaks of his
own
is
or of
subordinate
Oara
people, or in general of objects, to which no importance
attached. --
and bara belong to the written language.

side, the highest respect,
- -
Tatsi implies respect, and gata,
which
is
analogous to our
on the part
of the King"
for
from the King."

It is natural,
that
more or
less elevated expressions,
which from politeness
are used to others, are not applied to
oneself and one's own.

adverbs,
as
IV. The plural
is
also
expressed by
Mina (f|f*),
(
together,
generally,
Nokorazu
^^^g),
yordsil,
without exception, and Koto-gdtoku

to
;jjJ ).
which then precede the predicative verb

sinawa mina
are
offer
all
which they belong, for instance, Moto

together good,
the
article
itself is
the articles themselves

,
good.
San-kan nokordzu mitsvki-mono wo tntd-ntatsuru the three empires

-
without exception tribute.

all
Tane koto~g6tokH me wo iddtS nan, the seed
shoots generally,
the seed shoots.
60
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. ISOLATING
OF THE NOUN.
6.
ISOLATING OP THE NOUN.

6.
The
suffix
)% va, *7 wa, )Y
*>a.
Every one, who
for the first time hears a Japanese harangue,

little
is
struck by the
continual repetition of the
word wa, which pronounced in a sharp and

off the
high tone and followed by a pause, breaks
equable flow of words, in
which the speaker then proceeds in
his ordinary tone of speaking.

little
On
a hearer, not
acquainted with the language, this
word with
its
resting point
makes the
impression, that the speaker would emphasize what he has just said, and separate
it
from what
,
follows.
is
And
that impression
is
correct.
Wa,
*7
in the book-
language )\
isolate
va,
an emphatic
suffix or rather
an interjection, intended to
follows.
some word or saying, and
to separate
it
from what immediately
We
do the same,
when we
raise the voice at
some word and,
after a pause,
continue, speaking in our ordinary tone.
Va
or
wa
therefore
is
used, in the
first
place, to separate the subject
from
the predicate, as in
(jewels
Tdmavb ydmaydri
it
idsu,
= the jewels
||
mountain out come
come out of mountains); and

it is
may not
cause surprise when, on that
account,
understood as characteristic of the subject and consequently as

strictly considered,
it is
the sign of the nominative, which,
not.
It is indeed
joined to the subject, but not exclusively, and serves to isolate every other relation, every
dependent
as to,
.
case.
The
isolating
power of va
finds its equivalent in

,
expressions like
with regard
,
to, .quant a Fr.
quoad, quod
attinet
ad
Lat.
wat
aangaat
Dutch.
it
Whenever va
isolates the subject,
answers to the Chinese
tse,
which
has the signification of a
definite
something" and passes for a relative pronoun.
As
a euphonic modification of va,
)Y ba
also occurs.
The
subject
and the predicate are not always separated by va, but how neappears from the instance quoted, which,
cessary this separation sometimes is,
with the omission of va,
may
also signify:
jewel-mountain from come,"
i.
e.
be produced from a jewel-mountain.
Examples:
nari, the lion
>j|jj}j^
v"
^'^W
all
H/t^^
^pt:
^" 9
Sisiva fdku-ziuno tslyau

is
is
the head of
isn'^t
brutes, or: as to the lion, he
the head etc.

nari',
^f% ^
ox,
^ ^ E0
is
lif
^" 9
Usiva tawo tagavesu tsiku

animal.
as to the
he
a field-ploughing
domestic
l^f ^ ^K^
^P J
~^
**
>
Oso va
sui-tsiu ni
sumu = the
,
otter in (the) water lives.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
61
DECLENSION.
7.
The relations of one noun

by
to another word, or
1
its
cases, are expressed

defi-
by
suffixes,
particles (Teniwova or Tsukd-zi)
),
which generally have a
nite signification, and, arranged, according to our declension, are limited to the
following.
Nominative (subject) and Vocative.

Accusative (object direct)
Genitive
^7
wo
Jf ga (pronounced
nga,
I'M),
~J]
among
in-
exact writers often

Qualitative Genitive
ka.
J
S
no, old- Japanese also

tsu, originally tu.
-}-
na and
Dative and Terminative
ve, he or
X ye, e
(wards).
Index of the relation of the Place,

ni,
Means and Instrument

Ablative
7"
te.
^
3
})
nite,
7*
~ft
de (pron.
tide).
yori,
kara (out, from).
;7 wo alone, which indicates an object direct

of declension,
signification.
it
is
is
characterized as a real form
the other inflections belong to the suffixes, that have their

If,
own
notwithstanding, they are here already cited and illustrated,
for
the
behalf of those,
who do not
willingly dispense with the ordinary
declensions.
Explanation.
I.
NOMINATIVE. The primitive form of a noun
is
at the
same time that of the

In imitation of former
nominative, which thus has no inflectional termination.
grammarians the
ristic
suffix
)^ va, vulgo *7 wa, has been considered as a characteis
of the Nominative, but as this suffix

also
merely an isolating particle, which
may
be of use with other cases,
it
must not be longer considered aa a

*).
definite characteristic of the
Nominative
(subject)
1)
See Introduction,
altaische
14. 3. pag. 42.
2) ,,Keine
Sprache hat einen Nominativ."

186.
H. STEINTHAL,
Ckanuitrutik itr ha*pU*f)ditktit*
Typen det Sprach bauet , I860, pag.
62
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
VOCATIVE. The poet sometimes stretches or doubles the final sound of a noun
to
make known,
that his feelings are thereby
affected,
or that he invokes the
object.
This emphatic prolongation of sound, by which the vocal-harmony comes
into play, belongs properly to the interjections,
and has the same
effect as
our
exclamation
or Oh!
Hdna,
flower;
Mnaa!
torii!
(
(^f
^
(
7
)
o flower! oh the flower!
Tori, bird;
,(^ J
^}
o bird!
Mi,
three;
mii! (lEl
To, four;
.
. .
y6o! yowo!
...
u;
uwo!
occurs,
i.
As exclamation ^, wo
e. g.
e.
in Irova nivoveto tsirm%ru'w6 = the colour

,
with the smell corruption o!
oh!
that the colour with the smell should
vanish!
Besides, 37
suffix
Yi
just as in
German: Feuerio! Mordio!

,
is
used as an emphatic
,
and
added to the simple root of a verb
strengthens the Imperative
e.
g.
To wo akdyo, open the door!

n. ACCUSATIVE.
placed before the
g.
If the object direct of a transitive verb is
indefinite,
falls
it is
verb in the primitive form and the logical accent

grass to
upon
the verb'
e.
Kusd kari,=
it is
mow.
If the object
at the
is
definite (Accusais
tivus definitus),
e.
characterized by
wo and
same time
If
it is
accentuated,
g.
Kusdwd
karu, = grass (or the grass) to
mow.
to be brought out
is
with emphasis as the subject of conversation, then the accusative
isolated
by the
particle va besides,
and the form

is
wova
is
obtained, which for euphony
passes over into
woba, and
frequently pronounced oba.
Examples. Tori-odosivd
tori
kedamonowd oddsu mono
ndri, the
scarecrow
||
is
-something that frightens birds and beasts.

nari,
Uw6
tdru
amivd uwow6
toru
gu
= the
fish
catching-net,
is
a fish catching-net.
- -
Midzu kumi, water

Kefurino
tokdro o
scooper.
nobdruwo
Ikdno midsuwo kumu, to scoop the water from a pond.

miru, to see the
mounting
J
of the smoke.
Kamird mkumu
ba
mdtte simowo ts&kgu koto nakdre

chief, they
),
with that which people disapprove of in their
must not charge
their inferiors.
(
In the book on the Middle- Way
f|l
Cap. IX) after what a
man may un-
J)
The Grand Study (Dai Gaku), X,
8.
CHAPTER
dertake of what
is
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
63
but
great has been
summed up,
there follows as antithesis:
he cannot keep the

rectly expresses
Middle-Way," which the Japanese translation very corwdb* yo| ife Tsiu-you if it were: >7Vm-youwfr, kortwo
>^*K*. Iff* *'**/$* v/*Tf B

effect,
-
kusu bekardzu. It would have the same
- but the Middleyokusu bekardzu Way

Tsiu-you
saying:
wa
cannot,
it
is
plain, pass for

rtava nite
that can one not keep." The form an accusative. On the other hand the
Muma sar^woba
korewo sibdru, = the horse and the ape

contains an unnecessary repetition of the
with a rope (one) binds them fast,"
object, characterized as accusative. If the fluous; if the kordwo remains,
wo ba
is
perserved, the kordwo
is
super-
Muma sdruva
must remain, the wo being

tsuku, to build a wall
superfluous.
(or
The use of
ivo
in
Kai-henwo isi-kabewo
on
along)
(
the seaside, deserves notice.
Nipponno bu-naiwo riyo-kau-suru men-g!yo

permission to travel
$^^R ft^SlctT^^^S^)'
Japan
1
through the inland of
).
The Accusative employed here
indicates a continuous motion
which we
express
III.
by means of along, through.

GENITIVE.
1,
~}f
ga, nga,
na(^),
sets
in pronunciation sharp toned, cha-
racteristic of the genitive relation,
forth the object as something taken in

the.
a definite sense
of ga
is
and has the
effect
of of
The
genitive subordination by
it
means
considered disrespectful;
thence the speaker applies
only to himself
and to persons and things of which, having higher persons in view, he makes
no
of
case.
One
says, indeed,
is
Wdregd
or Watdkusigd,
= of the
I, of
,
me, and Are go,
him
but ga
not used with those nouns and pronouns

2
).
with which respected
persons are addressed or indicated
Examples.
bailiff of
is
Ko
va Misima-agata-nusi gd oya nari, this
is
the progenitor of the

wart, this god
the district of Misima.
Kono kamivd N. N.ra gd oya
the progenitor of the N. N.s.
Flt6 mina Sukunegd kau-rikiwozo kan-zi keri, each admired Submit* strength.
1) 2)
Netherlands and Japanese Treaty

This
I.
al.
3.
RODKIGUEZ
also
must have meant, when he, according

la troisieme persoiine,
to the
et
French edition f 7,
la
sy:
,/
s'emploie cotnme proiiom de
pour
les inferienr*,
comme prouom de
le
praniirc,
par humilite." Let the misprint
coin me pronom" be altered
to
,,apre$" or ,,pour
pronom," and the

is
agreement with our assertion will be found.

in Alcock's Japanese
pronoun, ga
does not exut.
The ame mistake
met with
is
Grammar
of 1861
p.
18, where we read: ,,f y,

first
n of the genitive in noons,
used aa a pronoun in the third person for inferiors, and in the
person
a term of humility."
64
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
Kai-mongd dake, the peak of the

to the
sea-port (Kai-mon
is
the
name
of the entrence
bay between the provinces of Odsumi and Sdtsuma).

sdki, the cape of the
Sagdmino Miura gd
in the province of
Sagdmian Miura
(
the cape of Miura

,
SagdmL
Amegd
sitd
~~J\ )
under the heavens
the
sublunary world.
FU6wo
nai gd sironi su, to estimate others at the value of
nothing, te consider others of no value.
Kdru, being
so,
Kdrugd
yuejii,
for
ki-
the reason of the being so, on account of the state of
affairs.
Watdkusigd
mono, the dress of me.

~Jf
Ga, no index of the

particle
subject.
The
ga
is
also
considered
as
an emphatic
definite characteristic of
it
the subject.
Now
the question arises, if a particle, which, as

is
most evidently
appears from the instances cited,

genitive, can also be one of the
an emphatic
definitive characteristic of the

is
nominative. The answer
negative.
The
cases,
in which ga
is
considered as an emphatic nominative termination, are capable of

its
a conception, which leaves to this particle
value of a characteristic of the

reasons,
genitive, and besides places in a

effect, which
is.>
clear
light the
why ga
has that
ascribed
to
it
as
an emphatic
characteristic
of the subject.
is
An
instance will
make
this clear.
Speaking of an undertaking the question
proposed:
for it."
Is there
MONEY
for it?"
and which
is
is
answered by:
There
is
money
Now
in
is
the question
money
the subject,
first
which
after the
Japanese
arrangement,
isolated
placed first and, as a subject
brought into conversation,

there is" lo-
by va or wa. In the answer, on the contrary, the predicate

and the subject
gically has the greater weight,
money," as subordinate
attributive
ga.
definition, precedes the predicate, as
genitive, emphatically characterized by

to:
The answer:
There
is
money" changes
of
money
the presence (is)"
*).
The
question sounds in Japanese:
Kanew& drimdmkd?
y?,
the answer: Kanegb, drimdsu.
Another instance consisting of the words
day, and kuretd, become dark.

||
To
i.
the question:
e.
/7wa
kuretakd? = the day (as to the day)

the
i.
has become dark?
has the
day approached
become dark
is,
end? as answer, follows: Fig& kuretd = the

the day
day's having
e.
has become dark
3
).
1) It
must be kept in view that

the snbject exists.
is
in Japanese
no congruency, properly 80 called, of the predicative

15 A. p. 44.
defi-
nition with
See Introduction
2) This instance
taken from the ,,Japansch en Hollandsch Woordenboek van den Vorst van Nakats"
1810, letter/.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
65
The Shopping-Dialogues
E. g. pp. 1 and 2:
are rich in instances, which plead for this conception.
The buyer.
have come to buy something = WatdkusiTrb kai mononi maitta.

whill
is
The
seller.
What
you buy ? = Naniwo
kdi ndsdrft
'
h-<i
The buyer. What The

seller.
there? =
Ndni ga dri-mdsuka?
There are lacquered goods inlaid with mother of pearl = Awo-gdi
mono ga dri-mdsu.
The buyer. Are there any gold-lacquered goods? = Mdki-ye mom>wa

mdsftka?
dri-
The
drimdsu.
seller.
Yes, gold-lacquered goods are at
hand =
Hei. Maki-ye
monoga
Question:
ko
samagatavra, ikdga de irasertire mdsuka?,
your children,
the youngest child
how do
is
they do?
- -
Answer: S&dno ko ga sugure masfan
),
not quite well.

Therefore
is
come down
is,
snows" Yukigo, furn or furi-mdsu, = of snow whereas Yukiwa, furu - with respect to the snow, it is coming
said rightly for
it
down, would be a
snow. The same
is
definition
which attributes
come down," the

tsuki-mosta
9
predicate, to the
the case with Fokdno
fundg&
),
there
is
another
ship arrived, properly the arrival of another ship has happened, whereas
Fokd
no fund-w& tsuki-mdsta, would signify:

ject
another ship --is

to. which
arrived," the subis
now
being
another ship" the idea

is
the most importance
attached,
and on which the attention
first
is
fixed.
The degrading of the
subject to attriin the
butive genitive of the predicate

Altaic languages
3 )
,
a phenomenon, that
also
,
commonly occurs
and in the Chinese
plays an important part. Thus, to
choose a classical expression, the saying [gj
^ ^ fy
is
-{{^ *),
Hoei
tee!
is
:in
y\ means
Hoei
is
(or was) a
man, Japanese KwaivB,

9
ficfl^
i
flto to nari.
Hoei
here the subject
brought under consideration, of which something

saying of CONFUCIUS:
said.
On
the contrary the
^**
-*+
.*,
*\
l^s \/J
+.
\
}
A
|
U **
Japanese JTwoi'fft/ttrftd
<r,
- Hoei's a
man
to
be
(is),
lays the accent emphatically
on the predicate >to
be a man," which we might express by
Hoei was eminently a man."
1)
Familiar diatoytut, pp. I, Copied, with correction, from R. ALCOCK,
2) R.
BROWN
Colloquial Japanese t p.
etc., p.
n.
6.
3) STEINTHAI, Characteristik 4) Tschung-yuny ,
186.
Cap. VIII.
66
Still
CHAPTER
worthy of a place here,
is
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
R.
BROWN'S remark
in his Colloquial Japanese , pp.
XXXIII and XXXIV,
his opinion concerning; the power of both particles being fully confirmed by our illustration.
,,Wa, which
follow
it
,
is
merely an
isolative particle, serving to separate a

,
word or
clause,
from the words that

its
is
not a sign of the nominative

of vinculum
it
though
it
frequently stands between the subject and
predicate
Wa
is
a sort
around a
collection
of words, and serves to give definiteness to this group of
words, distinguishing
purpose,
scarcely
from the other elements of the propositions....

seems to be more emphatically
is
Nga
or ga (ff)
is
used for the same
except
that
it
definitive.
The
difference between
wa and nga
is
translatable,
but
to
be expressed by the
tone of the speaker's voice, rather than by any cor-
responding word in English.
The
native ear at once perceives the difference , and a foreigner can acquire the
use of these particles only by practice and

that
much
familiarity with the Japanese usage.

as
are.
if
The
native teachers say
wa
is
a kind of cordon drawn around a word or words,

is
to isolate it or
them,
as a distinct subject
of thought, and that nga
used
when one
if
or
more
objects
singled out, being present or conceived to be
present,
spoken of
specifically.
Thus,
a Japanese should
say of a certain lot of teas;

i.
Here are the

as separated
musters,
his expression for
the musters, would be Mihon wa,

if
e.
the musters,
from
the original packages,
but,
buyer, taking one of the samples should say he liked
it, his expression

-
would be Kono mihongi kini
irimas".
The
idea
would then be, that that particular sample suited him."
Thus here
difference
is
made between Mi-AonVfA. (properly Te-honwa) kokoni arimdsu, samples

these samples
are
here at hand, and
Kono te-honga kini irimdsu,
please me.
2.
No,
cognate to ni, to be,
is
used for the attributive subordination of
one substantive to another, and gives to the subordinated the character of an

adjective.
As
the use of ga
it is
is
limited
by
etiquette,
no
distinction of person is
intended by no;
:
used for high and low.

~
Examples Kousi no
Dai-gdku no mitsi
(
i-siyo
^\ -f*
)
,
ij^
^^
^ ^^
a writing left by
Kung
tse.
the
way
of the Grand Study.
Ama no
--
gava
the river of heaven, the milky- way.
Fosi no fikdri, starlight. a beginning year

,
Tosino fdzimd,
year.
beginning of a year.
fima, a
split in
Fazimtno
tosi ,
New
Kobe no
a wall.
Nisikino bousi, cap of colored

i.
silk.
Akaganeno deru
tok6ro,-of copper the birth place,
e.
the place whence copper comes.
Wa-
tdkmin6 kimono,
my
garment.
elision the
j>
Remark. By way of
for
o of no
is
1
suppressed as in
for
ondori,
6no
tori,
is
male bird;
&
mendori
),
meno
tori,
female bird.
The
is
also
dissolved
in the
following consonant,
which in the writing then
marked
as
impure
(nigori), so, Fito-yo-nosake,
Sake of one night, becomes
|^V
V@Ti A!
Fito-yo-nzake. v
still
That no frequently has

of an ellipsis,
e.
another particle (case) after
it, is
the consequence
g.:
^t
Remark
Jf.y ?
^0
<
$j|>
JJft^y
#|>
1)
Compare
A.
2.
p. 52.
CHAFfER
Usivo, dsttdnowo dsasivoto ivi,
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
67
tide,
kurdnowd
yuuxico to /Vw
),
that of the morKore
ning
is
called the morning-tide,

tsiisai;
that of the evening the
evening-tide.
is
wa amari
mo
sukosi
ookiinowo
mise*), this (case)
too small; let
me
see a larger one.

3.
Na,
still
-)-
(abbreviation of ndru,
being"
vid.
12), old,
and in the popular lan(
guage,
used variation of no, in the mouths of the vulgar at Yedo da

3 )
,
f) also
(pronounced nda)
which
however
,
is
to be considered as a syncope of de-aru.
Simozamana
manner, and
koto
(^ ^.)
baseness, vulgarity, from simo, beneath, taina,
koto, thing.
Kova
na-bakdri nari, that
is
only a name.
bakdrina, mono, something (mono) that exists only in name.
AVoma yawa,
jfpj"
for
kaneno gawa
(^
)\\
),
metal-brook, or kamino gawa
j(j|jj
), god's-river.
Taizid&
4.
still
(for Tai-zi de-aru) koto
wd
gozdrimasdni'i
there
is
nothing of consequence.
Tsu,
y
it
(^f)
old- Japanese characteristic of attributive relation, appears
only in old compounds, instead of no; sometimes, for the sake of euphony,
after
or n
passes over to du, su and
dzu
^*). The oldest records sometimes have,

also.
instead of
y and ^, X
zu
Examples. Amatsu kami, = of heaven khan, heavenly god.

the expanse of heaven , the firmament.
Amat#u
sora,
Ama tsu
4
miko
the son of heaven (the
Emperor).
Amatsu
fitsuki,
the heavenly (imperial) crown.
Kunitsu kami,
the country god.

try products.
-
Kunitm
or kunizu (>?
5
%)
).
mono, country objects, coun-
Ivdtsu imo, house potato
Ira tsu kok6ro, = prickle heart, Aki,

1.
shrewdness.
Nivatsu dori, the court-bird, the cock.
glitter, 2.
au-
tumn.
Akitsu musi, the glittering insect (Liln'Unln}.
Akitsu
Wi,
glittering
islands (a
name
of Japan).
Sita, beneath, under.
Sltatm
i/itV#i,
an under-
ground way.
Instead
of
Kibitsu
6 )
ty*
Kiln'. take/lkd, the hero of
J L:7
Otsuko, bachelor, and
ty*
&*,
Otmmt,
and otome also. spinster, occur in old writings otoko

IV. DATIVE and TERMINATIVE.
-^ve
(he) or
X (L) ye, e properly
signifies
2 verso. 1) Jap. Encycl. 57,
2) Shopping-dialogues, p. 3.
3)
From
oral
communication by 0. Y. from T4o.

occur alternately.
both forms (7^-9 and 4) In the Nipponki, XXII, 20,

5)
6)
7=7)
Caladium esculenium.
It
must seem strange, that the writer

subjoin to this
i.
of the Japanese Encyclopedia (78. 8. r.J baa thought

'
it
necet-
sary
to
name
the note:
l"
^b
><
57
'
T8t7r*
NO
to
ondzi,
e.
TSU, an auxiliary word, the same as NO.
68
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
side or direction,
e.
g.
Yamanove, the mountainous
side, the side of, the
direction of (towards) the mountains. -- Yukuv4, the
side,
by which one goes

Atove
away.
or ato ye ,
Mav6, ma yd, vulgo mai =

= spur-side
,
look- wards ,
i.
e.
forwards, before.
backwards
behind.
respects to our
As
tion in
suffix ve or
ye answers in
,
all
wards and
,
indicates the direc,
which any thing proceeds
e. g.
Y6do-ve (or Yddo-he)

dite",
Yedo-*waxds as distinc-
tion from Yddoni, in or at Yedo, Yddoni
being in Yedo;
YMoveno
mitsi,
Yedo-waxds road, the road to Yedo.
Nippon ve no miydke, presents
for Japan.
Examples: Siyok'-motsu wo
fit6ve" okuru, to send victuals to others.
Kariva
mindmivd
sdrita, the geese
have gone away towards the south.
Tovoki kunive
yuku, to go to distant countries.

boru
,
Ten-lei vd simove" kuddri, tsi-kivd

,
kamive no-
the mists of the sky sink towards beneath (to the earth)
the mists of the
earth rise towards above.

1
Motove moddru,
to return to the source.
Kara-
fune
itsu
sou
(tteotf)
Sagdmino Miurdga sakive feu-tsiyaku-su, a Chinese junk ran
aground on the cape of Miurd, in the province of Sagdmi.

Instances
17.
from the treaty between the Netherlands and Japan. Art.
II,
Koku-daive furi-watasu, to make known into every part of the realm. -
Gun-youno siyo-butsva Nippon-yak' -siyono fokdve uru-be'kardzu munitions of war

,
may
not be sold to any other than the Japanese government.

(
V,
1.
Olanda-
zin ve (or ni) taisi
^j" ^
fau wo
J^ ^ ^ )
^
okdsu
to transgress the
law against
the Dutch.
sul.
--VI,
9.
& 2/3.1^^.
^
^'
communicate to the Con-
V, Ni
1.
^* ^T^"^'
o
everJ direction, towards every side.

to, in general points out the relation of
(^
"f), with relation

and
is
an
indirect as
object,
therefore used to indicate the place at
which,
as well
of,
into which and answers to our in, at, unto, by and by

it
means
according as the verb, to which

reached, or that the object makes
belongs, indicates that the place has been

it.
movement towards
Thence one says Yddoye
yuku and Yddoni 6ru, to go to Yedo and
to reside in Yedo.
as:
collateral relation to the
The
a.
relation expressed
by Ni may be understood
Dative
or
is
Ablative, by which, in general, a
predicate verb
to
expressed. E. g. Fitdni tsikdki mitsi, a road,
which with relation
people
is
is
near.
F^t6ni tovdki mitsi,
a road which with relation to (for)
people,
remote.
F'itoni fandruru, separated
from people.
Kdvi ko kuvdni
fdnardnu, the silkworm does not remove from the foliage.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
6d
toktroni, at this
b.
Local,
to
the
question
where
or
when. E.
g.
Kono
at
place.
Nusubitd tok6ro-dok6roni ok6ru, robbers
rise
every place (every-
figdsini nob6ri, nisini im, the sun rises in the east, and goes in the west. -- Ytdoni (down) kiyo-riu-suru yaku-t,'in, functionaries residing in Yddo. Ydmani iri ki wo kiru, = to go into the mountains and chop wood.
where).
--
Figa
in
Fnndni n6ru,
kazdni sardsu
,
-to be load in a ship (to navigate).

to
Yunui-n^'urn tfinim tarn,

in the air.
hang up mountain-herbs on a rope and dry (them)

silk
Kavikoni yamavi dekiru, by (among) the

todokovoru, to stick fast in speaking.
worms
exists sickness.
Iruni
/Vrui/i, at
Kono
tosini, in this year.
noon. -- Yuvuni, in the evening.

face of
Firu-garo dsani ake, yArublni
*//;////,
the
noon"
,
1 )
opens in the morning, and closes in the evening.

Nan-ltu
,
Ni va
the relation indicated by ni isolated by va.
Txfikdrlt-ben no
:
tsi-meiniva fan-mei ohosi,
among
(ni va) the
names of
places (J^Jj*
-f
*)
ê
country of Nan-bu and Tsukdru strange names are manifold.
Ni va sometimes
elliptically
changes into nva
i/
)~^ ).
- -
Aru
tokinird or
dru tokinvd, at any time.

c.
Modal,
to the question
how. E.
g.
Dai-sini tatsi-tamavu^ he appears as (in

(-f
the quality of) hereditary Prince.
Ikdni, vulgo ikdn
^), how, in what
manner.
Ikd-sdmani, in what (or which) manner.
Saka~^cmtani% perversely.
-
Kotoni, particularly.
Ookini, often, very.
d.
Makotoni, in truth, indeed. -- Tadani, mere, only.

Sttmiyakani, suddenly, quickly.
to the question of
Casual and Instrumental,
whom, by which
or
by
what, with which, with what, although

with relation
to,
is
here also the original signification,

atardta, struck with
-
preserved. E.g.
Yani
an arrow.
Fltoni damasareta, deceived by people (others).

korite
Dai-Minno
eiva fai-yuani
susumi tsikd-dzukdzu
not Til-Ming's army, confounded by the defeat, doea
approach.
e.
Dative of the person,
to the question to
whom.
E.g. Oyani
m'ru, with
relation to the parents, to be like, to resemble the parents.
Fltoni taisu, to
stand opposite others. -- Flto-ni mono wo atavuru (prou. a/îura), to concede or

give anything to others.
/.
Dative of the thing,
to the question to
what
or to
which,
for
which
I)
The
flower of Phurbiiis Nil CHOIS, or Ipomoea Nil
70
used
seed.
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
the
suffix to is
also.
- -
E. g.
Kuvdno miwo taneni

wdta id tdru
into bows.
bdsi,
,
(or taneto) tdru, to take

-
mulberries
for
Mdyu wo
to use cocoons for wadding.
Yumini
ndvu
tsukuruki,
wood worked
Wdravd musironi oru
bdsi,
it
ndvani
can be
bdsi,
fdki-mononi tsukuru
it
with regard to straw (waravd),

it
woven
into mats,
can be twisted into rope,

nari,
can be worked up into shoes. -
Nami
kaze
mo tawoyakani
besi,
wind and waves become smoother.

off his feet
Asiwo
kirite
siyoku-motsuni atavu
g.
he will cut
and give (them)
for food.
Terminative,
the direction
whither,
signifying to
which
(to
what,
to
its
whom),
limits
provided the
movement
directed towards
an object extends
to within
or reach, distinguished from

g.
<
ve
which properly answers rather to

i}ie
our wards. E.
wards) the west
Kaz<[vd nisi-katani kavdru, =

--
wind changes
to (veers to-
side.
To wo
fini tsugu, to continue the night to the day.

lulls
KazJ_ ydmite (yande) fun& kisini tsuku, the wind

shore.
and the ship comes to the

Isini
Fdknsai
yon Nippon ni watdrn, he
passes from Fakusai to Japan.
ndru, to turn to stone.
V. To,
to,
Dutch tot, ter, German zu, a
particle that denotes the inherency
of a substantive in a predicate verb, which expresses a to, in general a working, which has an object for
are the verbs nari, to become; nasi, to
its
becoming
apposition.
or a
making
sort
Of such
make;
ivu, to be called, to
etc.
name; nddsu-
kuru, to name; miyu, to seem; kaku, to write,

to nari, he becomes, of his nasu, people
E.g. Midsukdra toravare-fito
own
accord (to) a prisoner.

to silk wadding.
flies
Mdjuwo ma-wata
N. va
to
make (work up) cocoons
tori to ke'site tobi-
yuku
N. changes himself to a bird and

to ivu
away.
Fttd to ivu
is
to be called
man; Ftto
called
va (by syncope Fttd
to va), that which
called
man,
the so
man. To,
serves as a sign of quotation.
Vide Addenda
I.
V. Tote page 343,
190.
n.
,
20.
~^"
,
Nite
is
in the spoken language

alike
passing into nde
for
which ^r* (de)

is
written,
characterises
the
Local and the Instrumental and

it
used,
sepa-
especially,
when
it
the predicate- verb does not follow
immediately, but
is
rated from
by the interposition of the subject or of the object direct. E. g.

- in
this strait the tide is rapid.
Kono
sedonite sivo faydsi,
Kari-bdsinite kava
wo watdru,
usii
to cross the river

,
by means of a temporary bridge.
Komewo
Kuvd nite
kdrakdviko
nite
komakdni kuddku
to
to stamp rice fine in a mortar.
wo ydsindvu,
rear
silkworms
- -
with leaves.
Tamagonite siyau-zuru mono
beings proceeding from eggs.
Fdku-sai-k6kuniteva takawo Kutsin t6 ivu, in
CHAPTER
the country of Fdku-sai, the
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
71
kuniniteva kariko-ami
used.
hawk
is
called Kutsin.
Aru
is
wo tsukavu nan,
va, in China.
in a certain country the silk-worm net

pff
Morogosinite
Hj^T^,
in the Middleland.
Kuni-guninite, in each
-- Te country.
nite
nite,
with hands; Teniteno si-kata, gestures with hands.
Fast
fasdmu,
to take hold of with eating-sticks.

ni-\-te
b.
De,
y*, contraction of
a.
and pronounced as nde, characterizes

the Instrumental,
alike
the relation of
the Local and
but
is
only peculiar to
the easy, spoken and written styles. Examples:

a.
Miyakode, at Miyako.
Tsilkino motode avu, to
meet under the moon (here
below).
Yumino
sit
utsi de dvu, to
meet with in a dream.

-
Mftmdno uyfde
Ica-
tamukeru, to
flowers.
awry on horseback.
Fdnano
sitdde
maydvu, wander among
TsUbamega yanagino fotoride mayovu, the swallow roams around wil-
lows.
Kusa nakade naku musi,

ka, in
insects chirping in the grass. -it
Ikkadt dtki-
mdsu
b.
how many
days can
happen,
is
it
possible?
Fudede kdku,
to write with the pencil.

-
Iside
ganwo
teukitrK, to build
temple of (with) stone.

blood.
Tsiwo
tside
ardvu, to wash off blood with (or in)
Yotsu
mumdde
fikaseru kuruma, a
*),
waggon drawn with

it is
four horses. -
Sononede
wa
kaye mase'nu
with
(for)
that price
dza
(
not to
sell.
The spoken
language of Yedo Changes de

writing ja french. gia V.
wa
into
5.
^ "V
according to the English
109.
II.
Remark.
motte
^.J^l
(
1.
-2
The book language generally

?), and uses for
to
expresses the Instrumental by

off
. .
wo
Jj[
wash
blood with blood," the expression
^ lutt
J$^
2.
Ifllt
Tsiwo m6tte tsiwo araru, = folding or using blood
(with blood) to wash off blood.
Remark.
in schools
For the explanation of expressions belonging

is
to the book-language,
and school-books the spoken-language
used, and this, whenever
ni occurs in the book-language as a characteristic of the Local or of the Instru-
mental, generally substitutes de for

VI. ABLATIVE. Yori,
indicate a
it.
>J
and kara,
# y
gj
),
out
of,
from,
movement
in a direction from a place, in opposition to *^s, rv, totill.
wards,
or
7 *,
made, to,
If the point of departure
is
a period of time,
or an action, then yori and kara answer to our
from
to,
from, since; after,
afterwards.
I)
Shopping-Dialogues t
p.
8.
72
CHAPTER
I.
NOUNS. DECLENSION.
7.
Examples. Firatoyori Nagasaki made san ziyu fdtsi

gasaki
times.
it is
ri dri,
from Firato to Na-
38
ri
(Japanese miles).
Inisive" yori
^
(
^=
f
-^)
from
old
Fdztmd
yori,
from the beginning.

^
J
Ima
yori
|||
^^)>
from now.
Y y
3
).
Kunini tau-tsiyakuno
fi yori,
from the day of

Fusi-
the arrival in the country
Fusi-yamava Wun-zenga
take yori takdsi,

i.
mountain
is
out of the peak of the
warm
springs high,
e.
the ^wsz-mountain
in higher than the peak of the
Wunzen.
e.
Korewd
sore-yori takdku drimdsu *),

that.
this
from that out high
is,
i.
this is higher,
than
Yori,
oki yori no
subordinated by means of no to another substantive:
Kono misakiva
mmte
nari, this cape is a
mark
(medte) out of sea.
Kara, indicating rather the

the
direction,
from which any
thing
comes
),
as
German
her, occurs in the written
language seldom, and only in old comis,
pounds, as in Oki kara, out of sea, and

guage. Kore kara
yotte).
(
rather peculiar to the spoken lanfor that reason (= koreni
fj|j
^),
thence,
-
-- Sore kara, so with.

fil
also therefore,
jfc^ ifl^
^?
v% % ?
4
H^
)
,
mj
"t"1f
^> Tehon-girega drimdsu kara, korewo Goran-nasare

hand (drimdsu), please
see this.
since
(kara)
there
are patterns at
5
Age-masu kara uke-
tori-gakiw6 kudasare
),
after (kara) delivery (agemasu) please, give a receipt.

G
Kon-nitsiwa yohodo 6s6i kara

too late (yohodo-6s6i)
,
),
miyau-nitsi kaheri masiyoo, as (kara) to day

to
it is
I will
come back
morrow.
to shoot,
Remark. Yori, verb continuative, derived from yi (#),
from which,
among
root,
others ya, arrow, and yumi,
bow,
ni,
derive.
(Kara seems
to belong to the
ki,
come).
Preceded by a local
yori,
means
to have its point of de-
parture in;
Kore-ni yoreri, from that flows forth.
Koreni
ytiriti
or yotte, in
consequence of, therefore.
1)
The Treaty between the Netherlands and Japan, I,
5.
2) Shopping- Dialogues
p.
35.
3)
pn"
;fjjj
-^j^
-Hi
p.
Wa-gun
siwori , under Kara.

5)
Ibid. p.
14.
4) Shopping-Dialogues,
23.
6)
Ibid. p. 41.
II.
PRONOUNS.
\
8.
I.
The Pronouns
in Japanese are:
Nouns which
express a quality.
II.
Pronouns demonstrative, which

its
point out something, either a person
or thing according to
relation to the speaker.
They
are
all
subject to the ordinary declension, and which the genitive suffix,
no, are used as pronouns possessive.
The
distinction
of
three grammatical persons

1
(I,
Thou, He) has
re-
mained foreign to the Japanese language

(the I), as well as that to
).
All the persons, that of the speaker
which or of which
he speaks- (Thou, He), are
on-
sidered as contents of the proposition
and thus, according
to our peculiarity of
language, in the third person, and etiquette, having in view the meaning of
words expressive of quality, has to determine, which person, by one or another

of these words
is
intended.
Etiquette distinguishes only between the
I,"
and
the
not-I,"
it
abases the one,
and
exalts the other. Thus,
it
is
the meaning.
us.-,
which in
this sort of
it,
is
words comes
indicated.
first
under notice,
Mon*
the
that
i-ti-
quette makes of
1)
Therefore,
as
it
will
be seen hereafter,
the
verb
has no ronjiigational snfnxc*,
which tend to the
expression of this distinction.
74
CHAPTER
II.
QUALIFYING PRONOUNS.
8.
With
respect to the
use of the qualifying pronouns

differ
especially, the written or
book language and the conversational

I.
from each other.
Qualifying nouns, which

I":
are used as pronouns, are,
A. For the
M
Yatsu-k6
(
fjf?), pron.
Yakko, = house-boy,
valet, servant; belongs to the old
written language. -- Yatsii-kare
(^^î^),
valets,
valet,
your servant.
Yatsu-bara (^Jj} ^j^'l), the
we
subjects.
The Chinese
^
j^*
7
'
j^
,
yfi,
Jap. gu, unintelligent, in compounds, as:

,
^^
^- ^
t~l
.v*
Gu-nin
the unintelligent
man
I.
ppt^ CX
'
Gu-sa. the unintelligent.

1
Jj?k^
-^-^' Gu-sau, the unintelligent herb

^
Tgr
,
),
the
I" of the Bonzes.
j^
^*
Gu-rau
Gu-sin,
the unintelligent old man.
jeB^"
A^^? *^
my
heart.
B. For the person spoken to,

1.
THOU:
originally Na-motsi,
;
Nandzi (|^^), formerly Ndmiidzi,

, , ,
having a name,
,
name-having
name bearing renowned honoured
plural nandzira
nandziga-tomo-
gara. It belongs to the written

literate persons address
language and to the solemn
style,
Nobles, and
.
one another with Nandzi.

to
f^
^fc
ffi>
Tdmi tomoni ndndziwo miru, the people look up

Nandzi fitoga me wo
2.
tsukete oru,
you together, or every one looks up
to you.
you have attracted the eyes of the people.

,
Imasi
^^
shortened m&si
= present
leaves
.
it
uncertain
whether a
person speaks to his betters or inferiors. J|5 ~f

3.
Sanaa
(^^^
^j||^
= the look, appearance, shape, ^9l^)> vulgo San,

is
e.
g.
Mindtono sdma yosi, the shape of the harbour

well,
beautiful, the
harbour looks
was, originally, as a characteristic of modesty, applied by the speaker

since
is
to himself;
the middle ages, however,
conceded to a person beyond the
speaker,
it
now
generally used as an expression of respect and at present

It is subjoined to
;
answers to our
4. "gimi
(
Sir, Mister."
*J~)
,
nouns and pronouns.

,
^"
Sir
Mister
Kimi-sama
to
^" ^ ^| *")
NN.
vulgo Kimi-san
ho-
nour, lordship.
5.
N. N. kimi-samaye,
(-=f*^
Mr.
Te-maye
^0
"'),
vulgo Te-mai, Te-mee, = at hand, indicates the per-
1) Corporal, only to vegetate from the example of the Lotusplant,
but to make the
spirit free,
is
the
duty of the Buddhist's
life;
thence the clerical (Bonze) considers himself as an herb.
CHAPTER
son spoken
II.
8.
75
to.
Plural Te-maye-Wsi, vulgo Te-maird, Te-mee-tatsi. Te-mdye-sdnm .
vulgo Te-mdye-sdn, the gentleman at hand (present), you, Sir; plur.

sdma-ydta.
Te-maye-
On, O ($P**"), Ki
conversational language
the person, to
6.
J|*), Son
(1p
|^ *
.
honorary adjectives, used in the

style as
and in the epistolary
pronouns possessive, of
whom
or of
whom
spoken.
J^J.
On, O ($P**,
,
abbreviated
f^.
/.
(^. tj v^),
.
as given
by
Japanese authors
our
an abbreviation of ~fc
60 , 6ond , great , sublime , answers to

it is,
His or Her Highness" referring to a prince;
however, prefixed to the
names of things or matters that have

applied by the speaker to
respect
all
reference to
any person in honour, and

his
beyond himself, for which he wishes to make

o before substantives
known. Thus the presence of on or
and verbs, makes
known, without the help of another pronoun,

reference to a person
that the things or matters have
beyond
the speaker.
e,
As
a Japanese element on or o
Yeilo.
is
compounded with Japanese words,

the honoured side,
g.
0-Y4do, the princely
D-kola,
Your honour.
,
0-mi, the honoured body, Your-self

I shall
0-iw,
-
Your
eye.
0-meni kaMri-matfyoo
0-ide, your
rise.
appear before your eyes.
"-
your name.
-- Y6ku 0-ide nasard,

0-agdri nasard, =
may your
rise
happen = be
welcome! -- 0-agdri, your

on!
for
if
rise.
may your
wish, the
rise
happen, come
expression
-
0-negdi, your wish.
0-negai~tn6.se ,
let
may you
common
you plase."
letter,
-- 0-mise,
etc.
me
see! -- On-tdd&unt, your inquiry.
">
bumi, your
In old- Japanese the place of On,
is filled
by Mi, thence J//-XWo, sublime
mountain. port; Mi-koto, Highness; Mi-ydma, chief 3 7. Go, the koye of O, is generally prefixed to Chinese words. It fjlp
princely,"
means
but from politeness
is
also
used towards other persons beyond the
speaker.
Go-won, your favour.

Go-yon, your use. ~ ... n~ *.,,-, y 0ur wntmg.
^
-r,ii>,
your look.
your friendly
t;,,-k,ni-i.
-,.--? at ^
9
feelings.
*"
>
Go-sen before you in your

,
-'
^1 ?
'
Go-'Qu-**"'
~ y ur con
venation.
presence.
Go-za, sublime
i
seat.
'
G" **"*
sitiou.
y ur permission.
76
CHAPTER
II.
^), vulgo 6-mai
8.
8.
O-maye, 6-mae
(fjljj^
~jjft
from the honorary o

is
aiid
ma-ye
or ma-ve, - look-wards, that

speaker,
is
before, thus something that
present before the
or as by
him imagined present and honoured, = Your Honour. The

call
lower classes of functionaries and small people

sdrna , omdesan.
one another omae and omde-
Formerly by 0-mae was meant the place before tbe prince; thence;
Omaeve maim,
to step before the
Emperor.
9.
Npn
II, 4,
r.
lH'*, Ki, noble, honourable, =

^
you" in genuine Chinese compounds,
as:
p 7
'
Ki-kokn
-K"'-/M i
your country.
t
'
y ur
?
wn
your
care.
Ki-ken f ^/
'
your
district.
^lz2Jr I* ^>>>^
I
anKi-fau, ki-foo, your J ^ ô

'
T'
-Ki-<J un
y ur canton.
ki-so,
swer.
^' Ki-MyOi
your place,
^
'
Ki-too
your answer.
your Excellency.
^> ^,
Ki-koo, ki-koo-sama, the noble Lord, your Lordship.
^
,
Ki-tf'd-ff
your house,
f'
Ki-<Jan i
your
face.
^^
'
-Ki-deni your Excellency.
jfiTz-
f
f
, ,
Ki-men, your countenance.

Ki-ran, your look,
den sa,ma.
ji^^
Ki-fen,ki-hen, your side, your
f Ki-kan, your pencil, your pen.

S' Ki-zat, your ^
,
Excellency. Ki-fen-sama.
~)j'+,'>
letter.
Ki-fyu, ki-hoo, your
side.
j7 s/j/o,
ki-so,
your writing.
Ki-foo sama.
^, Ki-mei, your
10.
command.
HI
^ Ki-sama
'
your Honour.
Son, worshipful, reverend, =
your" in Chinese compounds, as:

i-kdk, the worshipful guest,
^"f,
Son-kun, the worshipful gentleman,

Sir.
my
,"%,
guest.
^ ^
3
i
Son-kou, the worshipful gen-
Son-sau, the worshipful herb,
tleman, your father.
you, Bonze.
^, Son-tai, your body, your person.
7
,
Son-fu, the worshipful father,
your father.
y
^- ^
Son-bo
your mother.
**,
Son-gaiy your limbs.
CHAPTER
II.
8.
77
^^ >y S
'
n ~y u
your appearance.
^tS
'
Y
'
&<-', your
o
will.
IH f
'
'
Son-ran, your look.

Son-fgu, the worshipful side,
Son-zat, your
letter.
fir
L-
>)
Pfr
v
y
i"v 3' bon-nyo, your care.

^t^"
??
,
~Jj
f
'
|L
^ -^ p
y
c oon-foo , your answer.

S' Jli ~l ! tu
'.
^LS'
^|
1-^^^'
I! *^
y ur
^ Son-sfyo, sort-so, your writing.

f
'
>
"R
*
,
Son-k<i
that which
is
below
'
ttfj
Son-kan
your
letter.
the worshipful; the

speaker.
I" of the modest
î$$ *'
$ cw -^vm ?y our pencil? your pen.
In proportion as any thing belongs to the speaker or to a person beyond
him,
desty
it
is
frequently mentioned under different denominations, to express

side,
mopre-
on the one
this
and respectful politeness on the

is
other.
As much
is
sumed on
abundance of names, and ample use
made of them, we may

title
not entirely overlook them here. They occur in popular books under the
Particular
i-rrtiyqu).
of
names of human
relations
One's
own
father
is:
Another's father
s:
Ka-ku.
Gen-knn.
A *> Ka
One's
own mother
Zi-bo.
is:
Another's mother
^^-^r^,
H
/Li
.to.
Rau-lo.
eldest brother
One's
own
Another's eldest broil n-r
Ka-kei.
>
******
78
One's
CHAPTER
II.
8.
own youngest
brother
Another's youngest brother.
J,
Ka-tei.
?, A-tei.
%, A-slyuk.
'
A-tsiu.
One's
own
son
is
Another's son
J^
s:
X S* lK
/?
-y. ?, X HP /
'
(jrU-Sl.
/-,
^yj"
-f' ^, Rei-si.
^y ^ ~j
Htj
^
,
Siu-si.
-j\ 3
Ran-giyok.
One's
I i- t l
own
A.
-4-i:
wife
#.
TV. .
is
Another's wife
^ ^
u
Rei-sits.
s:
m.
lit.
,
Kei-sai.
Sen-sai.
^ ^ Sit
Nai-dziyo.
Sen-sits.
>yc
-y
^, Sai-kun.
#)
is:
One's
own
concubine
,
Another's concubine
Seo-seo.
.
.-
Kei-seo.
Soku-sits.
^
^7
f0l| 17"J
^^ ^y ^
.
^Y fl|' &* Hf
Rei-tsnjou.
Sei-tslyou.
'
One's
own
country and town
Another's country and town
ill
1 *^
'
San-ken.
ben-ri.
Fei-ri.
3
,
Ki-koku.
LI)
''
JHf
^'-^w.
t",
Ri-ken.
*
it r
5B^
^'-^Kin-n.
T7--
Kan-kiyqu.
M
prf
I) '
,
CHAPTER
One's
II.
8.
79
own
dwelling place
Another's dwelling place
$S^ I^Y'
!^l^
Kiiva-siya.
Ht^>
>QE/7'
Kuva-sits.
^,
>
Kau-tei.
Kftra-tei.
/T ^
iM
^,
Toku-ro.
>'*,
D
Jj8[
'
Ran-bau.
l^f
^>
letter
Kan-siya.
One's
own
s:
Another's letter
'
"\T ^
^^ ?
^
Sun-kau.
Siyu-t6ku.
*
,
Da-un.
ASati-ân.
^" ^ B'a
it
^
^M
'
? ft*.
,f'
/.
^ " c <i~k<i'
*
,
Gu-kan.
\_
'
II.
Pronouns proper, which
point out objects with distinction of the place
they occupy in space. They are formed from adverbs of place.

1.
They
are:
Wa
A
(
^7
),
pointing to the centre of space, therefore to the person spea-
king, to his
2.
I."
),
y
( ~f]
anywhere, elsewhere,
indicates a place not sufficiently
known
beyond the speaker.

3. 4.
5.
Ka
Ko
),
there, indicates a
definite,
more
distant place.
I? ),
here, indicates a
definite place in the neighbourhood.
Yo(jj7), yonder,
indicates a place,
which
is
beyond a place already

</W<rr,
<
defined,
and serves to suggest the idea of other, Dutch
ionium
/rr
andere, dussere.
6.
So ()/), so, indicates a place already mentioned or imagined as men-
tioned, and serves to form the reflective pronoun.

7.
The
(
interrogative elements
-^
Ta
^?
or
To
]^
r//
),
vulgo
Da
^) or Do
}<
),
and Itsu
or Idzu
^f
^*), answering
quis? quid?"
to
in
who? which ? what? wheis
re?" and to the Latin qu in
j% and "^
the written form occur-
ring in old books, that now, in accordance with the pronunciation of the people,
80
CHAPTER
II.
PRONOUNS PROPER.
8.
is
more generally superseded by
and
).
The
first
form
may
perhaps be
attributed to the inaccurary of writers

a.
and engravers.
To
the immediate compounds with the root

(
Wa
,
(own, proper) belong:

the master of the work-
Wa-nusi
people.
-^
3E f
1
>
proper master
the master
Wa-dono
Wa-nami
Watakusi
^^ ^
jjjz
*),
my
the
or our master.
( ^jj-
^jjfr
t)
the proper row, we.

I," plural
(^ ^),
Watdkfai-ddmo, we, among people of
fashion, and in the familiar language the ordinary

It is
pronoun
for the first person.
commonly abbreviated
to
Watdksi or Watdks, and Watakusi vd to Watdksd,
whereas the porter at Yedo says Wdtski. Wdsi or Wdsi, and the servant-girl
Watdsi,
last
Watdi.
Whoever
does
not wish to put himself on a footing with the
mentioned should, thus, use Watakusi.
About the meaning of

panese etymologists keep
.that subject always
tdkusi , the second element of this

silence;
compound the Ja,
likewise,
our question directly proposed on
remained unanswered. Referred to our private judgement, we
now
recognize this word as the tdki
(^^, vulgo J|)i greedy,

whence the verb
desirous, in use
in the
popular language,
is
adv.
tdkn,
tdkusi to desire,
to be
greedy,
tamount to
b.
Thus Wa-tdkusi means self-love, egotism, and is tan3 ^ the ordinary Chinese compound self-love, egotism. $fa
derived.
',
The remaining adverbs of place enter

1)
,
into
immediate composition with

(
words as
Ko
3
(
J
j^p
),
j||
place, region, 2) Tsi

(
=f- ),
plural tsira
,
^-
),
way, tract
in the popular language also Tsutsi

places,
^-
province
etc.
These
compounds indicate a place or

1)
and are, as nouns, declinable.
Compounds with Ko
F
:7
(^ô
ffi
^
tsurugizo,
Doko
(^rf
j||
),
what place?
which place?
Dokono
at
whence
this
sword? to-
Dokoni or Dokode,
at
what place?
Dokovd or Doko yd,

is
it
wards which place? whither?

is
it
Doko ye ydkuka, where
going to? whither
going?
3
(llfc
Koko
JH^
3
itt^j^fô
lies
^% S!')'
this
Place
oitd,
'
tere
'
Koko
or
Kokode wakdru, herein

S6k6
the difference.
a
j^lf
}i
Kokoni
herein.
is
(^
^ ^
pron. sko, such a place, the place of which
1)
Wa-gun
siwori, under Tare.
CHAPTER
or
II.
PRONOUNS PROPER.
8.
II.
81
spoken,
cate
the
place
of
something, pointed out,
serving formerly to indi3
the person spoken to; plural sokora
(jt
y
ffi
^f
?
).
S6ko-m6to, for
dsok6-moto = the seat there, serves as pronoun for the person spoken to: Thou,
You.
S6ko-m6to naniwo kurdsu zo? in the spoken language: S6ko-m6to Ikdga kurdsi nasdru, how do you do? literally: how do you let (the time) go round, how
-
do you wind round?

where.
Asoko, pron. dsko - of some where the quarter, any

(
Kdsdkd, vulgo kdsiko

kdsikd,
j|
= the place of there, that or yon
place.
Doko
which quarter?
-
Koko
kdsiko ni, at this
and yon place, here and

to
there yonder.
Kono yamayoii
kasikono
yamave utmru,
remove from
this
mountain to yonder mountain.
Yoko, because
place, elsewhere.
it
means
Yosoye
cross"
is
superseded by Yoso
l>
J$
f), another
litsuru, to
i.
remove
to elsewhere.
Yotoye ugok'mu,
not to remove to elsewhere,
e.
to stay firm at (or in) one's place.
Idzuku
('ffif 1.
||*^)> old- Japanese Idzuko, which place?
Some
consider
uas
an abbreviation of kuni, country, and consequently write ft'*

country?
*, which
is it?
kuniwd idzukude gozdrimdsu, your country

your country?
which country
is
what
is
Idzuku no fitdzo, from what country
the
man?
Idzukuyd, whither?
ydri kitazo,
Idzukuye m6, whithersoever,
to every-where.
Idztku
whence has he come? -- Idzuku yori m6, whencesoever, from every

-
place whatever.
Idzuku ni
driizo,
where
is
he? Iy4ni aru, he

*).
is
at home.
Idzwkunikd, or Idzukunkd, where? whither?

idzukunkd yuku, whither
is
^
-f
ft?
^7
*),
Uri
the ox going?
originally
Idzukunzd,
-\
"J
"^
^X,
Idzuku nizo,
7*^=X,
it
old-Japanese
Idzukonizo, -\y*i
^X,
from the elements, of which
is
composed, has the

to our
meaning of
at
what place? where?", answers nevertheless

also,
>on what
to rtte
ground? why?"
Doittite*).
and with
this
meaning
is
ranked with
A an
and
The
force of
Idzukunzd appears most plainly in the Japanese transla-
tion of the Chinese expression following:
Kare idzukunz6 korewo sirdnt

fj?
*)
= he
there on
what ground (why)
*^
shall
he know this?
speaker's object here
is,
Zl
u/
tiu>
The
not to draw out an answer, but
1) See p.
68, line 8 from the bottom.

85.
8)
MINCIVS (LIOOE, Ctimtir Cbftic*, Vol. II,
p.
l).
3) See
p.
4;
VoL
I.
Book
I.
Pt. I. Ch.
VH.f 7).
g2
he will have
it
CHAPTER
II.
PRONOUNS PROPER.
8.
II.
the assertion, but even understood that he not only doubts
is
convinced of the contrary:

If the question proposed ted,
one does not
known
is
it,"
by Idzukunzd
affirmative, as in the instance quoif
in view, the speaker has the negative contrary
however
it
is
negative,
then the positive, as in the phrase:
O
pJ^
v >g *
.
Imdda firokardzu? Kau-mtyau idznkunzo

be spread everywhere?
Why
^f t ^
should his fame not
The
affirmative question
Jjjf
fr
Idsukunzo kais
nardn? -
why
shall
that be" possible? implies that the speaker
convinced, that
,
it is
form: Idznkunzo impossible; the negative

is
kanarazdranf =
viction, that it
why
shall that
not be possible?,
a consequence of the con-
must indeed be done.

characters,
.
The Chinese
which are used

# J=L
to represent
* Idznkunzo are
'
j|
_^
_,
/p
JOg*
-ii
Jjlf
Ijlf
^flE
^ ^ ne
J a P aneSe
word 'only the termination

the force indicated only,
dicate; at the
mo
is
These characters have mostly found added.

a place before the verb of the pre-
when they occupy
a direct end of a sentence, where some occur likewise, they imply
question.
2)
Compounds with Tsi
(^^
where? Do-tsi, which place?
- Dottira, which places? - Dotsiye, whither? (^ a

here. -
%&*}
way,
place.
- Dottira karamd mukdi-dvn, to meet to everywhere. Dotrirayemt, whithersoever, it may be (from all sides). each other from whatever places
A-tsi (%\>
J^),
Atsvra, elsewhere.
- -
Ko-tsi
3&^),
kotsi to, plural kotsi or Otsi kotsi, Atsi
Atsira kotsira, elsewhere and here, here and
there.
So-tsi (:
3f*),
it is
serves to indicate the old-Jap., his place, plural Sotsira,
person, of
those here.
3)
whom
spoken.
-- SoUira kotsira, those (the persons) there, and
Compounds with
Tsutsi.
Do-tsutsi, which place?

c.
- Do-tsutsive,
Ta
is
whither?
The adverbs of
place
(vulgo Da) and
Wa
with the genitive possessive

, ,
termination
#,
ga (pron. nga), which
written fj mostly, but improperly
ka.
Taga, vulgo Daga,

or Darega, whose.
(pron. Da-nga), arisen, perhaps
by syncope, from Tarega
- Ddga
^ka,
whose house
(is
this) ?
- Ddga awarM-koto
have compassion?
will there be? arau (or aroo), whose compassion
who
will
CHAPTER
_
II.
PRONOUNS PROPER.
or his
g.
II.
pron.
Wanga, own, mv
nw n,
wh lc h
courseô from Waka,
^îv
\.
W^
ô
according as the subject of dis-
-j-
-fers,
is
the speaker or another person,

,
v Aug. vounsr. j
_i.w.
W/inn Kimi iî^-f ruga,

(or
-for diatineti.,
~"^
own countrv ^
mv j
rr K'
udtive countrv
Waoa
tsoo).
own
r^f, also contracted
Wqiyt,
W,,a
wn
house.
_ Wtga 1m ao( m*
home
....
turn
home.-JTa,,
beloved,
little
own
my
wife.
- Wdgim6ko, old-Jap, for

(Sft &
*
^^ %,
J
ra , he return8
my
wife. -
TF<% a
JZ.
^ own /it
,
son. -
JPilfa
mt
SK
body, one's
own
person, ray person, --
*e
Wdgatdtsi, one's own station, we.

are not of ours.-
>I" in a woman's
Wdga t6mo o^.
_'
Wdga ttmo
Wtga
t6mo-gdra, one's
own
*n
authority, arbitrarily.
relations or clan, we.

de)
Wdga
m^ni- (or
- *+***
not arbitrary.
-
de nai they
wd
ndi,
it is
Wdga
for
rikntsuw6 tattnu, not to persist in one's perverse

behoof; I for
view.- Wd<# t*m<n<

sake.
own
my own
made
it
sake, or he for his
own
Ware
WuJ
6ga
W<u,a
dg* mtntni sKd,
I have
that
my own
property. - Kare
sorM
it.
mononi â, he has made

mavent, =
his
own
property, he has appropriated
before the I" of the
being beyond him.

rtbd,
- Kavilco *6n6 stJdwd sardzu, wit*, k*vd mo

its
subject of discourse, whether the speaker, or a
nya ma*ni
it
toa-
Mvu,
the silkworm does not leave
mat, sitting
still
eats,
whenerw
food comes
before
it.
Wdga
de ni, with one's
own
hand*.
for
In the old-Japanese, which used
for
Wa, we meet with Aya

Sir.
^ (WJ W
son.
also;
thence Agakimi
J)i
(|$ J.
ff:*), abbreviated Agimi and Agi,
our Buddha.
Ago
(^ ^>
my
beloved,
- Aya FoAy*b,to? r db *),
Wag*
abbreviated for
Adzuma,
wife
d.
abbreviated for Agatsuma,
my
husband
my
(fp j|^).
no, the adverbs of place become pronouns possessive; that
Pronouns possessive.
suffixing
By
have,
Ano, Kano, Kono, Yono, Sono, Dono, Idzuno.

fltd
And
(TS
any
C S),
after the
- -
Ytdo pronunciation: Ant kt6 and A*6*6t
man
of elsewhere,
she.
one, he.
Ano onna ()V 9
),
woman
of elsewhere,
Ano
f1,t6
tatsi,
Ano
fttd gata, the
men
there, those people, they.

is
Ano
kdta
(7S% 2),
contracted Andta
(7t*),
the side of elsewhere,
Used at a
polite indication of the second person,
thou (you); plural AndtA pfta.
An&*
hare done
dewd gozdri-mastnu; watdkwi

it
zi-sinni
<i'-ma*a, =
it
is
not yon;
myself,
04
CHAPTER
II.
PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE.
8. II.
Ada (7*),
Ware
I
Pron.
Anda,
is
to used with the signification of other, opposed

self.
the other world. Kôkisi (*; * *), the bank (or shore) yonder, Kano fttd, that man. kata, yon side. Kono tott, this time, this this world, this life. Konoyo (3 ; 3), Kono aida, between with relation to time, since. Kono kata, this side,
Mino, own and MidzuMra,
meanwhile.
articles.
-Konoyntni,
for this cause,
therefore.-
ft ]J
*"
to
Tono
(3 S ), without,
same as
on the outeide, other, with reference
son
,
that has been already
mentioned.- Yono
one
else; the
FMno /<!
rono
%,
of another physician than he,
(^ ^, *^ **-)* (M* A^ ^f A - 8M*

^6
?> or
whom
it
is
option.
%,
an additional physician.
S6n6
,4no
ohject
(:?),
his, its.
- fV6
/W
MM) ***
^ !**. ^
fM^sdnu,
-si
arrives at his place,
btt6 titoO sdsidsfontwt
= each one misses not his aim,

sono
one misses his aim.
- Kun *M Ur,Uni so-M oh***,

is
fttdwt
do,
xM,
to his station, what the nobleman acts according
beyond that, he
long for
-SMmi,
his body, himself.
- AyamcrtsM
sono mini motomu,
men must
(
"
B*
themselves. seek for the fault in or with of the act that ^ b time , such a period , the period j| || ?) , its
there.
tin, ju^been lenfened,
- Sono
fi
(ff
(3t $0),
abouts.
that point of time.

nAttf ooTio notsi
^
(-#s&' J. ^ ^ ^ ^ y
fljSono fen (iB^ y y thereafter. )

; T&. +>
5 '
^^ ^ ^.^2^' Sono _t
vyi(^^
also.
~ ^ ^ J "^
ô
ti
or after the
YMo
pronunciation:
*w|, moreover, besides,
M
for
behind that, thereafter, there
upon.-Soo
yi,
for that cause, so,
fore
-Sono
Sbno
to
(^^
ffi*
)i
else, otherwise.
- &mo
yon
toMni, thus
to,
contracted: Sonata, his (or its) side,
side, the familiar
Nad*i, your Honour,

.
you; vulgo
SMI
/*.,
SM
&
oto Sono moto
(
"
to
tM-^Kro'
undertake
ho (JtJ #3>. Pk it! = Nandn ka,M,.

you,
ye.'
ff*) = yon
6
domicile or seat, for
"),
at this place.
at t
ace where
someone
- JTom.no dwells.
moto, seat of gods.
nor
uk&e
KMri-M
moon-bow
Tsuini
VMsivo ka
mor^-ô^too *** m ino m otoni

(
ftp
the god of the
receives the divine charge
and descends. At length
CHAPTER
II.
PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE.
8.
H.
85
motsi-kita ,
comes to the seat of the goddess of the harvest.

have brought.
Sono moto
you
Kuni-gum
nite iro-iro
no
i-fau art; ono-ono sono ydr6Akin{ Ata-
gavu besi, in every country different ways of acting exist; people ought to keep
to the best (yordsiki) of each (ono-ono-sono).
his share.
Ono-ono-sono bun
teo
u, = each gets
Sono
or
ni
,
Ta no
T6 no
_fi:^ ijt ^ _S^) Da no or D6 no ( fa commonly

(
makdse
kaê
it
to his pleasure.
*o
*)
or
Donna
fa t )
the interrogative
which? what?
-
D6no
where?
at the
-
fttd,
which (what) man? who?
D6no
tokdroni,
at which
place?
D6no
kdta, or contracted D6nat&, which (what) side? where?

as the
--is
same time used

or to
who?",
polite interrogative
Donatdye yuk* zo,
whither,
kd,
whom,
*
are
you going?
D6natd ga anatani kortwo 6*iyr-mdAta

kotozo
who
has taught you this?

(
D6no yau
yau na,
fa
Htp>
(fa t ^^y), which matter? which way? how? Yort dono P f on. dono ydo,
Donna
how
is
the night?
is
In the popular language Dono yau or D6yau resolves into Doo, which
written
or
also
|~'.
Thence: Doukd (-^-*), pron. ddokd,

I.
Douz6(fa
2^^,
=
how?
D6u m6,
how
however. V. page 326.

is
(it)
122. 1.
Ano
koto ted doundttaJcd,
the matter
become? what has become of the matter?

is it
Ano flt6no
nd wd dou iukd, = his name how
called?
this,
what
is
his
name? -- Kortwa
will it
dou tsuknriti ydkardo kd, - what concerns

i.
by what making
be good,
e.
how
will people
have to make this?

do?
(
Dou-si, =
so to do.
-
how
to
Ka-yau-si
c
^
it
2^),
contracted Kqu-si, Koo-ti,
D6u-sit6
fa
fa ]%
Jj^j ),
= how doing?
is
Dou-At4 mak6to dt
ndi to iwareu
ô,-how
could people say, that
not true? --
War4
</ou-*W
sdmukqu
z6,
how
should I be against it?
Dou-sit& (an abbreviation (apocope) of Ddusltdr*), used adjectively.

kotozo,
e.
how done? how?

is
is
D6usttd koto gd dr&, what sort of matter

sort of matter?
there?
Dotuttti
- what
what matter?
Substantive pronouns.
suffixing re the adverbs of place
By
refer to
become substantive pronouns, which
something
(whether person or thing, remains undetermined) as being

is
present in a place.
The termination re
arisen
indeed an abbreviation of are, which,
by a mutation of sound, has
from or, to be. The pronouns thus formed
are declinable as every other noun, with the genitive termination no, are used
as attributive adjectives, and, in this form,
answer to our pronouns possessive
86
CHAPTER
II.
SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
8.
II.
(mine,
thine"),
they are,
however, used as substantives
also, in
which case
they, as every other
noun, are declinable.

are:
The substantive pronouns

1)
is in the midst, in the which the (wa), by person thinking or speaking supposes himself surrounded. The characters used for it are **5& ^ # ftl ^^Si ^T- o Ft o tt o 3, V& o ^ >H o v o 1 _^ The Mikado uses for I" D for which Tsm, formerly Maro JJ}
,
Ware, *7 I/
the
I," understood as that which
circle
We ^^
^& ^
(jjfc-
was used, which word however has
The Tai-kun generally
uses for
I"
%*)wasuru
Ware
fit6
(^ t
tj
A
I
bo
^ ^ S
Or
,
at present
become an appellative of youth.

(not to be confounded with
the I and another.

I forget myself.
Ware icarewd
(^ ^|||^,
^
ours.
forget the I,
,,),
- -
- Kono
kdsava
wareno nari ($
j*, t
this hat is
mine
).
Plural: Ware-ware, Wdre-ware-dznrt,
Wdrerd(^^^}^
Ware domo, we;
Warerdgd,
Ware properly belongs

conversational,
2)
to the
book-language, nevertheless
I."
it
is
used in the
when
the speaker exalts his
Then
is
it
answers to our WE.

he, she,
it,
Are,
\^ (ffi
j),
something that
some where,
it,
German
refers to
er; plural Are-are,
Arera, Being short in matter

is
just as
he or
it,"
something (person or thing) of which no case

his book.
made.
i.
Arega hon, that one's book, what is it? who there? Arewd
Areva
tare?
= something what?
(or
it).
e.
mi-tdi, I long to see
him
I.
In old- Japanese Are occurs, as a variation of Ware,
Aremd, = that
there, also
A-itsu and Ko-itsu - that there and

,
this here, or
A-itsume", Ko-itsume" are opprobrious terms.
Ore
refers
(S*
iSL^)' variation of Are, in the mouth of a plebeian of Yedo 6ra,
with derogation to another person, whereas from humility, the speaker,

it,
with
also designates himself.

iydsimete ivu kotoba
Oreva fitowo
nari;
kou-sei
midzukdramo
have applied
i.
it to
Ore
is
a word, with which one
mentions another disrespectfully; in
later times persons
themselves.
Fu^.koiono
basi.
3) 4)
Kare,
>(/
I/
^c
|g), something
is
that
is
there, he, she,
it, that.
Kore,
I?
I/, something that
here,
this, (îff*
^M
2x*A-
^s*).
1) Here an eUips
takes
place,
as
the
word
Eâ,
which
belongs
to
Wareno
also,
is
expressed
but once. Comp. pag. 66, line 4 from the bottom.
CHAPTER
II.
8.
II.
87
a
).
Kortwa amari
motowd
this,
tsiisai
(ft^*7
^5 /JN|^),
innrii,
this is too small
Kortuo
and
yotte
siru to iu, this is called
knowing the foundation.

to
Are
-
kore, that
those
and
these.
-- Kortkara
go from here.
so!
Kortni
?)' therefore.
Plural:
Kordde ym, so far well, good

-
Kore-kore, Korera.
3
The
isolated
Korerd
is
often superseded \>j

-
Kova
(itfc
^f"")'
and tne
attributive
Koreno continually, by Kono.

is
Kova
-
nari, this ao-flt6-kusdno fazimtno oya
the progenitor of the
human
race.
Kono nedanwa
is
ikura si-mdsiikd, the price (nedan) of this (article),
how much
it?
2 ).
5) Sore,
yV
'
(5fe
IU j)>
=
sometm n g
taat
so
8Ucn
^ ura
*or6*on,
-- Sore kore so or such.
I& ^
|Jf ^),
= such
ones.
is
Sfirtwd deln-mdrtka, can

*ort\c6
such happen?
ni sitd, I
Sorevd ndnidt, gozdrii, what
such?-- Ware
wAganumo
have made such (or that)

itdru
my
tsuitt
property.
S&reno tokin6 fan yrfn trftill it
gln6
toUm
(till
made, = from the half of such an hour
comes to the next

-
hour
the next hour).

it
- Soreni
jjjfc|
^^),
concerning that
niwd oytbi-mastnn, =
also so it is good,
comes not to such, such
is
unnecessary.
- Sored4m6 y<K,
(this
also that is good.

it.
-- Soredhca, kai-maloo, so
being so
or
then)
I will
buy
to Sort kard vyi, = from there upwards; in relation
time,
i.
earlier
than, before.
- Sore
y6ri
m ayt, = proceeding
from there forwards,

i.
e.
earlier than. ...
- SoreyM
(
simo,
).
= proceeding from there downwards,
e.
afterwards, there
upon
J#
i.
from there on
or so.
so.
this side,
e.
- Soreyori kono kata (ffi ft), = proceeding - Sort-soren6 m^rd, things which are since.
.
- Sore-sore^
sitagdlte,
= according to the
for Sore-wo,
e.
or so or such, in proportion as it is so
g.
The poet employs So wo

If Sort
Sowo
mireba, seing such.
attributive definition the beginning of a sentence as happens to be at then it reflects on that, which has pre(such) of a noun immediately following, Mention has been nude of the same subject already; e.g.: viously been said after some general remark* the historical commencement of Japan;
continues:
too so
&rtf Nippon-gokuva
Tsiu-kvano to^HF
as
/
towards the east
M,
what concerns SUCH country Japan,

it
is
it lies
so Central Blooming country (China),
,,ll,,l
th,
^
at
ti
Sore eastward of the sun. Evidently
is
here, not as a mere eipl

relative
,/u/
but
is
of the
same value,
as
the Latin
beginning
1)
2, 23, 24. Shopping-Dialogues, pp.
88
sentence such as:
I.
CHAPTER
II.
8.
II.
Quae
contumelia non fregit eum sed erexit. (C. Nep. Themistoclthis,
3).
In cases such as
we supply
the place of the reflective pronoun with
the demonstrative, and the Japanese Sard

try Japan.
Nippon goku
is
equal to: this coun-
Soregasi = such a man, formerly used only by princes as a modest indication

of their
own
persons towards higher

,
),
latterly
it
has come into vogue with

is
inferior persons for a
and
is
used by them to speak modestly of themselves. It

, ,
taken
amalgamation of Sorega nusi Mister such a one and
is
placed on a footing
with tbe Chinese

6)
7)
^
lx/
,
or
J^
= somebody, quidam
8
).
Yore
Tare,
is
not in use.
old language,
,
now usually Dare,
^ \/
(g||
^b), = who?
Lat. quis?
y zo,
is
is
which of many? By suffixing the emphatic particle formed Dardzo, abbreviated Dazo, who? -- Darega, whose? (cujus?), Dore, y^ \/
often superseded
by Daga.
Kavd
who
is
(= karevd) dare
(^*
pfl*')'
wno
ig
there?
still
Kavd-dar4-t6ki (= the
too faintly lighted, to be
there ?-hour), the hour at which objects are

,
recognized well
the morning twilight.
Kavd-dard-bosi
is
the morning-star.
Sore
wa
dare no
ko de gozarimdsuka ,
what boy
that? vulgo:
Arewa
dare no ko dakd
(dakd - de drukd).
it
Sumire darega tamdni nivdvu, = the violet for
whom
6ru,
does
smell?
it
Sdkdni darfya druzdj

well?
(or
who
is
there?
,
Dardga yoku
this
sirite is
who
knows
Kono ftt6wa dardde dri-mdsuka =
man who
is
he? = vulgo
Ano fitdwa
Arewa) dare da kd (properly: dardde drukd) , who
he.
Nandzi
-
va darede druzd,
who
are you?
Dare to ondzi
to talk?
koto,
with what identity?
Dar6t6 fandsi suru, with

dwell together?
whom
Daret6 tomoni druzd, with

who.
whom
to
Dareni yordzu,
(
indifferent
Korerano siyono nakade

^ *$ - 3
Dore-fodo
=.
3.
dorega nandzi ni ydkizd
yfc
^jjf
^^
y Fp
y)
which of these
^
books pleases you?
Dore mo, whatever, each.
('(of
^*)
much?
next town
Kokoyori tsugind matsi made dore-hodo arimdsu,
from here
to the
how many
1.
(miles)
is
it?
Remark
The Japanese does not
distinguish the interrogative sentence
1)
In the
Nippon woo dai

as
itsi
ran ("39th Mikado, 10th year,
Oth month), the Emperor's brother,
addressed by
him
Nandzi,
calls
himself Soregasi, whereas
now
every one speaks of Soregdsigdkditafumi,
the letter written by me.

2)
Wa-gun
siwori, under Soregati.
CHAPTER
II.
8.
II.
89
from the affirmative by an altered order of words; the sentence

must, therefore, as
it"
is
who
is
it?"
the subject of discourse, be expressed by

J
SWwa
dardde arimasukd, and not, as in the Ban-go zen
),
II,
39
r.
is
the case,
by Darega sorede arimasukd.
Remark
2.
The question, whether Dare,

= somebody,
is
just as the Latin gut*, with the
signification of drufitt,
used as an indefinite
*).
pronoun,
has been answered negatively by a literate Japanese
Idzure,-f
y*lX (fJ fb
fa), mostly
-f
I/ Itsure, who?, what?,

is
which?
used rather in poetry and in the epistolary style,
superseded in
the ordinary conversational language by dore, doko, dotsira or dou.
Idzurega masdru (^fcT
)|&*)i wno surpasses? which
is
the better?
it
Imdda idzurdkd
been
settled,
s )
kore (Fou-rai-san) ndru yd tsiimdbirdka nardzv,
has not yet

is.
which (of the mountains mentioned)

3 )
this (the Pung-lai-.c/i<m)
Idzurdno tokdronikd
lay hands
tewo kuddsan
to begin?
(fa
]|
~f\ -^-)
at
which place
will
one
on? where
-
= Dordkara fozlmeu zof

-
*).
-- Idztreno fu6,
year?
-
which
man?
kata,
Idzureno yo, which age?
Idziireno ton, which
Idzweno
which side? which province?
Idziirdmo, V. pag. 326. Idztrdtomo,

Idzureto (or Idztiretomo) niX*u, =
{pti
whoever, whichever, = Dordmo, dotsiramo.

without whatever,
i.
e.
without anything whatever, = Dorito

whichever,
all.
-
koto naku.
Idzuremo
idzuremo,
plural,
Idziirt nari
vessel.
fomo, whoeyer
it
may
be.
Idzurdno utsuva nitemo, in somewhere a

it is
which no doubt means:
to be
met with in every

pronouns.
* ^f ^ J jl| river," mo is left out.

In
III.
Determinative and reflective

I
Self, determinative pronoun in
myself, he himself,
reflective
pronoun
in
myself, himself, herself,

A.
2.
1.
is
expressed by
1.
Ondre = Individual
,
6n6dziikar& , apart, by oneself.
Mi, = body, person; Midziikara, personal; Waga-mi, = own body.

Ondre, ^r
are
I/ (l!; (vulgo
Q)
|f
is
|g), from
on6,
= single, and
ore,
(being), thus
something that
(=fit6
single, single being, indivisingle, alone); plur.
dual,
allied in sense to fltdri

(
ondredomo, ondrera, also ondra
tl
+ ori, being alone, ^) n W Japanese.

i
l\
$|ift
3-H.
3
suflBx.
11
Mr. TKJDA
rWIIOO.
3)
Ka, an interrogative
90
CHAPTER
II.
DETERMINATIVE AND REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS.
8. III.
As
the subject of a proposition Ondre answers to he,

,
German
er, einer,
and,
just as these words, indicates a person
without any compliment. Therefore, when
the speaker applies
it
to himself
it
betrays modesty,
whereas applied as a deit
monstrative pronoun to any one beyond the speaker
shows a want of respect
and, just as the variation Oddre (X K

of contempt.
L^),
is
understood as a epithet expressive

themselves, on6re, to the Emperor,
The Princes of the Empire

word equal
i.
call
and make
this
^ to the Chinese expression J|^
J^ ^
kiva-zin
Japa-
nese suknndki /fid,
e.
an insignificant
,
man
').
Ondre, used attributively (genitively)
or objectively, refers to the subject as

to;
being
itself
:
the
object of
its
action,
and answers
his
own, himself.
Examples
~fo^L
j^-X
*
O
JF jl
j
A.^
/ll>
}.-< \
.
O
F1 "^ / *-^
\
t
Ondre
i^
fMono oydwo
uydmavebd, FVtd mata ond-
^ i^RA A fay A T?
3*
oiidwi read t7 v
Onoregd mi wo
t.
tassento hossurebd,
Mddzn
ta-zin
_-^v
h
.
^ ^
|^
ft*
^
II
WO
If
an individual honors the parents of others
L_^
^M
^>
'
At? 5^
Any
Then
others honor the parents of the individual.
^
'I
&* s
tft
"*
-fta
"*
-T^^ 5^v /
~>f
$@ V
Will
others.
you
improve
yourself,
First
improve
rt
^^ M
may now
then the
one
substitute for the
word
individual," in the
first
saying
I myself,
thou thyself (you yourself), or he himself,"

other also honors mine."
and say:
If I
honor
another's parents,
In the second saying,
however, ondre, in consequence of the Imperative there used,

to the second person (thou, you).
may
be referred
Onoregd kok6ro-sdsiwo okonqu (^~f 2i

(
^.
^k )
one's
to
do his
own
-
will.
Onore wo okonau
sutete,
^f F^
),
to
behave oneself,
own
conduct.
Ondre w6
fit6no tamdni su
,
(^
2t
^ y\)'
set oneself aside

6iti,
and to act
for the
advantage of others
= Wdga
business
,
koto ivo bd sast-
fitono kotoniwd sewayaku, to give up one's
own
and serve the

sunavdtsi urdmi
interests of others.
ndsi,
On6rew6 taddsm
sitd,
fVtoni mdtdmdzdrebd
when one
rules
himself
(his
individual)
and seeks nothing of others,

self- victory.
then one experiences no hatred.
Onore ni katsu r
Onore-yori
(I B
),
= from
oneself.
CHAPTER
II.
8. in.
91
Remark. If we have derived ondre from on6 and attributed

fication of
to this tile signi-
one, the word on6-ono pleads
for this conception, for ono-ono,
as a repetition of ono, has the signification of
one and one,"
i.e.
each
one, answers to the Chinese
&
kd, and
is
equal to Fltt-toto,
= man and
man,
gly,
i.
e.
each man, everyone. As derivatives from this ono, which, sinin
is
no longer
i.
use, comes under notice: Onazlki
^J
^), not in-
dividual,
e.
identical.
On6re
is
frequently superseded by Ore
Q *)
),
which some Japanese phi-
lologers consider
an abbreviation of On6re.
2.
Mi
(Jfp
-),
body, person, understood

it is
as the concrete self, whereas the

all
idea of self,
is
when
taken in opposition to
that does not belong to self,
indicated
by Ware or Ondre
is
Mi wo
tatsuru
mono,
- one (mono) who makes
his
body stand,
one who makes the most of his person; Ware wo tdtsuru mono one who places his
I, his will, his interests
on the contrary,
and by which
navdzu mono,
his personal
is
on the foreground,
Sono miiro
itri-
is,
is
in general, understood a self-willed person.
one
who
does not throw himself away, does not lose sight of

I do not forget
dignity;
i
on the contrary Ware ware wo wasur&tti,
my
=
I,
do not lose sight of
my own
interest.
Kare ondrewo
icasurtni, he does
not forget himself (his individual in opposition to others). -- Onoretcd hointru,

to praise oneself as
an individual; mi wo homeru, to praise one's own person.
Examples:
Mi
1
ten-kano ken-meiw6 usinavdzit
^
(
Jf'
^ * _^ * ^ *
,
*
"fC
iHv
name
_^
')
ne himse tf
(y
hi8 personal conduct) does not lose his bril-
liant
in the
Empire
2
).
Kun-si sono miwd fmlztikaslme:*
the noble
man
brings no disgrace upon himself.
Mi wo
dmimiiru
yudnwo
to rule
sirtba, tunanitfi
/W
w6 osdmuru yudnwo
knows the way
siru,
if
one knows the way
oneself, then one

,
to rule others. --
Miw6 mmdni
makdsttt hlgd-gtirinu
yielding
himself
to the horse, he escapes.
Waga-miwo
uru,
to sell his
own body
(himself);
said of girls
who
prostirest,
tute themselves for hire.
Wdga-miwo
one's ydstimdru, to let

siiri
own body
to allow oneself rest.
Wdga
own
deni wdga-nuwo wdruu
mono, one who de-
forms himself with his
hand.
t,
Sw
p. 80.
J)
t***9-y*i.
Cap. XVIII,
92
CHAPTER
II.
8. III.
Women
use
Waga-mi and Mi,

at the
plural
Midomo,
for
l
I.
Midomoga
mditta toki,
when we have come

Mi-mi (^P
persons,
e. g.
thime of our coming

self,
).
"
^(*~}i
= Highness'
in old Japanese the self of illustrious

.
Kono futd fasirano kami mo
mi-mi wo kdkusi-tamaviki
also
both
these gods kept their sublime persons (themselves) concealed.
Midzukara,
mething that,
y^
~)]
37
compounded of mi (body), dzu (piece,

exists
i.
e.
so-
as a part
of a whole,
is
apart for
itself,
so
that mi-dzu,
to
means a separate something that

of itself,
body) and kara (from), answers

[fj
our
from
itself.
It
is
expressed by the Chinese characters
Remark. As the Japanese etymologists do not
satisfactorily explain this
word, as they leave the

for the
suffix,
dzu unnoticed, we must explain the derivation given here.

first
We
acknowledge now, and that

to be the
time, dzu,
to be distinguished
from the genitive termination tsu,

futd,
same
that, added to the radical
numbers
(fito,
^=
one, two;, forms of them proportional numerals,

,
(thus: fito-dzu,
futd-dzu,
single,
gives
double, simplus
to
duplus), and which, by means of repetition,

distributives:
used in
the form
of dzu-dzu,
these
numbers the character of

Whereas now
in
fito-dzu-dzu
futd-dzu-dzu ,
singuli, bini, one at a time, in couples.

is
mi kara
(=
from a body)
the idea of body
taken quite generally, and only opposed to something else, midzu-kara, refers to
to a
separate body,
separate
person (opposed to
all
other persons).
By means
Kokdro (3
>
of the
same derivative elements
(f'ft
>), from Te (7), hand, and
n),
heart, will, are formed the words Te-dzu-kara

i.
(^-
^
own
^ ^),
kara
free
= from a separate hand,
e.
with one's
i.
own hand, and Kok6ro-dzii

spontaneous (from one's
(A^^
/^*#>)i from a separate heart,
e.
movement).
According to
its
form Midznkara
is
originally an adverbial definition (- of it;
self)
and as such not susceptible of declension
e. g.
Midzukara toravdre fit6
t6
ndri, he
becomes a prisoner of himself, he surrenders himself a prisoner.
Tddzuhands.
kdra kuvdwo toru, to pluck feeding leaves of mulberry trees with one's
own
1)
The words given
in
RODRIGUEZ Siemens
Sui
Sibi
pp. 11
and 80 ought,
for the correction of typical errors,
to be reduced to the forms:
=. Mino,
=. Mini,
Waga-mino,
ni,
Ware-tomono
ni
Se
Miioo,
wo,
wo.
Midzukara
it
also occurs there with
the inflectional terminations no, ni and wo, although in original texts
is
always nndeclined.
CHAPTER
II.
8.
m.
93
However
self or
it
is
also used (in the quality of subject or of object), for I
my-
he himself, and for they themselves.

is
Midsukara
used as subject, whenever another object

e.
is
mentioned before
yetdri, he
the verb of the predicate;
g.:
Midzukara omovdkuva fakdri-kotowo

Afidzikara
has himself, as he thinks, attained what he intended.

racterized as the subject in the proverb:
is
also cha-
HH ^ *
[|j
O
a
~
"*-*
Ta-ninno urtiwd mitevd, sunavdtsi midztikara tomoni ur/r*

If
Mm,
one sees another's
grief,
then one must oneself be grieved
with him.
As
object (= himself),
it
is
on the contrary, Midzukara
is
used,
e.
s^*^
J\^f/
_L,
,
whenever
immediately followed by a transitive verb;

akirdkani
to
siirft
g.
"fltr.
Mina midzukara
sayings) ..
(
luiri
{?
TO
/^
{ft
'),
g,v
<
mean:
)
enlighten
oneself.
Midzukara
-
UA 7
_^> ^
5fiiJt
V'
m^
8)
3
to
to
deceive oneself,
cultivate
self-deception.
self-culture.
,
(Q
self.
Jl/.
f^)
),
oneself,
I/,
om,
to
stand on oneself (to rely on oneself).
M.
)
,
kokoromit
is
to take the proof of one-
yomin-suru mono
Jf
one who
fond of himself.
mu,
self-torture.
On6dzukara ($T
individual,
*P
~ft
ôQoS^S.B^^^.flS^)^ **
self, Lat. sponte.
from oneself, of
its
What
has been said of Jftfefr-
kara,
is,
with regard to
adverbial character,
applicable to
Onod&tnra
also.
Onodzukdrd kuru-kuru
to
mavdrti mono, things turning themselves, having their
own
revolution.
0. mauktrft fit6,
one who, of his own accord, immigrates.

'
which are self-evid.-nt 0. ndru kotowdriwo miyo! behold reasons,

B.
As Chinese
the determinative and reflective pronoun self expressions of
are in use:
1.
^v>
Sin
bod y'
self '
PP sed
to
At'
-'"
others.
2.
S ^ ^^'
as
</ri-'w, Zi-sin, often prououncetl as
own body
or person.
Zi-sinwo aisurn f1i6, one
who
loves his
own body,
.--*,'
i.
e.
who
i*
fond of oa.e. the
same
in
Sono miwo aMrtf ,/W.

person (myself).
it
- !Tafttt*
Anit
i.,'
.MWoM
*
(
my own
Go-dînm
own
ffi
gy
mrftta,
= You have done
in your Honor's
person.
1)
JW
I. 4.
t) Ibid. VI,
1.
)!!.
111. 4-
CHAPTER
II.
8. III.
3-
^
[=1
ffi?/i Zi-bun,
= own part,
his part.
Zi-bun
wo
mi-suUru mono,
one,
who
loses sight of himself,
his interest.
Zi-bun ni suwdtte 6ru, - midzu-
kara 6ru, to be substantive.
Zi-bunno sai-kuwo suru, to do one's own work.
Zi-bun no mono to naru, to become property.

4.
^
|||
$^ t>,
Zi-zen (by some pronounced as dzi-zen), also zi-nen , = being
of
self,
original, natural,
un worked.
Zi-zenni, or zi-zento,
= Lat.
is
sponte.
Sore f'ttono tsi-druvd zi-zen nari,
that this
human understanding
there,
is is
a a
something natural.
natural
fire.
Ydmano uy6m
zi-zen no fo dri,
on the mountain there
Yumdni ^
[=}
zi-zen ni mirn, to see
something in a dream, of oneself
(involuntarily).
f,
$1
X',
to exist of itself (spontaneous existence).
Besides these, there occur

(self),
many more
expressions
compounded with
|f|
^, zi
in
which
zi,
it
at
one time, has the meaning of
own," then
of
self." In
the former case
stands adjectively before a substantive, in the latter objectively
before a transitive verb.
EJ ^j zi, enters adjectively into compounds, as:

^,
own own
country.
house.
self.
own own own own own own own own
trade,
fabric,
*
,
^
^
5
own body, owu

person.
pencil,
drawing,
"
S5'
own
own
clan.
?'
person.
answer.
^ > own strength.

'
own
disposition.
Boiling.
interest.
^
v>^
'
own whim.
compounds
own
as:
Zi
is
objective to the verb in standard

self-love.
^' self-prostitution. * IP ^, self-injury.

r^
l_f*
self-praise.
self-existence.
5,
*
self-sale.
self-confidence.
5, self-murder.
.
self-bondage.
JX?
self-destruction.
self-nomination.
CHAPTER.
II.
PRONOUNS. EXPRESSIONS OF EECIPROCITY.
8. IV.
95
These compounds by suffixing the verb

to verbs, as Zi-fits-suru ,
oneself.
si, era,
suru
(to do),
can be changed
to write with one's
own hand;
Zi-san-tmru, to praise
IV.
Expressions of reciprocity.
reciprocity of
The
an action
is
expressed in Japanese not by pronouns, but
by the adverbial (modal)
definition
Tagavini
(*#;=,
pronounced fa-nyatm,
5*T=
verb
fies,
*o
(7
S)'
t),
it
Am
(J \L$$\L~), = reciprocal, or also by the vulgo Ai (71). The last means meet each other" and signiis
or Ai-tagaini
whenever
prefixed to another verb,
that the action takes place reci-
procally or mutually.
this
The meaning of Tagai,

kotsi,
is
generally explained by Kart tore.

fito, self and another.
to
and that; Atsi
here and there;

etymologists
')
Ware
Remark.
Japanese
ascribe
Tdydn
the
meaning of
-^^ IH *>
of the k to
Ta-kavi, - changing of hands, by which nevertheless the change
the troubled g (- ng)
is
not explained.
To be
able to give a
-\-
reason for this,
we
think
we must
consider Tagavi as a fusion of ta
mfi&fri,
= meeting of
shuttle
see in
place.
is
(or with) the hands, as this takes place in
weaving when the

other.
is
thrown with one hand and caught up with the
We,
thus,
g (ng) a fusion of the
with the
k',
phenomenon that frequently takes

in gdsi
In Figdsi (pron. fi-ngdsl), - East, likewise the troubled g
called into existence
by a fusion of mitkdsi
side (kata),
to ngdri.
/Y-wiHw,
originaDy
to
Fi-mulcdisi kdta,
means: the
whence the sun (/) has come
meet (mukdisi}.
Examples:
Tf=
Jt ??
-
-i*-'
Tt 'i" i!
"'./"-'//" /<: "">"
).
by turns
he becomes guest and host.

mini, see each other, meet.
T&gdvlni mkn //*/?, hate each other.
Kwan-nin
litt'-mi/biri.
FoMin
yoritio oturi-flti t6
Mandarins came out of (the town) to meet, and ext&gdmni ai-sdtsu tamdvikf, with the people sent from Pekking. changed welcome-greetings
Avi-nitaru mono
iitsn,
(
ffl
strike each other,
one another. \ $[ | ^/^), things resembling .lri-.v/n/, know one another. come to blows. -
An-
katdrti.,
converse (speak together).
Ari-ttitmini
Jg J
5f =).
reciprocal.
V.
Pronouns Indefinite.
if
In Japanese,
the subject of a proposition
is
indefinite, it
remains unex-
I)
Wa-gun
tiwori.
2)
MMCiua (tioot,
CMmf
tUui*, Bock
V.
Pt
II.
Ck. III. f
.)
96
CHAPTER
II.
PRONOUNS INDEFINITE.
8.
V.
pressed;
there, propositions without subjects are something very
common.
Our
idioms do not permit this, and having to represent the subject of a proposition
by a pronoun
or
it."
indifinite, in
such sentences
we make
use of our
one" (people)
Besides, for our
one," in a more
e.
definite sense are also
found Fito,
is
man,
there
and Aru-fit6, = some person,

anybody?
atte)
g.
Fitdga druyd
(J^^J^^^^},
-Fitoga Fft6ga nandziwo tovu, someone asks for you.

tdsi,
drtte (or
meni kakdri
there
is
somebody, who wishes to appear before you.

is
^Something"
however
is it is also
or
anything"
expressed by
Mono, which
(
thing," means,
applied to living beings.
Korewo kdku mono

this,
^ ^^
*
^f" ^)
a this- writing-individual,"
some one who writes

(
distinguished from
Kaki-mono,
a
something
- a written something, a writing - Fumi-bito a

writing,
writer,
is
~y
){$!)
an d from Mono-kaki, -
(Ji*)-
In Kaki-mono, mono, has
the signification of thing or something and

as,
defined by the verbal root

is
Kaki
something written; in Mono-kaki, mono

root.
is
the objective definition to the
same verbal
Nani, = what?
also
used as our
somewhat," with the
signification of
^something."
If
by
nothing"
is
intended something without contents or substance,

e.
it is
expressed by the noun-substantive Mai, = something of no value;
g.
Fito wo
naiga sironisu, to consider anyone as worth nothing.
Our
nobody," when no
particular accent falls
upon
it,
is
superseded by
the negative
somebody" with the negative form of the verb connected with
it,
(not") being thus taken from the noun or pronoun and incorporated in the
termination of the verb.
Fitdga ari-mdsu, there

(
is
somebody.
^),
Fltoga
dri,
masenu, in the written language Fito nasi
fiE
somebody is-there-not
= there
If,
is
nobody.
it is
however,
wished to bring out
nobody" and nothing" with emare used in con-
phasis, the expressions
which signify
whoever, whatever,"
nection with a negative verb.
Dare korewo sirdnu means: who does not know

= not know).
this,
this? (sirdnu, verb negative

it
Darem.6 korewo sirdnu,

it.
whoever (who
senu,
may
be)
knows not
Kare
nobody knows
stnu,
Kare naniwo
it
- what does he not?

be,
i.
nanimo
= he does not whatever
may
e.
he does nothing. -
Dokonimo
ardzu, wherever not to be, = to be
no where.
CHAPTER
II.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
8.
VI.
97
Consequently
the
instance,
cited
in the Elements of Japanese

will
Grammar,
Shaug-hai 1861, page. 23, Dare mo kokoni kimasinanda,

not come here," and not
liberty to assign to
mean:
whoever has
nobody here come (honorific) has not"
We
are not at
Dare mo the meaning of Nobody, and

is
to overlook, that in
Japanese the negation of a negation
equal to a confirmed assertion.
VI.
Relative pronouns
substitute for
refer.
are wanting, because the Japanese, having
no
relative clauses,
them
adjective clauses,
which precede the word,
to
which they
Instead of
the present
-
the
man, who
is
present,"
an expression
is
used, answering to
man"
(Arii fit6)\ instead of
the town, which
the
enemy has sacked,"
of the enemy-to have-sacked-town."
In such cases, moreover, the substantive Tok6ro

is
also used to intimate the
passive something.
TsUkuru koto
is
the fabricating, the fabrication;
TsUkuru mono, a fabricating being;

Tsttkuru ftt6, a fabricating
man, one who
fabricates;
Tsftkuru tokdro, the place of fabrication;
Fit6no tstikuru tokorono mono
is
something (mono) of a man's (/JMno) fabrii.
cating- (tsUkurtt-) place (toMrono),
e.
something that somebody
fabricates. -
tokdrono nen-g$u Initfye ydri motsiÛru
is
a year-name (uen-gau) of a place, where

i.
times has used, (not which) one from ancient

cient times.
e.
a year-name used from an-
Thus we, although the Japanese

that position also, in which
it
do so, give to philologers do not
ToMro,
in
its
seems to do the work of a pronoun relative,

pi ace."
that of proper signification, namely
In the Syntax
this construction will be treated again.
VII.
Interrogative pronouns.
of the pronouns, those, of In the previous pages, treating of the formation Da or Do, and Itro, rulgo which the interrogative elements Ta or To, vulgo been explained. To embrace them in one have
Idzu are the foundation,

are: glance, they
already
98
CHAPTER
II.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
8.
VII.
Da wo,
which?
p. 85.
Doko, where?
Dotsi,
p. 80.
Idzttku,
where?
p. 81.
Dare, who?
88.
82.
IdzUkunkd,
Idzukunzd*), on what ground?
Darega, whose?
Dotsira,
Dotsutsi,
Daga,
Dazo, who?
how?
85.
Done, which?
Idzure, who, which?
89.
Dare no ka, whose?

Darenozo*),
Donna,
D6nata, who?
Idz&rend, whose?
*)
Zo
is
an emphatic
suffix.
Donoyau,
Doyou, dou,
Dousite,
how?
Dore, which?
Besides these are still Nani,
87.
what? and
Ika, how?, which from the im1
portant part they play, deserve an acquaintance more than superficial
),
whereas
Iku,
them.
1.
how much?,
Nani,
('ffiif
as
being related to the numerals, will be treated of with
-J-
('ffif ),
abbreviated
Nan,
*j-
obsolete
is
Nam,
-f
A, plural
Nanra
^), what?
zo.
which?
Lat. quid? quod? It
used both substantively,
and adjectively, and very often strengthened by an interrogative suffix, ka or
by the emphatic
Substantively, with the
meaning of what?", Nani occurs in expressions
as:
Nani wo
yerabi mdstikd?,
what do you choose?

yd?,
Nani wo
t6vu kd?,
after
what
do you ask?
Nani wo nandziga motomuru

what do you buy?
3 2 ).
what do you seek?

motte?, wherewith?
Nani wo
kai nasdru kd?,
Naniwo
whereby? -
=
fipif
Jj[
shall I
_^J^ ^f^ _H ^ )' Naniwo motte waga kunitvo' ri-sen, wherewith advantage my empire? Nanigd dri-mdsitkd?, what is there at hand? ). "2
4
Korewa nanini
for
motsii-mastika?,
what
is
the use of this?
Soreva nanini yoikat,
what
is
such good?
1)
The
greatest stumbling-blocks in oral intercourse with the Japanese, are the interrogatives
is
(we under-
stand by the term every word, by which inquiry after anything
made), and the ways of using them.
Uncertainty in that respect brings about misunderstanding on both sides; one answers to what the other has
not asked; and the speakers, weary of the continual deviating answers, probably end by thinking each other
reserved,
tive
if
not by suspecting each other of a want of understanding.

.
With
a view to this, the interrogadiffusiveness required.

I.
pronouns
and the combinations formed with them are here treated of with the
2.
2) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 4;
3) MENCIUS (LEGGE
Chinese Classics, II.
Book
Pt.
I.
Ch.
I. $
4).
p. 2.
CHAPTER
II.
8.
VII.
99
= to what, whereto, as appositive definition ') va nanito ii-mastikaf, - your name what (how) is it called?, what
Nani
to,
Andtano
is
na
*).
your name?
-)
Nani to
ivu
(fa
~j^^), in the popular language contracted to
pronounced Na-ndeo, for which

called.
fa
^7*
is
written,
i.
= what to
e.
-
7* ^7 call? how?
,
Nanito ivu
koto,
= a what
calling matter?
what
sort of or
which
matter?
Nanito mousi-mdsukd?, what do you say?

(
Nanito ndku, without
anything
$S
/J>
).
Nanito zo (fa =
like doozo,
^
- -
f r
Nanito ivu zo, what says
it?, supersedes,
our
if
your please."
Nanito
te, also -J-
^ ^
Na-ndote, from Nanit6 *#4, = to what?, tending,

,
whereto? wherefore?
Nanito te kordwo itdsimdsitaka
to
what end have you
done this? Nande,
t ^7% fa
why?
Nani yori
(^fj
fat), Nani kara
(^g
fat), =
of what?, whereof?
-
Nanini y6tte (fa =

T*F
^5 J^l
JSSf)'
= on what ground?, whence?
3 Nanini y6tte waga fii )' Ed T v FJ #' - '"J ,v on what ground, (how) do you know that I am able for that?
=^
Nazeni, from nan-se-ni, =

drukaf,
for
what?
to do,
why?
Nazeni sorevo
entm
why
does not one such?

i.
Nazeni
4
agdri nasardn&ka*
).
= why does not
your
rise
happen?,
e.
why
do you refuse?
Nani-sini, Nani-sini kd, variation of Nazeni,

perly
I
why?
Nan
sore
.
o, pro-
Nan sure zo, how

^ ^~ ^ ^ ^
x
->
doing, on account of which,
why? fa J$
Irb
3f ~^
Wau
mosi korewo yositoseba, sunavatri namure zo okoitaoaif

fVifi
*ni
^
^.,*, 5^
Vincr fonsidftra this as crood.
whv
does not
^^
^^
'
^ e Can7 ^ ou^
Nanizo (f = X o
for
-
fa ),
abbreviated
Nanso (t d^X),
also as a
also
Na-nzo (tX), how? in what way,

characteristic
what reason? -- occurs
mere
of a direct question.
3i
fa^. V 0'; ^J'i')'
^V
-
the word advantage? riwo tan. - the king, why does he mention
"Sf?
S?
ife
) 8
Nanzo
)-
faiau beken,
how can one

*
abolish (such)?
to
*$-,
2f.\
fatTs^^
^'u y^ u nanzo eraban
wh y
cno 8e
*>e*W6e11
ox and
A\
1) See
*>
fW
ffi
MM
1O
page 70, V.
p.
(7A*n<f Ckutict, vol. I, 3) MENCIUS (LEGGE,
15.)
I.
Ch v
7)
Vol. II. Book 6) Jttxcius (utooE,
Pt.
I.
Ch.
I.
J3).
Ch. VII.
H-
8)Ibid. Ch. VII. f7.
100
CHAPTER
II.
8.
VII.
goat?
pleases
Nanzo
you?
kini iri-mdsu
"^
mono go. gozdri-mdsu,
is
there
anything that
TjnJL^.
JR ^^ -^^
obsolete
')
Nanzo
sono motoni kaverazdru,
why
not return to the foundation?
Nanzo ya, â'X-Y,

does
it
:fX*Y
ôf ife
'fcf
$P
= how
is
this,
how
happen?
as predicate closing the sentence,
and preceded by a subjective
clause.
+.
^jf,
Tami ohokikotowo kuvavezaruva nanzova*), that the people does

E3L
\
-
^
x
not increase
its
number, how
is
this?
/fcrr
1RJ
'
}
îx
'
*}*
Nazo-nazo. = how? how?,
riddles.
'
Nani naru
),
= what? being.
Nani naru mono,
or koto,
what thing, or what matter?

adjectively
Nani no, nanno,

what day? vulgo
V
itsu.
4 )
'
what? in the expressions: Nani no fi(^S[- J u), 3 Nani no koku ('ffif = $A?)i what hour? i^C =
^
/
^ 'fof
N
J\]j)
y*
^|
-ôre makotoni nanno kokorozoya,
what was
really
(my)
opinion concerning that?

JVam' and
Nan
occur adjectively in the expressions Nani-goto
JBf=
-^T)
what matter?, what?

lingly
('(of
Kimi konomU
it)?
tokoro nani-gotozo,
= that which you wil-
have,
what
(is
Nani-goto def, wherefore,
why?
Nani-bun
^),
what part?
Nani-yau or Nani-zama
(^"=
^^j
what man-
ner?
Nani-ven
(^ t
j^v)i wna* volume?

Nani-mono
Nani-fodo
(^"^ ^f)' wna^

Nani(
quantity? the quantity.

gokdro
(^=
^"/)' wna ^ being, what?
(^=
^\j>^)
which heart, which sense?

/
Nani gokdro naku

(
_3B?
^t _j\^^),
what one?
without any purpose.
Nani-yUd
JBf=
^Lî
what cause?
Nani-yu^ni sorezo?,
why
that?
Nani-kore, obsolete Nani-kure
(^ t
^^),
^t ^^
|^g|
^ ^y
^^
^J
do
1 ^
this.
X*
JVam' bltoni
kagirdzu kono koto wo ndsu koto ydzu, nobody
may
Nani-gasi ('$$= ^f^)'

of? master,
finite
after J aP- etymologists from
Naniga
nitsi,
= where-
what somebody, now in use only with the
signification of the inde-
pronoun
any-(some-)one"
gasi, p.
(^)
are:
and applied by the speaker
to himself.
Compare Sore
88.
Combinations with
Nan
f)
(-f
^)
Nan-nen ('fnfv
Nan-doki
/
^v)
Bjjp
wich year? ^),
Nan-guwats
(^f"
v^M
wni cn month?
( jnf
which (what)
1) MBNCIUS (ibid. Ch. VII.
$ 23.)
2) Ibid. (Ch. II.

4) Ch.
I).
3) Not Naniru,
VII. $ 7.
CHAPTER
time? what hour?
II.
8.
VII.
101
Nan-doki-goroni
pieces?
(fa
Nan-dan (ffit$ji*)i which

(how many)
pieces
$$ | ^|), against what time? '). Kono iroga nan-dan drtmdjtXka ? *), what
Nan-gin?*)
are
there
of that color?
(fat /f ?) now
many pounds?
Nani,
Nanzo occur
also
with the signification of the indefinite pronoun

tsuitd
any-(some)-thing." - Nandzivd sono kotoni

heard anything about that matter?
2.
nanzo
kikitt
6r*kd, have you
Ika, -f
1]
(#pfa
^f"/)'
irfa), how?
wna*
Current combinations with Ikd are:
Ika-mono
>
(5f
thing.
/
Ika-sama, vulgo Ika-yau, Ika-yoo

yauni, in what way, how.
fnf
H!
^T^jf) which way.

sort of thing.
Ika-
Ika-ygunimo, however.
ndrit
Ika-yau ni ndri tomo,

Jka-yqu naru
Ika-
however
it
may
be.
Ika-yau
mono, what
it
mono
yauna
nite
mo, what
sort of being or thing
may
be,
who
or whatever.
koto de
(
mo
/
sdru, do whatever thing
it
may
be, do every thing.
Ika-fodo
tstkdra,
fnf
^3E*)
power.
quantity.
-
Ika-fodoka,
how much?
Jk-a-fotlono
how much
Ika-fodo no aida,
- how much
is
interspace,
how
long?
Sore wo Vkd-fodoni uruya, for
how much
such sold?
Iku-fodo ook*
tomo, however
much? how much
soever?
Ika-bakari,
yet
(still)
how
yet
(still).
Sono koto wo ika-bakari kurinka, how
will people
be sorry for that.
Ika-naru,
how
being, of what sort.
Ika-narU kotozo, what sort of thing?
Sok6ni ika-naru fitdzo, what sort of

(is
man
is
there?
Ika-naru
-roco, what
your)
name?
are: Ikani,
-i
-f
The modal terminations of Ika

Ikanizo,
-f
=,
-\
Ikanika,
-f
*-
^ -X,
abbreviated Ikan,
^ f,
Ikanzo
* ^X,
t
or eren Ikade,
<juotn>l<>.
1 fty (pronounce Ika-nde, 1 # 7 # Ikaaekn, Ika-mleka how? Lat how? how is such? According to the rule of Soreva ikan? = such
,
the Japa*).
nese arrangement of words ikan, as predicate, follows

subject
or*ra as subject
The
may
also be a subjective clause,
e.
g ---- aruvd
ikani,
how
does
it
happen,
that there ... is?
Ikade (vulgo doude) iraterare mdttkd, how
goes it?
arazaran,
how
should there not be,
why not?
I)
17. Shopping-Dialogues, p.
*) Ibid
)
P-
"'
p.
3) Ibid. p. 11.
** ItwdrtioB.
44,
l,
A.
CHAPTER
II.
8.
VII.
Ikaga, -f
~J]
~ff
pronounce ikd-nga
$f|
-JBf
,
-j^
-ftif ),
ho w? probably
,
a fu-
sion of ikd Vka.
Ikdga On watdri sorooya = how

kurdsizo?
,
is
your passage?,
let (the
how do
you do?
Soko-moto ikaga
- -
= how do you
time) go round?
how do you do?

Ikdgand) koto,
Ikdga sen, how will one do (anything)? Ikdga no obdsimdsfzo

,
Ikdgandru (or
what matter?
what opinion? what do
you think?
Interrogative pronouns with the suffix mo.
Connected with the
suffix
all
mo,
that
^
is
(= also, Latin que, cunque), the interro-
gative pronouns embrace
comprehended in the interrogative as indiviwhoever, everyone that
duals together.
Dare mo, the same

qui.
is
as quicunque,
may
be
reckoned under Dare or

If the interrogative
it is
joined to a substantive,
-
mo
is
placed after
it,
and
if
declined, after the inflectional termination.
Idztireno ya
or
mo
karato tin
b6si,
every arrow
may
be called kara
(shaft).
Dokonimo
Dokoddmo, wher-
ever, everywhere.
Instead of mo,
temo
(7"
t)
is
often used;
e.
g.
Dare" temo sono ziwo hdme'tart,

Idzttreno tosinitemo,
site"
= whoever
it
may
it
be (everyone) has praised this poem.
in whatever year
is),
may
mo
be: temo having, by apheresis, arisen from
mo
(= also
whereas
to
te is
in expressions as
Nani
to
te
mo,
- whatever people (may
think or say),
the same as an ellipsis, being the verb that

')
means think or
not expressed
say, and that governs the apposition

itself,
characterized
te.
by
to (nanito), to
te
but only indicated by the termination
Nani
mo, thus stands
elliptically for
Nanito iyu
is
te
mo
),
= whatever
it
may be
called or be.
An
abbre-
viation
of which of it?
Nanitomo, Ndnt&mQ.
Ndnto omovuka, what do people

it,
think
Ndntomo omowdnu,
it.
people think nothing of
people do not
trouble themselves about
VIII.
Arrangement of the personal pronouns
in the conversational
language.
The
nouns,
rience,
choice of the words, which are used in the oral

is
intercourse
as pro-
not indifferent, but

after
,
it
is
prescribed
by
etiquette.
From our own
expe-
if
it
an intercourse of more than two years with Japanese we may

3 )
speak of
and from the information given by a learned Japanese gentleman
1)
Compare
p.
70, V.
2)
Wa-gun
siwori.
3) Mr. TSUDA SIN ITSIEOO.
CHAPTER
II.
ARRANGEMENT OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
8.
VIII.
103
the following expressions, used as pronouns, enter into the conversational lan-
guage.
1.
For.
I.
1)
The humblest expression
is
Te-m&e, plural Te-mae-tatsi, in the popular tongue

e,
of Ytdo which frequently changes a to

is
Temee. =
at hand,
i.
e.
that which
at
hand or present
to the person opposite.

,
2)
Watakusi, plural Watakusi-domo
a modest, and, in confidential intercourse,
most usual expression. Every respectable man speaks of himself thus; and the
man
3)
of the people at Yedo says for
it
Wasi
(icascfii).
Ore, plural Orera, in the Tiô-dialect Oira,
after the
mention on page 86
supported by a quotation from the Dictionary of the old-Japanese language,

a self-humiliating expression,
4)
is
now
considered as one of pride at Yido.
Ware,
plural
Warera, the
I" and
>We"
in the
mouth of a
prince,
when
he speaks to his people.

2.
For the person spoken

plural
to,
THOU, YOU, YE.

is
1)
Ware,
Warera, the most humiliating expression, which

Are?
fit
applied
only to low people. Probably confounded with

2)
Te-mae, the same
as given above for
I,"
is
for subordinate persons
and
servants, and answers to the well

3)
known German
,
>JSr" and
*."
, ,
Temae-sama,
plural
Temae-sama-gata
is
equal to You, Sir,
You gentlemen
used by a person of quality towards those

4)
somewhat below him.

O-mad-gata, in use among the
O-maS, in the T&fo-dialect Omee,

middle
class.
plural
5)
O-maS-sama, = Your Honor, more
periphrastical
and consequently more so-
lemn than 0-mde.

6)
Anata, plural Anata-gata, used, with preference, by

their equals
J
polite people
towards
).
7)
Anata-sama, plural Anata-sama-gata,

towards the person addressed.
3.
is
expressive of the greatest respect
For the person spoken

is
of,
HE.
1)
Are, plural Arera,
put down for disrespectful.
1)
The members
of the first Japanese embassy, which
came
to
Europe
in
18,
tad to which the author
was appointed as one of a committee by his Government, generally used
A*4U
mutually.
104
CHAPTER
II.
ARRANGEMENT OF THE PERSON AL PRONOUNS.

person there
8.
VIII.
2)
Ano mono = that

,
characterizes the person spoken of as a

respect.
mere
object (mono), deserving of no

3)
Ano
fit6
plural
Ano
fitd-gata , polite indication of one's equals.
One
officer
or functionary speaking of another intimates 4)
him by
A no
fit6.
Ano O
fit6,
plural
Ano O
is
fitd-gata,
somewhat more
stately, is used
when
the person spoken of

5)
related to the person spoken to.

,
Ano
kata, plural
Ano
kata-gata = the side there, and
Kono kata, =
the side
here, looking from the person, and only indicating the direction, in which
he
6)
is,
both belong as our Your Honor, to the very respectful expressions.

kata, plural
Ano O
Ano O
kata-gata,
is
"indicative of the highest respect.
The above arrangement of the pronouns
of the conversational language agreeing,
in general, with that adopted by R. ALCOCK in his Elements of Japanese
Grammar,
page 21, contains, however, a few deviations which, the reader

observe, rest
will please to
upon the authority of Mr. TSUDA
SIN ITSIROO.
HI.
THE ADJECTIVE.
9.
The
adjectives attributing to the idea, expressed
by a noun substantive,
one or another quality, have, in proportion as they represent an attribute or a

predicate,
different
forms which, though strongly prominent in the written or

less obsolescent in
book language, are, on the contrary, more or

sational.
the conver-
The forms of
the written
will
therefore
be treated before those of the
spoken language.
I.
THE ADJECTIVE IN THE WRITTEN LANGUAGE.
A. Construction of the adjective in its radical

If the quality expressed by the adjective
is
form with a noon. -
represented as present in the object

is,
from the very beginning, then the adjective

definition in its
as
a subordinate attributive
radical form, joined
to the substantive in a
also:
compound word;
Taka-no, = Highland, German ffocklanJ. Thus

Nagd-sdki, Long-cape.
Akd-t#ittsi,
Ktir6-tttU*ii black-earth.
red earth, ruddle.
Amn-sakt*
foi,
sweetbeer.
Sir6-g<ine,
white ore
ki.
(silver).
the old-year.
B.
1.
Adjectives in
a.
-- If the quality Ki, termination of the adjective used as attributive.

attributed
to
is
first
to be
the object expressly,
the adjective,
to
be used
attributive,
a derivative termination, which acquires a conjunctive, or properly
106
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
9.
for a particular class of adjectives, is ki;

is
Takakino, =
a high land, land that

:
high
distinguished from
saki, a
Takano =
,
highland. Thus also
Nagdki
Akdki
long cape.
Kurdki
tsfttsi,
black earth.
tstitsi,
red earth (ruddle).
Amdki
sakd,
sweet beer.
old traces, ruins.
Sir6ki gdne,
white ore.
FUruki dto,
The
adjectives belonging to this class generally express a quality, to
which
activity is not allied.

Remark. The termination Ki , whose vocal /
is
is
the root
from which the continuative verb ari

part of the
:= to
be,
derived, means
,,being so" that
is
to say, as the essential
word
implies.
The
relation of
the essential part to the verbal element can be no other, than that of an the mutual relation of Takaki and
said
adverb
to the verb
whereas
Yama
is
that of a
compound
word.
Compare what has been
on page 96
line 15 et sqq. concerning
Kaki-mono.
The vulgar language of Nagasaki

ki, thus sirdka for sirdki,
b.
substitute
ka
for the adjective termination
white
).
The
adjectives with the termination ki
may
be used substantively
takaki or
as
nouns
is
-concrete, and then as such are declinable.

the high of mountains
,
Yama
Yamano
takaki
,
i.
e.
eminently high
or the highest of mountains
yama
now
being a subordinate definition to takaki.
2.
Ku, adverbial
its
form.
- -
If
an adjective of
this
class
is
used as an
adverb, then
fly
radical
form assumes the termination ku. Takakft tobu, = to

all
high.
The adverb in ku under
circumstances remains an adverb, yet re-
presents in the coordinate sentence, whose predicate verb must be in the un con-
jugated radical form
),
the undefined radical form of the adjective verb termi-
nating in
si.
Isolated
by the
suffix
va
its
6) the adverb acquires a position separated
from
the verb, which brings out

often (frequently).
3.
a.
idea with
more emphasis.
Odsik&vb, = manifold,
Si,
form of the adjective as praedicate.
When
an adjective of
this
1)
if
The
question, formerly mooted in the ,,Proeve eener Japansche Spraakkunst" by D. CUETIUS, 1857, p. 34,
is
the termination ka
orally,
really peculiar to the dialect of
Nagasaki , has since been answered
affirmatively, as well
by Japanese
preter
,,is
as
in writing by the late E.
DE SAINT AULAIEE, who was
stationed, as
Dutch
inter-
for
the Japanese language, at Nagasaki. ,,The adjective termination in
," wrote the latter to

else
;
me,
really used generally in
Nagasaki and the lower
class of the people

it
understand nothing
those however
who have had
little
education,
know
very well, that
is
not right."
2) See Introduction, p. 45, Coordination.
CHAPTER
used as a predicate
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
9.
107 =
1
class is
is.
its radical
form acquires the termination

is
si
to be
).
Yama
takasi, = the mountain high to be, i.e. the mountain
high
The
relation in
which taka stands
to si, is, in the spirit of the Japanese language,

its
again no other than that of an adverb to

This
si
,
verb.
placed by Japanese grammarians

3
among
the auxiliary verbs (Ziyogo) *)
and designated G-en-zaino

verbal change.
b.
si,
or the
si
of the present tense, undergoes no
If
now
a verbal change to indicate term
and mood
is
is
required, then instead
of
si,
the continuative verb ari,
am
4
)
(= exist),
used, which added to the
adverbial form ku, fuses with this into kari; from Takaku ari, continually high
to
be,
comes Takakari, a derivative verb, which

5
is
now
to be conjugated in
is
accordance after the general plan of conjugation

used, as expressing the praeteritum praesens, see
4.
).
Instead of art, eri

80.
also
By
the change of
si
into sa thase adjective verbs are
made nouns
abstract;
Takasa, = the height.

Remark. Sa
the
is
contraction of the
predicate,
and the
isolating
m. Ta*<ua,
noun
therefore include*
,,the height.**
Takdsi predicate
,,is
high ," whereas va

it
raises this idea to a
ubUntire
"
The Chinese
follows the
same way, when
idea of ..height" by expresses the abstract
5.
LIST OF
THE PRINCIPAL ADJECTIVE ROOTS IN
KI.
1.
Taka-ki,
lgf|, high.
'fl!
2.
Fiki-ki,
Fik*-ki.fa$ $, low.
S.
Fnkarki,
5, deep.
4.
A*a-ki.
jg
;
short.
5.
Naga-ki,
Fir6-ki,
||J>, long.
6.
MMsika-ki,
Sel>a-(Sema-)ki ,
$@f,
^T<.
7.
J{
wide, broad.
coarse.
8.
fifc,
narrow.
9.
FM6-ki,
[Ooi-naru,
^fci, thick,
10. Fo*o-ki,
11.
^^.
fine.
^|
is
large.]
TuuaM,
/J^ 8maU
'
1)
In
E.
BROWN'S
Colloquial Japane,e
p.
XXXIX,
line
36
et .qq.,
*.'
cited a. the tenottiti.
the adjective predicate, and

)
no doubt a printing wholly overlooked,
fault
that
we may
ot
lero
*yj 3
pq
-ff
8)
4)
$S,v^Y
10.
IB
**
V ~> xC
1 1It
ra-r*
wr
under
Si.
Compare lODftioun. page 66.

7,
It
Not tar*, nor yar,
as it is printed in
Atco
Am.,
p.
5) See
6)
The
adjectives placed
between bracket,
do not belong to
tti.
côry,
a,
the autithesis.
108
12. Fira-ki,
14. Naka-daka-ki,
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
13. Kevasi-ki,
15
.
9.
If,
level, even.
')
steep.
*.
j\
# gibbous, con,
Kubo-ki
|, hollow, concave.
'
vex.
16. Firata-ki,
flat.
17.
Mdro-ki\Maround.
18. Atsu-ki,
thick.
19. Usu-ki,
20. Nao-ki,
21. To6-ki,
right.
far, distant.
[Magaru
*",
crooked.]
near.
22. Tsikd-ki, 24. Suku-nd-ki,
23. Amane-ki,
'So
JH Hi
o
eve ~
seldom.
ry where.
25. 06-ki.
>
much, many.
1^1
o
26. Stik6si-ki,
g
t
ts
*/,
little
few.
%*<>
dense.
28. Mtind-si-ki,
without
con-
tents, void, 29. Matta-ki,

'-?
*
*3
entire, whole.
30. Ndki, 32. Moro-ki,
t without
,
less.
31. Kovd-ki, 33. Tsuyo-ki,
hard.
io Ife^
brittle.
y o ^^, weak,
35.
^5o^ ^cjft'
harsh, rude, waste.
[Yawaragandru,
gf,
soft,
weak.]
36. Om6-ki, 38. Kdta-ki,
|[^, heavy.
fc%,
h
fy
o
31.Kar6-ki,
39. Ydsu-ki,
,
^^ a
>^ ^
light.
facile ,
difficult.
easy.
40.
To-H,
pointed
41 Nibu-ki
.
^7'
blunt.
/
sharp; quick.
42. Hayd-ki,
early; quick.
jljl^, late; slow.
44.
Wa&a-K,
^,
,
young.
[Oitaru,
45. Furu-ki,
4^-tt>C^
nlrl 1
f^,^
O1U.J
new.]
^p^
^
Jjgi
^,
bad
,
ancient,
antique.
46. To- (old. Ye-)
||
|| good,
,
well.
47. Wdrti-ki,
base.
48. Sdmti-(SdM-)
|gj,
cold.
>
f$l ^ f
warm.]
1)
Kevasiki,
and the
adjectives
cited
under Nos. 28, 30,
66 and 73 have
tiki
(N.
71)
for their
derivative form.
CHAPTER
49. Suzu-ki,
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
50. Nuruki,
9.
109
cool.
)|, lukewarm;
lazy.
51. jfiTo-K, Keki,
iH
3
,,^,
strong
(of
52.
v
,
faint (of taste
taste or color).
jfct,
or color).
red5. JJQCi
53. u4o-H,
^|
^, pale blue, pale

.
54. Aka-ki,
green.
,
55. Sird-ki,
j
,
white.
light, clear.]
56. K&rv-ki,
57. Ktird-ki, 59. 61. Niku-ki,
2, black.
$, dark, dusky.
>x, acid.
[Akirdkd-naru
58.
l$J
Jt^
Amd-ki,
sweet.
60.
Umd- (Muma-) H,
ôfPI' sweet,
nice, beautiful.
)fp;*, itching.
62. Kayu-ki,
63. Niga-lci,
^, bitter.
,
64. Sibu-ki,
66. Kaubasi-ki,
fiifcK
S<f ft
raw
e ;
acerb,
65. 67.
tart
stinking.
^^
*/,
fragrant.
Kauvasi-ki
68. Sivd-ki,
ifeJZvrfii covetous,
6e".
Td-ki,
$C
*.
|^
'
desirous,
willing.
scant
7Q.G6t6-ki,
71.
-jffj^
jf,
i
like.
[/fotonrfrM,
J|.j:
difierent]
5-&i,
$H H
as
Sfe being such
72. Sikd-ki,
j^ ^,
being so, or such.
(substantive suffix
. . .
=
73. Be-ki ,
ish
... like).
allowable. "pf ^,
THE SAME ROOTS ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY.

.4fca
. .
54.
110
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
as the
9.
Remark. The termination ki,

this class of adjectives,
distinguishing
characteristic of
ought to be placed on the foreground, deviating from
the method in the Japanese dictionaries, which give these adjectives as adjective verbs with the termination si and, so doing, do not distinguish
them
from those, which terminate in siki (=

expression
ish).
So, to give an instance, their

(=
is
j\f
*''
$* **/
is
defective,
since fisdsi
of long duration) as a
syncope of
but
fisdsisi,
is
in all respects the form of the
adjective verb, has
fisdsiki,
is
not fisdki, for adjective form, whereas the adjective form not nagasiki, but nagaki.
cited.
if
of nagasi
6.
[Ki.] Sibu-kakino tanewo uete,
amaki kakiva fayezdru,

that are sweet,
-
people sow seed of
the sour fig, then do not

kitstindwo sasdgti,
grow
figs,
Tanba-kuniyori kur6ki
from the country of Tanba people

,
offer a fox
which
is
black.
Tsikdra-ndki yumi
a powerless bow.
Tsikdra-ndki koto , powerlessness.
Ne-
ztimino sirokiwd siro-nezUmito /#, the white of mice (= mice that are white) are
called
white mice.
FUrukiwd
stitete
dtdrdsikini tsukti,
forsaking the old, to
apply oneself to the new. If objects are previously mentioned, from which a choice
is
made, then the expression
is
good: Fitrukinowd
*).
stitdte
atardsikinowd toru, to
reject the old (objects)
V
M/
HB Z
and take the new ones
ll]5
-E^-fr
Ydma
because
takdkiga yUdni tattokardzu, a mountain

it is
is
not considerable,
$J
j
it
high;
Kidr&wo
mdtte tattosito su, because he carries
if
wood, people consider him
to be respectable.
"*
"*
,>
Mftsasabiva takdkiyori fikikini dmdmuku. Fikikiyori takakini nob6ru-koto atavdzu

2 ).
2
y?
The bat turns
itself
with
^J ^ A
^%
5
9
its
head from above towards below.

it
To climb from below
y
;
towards above
may
not.
[Ku.] Konofa akdkti
ttrite firtigaverti
the tree-leaf shining red
flies
around. -
Iy6wo
takdktt
tsftkuru. to build a
house high.
Kdriva takdku tonde tookuyori

afar.
kttdri, the wild goose flying high,
comes from
1)
With regard
to this construction
compare, page 86,
line
10, in connection with note
1.
kin-moo dzu-i. XII. 11. recto. 2) JLasira-gaki
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
9.
% -to? 9
~
pr|
'
-__
Kuma-takavd takano ooi-naru mono
wart.
Tsubdsa
is
HI* y^">
/%
ku-tsiu takdku
tobi-mfyiiru '), the eagle
the big-
y
nx
;*
gest
among
>5t ^
"f
the birds of prey;
strong in the wings.

air.
JH*
t
he soars round high in the space of the
Tsubdsa tsuydku stands to the next sentence in the

relation of coordination, in consequence of
which
its
grammatical relation
is left
undefined and the adverbial form tsUydku

(See above, page 106
ffifc^T
4JcpE.
^*
is
used instead of the predicate t**y6d.
b.
2.).
The same
is
the case with ydssUku in the proverb:

iri-qdtatt.
vy!/
3.*%
Aku-dauni
iri-ydstiku,
(is)
sen-dauniwd
to turn into the

is
way
_./
of evil
easy, to tread the
way
this
of virtue
is,
difficult
=^
''
Korewd
soreydri ydsuku
is
art-mart,
a
).
from that out,
If 5-
^5
Z&Z*
cheaper, = this
of dri nk,
to
cheaper than that

-
Nomi-tdku, dri, desirous
Z&
J?
be thirsty.
Oide haydkft ari-md**, or merely

rise is
=0
haydkft ari-mdsit,
= your
-
speedy, a greeting at setting
out on a journey, and on the way.

arrival
Y6ku
-
ide
natdrc-mdata,
wart,
well,
your
has happened,
,
i.
e.
be welcome.
-
Wdrukti,
to
become bad.
*)
,
Wdrukii ndtta
(too dear).
has become bad.
Yo fodo
takdru nori-mdsfi
it
is
too high
Remark. Do the adverbs

B.
in
ku in the three
p.
last expressions,
which we hare taken npratlj

or are they predi-
BROWN'S valuable
Colloquial Japanese ,
is
XL
retain their adverbial character ,
cate adjectives?
this question
answered in the place quoted in that SCUM,

it
,jUuU
wktmtr
titit
farm
(the adverb in ku) precedes a substantive verb,

tion with
adjective,
it
an
adjective or a prfdieate adjeftie*,"
eoetp,
which we cannot
agree.
As the Japanese has no properly

cannot agree with the subject;
,
called nominative termination
an
to stand as predicate,
these adjective* are governed aa aco,
ordinate definitions , by verbs which
as regards their signification
answer to oar
,,be**
and ..beeoaM,"
in tie eaae
but their complement, when

ni or de
,
it
is
a noun, to the question where?
how? or whereto P
of
and,
if it
is
an adjective,
have ku before them, in the equivalent adverbial form.

the weather
is
7V*-Ji
yoku dri (yokari) or Ti-n-ki yoku nari;

language nearer
perfection
in all
good,
or the weather becomes jrood
in
respects expressed by Tempetttu to** tit, or lom*jU, bat the Jais
far as panese expression is, as
form
concerned, equal to TtmpttUt Itne tit, or lf*f
#1.
[Si.]
Kono misdkiwd hanahada

is
nagdsi, this cape

-
is
very long. takan,
Neno
the
adti
flight
>,
amdsi, the taste of the root

of the geese
is
sweet.
toori,
is
Kariga
tobu-k-vlo
is
<
high.
Yama
the mountain
Kono */
sivo faydsi, in this strait the
stream
swift
Siyuni mazicfo* monovd akui
1)
XIII. Kasira-gaki kin-moo dzv-i.
6.
recto.
8)
SAoppimy.DMywt ,
p. 95.
3) Ibid. p. 37.
112
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
9.
<!
whoever goes abouth with red

dstsi.
is red.
Fino
atdriitoko'ro, taki-
fino kin-ziyove 6ku koto
Subtle dsiki nivoviwo imu btsi, in a place where the

fire
sun comes
is
(and) in the neighborhood of
(the eggs of the silkworm) to lay
not good. In general people ought to avoid the nasty smell.

this
Kono sima
fiio
nasi,
island is
without inhabitants.
Yosito timo'vn,
to think that it is
is
good.
difference
Neno
adzi asisi yotte, because the taste of the root
nasty.
As
to the
existing between
Yoxino, = a beautiful
field,
field
and Yosino, - a place
which
is
renownd
as
the Beautiful
see
Addenda
N.
IV.
is
[Sa.]
Kono misaki nagdsa
san ri bakari nari, the length of this cape
only
three ri (miles).
II.
THE ADJECTIVE ACCORDING TO THE SPOKEN LANGUAGE.

s
The spoken language suppressing the k and the

retains
of ki, si and ku, thus
only the
and the u, which now immediately follow a vowel. Thereby
they acquire.
for aki
eki
iki
and
asi the
esi
isi
form ai and for aku the form au, pronounced as au, ao, 60.
ei
ii
eku
iku
eu,
iu.
eo.
oki
osi
oi
oku
ou,
uu.
60.
uki
usi
ui
style,
uku
The easy written
which follows the spoken language, has for au, eu

;
and ou , no fixed written form

(high)
(long)
it
supersedes the form of writing to be used by choice.
also
by
2% 7,
^^,
23
*?
and
t#7, T**
K^
t*l
K)
(desirous)
(without)
(close)
(far)
K?
Examples of the use of the forms.

[i
for ki].
Nagai matsu yori otsuru yuki, snow

Karoi kemuri noboru,
light
falling out of the long (high)
pine-trees.
smoke ascends.
Fdna simono samuiwo
osoru, the flower fears the cold of the rime.

[i
for si].
Kurdno
figa akai, the evening-sun

is
is red.
Kariga tobu-koto
1
takai,
the flight of the geese
high.
Korewa amari
tsiisai
),
this is too small.
1)
Shopping-Dialogues , p. 2.
CHAPTER HI. THE ADJECTIVE.

- -
9, 10.
113
there
nagai*),
is
long.
4
takai*),
is
high.
Fitoga nai
.
.
),
5
is
no one.
Korewa
dziyaiga usui
is
),
this is thin of texture.

color.
atsui
), is
thick.
Kortwa
iroga koi*), this
dark of
is it
..iroga wui
),
9
this
),
is
light of color.
late
..iroga warui*), this
bad of color -- Osoi kara

is
as
it is
Ydsui
nara
tori-masoo
I0
as
cheap
I shall take
it.
[u for ku]. Ari-gdtau or Ari-gdtoo,

ari-mdsu,
it is
difficult to
be, abbreviated for Ari-gdtaku
difficult to
be, = I
am
obliged to you.
Y6o
moofft, for Ydlrii
mausw, to speak
well.
Kaslkoo sum, for Kasikdkfi suru, to do wisely.

difficulty.
Fukoo
wadzurdo, for Fukdku wddzurdvu, to be deeply involved in
In Japanese vocabularies the expressions of the conversational are mostly

distinguished from those of the book language by an antecedent
or
that
is:
the word Kanari of the book language

of the
is
equivalent to Soredomoyoi of the conversational.

j,
('should not...)
is
book language
is
is
the same as Soosita koto tea nat
Mich tort of thing then
not) or as TLauteio* nai (=.so
there not; of the conversational-
DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES.
10.
Adjectives
in karii and gartL
By
a fusion of the adverbial form
ku with
aril (being),
the form karfl
is
obtained (so being as the previous adverb indicates). Nomi-tdku-ar* , passes into
Nomi-takdru (J
L?%
the
v), = desirous of drink or being thirsty.
Derivatives of this stamp take the same inflections as art,

attributive,
drt
dr* being the

ki
predicate
form;
and as the adjectives in

is
themselves,
which the idea of activity express a quality, to
not allied, the derivative form
k+ari
the continual presence of the not-active quality. expresses merely
Waka-ki, young.
while or as long as one
Waka-ki tokoni, in youthful time.

is
Wakakdr*
fafa'm',
young.
Wakakdriti
toki ydri, since
the time
when
one was young.

without. Naki, not at hand, being
Sir61d, white.
Nakari, continually not to be at hand.
Sirokdru, continually white.
Ydsuki, easy.
YdsZkdri, continually to be easy.
I)
Shopping-Dialogue*, page
8.
2)
lg
>2-
)
8)
6)
page 23.
1) ptg* IS.
PV p^
31 1.
4)
PV
PH*
<
'
8)
<>)
^
PV f4
'
9)
114
Remark. This
GUEZ,
lem+
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
10, 11, 12.

55 and 57 of RODRI-
illustration of the derivative
form lean explains the obscure

12,
is
$J
The
gam
there mentioned on page 55, lines 8 to
a fusion of the genitive-termi-
nation, ga and
aru peculiar to the conversational language exclusively. Joined to the Chinese word
it,
it
Yek-ki 1 ), gladness, with
forms Yekkigdru, being
full of gladness,
synonymous with Yekkindru
Yekkina, being
glad. See
12.
11.
Adjectives in
aru.
,
Ari, aril (^(=fT o r,)i ver^ continuative

antithetical
to be at hand, to be there, to exist,
and at
Ndki (^F|p, not at hand, ....less. Ari is the radical (to be) the same time but by exception the predicate form (= there is) dru the
to
, , ; ,
substantive form (the being)

to derive adjectives
there.
which
is
at the
same time used
attributively (being)
from substantives.
iro
an",
Iro ari, = there
is
color or colors are

is
Kumova
has
= what concerns the cloud, there

there
is
color,
i.
e.
the
cloud
color. If the definition:
color"
is to
become
attributive, then
an
acquires the attributive form dru', the subject iro
now becomes an
attributive
proposition of dru, and assumes the attributive form, thus the genitive termination no, in the spoken language, ga. Iro no or iroga aru
colors present being clouds,
i.
kumo means,
literally:
e.
colored clouds or clouds which have colors.

is
The
cularly
its
genitive termination
no
often omitted in similar expressions, parti-
when
the attributive definition joined to
aru
is
verb,
which
is
in
radical form; e.g. Asiki riivdi druki,
wood (M) of
a bad smell.
Nivoi, to
smell, smell.
Examples. Tsumi an, there

criminal.
is
guilt.
Tsumi
dru,
mono, a guilty person,
Futd-kok6rono
dru fito,
man who
word
has two hearts, a double-
hearted man.
Om6i
futdtsu dru kotoba, a
(kotoba), that a couple (futdtsn)
of meanings (om6i) has, an equivocal word.
Kok6ro-sdsi dru mono, one
who
flo-
has a will, a firm character.
Aya-dru ori-mono, flowers having texture,

,
wered
silk-stuif.
business, busy.
Koto-dru having 3 7 Fima-dru or sukimaga dru, having free time. ^% ^)

Sai-vai-dru
happy.
Yamavi-dru
sickly.
E
,
Kou-dru
12.
fito, a
man who
has merit.
taru.
^f T, ^tn^'
feki-aru, profitable.
Adjectives in naru, na and
By means
of the substantive suffix naru, which
is,
in
my
opinion, a fusion
. . .
of the Local ni and of dri, dru, and thus
means
being lasting in
,"
from
n, THE ADJECTIVE.
substantives
12.
115
and adverbs
adjectives are formed,
which indicate a possession of
that which the root expresses.
The
familiar conversational,
and the epistolary
style abbreviates
').
naru to na
uri,
-- Ki, vulgo da. yellow. Ki-uri, the yellow pumkin

a
Ki-ndr* or Ki-na
pumkin
that
is
yellow.
Fimdna
tokoro, a place of rest.
Kirei-na
nizi a beautiful rainbow.
With
adverbs.
the inflectional termination ni the radical forms of this class are used as
Odini, greatly.
Tsundni, commonly.
for their derivative
Suguni, directly, straightly.
As words, which have naru

1)
form are to be noticed:
0rf),
TsttnJ,
^|
|,
great.
U4,
Sttd,
_h*,
"f^,
JJJTX,
~^\
above.
UJ?,
^fjt,
yUfy,
common.
rare, seldom.
right.
below.
before.
Mare,
Sugu,
Mat,
lya,
^,
unwelcome.

Ftt6 sono nave no 6oi ndruwo sirn koto worf j ),=
that a
it is
not the fact (koto
man knows
}
that his rice-crop

~Y i//%
'^
is
so large (ample).
--
âp>
seo
P^
'"
S\\$ 7
^S Â
*9"
In-kova dai
little
ari; '6dt
mrrdra
fatono 6otsd
dri,
of parrots people have big and
ones; those which are big

h'ari-ko
<So-
have the bigness of a dove.

no katdvara naru taka-tokdro
,
Sono kou 6ot wan,
his merit in great.
a high place at the side of the silkworms.

,
kini nevurisi kavikova nve (or u^)
naru kavawo nugi-idzuru = the silkworms that

being (which
is)
have previously
2)
slept,
throw
off the skin
upon them.
adjective*.
By means
of naru, or na, Chinese words are
made Japanese
Zin-ndru, humane.
Tsiu-ndrit, sincere.
Fu-tsiu-ndru, insincere.
Yuu-ndrii, brave.
1)
Cucurlita Pepo verrueoia

Ooi, great,
LWN.
2)
after the old writing
**,
and
w>d the form* ooK, *o*i,

;
in
the
eoivwwtioMl
ooi, derived from oo,
much,
are frequently interchanged

ooi-ntu-i
the
tamo writer frequently
OM
by tnnu <NNM
^^Y<h)
3)
and oosa
(f^
2.
for ,,8;reat,"
and ooti m*ri for
>
rit.**
Dai Got*, VIII,
116
CHAPTER
in. THE ADJECTIVE.
12, 13.
ft v
r
W?
fc^ ^
t flx
-
'
Sin-zits-ndrii , solid
real , sincere.
Tei-nei-ndru , courteous.
,,
Ki-rei-ndru, beautiful,
?
fair.
^t^
&,
. .
Bu-ki-rei-ndru , not beautiful.

.
ly,
being as ...
),
Yumino yau na,
archwise.
r
7^-
a
1
glad, joyful.
feel pain.
lt^'
"Sdo-st
),
= cease laughing,
Soo-si nari, It is not
to be laughed at, It is sorrowful.
Taru (2
words.
n/),
te
aru,
is
also used to
,
form Japanese adjectives from Chinese

apparent, public.
Êv^v^^'
Gen-zen-taru
If more adjectives thus formed follow, linked to one another, then only the
last
has the attributive form taru, whereas those preceding have the indefinite
tari.
form
j^
a.fe
7
JD^
*
Jljj
Sit-tari, kan-tari, ft-tdru kun-si ari

stately,
2 )
,
there
is
a prince
JZ. */
^,T.I TI
n /\. Z
A. Z
worthy, perfect.
13.
Derivative adjectives
in
in ka.
The termination ka,

and
my
opinion, allied to the adjective radical forms
Ke
Ko
(page 109 n. 51), just as these,

radical
indicates, that the quality expressed

is
by the
word
is
present in a large degree or
strongly prominent.
As
evidence of the mutual affinity of ka, ke and
ko may be adduced that the forms
kanaru, kanari and kani, the
first
being attributive, the second predicate, the
third adverbial, are frequently superseded
by keki, kesi and keku.
For kdnaru
and kdnari the conversational language uses only kana.

Adjectives of this class are:
AMrdkd,
Atataka,
,
IfJ^^^j
bright, clear, light; allied to Ake, light.
^5^*'
,#
,
warm
allied to
Atatameru, to warm.
is far.
Faruka jm
Kdsitkd,
far.
Sono dtofarukd ndri or farttkana or farukdsi, his trace
^|*^,
remote, solitary.
Umino kazdva
kasttkd ndri, the sea-wind is so
solitary.
Mitsiga kdsttkani farttkana, the
way is solitary and far. As
to
ni see
160.
I)
Both expressions are taken up here,

and 10 sosina,
,,avoir
to illustrate the
forms occurring in RODRIGUEZ Element, p. 55,
line 9
do regret" and yekina,
se rejouir."
3)
Daigaku,
III, 4.
CHAPTER in. THE ADJECTIVE.
13, 14.
117
Ktrdrakd,
ffi
? #, brilliant; from Kira-kira, glitter; Kirara, glimmer, niika.

o
Komakd
$gj ^ %
$gj
fine
allied to
Komamtru
to
make
fine, to
make small. -
Komakana
sund, fine sand.
Komakani, adverb,
to the
most minute par-
ticulars; minutely, exactly.
Nadarakd, tf$#7#, smooth, ironed out; from Nader*
to iron, to stroke.
to
Namerakd, J^f J ? ^, smooth,

to
slippery; allied to
Namert, suck, and
Namfa,
make smooth.
'fijZ
Nodokd,
Ogosoka,
$&*
>
se* fei r
(f
the weather); from

-
Nodo, calm.
jJE^y^,
severe, strict.
Or6ka
jîS^
^,
stupid, obsolete 6r6U.
Ordsoka,
lay
^^ y *>
negligent, lazy.
off.
Ordsokanisu, to neglect; allied to 0rJ*u, to
down, put
Sadaka,
^^
.
fr
-fi
_^., certain, sure, definitive.
Sadaka ndri or Sadaktsi,
it is
cer-
tain; allied to
Saddmeru, to define,
calm,
is
still.
- -
fix.
Sidztikd, jffi^
^.î
Asa-Jiga sidzHka nan', or
fefcti*&ui,
or
sldzuktsi, the
morning
so calm.
SidzUkdni, old- Japanese also

old
jfcfcuZ-uiii,
I/M^M, to go softly, slink, sneak.
The
form SidziJcuni pleads for the in,
fluence of the vocal harmony. (Compare page 62
line 2).
The
radical
word
Sidzu
Tavtrakd,
is
preserved in Sidzu-kokdro
,
a calm mind.
flat;
^
,
or Tdlrakd, even, plane,
from
fa,
hand andytra,
flat,
thus
hand-flat-ish.
,y
Tsttmd-btrdkd
^-=? ? ^,
clear
and plain, decided,

-
settled; after the 5i iron
from
Tsumdri, concise and firdku, to open.

TsttmablraMkti, adverb, plainly.
TVumo'&fra&im, or old-Japanese
WadzUkd, ^j[Y
14.
J^,
scarce;
Wadztkdni,
scarcely, hardly.
in yaka, in old-Japanese also vaka, )\
"ft
Attributive yakdnaru, predicate yakdnari (in the conversational language yi-
kana), adverbially yakani.
The
derivative
form yaka means as much as having the appearance of that

')
which the root points out
To
to the the words of this class, which have passed from the old language
new, belong:
1) This notice
of th6 meaning
of
a ya*a agree* with that which
Japuve
etymologi*
<im
of
it:
*v#o
H,
118
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
as the
14.
Asdydkd, $EE^ #
$E
HfJ
fresh
and bright
morning
(asa).
Also Azayaka
Azayagu, Asayuga, Azarakeki.

naiva iro hana-hada asdydkd nari
the safflower
is
Asayakd ndru
iro, a bright color.
Kure*J
^J
j|
/^
CiQ &^^-
Hflr^-
^'
very bright of color.
Fiydyakd, J^-v^, bleak, cold.

bleak.
Aki-kaz6va Jiyayaka nari, the autumn wind
is
From
Fiya, cold.
bright (of the weather).
Ke-zayaka,
Kirdviyakd,
^^ ^^>
^7^.^,
glittering; also Kirabiyaka,
from Kirdmi, to
to
glitter.
K&mdydkd, ^|p|^ ^ #>
1) tight, close, dense;
from Komi, Komu,
fill.
Knsdki
komayakana, grass and wood close growing.

strong beer.
2)
;<
Komayakanaru saM
jp|
narrow,
precise.
Mamfyaka,
tlf.
J|J#, sincere, unfeigned, true; from
Mamd,
reality.
Miyabiyaka, ffj&^f
#$!'
splendid, beautiful; allied to Miyaburi, courtly.

graceful;
Nagdydkd,
Nigiyaka,
j^fj $^#' maidenly,
from Nago, maid.
HH^^^,
busy, bustling.
Nigiwavi, bustle.
Nikoyaka, Nobiyaka,
Oddydkd,
Savdyakd,
^ft^Y*? ^ne
tender, soft, mild; from Niko, pleasing; fine.
^*^Y*
^ftlrY #
elastic;
from Nob)i, u, to
still;
stretch.
calm,
from Oddv)i, u, to become calm.
p
fft\
Sayakd,
Sindyakd
,
^^ ^*
ô
bright; gay; brave.
^ Sayakeki,
clear (of light

,
and sound).
;
^^ ^^
^^
supple
pliant ; soft
flexible
also Sindbiyaka ,
from
Sindmi, to bend (oneself).

Sindbiyaka,
/
^f'v#?
secretly,
jP|
from Sinob)i, u, to hide; to
suffer.
Snkdyakd,
^v*o
=
^gi
strong, full of power; also Siikuyakd, Sttkuydkd,
Sukdydkd and Sukiyakd;

Sttmi'yakd,
$$|?
allied to
SnM,
support. (?)
%, quick, swift; allied to Stisitmi, pronounce ssmi, to advance.
Kava-osova midzu-nakawo fasiru-koto sttmiyakd nari, the motion of the river

otter
under water
is
quick.
Tawdyakd, JUJj^fri
logists
also
Tawayaka,
pliable, supple, soft; after
Japanese etymo-
from Ta, hand, and Yowa, weak, being the weaker sex, opposed to
called
the
man,
Tawoya-me;
allied to
Tawam)e,
eru, to bend.
Nami
kazemo tawdyakdni naru, Waves and wind become
softer.
Wakdydkd,
^*^
juvenile.
Waka-ki*, young.
Wakayaka ndru samurai t a
youthful warrior.
Yuruyaka
4ffe*s%, limp; slow; allied to Yurusi, to loose.
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
15, 16.
119
15.
or K6ki,
radical
in keki or k6ki.
Keki
form
Ke
or
Ko
(yf|),
= strong
(of taste or color),
already mentioned
of another word,
among
the adjectives in ki, whenever
it is
joined to the root
signifies that the object richly possesses that,
which
is
men-
tioned by this word.
Words
of this stamp are chiefly characterized as old-Japanese ,
although
not totally excluded from the modern language. The conversational

kesi or kori
language supersedes the attributive keki or koki and the predicate

with
kei or koi,
and the adverbial
kekit
or kokti by keu (keo) or kou (koo).

(
The
forms keki and koki frequently mutate with the derivative form ka
13).
To
this
class belong:
Azara-keki
Fdrtt-keki,
quite fresh,
)
Ne-koki,
lying in a deep
sleep.
very clear.
Keya-keki
Nure-koki , ~j^ , very strong,

very cold, very calm,
full
,
thoroughly
Sdmti-keki,
damp,
Sitsu-koki,
Sidzu-keki ,
wetthrough.
Tsuyu-keki
16.
of dew.
in siki',
),
..
like.
Adjective siki (i"f
adverbial slku (*/;?), predicate sisi (l^>), often, but
not generally,
mostly
as
si
sii
(
si
(O'
in the conversational language by the elision of k and *,

(
and siu
l/*?
2/7), the
last
mentioned frequently pronounced

Ikarl,u, = so to
be.
su
(shu)',
substantive sisa
so, Lat. sic
. .
(>f);
continuative verb
Root
(^fP^), =
>).
. .
Siki means, just as
like (German
lich,
Dutch
lijk,
it
an/ki),
joined.
equality
with that, which
is
to which expressed by the root,
is
Being of a
(
^j,
it
is
thus by a indicated in writing also by these Chinese characters,
word indicated in a false light rebus, which places the
As in old-Japanese many
mination
viation of
siki
siki.
of the adjectives in ki
9. B.)
occur with the ter-
or
consider the ki as an abbreii, the Japanese philologers
1) Distinguished
from Fdrv tetiti, spring-wrathcr
Zoo boo ti-mon
t*i*-loo
4, 1119,
under Sit*.
120
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
16.
Siki forms adjectives from nouns, from adverbs and interjections, and from
verbs.
1)
Denominative and Adverbial
i.
e.
derived from nouns and adverbs are,

asiki
e.
g.
A-siki,
jl 7
2/*
3f|$
bad.
Kokdrono
mono, any one bad in disposition,

Asiku mandbu, to
a person of bad character.

learn badly.
(in
Asitd utsuva: bad tools.

aslsi,
is it
Fino teri-kdmuva hanahada
= the entrance of sunshine

Yosi asiwo
an apartment where silkworms are bred)

,
very injurious.
is
wakemavdnu = not once to distinguish the,

distinguish good from bad.
,
good and
,
it is
bad," not to
Asikdru continuative verb from asiku and dru.
Ava-siki,
J^'*^*,
"trf
frothy; faint of taste; also Ava-ava-siki.
Aya-siki,
prise.
2^
from *K^, wonderful; singular;

,
Ay a!
',
exclamation of sur-
Ayasiki ame, a wonderful rain
e. g.
a stone-rain.
Bi-bl-slki,
^^ V
,
Hfci''
handsome.
Fage-siki
,
^T^*,
heavy; eager.
Fanafada- or Hana
hada-siki,
l
1^
1-
tf^* very, uncommonly; from hanahada, very.

lately.
n g ag> antithetic to Sibdrakv, shortly,

Jisdsi,
it is
FaktL-sai
Hon-tsiyquni towdru koto with our empire.
long,
that Faku-sai has intercourse
Fisdsa, length of time.

is it?,
Iku fisdsani nari-mdsukd

In Fisa
,
= what lapse of time

of
how long
is it
ago.
is
placed the meaning

,
-^
.
i.
e.
the sun or the day goes hence
or has gone hence
which
refers to
Fi
sdrist.
^^, =
igif.
of one sort; agreeing.

stout.
thickish ,
Ikdga-stki , jfRv
lyd-stki,
^j"**^^, interrogative,
despicable,
,
inquisitive.
^V2x^,
mean; from lya, no!
Kdna-siki, Jj. f 2/*

pitiful!
painful, pitiful; from
Kana!
alas!
Kdnasiki kdna!
how
Kibi-siki,
J^^2^^,
,
originally Kimi-siki,
- masterly,
authoritative, strict, severe.
Kuda-kuda~siki
Kuru-&iki,
J^ ^
^Cî
piecemeal.
^^2^.^,
Kuru-kuru-siki
^Y
^Li
tiresome, disagreeable, grievous.
Mi-kuru-siki, disagreeable to be seen, ugly, misformed. Root Kur)i, M, to reel

(reel off cocoons).
Kftvd-siki,
j
j$
2x^
^
,
^,
fair, neat.
Ktivd-sikima
a fair horse.
Jitvd-
neat, precise.
poor, shabby.

Mdsa-siki,
16.
121
lE*^*,
>gt-^*,
real;
from Mdsa, truth.
Hand-slid,
without contents, empty; in vain; from mt, kernel, fruit

fruitless.
and no, without; thus
Miind-slku ndru, to become empty; to give
up the
Ond-ziki,
Sabi-siki,
ghost.
identical.
fsj^^*,
Jg*^*.
|#j
- -
$fr
$L
real.
rusty; alone (solitary).
Suzu-siki,
T&dd-dki,
^ ^
2^*, cool.
Suzu-stkdru, continually cool.
vSx *
^
^
proper,
Taye-daye-siki, ||Jf|
Urt-siki,
Sfc^
-
often interrupted, by pausing.
JL.*,^^, glad, merry, joyful, pleasant. -- Watdkusimo Hrfaku gozdrialso I
mdsu,
am
joyful.
Ur&toa, gladness.
UrMta
kagiri nakeri, the
gladness was boundless.

verb, to rejoice.
Ur&ikdru or Ur&tgdrt, = Hrfakit-aru, continuative

urtslgdrtl, to
life).
Fi-kdzuno ooiwo
be glad at the greatness
(ooiwo) of the
glad.
-
number
of days (at a long
Urfamtt, transitive to make

(e,
Ur4, Yakutic Yor, joy. -- The Wa-gun Siwori gives ffi
uru,
to get, acquire) as root.
Utsuku-slki,
j^
/'*,
lovely; agreeable;
handsome; old-Japanese Its*ka-tiki;

,
al-
lied to Itsuku-simu, or also
Uts&ku-stmu
to love.
Y&sd-siki,
Y&rd-stki,
J^^Ôl^, meek;
^gtn2x^
honest, graceful.
fit;
^,
apt,
well.
2) Verbal, derived
by means of
slki.
The
transitive or intransitive
meaning of the verb, from which
adjectives are
is,
derived by
means of
stki,
passes over to the adjective too, because tfJn
by
nature, neuter.
is
On
the manner, in which the derivation in one case or another

least those,
it,
brought about, the Japanese etymologists, at
whose works are
within our reach, preserve silence; they talk about
indeed, but leave the
matter
class of
itself in
the dark.
To be
able to treat thoroughly and satisfactorily this
words which, from an etymological point of view, belong to the most
intricate,
we ought
also to be able to
compare the forms,
in
which they occur

still
in the different dialects of the popular language.

Us,
As
these are
unknown
to
we
think
we must
confine ourselves to a
mere indication of the most con-
spicuous phenomena.
Adjectives with a
causative meaning derived by means of

it is
slki
to
from causa-
tive or factive verbs, from verbs, by which, as
known,
cause an ac-
122
CHAPTER
III,
THE ADJECTIVE.
16.
tion to take place or be carried out

it
is
indicated,
and which in Japanese,

i
as
will be seen, hereafter, are
formed by changing the verbal termination

osi).
into
asi
(or
for
is
vocal -harmony sometimes into
From Kondmi, -
to like, to be
fond of,
formed the causative Konomdsi, = to cause fondness
for, to
make one
adjectives,
to be fond of,
and from
this the adjective
Konomdsiki,
lovely.
The
so formed, thus show, that in the nature of the object lies the action, expressed
by the causative verb,
to exercise or to bring to light.
To
this
kind of adjectives,
among
others, belong:
for: doubtful, su-
Ibukdsiki,
&?*
>&3f' strange, wonderful; polite expression
spected; from Ibukds)i, w, to excite surprise,

surprised at something.
Isogdsiki,
|r|j|
and
this
from Ibuk)i, u,
to be
7T **'*
^L^
7^\
K*' busy; from
Isogds)i, w, to
make busy; and
this
from Isog)i, M, to make

kon-nitsiwd isogdsii
siness to day.
haste.
*7
Isogdsiki tokoro, a busy place.
Watdkusiwd
(^
-^
As a
variation of
^ ^>y ^Tj & "f ) 2 ) I nave much buIsogd-siki, we have Isogavd-siki derived from
,
the causative form Isogavdsi,
to
make busy, which
proceeds from Isogdv)i, w,
= to be busy.
Itamdsiki or Itavdsiki, ^jjj%
to torture,
^^ ^
and
this
St'
smarting, painful; from Itamds)i, w,

feel
and
this
from Ildm}i, M, to
pain, to suffer.
like, to excite one's
of.
Kdnomdsiki, lovely, agreeable, from Konomds)i, w, cause to

love, to attract a person;
from
Ktinoni)?,,
w, to be fond
&p.
Medzurdsiki , 3^2T î(ô "wT

to excite interest,
rest in
costly.
.
'
exciting interest, interesting; from Medzurds)i, w,
and
this
from Mede, MedzUru,
also
Medzuri, to take inte-
to have gladly
is
(^).
Distinguished from Medzurdkd, important;
Every thing that

is
strange and rare, and however insignificant, an
object of taste,
called Medzurdsi. If
from Me-tsnki or'Mi-tswki, = to

signification of
fix
the
eye upon
a thing,
an adjective with the

stki,
attractive to the
eye," must be formed by means of

rivative
we
should obtain Metsukdsiki, as de-
from the causative form Metsukdsi (= cause one to look), but not
2
).
Medzurasiki
Mutsukd&lki, tiresome,
grievous,
vexing, J||, or also, by means of rebus, ex-
1) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 16.
2) This as an answer to the question, proposed in E.
BROWN'S
Colloquial Japanese,
XLI.
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
16.
123
pressed by
grieve,
>gf |- and
%-*
gjr^; from Mut*ukas)i, u, to vex, to
make
=
sad,
and
this
from Mutsuk)i, w, whence the contin native Mutsuis
kdr)i, M,
to be grieved (or sad),
more in
use.
Natstikdsiki,
$p Jg,
vulgo *|g|
Jj^,
is
attractive, engaging.
- -
Fdnan6
u,
nin6vi
natsukdsii,
the scent of flowers
attractive.
From NaMtkdt)i,
make
disposed, excite inclination or love; and this from Natsuk)i, u, to be inclined,
have inclination
to.
Omdmukdsiki , |lp ^
A*.
3ft
kJW
ij
^V'
a^ so by
contraction
Omogdstki, pronounced as
attract,
Omofrom
ngdsiki, attractive, engaging;
from Omd-mMlutyi, u, to
(om.6)
and
this
Om6-muk)i, w, to turn oneself with the face
towards a thing.
j*
^^
[Sj
From muki, =
to
go
to meet, arises a continuative verb mu/vir)i, u,
to be turned towards;
whence mukavas)i,
,
u, the causative form; from this
is
derived dmdmukavdsiki
to be continually attractive.
Om&v68iki\
causing to think of one, keeping another's thoughts engaged, and
that in a good sense, thus engaging, dear, kind; from Omovds)i, u, also
v6s)i,
0md-
u, to cause to think,
and
this
from
dm(jv)i, u, to think (,{,
).
Osor6s1,ki,
^fl^y^*,
j
frightful;
from Osdr6s)i, M, to make
fear,
and
this
from
Os6r)d, uru, to fear.

Saivagdsiki,
^^ ^HtM*
make
is
Sawagds}i, w, to
w,
rustle,
J^' ^^ make rustle,
^^^g
(t^
an ^ noise, stormy, turbulent; from and

)
to disturb, to confound,
this
-
from Sairag)i,
Sivo wwagati^
a noise, be uneasy
^*
make
^
the
ifc
the sea
sei
stormy.
site
Rokdrowo
sawagdsit,
!
mind uneasy.
Saruva
noise and
savagasiku
mono wo
kai-su
),
= the monkey makes much

as variation of
injures every thing.
The old-Japanese has
Sawagi also Sofull
and Sawagavdtfki, wagavi, rage, tear; Sawagavds)i, w, enrage,
of noise.
Tanomd&M,
u,
"Pf
^,
trusty, a thing
this
upon which one can
rely;
from Tanomot)*,
make
trust,
and
from
7Wm)i,
M, to trust to, to rely upon.
make have disgust, to prejudice Urdmdslki, exciting disgust; from Urdmas)i, u,

and this from against oneself,
rom), M,
to be disgusted with.
^ft-
of rebus y|[| jlj $ jR^), worthy of enyy; UrdyamdOki, (vulgo, and by way from %rdyamds)i, M, to make one evy? excite envy, and this from
u, to envy.
,^
^.
1)
dzu-i. XII. 11. recto. Kasira-gaJd kin-moo
124
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
16, 17.
w, enliven, and
Uruvdsiki, uruwdsiki,
this
jH^'^^*
5^, charming; from
Ur&vdy)i
from
ttmivi,
nrdvi, to be enlivened, or charmed.

2x
Utdgaodstiri, j^ff
this
^ o ^F*
^>
o
doubtful; from utdgavds)i, u

o
make doubt, and
from Utagav)i, u
(^
P~
1^),
to doubt.
Utomdsiki, despicable, from Utomds)i, u to despise, properly to estrange, and this
from
ut6rn)i,
w, to be strange, to be despised.
y^
ijjjj^.
WadzUravdsiki, ^jPf-^SAaK, / "T

M, to tease,
^,
tiresome, teasing, plaguing, from Wadztiravds)i ,
and
this
from WadzUrdv)i^ M, to be plagued.

this
Ydd&rdsiki,
hospitable;
from Yddtirds)i, M, to lodge, take anyone in, and

f), to lodge
from Yad6r)i, u (fgf

Yawdstki, 3ft\^
somewhere.
u, to
^*, calming, from Yawds)i,
make
rest, to reduce to
calm-
ness, and this from
Yav)i, u; or Yam)i, w, to come to rest.
Y&rdkobdsiki , joyful, rejoicing, from Yordkobd$)i, w, to please anyone, and this
from Y&rtikdbi), w, to
Yukdsiki,
rejoice, to
be glad.
^1.
* ^^r, urging on, impatient; from Yttkds)i, u, to make go; to drive;
and
this
from Yuk)i, M, to go.

in k&-slki.
derivatives
17.
adjectives
To the
in siki unite the

are
in ka-siki, ka-siku, ka-si;

as
terminations,
which
considered
by Japanese etymologists
which kavasiki
etc.
contractions
of kamasiki, kam&siku,
kamasi
(for
also occur),
and which
are indicated in writing by j|f|* Hfc^T-
The sign
j{j|
means to go through
Is this
or to
make go through
for...., in Japanese Kayovi or Kayovasi.

is
character to be remarked as a rebus here, or of the
its
signification allied to that
Japanese
termination? This question remains unanswered by the Jait
panese philologers. The writer of the present, leaves the rebus for what
is,
and
sees
in the kasiki in question nothing
more
than the frequently occuring

( jffi
abbreviation of sika-siki , of which the radical form stka
^)
is
quoted
among
the
adjectives
is is
!
in ki (page 109
n.
72) with the
meaning of
being so, such."
Kasi
of
met with, and that

as
as a substantive predicate verb with the signification
much
as,"
in
simple
is
expressions
such
as
Mister
tova
kimizo
kasi"
)>
= the word Mister
as
much
as kimi; whereas the continuative verbal
1) I
diletante.
borrow
this satisfactory
example from a metrical
list
of Japanese and
Dutch words, by a Japanese
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
17, 18.
J25
form Karu
(for
siMru) in Karuga yfttni [= for reason

is
(yitfni) of the (ga)
being
so (kdrti), that
therefore, on that account],
is
generally in use,
and that to
exclusion of tiled.
to
.
The
derivative forms kdtiki, kfalku, kdsixi or kasi thus answer

is
ish,
... some;
to be).
whereas kamasOd
equivalent to a fusion of ttka-nuul-
siki (masi,
To
this class of derivative adjectives,

ka-siki,
among
others, belong:
Fadzi- (vulgo Fddzu-)
$$ jg*
gjr^
jfc |jr, timid;
also
Fadti-
(vulgo Fadsu-) ka-mdslM, or -kavdsild; from Fadzi, blush; Fadzu, Fadzttru,

to blush.
Fdrtt-kd-siki
,
0j|
j|| ^, clear (of the weather)

droll, jocose;
also FdrH-kavdtfki', root Fare, clear.

this
Kara-kaviga mdsiki,
kara, = ha! ha!
Ne-ka-slki,
from Kara-gam, to laugh, aud
from Kara
^^ JJ* Sfci'* sleepy,

Ra*^,
yakamasi nai
also
Ne-kama-
(or fora) sT&t;

like
from A>,
sleep.
')
Ya-kamdsiki,
noisy; from ya/
an exclamation
Heh! holla! ho!

is
Kokode yakamdsikiwo
ni
site
(
sakeru, here people prevent what
noisy.
noise.
Sidzuta
^^
^1^'
Pg|
it
is
quiet and without
Yume-ka-siki,
^J *M
also Yum4-kama- (or ytaua-) *UT, as in a dream;
from Yume, a dream.
18.
in ra-slki , = having a resemblance to ....

is
They are generally denominative. Ra
instead of ara, which has arisen by

;
the strengthening the final vowel of ari into a
ara-slki , by apheresis ra>slki
thus means:
such
(slki)
as
were there...," or
so as if there were."
Makoto,
it
truth; Makoto-narii ,
i.
= being
truth, true; Makoto-ra-slki, such as if

koto, or
were
truth,
e.
probable. Makoto-rd-tiki
Makoto-rd-sta
probnbility.
it
Ba-siki therefore answers to the derivative termination ..ish, so far as
means
bluish
jective
having
2
resemblance,
to
that,
which
is
indicated
by the root, as
),
whereas the Japanese termination gives at the same time, to the adit,
formed with
a diminishing, frequently also a contemptible signification
in addition.
The
old
way
of writing the predicate form Arari
is
^f
J{
^^
unUr 7.
The
to be
presence of
which
is
here ideographically , with the signification of
1)
Ta, yobi-kakunt koyeni
iveri,
= Ta
ii
aid of a calling Toioe.

.
r^w /ivori,
J42. 2) BRitt, Nederl. SpraakUer, 1854,
1).
126
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE,
18.
on hand, = Jap. ari" pleads

ara-si,
for the correctness of the assimilation of ra-si to
and therefore against the supposition, that the ra used here might be
(
the characteristic of the plural
5.
III.
1.
page 56).
rasiki.
The
dialect of
Nagasaki has raska for
Examples of derivative
Otdko,
adjectives in ra-siki:
man;
Otdko-rdslki 6nna, a
manly woman.
womanish
(effeminate)
Onndgd, woman;
Onndgti-rdsiki ot6ko, a
1
man, =
tinndno
yquni okondi-mdsu dtdko
),
i.
e.
man
,
conducting himself like a woman.

boyish.
Warabe, Warambe, boy; Warambe-rdsiki
Ko-domo,
child;
Kodomo-rdsiki
childish.
Kodomo-rdsiki handsi, childish- talk. Ko-
domono yau ndru,
childlike.
Kimi, gentleman; Kimi-rdsiki, playing the gentleman.

Dai-miyau, =
grea,i
name, imperial prince; Dai-miyau-rdsiki hdtamoto, a
vassal,
who
Baka
,
plays the prince.

,
fool
madman
Baka-rdsiki stupid , foolish

,
Baka-rdsiki koto
stupidity, folly.
Use, gossip, untruth; Uso-rdstki,
trifling.
The
derivative F'itd-rdsiki
from Ftto, man, answers formally indeed to

to the examples quoted,
hu-
man," must however, with a view

by which
it is
have a signification,
only applicable to a not
human
being, that acts
humanly 2 ).
g.
Also words of Chinese origin are compounded with rdsiki,
e.
Kou,
^^
,
merit; Kou-aru waza,
= a merit being deed, a
deed, that really
is
meritorious.
Kou-rdsiki waza, an apparently meritorious deed.

,
Ri-kou
''
7JJ|j
p| ^
whetted mouth or tongue
eloquence.
Rikou-ndrA fito
an
eloquent, witty (but not blunt) man.
Rikou-rdsiki ftt6, a
man, who
plays
the witty person or the orator.
Ai, $?lf
kind; Ai-rdsiki, amiable.

,
Ka-wai, proper ll]"* ^f:^ Ka-ai, kind, agreeable. Kawai-rdsiki amiable,

Ka-wai-ra$iku naki koto, ungraciousness.
lovely.
Bin-bou,
^j^^J^Jjri poverty; Bin-bou-rdsiki
poorly.
1)
Thus Mr. Oono Yasaburoo, when requested
to describe the in
meaning of Onnagorasiki otoko, defined

was translated j.menschlijkerwyze,'"
it.
2)
We know
this
word alone from a Vocabulary,
which
it

19.
19, 20.
127
in beki.
Placed after the attributive form of a verb beki (~pf ) signifies, that what the verb expresses may, can, must and shall happen. The predicate form is
besi, the adverbial bekii.
will do this
Onna kono Uwazaw6
stt-b&t,
women may,
is
can or
work
Korewa onnano
Su-beki,
stt-Mki tewaza ndri, this
a work to be
done by women.
= being allowed or
able to do,
is
here conceived in
an active sence, whereas the genitive onnano precedes as

page 97
highly.
8.
definition.
Compare
VI.
Fit6-bit6 kono
tamawo tattomn, every one

is
values this jewel
Korewa f%6-Mt6no
tattomU-beki tama nari, this
a jewel, which every
one may, can and
shall value highly.

(
In the chapter on the verbs
104.)
we
shall refer
again to Beki.
20.
that, which
is
in naki,
= without, ...less, indicating the
want of
mentioned in the radical word.

radical
>
Na-ki fi|, in the conversational language Nai, from the
word
Ifa,
= not, used substantively means

for nothing,"
the good for nothing" or
something good
= nothing,
e.
g.
Fltowo naiga sironi

is
*M, to consider a person as
good for nothing (of no value). Naiga
genitive.
is
Used attributively
it
means
not existing;" Naki-fitd
a not existing
man
one deceased; Nai-mono, a good for nothing, a not existing thing, a nothing.
Fitdno naki-kotowo kiku, to hear of a person's not existing
(his death).
When Naki
it
is
preceded by an attributive definition of what does not exist,

suffix
answers to the
...less.
Tsikdra-naki
or
Tsikaratio
nnki yu/ni, a
powerless bow.
The predicative form Nasi,
in the conversational language Nai

it
means the
not being at hand of anything, be

tsikdra nasi, this
is
-- A~>m> yurm'uvi thing or circumstance.
bow
is
powerless.
without inhabitants.
Iwqu-ga-sima ftt6 now, the sulpher island rf f ^ J^** ^" Ari nasi wo tovu, _fljj ? ^\T) _flR^ * inquire about
ft?
t_
J"
the existence or non-existence of a thing.
Adverbially Nakii
j[J),
in the conversational language
N|u, Noo (1*^.
-f?
not to
*?
7).
Thence the continuative verb Nakari (= NdkA

nari,
to
+ ari),
exist.
.
.
Ndku
to want.
go to nothing,
to
die.
Nat*
)i,
u, to be
without
Na
and the forms derived from
it
will be found treated
more
diffusely in
the chapter
on the verbs
109.).
128
21.
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
21.
Adjectives with the negative prefix Na,

power comes before
the contrary.
or the Chinese 3^
ETa, with negative
adjectives as well as substantives,
and
causes
them
to express
This use of
Aa
T
peculiar to the old lan-
guage
has been preserved in

seat,
expressions as:
Na-yami,
no
rest
(^
5C)'
Na-yi (J"#), = no
for
earthquake"
(^tjj
J|p; Na-ivizo, = not speak,
= be
silent!
The Chinese ~^>^', Fu, = not,
as a pure negative prefix to Japanese
words
expressive of quality has also got into use.
To
the few compounds of that na-
ture belong:
Fu-de-ki,
^
~J*^
91
>
mis-chance, bad-growth.
De-ki, to proceed, to be
produced.
Fu-nari,
f ^
'
^ a<^ growth.
Fu-narino
tosi,
a bad year.
Bu-rtari-naru ,
^^^f^^ti"
misshapen; Nari, shape.

uncomfortable,
disadvantageous;
Fu-katte-naru
^
,
)f^* ^*^t<V'
uneasy;
Kdtte, the winning hand.
Fu-mi-motsi-naru
^ 7 ^^ ^F^tV'
j^f?/
>
hehaving badly; Fu-mi-motsi, bad behaas it should be.
vior, Fr. inconduite;
Mi-mot si, behaving

extravagant;
Fu-ratsino,
7
~%*
absurd; improper, irrational; from the
Chinese Line
mit, fence.
zon-zi yori
(j^, vulgo J^),
after the
Japanese pronunciation, Ratsi,
li-
Fu-ratsino koto, what goes beyond limits.

j^^.^^-^.
,
Ratsi mo naki
^-^*^ 1o|M
%i
>
an irrational opinion.
;
Fu-sai-vai-naru
sing;
^
,
^fettf*^, uuprosperous
Sai-vai, prosperity, luck, bles-
from
development, and favi, growth.

^
Fu-si-avase-naru
lucky; from Si-avase, chance.
Fu-sugurete imasn,
excellent, not being particularly well.

>
Fu-tsu-gqu-ndru,
the Chinese
>
inconvenient
incongruous; from
- altogether, the sum; thence Tokino tsu-gquni yori,
according to the time.
More numerous
nese,
are the
7 which compounds with ~^\ adopted from the Chi,
and sanctioned by use as

life.
classical expressions,
have penetrated even to
the language of daily
As
suffixes
attributive
definitions
e.
prefixed to Japanese words,
they occur with the
no or naru',
g.:

discordant.
21, 22.
129
unfashionable.
^f*
^*^^*,,
'
f
t-
/ix,
desastrous.
,
unceasing gossip.
imperishable
;n
unchildlike.
nxj insufficient,
not enough.
friendship.
f|lv, unforeseen
indisposed
well.
,
difficulty.
not
^^, unexpectedly, by
chance.
If the pure negative
^7
sight
of similar expressions
is
superseded by ^fc
7'
(bu^
is
without)
still
the meaning of the word undergoes a considerable modification , which

of.
^
frequently lost
^7
/flL-r
j\^,
t n/ Fu-rei-naru,
^
is
uncourtly, and
7 equal to coarse, clownish. fiE ;f^gf t
without ceremony," and

u
/|fL^,
ig
may
also
be rude behavior, which does not wound. ^|

to the nature of politeness, thus misbehavior.
a behavior,
is
antagonist
not at the time fixed;
^t
7*
^p^,
untimely, i. e. u without fixed time, i.e. always; B^^,

H^p
^> Fu-si
wrong-time, the improper time, the time at which something may not happen.
8 22.
Adjectives with a previous definition.

to
Nouns, prefixed
an adjective
as definitive,
form with
it
a compound word,
the termination provided they are not characterized as an attributive addition by

no.
-- JTuta', mouth; Naga, long; Te-naga zaru, long-armed ape. Omoki, heavy; Kutsino omdki ftt6, a man heavy of mouth or tongue.
Te, hand;
Examples.
InisiM imdno na-takdki ftt6 High named (celebrated) persons of old and new times.
,
= of hand quick, of foot quick; quick-handed, quick-looted. Te-baya, asi-faya,

Kotoba-fayasi, he
is
ready of speech.
- -
Kotoba-oosi, he
is
woordy.
Kut*i-jir6ki,
broad-mouthed.
Me-akdki, red-eyed.
Mimi-t6ki flt6, a man, sharp of ears, a quick-hearing man.
Fara-bm6, thick of
belly, a paunch-belly,
fish
name
of a
fish.
Fardka uw6
(for
a fara-aka uw6),
red of belly, the red-belly.
Om6-sir6ki, white or clear of countenance, friendly.
Mono-Uyeno
naki yo, a night without sound, a dead night
Kok6ro-neno fir6ki kotoba, a word ample of meaning.
Kokoro-neno
warm
fito, a
man bad
of disposition.
soft haired beings.
9
Ke-no ara-mono, ke-no niko-mono, rough haired beings,
130
23.
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
23, 24.
The
is
definition, that the quality in

is
any object in full or
relatively full
measure
met with,
expressed by adverbs or definitions equal to them, which
precede the adjective; as such are worthy of notice:

1.
Ma,
Jlflô j|
iu conversational language generally
Man, = effectively,
really;
genuine unadulterated,
bow
indicates the full measure of the quality.
Ma-naka, or Man-naka, la.^ Pp#> the

torn, just the middle of the
just middle.
Yumino ma-nakawo
just in the middle.
to seize, to seize the
bow
Man-nakano
iy6,
the middle house, standing between two others.
Mdn-firdki,
fi^^p^^,
pL v HU '^
^ tlf
iff.
>
quite level, even. quite round.

quite easy.
Mdn-mdruki,
Md-ydsuki,
Md-sirdki,
M!^ v^^*'
^
lirja^' quite white, snow-white.
Md-kur6ki,
1^^,
quite black, jet-black.
Ma, = effectively, really,

that occurs in Ma-koto
right heart;
2.
( tlf.
variation of
jit ^f*
)
,
Mi
=
a
(
|f|
,
), is
the same radical word,
l|j. o
reality
truth.
Ma-gok6ro
an up-
Masa,
truth; Masa-slki,
really.
Itsi-dan,
'^
J^>
in
a whole piece,
all
adverbially:
wholly.
Itsi-dan
utsukiisiki
all
6nna, a
woman
respects beautiful.
Itsi-dan kek-kau ndrU, in
respects excellent.
3.
Ikanimo, = however, in
Ikanimo taydsuki,
all respects.
Ikanimo
tsiisaki,
as small
as
possible.
4.
as easy as possible.
Zui-bun, ^j$j$
^^' = comparatively,
is
so
much
as possible.
Zui-bun
faydku, pretty early;

24.
also used
with the signification of
very early."
Absolute comparative.
Adverbs which, expressing a higher degree of the quality, come before the
words of quality, are:

1)
Mo,
^^
which
vulgo
it
j^
yet, yet
more;
to be distinguished
from
Ma,
real , with
frequently mutates.
easier
Mo-ydsuki,
Mo-gami,
Mo-sotto ,
v ^ ST5> ^ ^ _t a
^
jj|f
4Ji?
Mo-fayd,
Ig
-*p-v
s till
quicker or
higher up.
yet
less.
earlier ; already.
Mo-suk6si, HS/^
^*?>
yet a
little.
Mo-sukosi sakini,
still
rather earlier; just now.
Korewa amdri
tsiisai.
Mo-
CHAPTEE
sukdsi ookiinowo 2)
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
24, 25.
131
see one rather larger.
mise
_,
*),
this (case) is too small.
Let
me
Ookini,
^J
/J^,
greatly, very.
Ookini furuki, very antique.
Ooki
ni ardki, very rough.
3) Suk6si,
little, in slight degree.
Sskosi takai tokdro, a place
high only in a slight degree.

4.
Nao,
>Jj|j
f, old-Jap.
it
Navo,
3fj!|
J,
once more so
still
more.
Sortdt
nao yoku nari, thereby

it is
becomes so much the
better.
Sore dake nao yorrfmt,
so
much
the better.
also
5)
lya or Iy6,
ya
or y6,
J!}
?'ya,
Y
o
3
e o
gj;,
= once
more
so.., far-
ther, more; to be distinguished from
no.
Jyd taka yama, the mountain

interesting.
once as high.
lyd medzurdsiki
still
more
6) lya-iya or iy6-iy6,
5HJY
Y L
SHU
{>
more and more;

still
in the con-
versational language
7)
Tydga
&y<!ni also.
Jyo-iy6 fiikdki,
much
deeper.
Masii-masu,
^^,
more and more.
Riyau-kokuno mdtfoari mdiu-md*u
dtsuku ndri,
25.
1.
the intercourse of both the empires extends more and more.
The
relative or real comparative.
If a quality be attributed to one object in

it is
the same measure as

if it
to another,
the likeness, if
quantitative,
is
expressed by Fodo,
is
qualitain
tive by Yauni. Fodo
(^*)
means quantity, Yauni, or Yooni
($?),
the manner.
Namiva ydma-fodo
yukino yauni
sirdsi,
takasi, the
waves are as high as mountains.

white as snow.
-
Namiva
=
siie of
the waves
are
Y<inia-fodo,
mountains, and Yukino yauni, = in the manner of snow, are here adverbial definitions ,
ticle
which
as such , precede the

is
words of quality
takdsi
and
W. The par-
va,
vulgo wa,
here necessary to separate the subject nami from the
as subordinate definition, belongs following substantive (yama, or yuki), which, to the predicate vSaw ri
i.
word of
quality.
fodo
todsi, it is so far as three miles.
Ii yguni
monora
kataki,
<i
stony hard,
e.
so hard as stone.
Zen fodo dai-sfan
tm'rfi
^ ^^f ^^ ^^n ^t nrt, ^jJH^ 5 1E H

-
"^t?
W5 ^
nai.
1V
-3*
'
tnere
^s
no * n * n 8
important as virtue; in the contei'-H
versational
language: Zen fodo
tai-setsu
na (or also
ta,
monowa
1)
Shopping-Dialogue* , p.
132
2.
CHAPTER
If a quality
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
25.
is
ascribed to one object in a

is
higher
degree, than to another,
with which the comparison
made, the
latter is considered as the
point of depar-
ture in the
ascription and, as such, characterized
by the termination yori (out),
immediately precedes the word of quality, which does not assume a comparative
form; thus NamivB, iy<[yori takasi, = the waves are from houses out high.
the waves are
particle
i.
e.
higher than
is
houses. In this form of speech also the isolating
va or wa
indispensible.
The Mongolian and Mandju, in
respect of the comparative, follow the

is
same
way
).
To
the expression:
The horse
higher than the sheep,"

ooi rtari
is
(
is
equivalent
in Japanese the expression:
Mum d va fltsuzi yori
Jj^î
_~fc
^f
Morin
^?
ami
ifei
>
- ^ ne norse
- -
from the sheep out high
in Mongolian
chonin etse jeke.
Examples.
Meiva koo-mooyori
lighter
karosi
(fjfjY
^jlcc?
^f
V^f*
_^)
is
^ ne
ê
1S
than down.
Ookamivd yama-tnuyori
takesi, the
wolf
bolder than the
wild dog.
Olanda-fundvd Too-senyori sakini tsiydku-yansu, the Dutch ship

KakYiretdruydri aravaruruva ram', = someis
lands earlier than the Chinese.
thing more manifest than the hidden,

fest,
there not, there
is
nothing more manislyuyori
than the hidden.
Riwo
kivamete,
Ten-kaw6 dsdmtiru-kotova
ooi-ndruva ram, what concerns the forming of the understanding, and the go-
vernment of the
.
state
there
is
nothing greater than the doctrine of CONFUCIUS.

. .
yori sukdsiku naru, less becoming than
Remark.
./tX&t,
rr
No
comparison
(tsutsi)
is
is
contained in the sentence:
Kono
sdkayoritsutsi
the land
of this steepness off low; as the words
of this
steepness off (kono saka yori)" are an attributive definition of
land (tsutsi)"
and not of the word of quality
low (fiki)"
be defined by means of one of the adverbs
e.
The
(
relative comparative
may
also
24),
which indicate a higher degree of the quality;
g.
Wasiva kuma-takayori
horned falcon).
koto san
mata-mata
ooi nari, the eagle is twice as big as the bear-falcon (the
Kuma-takava me-ono dai-siyau mina takani onaziku, takayori ooi-naru

bai seri, with the bear-falcon (Spizaidos orientalis) the size of the female
and the
1)
Compare
I.
J.
SCHMIDT,
,
Grammatik der Mongolischen Sprache

de
la
St
Petersburg,
86.
1831.
S.
39.
CANON DE LA GABELENTZ
lem.
Grammaire Mandchoue ,
1832.
page
Characteristic
der
hauptsachlichsten Typen des Sprachbaues , von Dr. H. STEINTHAL
Berlin.
Ifc60. page. 200.
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
25.
133
male generally
the
is
as with the
hawk;
his size (ooinaru koto) with relation to (yori)

i.
hawk amounts
The
to threefold (san bai);
e.
it
is
thrice as big as the

is
hawk.
object, with
which the comparison
is
made,
also isolated
it,
by va, when
is
the word expressive of quality does not immediately follow
but
separated
faX-ori,
from
is
it
by
a subordinate adverbial definition; e.g.:

this house.
Kono
nao
1y4 yoriv* mats
as
high again as
Kono
1y6 yoriv&
takasi, is yet higher
than
this house.
If the object, with
which the comparison

notice,
is
made
is
something which either

it is
has
remained
suffix
without
or
is
not
expected,
then
characterized
this also, or
by the
m6
(= also, even).
this.
Kore yorim6 oo, more than

to
(it
more than even

called
--
Faydbusd
flier
ivu toriva taka

is
yorimd
is
faydti^ the bird,

fleeter
Faydbmd, or the quick
the noble falcon)

'),
than eren
is
the hawk.
Kono ftt6wa
are yori mo gakuriya de ari
this
man
9
more
learned than even he.

/ fifyj /">-f
J=
^$S
more
#
is
J&\
/>
$t* ftt 3
^T t*
Sau-m6kuno kwa-kiyauva Botan yori ooi-ndru monovd
no, among
the flowers of the vegetable kingdom there
none bigger than the piony.
Verbs
reri
( îj rfl*
also,
which express a
/
or a less, such as Masl, Maaari.Masato excel (praettare)', Otoreri

e. g.
(
f,
* H&
/
0|
to be
more,
;,,),
to be less, are used in the forming of comparisons;

(
Idzurtga nandnni
'
masdru
jfb
^ J^
(
tJC
'
wno
'
is
more tnan you? "" Kon =

ffil
-
* am w '
ma ^rW*
fa
rano dru kum

this
J^
_@
^ ^Sf
It
is
'
),
country better than

excelled me.
country and rich in treasures.
Wareni masdreri, he has

is
monova ndsi, there Siro-mayu-kavikoni masdreru

silkworms of white cocoons.
the nothing, that surpass*

less
Pttdni ot6ru, to be
than others.
Remark.
When
in the saying:
better not to go, than to go,"
would be usual order of words, according to which one deviating from the m* Yukdniiva (the not going) ynk-uyori (than the going) obliged to say
(is
better},"
is
expressed by
Yuknyorlv* yuk<wii& m*i, a

it
rhetorical inrer-
sion takes
praestat)"
place, to
is
make
appear, that the predicate
it is
better (=
Ut
of the
most importance.
Therefore the subject yufcfwi, as a

is
subordinate
racterized
definition
but precedes the predicate,
emphatically cha-
the yuku yori, contributed to the comparison, by ga, whereas
I)
Compare KODBIOUEZ Element,
p.
80.
134
isolated
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
25, 26.
said
by va,
is
placed in front.
Compare what
is
on
this subject,
on
page 64.
The poet supersedes yoriva by kara koso

Udte miyo!
or gara koso;
ndsi.
e.
g.
Fanano sodatanu satovd

iyasikere
*).
Kok6ro gara k6s6 miva

Plant and look! There
is
no
village
where flowers do not come up.
My
outside
is
worse than
suffix.
my
heart.
Koso, an emphatic
26.
The absolute superlative.

superlative
is
The absolute
the
expressed by one of the abverbs, which imply
highest degree of the

are:
quality and precede the
word expressive of
quality.
The adverbs
1)
Fana-fada, or hana-hada,
very;
old- Japanese Fata-fata, from, fata,
yet again.
Fana-fada
takaki, very high.
F. sebdki, very narrow.

koto
F. tdkuflight
san ndru, very plentiful.

of the swallow
is
Tsubame tobi-kakeru
F.
tai-se'tsuni
fana-fada fayd-si, the
very quick.
dmovu, to consider of the most
importance.
2)
Mottomo, jjx?
^Hf
^[J
originally
Motomo, utmost, quite.
Aka-
kaneno nari mott6mo yorosiku,

coin) is quite good, it is
itatte
mare nari,
as to the standard of copper (the
however extremely
rare.
3) Ito, ito-ito, j]|
"f o
5JJ
ig:
Jjj|
very.
Ito ydsuki, very easy.
Ito 6siki feme", a very lovely girl.
4) Itatte,
will
it
551
#7,
the gerund of Vtdri,
arrive at the place to

- -
which one
come; as adverb complete, entire, utmost, highest.

quite good.
Itatte
Itatte yor6si,
itatte
is
faydku, very early.

is
Sasaki va katatsi
tsiisdku
. .
.
sit6 hoye" ooi
nari, the
wren
in form very small, yet in voice strong.
to
kokoro-yuruvd makotoni itatte oroka nari,

Instead of
it
mean
that...,
is
indeed utterly stupid.
place the inversion: makotoni or6kan6 Itari nari,

,
is
indeed the
highest point of stupidity
if
the logical accent
is
to be placed
on
7
itari.
En-in
ainari kino-dokuno itarini soro,
$, v
*f
^%
is
;
jjJ(i
^ ^
/
^Z
7a
delay
is
the
summit
of vexation.
2x si,
The Chinese .H?
=1tdtte,
also
used to express the superlative, and

e.
that in composition with Chinese words
g.
1)
leaf in
an album, written by FUKU-SATA, 1862.
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
26, 27.
135
3*
*"
ffifr
si-g6ku
top-point
utmost.
JS^Wv?
^5
3j?
si-zen, highest
good, perfectly good.
^ 3p
^
^|j^
si-beo
excellent.
si-you
needful in the highest degree.

is
5)
Meppod (t ^ î^), which
said
to be in use with the signification of
most," but only at Y4do, was known to us only under the form of Meppou-ndrv,
as
synonym
of Mono-os6re sfau,
caring for no danger, fearless, bold.

this price is
Kono
as
nedanva meppoo takai might thus signify:
boldly high. But
we
now
recognize this word to be the Japanese pronunciation of the Chinese 9j

annihilation-law"
,
Jjr ,
Mie-f&, signifying
i.
e.
unavoidable dead,
we most
it
translate
Meppoo
takai
by mortaly high. Some write $&$. ~tTf, and pronounce

'^ y,
first;
Mct-boo.
Irita-
6) Itsino,
Dai-itsino,
is
ijfc
--f
= the
first.
--
Tsuruga
kuni itsino yoki mindto nari, Tsuruga
the
first
good (the best) harbour in the
northern provinces.
Nippon
itsi
itsino takeki
mono, the bravest
man
in Japan. -
On
the other hand
stands for utsi, = blow, in Itsi faydku, = quick as the

first
lightning.
Ten-ka dai-itsino gdku-slya, the
scholar in the empire.

1)
).
7) Itsi-ban,
<5,
first
rank
(see
81.
Itsi-ban yoritiki, the
very best.
8)
Siigurete,
^F
-, excelling, surpassing.
SugHrttc mcdztrdslki , meet in-
teresting.
9) Kitsuku, kitsuu
heavy, very.
Kitsuu sui mono, something very sour.
Very common
also,
are
the following Chinese compounds with
8ai
= very, utmost, which
express a superlative:
best.
T _t.X> uppermost,
5f
iH?'
the highest
fiwtJ
%
^
PJ3
middlemost.
lowest, least.
first
S r M*'
^to
rel ation *<>*"
"fk"**,
= just now, presently, a few moments ago.
KY
27.
8ftt
moet diligent
The relative superlative.

superlative
is
The relative
characterized iu that, that the objects snrpawed
in the genitive, or in the local, are expressly named, and this naming, whether thus word expressive of quality, by way of a definition, and is placed before the the stars is, after the Japanese subordinate to it. The bright of (or among)
CHAPTER
III.
THE ADJECTIVE.
of (or
27, 28.
the stars, Fosino (or Fosi
manner of speaking, the brightest

no nakani) akiraka ndru va.
among)
Examples. Karasi fazikamiva, nano

principal
tattoki nari,
mustard and ginger are the

fazikami nari, the principal
||| |5
of vegetables;
or:
Arano
tattokiva, karosi
- -
among
[^jj*^]
the vegetables are mustard and ginger.
^ ^ ^
^
#
'
Jl^
^ ^ ^tt" /
Kusurino nakano masdreru [pt6reru\ mono, the best [the
least]
among
the medecines.
wr
i/
JRcg
Ijfa^
lgd?*
TO ?
1/P ?
Buppoova moro-morono norino nakani motomo sarani

sugurete
^
,
^"^
"
imdsu
),
the Buddha-doctrine
is
among
all
*^>y
doctrines the most excellent.
28.
The excess in a
...
quality
is
expressed by:
...
Amari,
excess
^^ ^,
~Y
..
= excess, adv. excessively, too
Tsikarano amari,
tsiisai,
of strength.
*?
Amari
2 )
gin,
is
excessive
^
money.
Korewd amari
nagai
3
AJz^'
^"if /hl"f
ti*^
small.
is
Korewd amari
),
this is
too long.
Korewa amari
dtsui
5
)
,
iroga koi*), this
too dark of color.
Korewa
amari dziyaiga
this is too thick of stuff.

. .
To-fodo, ?f$
Ê*) = excess, excessive, too
= Amari.
7
"*"
Soredewa
6
yo-fodo takdku nari-masu,
^t^^
3
?fe
^1
it
^^
)'
tnen
becomes too high (too
dear).
Yo-fodo
os6i 7 ), it is too late.
1) Nippon-ki, Vol.
19, page 25 verso.

3) page 8.
6) page 37. 4) page 23.
7) page 41.
2) Shopping-Dialogues, page 2.
5)
page 24.
IV.
NUMERALS.
The Japanese language has
its
own numerals; but with
the introduction of
the Chinese system of measures,
weights and reckoning of time, the

early
Chinese
numerals and
into use.
the
Chinese marks of number came
and generally
Therefore one has to do with two sorts of numerals, with the Japanese
and with the Chinese.
The Japanese
are connected with Japanese words, and
the Chinese with Chinese.
29.
The ancient Japanese cardinal numbers

,
are:
nine.
ten.
Pltd (P't6, H'to)

Fiitfc (P'ta)
one.
I?
>
J
,
K6k6n6
,
two.
three.
y*
^
,
Too = once
So
,
^.
Mi
>/
ten , termination of teat*
3,
f
,4
-),
Yo
four.
five.
^
.
>
Momo
. .
hundred.
. .
y
>
,
Xtsu
']";
fo,
vo, as termination of
Mu, Muyu
,
six.
hundreds.
*]~
,
Nana
seven.
eight.
Tsi
tt
thousand.
.
.
Y&
and says for Hito (1)
y*, Y6rodu
ffi
ten thousand.
alto.
The vulgar man
Kokono (9), by way of abbreviation,
and Koto
Or*l
communication by OONO YASABUHOO BSQ.
138
CHAPTER
IV.
NUMERALS.
29.
These radical forms are used in the forming of compound words in which,
according to the principle fixed in
to be already
9.
I. e.
A.,
g.:
the idea of
number
is
supposed
combined with the object,

flower.
old.
Fit6-vino /ana, = one day's

i.
Fttd-yono sake = one night's rice-beer

,
e.
sake
that
is
only one night
Fltd-fdna
one-flowered.
Pitta-go, a twin.
dite.
Futd-gok6ro, a double heart.

- -
Fntd-nari, an hermaphro-
Futd-oyd, the parents.

island.
Futd-tdbi, twice.
Futd-nan6 sima, a two-
named
day;
Mi-ka, the day (a), which has the number three as characteristic, the third - the - of three also the
period
days (triduum).
Mi-ka-tsuki,
third-day-
moon,
the
moon
of the third day.
Mi-tose, the year three, also the period of
three years (triennium).
Mi-kusdno kayu, = three-herbed pap.

Mu-t6se
,
Yo-mo
the square.
the year six
also the period of six years.
Mu-t6seno, six yeared.
Nand-ydma, the Seven mountains.

1 to 9 take the
j|j|
Used as substantive numerals, the cardinal numbers from

suffix
^
in
tsu, which just as the Chinese numeral-substantive

the most ancient writings
1
(ko),
with
which
it
is
assimilated,
means, originally, a
is
piece of
taken for
bamboo
piece,
and, in a general sense, in the counting of articles,

2
number"
).
Consequently
we have
the following
compound
nouns
Fit6~tsu (F'tdts, H't6ts)
one.
Mu-tsii
six.
Futd-tsu (Ftdts)
.....
two.
three.
four.
five.
Nand-tsu
Yd-tsu
seven.
eight.
.
.
Mi-tsu
Yo-tsu
........... ...........
......
3
Kdkono-tsu
....
nine.
Itsu-tsu (lists')
These numerals answer to the question: Iku-tsu (a|?), how

Flto-tsu-fa, a single leaf
).
many
pieces?
Mii-tsii-hdna
or
Mu-tsuno
/tana, flowers to the
number of noun used
six,
being Mutsu characterized by the genitive termination no as a
attributively.
1)
Nippon-ki.
the
2) "When, in 1857, I published
Proeve eener Japansche Spraakkunst van DONKER CURTIUS, I con
sidered this tsu as the old genitive termination.
3)
The name
of Acrostichum Lingua.
CHAPTER
IV.
NUMERALS.
29.
139
By combination with
=
ari or ori (= to be), Ftt6, Ftitd,
Mi
and To form the and Yottari,

noons,
words Pitdri ($Jb), Fiitari

individual, alone;
(zl
A?)> mtiai
(H a
A?)'
pair, both;
triad, three together;
four;
which are only applicable to persons, and thus are used as substantives, as well
as attributively. his
Kun-siva sono flt6riw6

Iku-tari,
tsUtsusimii , the philosopher attends to
own
person, himself alone.
how many
persons?
,
The tens: 10, 20

which means ten
to 90, consist of the cardinal
numbers followed by }/
ao,
(just as ..ty in twenty).

;
Mi-so, three ten, =

,
thirty. If they are
used as substantive numerals
they take as suffix
(instead of
7,
tsu)
tei
which
to
is
only a modification of tsu, and for the sake of euphony also changes
dzi. Mi-so-dzi,
- thir-ty-number. Mi-so-dzino hdna, flowers to the number

be distinguished from y
>
of thirty.
Let this
zi,
for Misozi
means the age
of 30 years
(H*
are:
OC^)-
The tens
Radical forms.
Compounds with
To6-tsi,
tti,
To6,
also
To,
contracted from
ten.
use.)
one
ten.
F'tdso,
= once
y, twenty, not in
F&td-tsi,
two
,
tens.
F&td-tsi,
7, Mi-so,
y, Yo-so,
thirty.
Lyf
f ,
Mi-so-dzi,
Yo-so-dzii
te-*6-dzi,
number of
thirty.
forty.
forty.
3yf
commonly:
-f
f ,
number of
?y,
y
^
Itsu-so (W*fifty.
y f*.
(tt-(W*t), number of
fifty.
7, /-so,
,
Ma-s6,
sixty.
Ay
~f~
<f ,
Ma-sd-dzi,
A'in-wrfôc/cj,
number of sixty.
>
y ,Nand-so,
Fa-so
,
,
seventy.
y ^Tt
seventy.
eighty.
-Vyf,
ninety.
y ^^TzJ-so,
^t
> ,
number of eighty, rW(W', y y f A'otonrf-Wzt', > ninety.

,
ifomo, a hundred; in combinations &, -/

Fa-vo, 800; others
^
,
- t10
'
" ho;
thence r<>" r0f 400
"
I-vo, 500,
,
we have not met
with,
f Tsi, thousand; f 7 ^f ^, FWa-tsi-tsi,

57
Tsi-tri, thousands.
two thousand.
B r,
^
rtfrd-rf, ten thousand.

7*,
*,
t * f Nand-tri, nine thousand. f Momo-tti, a hundred thousand.

. ,
5?
times ten thousand, or a Momo-ydrtdzu, a hundred
million.
hundred times ten thousand, or eight millions. raw-ydrd(fet, eight
140
CHAPTER
IV.
NUMERALS.
29.
The Japanese numbers Momo,

neral sense for
Tsi and
Y&r6dzu are generally used in a geall
many
all
and all; Momo-ktisd,

things; Momo-tsi-dori
,
plants;
l
Tsi-tose,
many
years;
Yorddzuno mono,
all birds
its radical
).
If a numeral precedes another
numeral in
is
form
then
it is
the attri-
butive definition of such: Mi-yotsu
thrice four; Miso-yotsu, thirty times four.

is
Two and
mdri) futdtsu,
thirty,
i.
on the other hand,
expressed by Misodzi amdri (or simply
e.
a number of thirty plus a

. . .
number of two. One counts

ftt6tsu.
thus:
Eleven
To6-tsi
mdri
Twelve
.....
futdtsu
etc.
One and twenty,

Mu-s6-tsi mdri mutsuno Tcuni
Fatdtsi mdri fitdtsu etc.
(^ A
~\^
*fe~*l
'/^y
'
@=)
the
and sixty countries.

sand gods.
Ya-fo yorddzuno kami, eight hundred times ten thou-
The saying:
It is
more than 1792470 years, since the heavenly parents
descended from heaven,"

expressed by:
we
find in the ancient chronicle
Nippon-ki
III. 2 verso,
^5 -K *
I
-fc*
^^ T ^> f^
H? II -L
j|
O
iff
^fr
A matsu
tea
mi-oyd no ama-kUddri-mdsite y6n ko-
3
71
z^
"*
'
a *
Momo yorddzn tose

nandso yorodzii
kon6 yorddzU
tose
(100
X 10000 years) amdri

years) amdri futdtsi
tose (400 years)
<osi
tose
70 XI 0000 years) amdri ko-
W^
\-
-j
3
7-
_
^3
1
-^ 3
*?
K&^?
PA*
tose
(9X10000
5
')
If
(2000 years) amdri yo-vo

2
aman
Ut
^
|
i^h
^
i
nandso
iose
(70 years) aman'
dn.
7^
',.-?
The numerals in tsu and
tsi serve
as
nouns substantive and are
also used,
with or without the genitive termination no, as attributives.

fltdtsuni
kdktt) is
stte,
Kono simavami
6m6
yotsti,
ari,
this island (the island of the four countries, St-
of body a unit, and has of faces four in number.
1) Momo-tsi-dori 2)
is also
the
name
of the thrush, that imitates the voice of all birds,
The
original, printed with
some worn out forms, has nana instead of nanato.
CHAPTER
30.
IV.
NUMERALS.
30.
141
The Chinese cardinal numbers,

column contains the number
in full.
after the Japanese pronunciation.
The
*
first
?' Itsi
one.
..............
San
two.
three.
fo ur .
Go
five.
,
.................. sitsi (*'*' at ra o A'fct) .......... /, Fatsi (/*&) .................. .......... ft Jl$S> Kiu Ku ....... at Ye do * ^M <^f. Eng. ;t), Ziy t& +S ? Piyak' (tyaV) ................ "Q"|, Sen ...................... -^vj 7f v >' Man (^) ..................
Bikii
|
six.
seven.
eight.
'
'
nine.
ten.
'
11
rf
a hundred. a thousand.
ten thousand.
The number of the

definitely
tens, hundreds, thousands and tens of thousands
is
more
determined by the units preceding them, thus:

Is-ziyu, ten.
,
Go-ftyak\
Rop-piyik\
five
hundred.
hundred.
Ni-ziyu, twenty.
six
San-ziyu
thirty.
Sitsi-f1yak\ seven hundred.
Si-ziyu, forty.
Fap-plyalc\ eight hundred.
Go-ziyu,
fifty.
Ku-flyak\ nine hundred.

/*-#n , one thousand.
Rok'-ziyu, sixty.
ASftte/-
(7tVi)
z?'y?t,
seventy.
Ni-sen
etc.,
,
two thousand.
Fatsi-ziyu, eighty.
>?
Itsi-man once ten thousand.
i?3-,
,
Ku-ziyu, ninety.
Ip-p1yak\ one hundred.
Ni-man, twice ten thousand.

Ziyu-man, 10X10000.
,
-f
N-flydk\ two hundred.

Sam-llyak',
three hundred.
Ni-:iyu-man, 20X10000.
Ftyttlc-nMii,
a million.
mill.
hundred. Si-flyak', four
Ni-f1y<ik-man , two
1)
The numeral Si
(4)
also
is
mostly avoided
,,to
in
composition with nnuni,
and inpfneded by the
JapWMM
numeral Yo because Si
2) The
written form
means
would,
die."
?*r
in all respects,
answer rather to the Ytto pronuncution
it
howerer,
io
142
CHAPTEE
IV.
UTJMEUALS.
30, 31.
By the suffixing additional numbers all possible numbers Is-sen fap-plyak' roku ziyu roku Ziyu man itsi, 100001.
The number
If
is
are expressed; thus:
wen, the year 1866.
intended here as attributive definition belonging to this year.

is
however the meaning
1866 years, then the number
is
preceded by the ad-
verbial definition
number itself
Oy6so, J\^3 (pron. 6y6sso), = in sum, together, and the " followed by a numeral substantive (see 37). J\^ 3 -^ ^r [or -^
A&% ^f^*] fc^^ 59^

six (or six to seven) years.
Oy^so
rok&'ka, [or roku sitsilsa]
nenno aida, = within
The
necessity of taking
up
oydso in the translation,
naturally disappears in every language, that has a plural.
To
Japanese word,
the Chinese numerals are connected by the genitive

iro,
termination no.
31.
1)
Ziyu ra'no
twelve sorts.
Ordinal numerals,
the first, the second.
As
the most in use are:
The Chinese numbers
Itsi,
A z,
T
San
etc.,
followed by ^jjf'
ban, that
means watch, and number.

number?, answer
'$
To the question
^g^
i.
^H'vi Iku-ban, = what
^'V'
:
Itsi-ban,
number one,
e. e.
the
first.
=
*.
^ v'
:
Ni-ban, number two,

,
i.
the second.
Ell
|7tJ
v
3
"flf*
v Sam-ban number
three.
^^^5, Yo-ban, number

,
four, exceptionally for Si-ban.

|jj|
2)
The Chinese numbers
preceded by
i.
^ Dai, = series;
first.
thus:
j|=j
-^,
Dai-itsi,
sitsi,
one according to order,
e.
the
--
Nippon-Id ken daini ziyu
= Japanese chronicle, volume

"j^ ^*
27, literally:
sz,
27 according to the order of the
volumes,
3)
r"y
~^î
Dai-san
,
the third son.

,
The compounds
,
Itsi-ban
Ni-ban
Sam-ban
,
etc.
preceded by
,
^ ^ Dai
thus Dai-itsi-ban
Dai-ni-ban , Dai-sam-ban
first ,
second
third.
th
),
Dai-yo-ban
fourth, exceptionally for Dai-si-ban; so also Dai-zlyu-yo-ban (14
Dai-ni-ziyu-
yo-ban (24
th
).
With
the genitive termination wo, these three sorts of compounds become
attributive.
If only
two
objects are to be counted, the difference
is
made by
lam
Sen
and
*g
Go, before and after.
If the arrangement
is
limited to three classes,
Japan
<rr.
itself,
not yet adopted.

is
By
a mutation of the French letters j and y, in the Supplement to RODR.

jott
from page 15 you
generally found improperly for
(ten),
CHAPTER
are
TV.
NUMERALS.
31, 32.
143
they
ffj
i
distinguished as the topmost,
middle and lowest, by
f* fr
Ziyoo,
Tsiu and
ftsiro.
~^\^"Ge
),
or as foremost, next and last, by <Sot, Tsugi and

*t*
Ato or
_t J
ft|
? y
SI ?<> ~F ^
is
S?
**
*^ e 8ee^
second, third quality.
The
first, with reference to the time,

first
:
expressed by '*? /o/*fi, or

the
first
Fazime, no ,first
Fatsu-mono, the
firstlings,
fruits;
Famine no to, the
year (of a period).

32.
The
iterative numerals, once, twice
etc., are:
Japanese, to the question:

Iku-tabi, ^dl yjXrf x
Chinese, to the question:
$* /-'W
t-
how
often?
Nan-do,
-1 r
16? >t
**,
ft
jg
H
,
how
often?
>)
Ftt6-tabi, once.
Itri-do, once.
Futd-tabi, twice.
~
*.
1
|&
**,
Ni-do, twice.
San-do, thrice.
Mi-tabi, thrice.
Yo-tabi, four times.
Itsu-tabi, five times.
=r t IS *^ /^W
H
,
P9
fi
**'
Yo-do, four times.

<SiWo, four degrees.
Mu-tabi, six times.
^L
3*
j^
f6f AX^
H
,
Go-do,
five times.
N&nd-tabi, seven times.

Ya-tabi, eight times.
-/c2 ^^ * -^
^fc
H
,
Rok'Jo, six times.

Sitn-doi
^
7
F
ffi
**,
s^
11
times.
Kdk6no-tabi, nine times.

To-tabi, ten times.
In numbers higher than
also are
l'
y\^ j^
^L
Fat*i-<lo, eight times.
>K
H
'
û-^'
n* ne t"068-
the
Chinese numbers
teii; thus
-|-^ H
Ziyu-<lo, ten times.

.
compounded with
tbffsji
Ziyu-itsi-tabi,
eleven times,
le,
etc.
~
Momo-tabi,
a thousand times;
a hundred times;
-
many
times. -
7W-teM,
^f
{
many
times.
TW-faW momo-fW,
-
often. a thousand times, a hundred times');
^f TnlMi,
R5 S'
$
often.
TaJi,
numbers form a compound word, with which the Japanese cardinal

Tabi-ttto, a traveller.
means journey;
,)
The yomi: Kami, Naka, Sio,

11 J llti-do
is
in
the
c-a
I.
,ation, -conliBg
to Ik.
oI
not in n*. a native of YeMo, there at least,

2) Also
how many
degrees;
l 1
ffi
m~Jo
'2
ete.
8)
Abo
hundred time of
144
CHAPTER
IV.
NUMERALS.
32, 33: 34.
in*
By
3
|3J
Sanyo
(
do, three to four times;
San
si
do, 3
to
4.
these
suffixing
Me
}E|
*),
which means eye and,
figuratively,
mark,
iterative
T?O
numerals become ordinal numbers, which with the genitive inflection

Iku-tabi-me
,
are also attributive.
$% sy^
^
>>*^*
J& %
*-
H *.
v
what number of times?

To-
Flt6-tabi-me
or Chinese
^
,
Itsi-do-nie , the first time.
tabi-meno hanasi, a story for the tenth time.

33.
The doubling
or
multiplying numerals, single, twofold

,
etc.,
consist of the Jap.
noun "X, veorhe, vulgo JC
ye ore, -fold (German fach),
preceded by the Japanese cardinals.
To
the* question Iku-ye (=j^|? IfC^),
= how
manifold? answer:
Itsu-ye, five-fold.
-yd, single.
Yd-yd, eight-fold.
Ftd-ye, two-fold.
six-fold.
Kbkono-ye
nine-fold.
Mi-ye, threefold.

Yo-yd, four-fold.
Mu-vd
(obsol.),
To-ye, ten-fold.
Ndnd-ye, seven-fold.
Fatd-ye, (obsol.), twenty-f.
Fitd-yeno fdna, a single flower (flos simplex).

fold,
i.
Ya-yeno fdna, an eight-
e.
full flower (flos plenus).

is
The counting by pairs = double, pair,

'^
expressed by the Chinese
^^
( a ^ so
PR)'
t)ai
in connection with Chinese numerals, thus:
= 1
^*
<
'fg
Ttsi bai,
one (or
a) pair.
-j-*
Ni
bai,
two
pair. pair.
,
Ziyu
bai, ten pair.
7, Fiyaku-bai,
is
a hundred pair.
Instead of bai,
pair
also used.
~*^
î ^
Js-soo, one pair.
34.
For sort numbers, as one sort, two sorts
etc.,
serve the Chinese
numbers compounded with the Chinese

kind. They are,
2/3., Is-su
2/2.,
,
Îfsiyu
(pron. su), which
means sort,
after the
Yedo pronunciation:
one
sort. sorts.
tr >? i/ 2.
,
Rok'-su
H'tsi-su
Ni-su
San-su
......
Si-) su
two
.... ....
. .
.
six sorts.
seven
sorts.
three sorts.
.
Hdtsi-su
eight sorts.
-,
Y6- (not
Go-su
four sorts.
five sorts.
Ku-su
T6-su,
etc.
.
nine
.
sorts.
sorts.
.,
ten
Ren-ziyak' va,
wo no nagaki
to
mizikaki
to no ni-siyu art,
of the bird Ren-ziyak
(Bombyciphora) there are two sorts: as well a long- as a short-tailed.
CHAPTER
IV.
NUMERALS.
34, 35.
145
With
sin-too
,
the termination no these substantives are used attributively: San-riyuno
the spirit-service of three kinds.

sort, kind,
f.
The Japanese numerals are

Fvta-Kusdno
ttutdye,
also used either

'ftf
compounded with Kusa,

two
koye
inst.
HL %%%. ./
f.
different traditions, or
combined with the

fi
pluralsuffix
rano,
inst.
7t*urano
^
(
-Jsi,
3L ^ )M 3 ^3
etc.
etc.
x) the
ye kinds of vowels occuring in fa, fa, fa, XY,
&o; sa,
35.
To
express the distributive
numbers, one
at a time,
two
at a
time,
etc.
are used:
1) the Jap. adverb
^*
dzu-tett, pron.
dzts,= at a time, preceded by
the Jap. numerals FM6-tsu, Futd-tsu (= one piece, two pieces), or also by the
Chinese numerals in connection with the object counted. Dz*t*&
is
expressed
ft
by ^gl".
To
the question iku-tsu dztdsu, jjfel 5flj,
how many
pieces at
time? answer:
Fttd-tsu dzutsu,
h5
^1
one piece at a time.

pieces at a time.
Futd-tsu dzutsu,
H?
=
jj, two
Navawb
As
it
one spins ropes (fdru), two pieces at a time. futd-sudzi dzutsu fdru,
is
navawo (rope) appears, here the accusative
the objective direct to

is
/am,
whereas futd-sudzi dzutsu, by way of adverbial definition,

object
and verb. -
?= Zl
Ht JS
)
^
>
placed between the

</o
^toi-mVwm *m
is
twice or thrice a day each time.

ofcftfeowo
--In
"g"
accordance with this

ieri-fiuri
the saying:
a*rfr
),
kodomoni Too Mydku
wo
</r<*
yari
-
= gire
to these boys a
Too hfydku, one piece at a time.
!;t?la't
xIl a
ST%^
sfl^
^T ^^,
}
Ptt6-lro ziyu-ni dan dzutxt arl-mdffi, of one
and the same color, twehe
pieces
at
time are at hand. --
^t|
A 9 Rj %?/ ^
^*
%oo
two pieces of 2 fassak dzutsuno futd-kire*),
yoo 8 JnA at a time (=
Jap. feet).
when persons are spoken One, two, three or four at a time,

by F*t6ri dzutsu, Ftodri
dziitsu,
of, i> expressed
Mitdri dz*t**, Yotldri d:*t*.
1)
to
The common
written form
$g ?
ineswt '
in
!t
'
ô^ ^
1
to
^
ta
^^.
,
Misled by indistinct eiamples
badly printed
J.p.ne
book. w.
bt.
1857
FUo-ds*ds* intel of FUo* page 64 improperly adopled Too kigtk N 171
*&*
i.
f.
..a
handrtd (cwh) wortk," iMOrip-
tion OB the
new
of the period Ttm-too (tolgo Ttmfo). Jap. bronze coin

p. 88.
10
146
CHAPTER
IV.
NUMERALS.
35, '36.
= how many persons
at a time? (see
29.)
Ko
fnndni fttdri dzwtsn noritaru

sixty, seated one at a
fnndkatd roku-ziyu fodo
kogi-kitdri, sailor to the
number of
time in a small boat, came rowing.

2) In the
is
same manner
instead of dzutsu
is
Ate ni
T)
the modal of Ate
used,
which means an object, that

it
proportioned to another,
and
fully
answers to
in respect of value or quality.
We
consider
it
equivalent to
per
ration, in proportion."
Iku-tsu ateni,
F$t6-tsu ateni,
$$%%
uij
]/LT =
^
'
how many
pieces per ration?
-^ Hf}
^T=>
one pi ece P er ration.
Futa-tsu ateni, two pieces at a time.
Doru
36.
itsi
mai ateni yarn,
to give one dollar to each person.
Fractional numbers or broken numbers

The denominator
are expressed
by means
of Chinese ciphers and numerals. or
as genitive, indifferently with, PPH
without no, precedes the numerator, thus

itsi,
^-*
Y ^
^
PÎ
fy
'î
Kin-riyoono si-bu
or si-buno
koban.
itsi,
i.
e.
one of the four parts of a Riyoo gold,
= a fourth
R/lyoo or
^jp^ fy^si
Ham-bun, =
*^
the half part, the half. a third (part).
^ ^" 7
3t^
Sam-bu
Si-bu
itsi,
PJ^^f*-^
^,
'f'
'^,
itsi,
a fourth.
^
^f*"
7
7>
Go-bu
itsi,
fifth.
^" ^
-\^ fy
Roku-bu
SUsi-bu
Fdtsi-bu
itsi,
a sixth. a seventh.
7 7
'^
'^
itsi,
/V?
itsi,
an eighth.
^^
-J-"
^*
>;7
'^
Ku-bu
,
itsi,
a ninth.
a tenth.
itsi,
5f
-^
-^
Ziyu-bu
'^?
itsi,
7
-j-*^
l=f
-^ ^j^
'
Ziyu-itsi-bu
an eleventh.
^ ^*" ^
'
Fiydku-bu
Sen-bu
itsi
a hundredth.
^^^ 7
^
~J^ ^. ^>-
^,
itsi,
a thousandth.
itsi
,
Jfe^
'
man-bu
a then thousandth.
,
man-bu san
three ten thousandths.
In broken numbers
^- is
generally read 6w instead of bun
and therefore often
but improperly superseded by
7
*,
bu, the
name
of a superficial measure.
CHAPTER
Mi-tsu
IV.
NUMERALS.
36, 37.
147
properly of a
itsi,
Mi-tsuni means one of three,
two of three,
is
number of
three, being the denominator, which
expressed by a Japanese nu-
meral, the partitive genitive of the numerator expressed by a Chinese numeral.
They count
Yo-tsu
Itsu-tsu
further:
itsi,
itsi,
itsi,
one of
four.
five.
Ya-tsu
itsi,
one of eight.
itsi,
one of one of
Kok6no-tsu
one of nine.
Mu-tsu
six.
Kok6no-tsu fatsi, eight of nine.
Nand-tsu
itsi,
one of seven.
a
The division of
hundred by ten
is called
Wari,
,
f[i]
^,
= splitting.
"% If'K' Itsi-wari, = 10 per cent (10/ 50/ Ku wari, ziyu wari, - 90/ 100/
.
).
JVt,
*w,
go trari, = 20, 30, 40,
Bu,
Wari.
fj*
r
,
vulgo chiefly but erroneously

Itsi bu,
^r
an,
is
called
the tenth part of

.
fr^,
is
per cent. Ni,
',
go 6u, = 2, 3, 4, 5/
Jtiei
Bin, J|C^,
cent (TC/O).
W"J
the tenth part of Bu.

so
jjC,
si,
""t =
tel
Ui per
And
further:
1
Ni, son,
go rin, = TV.
tV
.
1%.
tWo-
~fc
3*
^ ~' v JS v
,
H^
Si-wari go-bu san-rin ,
45,3*/
The
definition
that the import duty of certain articles shall be paid for with
shall
35 percent, in the Regulations, under which the Netherlands-Trade

ried
be car-
on in Japan, belonging
to the Treaty of the 18

is
th
Aug. 1859, edition of the

~fa
Japanese text page 25 verso line 2,
expressed by
^^
$j
"^
&'$.
e.
_t ^
A $fa ^î Migiva san wari go bu no un-ziyquico komu &e, L
on the
said articles a duty of
35/
shall
be paid.
or
37.
Numeral-substantives,
Numeratives.
Since the Japanese language, like the Chinese,

tical
is
deficient in the
gramma-
and plural
(see
page 53
5),
to
ditinguuh what
enumerated as something in the singular, or

it
in the plural an a repetition of
singular objects,
must have recourse
to
certain names,
is
which, joined to a
is
numeral,
unity so
express
that the object,
which
to
be counted,
present a*
six
many
times, as the numeral denotes.

uses
For
one cannon,
cannons,"
si x
the Japanese
an expression answering
to:
tone-piece cannon,
-piece
cannon," in which case tone-piece" and

butive
definition
six-piece" have the value of an attriplace,

is
to
cannon," or, in
its
found: > cannon one-piece,
cannon
six-piece."
The
number of
suchlike auxiliary
names
in
Japanese
is
greater, than
is really
necessary.
Considering objects in respect of their outward
148
are
CHAPTER
counted
IV.
NUMERALS.
37.
appearance,
racteristic,
they
according to one
fish,
or
another
noticeable
cha-
as stags,
by heads,
by
their tails,
brooms and objects with

articles into classes
,
handles
by the handles. Hence has arisen a distribution of

either
which are denominated
with Japanese or with Chinese names, and are
usually indicated with Chinese characters.
The Japanese names of
classes
are
associated with Japanese numerals, the Chinese with Chinese.
We
have thus for

,
one piece of wood" either the Japanese expression
-^
(or also
2j
^ s ~fo*
Fit6-
motono
ki,
list
or the Chinese
'^
2JJv^V^' Ippon
up
in
i.
Ipponnd)
ki.
A
under
of these classes has been taken
some Japanese Encyclopedias,

e.
the
head of gj*^ -r^tS'
Tsui-miyau,
names which are used

describes
also
for
pendants or matches; a denomination,

racter
which
very justly
dictionaries
the
chaof
of these words.
The Japanese-Chinese
contain
lists
these words, being amassed, the Japanese under Fit6 (one), the Chinese under
-^.
'^
Itsi,
Itsu, but at the
same time being mixed with words which

as
indicate
an idea of measure or of a quantity,

rice.
one grain of
rice,
one
bale of
As the
last
mentioned properly belong to the names of the objects
contained in the dictionaries,
we
limit ourselves here to those auxiliary
names,
which are alone used for fixing the idea of

Japanese and Chinese.
number, and them we
divide into
I.
Japanese Numeratives.
Fasira,
,
1.
>^^,
7^
post, column, for Kamis or gods of the Japanese myths.
Iku-fasira
^g ^
^ how many
,
(gods) ?
Fitd-fasira no kami
one god.
Mi-faswano kami, three gods.

are wind-gods.
of
Kono futd-fasirava kazdno kami

here used
substantively
,
nari, both these
Futa-fasira,
includes
alone the idea
both."
Applied to statues of Buddhist saints, Fasira
is
expressed by
^
jjjjp
,= statue.
Sv'Ê* W?^*ffl
/
^^|
'h|]!'
)i
one Bronze statue of Sakya-
Buddha.
2.
3.
Kutsi, (U ^,
mouths,
for souls, that are not to be counted. Also Mund, breast.
Kasira, ]p|^, head, for stags and wild boars.
StM
mi-kasira, or
Mi-
kasirano sikd, three stags.
1) Nippon-ki,
XIX, page 25
verso.
CHAPTER
4.
IV. NTTMEEALS.
37.
149
Pami, |gf, bit,
for reined horses.
ATmano
ftt6- (vulg. fttdtsu)
one reined horse.

5.
Moto,
2f
,Hy,
pale, seat, for hunting-hawks, which are held on
perches; for trees.

6.
Fa,
Wa, ^J '\ ?
feather, wing, for birds.

to let start falcons
-
Kitino ftt6-va, one pheasant

couples.
Hayabusavro futa-fa kakuru,

7.
by
Compare page 130,
7.
O, JH^,
Ori, ^ftf,
tail, for
fish.
Koifitd-o, two carp.

for perch
8.
fragment, piece,
(Tan), which are
offered as
present, and from modesty are called a small piece.

9.
Sudzi, ^JJ5^, line (from sumi, ink and
cfci,
way), for things that are

line,
long and thin.
Nova, Tddzund, Tsuru, Obi fU6-sudzi, one

girdle.
one rein,
one tendon, a
10. Fira, |jr|||
^,
spot, stretched, for things which are
flat
and even.
Osi-gava fttd-fira, one piece of leather. 7 11. No, ijlg breadth, for rolls of writing.
,
Maki-mono fU6-no, one
roll.
12.
Ma, ^jj^, room,
for apartments.
Ne-dok6ro /W^-ma, one sleeping-
apartment.
13.
Tomaya, "^ ^
^v
vulgo Tomaz, for warehouses.
Kira fU6-tomai t
a warehouse.
14.
Nagare,
^**, stream,
two
flags.
for rivers
and waving
flags.
Fnid-naffdrt tarn
or fata,
15.
two
rivers,
Yeda,
16. Furl,
^J, branch. ^^, sway, for
Naginata fit6-yeda, one pike.
drawn swords.
><nia
/M<J-/im, one drawn
sword.
II.
Chinese Numeratives.
of a Japanese
The scope
class of
Grammar
excludes a complete
list
of this numeroui
all
idle words. For such we refer the reader,
who
wishes to see them
treated.
to
J.
EDKINS,
Grammar
121 and further, of the Chinese Colloquial Language, page
and
restrict ourselves here to those
most in
use.
noun the In the union of the Chinese numerals with a successive numeratiTe
allows Japanese spoken language
as
it
itself
a few modifications of sound, which arise

...
were naturally from a rapid pronunciation, though
writing generally
remain unnoticed.
The
rule,
which the spoken language follows
in this retpect is: if the IMIU-
150
CHAFPER
IV.
NUMERALS.
37.
merative noun begins with &,
s,
or with the labial
(A)
and
/>,
then the
numeral unites
assimilation,
itself
more
closely to it,
and the
final
consonant undergoes an
which has been already

.
illustrated
on page 19.
. .
.
Itsu-k
Itsu-s
Itsu-t
becomes Ik-k
Is-s
T>
.
San-f
becomes Sam-b
Zik-k
Zis-s
Zit-t
.
Ztyu-k ...
Zlyu-s ...
.
It-t
Itsu-f
Ip-p
Zlyu-t ...
.
Roku-f
Rop-p
subject
Ztyu-f
Zip-p
The combinations
to
assimilation are to be
known by
the numeral
e.
g.
*
|g|
,
pron. Ik-ka.
,
No
assimilation takes place
when
the enumerative
noun begins with one

also
e.
of the
impure sounds g, z, d, which are pronounced as ng, nz, nd, or

r,
with m, n,
-^
y and w. The
characteristic of this class
is
the form
g.
^C^'
Itsi-mai.
To the Chinese Enumerative nouns most

1.
in use belong:
^^5
'^
>
Nin
'^
>\v)'
m an,
vj? s^
for persons.
is
^^
,
Itsi-nin^
= the Only,
applied to the
-j-*
Emperor (Mikado)
alone.
Bon-si ni-nin
two Bonzes.
^^
5^
;^
J^ ^
Siya-mon ziyu yo
,
nm,
ten Shamans.
San-ninno onna, three women.
Go-ninno kwai-kokft-nin
five foreigners; Kwai-kokti-nin go-nin, foreigner five persons.
The conversational language uses
for one, two, three or four

(see
persons
the
words Fytdri, Futdri, Mitdri and Yottdri

merchant.
2.
page 145).
Fttorino akindo, one
F&tdrino
/
siii-fu,
two
sailors.
^*
f@5 by
abbreviation
/^
or
^r
Ka
"^ f!|*)i the most geneit
rally
used enumerative noun, applicable to objects, which
is
wished to cha,
racterize as individuals, as a piece,
answers to the Japanese
tsu
(page 138).
The counting according

Ik-ka
,
to the Yedo-pronunciation is:

1.
-f
Go-ka,
5. 6.
7.
Ku-ka,
Zik-ka
,
9.
Ni-ka
2.
Rok-ka,
Hltsi-ka,
10.
,
San-ka,
Si-ka ,
^
^
Hn
3.
4.
Ziu-ik-ka
Ziu-ni-ka
11.
2^ 2. cr
Hatsi-ka,
8.
12.
'?>
$T^'
Ik-ka-styo, a district (by counting).

district.
-^ J^)f^
/<SM-
??/o
(ts-so)
one and the same
:Elv y^
v*
?> San-ka
nitsi,
three
days.
^.5
^? San-zitsu, the day three, the third day.

Dai-'zi^ the four great temples.
J3j -^r
^p^, Sikano
CHAPTER
IV.
NUMERALS.
37.
151
the word
To show
that a
quantity counted
is
spoken
is
of,
Oydso
pronounced 6y6sso, = in sum, together,

ber.
generally placed before the

-
num-
fas
/
+ ^r ÎIT,
Oy<$so ik-ka
Oy6o
ziyu-ka geMi, ten months.
fa$
i.
59
'
nenno aida, the interval of one year (in counting),
e.
a year long. 3
-
E$o
stuffs
/Eo
etc.
.3ci
Kki. Hiki
E*)i
some
is:
objects,
which are paired or
given in pairs, as horses, horned cattle,
sorts offish, such as perch (Tot),
woven
The counting
at
Yedo
Ip-piki
152
CHAFrEB
IV.
NUMERALS.
37.
Midzu
8.
ip-pai, a saucer or a glass of water.
Tsa ni hai, two cups of
tea.
^Y' ^*>
Mai
'-
$C?)' Candle, anything
single, leaf, for things thin

sorts of fish etc.
and
flat,
as boards, paper, prints, coined silver,
some
9-
Pon, Hon
-^ 2[
<),
stem, stalk, handle,
for trees, plants, as a
in general things long and slender,

pencil (Fude),
which have the property of length,
fan (Oogi),
etc.
spoon (Tsiya-siydku), whip (Mutsi), needles (Fari),
salmon (Sake),
At Yedo, they count:

H'tsi-hon
.
CHAPTER
~w
TV.
NUMERALS.
-
37.
153
15
feet.
Wj'
Kiyaku, Kiak
$ )Îv), foot,
for articles of furniture
baring
Tsukue, or Keu-sok ik-kiak, one desk. Siyoo-gi san-ftak, three couches.

16.
TSo
!,
swing,
stick.
for trunks
it-tso,
and
traveling-articles,
which
are carried hanging

bitsu or
on a
Norimono
litter
or sedan chair.
Naga-
Naga-motsi
ni-tso,
two traveling trunks.

vessel, for ships. Counting
is
17.
done:
154
CHAFFER
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
38.
^3
^l$$
* or
^"
^
nil
'
Ip~P u n
so-kan
or
te-gami
one
sealed letter. 26.
J^ ?
Soku
'
?}, foot, for shoes:
Tabi
is-sokti,
one pair of
stockings.
NOTATION OF TIME.
38.
Enumeration of
K
years.
h'tf,
Year, Japanese
1.
^,
T6si, old- Japanese
Jfoe, Chinese 4î^,

is
.Afrw.
The enumeration
(
of years in pure Japanese
limited,
on the question:
Iku
tdsd
^g ^
,
4]
.)
how many
years ?
to
4j ^
'.
Fit6
ttise,
a full year.
Nand Yd
tdsd,
seven years.
-^
Futd
^/i'
t&sd,
two
years.
tdsd,
eight years.
1
^
IJy
^^^,
3
<Sse,
three years.
h
K&kdno
f^
),
nine years.
4^t'
^s^j four years.

five years.
-J-
, '
TJ Wse, ten
years. *
itsu tdsd,
Momo ttisd, a hundred years.

Tsi fos^, a thousand years.
T,
>
six years.
2.
The Chinese enumeration of

years?
Itsi-nen,
years,
on the question:
rp
Nan-nen
how many
or
.
'^
Ik-ka-nen, a year.
Ni-nen
Ni-ka-nen,
,
two years.
San-ka-nen three
3
JJy
^5o ^' Yo-ew,

i^v
Go-nen,
etc.
.
Si-ka-nen, four
3
-ff .
Go-ka-nen,
etc.
five
The Chinese
si
(four) immediately before new is superseded
by the Japanese yo
as they do 'nt like to
speak
of
^^ ^f^v?
^ ne
Si-nen, the year of death.
ffiff
|Jt|
p|
')
^
-^
~P^ ^v>
year.
y ear 40 -from the accession to the throne.

it is
/fe
in)
^^=t
X, Yo-tosi-meni or Yo-nen-meni nari-masu,
now
(it
goes
now
the fourth
3.
is
The question:
how
old? = Japanese iku
tftse
(^^
J|| ^) -\^
bow many
j^jfr
years?
answered in the Chinese manner of counting.
-p ^
^ =T
^g=
^^S7,
th year of his life he Ziyu-sitsi zai nite kurdini tsuki-tamoo, in the 17
1)
Vulgo Kono
iose also.
CHAPTER
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
39.
155
comes to the throne.

39.
1.
Nl-ztyuno
tosini
or Tori ni-zXyuni, in his 20th year.
Chronological notation of years.
Japan uses the Chinese enumeration of years, which was introduced by a

').
buddhist missionary in A. D: 602
After this the years, as well a the months

after the
and the days, are counted by sexagenary periods, and named

sexagenary cycle, which
itself consists
is
known
of a cycle of ten and one of twelre signs.
The cycle often series
called
from the
five
elements:
Wood,
Fire, Earth,
Metal and Water (Japanese Ki, Fi, Tsutsi, Kane, Midzti), which, each taken
double, are distinguished as masculine and femine, or, after the Japanese conception, as the elder and as the
younger brother
are:
1
(^Jf,
,
Ye and j^J
h
,
To).
The names of the ten-series cycle

1-
EP
JE
Kind ye. Kind to.

Find ye.
7
-
2.
Y.,
3.
8.
$,
/ Y* Kanndto.
4.
T/
Find to.
9.
M)de&n6yt.
.1
5.
n' Tsutsin6ye.
relation
10. to
i.
/)</*
nrf to.
The twelve-series cycle has
the division of the zodiac into
twelve equal parts, and bears the names of the Chinese zodiac, for which Japanese names of animals are used, as:
1.
Ne .......
Usi
Mouse.
Bull.
AT ma r
'-
Horse.
2.
?*'
3.
Tora
Tiger.
9.
4.
U
s'
Hare.
(pron. Taats) Dragon.
10.
11. 12.
Ton'
Cock.
5.
Hound.
ENria*
till
6.
Serpent.
If both series are let proceed side
by
side,
both are run out, then the

year
is
sixty-series cycle
or
is
obtained,
of which the
first
called
Ep
^^
The
Ktnfye neno
ton, and the sixtieth
^^^
or
MWrimfto
ino
tori.
first
year of the cycle
now
current answer to 1864.
I)
j.
See Japan',
Beziige
mil
** *"
**.
HOFFMANN. 1839. Page 126.
156
CHAPTER
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
39.
SYNOPSIS OF THE SEXAGENARY CYCLE.

i
in
iv
vi
vn vin
ix
10
11
12
CHAPTER
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
39, 40.
The second year of king
ZIN
MH
is
called
A
jpljlf;
jj
J^l
jfl
iâ
jJ
(IX 11)
40.
H=4t.
(f,
Enumeration of years by year-names.

year-names, Nen
or
In 645 A. D. the reckoning by years of government was superseded by a

reckoning by
goo
-77*^).
Just as in China, these are appointed by the Sovereign, so are they in Japan
by the Mikado, and

changed by him
,
after
the lapse of a larger or smaller
number of yean
this
being one of the prerogatives of his crown. The adoption

l
).
of his year-name pleads for the recognition of his sovereignty
The 68 Chinese words, from which
the Japanese year-names are chosen, are:
The
successive year-names of the current century are:
Klyoo-wa
1801.
1804.
7t
1854.
-
TC 186
38:
rig: I
1830.
(
1864.
Tem-poo)
Koo-kwa
1844.
1868.
1875.
I
7C
Addition to the edition Japan. The
first
1848.
of 1876.
Introduction of the Western Calendar in
of Januar 1873 (according to the time calculation of Greenwich)
the Japanese Government has adopted the European Calendar with his twelf months.
Therefore the correctness of the Japanese ohronology,

question, as
1)
may
not be called in
is
done by some bookmakers.

of the year-names seems,
in latter time*,
The change
not
to
btve been known early enough,
with one yew-name, when another had taken iU place. reckoning has heen continued
158
CHAPTER
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
40, 41.
his
weeks and Sundays

C.,
and
fixed as the
beginning of their era the year 660
B.
which
is
the foundation-year of the Mikado-dynasty.

first
The
first
of Januar
1873 was thus the

thousand
five
day of the
first
month
of the Japanese year 2533 (two

certain notarial Act:
,
hundred and thirty
three).
The dating of a
^jKîHH+H^H -^
^
Bfj VJ
'^+3
,
is
equalized there with
A Ê
M + 3L
and agrees with our 15 th Januar 1873,

(
.
thus the Japanese

41.
still
continue making use of the Nen-go
^^
).
Division of the solar year.

solar year are divided into twelve equal parts
The course of the sun and the

(months),
called
after
the zodiac, beginning with

falls.
the
arc
of the Mouse,
on
half of which the winter solstice
If the twelve arcs are bisected,
the 24
i minutes are obtained, periods of 15 days 5 hours and 14
by which the hus|jit*'
bandman
regulates his labour.
These 24 divisions, called
|[jf |>
Sek-ki or
modifications of the weather, are distributed by pairs over the twelve months of
the year
the
first
of each pair being called
"BjJ
Setsu
the second
Pp ^
7
Tsiu.
Ris-sun
...
.
3 Febr.
Ris-siu
...
.
Aug.
Beginning of the spring
Beginning of the autumn.
U-sui.
19 Febr.
5 March.
\, Slyo-slyo
Local heat.
.23 Aug.
.
Rain water.
Q
,
Kiyoo-tsits.
Awakening
FdkU-ro.
"White dew.
8 Sept.
of the insects.
sun-bun
... ...
20 March.
5 April.
<^,
Siu-bun
...
23 Sept.
8 Oct.
Middle of the spring.
Middle of autumn.
Sei-mei
Clear.
a
,
Kan-ro
Cold dew.
...
.
Koku-u
Seed rain.
... ...
. .
20 April.
5 May.
Soo-koo
23 Oct.
7
Fall of hoar-frost.
,
Rik-ka
Rit-too
Nov.
Begil ning of the
summer.
Beginning of the winter.
Seo-man.
Little plenty.
20 May.
5 June.
|
|>
Seo-sets
...
.
22 Nov.
7 Dec.
Little snow.
,
Boo-siu
...
.
.
Dai-sets.
Great snow.
Transplanting of the rice.
Ge-zi
.21 June.
6 July.
^, Too-zi
...
22 Dec.
6 Jan.
Height of the summer.
Height of the winter.
Seo-siyo
...
.
.
Seo-kan
...
.
Little heat.
Little frost.
Dai-siyo.
Great heat.
23 July.
Dai-kan.
Great
frost.
20 Jan.
The
civil
year begins with Ris-sun (beginning of the spring).
Ris-sun yori
is
fatsi ziyu
nitsi
me, or the 80
th
day from the beginning of the spring
our
CHAPTER
23th of April.
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
41, 42.
159
Time
is
Bi-gan (ffi
very commonly determined after the two equinoctial feasts
j^
),
which
last
seven days each, the principal feast, that takes
place on the fourth day, falling on the day of the equinox.

42.
Enumeration of months.
to the question Iku-t**ki
(
Months are reckoned in answer

Nan-getsu, how many months?
Japanese.
$fc
ft
J), O r
Chinese.
'^
Fatd-tsUki.
Mi-tstiki.
fty
ft
}i
Itsi-gets or
-^
Tk-ka-yett,
one month.
9 months.
Zl
.
$ Ni-gets
ft
-.
^
3
ft y San-gets
Si-
3
4 5
Yo-tsUki.
Itsu-tstiki.
"ff.
J-]
y Go-gets
Mu-ts&ki.
Nand-tstiki.
7
Ya-tsuki.
/\ ^
Fatsi-gets
A
If
S 9
10
.
Kdkono-tstfki.
To-tsiiki.
y Ku-gets
..
12
To
the question Nan-gwaLt
(^ ^ ft /),
month.
at
Yedo Xan
ngat*,
which month?
(of the year) the
names following answer:

,
Siyoo-gwats
(at
first
a^
^
[,
ft
'
Sttti-ittrut*
seventh month.
eighth
Yedo Soo
ngdtstt).
'4
ft
''"t"
Ni-gwats, second
San-gwats,
third
^
"if
ft
ft
^ ~
'-
K>i-,,>i-,,',
ninth
/%u-(/>*t'>i)-,nr.>t.*,
tenth
>
Si-gwats, fourth
""o^^
>
^
^
Zin-it.i-,ncat*i eleventh
Go-gwats,
fifth
month.
"
RokU-gwats, sixth
%>n-ni-tnc<ti.i
twelfth
>
These names are good for the intercourse of every day

writings and in almanacs the months are also
life;
in chronological
<
named
after the sexagenary

is
The intercalary month.
As the
civil
year of the Japanese

In'gin
a lunar year
connected with the solar year, the mouths continually
with the
new moon
l)
Itsi-gets,
a whole mouth.
160
CHAPTER
IT.
NOTATION OF TIME.
42, 43.
and have 29 or 30 days alternately. Thus to the

or 355 days.
common
lunar year belong 354
To keep
the
four seasons even with the revolution of the sun,
every two or three years an intercalary

obtains the
Vy
; (ypl ^).
month
follows,
(Uruu-dznki)
is
added, which
name
of the
moon, which
it
preceded by the word Uruu
The
t=t
intercalary
month
following
the
second
month
is
thus called
^m^
ypi'V ,7
^JaZi x
43.
Uruu nigwats, = supernumerary second month.

days.
rising to
Enumeration of the
The natural day, from the

Jap.
the setting of the sun,
is
called in
U, Fi, Hi; the night 5, Yo; the midday Firu\ the midnight Yoru. The
compound Firu-yoru,
to the Chinese
-$C
day and night, means the civil day;
it
is
equivalent
j|i
Y
>
Tsiu-ya, and, just as it, applied to the astronomical
day
also.
In connection with the year and month, the

Chin.
1.
civil
day
is
called Jap.
Ka,
Q
or
^ ^,
Nitsi (or Zitsu); both are used in counting the days.
After the Chinese
manner they count, with

$jj^%
or without the numerative
jjgj*
^,
ka, to the question:
*, Ikn-ka,
1 day.
how many
days?
'^
Hi* HH*
HI*
*
j|j=j
'
lk-ka
nitsi,
~
""",
3f,
Ni-ka
San-ka
Si-ka
nitsi,
2 days.
lElv
? ^
'
nitsi,
3 days.
etc.
^
ptj
nitsi ,
4 days
after the
.
reckoning with the numerative j|f}*, ka (page 150):
v ~HI^
t^
PJ
v ra
ka
*'
0^ y ^^
J^
Sanziu san-si-ka nitsino aida,
within 33 to 34 days.
If the numerative
*
jgj
,
is left
out
the Si-nitsi (4 days)
because
it
also
means dying-day,
is
superseded by the Japanese
Yok-ka; for 14 days
is
said
Zfyu-yok-ka, for 24 days Ni-ztyn yok-ka, for 34 days San-ztyu yok-ka

2.
etc.
first
The Japanese manner

and to the 20
th
of counting, which extends only to the

,
ten
days
is
and 30
th
refers to the days of a
month
when
the
month
expressly
named
previously; this not being the case, the counting

is
must then
be considered to begin from another given date, which however

in the calculation.
not included
The days of the month,
- -
it
generally begins with the

*),
new moon,
are
called, after the question: Idztt-ka ('fnf^
= which day? or Idzureno fi-kal
CHAPTER
*
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
43.
161
CHAFEEE
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
43, 44.
If
is
Ka
or Nitsi be followed
by
^*
Me
(see
32)
then this expression
equivalent to an express definition of the day by an ?> Mai-nitsi,

is
ordinal noun of number.
^Y
arises
said for: daily;
^7
5^,
Kaku-zitsu, the next day but
one; M^-ka-meni, on the third day; Mi-ka-me g&t6ni fatsuru nek-ki, a fever which
(recurs) every third day, the tertian ague. to day, to
Kon-nitsiyori yok-ka-meni,
on the fourth day from

date
is
day
as the point of departure
from which the
reckoned, not being included in the calculation.

at
Yddo mukdsi yok-ka-me

old, held every fourth
th
,
gtitdni itsi tdtsisi nari,
Yedo, market has been, of
day
,
(or every four days), thus either
on the 4
th
,
the 8
th
or the 12
or on the 1
it
st
th
or 9
th
day
-J-*
etc.).
Muika-meni
deki agarimasta, he accomplished
on the 6 th day.
"^
fU- PH
day.
^*
^ *=
San-zm san
si
ka
nitsi
me ni on
,
the
33 rd or 34
th
44.
Notation of hours.
This dial shows the two methods of marking the hours in use in Japan.
CHAPTER
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
44.
163
exhibited
I.
According to one method

of the
dial, is,
the original Chinese astronomical
on
the inside
portions
as
is
seen, the civil day divided into twelve equal
of time
(^p^,
Toki, times),
which are named
after
the zodiac, as
etc.
^PJ B$
first
is
Neno
doki, Mouse-time, -ftt-KJpf,
Ustno doki, Bull-time,

is
At
Yedo they say Kok

called ;$J |",
instead of Told.
The Toki
divided into two halves; the
Styo,
first
beginning, the second,
j^, 5,
= the true
or proper.
Each
half, being equivalent to
an hour according
to our reckoning,
has four subordinate divisions, called 5^lj?,
Kok
or
notches, each of 15
^>
Bun (=15
minutes), and the Bun has 60

P*jf
begins with the -^rj
Neno
its
doki
^T^, Meo (60 seconds). This cycle or Neno koku, the middle of which
falls
(IE?)
fall8
at midnight; thus
beginning
60 min. before,
its
end 60 min.
after midnight.
^p*
fl^pjj:
Nen6
dok{-,
Mouse-time.
,
Hone-time.
J$]}fsfyo, = 11 o'clock in the evening.

sei,
= 11
o'clock in the morning.
=12
o'clock midnight.
TF:$
=12 o'clock
noon.
Goat-time.
,/
H^fe
Usind doki, Bull-time.

,
^p ^
JFtt9tLzln6 doki,
J" siyo
sei,
1 o'clock in the
morning.
>
yo , = 1 o'clock in the afternoon.

,
=2
o'clock
=2 o'clock
c/^ti,
>
Tiger-time.
**
w
Sarfind B^F^ ***J ^
Ape-time, *
=3
se,
o'clock in the morning. o'clock

*
^ rfyo, = 3 o'clock in the afternoon.

sei,
=4
-4
o'clock
rfdJW,
>
Hare-time.
'
Bj
Yyo,
sei,
Ton wd
Cock-time,
siyo,
sei
- 5 o'clock in the morning.
= 5 o'clock in the afternoon.
=6
o'clock
=6 o'clock
tloki ,
ffifc 4f HtJ -v
Tai*un6 doki, Dragon-time.
& f 7ii n<5

tiyo,
Dog-time*
s^wo
7 o'clock in the morning.
= 7 o'clock in the evening.
sei,
= 8 o'clock
,
Mi t
Serpent-time.
,
=8
o'clock
i.
Swine-time.
in the
= 9 o'clock in the evening,
se i,
= 10
o'clock
sec.
i,
=10 o'clock
is
Our 11 hours 48 min. 2
before midnight
expressed by
f7/
164
CHAFfER
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
44.
Hlv %A?
3
"l
^v
^"v
2
sec.
~
'-
^"^
Neno
styo
san-kokft
san-bun ni-meo,
i.
e.
X 15 + 3 min.
is
-f-
from the beginning of the Mouse-time. Our 12 o'clock

our 12 o'clock 15 min. after midnight ~y*/
midnight
r ^"5 5E?i A <?wo s;

sei sfo/o
IE?
2.
tffl^lÂ?' ^Vwd
&o#.
The second method, the Japanese proper, supersedes the names of the
zodiac with
bell or
(
numbers, by which
the hour
is
made known by
strokes
on the
drum. The civil day retains the division into 12, or properly
T61ti);
2X6
Bun
times
B^:
the
T^M
however
also
is
is
subject to the decimal division into 10 ^l]^,
Koku
** HI'
(notches),
which are
or
called
ffi^_
BUH
(tenths),
the
into
10
Rin.
The KokQ,
Bun
now = 12
min. The numbers which have been

till
added to the successive twice six Tokis, are from midnight

5, 4,
noon
9, 8, 7, 6,
and the same from noon
till
midnight; these numbers are obtained,

is
when
the number,
which should properly belong to a Tdki,

1
subtracted from the
number 10; thus 10
9.
The numbers
1, 2
and 3 are not included in the
hour-numbers, as 1, 2 and 3 strokes on the drum or clock belong to the signals

of the military and convent service, and a confusion of the two signals has to
be prevented.
The newest information respecting

with the notices of
it
this notation of
hours does not quite agree

itself,
it
formerly obtained, and people in Japan
seems,
do not reckon more consistently. Therefore we confine ourselves to the clocks at

Yedo. There, at 12 o'clock at noon, the clock strikes 9
this
J
),
and the Japanese
calls
time Firu k&kon6tsu doki, = noon, time of the nine number, or in short,
',
K&k$n6tsu-d&M
or Konondtsti, or even
M'mano
k6kti.
From 12
calls
to 2 o'clock accor-
ding to our reckoning of time he counts 10

afternoon Firugo
Jctiktindtsu
Bun and
our 1 o'clock in the
han ddki, = afternoon 91 time, or. in short, Firu
ktik8n6tsu han] our 2 o'clock Firugo yatsu-doki, or Firuao yatsu, or also Fitsuzino
kokil',
our 3 o'clock Firugo yau han,

strikes
etc.,
till
after the
end of the fourth Toki,
at
midnight the clock
nine again, and beginning with Yoru kdkon6tsu

till
dtiki,
the other six Tokis continue
noon. In consequence of this
for the Ja-
panese Tokis the following definitions of time are obtained.
1) First a stroke is heard, about a
minute afterwards a second and immediately
after that a third, being
the warning.
minute later the strokes of the
hour follow, each stroke with a pause of 10 or 12 seconds,
except the last two, which follow quickly on each other and show that the clock has finished striking.
CHAPTER
IV.
NOTATION OP TIME.
44.
165
,,
TORU
or
TO,
at night.
JL
KokVnfant-d8t{, Qth time,
K6k6n6lsurd6ki,
9*
time,
= 12
i
o'clock
midnight.
,
= 12
o'clock at noon.
Kdk6notsn-han, 9
1 o'clock after
midnight.
1 o'clock in the afternoon.
FIRU GO,
the iftaraotM.
A?
Ydtsn-doki,
8*
time,
Ydttt-doH,
8*
time,
= 2
o'clock after
,
midnight.

l^M-Aan, 8|, = 3 o'clock in the afternoon.
$, TUU.
in the
A?
vj Yqu-han, 8
=3
,
o'clock after midnight.

in the
ARE,
morning.
eremmg.
N&ndtsu-ddki, 7* = 4 o'clock in the
time,.
N&ndtri-dtH, 7* time,
morning.
,
= 4 o'clock i n the afternoon.
v, N&ndtsu-han, 7j
= 5 o'clock in the morning.

,

^,
rrJZlT. in the
rtaui ( .
.^.O,
in the
morning.
Mmsu-doM,
=6
6th time.
M*t*u-<l6k(,
6k
time,

,
=6
o'clock in the erening.
Mutsu-han
6J
AfStrt-ban, 6|,
=
2.
,
7 o'clock in the morning.

in the morning.
= 7 o'clock in the erening.

70J?[7. or
ASA,
70,
it
aifhu
Itsutsti-d&ki,
5 th
time,
lt*ut**-dQk(i
S*
time,
=8
=8
o'clock in the erening.
= 9 o'clock in the morning.

X, FIRU MAYE,
in the fore noon.
=9
o'clock in the eTening.
|, Y6t8*ttok(, 4th
ti
m e,
4*
time,
= 10
10 o'clock in the erening.
= 11
= 11 o'clock in the eTening
In agreement with the preceding definitions are the notices of time, occuriug.
in the Shopping- Dialogues page 17, after the Nagasaki original, page 42, where 3 *) -fct 2 - ZBtoitrfton Aon is to be read: 5^2 -JL \ >y
^&Bf
&
&
CHAPTER
IV.
NOTATION OF TIME.
44, 45.
dtiki yori
B=5f:
nandtsu made utsini,
between one and four o'clock."

about three o'clock."
it
/V^ ^pv
occuring in
^^'^,
Yau-han doki goroni,
On
R.
the contrary,
not in agreement with
are the
notices,
BROWN'S Colloquial Japanese, Grammar, page

is
XL VIII,
where -Neno kokonotsu

12 o'clock midnight,
doki
made equivalent
to 10 o'clock in the afternoon
till
and
also the other Tokis begin
60 minutes
earlier,
than according to our notice.
The measurement of the Tokis

alone
of
fixed according to our hours, is, nevertheless,
value
for
an equinoctial day, and change (they become longer or

and night in the
different seasons are of
shorter) in proportion as day
unequal
length. Thus each of the
six
Tokis from the longest day, if this day including
the morning and evening twilight be reckoned at 17 hrs. 58 min. (notices are
found which
differ
from
it)
has 2 hrs. 58 min. The Japanese almanacs contain,
every 15 days, the definition of the changeable length of day and night, and the
time-pieces
are regulated are
accordingly,
plates,
therefore they
are
so
adopted, that the
hour-ciphers
on loose
which are
shifted, whilst the division of the

is
hour-circle into
Koku
or
Bun,
is
as also the cyclical division of the zodiac called
fixed.
The changing of the hours
Tokiwo utsusu.
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COINS.
The Japanese measures and weights,

deal
as well as the coinage are for a great
reckoned after the Chinese decimal system, with which, as a rule, the
Chinese names are used, preceded by the Chinese numerals, both modified by
the Japanese pronunciation.
In consequence of the modifications, which since 1850 the Government at
Yedo has introduced in the measures and money, the

from those given by us formerly and
modifications again,
ciple
will,
definitions here given differ
probably, sooner or later undergo

itself,
when
people, in Japan
have agreed about the prinits
of the measures,
viz.
about the Japanese foot and

ell.
proportion to the
French metre or Netherlands
45.
,
Measures of length, Sasinome.

S&ku, foot
(
-^ /^.%> Is-sdku, one foot), the
iron foot (Kane-
sasi,
vulgo Kane-sdku), used by work-people, generally bent to a square and
therefore called the
bent foot
$]
/^^
Kiyok-sdku], the unit of the Japa-
nese measures, formerly (1831) was found by nice comparison with a standard-
CHAPTER
IV.
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND CODJS.
45.
167
metre to be = 0,303 metre or 0',11'Ml'" of an English foot, since 1850 fixed by

the Government at Yedo at 0,30175 metre or 30,175 centimetre, the metre being
reckoned at 3,28889 Japanese

ell
feet.
At the observatory
at YeVlo the Netherlands

'),
or French metre
is
reckoned at 3,308 Japanese feet (KaneldJe*)
whereas
it 1),
the Japanese Department of Marine has adopted 3,289248 Japanese feet for
and a manual published

of the Netherlands
ell.
at
Nagasaki
gives 3,31 Japanese feet as the measure
When,
in 1864, the manufacture of
some comparative
measures was ordered of A. VAN EM DEN, by the
Nederlandsche Handelmaatschappg ,"

ell.
the Japanese foot was fixed at 0,3035 Netherlands
For piece-goods, except woolen

zira-sdku)
is
stufls,
whalebone foot (0[
used,
being = 1,25 iron
feet.
Divisions of the Sdku:

Jap. foot.
H
-y-J, Sun
J $
#, Bun
jf 2,,
Rin
J 4
j^$, Goo
gz*/ /|y|\
tgjf
,
Si
JSTo
t
'
168
CHAPTER
IV.

if
45, 46, 47.
or streets, = 3910,68 metres,
the Japanese foot
is
reckoned at 0,30175 metres.

7,
According to the Treaty between Japan and America, concluded in 1858, Art.
the Japanese Ri
is
= 4275 yards
is
(the yard at 0,91438 Neth.

<.
ell),
thus = 3908,9745 5
N.
ells,
whereas
it
said to
amount
to
33 BTp
48
ft
In the Japanese-Russian Treaty of 19 Aug. 1858, Art. 8, on the contrary the

Japanese Ri
is
made
equivalent to 3 wersts 332

ells.
saschen, which gives to one
Ri 3908,68192 Neth.
46.
Superficial measures.
i.
e.
a square Ken, or ~^j
^ ^,
(
i.
e.
6 square feet (3,27791025 square metres).
lfe* o
length
SX* Bjfc*' Se and 5 Pu breadth,

o
,
lfe*
F*M
a rectangle of 6
Jp
r Pu
= 30 square Pu.
JT-to)i a plane of 20
Jg
~f_
Tan
'$!:>>
It-tan
(
Pw
length and 15
Pu
breadth,
= 300 square Pu.

BJj'v,
is
the regular plane of a rice-field.

^*
Tsao, Tsoo
-^ STf v ptj
-^
It-tsoo
yomo), a plane of 60
PM
length
and 50
Pw
breadth, = 3000 square Pu.
47.
Measures of capacity (Masttmd) for dry and liquid wares.

Soo, Sao
(
^p3,
^ ^p^,
Js-soo),
unity of the measures of capacity,
formerly distinguished by Europeans with the Malay

feet
name Gantang,
is
0,49 Jap.
long and broad and 0,27 Jap. feet deep, containing 0,064827 Jap. cubic feet,
cubic decimetres, or 1 litre, 8 decilitres, 9 centilitres etc.
Soo.
= 1,893365719029
3'
ffi
full
Subdivisions of the
"0*^ Go-goo,
Ooo, pron.
% ffiz &oo pron. go-ngoo, a measure of 5 -p^$T Goo,
decilitres.
vtgoo
= -^-f, /<' goo),

,
ffi's
&oo.
v, formerly
3
-
-^ v*, Siy&ku
s^yû-? a
^j?
pron.
dktt (
% ^J *,
Is-sdku),
T ^5 ^f- "^00.
f.
'
measure of T |^
*oo, or |
Js-saz),
7^^,
formerly
and
|gj,
Sai
$ ^!f,
= T5
W ^^ Soo.
cubic de-
Multiples of the
/&>o.
^.^
cimetres.
^,
Go
soo, a measure of 5
ff"|f&0i =9,46682595145
^v,
b
Pioo, or Tawfcra
-^
^^,
J
(rice), at present contains
^J-
To, formerly
^tx^v^î
h
(
Ip-pioo or Ftt6-tawdra) ; a sack or bale 3 01 ^ ^ ^ ^
*^*^
h
,
/Mo),
as vessel Tomdstt,
= 10
CHAPTER
IV.
MEASURES, WEIGHTS AND COIXS.
47, 48.
169
^
,
?,
G6ku
(pron. ng6k*)
formerly
ff
*
(
= 100
or 189,3365719029
litres.
.Remark.
The
fixed salaries of
is
Government functionaries are based on the

is
quantity of rice, which

paid in
allowed them per year or per day, and which
money
*
according to the market-price.
The money value of a g6ku
(5)
in 1865
2X/5 2 X/1,25. "ff J Fdkn g6ku takdsa is an income of 100 Kok or l^jj /1250 Netherl. currency. The pay of a common man ( J
i.
exchange^
5?
^= ^| H= ^,
/12.50 Netherlands currency, or according the Japanese

e.
--
or 6 cent(!) a day.
48.
Weights, Hakarime.
,
-ft
Sai
^,
/Tv
(c.),
J^-?,
^,
'
JwKri), =
(
vulgo
(
Sak'
>f,
5
-
-^
= T5 /f-J
'
-g^f, Goo
Jte
5,00),
JK,,.
Kin
/Tvi
Ik-kin), the Japanese pound, called by Europeans

*)
weighs according to former notices

0,597
kilo.
0,6 kilo, according to the latest
definition 2 ),
They reckon,
at Yedo:
Ik-kin
170
CHAPTER
IV.

Itsi
48.
Maas. One Mace

'M!?
Tael
-^
^v
monme, or
^^ B *'
Itsi-mp, or
as T o
l
^f!,
if the,
c.
^|v>
is
&in
is-sen),
weighs 3,74799 grammes and has,
Tael,
counted to be equal to /1, 60 Neth. cour., a value in silver of / 0,1 6 N.

is
The Mon-me
divided into
10
fyî Fun,
vulgo condrijn, conderein, cent.

cassie, cash, mokje.
100
1000
10000
Itsi
^v' %f,
*
jjjj
,
Rin, vulgo
Moo.
Hots, vulgo wassie.
1,2
mon-me
ni fun,
Mon-me, or
Mon-me
2 condrijn.
A7 mon-me
san-bun, 2,3 Mon-me.
San-mon-me
si-fun go-rin roku
moo, = 3,456 Mon-me,
or 3 mace, 4 condrijn, 5 cent (or cash) 6.
^L
'
^ vX
'^ v*
/ 1,60
'
Gto-mon-me, = 5 mace or half a
tael.
>
-f"i
silver,
Ziu-mon-me, = 10 Mon-me or 10 mace, the weight, which, in
makes the immaginary coin Tael, Dutch Tail, = 37,4799 grammes, value
Neth. cour., being according to the Japanese text of Art. 12,
in silver
alinea
of the Additional Articles to the Netherlands-Japanese Treaty of 30 Ja-
nuary 1856, 6,25
^v = /l,00
,
Neth. cour.
).
With Mon-me they count

mon-me (19 mon-me), and
sands , ten of thousands
j|
further: Ziu-itsi
mon-me, Ziu-ni mon-me, Ziu-ku
in the tens (20, 30 etc.), and in the hundreds, thou-
etc.
supersede
,
\
Mon-me by
*
|=j
Me
thus
~"*,
-p ^
*, F'^r'yu me,
"H^
20 Mon-me.
^
ptj
~f"!T
itsi
B ^'
San-si-ziyu me, 30 to
40 Mon-me.
\f
~\î
'^ '%{î Ku-ziyu
"Q v
or
*
,
Hiaku me, 100 Me
mon-me, 91 Mon-me. 10 taels or 374,799 grammes, or Mon-me,
/16
Neth. cour.
Jff
one
rist
B *'
(1000)
Kwan-me
we = 100
^
l=f
(at
Yedo Kdm-me),
*?
Af Q ^
,
Ik-kwan-me, or
taels.
^ v ^ ^v 5t
*
B ^' San-gwan
go hiaku.
me 3500 me
or 350 taels.
1000 fo? Jt^ B"*> Zik kam-me, 10 rists or 10000 me, = 10000 ~ Bvi7 W? -'^ v B^> Hiak kam-me, 100 rists or 100000 wfc,= ^ Sen ngam-me 1000 rists or 1000000 me, = 100000 t Jf ?, B =1000000 W5" B^> Man ngam-me, 10000 rists,
'
Sv
I)
In the
official
Dutch translation instead of
it
we
find
,,De zilveren Spaansche
mat
of pilaar-mat wordt
gerekend tegen de waarde van /2,50.
De Mexicaansche
dollar tegen /'2,55 Ned. coor."
CHAPTER
IV.
MEASUBES, WEIGHTS AND COINS.
48, 49, 50.

being = 16
171
The Yedo Pound

or
(ft* fi
for
>jj*<
fj
frl, Ytdono
ik-kin),
taels
-f-
g|
160 Mon-me or Me, or Sen, weighs 160
= 0,5996784 Neth. pound,
3,74799 grammes, which in the above quoted Ban-go gyoo-in >about
0,597 N. pound" has been given.

!ft
^^
is
Itsi-zi, i
g|
Sen or 3/ofi-m,
is
^=
IL' M2-^-
/wn #0
rin weight.
49.
Iron, copper and bronze coins.

,
The unit
in circulation
Mon
-f*
^^,
/*
mOn)
the smallest exchange coin,
&m
(= Chin.
Trien), Japanese also Zeni,
and
called
by the
Europeans cash, pitje or duit. The

.Rm, and 100 pieces
Mon
has a value in silver of one ^ ft ?

i
(U|
3fcB, #*'&* wow) are reckoned at one Mon-me or

varies, being reckoned in the
mace of
silver.
The exchange however
town* of
the Taikun only 96, and in the countries of princes at one time more and, at
another
less.
The
cents with
square hole are strung upon straw-ropes to the number

,
nominally of a hundred
representing the value of one

are
called
Mon-me
$
or mace of
silrer.
Ten such
strings joined in one bunch,
JJ?
^fcj, Ik-kwa**
Yedo Ik-kam-mon) or one string of cents, and are worth one Uel or = 10 Mon-me of silver. JH ^"^ ^fcvi Nihcan-mon, two taels; ^ \ 3fc* San gwan-mon, three taels.
mon
(at
UT
The copper
the word
coins,
which generally bear
for superscription a
year-name bcjkka
1
j^
Tsu-boo,
= money,
generally have the value of
Afon; never-
theless there are larger also, of the value of
4 and of 5
Mon
^L^^vli!)
The new
of one
at
andof
2X4
or 8
Mon
(^ H^^t>SlS'
Too took* MM, of
first cast in
jjfa
(^^ $*
JVi
tiie
tilt.
).
mow
hundred Mon-coin,"
^ ^ ^,
f
name-Talae
Mon-me (f
0,16 Neth. cour.), was
the Oik year Ten-boo (1885)
Yedo, with the superscription

50.
^^
is
Ten-boo T*wt-boo.
Silver coins.
silver
The unit of the
coins
the pff v Riyoo,

>
pronounced by some
$&t %^- ffi"

silver,
H^ ^ Ht #v^'
Mai
on6
%
lamp
=
of
= 4 Mon-me or mace 3 FM or condrin, thus 6&A cents Neth.
cour. 10 Riyoo of
an oval iflver according to the old coinage represented by

called
(/fa-âr*),
which has been
^T
(vulgo by the Dutch, schuitje,

silverweight
little
boat),
must have 43 Mon-me (-
1 tael
4 mace)
The obloug coin with the
superscription
ft
S&t.
Itai btt
in
^rst caa* "*
172
CHAPTER
IV.
50, 51.
nevertheless
1837, has been found to have a value
of/
0,80
Neth. cour.,
to the
is
worth 33 Dollar-cents or 84 T'oSo cents N.

exchange more or
less
also.
c.,
and according
pieces
is
temporary Dollar
The weight of the
unequal; there are some
of 8,61 and others of 8,81 grammes.
The smaller square coin of silver with the

which 4 go
51.
to
superscription
~^.
^^
full
Is-su gin, of
an
Itsi bu gin, first cast
1854,
is
worth 8 Dollarcent,
21 cents N.
c.
Gold coins (under

is
the Taikun government).
The unit
of gold
is
,
the
pjjjj
v Biyoo.
^^
a
*jj^ -f
PPH
^n ^
riyoo
or one Riyoo
its
is
represented by the /\\
^lj ',
Koban
which in virtue of
stamp
current without being weighed. According to the coinage then in force the
silver, or
Riyoo of gold or the Koban was worth 60 Mon-me of

divided into halves, fourths, eighths and sixteenths.
9,60 N.
c.,
and
An
scription
oblong gold, but properly silver and lightly

""*.
gilt coin
with the supersilver
^ Ni
4,80 N.
is
pu,
c.)
first
cast in
1818 and declared worth in
30
Mon-me (f
The
it is
represents the half Koban.
Koban
an oblong coin with the superscription
ft Itsi
pu, for which

c.).
customary to write
-^
Its value is
15
Mon-me
or 1| taels (f 2,40 N.
The | Koban
superscription
""*.
is
represented by an oblong coin of silver and gilt, with the

su, for which in general Nisi
dollarcents or
is
^ Ni
said; the
newest cast
in 1859, are worth 16
42 cents N.
c.
The Y5 Koban,
Is-siu,
also a small silver-gilt coin, has the superscription
;TJ^
which
is
called Is-si.
Addition to the edition of 1876. Recently after the legitime heir of the old
Mikado-dynasty has
resumed
the reins of his empire his government has adopted the

is
gold-standard of which the unit
Yen || J vulg.
ffi
J being,
according to the sta-
tement of Mr. STANLEY JEVONS 1 ), only three per

dollar.
niille less
in value than the
American
The gold-coinage
consists of pieces of twenty, ten, five,
two and one Yen.

2j
OJ] yjpf
.
The
'.
inscription of a two-yen-piece in
my
possession
is
[jj
^
new
and
HU
Dai-Nippon Mei-dzi San-nen Ni-yen,
Japan. 1870. 2 dollars. The
fractional
silver , the
money
of Japan consists of
fifty,
twenty, ten and 5 Sen
(^^) pieces in
,
Sen corresponding to a dollar cent and in pieces of copper of 2
Sen or one rin
1)
Money and
the
Mechanism of exchange
by Prof. W. STANLEY JEVONS.
London 1875.
V.
ADVERBS.
52.
The adverbs
in Japanese which, as such, always
precede
the word
is
(verb, adjective, or adverb) that they qualify, are, so far as their origin
con-
cerned, to be distinguished as:

I.
Adverbs proper.
1.
Primitive adverbs, such as:
Ma,
truly, perfectly;
Tto, rery.
2.
Adverbs ending in
ktl (in the
spoken language simply u), formed from

Osdkfi, late.
adjectives in ki (p. 106), as Haydkii, early;

II.
Improper adverbs or
adverbial expressions.
1.
Nouns with
or without the modal case ni or de, included

/>),
among which
14), prorided
the adjectives in ki (p. 106,
ka (p. 116
13) and yaka (p. 117
they are used as substantives concrete.

2.
Verbs in the gerund,
i.
e.
in
the modal
case, charncteriied
by to
M:
Sadamete, definitely; KessltJ, certainly; Kakite

If,
(kaitt), in writing.
for convenience,
we
distribute the Japanese adverbs
and adverbial expres-
sions in groups according to their signification,
we
shall get at:
53.
1.
Adverbs of quality, to the question:
how?
106,
9, B. 2),
Adverbs in ku, derived from adjectives
in ki (see p.
M:
174
CHAPTER
V.
ADVERBS.
53, 54.
well. (See p. 112. II.)
Y6kU,
Yordsiku,
Jtli
7?
n the spoken language You, Y6o,
1.
^j[.a*/?,
Yordsiu, well, good.
Wdruku
Haydku
Osdku,
,
^L ^^
jj||3
Waruu
Haydu
>
,
bad
ill.
Haydo
quickly,
5.
jley?*
J|||
Os6u, Os6o, slowly.

*
Kdtaku
X
"T^" /
# 7
Kdtau Kdtoo hardly with

, ,
,
difficulty.
7 v>
.
dSH/Ctf'
IT ^*
>v7f /s *7 >7 / *^C/
i J
T/'
CtSHM
63.S11V. /
Kuvdsiku,
^^^^,/7,
Kuvdsiu, neatly, exactly.

116,
8.
2.
Adverbs in ka, with the terminational ni

stillness.
(see p.
13):
Sidzukdni, i^V"-, calmly, in

Tsurndbirakdni
9.
0^^^ ^
-, clearly and distinctly.
10.
Sumiyakdni,
Tasikdni,
J^^^=,
quickly, swiftly.
^^^=,
certainly.
,
Tamasakani,
.Dan-danni,
Zen-zenni,
Soro-soro
,
^^
J^ v
by chance,
i
fortuitously, accidentally.
V ^fv V
=> ^J degrees, gradually.
=
,
^J
^=f*
degrees.
15.
>
Soro-soro to
Jl!l
^7 degrees
gradually.
Yara-yara, slowly. Yara-yara yuku, to go slowly, saunter, lounge.
Mu-sdto, $f
^^
-'
Musd-musdto without forethought, in confusion, in

18.
opposition to Kuvdsiku, exactly.
$ 54. Adverbs of degree, in answer to the question: in
what degree?
Nao, once
The expressions
Ikanimo, in
all
cited in
23 and 24
still
p.
130:
Ma,
quite; Itsi-dan, wholly;

little;
respects;
Mo,
more; Odkini, very; Sukosi,
more
so, so
much
the; lyd,
~iy6,
again so; Mdsu-mdsu, more and more; Fana-
fada, very; Mottomo, utmost; Ito, very; Itdtte, utmost, highest.

Besides these:
Ikura, Nani-fodo,
'fnf
^*
*?
h
4"
much?
in
what degree?
19.
Dore-dake, Dore-fodo,
how much?
Dono-kurai ooki
Yo-fodo,
'jnif
'^ TT g
1
T
how much ?
too.
^
,
jgf'; ^ma'n,
^5,
(See p. 136
^|$i
28.)
all.
Mina,
^^,
together.
Subdte,
,
^3;^
06
Tonto, in
Osi-ndbete
iffl (,
g^ ^ ^
altogether.
kini, very.
24.
CHAPTEB
V.
ADVERB?.
54.
175
Koto-got okn,
J^h^j.?,
a^ oy er, entirely.
Nokordzu,
Mattaku,
Ippaini,
the brim).
Is-soni,
^fiXfjg?,
without surplus, without exception. (See p. 59.)
^y^?,
wholly, perfectly.
,
? ;jg? =
full,
abundantly.
--
Tppanni,
^ JB=,
full (to
H^-,
together successively, altogether.
29.
Kdtsu-te, ffify
^
*
means, not at
mairu mai,
all, e. g.:
With a subsequent negation, by no Kdtsute wakaranai, it is by no means intelligible, Kdtrtte

,
wholly, entirely.
I shall
not go at
all.
30,
Kdtsu-gdtsu,
H
fl
% \^
f,
wholly.
fl,
KdtsU-mata
Yo-keini,
/jj> ~%
^^
>[
so
much
the more.
^|"^=,
in a greater degree, more.

so
'ftjjt,
Iydsikiim6, îj ^ */? ^
much
,
the more.
tolerably.
S&i-bun,
^g
frZ,
proportionably
>
pretty,
35.
Zfyu-bunni,
Itsi-bunva,
"pi 4^v = Ûji

-^ fy?/Ki partly.
quite.
Wadzukani, 'Hlâs,
scarcely.
Mabarani,
tially, thinly.
^^^-,
Stik6si,
sparsely, in a scattered
little.
manner, here and there, par-
Oydso, pron.
ty?}^, not much, oydsso, /t,3yi i n sum

>
together; very nearly,
about
40.
Tdktisdnni (at Yedo),y/5.^

Tai-soo,
|Ilt =
richly, abundantly, in multitude.
~fc* 7tt>
excessively.
Tai-soo ooku, far above measure.
Tai-tei,
C?
ftc|,
in general,
more or
leas.
Stikdburu,
^rv
it
Pr
e%
tolerably, for three fourths of the full measure.
Stikoburu flsdsi,
is
pretty long ago.
Yo/odo,
3?#
H, contracted from Yoi-fodo, pretty.

^_
jt
Tsiyau-do, pron. Tkoo-do, |8Jj

just.
F
'
not f
K, proportionately,
rawonbly,
Tsiyau-do yoi,
it
is
just good.
it is
Fotondo,
^g*
H,
almost, nearly, scarcely, hardly. Sortva/otomdo tor?*,
hardly enough. Moppara,
^5 1?
(ff
one^y
i
mere^7'
Fodo-fodo, Naka-naka,
almost
SukumStkum6 o6kHm6 ndku, ty'fy + 9 *
^J^trjr*
neither Iww nor more. 50.
176
CHAPTER
V.
ADVERBS.
54, 55.
Tsitomo, as
as possible, with
Tsito,
Tsitto,
^"ô
jjj?5
j-
^P*- a
little.
little
a subsequent negation, not in the least.
51. 52.
Yau-yau- (yoo-yoo-)
Bakdri,
sitd,
scarcely, hardly; almost.

this.
jf#,
merely, only. Kore bakari, only
Fu-soktini, ~J\*?
A^.% => no ^ enough.

55.
Be'tstim, J^|J^f_, in particular, particularly.
55.
Adverbs of circumstance.
Mti-ydkttni
^ A 3nL?
^^.yy.^.,
jjft^/
=-1
vai nty-
Mtiddni,
^# =
in vain.
56.
Ayamdtte,
Ukegatte,
jlp^.^^, by
mistake.
-willingly.
Kononde,
vf* (contracted from Konomite), gladly,

><
willingly, readily. 60.
^
gladly.
Tasinde (= Tasimite),
(^ i^^-,
Nerigoroni,
j^^ni
gladly.
lya-nngaramd
Tomoni,
y
against the grain, reluctantly.

* >
^5 ^,
t-
to
\~
with, together,
alike.
Itsuni, Fttdtsuni,
'^=,
together.
64.
Ondziku, |^
j?
7, in the spoken language ftnaziu, together, at the same time.

,
Tada,
^^
î
P||
only, alone, but.
Tada san ka
nitsi
nomi, or Tada san ka

66.
nitsi bakdri,
only three days.

^-^, originally
Saye,
park, enclosure
for cattle; used adverbially it limits
the idea exclusively to what has been mentioned immediately before and answers
to
but, as
it
is
as
much
as the Lat.
to
modo
only.
Sono na saye
Sir."
spirits.
siru, to
know
by name only.
Ki-den
saye mausu, say only:
Sakewo nomi saye-
suru mono, some one,

surdbd, yevu,
if
who
does nothing but drink

spirits,
Sakewo nomi
saye
one does nothing but drink
he gets drunken.
is
In connection with a subsequent negation Saye

Lat. nee quidem,
e. g.
:
equivalent to
not even,
Sono na
Mma
saye nakari, there are not even horses.
to saye siranu, not even
know by name.
Zi saye mi-sirdnu mono, anyone who
does not even
know
the letters.
it
Dani,
%=-,
cognate to Saye, as an adverb, has the word to which
exclu-
sively limits the idea, before it with or
without inflection,
e.
g.:
Ima
dani nanori
si-tamave, assume but for as yet a name.

will only last a short time.
Ima
sibdsi dani ovase
nan,
now
it
68.
CHAPTER
V.
ADVERBS.
55, 56.
177
is
Surd, x 9, even, German, sogar, indicates that an unexpected predicate

emphatically given
to
the subject of a sentence,
e.
g.:
Kudki
sura kari-kovo
tore wo tirdnu,
kuvase tamavu, even the qneen has silkworms fed.
Rare rura
he even does not known

Kata-gata,
this.
^,
single, alone.
70
least.
Suku-ndku-tomo,
three months.
^*?
t ^ h ^, at
,
Sukunqu Atemo tan
lea
get**, at least
Sa-naku-tomo
at least.
Ndru-dake,
Ze-hi,
J^^^t?,
if possible.
Jj^*
^*,
any
so or not so, in
any
case; necessary. Ze-hi fefei-maioo,
I shall do it in
case.
Don
bo-don
^
b
^** gjf
^^],
if
either active or not active,
in
any
case. 74.
case.
To-mo kdku-mo, h'Efc^'E, To-mo kau-mo,

Also
n**<e,
to
however, in any
-
To-kaku,
[^
7
possible,
synonym
Ndn^dake.
To-kaku
itsi-yauni ndru-besi,
if possible it
Fu-ini,
should happen in one and the same way.

76.
^1,
\ ,
suddenly, at once.
unexpectedly, by chance.
firstly.
Tama-tama,
Sai-styo ni vd,
Dai-itsi ni vd
,
^% ^^
ijj
tfj\ |^ = />,
^p ^
%
"~^
^ _^
- _
,
>
Dai-ni ni vd,
secondly.
Itsunivd,
'^
= ^,
partly,
on the one hand.
Afatd,
^5
. .
.
a^80
'
81.
Mata itsunivd,
itsunivd itsuvdri,
^^
half.
'^ = r, on the other hand. Itdtiuvd maJtoto, mdfa

falsehood.
. .
.
on one hand truth, on the other
82,
,
Ndkabdva,.
Sarani,
AÔTZO
^p * ^,
Nakabdva
ndkabdva
partly
partly
J^*
_, again, anew. Kasanete, again.
fokdm, 3jLy
[$=
,
further, farther.
besides; moreover.
-Sowo ti,yeni,
ijt^ _h^. =
86.
as of, by, for, in, after,
56.
Our adverbs of place and space, such
on
etc.
are generally expressed in Japanese
by connectives expressive of
relation, whiih,
when they
are accompanied with another definition, have the latter before
them
(see Introduction p. 44,
15, B. 1.);
e.
g.:
yt or he, = wards; A'ofro-y*, hither-
wards; yori, = of, out; Kotsira yori, from here. Since compounds with ad verbs of
have been already treated at pages 81, 82, 83, place, belonging to this group,
we
confine ourselves here to a mere citation.
Dokoni, where? Dokoye, whither? Dokoyori, whence? Doltonimo, wherever. 87.

it
178
CHAPTER
V.
ADVERBS.
56, 57.
Idzukunzo, Dotsira, where?

Kdsikdni, there.
Astikoni, somewhere.
Atsira, anywhere.
88.
Kokoni, Kotsira, here.
Kono
tokdroni, here.
Sono tokdroni, there.

Yosoye, to elsewhere.
'ftlJ,*
-
Yosoni, elsewhere.
Ta-siy6, pron.
Yoso kara, from elsewhere.

92.
Ta-so,
jtk^n elsewhere.
Besides these, for the definition of place and space,
come under
notice:
Amdneku,
Tsikdku,
^
3>
li,^.
?, everywhere. Siyo-siyo, pron, so-so, j||

-
\i
everywhere.
J^lS ?> near
Tooku,
Is-soni,
^,^7,
far;
Yen-fooni
*||,v
>!?='
âr>
^5. Is-soni yuku, to
Jj/fn'^ at or to one and the same place.
go with, to accompany.
Nakani, or Tsiu,
Utsfni,
pjj_,
=
,
in the midst, amidst, amongst.
97.
Urdni,
pfcj
within.
5
Fokdni, Sotoni,
^[^ =
without.
Mayenij Sakmi,
Uydni,
g^X =
above.
before.
Usirdni, Atoni, Notsini,
^g4='
behind.
_t-,
>|^_,
Sitdni,
~JC^ =
beneath.
100.
Sdbdni, Katani, Katawarani,
^Jx=>
near, at the side, beside.
Migini,
to the right.
>j
ffiddrini, ~fa
ij
to the left.
Mavdrini,
^3^
=, round, around.
Guru-guru, around.
Gururito, round about.

against, opposite.
,
Mukdini,
fy%^~,
Ai-tai,
;j|J
^j"^
opposite.
105.
Yokoni, Yoko samani, Sudzi-mukdvini

,
Nana-meni, ^j*t ^ = aslant. ^| f = across. XÂ*ii=, vulgar. Suzi-kaini, almost opposite. time,
y
*i
107.
57. Adverbs of
to the question:
when? how long?

108.
Itsnzo,
Itsu-ka,
'fnf^
-jof
H\5p
when?
[zo, an emphatic suffix.]
*, what day of the

>
month? See
p.
161.
Itsumo, ^JX^^ ^^ ffl
whenever, ever.
Itsu
Itsudemo, whenever, always, ever;

110.
with a negative verb, never.
made mo, always.
Imd
(imd)
^^, now.
^-^^f'?
Imani,
~^ =.
^^1
now.
Imdyori,
g ^ ^^>
henceforth.
Ima-made,
hitherto, heretofore.
^j!|,
Ima-madeva, contracted ~imdda, in the spoken language usually Mada,

hitherto,
still,
Lat. adhuc; in connection with negation included in the subsequent
verb,
not yet,
C,-
113.
CHAPTER
V.
ADVERBS.
57-
179
114.
Tadd-Vma,
Maye-kata,
beforehand.
${**
^
\fy
>
,
lfl
^
i
fa ?fc, j*st now.

yori, beforehand.
gf'X^fl' Mae-kata
-- Madzu^
Q^,
first,
I-raiva,
^ ^"
since.
1.
Haydkti,
,
JJv^ -^
Hayau, Hayoo,
soon, very soon;
2. early.
Mo-Mya Mo-hay au
Os6ku
contracted JH/oo , already.
3/bo
kairi-de gozaiimdtikd,
do you go again already?

,
117.
jj$j,
^^
late.
ff
^4r# tokini,
once, at a certain time.
Tsikd-goro,
Mtikdsi,
jfcj
a& i
^,
lately.
-- TAkd-d#kd-ni , shortly,
speedily.
^^
^4*1
"^f, of old, formerly, of yore. Mttkdri yon', of yore.
Inisihd,
^^,
of old time, formerly.

finally,
Tsuini,
never.
Sikirini,
Otte,
^^ =
a* *ne en<^'
at last;
ever;
with a negative verb,
^|^t)=5
every moment, without ceasing.
124.
i&*
ffi)^> afterwards, consequently; late, henceforth,
= tono
not*i.
Ottskt,
Hr -? -
ô ^|J ~Jt
,
forthwith, immediately, directly,
= ntgum, at-no naL
Suguni,
Zikini,
\ji^ =
directly, straight.
]SJ=,
directly, forthwith.
Sibardku, ^jljj^??, in short, shortly, quickly.
Yau-yaku, Yoo-yaku; JDfJv?' ^J degrees.

Tatsi-matsi,
JJL|
^f?
#>
at once
directly; suddenly.
Yagate,
lp|J>ffii^
suddenly.
directly.
Soku-zini,
iP^ 8$^=,
y(+*/7,
long.
j 118
Ftodtik*,
Sai-zen,
Hisd-bitd, long ago.
/SwWi Ao, long
ago.
ft? "|0v
now
Kore-kara, hereafter, thereupon.

jjfe-ô,
in connection witli a sub0equent negation, |ttj^, henceforth,
no more.
SfoWra,
^t?'= o
B'
already.
Ktuni,.
Tslyoto,
^C^=,
quickly, hastily.
b),
TWtto (^3^
vulgo TUito, "$.$
h
,
once, for a
moment
3 t-* *, just hear!
Tsidito
matfi nasare, wait a
moment!
141.
Sono
toki,
B$,
then, at that time.
180
CHAPTER
V.
ADVERBS.
57.
Sono
notsi,
lj/ ^|4'
thereafter.
142.
Notsi-notsi, later.
Notsi-kodo,
^|f
^*'
Y
by and by.
Kono
i-go,
&
/ JSl
H^
$
\&
?
after this.
Kono-goro,
./Tcwo
^^
there, then.
145.
Aoô, J^J / JJSLÎ shortly, lately.
Konoaida, Jfcj
Sakini,
{?
?$% #
MY**'
shortly.
^~
31 a
>
vltf'>
Before,
the time that has immediately

148.
preceded the present, just now.

Saki-goro,
Mo
s&k6si sakini, a short time ago.
^J
^Q^
lately.
J us t
Saki-hodo,
îj*'
now,
presently.
150.
Definite notices of time like to-day, yesterday, to-morrow etc. are expressed
by nouns with or without a previous adjective

Kon-nitsi,
definition,
e.
g.
^ Kon-nitsiwd;
^",
-^^ Q
7
,
Keo, Kioo,
this day, to-day.
Kesa,
Sdku-zits,
Sdktt-gdtsu ,
|f|:
this
morning.
K
fi.
152.
|>
*
Kinou, ^/7 (contr. of Sakino

,
"^0?
),
yesterday.
last
month.
155.
Sdkti-nen,
,,
last year.
5
Miyoo-nitsi, $%*?
*
>
morrow.
Asu-made.
till
to-morrow.
?' to-morrow.
Miyoo-nitsino jiru, to-morrow noon.
Miyoo
evening.
(nitsino) 050,
to-morrow morning.
Miyoo-ban,
tyj
+,
$&,i
to-morrow
Miyoo-getsu,
I^J
f^
^
3
^*,
next month.
-
Miyoo-nen,
Hfj
,
Miyoo-go-nitsi
^v ^^
u
nex^ y ear
"
160.
^
tyj%-/
the day after to-morrow; also Asatte,
Akeno
tosi,
Akuru
tyj^n/
tosi,
^1^1
still
nex t year.
Akuru
fi,
to-morrow.
to
Rai-nen,
Rai-g&sii,
^v
_,
the year
come, the next year.

165.
^ ^1^1 next month.

by day.
Firuni,
Ya-bunni,
^f*v=
definitions,
Ya-tsiu,
^^
Pp^?
at night.
167.
For adverbial
1.
to the question:
how
often? are used:
the repeating numbers cited in
32, p. 143: F%t6-tabi or Itsi-do, once; Futdetc.
tabi or
Ni-do, twice; Futd-tabi mi-tabi, twice, thrice, continually,
CHAPTER
2.
V.
ADVERBS.
57, 58.
181
Mareni, ^gf ^ =
seldom.
168.
,
Suku ndki
tokiva,
4^1} f ^ $f
seldom.
170.
then.
06 ki
tokiva,
^>3U ^^/.,
fjf
often.
{,
Ori-6ri or yori-yori, \ R*f^

Ori-fuzi,
Fu-tosite,
now and
:$H
^p
Bj
|jf
from time to time, now and then.
*j^j*,
sometimes.
Setsn-setau, fff
*
"
often. SiM-sibd, $jb%\, .^w*
$
^
it
often-
Tabi-tabi,
jftmm/
Jj^^
i>
a^ every turn.
175.
m,
^| =
^g,
-- Ts&n6-dz*nt, generally, always. continuaUy.

177.
OUt&ddsiku, :$y*z^*/>?, manifold, often.

58.
Adverbs of
manner,
indicating the form of thought or speech, in

predicate.
which the speaker represents the idea expressed in the

1.
Affirmative.
H&i,
Sa-yoo,
H4i.
-f,
with
its
variations: hdhi, Az, vulgo hdi, /m, yea.
178.
^r^
^Hl^? contracted Soo, so, thus, considered more polite than

,
Soo mdsoo
it
will
be
so.
Stkdto,
Î'j-,
certainly, truly.
180.
Td&bani,
^s^^=>
certainly, truly.
Makdtoni, Zitsuni,
^Jf^=,
\f
in
truth,
truly, forsooth, indeed.
JMtiMni,
jE?=,
indeed.
jjjjf
Geni, or Geni-geni,
{,
evidently, doubtlessly.
K&sttdj
Ari-teini,
Ktit6,
$$ ^7 ^|=, ^| |^
rffi T'J
}
surely; with subsequent negation:

solidly, to the purpose.
by no means, not
at
all.
certainly.
Fit-zen, Jjfc$ ft$ ?' certainly. Fit-dziyoo, i)fr$

Itsi-dziyoo,
^v,
certainly, definitely.
-^
^v^5"
definitely.
Ka-ndrazu,
$%?%,
doubt. certainly, doubtlessly, without
= do not reason! = without Motsi-ron, Mu-ron, Ron-ndku, Roti-n$u, jfl$ jjft,

contradiction; not to be contradicted.
Sappari,
Sappari-.
.
+?
.
><
')
in
all
respects; with subsequent negation:
by no means.
sezu, to do
by no means.
properly.
Tyu-zen, Too-zen,
leasaka,
~%ft$.
@^ ^ J,
^, in -short.
Sasuka, Sasukani, {^-, notwithstanding.
182
2.
CHAPTER
V.
ADVERBS.
58, 59.
Negative.
>
^c,
liye,
-f
vulgo iiya, no. liya-iiya, no, no.
194.
Remark. The negative: not, expressed in Japanese by n,

the verbs, by which a peculiar negative conjugation arises.
as a rule, is included in the inflection of
Fu-sinni,
Fu-d6-site,
3.
^7 ^
f
v=
b
|j
uncertainly, doubtfully.
195.
*/T
suddenly, by chance.
Optative.
-jfiif
Doozo,
2^ ^,
though, than, Pray! Doozo, kikareyo, hear,
if
you please,
197.
hear though!
Negavdkuvd,
Jp ^ro
though (contracted from Negai, wish, and Ivdkuvd,

198.
so as they say), so as one wishes. (See Shopping- Dialogues p. 11.)

4.
Supposing.
,
Makotordsiku
probably.
Ta-bun,
^>% fy^,
perhaps.
199.
Tokini yottevd, Kotoni yottard, perhaps, according to circumstances.

Zi-gi ni yori
,
^p
^
#*
? ^^
or
î'-^fi
ni yotte or yottard , if time
be favo201. 202.
rable, according to circumstances;
under favorable circumstances.

probably.
Utdgavurdkuva
5*E %
7 ^ 7
/>>
Zon-bunn6
gatte.
st-dai,
ffi-^C /
^F^^'î
as ^ think; also
Zon-bunni
sita-
Zon-bunno
59.
si-dai siyo-mdtsti ari-mdsuka, are there books also?
Adverbs connecting propositions, such as nevertheless, however,
since they are
conjunctional
adverbs, are treated in the Chapter VllI on the
Conjunctions.
\
ALPHABETICAL SYNOPSIS OF THE ADVERBS CITED.

The numbers correspond with those
placed after the adverbs treated in
$
53
59.
Ai-tai
Asokdni
Asu
Asu-made
Asia
.
Asuta
CHAPTER
Fkdsttot
134.
V.
ADVERBS.
59.
183
184
Os 6u, Os6o
CHAPTER
5.
V.
ADVERBS.
59.
VX

(POSTPOSITIONS.)
60.
Our
prepositions which
show the relation,
in
which the chief idea
of a sentence stands to other objects or ideas, are superseded in Japanese bj

postpositions.
We
call
them words expressive of relation.
Chief
among
these words are the inflections (see Chapter I, p. 61), ris:
-^, ve, he, or

=
,
x, ye,
e,
= wards,
to.
Dative and Tenninative (see p. 68).
ni,
= with
relation to, in, to (see p. 68).

p.
K, to, = to (see
70).
ni;
,
T,
;
te,
Local, Modal and Instrumental (see pp. 68,

70).
p.
= 7"
5
>;
nite
7"
de (pron. nde)
j J
yori;
#2,
kara, = out of, from. Ablative (see
71).
61.
1.
All other relations are expressed either by:

as such,
nouns which,
are declinable
and have the further attributive

Uy4 or
definition, as genitive, before
them, as
Yama
Yamano
9y4, the topmost
of a mountain;
2.
Yama
tiydni,
on the top of a mountain; or

gerund in *,
verbs, which being,
either in their radical form, or in the
te,
in proportion as they "govern the accusative, the modal, or the dative have
their object with the inflectional termination
iw>,
or
=, m,
or
^, w,
before
186
CHAPTER
VI.

this object is a
61, 62.
or a
them, indifferently, whether

substantively.
noun -substantive
verb used
62.
Nouns,
used as expressive of relation, are:

j:>
1.
Uv6, uye, _t^. 8
1)
above, upon (with reference
to a place).
Tsukdno uv6ni kiwo uyuru, to plant a tree upon the grave.

ki,
still
Tsukdno uveno
is
a tree upon the

one.
grave.
Aru uydni mata

- what
is
1
).
fttotsu,
above which there
Kono
tiydwa deki-masdnii,
it
above that, does not happen,

,
= more
I can
not give for

2
).
Sono uyewa nai (or ari-masdnti)
there
is
nothing above that

2)
upon, after
Y
(with reference to time).

tivd
Gin-mi (or Taddsi) no
fattowo motte bassu (8^-^

^,*
2
f^f*
"
( or
"
j^H"
3
'
K ^.
Un-
? Jî^T ittf?*)' upon inquiry punish according to law ). ziyau nou-saino uvdvd ($j^/ \~ t ^ 7fS$J ^^^/ _t^->0' upon payment
$f3
)$<,
*/
of the
duty
4 ).
Sina-monowo
uke-totta
ftydde
(dai-kinwo)
5
).
age-masoo,
after
having
received the goods I shall pay (the price)
Chinese compounds with

ill
L i* r v
ziyqu, zoo,
upon.
uP ori
clouds. --
v _tx
upon mountains.
J^t^
^^ JlX'
J^ ^ JlS''
upon the throne.
_t ^
upwards, prior to a time, = sore yori mave.
San nen
2.
i-ziyau, prior to three years ago.
Sitfc,
~f^^, beneath, under, below.
Sitd~ni sitd-ni,
down! down! = kneel!

Sdkuno
sitd,
Sitayori waki-idzuru midzu, water
springing up from beneath.

divisions of a foot
e
).
what
is
under a foot measure, the

gtizdru,
Wat&kusiva andtayori sitdde
am
beneath
you, I
am
less
thou you.
~f**o^
Ten-ka,
^*
^v ~T** ^^
San-ke
,
~T*^
U-ke, what
is
under the heavens, under

|_Lj
the firmament, the earth.
J&^
the foot of a mountain.
Jj[
~f^^ ^
under
(in) the earth.

,
vl^î
San
* = /Sono ato ~JC ,
after , since.
nen i-ka, three years since.
1) Shopping-bialogties
p. 38.
al.
2) Ibid. p. 29.
2.
3) Treaty
f.
1858. Art. V.
4) Ibid. III. 6.
6) Ibid. p. 29.
CHAPTER
3.
VI.
62.
187
Mave, Maye, vulgo Mai, lHfX.2

local or temporary.
(of
ma, eye, and w,
side, direction),
before,
Matsu-maye,
before the pine-trees.
Yei-ziwo mtnJno martni takavete

it.
im-
you su, she holds the suckling to the breast and suckles
Itm-ka mat urst
m,
out.
a year previous
')
Go
nen yori mave,
Kaviko idzuru mayeni, before the silkworm comes - from the fifth i. e. before the fifth
year forward,
year.
j^"i>
of.
zen, before.
v|0v
previous
4.
to.
before the front
*
P*|
|f*;, before the door.
J#
|frf.
*).
Kono
fi-giri aruiva tono i-zen nite mo, at this date or even earlier
Notsi,
^gf
(from no,
back, whence mUti,
retreat,
and ft,
is
place), be-
hind, after, with a
definition of time, refers to a time
which
behind, with
reference to the present, future,
Kaze
okiru notsi, after the rising of the wind.
Kaxega
fuL-ite noirf, after
the wind has blown.
Sono
notsi, thereafter.
Ima
yori oyoto îyu/atn ha jstsi
no
notsi yori fttdtsu
minatowo
3
).
of JiraktL bdgi, after the lapse

-
18 months from now
a harbour shall be opened

,j-
}%
fa *",
from now for the future.
5.
Omote,
TJra,
^Qf
^,
the face, the countenance, the fore-side, before.
6.
1||!
>ji)J!.
the internal, the inside of a garment; the reverse of a
coin; the opposite.
Iy6no urd, the inner

the reverse of inclination.
7.
side of
a house.
Ur&m
won no trd
nan', disgust
is
TJsiro,
^2x>
after.
Yamawo
usironisi,
kavawo omotenitu, (the

it
Tillage) has
moan tains
for back-
= ground, a river for fore-ground,

it.
has mountains behind and a

is
rirejr
before
Also the inside of a garment, as reverse,

8.
called uriro.
Saki,
^\
lU
point, with reference to time,
beforehand, past
Sakino
yori
first!
tosi,
a former year.
Sakim,
-earlier, before.
J^jl* jfcj,
Go nm baUri
yon beforel
told
five years. o, only since the last
soii/
after you!
9.
Ato, gltT- t ft}, footstep; behind.

tsuite
Fttono atoni
one. yuku, go behind any
Amo
ato afterwards.
1)
.L Treaty Art. X.
I.
8)
XI-
'
"-
188
10. TTtsi,
CHAPTER
VI.
62.
pj|
ffl.
within.
Kiyo-riu-bano Utsini
J ).
lydno utsini
arti, to
be within the house.

,
^j| 3
w^
'*
j^J
^ =)
within the ground

2
where one has residence

--
Riyoo k6ku no
tttsiyori,
from out both empires

is
).
Utsiyori fokdwo ukdgavu, to spy from

fairu, to go in by the window.
within what
without.
Madono
tttsive
Tekino utsive seme-iru, to press into the enemy.

in the dream.
Yumtno
ittsi
de avu, to meet
utsini,
Fuyuno
utsini, as long as it is winter.
San-nenno
it
within a space of three years.

three
days'
San
nitsi utside
deki-masu
may happen
within
time
not
3 ).
Hiydkn me utside wa ure-masdnu, within (under) ten

it
4 ).
taels will I
sell
Kono
it
ni zi no ntsi idzure naritomo motsiyu
be"si
of
is
the two signs each (whichever

eating.
be)
may
be used.
Kuvu
Utsini , while
one
Sina-monowo uke-tordnu utsiwa, dai-kinwa agerare-masdnu, = within
the not receiving of the goods (as long as I have not received the goods), no
payment
will be
made
5
).
Men-kiyo nakdrisiga
ntsi nite, as
long as there was
no permission.
Much
(
in use also, are Chinese compounds with j^j

iF)
>
;JT
dai or nai: Kai-dai

(
'/$
? ft
wna*
i8
within the seas
the continent.
K6ku-dai
|f|
f ft
?^)
first
within the borders of a country. -- K6kft-daino dai-itsino gakH-stya, the

scholar of the empire.
this article shall
Kono deu
(deo) va
Nippon
kokti-daive furd-watdsu
6
).
be"si,
be made
i 1111108 ^?
known throughout
interior.
7
).
the Japanese empire
Bu-nai
("0$^ ft
-f)
ê
Nippon no bu-naiwo
riyokqu-su, to travel
is
over the interior of Japan

the family.
11.
Ka-nai
(^*
ft
),
what
within the house,
Foka, Hoka, ^f[*, besides; except, without.

hokft-kdku kisini 6ttd fitotsu
).
Kono fokd
minatowo
firakft, be"si,
besides
on the
north coast a harbour shall be opened

except to the government
Ydku-siyono fokdve uru-bekardzif,,

9
).
may
not be sold
Kei-sdno fokd onna\
women
except
wry
castles (prostitutes).
To wo fokdyori todzuru, to shut a door from
without.
Dai-ku sono fokd s6ku-nin wa kane-zdkHwd motsii-masu, carpenters

iron-foot.
and other workmen use the

mastt, there are piece-goods,
Tan-mono
to
ara-mono sono foka
ari-
and raw materials and
so forth.
1) Treaty. Art. 4) Ibid. p. 4.
VIII.
al.
1.
2) Ibid.
X,
I.
6) Treaty. Art. II.
9) Ibid.
al.
p.
9.
5) Ibid. p.
13.
17.
7) Ibid. Art. I.
d. 3
5.
8) Ibid. II. 2
IL
18.
CHAPTER
VI.
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OP RELATION.
62.
189
#[,
gwai, outside, without, out of:
without the gate. [%' Mon-gwai, mouth, out of the mouth of a river or harbor.
PI
[,
Koo-guai, out of the
12.
Soto,
#[^,
originally the back door, at present generally:
without
Sot6-mo for Soto-omo, the back- or winter-side of a mountain. without the

village.
Sato no Mrfoiti,
13. Miikavi,
Mukai,
fnj
|, |, vulgo
also
Muka.u,
Mukoo
as substantive,
the opposite quarter, the direction opposite anything.
Karega stimi-kava waga-iydno mttkaini dru,
his dwelling is opposite
my house.
Mukduno
river).
kisive
fttdwo watdsft, to put people over to the opposite side (of a
14.
Avida, Aida,
on 7
pjj
e
3
7
,
the interval, space between things,
between;
space between two points of time, while.
Aulano fima, pause,

tween.
the
leisure,
opportunity for anything.
Kono
alda, bet'rf
.
Sono
cttda,
meanwhile.
Yamano
aidani mid;6 <irttwo taxi-gava to

is
appearance of water between mountains

1
called
a valley-brook
'
'
ik-ka nenno a?Wa, for the time of one year
).
Tada tiyau-baiteo na*u
aiilami
nomi, tou-riu-suru koto wo u-t^t, only while they carry on trade,

residence (there)
2
).
may
they hold
55*
tT'
^'
aM
'
ff
fn:
.
B3 v
rocks. 15.
M*'
between
rice-fields.
51
B8
3lJ*
8row between
Xv
Naka,
Pfl
v' Nin-gen,
among men; mankind.

--
*Jj J,
the middle, in the midst of, amidst; among.

hut in the middle of the
field.
Tano nakano
riu-sui
tyd, a
Kiy$*
J
*t*o mdkamo
hrtween two
(fgv |Jjt/
ff^
fo
n nS water 5|C?) *ta
mountains. -- Yo-naka, the middle of the night, midnight
ndku kera, crickets that chirp in (between, among) the grass.

Chinese compounds with f|l^,
Sm-tsiuni
'*''".
in
the midst:
(^C?
#?=) "^
trite
^ô,
beings which lire in fresh water.

that
in
'/S?
^ J / $0'
-
2TaH.vmo mono, something
in the
wa, a prodnetioB
of the sea.
pearl-mussels.
Kai-tsiuni
aedbiwo torn, to dire into the sea and fetch np
*fc*
^ $.,
TW-tomm,
in the earth.
Art. IV. 1) Treaty.
al.
3.
H*.
"
190
in the ground.
CHAPTER
VI.
62.
5|f)|f
ty$i
Dau-tsiu,
mid-way, half-way, on the way.
H?i/ Pfl^,
16.
Un-tsiu, in clouds.
/
Sob a, ^'];^
ffi
(from
sdvit,
come near and
ba,
place),
the neigh-
bourhood,
next, at the side of, by.

koi,
Fino sobani
17. Kata,
come next
v3f|;|i
(or by) the fire!
~^j\
side,
near;
with reference to time, as much as
about,
against.
,
Figdsi-kata, Nisi-kata, Kita-kata, Minami-gata

side.
the east-, west-, north-, south-
Kita-katano kazd, wind from the north.

i.
Yo-ake-kata, = the side, on

of the day.
which the night goes open,

katani, against the
this side,
i.
e.
about the
dawn
Sono fino yuvu-
fall
of the evening.
Sore yori kono kata, = from there to
e.
since that time.
Chinese compounds:
$E^
(at)
jj-jgvi
sea.
Kai-ben, on (near the) sea.
Kai-benno
sni-
min, people that
live
on
JA
!/>>>
>?fC?
^t^=
^JlXx*' -Asiva
benni siyauzu, the reed grows on the water.
~)j
The spoken language often supersedes Kata with the Chinese P6o (H6o), * Dokoni san ide nasdruka? wither are you going? side, quarter.
,
no hooni (or h6oye), to Mr. N's.
Andtano hooni,
84.
at or to your side,
by or
to
you
1
).
Sono f6o, his

1
side, you. See p.
18. Fotori, jgg, :,
round, round about.

fish
Ike no fotorino tsutsumi, a dike round a

19.
pond.
Mavari, fcj^
$H)
^11
>
circumference, round about, round.
Yasiki-mavarini, within the compass of dwellings.
Chinese expression.
^ ^ OH
2
).
^,
Siu-i,
round about.
^^
^ ^ ^'*^
two or more
relation,
^3 ^
v irai >7 ? Wt 2 X"' ^p
roun(i about their dwelling place people place
neither gate nor fence

20.
To,
BJiL *",
with, Lat. cum,
indicates the express coupling of
objects; it is a declinable sufiix and, so far, a
word expressive of
identicalness
Dare-to ondzlkoto
Yebisu-to
(^^
$1^ Pff*"l) -
with which? Kimi-to
wa-b6ku
sitd,
peace has been
made with
the barbarians.
tomoni sum, to hold with his master, to be attached to him.
Hana,
tori,
flowers, birds.
Hana-to
tori wo
yekaku, - to paint birds with (and) flowers.
1) Shopping-Dialoguet , p. 16.
2) Treaty. Art. II.
al.
10.
CHAPTER
VI.

and
also birds.
62.
191
Hana
Sisi-to
tori-to
wo yekaku,
to paint flowers
Swt, lion; Tbra,
tiger.
tordwa, as for the tiger with the lion; or also: as for the lion and the
tiger, provided the principal accent be placed
on
>
tiger."
Kane-tfydkA-to ku-
zira-ziydkuwa doo-kawari mdsuka? = as for the whalebone and the iron foot, what
difference is there?
J
).
Atsi, there; Kotzi, here; At*i kotri-to, there and also hare.
... to ... to, repeated after two nouns coordinate, anwera to our
both
and..., as well, as... also.., Lat. et..et, que..qut..

flowers and birds.
sin
Hana-to
tori-to,
both
Olanda kdku-wauto Dai Nippon Tai-kunto rlyau-koktno kontsindmiwo jirdkti-sen kotov>6

to
h6stHte^
kdtsu
siyau-baino
the
King of Holland
and the Tai-kun of Japan wishing
extend the relations of friendship and
commerce of both countries
etc. a ).
Nippon-to San-kan-tono attikaino koto, ne-
gotiations of (between) Japan and the Three states.

to paint flowers as well as birds.
to
Hana-to
tori-to wo
yfkdkv,
-- Yuku-to kaveru-toni matoico
fru, in
going
and
fro to shoot at the mark.
Faravu ni Nippon
to gicai-kokft to
no ktca-fatwo
motsiiru
koto
samadake ndsi
*)
= there
-
is
no obstacle to using
either Japanese
or foreign
money
in payments. it
The
characteristic of the coupling ia necessary
here, as without that
does not attract notice.
Remark.
If,
as in the expression: a valley
with or with oat water

is
the
presence or absence of one object near the other

dru, present and
ndki (see p.
intended, then the Tartu
108,
n.
30), not present, are used, thus:
Midzu dru
water.
21. Tonari,
close to.
torn',
valley
with water; MidzH ndki tani, a ralley without
^f
(from
to, door, family,
and waraW, row), neighbourhood; next,
Ydku-siyo no
tonarini,
next
the
government house.
-
Kin-miyo
(*mJo),
2v)9rS'
a place near ' nei g nbournootl
22. Si-dai,
^^H?*i
rank, following, in proportion

it
to.
to wish, in proportion as Negai-si-dai, according
is
wished
4
).
23. To6ri,
along. jft^, passage;

witarli kdtko, silkworms lying along the edge of the feri toarini
Waradano
straw-tray.
Fama
todrino
mrd
mina
all
the villages
along
the strand.
Shoppy-Dialog^,
Art. IV. 3) Treaty.
al.
p.
Si.
Tmty,
rt
tW
a.
*) I**- IV -
192
CHAPTER
''
VI.

dau-rino
62, 63. A.
ilJLV'
j|f|
t
^1
*S^='
todrini,
1
according to right.
J^|] ^f
jffi$ /
_, following a separate writing
).
Waga kokdroyeno
todrini, after (IL)
my
opinion.
24.
Tame,
^^,
purpose, aim, end,

on behalf
the destination of a thing.
Tameni,
for, for the service of,
of, for the sake of,
on account
of.
Fit6no tameni,
for,
on account of
others.
Waga-tameni, for
my
sake.
Simo kamino tameni
su, the less is for the service of the greater.
Tate-monono
tameni kari-uru ikkano ba-siyo,
a place hired for building

3
2
).
Kono
okitewo
for sale.
kataku-sen tameni, for the maintenance of this article

25. Kavari,
).
Uru tameni,
for,
^^^
fv
'
barter. Kavarini, in exchange
instead of,
for. 26.
Kono fitono
kavarini, for (instead of) this man.
Made, ^TJ^ O J?
till,
|^
the
aim towards which
movement
is directed;
to, into,
until, with reference to place or time, opposed to yori, from.
Firato yori Nagasaki
made sanziyu
fatsi ri ari,
from Firato to Nagasaki
it is
38
ri.
Itsu
made watdkusi mataneba naranuka?

till
till
when (how
long)
must
wait?
Asu made,
to-morrow.
till
Ten-si yori mdtte siyo-zinni itdru made,
- from the emperor himself

I-fuku, ya-gu,
distributed.
one comes (itdru made) to the

ge-saru, clothes, bedding,
common man 4).
tabino rui
made
even to
shoes, are
till
Kokondtsu han doki yori nandtsu made utsini, = within one

5
).
B
four
o'clock,
between one and four o'clock

it
Tok-ka madeni deki-mdsu, by the fourth
day (of the month)
will be ready
).
63. Verbs in the gerund, used as words expressive of relation, are
A. With a previous accusative

1.
wo
Motte,
Jj[ _?,
using, by means, with, the gerund of Motsi,
to seize,
hold, use.
The
object that
is
seized, or taken
with the hand,
is
either the
object diit
rect of an action
It is
later to be
mentioned, or the
as:
i/~]
means
of carrying
out.
object direct in sentences

JJijf
7J|^2
^^
_J||l
ij<
Jvij-
>
Siwo
it
vnotte
namini tsutauru koto na-
kdre,
i.
e.
literally:
Taking the poem
let
not be abandoned to the waves!
let
not the
poem be abandoned
to the waves.
III. al. 1. 1) Treaty. Art.
2) Ibid. II. 8.
5) Shopping-Dialogues
,
3) Ibid. II. 6.
p. 17.
4) Dai Gaku,
6.
6) Ibid. p. 10-
CHAPTER
VI.
WOEDS EXPEESSIVF C? BZLATIOX.

used as the
63. B.
193
The
object of Motte
is
means
of carrying out an action in sen-
tences as:
vJÎ
mankind.
the Irova.
ix/pj A.^' Fit6wo motte ftt6wo worn*, Irovawo motte rui wo wakdtett, to divide the
to treat
mankind
as
classes according to
Tovorite, To6rite, contracted Tootte, JS|* ^, going through or along the gerund of Tovdri, go through,
pass.
2.
. . . ,
Monwo
to6tte,
fire.
going through the gate.

Mitsi-suziwo
todtte yuktt.
Fino nakawo
to6tU, through the
midst of the
3.
go along a way.
Tsiitaite, vulgo Ts'tatte, the
gerund of Trftdi, go along.

yukdba,
if
Kai-ganwo
4.
Uutdtte
itsi
ri bakdri
one goes a
rt
along the coast.
Pete,
$g,
through, along, during, the gerund of Fe, Ftru, to go
away,
to
go along. Sono fa fuyuwd

5.
fete sibomazu, the foliage does not fade in the winter.
Noz6kite, Noz6ite,
$^7^
setting behind, excepted, except, the gerund
of Noz6k)i, u (contracted from notsini oki, to set behind).
Nippon
siyo kwa-feiva, tou-zenwo nozdku, yu-syut*-u
Wri
^ 3lC*
9j^
^^ M?
^ IPI^
t?
$fe$
^^
J ).
ttj^^^t
al 1
Japanese money, except
copper money,
may
be circulated
B. Verbs, used as worths expressive of relation, with a previous local or

dative,
1.
. .
c=
ni:
(^1
"J
ni 6ite, in, at, strengthened local form, of 1 = Fr. en tiablissant the

),
(in, at)
and
<#//,
or
wSM,
establishing,
gerund of
is
oki,
flf,
to place;
establish,
erect.
When
merely ni and when ni 6Ite
used, will appear from

in
the following examples.
The
expression:
>The Dutchmen staying

rfr*
Japan, = the
the expres-
Dutchmen
sion:
local
is
in Japan,"
is
rendered by Nipponrd
Oranda-an
*); in
this
document
shall
be exchanged at Nagasaki," on the other hand the
expressed by ni 6ite, and the translation runs:

tori-karjdsti-le'in*}.
Kono /on-Wvo ro JVowhere?
gasakivi dlte
is
In the
first
case the definition of place
governed by
the
dm
or <?ru, dwell, immediately following; in the second
caw
the definition of place, where?, because not dependent on the verb, exchange,
it is,
by the addition of
Mte",
made an
adverbial phrase. -- This remark agrees
1) Treaty v.
1858. Art. IV,
al.
4.
al.
1) IWd. VII.
I; after the
J.
the Japanese text Art, XI, 3) Ibid, after
Dutch tot Art. X
al.
4.
13
194
with
all
CHAPTER
the
VI.
WOitDS JiXrKESSITE OP RELATION.
63.
definitions
of place, occurring in the Japanese text of the docu-
ment
cited.
The
object of 6it6
may
MlJ
also be
an action, one
is
engaged in,
e.
g.:
Fau-s6kuw6
1
okdsitni dttevd (J3f
5?
^11* =
t^
=
^y violating the Regulations
).
The
derivative
from
oki, viz dkdru,
to be fixed or placed, preceded

e. g.
by a
:
local in ni,
answers to the expression: the position with relation to;
o
fill
$3 "til
-?f"v
Kun-sino mononi
tikdrft,
korewo
ai-siie zin-sezu,
rela-
*$J^
~^^
tion of the philosopher to the creatures: he loves

is
them,
however not humane towards them. Hia Meng, Cap.

6i.
o
vii,
2.
Yorite , Yotte ,
also
its
^
*
t
3
!!
3
o
_?
^
i-f~A
J. v j
>
^
,
fjf|
pq
= having
its
point of departure
of,
p.
and thus
point of support in,
from, in consequence
Compare
on the
ground
of, the gerund of yori, yoru, to get out from.

siro ni yorite , teki ni
,
71, 72.
,
Korera navo
kuddrazu those yet relying on a
castle
do not
Tsi-
submit to the enemy.
Koreni
yotte,
in consequence of that, therefore.

-
Mrani
time.
yotte,
in proportion to his strength.
Tokini yotte vd, in proportion to

is
Ironi yotte nedanga kawari mdsu, as the colors are different there
in price
2
).
difference
Negaini
yotte ),
on entreaty.
Aruni
yotte,
because
there
3.
is.
TsuMte,
vulg. Tsuite,
to.
î,,!,, |^, concerning,
the gerund of Tsuki,
concern, come
Fun6
kisini tsuktt, the ship touches the coast.
Koreni
tsuki,
or tsuite, or
tsuiteva, concerning that,
what concerns
Tsuite no,
e.
this.
The
attributive
form
is
g.
7^^^|f ^=
-f>j"l
4
).
^^
f^V'
û~
zini tsuiteno soo-ron, dispute concerning (about) religion
Remark. To Tooteva
tewa
5 )
also, for
which the written forms: Tbttewa and Tatof:
have crept in, the meaning
concerning, quand
its
a,
have been
of Tov)i, u
given, without reference to the limitation of

(^jjJ;),
to
use.
As gerund
ask,
Tooteva means:
if
one ask, to the question; and the ex-
pression:
Ooseva
mottomo
naredomo, waga-mini tooteva, kanai-gdtai, thus
1) Treaty. Art. V. al. 4.
5)
3) Treaty. Art. VIII.
al.
4) Ibid.
VII.
4.
COLLADO.
p.
57. RODRIGUEZ, p. 86.
CHAPTEB
VI.
WORDS EXPRESSIVE OP RELATION.

indeed reasonable, but
if
63.
195
it is
means: the command

easy to
is
one ask me,
not
be carried out.
vulg. Itatte,
4. Itarite,
Jg|? |r>
come
= coming
to, respecting;
with defini-
tions of time;
against, towards, the gerund of

it
Itdri.
Taikunni Matte vd, does
to the Taikun,
what concerns the
Tfcikun.
Fdritni Matte vd, towards the spring.

5.
Tai-sXt6,
J^-^^^,
standing opposite,
towards,
the gerund of TOI-M, to

its
be opposite, being the further definition, opposite to which, characterized by

or ve, sometimes also by
to.
Compare
p.
68.
Oranda-zinve
tai-si
fouwo
dkdseru Nippon-zinva , Japanese,
who hare
trans-
gressed the law, towards Dutchmen.
Nippon-zinrdtai-n fouwo okasitaru Orando1
zinva,
6.
Dutchmen, who have transgressed the law, towards Japanese

Mukavite, Mukaite,
also
).
Makavute, Mukootte,
|S)
|T.
|HJ
* ?, against,
the gerund of Mukavi, to be pointed against something.
Fitoni mukdite (or m&kdotte) ku-ron-zuru, to contend against some one.

Mtlkdrite, Mukdtte,
[Sj
^ ne
gerund
to
of Mtikdrt. be turned against
some-
thing
e. g.
Kazdni m&kdtte hdsiru

|wj
run against the wind.

/typ*
Mukitt, Muite",
$, against, the gerund of J/ut, to turn against

sides.
bau ni
7.
muite",
towards both
SItag|ute, Sltagoote,
^^^7 ^, according to, complying with, the geyield, to follow.
rund of SMagavi, Sttagai, to submit, to

Sttagdtte,
$&% wf,
according to, the gerund of Sltagari, to be subordisitagatte
nate.
(N't
motsuno) atavini
un-ziyquwo fatimu
1
).
6e,
according to the
value
(of the goods) shall customs be paid
A -int
titagatte (
J("*
JJ
^^}, according
to the noble
(i.
e.
yonr) pleasure.
ALPHABETICAL SYNOPSIS OP THK WORDS EXPRESSIVE OF RELATION TREATW).
Aida - Avida
Ato, behind.
62. 14. 62.

0.
De =
Nite
.62.
63. A. 4.
.
4.
Fete, through
62. 11.
60.
Avida, between
62. 14.
Fokd, without
62.
He=Ve
.
Ben-Kata ...
Dai Utri.
62.17.
62. 10.
Fotori, round about 62. 18.
60. 11.
Ge = Sltd.
62:
2.
IMte^lttite.
63.
E 4.
1)
Treaty. Art. 5. al
1, 2.
S) Ibid. III. 3.
196
CHAPTER
VI.

63. B. 6.
63.
Itdtte, to,
concerning,
. .
Tsiu =
Naka ...
: .
62. 15.
respecting
63. B. 4.
.
Mukitd, against
63. B. 6.
To, to, with
60.
Ka = Stta
Kara,
Kata,
62.
2.
Mukoo- Mukau
Mukdote, against
62.13.
63. B.6.
62. 10.
To, with, together,
Kan-Aida.
out.
.
62.14.
60.
and
Touari, next
.
.
62.20.
62. 21. 63. A. 2. 63. B. 3.
. .
Nai =
7
Utsi
next, to;
A aa,inthemidstof62. 15.
62. 17.
Todtte- Tovorite
against,
about
Ni,
at, in
....
.
60.
60.
4.
Tooteva
Todri, along
Kavari,
for, in-
Nite, in, with

62. 25. 62.
2.
62.23.
63. A. 2. 63. B. 3.
stead of
....
. .
. .
Notsi, behind, after 62.
Tovorite, through
Ke-Sita.
Noz6lte=Noz6kite 63. A.5.

Noz6kite, except
Oitd, in
,
.
Tmate = TsuMe
Tsukite,
Made,
to
....
. . .
62.26.
62.
3.
63. A. 5.
63. B. 1.
.
concerning
63. B. 3.
Mai
Mave
Mavari,
about
round
62. 19.
3.
Omote before
62.
5.
Tsntdite, along
Ts'tatte
63. A. 3.
Saki, before nand

Si-dai, following
Stta, beneath.
.
62. 8.
Tstitdite 63.
.
A.
3.
6.
7.
Mave, May e, before 62.

Motte,
62. 22. 62.

2.
Urd, inwards
62.
by means
. .
Usiro, behind.
Utsi, within
.
62.
of, with.
63.
A.I.
Sitagdtte, accord, to 63. B. 7.
62. 10. 62. 62.

1.
Mukdi = Mukavi
Mnkdite = Mukdvite
62. 13.
Sitagaute,
Sitagoote,
Siu-i,
63. B.
7.
Uve = Uyt, up
Uyt, up
Ve, wards, to
63. B. 7.
1.
63. B. 6.
Miikdvi., contrary
round about
.
.
62.1 9.
62. 16.
62. 12.
60.
60.
62. 13.
63. B. 6.
6.
Soba, next.
Yori, out, from

Yorite,
Mukdvite, against
Soto, without
Tai-site,
on the
. .
Mukdrite, against 63. B.
towards
63.B.5.
ground of
63. B. 2. 63. B. 2.
.
M&kdtte = MuMriteGS. B. 6.
Tamd,
for ,
on
.
ac62. 24.
Yotte-yorite.
Mukau =
Miikdvi
62. 13.
count of
...
. .
Zen - Mave
62. 3. 62. 1.
Mukavute, against
63.B.6.
Te, in, with
60.
Ziyau - Uy6
OH AFTER
VII.
THE VERB.
Man
begreift nichta,
domes EaUtehuag
BU
uefct tiiriill
In the treatment of this chapter, the question, which presents

prominently,
is,
itself
most
what are the conjugations! forms of the Japanese verb, and

Included in
it is
what do they mean.
the answer to the question,
how
are the
conjugatioiial forms of the
Western languages expressed

are:
in the Japanese.
64.
The Voices of the Japanese verb
Intransitive.
Transitive, Factive or Causative.
Passive, but in the form of an Active.
Negative,
element, n.
65.
since
the verbal terminations contain in themselves a negative
The Moods
is
are:
the indefinite Root-form; the Imperative which, at

the indicative
the same time,
the basis of the Optative;
doting form; the
Substantive-form (Infinitive), at once Attributive form (Participle), and a derivative Adverbial form (see
declinable,
107).
The Root and the Substantive forms

definitive of time
are
and by declension express the mood
and cause (Sub-
the Conditional etc. junctive) and
198
66.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
66, 67, 68.
The Tenses
are root-tenses (Present, Preterit, Future,

?
Gen-zai;
root- tense
is
j^
is
a Kwa-ko; 7J^ 3J? Mi-rai), and derivative tenses. A indefinite (aorist), when the action with reference to the speaker
^^
,
present , past
or future
and
is
not
with reference to a given period of time
represented as perfect or imperfect.

distinction,
The Japanese verb pays
attention to this
and
also expresses the beginning, the
continuance and the ending,
as well as the repetition of
an action by peculiar forms.
67.
Person and number

distinction of
are not noticed in the verb, whereas the

(I,
gram-
matical
and
three persons
thou, he) as well as that of singular
plural,
have remained foreign to the language. (See pp. 73 and 53).
Instead of a
ceable
grammatical
distinction, a
qualifying one
steps in, noti-
by the choice of the verb, by which the speaker
distinguishes his
own
being or acting from that of another person, but particularly noticeable, because
he adds the augmentative prefix
On
or
which plays so important a part in
the domain of the pronouns (see p, 75), to the verb also, as soon as the action
that
it
expresses, proceeds from a person, to
whom
he bears respect, or
is
a con-
dition
imputed to that person. The want of a grammatical distinction of three

is
persons
his
fully
made good by the manner
in which a courtly speaker qualifies
own
being or acting and that of another.

expresses itself in the verbs
,
The way in which courtesy

in an Appendix to this chapter.
is
further explained
111. p. 311.
68 The verbal root. Every verbal root (the

of a verb) terminates either in e or
i
essential part or the root
(compare the Latin doce and audi). These

is
terminations are the verbal element proper, which

or declension.
subject to transformation
letters are able to dis-
Whereas we, by means of the European
engage
these
elements from the verbal root and treat them separately, the
final
Japanese syllabic system of writing represents them as bound to the

sonant of the verbal root.
con-
As
the element
undergoing a strengthening, in certain cases becomes a or
o, whereas the element e, in the same cases remains unchanged, this leads naturally to a division of the
verbs into two conjugations: a

i,
nondeflecting one
in e, and a deflecting one in
called
by some a regular conjugation in e
and an irregular one in i
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
68, 69.
199
element
There
i,
is
a group of about forty verbs derived by a

their transformation are ranked
nonde fleeting
which in respect of
e.
under the nondeflecting

99.
conjugation in
They
are enumerated and explained in
The verbal
our
Infinitive.
root or the root-form answers logically, but
not formally,
to
Ake,
to open;
Kaki, to write; YuJd, to go.
verb
is
in the indefinite
,
root-form, when
it
is
the
first
member of
which
a compound verb
as well as in the coordinate connection of propositions

,
has the peculiarity
that only the last of the propositions linked together expresses
the definition of time and manner, whereas in the preceding sentences the verb
is
left in
the indefinite root form (compare p. 46).
The
dictionaries of Japanese origin do not point ont the root-form.

it is
Bui as
a knowledge of
necessary to being able to conjugate a verb, we, here, as
in our Dictionary, place the root-form
on the foreground.
it is
The root-form
suffixes (see
is
equivalent to a substantive,
declinable by
means of
7)
and can be preceded by a
genitive.
Akeid, to the opening, to open.

J.yfoniva,
Dative and Terminative; Supine.

Local, Modal.
= Akenba, = Akeba, while one opens.
Akete, by opening. Instrumental, Modal.
On
this
principle forms are obtained, which answer to
some of our moods.
69.
The imperative mood, Ge-dzino
kotoba (~fC J9I
fjj).
The Im-
in the accented e. perative terminates
In the nondeflecting verbs the root

the deflecting the termination
i
is
at once imperative: Akt^ open!
in
changes into e: Kdki, to write; A'lAV, write!
Kuvi, to eat; Kuv4, Kuy4, eat! /m, to go away, 7w, go away!

This form
p.
may
ce strengthened by suffixing the exclamation ya, ai,

is
yo
(see
countries ro 62), for which in the eastern
in use
')
AMyo
or
AMro, open!
YuMyo
for
or Yuktro, go! Seyo or Sero, do!
Instead of eyo the conversational language of Si-kok uses el also, thai
AHi
may
AMyo,
for na*mr, = well open! Sei for Seyo, do! Y6ku Old* tuuaret,
i.
your arrival happen,

Kei*), come!
e.
be welcome!
- -
A"/,
come, has Koyo, Act, in SUcot
From
Aft, to see,
and A'M, to hear, appear also in the oldy

.
Japanese Miso and Kikiso
(%*
JL
|i||
JL
y
)
as imperatives.
1)
Wagwi
titoori,
uudcr Ro.
200
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
69, 70.
The termination
to beat,
f-,
tsi
(=ti) changes into
te\
from Matsi, to watch; Utsi,
becomes
MaU, Matey o,
The
watch! Ute, Uteyo, beat!

is
The imperative thus obtained

verbal root (see p. 62).
with respect to
its
form the vocative of the

is
categorical
imperative, used only to inferiors,
avoided in polite conversation and superseded by
more elegant
expressions.
The
imperative, followed by kasi or gana, has the force of our optative.
{de nasarei kasi,
oh that you came!

form of the verb.
i.
70. Closing
If a verb clpses the sentence in the quality of verb predicate,
e.
as finite
verb, then the termination e or
of the root form passes over to the
mute
u.
From Ake
is
Aku, one opens; from Yuki, Yuku, one
goes. Logically this

it
form
answers to our indicative present.
The
historian uses
for the past also,
which
he, in his relation, represents as an event taking place before his eyes. (Prae-
sens Historicum).
In the application of
this rule the following
ii,
phenomena present themselves:
The terminations
ai, ei,
oi,
ui pass into
au,eu, iu,
solve into
ou, uu,
which in the spoken language
re-
ao, eo, iu or iyu, ou, uu.

it
Compare pp. 12,
13.
*
Ai becomes au,
suits;
Ei, eu (^.^f or
xy),
one gets drunken; li (1
),
{yu (1 ^-), one says; Oi, oyu (tf
2-), one grows

gets,-
old;
Kui (?1), Kuyu (?

iyu
(-f
2.)
one regrets; ^ (:.), to get. u (]>), one

terminations:
lyd,
i),
it
heals.
The
ke,
se,
te,
?, and
ki,
si, tsi,
become ku, ?.
su,
tsu,
ge,
ze,
^, and
gi, zi,
become gu,
zu,
?
$ 7
^,
^,
%.
?.
^,
^,
?
%
de,
?%
dzi,ir,
vi,
dzu,?*
vu,
ne,
ni,
nu, %.
ve, -^,
t,
evi,
ivi,
The terminations
TC, 2
C,
t,
^C, ^t
(am,
ovi, uvi), for

,
which the spoken language uses
1 ai, ei, ii, oi, ui ), pass into
77, Z.7 17,
X7
',
2??
(avu, evu, ivu, ovu, uvu), in the spoken language au ($o), eu (eo), iu,
QU, uu. See pp. 12, 13.
(Kirdvu, one shuns) and 3-tf7, (Negdv% one wishes) sound in the
I)
Compare
p.
16, line 7.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB,
70, 71.
201
street
language of Yedo Kira-u, Nega-u, but in the mouth of a polite person

l
).
Kirao and Negqo
The
difference
between au and ou, for which LEON PAGES uses o and o
),
mostly remains unnoticed in the spoken language, and both forms are then
expressed by oo; fop the sake of etymology, however, a distinction of the two
is
highly desirable.
To the
deflecting verbs of this class belong:

sufficient;
Avi, vulg. Ai, to like; /warn, to pray; Kanavi, to be

it is
Kandvu,
sufficient; Samurdvi, pron, Soordi, wait on;
^L^y,
Samurdvu, pron.
Sooroo, vulg. soro ("fjô
^1?)' one
waits
on,
is
at the service of 3 ).
Em,
Im,
vulg. ei, to get drunken, zz.? or
2.^, one
J
gets drunken.
vulg.
ii,
say;
-f
ww
or
-f
3,
^^^t
one says.
thinks.
Om6vi, vulg.
drwdi, think;
t/m',
dmdvw or tfmow, one
FMW,
6e,
->s,
vulg.
bi,
bind; ywvw or yuu, one binds.

7*.
nx.
and
t*,
become Jw,
me,
J*
and mi,
2.
become mw, A.
re,
i^,
H,
w,
(to be),
-4n, toH and
wan
remain, when they close the sentence as verb
predicate, unchanged. See

71.
96.
The substantive and attributive form.

as
Used
noun
substantive (Infinitive) and attributive (by
way
of participle) .
i
the nondeflecting verbs supersede their termination e with eru or urii,

irii,
with
and the deflecting
their
with u.
Ake, to open, becomes Akuru or Akeru.
Mi,
to see,
Miru.
Yuki, to go,
Yuku.
have more or
less continuative force,
The terminations
eru, iru, oru
Akeru,
78.
Akuru and Miru being equivalent
to Ake-te-oru, Mite-iru or Mite-6ru, see to the written language
The form uru of Akuru belongs

the
and in Kiusiu to
spoken language also;

4
).
dru,
less
in use,
is
confined to the spoken lan-
guage
1)
From an
oral
communication by the native of Yedoj KITAROO.
2) See p.
13, note.
it
8)
On
account of the important part, which Soro plays as auxiliary verb ia the epistolary style,
still
will
be treated
4)
more
oral
particularly hereafter
102).
From an
communication by TSUDA SIN ITSIROO.
202
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VEEB.
71, 72.
As noun
substantive, the verb is, like every substantive declinable,
e.
g.
To6kini yukuvd, going into the distance.
Kun-sino mitsi
to
tatrfyevd tookini
yukugb
g&tdst,
the
way
of a philosopher
is,
use an instance,
as
a going
into the distance.
Terawd miruvi
yukti, to
go to see a temple.
because there are trees.
Ki druw6
Age-masu
being thus;
mdtte
on account of the presence of
trees
kara, after presentation.

since
it
Stkdruni
yotte,
= on account of
it
is
its
is
so.
Yuku yoriva yukdnuga masi,
better not to go than to
gO<
Se^ to do; Suru, the doing; Surnnivd, in the doing.
Mi,
to see,
Mini,
the seeing; Mtrunivd, as one sees.
San fao y6ri miruni
(or mir&nivd)
ydmano
sugdta ondzikdto nari, on looking out from three
sides, the form of the mountain
appears to be the same.
Compare
is
73, page 206. Remark.

substantive in
Kawdkitdru, the become dry,
Fan6 kawakitdruwo m6mu,

in;
- what has become dry of the

kitdru
leaves one rubs;
on the other hand
Kawa-
fa wo
te
nite
m6mu,
,
one rubs the foliage become dry,
it is attributive.
All the relations
which in a noun are expressed by the forms of declension

attributed to a proposition, just as
it
may, thus, by the same means, be

be desired to characterise
it
may
as subjective, objective or adverbial. as suffix is the
The substantive form with ka
form of the question

is!
direct.
Aru ka?
or Ari-mdsu ka?
is
there? Ari or Ari-mdsu, there

its
The verbal substantive becomes attributive by
mere subordination
-
to a
noun
following. Akuru-koto, the deed of opening, the opening.
Yuku-mono,
the going something, that which goes.
72.
Gerund.
inflectional termination
1.
The
te, or 7* , de,
which in substantives indito the verbal root forms
cates the local,
modal or instrumental relation, added
a gerund, which characterises the action expressed by this verb as a
subordiit.
nate
local,
modal or instrumental
definition of another action succeeding
Ake
te,
by, on or at opening, Fr. en ouvrant.

Oydbi, to
Mite, on seeing.
kahe'riki,
Yukite,
on going.
it
come
to.
Kure-gatdni oydUte wagiytni
= when
came
to the evening twilight, or, in short, at
evening, one returned home.

calls
Tewo
agtie"
fitdwo maneTd-y6bu, raising his hand (he) winks and
people to
himself.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
72.
203
2.
Modifications introduced into the original form of the gerund by the spo-
ken language:
a.
The
polysyllabic verbs ending in the deflecting ki or gi, mostly drop the
k and g;
kite
or gite becomes
for
ite.
Thence:
Yaki,
{l|g^, to burn, trans.
Yaite
Taite
Yakite,
from
1%
to burn, intrans.
to hear. to place. to like. to
*
,
\
^
'^
I"
come
to.
Kaide
Soite
Kagide,
Sogite,
\%
smell,
Toite
Togite,
204
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
72.
Erdnde,
JL?*?,
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
72, 73.
205
the remaining semi/
But
if it
be admitted, that after dropping the weak

,
i,
v
,
vowel v equivalent to u
with the preceding a or o passes into ao or oo
(o
o),
then the forms Aote, Naraote, Omoote, also, are only euphonic modifications of
the regular forms Avtte, Nardvtte, Omdvtte
Instances of the use of the gerund.
etc.
Kasirdwd
~iddsit
miru, to stick out the head and look.

"idi,
Idasl, to produce,
the causative form of the disused
to appear.
Kuddwo
mdttd tenwd ukdgdo

i.
(P&J ^^y"
to
7"
&J ^^^^),to
observe the heavens with a tube,
e.
not
have a broad view.
M6tte, from Motsi, deflecting verb, to catch hold of
with the hand, to use anything.

mottd siyu
t6 sit,
Oy6so fitdno sao-foowo dkagduvd, kasiraw6
he who pays attention to another's appearance, considers the

literally:
head as the principal;

principal.
taking the head, he makes
(it)
the chief or the
Isolated te
by va the gerund becomes an adverbial phrase

to dbd. See
73.
definitive of time,
va being equivalent
H'itdno
kimi to
Examples:
l
ndtte va, zin ni 6ru

is
),
if
he becomes another's lord, he

Natte - Narite
,
dwells in (his position
that of) humanity.

definition
from Nari, = io
be,
and,
when an
appositive
with
to
precedes,
= to become. See
100. III.
FVbdri takdku tdndd ameni
îtdri
bu-mei-su; kwtdVirdtevd, tobi-s&gdritd
kusd-murd ndkdni trM, the lark, soaring high, goes to the skies, dances and
sings; if he is tired, then he descends
and goes into
his grass dwelling.
Tonde,
gerund trom Tobi,
to soar. to
Kutdbirdte vd,
tired.
= by
fatigue, the gerund isolated

i.
by va, from Kutdbire,

fly
grow
--
Tobi-sagdri, literally: fly-descend,

local,
e.
downwards.
Iri, iru,
go in, with the
where? one goes
in.
Instead of the isolated
gerund Ndtte vd (by the being, or becoming) often
occurs the expression Ndtte stkdusttt,

73.
= becoming,
so, etc.
The verbal root
in the
Local
for the forming of adverbial phrases
definitive of time (Conjunctive or Subjunctive form).
The
predicate verb of subordinate adverbial sentences, which describe a time
really present, or supposed as present, in the past,
and which in our languages are
connected with the principal proposition by conjunctions such as

as,
in
when,
since,
the Japanese
is
placed in the Local in ni,
followed by the isolating
1)
Dai Gaku,
III. 3.
206
/>
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
73, 74.
particle
va.
Thus
is
obtained ni
-f-
va as termination
which fuses into
/^*,
ba
(=nva,
nfca).
The subordinate precedes the
principal proposition.
e
This termination in the nondeflecting verbs in
and
i is
joined to the root
form, thus Akdbd, on opening, as or
when
he opens; Nedz)i, iru, to twist,
Nedzibd, as one twists; Moisi, to use, Motsiibd, as one uses; Sii, to die, Siibd,
as
one
dies.
i
In the deflecting verbs the verbal element

of sound
to go,
,
first
undergoes a strengthening
and changes into
by which eba
is
obtained in the same
manner Yuki
;
Yukdbd (vulg.
Yukiya) on going, as or
when
one goes, or when one went.
H6ssi,
^,'V,
to long for, ffosseba.
Ivi, to say, Ivebd.
Tatsi (- Tati), to arise,
Tateba.
Yomi, to read, Yomebd.

Ari, to be, Ar&)d.
Matsi (= Mati)
watch
Mateba.
Tat6vi, serve for example, Tatdvebd, for

instance.
Nari, to be, Nardbd.

Ndkeri, not to have been, Ndkerebd.
Examples of the use of
this form.
Satoow6 mazebd tsya-yu adziwdi amdku ndru, = by the mixture with sugar the
tea
becomes sweet of
taste.
Maz)e, uru, mix
in.
Mlw6
osdmuru yuenwd
sire'bd,
sunavdtsi fttdwo osdmuru yu&n
w6
sirtt, if
one knows the means to govern oneself,

Titsi si-seru
then one knows the means to govern others. Sir)i, u, to know.

toki sao-siki
w6
su-beki tsikdra ndkerebd.
'1/0
waqa-mi w6
e
urite sao-reiw6
itondmu. at the
time of his father's death not having the means to bury him, he (the son) sold
himself and performed the funeral
rites.
Remark. In nondeflecting verbs in

explained the substantive form
and
z,
instead of the form eba, here
of the verb with the isolated local termiused.
nation niva, vulgo niwa
is also
Motome,
to strive for, to seek;
Mo71.
tomuru, the seeking; Motomuruniva, in the seeking, as one seeks. See
74.
The concessive form.
The
sition
concessive adverbial phrase, which
we connect with
as
the principal propo-
by means of conjunctional adverbs such

is
though, although, how-
ever, but,
or
characterized in Japanese
by the strong accended form-word
m6
tom6
(= Lat. quoque) and precedes the principal proposition.
Opposed to Ama-gum6 ariteva (pron. attewa), amega furu, = while rain-clouds

are present, rain falls,
and Ama-gumo ar6ba, amega furu, = as rain-clouds are
CHAPTER
V1T.
THE VERB.
74.
207 - also in the pre-
present,
it
rains, is:
Ama-gumo
it
arite-m.6, (dttemd), furdzu,

is:
sence of rain-clouds
it
does not rain, that
although
there are rain-clouds,
does not rain.
Consequently the following forms are opposite to each other.
The verb
Akuruvb, the
act of opening.
as substantive.
Akurumo,
or
Akurutomo, the
act of
opening being granted.

Tatsuruvih, the act of erecting.
Tatsurumo,
erecting.
or
TatsurutoTao ,
though
Miruv&, the
seeing.
Mirumo,
or JftVMtomo, also (or
even)
the seeing.
Yukuvb, the going.
Yukumo,
or
Yukutomo, also
(or
even)
the going.
Akurunivb, on opening.
Tatsurunivk, on erecting.
Akuruni'mo, even on opening.
Tatsurunimo, even on erecting.

Miruni'm.o, even on seeing.
Mirunivb, on seeing
Yukunivb, on going.
Yukunimo, even
in going.
Gerund.
Akdtdvb, on opening, as one opens.
Akdtdmo, though opening, or even

one opens.
if
Tattevb, by erecting, as one erects.
Tattemo, though erecting. Mite mo, even

if
Mitevb, on seeing.
Yukitevb, (pron.
one
sees.
Yuitivd), by going.
Yukite (ym'te)-mo, though going.

local.
Time-defining
Akebb, contracted from Ake-ni-va,
one opens.
Tate'tob, contracted
as
^l^domo,
contracted from Ake-ni-tomO)
Akendomo, though one opens.

from Tate-ni-va, as
Tatedomo, contracted from Tate-ni-tomo,

Tatendomo, though one
is
one
is
erecting.
erecting?
Yuk^&
one
contracted from Yukd-ni-va, as
Yukddomo
contract,
from Yuke-ni-tomo,
is
going.
Yukendomo, though one goes.

from Tatsure-ni-va,
Tatsure domo , contracted from Tatsureni-tomo, though one
is
Tatsurel>&, contract,
as
one
is
erecting.
erecting.
208
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
74, 75.
necessary at one time to say and
b in la
From
this analysis it is evident
why
it
is
to write vd
is
and tomo, and
at another
and domo. Just as the impure

is
a fusion of n 4- v, so the impure
in
domo
a fusion of n
t.
The Japanese
/-
themselves seem not to appreciate this distinction and forget to characterize
(va)
and
(to)
by adding the Nigdri-mark
)
-(
as
a:
"J
/*,
ba, and
is
K, do.
Instead of domo,
sive
iedom6
(-f
K<fc
<>
K*e)
*
also used. This is the conces-
form of conjugation of
Im
or Jt
(-f
),
to say, to be called,
and therepreceded
suffix
is
fore
means: though one says,

definition,
though
calls
it
be called. This verb
is
by the
how
or
what
one
something, as opposition with the

to
to 2 ); e.g.
called
is
Kuni
ari, sono
nawo Nipp6n
iu ka,
wu, there
is
is
a kingdom,
its
name
Nippon.
Sorewa nanito
how
that called?
If the apposition
a verb, then this stands in the substantive- or in the root-form:

to ivu, it is said
Akuru
to
to ivu,
Yuku
Yuku
that one opens,
it is it
said that people go.
Akuru
fadomd,
t6
tidfond
thus means: though
is
said that one opens, or that one is
going, expressions which answer to: although one opens, or might open, although
one
is
going.
75.
Ari
to
Vedomo, even granting the existence, although there
is.
The form of the Future
(^^
jfc%, Mi-rai).
There are different expressions, that signify that an action or state which
is
still
in perspective,
is
objective to the willing, being able, having permission
or being obliged. Here the derivative form, which expresses the effort, the incli-
nation or tendency to realize what the verb points out, comes
first
is
under notice.
As
it
at the
same time includes the uncertainty,

will
if
anything
happening, has
happened or
sake
happen,
it
has been called Futurum dubium. For convenience'

fitted.
we
retain this
name, even were that of modus dubitativus better
With regard
I.
to the
form we distinguish the simple and the periphrastic future.

for characteristic the termie
The simple future of J"awafo-language has
nations
me
and mu, which in nondeflecting verbs in

i,
or
are immediately
i
added to the root, in the deflecting in
however, only after this
by a strengtho).
ening of sound has been changed into a (or sometimes for vocal harmony into
The termination mu, according

nounced m, has been in
language by
3?
,
to the oldest writing ^p:
-or
J^.
A3
)
and pro-
later
times superseded by
this
f, n, and in the spoken
u.
In measure
(n) counts as a syllable.
1) See p. 9.
2) See p. 70. V,
3)
As
in the chronicle Nippon-ki
and in the oldest poems.
CHA.PTBE VII. THE VERB.
75.
209
1
Ake, to open, future AJcemU (7;Jr), Aken (7 fr* ), in the spoken language
Akeu
7
,
>r 2? )
passing to dked.
,
Mi
to see
future
MimU
( 2.
L)
.A/w
( 2.
^)
in the spoken language Miu.
Yuki, to go, future Yukamti (3-J? A), Yukon, in the spoken language Yukau
(
3.
*? )
passing to Yukqo
vulg.
Fw&oo
also.
Remark. The Japanese writing of the forms of the spoken language

to express the pronunciation of
varies:
others
7^"^, 2-^^, and even
7^^, 2-#$s some write T^"^ 3.%?, and 7^3^, 2.^^; and instead of 7 > >> (aroo,
is
shall be,
<S)i,
from ^1H, to be), 73-^, 7tr^, 7tr^7, and even Q

w, to do; future
.
written.
SamU, San,
in the spoken language
00, at
Yedo
soo,
expressed by ^r
Mas)i, u, to be present; future Masamu, Masan, in the spoken language
Masqo, Masoo,
Afatsi,
*~?^r,
at
Yedo Masoo (Eng. Mashoo).
wait; future Matamti, Matan, in the spoken language Matqu,
Matao, Matoo.
Avi, pron. Ji, to
fit;
future Avamii,
Avan, in the spoken language Avgu,
Avoo, Awoo.
Negdvi, pron. Negdi, to wish; future Negavamu^ Negavan, in the spoken
language Negavqu, Negavqo, or Negawoo.
S&mi, to
nestle,
sit
up; future Sftmdmft, Sumdn, in the spoken language
X"??', Sumao,
Ni, to be
for
which the written form

100. I); future Namii,
^^
also appears.
(see
Nan.
Ari, to be (see
96); future Ardmtf,, Aran, in the spoken language Arau,
Arao, Aroo.
The termination
mu
as characteristic of the
Future
is
according to
my
idea
the regular indicative closing form and the substantive form of a verb mi, that
expresses a
striving
to be or to
do something. Ardmu, =Aran, the derivative

is
of Ari, consequently indicates a striving after existence and what
called the
dubious future,
tom)e, M, uru
(
is
according to
i-),
its
form, a
present.
The nondeflecting verb Moto acquire,"
jj^ *
generally considered as equivalent to
but which,
as the regularly
formed derivation from Mots)i, u
the meaning of strive to hold, shows the
(^|), = to hold, really has nature of Me, mu in its full power.

red and ripe of fruit.
14
In the same way: Akari, red
light,
glow; lighten, to glow; Akaram)i, u, strive
to glow, in particular, the gradually
becoming
210
In
CHAPTER
opinion, there
VII.
THE VERBS.
75.
my
is
also a connection
between the form me,
mu
treated
forms mi, here, and the verbal derivative
mu, which from a number of
adjective
intransitive verb, root-words cited on p. 107 forms a deflecting
that expresses
the becoming such
as the root
word
indicates
and
is
equivalent to a Latin in-
choative verb in -sco, for instance:
Siro, white;
Sirdmi, albescere to grow white.
Kuro, black;
Kurdmi, nigrescere,
Kurdmi,
to
to
grow
black.
Kura, dark;
Taka, high;
grow dark.
Takdmi, to grow high.

Firdmi, to grow
flat.
Fira,
flat,
Firoj roomy, broad;
Firdmi, to grow broad.
Kata, hard;
Katdmi, to grow hard.
Nuku, warm;
Maro, round;
Ao, green;
Kubo, hollow;
Nukumi,
Mar6mi, A6mi,
to
to
to
grow warm. grow round.
grow green.
to
Kub6mi,
grow hollow.
Naga, long;
Ydsti, easy, quiet;
Nagdmi,
to
grow
long.
quiet.
Ydsumi, to grow easy or

Sigdmi, to
Sige,
tight;
grow
tight.
Arata, new;
Aratdmi; to
grow new.
wild.
Ara, wild;
If
sitive
Ardmi,
to
grow
we put
verbs
in the place of
mi nondeflecting me, mu, muru, then the intran-
cited
here become transitive or properly factive: Sirom)e, u, uru,

,
to
make grow white
to whiten ;
Kur6m)e
uru
to
make grow black
to
blacken; Nukum)e, u, uru, to

rest,
warm,
to incubate;
rest- word,
itself.
Ydsum)e, u, uru, to make
whence Yas&me-zi
($C* ^^)> =
an expletive
particle, like
mo, which causes a

and me
is
rest,
but does not rest,
The
difference
between mi
frequently overlooked by the Japanese themselves.
We
return to the Future.
According to Japanese philologers the termination

,
en or an of the Future signifying uncertainty
appears particularly in connection
with a previous interrogative, mination me

is
i.
e.
in interrogative sentences, whereas the teris
used,
when
the sentence has a definite subject, which
fre-
quently strengthened by a successive Koso (= this here); a difference I have not
found actually confirmed.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERBS.
75.
211
cited.
>
y?
y
^
Yezova fumiki kotoba

the
It
ni miyetarazu.
Yemisino ten-go naran,

old language.
name
of
Yezo does not appeal appear in the
may
be a corruption of Yemisi.
Tamino nn-k6ku yori ohokar&n

there
is
,
koto wo
nozdmu
koto nasi 1 ),
no prospect that the population
(here) will
states.
become
more numerous than that of neighbouring

Ohokdr}i,u,
contin.
is
form of Ohoki or Ooki, much. Noz6rn)i,u,
to
hope
on.... Nasi, there
not.
V
iii
s >^*|x ='i* x
tfil
^
^
/5owo jisdsiu sitd tagav&n koto wo osJrw 2 ),

(t ne
he feared that
it
doctrine)
might degenerate in time.

ka
3
Ivaku: Kau-rai tsuini forobimu

will at last perish.
Forobi, nondeflecting verb, to perish. See
sirusi
),
behold, he said, a sign that Corea
99. 24.
Imd sardnto dmovu, k*)Ima sarauto

Niva-toriva suman
court-bird (the cock)
to
om6i-mdsu,
now I think of going.

to surtt
&
; w
|5^
J
-^
SM,
Niva-toriga sumau
(^|
|X rjr
^J j^^))
the
is
about to go to his roost. Sumavî, w, to roost.

wataravu)
to
Nisiyd wataran
(A
su
($$
('foj*
pt|
^^),
~~J\
I shall
go westwards.
Idzurdno tokdro ni kd tewo kudasan
-^*), where shall I lay
down
my
hands? =
i.
A Dokowo
where
*?
tekakdrini siyau-(so-)zo?
= which part
shall I take for
handle?
e.
shall I seize it? S)i, M, to do; future *Y, /o.
v% > ^ &t
y\ Dorekara fazimeo zo? where
shall I
begin?
A Do
tsutsiye nigeyou zo?
whither shall I flee? (Zo, an emphatic
suffix).
Nanika aran
zo? what
(^
^$)i what may there be? =
may
there be, that you do not gladly
A Nanno si-nikui kotoga arau do? = A Nanino nardnu to ivu
kotoga arou zo?
= what should there be,

I
that you blame?
Ani korewo nasanyat what, should
do this?
shall (or
A Naniwo
wo age-masoo ka?
meni kake-masoo ka? what

shall, or
may)
show you?
Sake
may
I offer
you something to drink?
I)
Meny-tsze,
I.
Book
I. 3.
2) Tschuny-yung.
3) Nippon-ki.
it is
4)
The
sistn
indicates that the
words and expressions, to which
attached, belong to the spoken language.
212
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VEBB.
75.
A
at
Kitano Accra kuro-gumoga

!
ats' matte
orimas' kdra,
Yedonohoowd tmd amega

,
ftte ori-masoo
as in the north black clouds are
heaped up
is
it
will
be raining
Yedo now.
If the
definition
of time 1md (now)
superseded by sdkuya
it
(last night),
then the
after sentence takes the signification of:
will
have
rained
at
Yedo
last night.
Sdku-ban
ittaroo,
he will have gone yes-
terday evening.
The certain Future
of the written language.

(
The adverb Masdni, - indeed, certainly

a future followed by to su,
will certainly
^),
in connection with
gives
the expression the meaning that something
happen or
is
at hand.
(103).
Masdni sardn
t6 su, will certainly go.
O
_"T* 7
~^w 4*
Ten-ka no mitsi naki koto Jisdsi. Ten

motte b6ku-tdku to sen t6 su
2
)
,
'*
-t
masdni Fuu-siwo
long that the
"7^-ttjtf
=L
t
?
^
Jt ^
"
it is
^ irW = tpw j> V| ^ ? /^ -X* ^

|
__
"tfii
JJl
s\ |^
^
-
empire has been deprived of the way of truth and

^
righteousness ; but
"^
Heaven
will certainly use the
mas-
*P^
7C^
fe g
^
S^
*
V^T
if
ter (CONFUCIUS) for a signal bell (for a herald).

3
_/tf^
-s^^
Koku-ka masani okordnto surebd, kanardzu

a nation or a family
is
tei-siyou-ari
^ ^^
>
indeed on
the
way
to raise
it.
t '*d& 7
itself?
then there are certainly signs that give notice of
II.
The periphrastic Future.
A. The periphrastic Future of the written

1.
language
is
formed
by grafting
7> ^,
aran or
7>
arame
(= shall be) on the substantive

g.:
erit.
form of a verb, by which aran by aphaeresis becomes ran. E.
Mi, Miru,
to see; Miru-ran,
the seeing will be, videns
Kik)i, M, to hear; Kiku-ran,
= the hearing
will be.
will be.
Iv)i, u, or li, lu, to say; lu-ran,
= the saying
As
the Japanese find these words
expressed in the
old
rebus writing by
consider raw as a
cites
^t>Rv
particle
B3J
K^
H?
idv
also,
"?
S^'
tliev
standing alone.
RODEIGUEZ
on
p.
66 line 27,
ran and, on
line 8,
uran as particles of the future.
1) B.
BROWN,
Colloq. Jap. XII.
2)
Lun yu
III. 24. See J.
LEQOE, Chinese
classics, Vol. I. pag. 28.
3) Tschung-yung ,
XXIV.
CHAPTER vn. THE VERB.
75.
213
2.
By
suffixing
naramu, = naran,
or
narame (=
will be) to the substantive

will see, hear, say.
form of a verb.
Miru-naran, Kiku-naran, lu-naran, =

,
va
narito iveru narame
people will (narame) have said (iveru) that
is
equal to B.
3.
In combination with negative verbs by suffixing aranan

shall or
a euphonic modifica-
tion of ari -H nan,
may
'),
be,
to the substantive
form of the negative verb.

84.
Kaswmi tatazumo aranan

4.
= also the not
rising of fog will happen. See
By
grafting su, suru, fat. suran (= to do) on the form of the Future, by
s
which the
have seen.
5.
passes into the impure
ns-z.
est,
Mi-tari, have seen; Mi-taran, I shall
Mitaran-zu, = visurus
Mitaran-zuran = visurus
,
erit.
By
grafting the auxiliary verb mas)i, u, (= to dwell, reside, see

.
101) on
-+
the form of the Future of deflecting verbs,

or
.
.
amu,
aw, by which
am'
masi
an + masi passes into

,
amasi,
((
e.
g.
Ni
to be
becomes Namasi
*
-{^
$j^
=?,)
contracted from
Nan +
masi.
Ari, to exist, becomes Aramasi.
Nari, to be, becomes Naramasi (-f
>^^
r
-|j^
^^
^C^ ih^)'
Ktivd-siMri, to be fair, neat, excellent (page 120), becomes Kuvd-sikdramdsi.

Siri, noscere,
becomes Siramdsl, sciturum

to mention,
esse.
Mavusi (pron. Mqosi),

Iv)i, u, to say,
becomes Maviisamasi, Moosamasi.

'fjjf
becomes Ivamasi ('ZJ'^
^)-
Tamav)i, w, to grant, to bestow or confer on,

Sak)i, u, to unclose
itself,
becomes Tamavamasi.
to open,
"
becomes Sakamasi.
"
Hitomo naki
tree of the inn,
"
Yadono sakurava
saru tosino
Haruso
sakamasi, the plum-
though there was nobody, would nevertheless open in the spring

definition of time: saru tost,
of last year. The

If
last year, also transfers
masi to the
preterit.
we compare
the periphrastic Future Iva-masi with the periphrastic Present

it
Ivi-masi (see
101. 2. a),
it is
will appear, that the difference of the

it,
two forms
is
not in masi, but that
in the verb connected with
in the one case being
the Future, and in the other the root-form. Thus

rity, seeks for the force of the
when
the native, on old authost,
Future Ivamasi in the termination
and chaFuture,
racterises it as the
Mi-raino
si
si
(%* ^$3 J
s
).
JJbî
ê
'
OT
f *^ e
he
errs.
His Mi-raino
does not exist
1)
Hiyaku-nin,
N.
73.
si,
2) This has reference also to the Mi-raino
adopted in RODRIGUEZ filemens.
p. 6<> line 8
and
line
16-22,
214 In the rebus-writing

form Masik)i, u, by ^J
self 'attributes
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
75.
this
Masi
is
expressed by
to
59^ ^
an d
* ne derivative
ll&l^ forms
,
the force of ffi%
which the Japanese philologist himHossi, = will, and ~flj*2x, Best, may, and
which are to be distinguished from Mazi

B. The periphrastic
It
is
(59^
see
95. 2. 2)
).
Future of the spoken language.

(zi)
formed
1.
by grafting
zu (X), zuru, zureba, on the form of the

t
Future, proper to the spoken language, zi

dification of si, su,
zu
etc.
being the euphonic moAkeo-zu, aperiturus

est.
sum,
sureba,
to do.
est.
T^^X
Miu-zu, visurus
2.
est.
Yukoo-zu, iturus
By masoo
or aroo, the Future of masi and ari,
to be, the first suffixed

shall write.
to the root, the second to the
gerund of a verb.
Kaki-masoo, I
Kakite (or Kaite) aroo, I shall write.
Remark.
1.
Let us
now
just review the nine

lines
particles for the
Future" quoted
by RODRIGUEZ EUm. pag. 66

Be)ki,
si,
and
8.
= may,
is
a verb. See
1.
101.
2.
Nan,
the Future of Ni,
to
go away,
84. 85.
to be in.
See
84.
Nuran, the Future of Nuri. See

Tsuran, a variation of Nuran. See
Taran, the Future of Tari, to be continually. See

Taran)zu, zuru, Future zuran, from Tari. See
78.
78.
- Tariken. See Ten,
82.
Si, the Mirainosi, based
on a misunderstanding. See
p.
213.
75. II. 5.
Bay a
is
a fusion of
or n, the characteristic letter of the Future, and haya,
an exclamation, which, as an expression of complaint (Nagekino kotoba), answering to our

execrated
Alas," suffixed to a Future, indicates that what
is
at
hand
to
is
(Baya negavi-sutsuru kokorono teniva nari).

pitiful
Kanasiki mono
nara-
laya! Alas he will become a
man!
Consequently Motome-baya, Se-baya, Mi-bay a signify, he will, alas! strive for . he will, alas! do, or see. The same may be said of Yoma-baya, from Yomi,
. ,
to read;
Narawa-baya, from Naravi, to learn; Nara-baya (not Naruwa-baya) from

,
Nari, to be or to become.
Remark.
2. "
The Future
is
used as a softened Imperative. Thus the poet says:

H
Yakazu tomo
kusava moye-nan
it
Kasuka-no va
off,
Tada faruno
" f, ni
maka-
setaranan, even if
be not burned
the grass will
grow
luxuriantly, therefore
CHAPTER
only leave the
VII.
THE VERB.
75, 76.
215
left it to.
field
of Kasuka to
tlie
vernal sun. Makasetari, he has

left it to,
is
Makasetaranan, he shall or
may have
used, according to the
Wagun
Siwori, for the Imperative Makasetareyo. Just so in the colloquial:

for
ide nasarei,
ide nasareo
may your
arrival
happen, please come.

something future, the verbs which
Remark
express the
3.
For
so far as they point to
permission
or
liberty,
the
power
or the
obligation
to do
anything, come under notice here. They are Be)si,

I
it
H,
it
ku, I
may; Ata)vi,
it
v#,
am
able, can,
and
*jjf
$ $f$v^
Too-sen tari,
ought to be,
must be,
shall be.
Further illustration of them
is
given in
104.
THE SUPPOSITIVE FORM.
76.
The terminations eba
or iba of nondeflecting,
and aba of deflecting
verbs are the characteristics of the suppositive adverbial proposition, which, as

a rule
,
precedes the principal proposition.
They
are
in
my
opinion
a fusion of
the form of the future en or in and an with the local termination ni and the
isolating va.
From Aken-ni-va comes Akeba, T^'^

to
)?
pronounced as Akenba,
5. '"*,
on being about
open or as one
see;
will
open; from Min-ni-va, Miba,
(Minba),
on being about to
from Yukan-ni-va, Yukaba, 2-#/^, on being about to
go; from Maran-ni-va ,
War aba,
:f">'^, in the spoken language even fusing into
Mara,
-f
>, on being about
to be,
might
it be.
In the deflecting verbs,

junctive
clearly noticeable is the difference
between the sub-
Yukeba
and suppositive Yukaba;
not so in the nondeflecting verbs,

definite indication
since Ake-ni-va
and Aken-ni-va both fuse into Akeba. For the
of the suppositive character the help of the adverbial Mosikuva, vulgo Mosi,
albeit, in case of, is called in,
and
it is
placed at the beginning of the suppo-
sitive proposition.
Mosi
to
wo
akeba, might one open the door.
In the ordinary
but for
style of
speaking the form
Nara
is
used not only for Nardba

if it is,"
Nareba also, thus with the signification of
and
as it is," as
appears from the examples following:
Sore nara (or Sore de wa) kai maloo, as
it is
so (= then) I will
buy
it 2 ).
1)
The
points, which characterise the impure 6a (/<) are

,
commonly
left
out by careless writers,
p. 4.
216
CHAPTElt VII. THE VERB.
76.
Sore ram*, firubefore noon I cannot come. Firu-mayeniwa mairi-ye masentt, Nokordzu 0-kai nasdrti, warn, then (the answer is), in the afternoon ')
goni,
ondzi nedan d4 age-masoo, if you
buy
all,
I will sell
it is
them
for the
same price
it
3
).
Ydsui (- Yasuki) nara, tori-mdsoo, as
(if)
cheap, I will take
).
The future in the Local and

open,
if
isolated
by va (Aken-ni-va, on being about
to
one
shall
in the Local isolated open) mutates with the substantive form

as appears
by va (Akuru-ni-va, on opening),
from the passage following, taken
from the introduction to a Japanese-Chinese Dictionary:
atJ
:OP'
-tt*
J* J
}*
o Ab ^^ HP 7 ^
K
A
3Pit
-rts
v.
F~it6 to iu zi 100 ractfcwienniva,
Fino buno
ki-
giyoo-mon no sitawo miru
besi.
"ZT
*& Sx
"T*
p.
2,
^
f
"ZT7
*j?* **
Fdna
sei-sw6ku
to
iu
zi
wo raoitomuruniva, Fa no buno wo miru

besi.
~T"
Ê
mon no
îH
sita
HB
i
JC h
-Bs >}C
^ -
-^ one
see^- ôr *^ e WOI> d

it
FUo (man)
then
^
-
one ought to look for

^ ne
in the division Fi, under
*,-'
P^
cl ass : breathing beings.
If one seeks
for the
word Fana
(flower),
one
ought to look for in the division Fa,

class: plants. r
under the
That the unfused forms J.^w-m'-va and Yukan-ni-va appear in the written
and spoken language as Terminatives as well, equivalent to the Latin ad aperiendum, ad eundum, cannot surprise us, since the local termination ni
used as characteristic of the Terminative. (See
Remark.
7.
is
also
IV.
b.
g.)
When
in the
Proem
eener Japansche Spraakkunst of 1857, p. 146, I

,
first
explained the
origin of the subjunctive and the^ suppositive form
I raised the question
whether or not the Japanese

confound the two forms.
themselves
were clearly
conscious
of
it,
seeing that they

p.
so
frequently
Mr.
E.
BEOWN, who
Teachers
is
has adopted
my
theory, at
rational
VII
gives the following as answer to it: ,,Ja-
panese
know nothing
of the
of these
formations and constantly
affirm
that the
conjunctive
fication;
it is
the same in sense as the conditional, and that Yukaba and Yukeba have the same signir
but Mr.
HOFFMANN has
how many
ably and clearly demonstrated the distinction as above given. Indeed
remarkable
obscure points in the structure of Japanese words have been elucidated by
I) Shopping-Dialogues, p.
17.
2) Ibid. p. 36.
3) Ibid
p.
3?.
CHAPTER vn. THE VERB.

one who has derived
provided
all
76, 77.
217
I admit the last,
inter-
his
knowledge of Japanese from the study of books."
Japanese
books'" be understood. Before that time I

I
had not had the opportunity of
course with Japanese, which
enjoyed afterwards, in 1862.
THE CONTINUATIVE VERBAL FORM.
77.
The
)
,
deflecting
derivative
forms ari,
iri,
ori, uri, as I
i (
have shown
formerly
are continuative forms of the verbal element
68)
and express
the continuance of
of
movement
and
or being in a condition or in an action.

still
The
choice
them was
originally,
is
under the influence of a vocal harmony,

syllables be
which requires that the vowels of the subordinate

that of the principal syllable.
accommodated
to
Ari, Iri and Ori occur as substantive verbs with the signification of 1) to
bo or exist
^
,
and
seat
,
2) dwell , stay as root.
ffi
^
verbs.
and have
to go ,
,
and
or
wi -
These three verbs will subsequently be treated
further in
96, 97, 98.
Examples of the derivation of continuative

that the forms between
[ ]
Here
is
to be remarked,
have not hitherto occurred to me, yet they must be
supposed as basis of the derivative forms. Aki, light.

Akdr)i, u, shine, beam.
;
Kdki hook
,
to
hook
v.
i.
Kak)e,
w,
v.
uru,
tr.
fasten,
Kakdr)i, u, be hanging.
hang,
Satyi,
u,
unclose
v.
i.
itself,
Sakar)i, u, be in blossom
to open,
or bloom.
[Ag)i, u; rise.]
Ag)e, M, uru,
raise.
Agar)i,
u,
be
rising,
ascending.
[Sag)i, u,
droop,
hang
Sag)e,
u,
uru,
cause to
Sagar)i, u, to be drooping.
down.]
,
droop.
augment,
v.
i.
Masar)i, M, to be superior.
zi (=
si),
not to be.
zar)i,
u,
continually
not to be.
Miz)i, w, not to
see.
Mizar)i,
seeing.
u,
not
to
be
1)
Prone
eener Jap. Spraakkunst, 1857. $ 37, 41.
218
Araz)i, u, not to exist.
CHAMEfc
VII.
THE VERB.
77, 78.
Arazar)i,
existing.
u,
not to
be
[Sadam)i, w, to be determined.]
[Fazirn)i, u, to begin, v.
i.~\
Sadam)e u uru
,
,
to deter-
Sadamar)i, u, being deter-
mine.
mined.
u,
Fazim)e,
v.
tr.
uru,
begin,
Fazimar)i, u, to be beginning.
Tsidzimar)i,
u,
to
Tsidzim)i,
u,
wrinkle;
Tsidzim)e, u, uru, to crimp,

v.
tr.
be
crimp.
crimped.
Firomar)i, u, to be widened.
Firom)i, u, to widen,
v.
i.
Firom)e, u, uru, to widen, tr.
Tsum)i, u, to accumulate,
v.
Tsum)e,
v.
u,
uru,
amass,
Tsum6r)i, u, to be amassed.
intr.
rise.
tr.
Ok)i, u,
6k6r)i, u, to be rising, the

rise.
Ok)i(= Iki),u, breath; flame.
8k6r)i, u, to be
flamming.
to
Nok)i, u, recede.
Nok)e,
u, uru, to
put back
Nok6r)i
u,
be
re-
to bequeath.
maining.
Nob6r)i, u, to be growing
higher,
to
*
Nob)i, u, stretch, to be-
Nob)e, u, uru, stretch, to
come longer or
taller.
make longer
or taller.
ascend,
as
smoke.
Mdts)i, u, wait, trans.
Mdtsur)i, u, to be wait**
ing:
Ne,
sleep.
Nem)i, u, to
Nemur)i, u, to be sleeping.
be sleepy.
f
Thence:
*
Famani
(not
Yamawo)
upon
nobdri, to ascend a
mountain.
a feast. Mdtsuri (not
JTontfwo mdtsuru,
attend
a god,
make him
matsuri), the attendance, the feast.

It is obvious that to this category the derivative adjectives in
karu and
gam
also belong. See p.
113.
10.
iri.
78. ..te ari, ..te ori, ..te

I.
The continuative verbs Ari, Ori,
Iri (= exist, dwell), in connection with
it
preceding gerund, form a continuative verb, to which the idea of a perfectum

is is
praesens also
of opening, he
attached.
Akete-ari, Mite-ari,
Yukite-ari, (he) is in the act

videns est, iens
est.
seeing,
is
going, = aperiens
est,
Mdtsttt-
Irn (pron. Mdtte-fru, or Matsite-6ru,
he
is
in the waiting, Sltd-oru,
= he
dwells
in the doing, he
is
doing.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
78.
219
In the choice of Art, Ori or In, in the case before us, the vocal harmony,
or rather the easy cadence,
is
noticeable,
which had influence on one

for pure Japanese te-ari is
1
dialect
more than another. In writings which pass

exclusively.
found
not
If the
assertion
of a Japanese scholar
is
just,
which I
drii,
may
doubt, the dialect of Yedo uses by preference, iru, seldom

of
whereas that
Miyako generally uses 6ru

,
2
).
Tab4te-6ru, to eat; Normte- (Nomde-, Nonde-)

dialect of
6ru, to drink; Strife- 6rtt
to
know. Besides, the
Nagasaki has 6ru.
When
the same writer at one time uses te-dru, then again te-6ru, he seems to pay
attention
ori,
either to
the difference
of signification which exists between ari and
or to
the
ease
of the
is
cadence.
to.
Kotode aru, the
fact
is.
Sobdni dru
fitd,
some one who
near
On
the other hand: Tono soba-ni 6ru fitd, someIritsthdno koto wo
one who stands near to the door.
kondnde 6ru fitd, some one
who
is
fond of antiquities.
96, 97, 98.
Ari, Ori and Iri are inflected as deflecting verbs. See
II.
..tari, ..taru,
the contracted form of te-ar)i, u, in connection with a
precedent
noun, whether Japanese
or Chinese, answers to our verb to be, or

it
exist, when, connected with a word expressing a quality,

cate,
e.
forms the predi(
g.
he
is glad.
Forms
of inflection, the
as
same
as of
Ari
96); tari
is
the closing form, tarn, the substantive,
well as the attributive; taran, ta-
ran)zu, zuru, zuran, frequently occur as forms of the future.
Examples:
Kind kimi
tari,
if
tareba, sin sin

is
o
IIT
*
the master
is
a
u
Wau-siya t&ru fitd, a
man
master, then
o
the ser-
who
is
a ruler.
vant a servant.
1
^t
jdfo
AU.
Dai-kinwo faravu
sets
mo dou-you
taru besi
),
also at the
ê
in the same way).
price, it shall
be just so
(it shall
be done
1)
Mr. TSUDA SIN ITSIROO.
2)
native
i.
of Yedo also told

e.
me: ',,0lokowa OOfi-masu
to
mouti mast; kodomo onna
wa &i.-masu
to
mousi-mdau,"
The men
say ori-mosu,
women and
children, Qxi-mdsu.
al.
3) Franco- Japanese Treaty of the 9 Oct. 1868, Art. VIII,
4,
220
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
78, 79.
Ttikto,
sei-zin
tari,
tattdki
koto
is
Ten-si tari, as to virtue he
is
saint, as to worthiness
he
a son of heaven (emperor).
The spoken language changes
this
tari into
dza,
^"^
by some written
= JTore sai-siyo tari or (Engl. orthogr. ja, Fr. gia) Kore sai-siyo ziya (dza)
nari,
;&
>?
j^f,
this is
is it
my
home. Korega makotoni sen-nin ziya,

is it
this is really a
genius. Soo ziya, nai,
thus or not? li ziya, naika,
good or not? Fataraku

is
inonoka,
is
he an active
man? Fataraku mono
dziya!
he
an active
man
*).
FORMS OF THE PAST TENSE.
*
The form- words of the past tense
which derivative verbs are formed.
79.
.
.
3
'
Kwa-ko).
are auxiliary verbs of time, by
means of
tari,
taru, in the spoken language ta, contracted from te-ari. It, in
connection with a verbal root, expresses continuance in the condition or action,
which, by the radical form of the precedent verb,
is
named
what
as something just
is
becoming.
E-tari"
and
have gotten"
are both
called the
com-
pleted present tense.
The spoken language shortens
tari
and tdru to ta, which
ta has also
been
admitted into the familiar written language. Opposite to

field
Ta yd sonovd
fUrubitdri,
or garden have become old,
is,
in the spoken language:

field
Ta yd sonogdfuis,
rubitd; opposite to FurHbitdru ta
yd sono,
sono.
or garden become old,
in the
spoken language:
Since
e,
it
is
Fiiriibitd ta
yd
the form of the gerund in
te
or de on which, after dropping the

(
ari (or in the
spoken language
a)
is
grafted, the rules given
72) for the
gerund are of application

of the gerund
is,
to the perfectum praesens also, in other words: the e
in the spoken language, simply superseded
by
a.
Akete
becomes Aketd.
Mita.
Yuita.
Yonde (= Yomite) becomes Yonda,

Naraote (Naravute)
Atte (= Artte)
read.
Mite
Yuite (= Yukite)
Narqota, learned.
Atta been there.
,
Maste(-Masite)
Mas'ta, =been.
Maitte (= Mairite)
Maitta, has
come
Compare RODKIGUEZ Elem.
p.
84.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
79.
221
Whether the perfectum praesens formed by
tari
have an active or a passive,
a transitive or an intransitive signification, depends on the precedent root-word.
Fund
to shore.
kisini tsuku, the ship
comes to the shore,
it
lands; tstiMtdrt, has
come
Kisini
tsiikitdru
fund, a ship that has come to shore.
F&ndwd
kisini tsukdtdrt, one has brought the ship to shore.
Kisini tsuketdru fund, a

to import
ship,
that
one has brought to shore.
Sina-monowd mdtsi watdri,
goods.
Motsi watdri tdru sina-mono, goods which one has imported.
Instances of the use of the Perfectum praesens.
Koy)e, uru, to become thick,
fat,
corpulent.
M'me ameni
koyu, the
thick.
plum
becomes thick from the rain.

koyurii
M'me
koydtdri, the
plum has become

Koyetdrti
Ameni
plums,
the
at-
mme,
plums, that become thick from the rain.

thick.
mme,
that have
become
leaf.
Tsuyu kuvdni
tsukitdri,
dew has attached
itself to
mulberry
tached
Tsuyu (or Tsuyuno) tsukitdru kuvd, leaves to which dew has
itself.
Kai-fenwo isi-kabewo
tsukite
tsiyau-kawo tsurane tari, along the
sea-shore one has built
up a wall of stones and placed the houses of the place

satoritdrn fit6 ,
kftni
in a row.
Mitsi wo
some one who has understood the way
(the doctrine).
Amanand
y6ri kitdru fit6 fitaini tsuno ari, fundni ndritd

to
Yetzi-zennd Fino-urdni tsuki-tdri; yueni kono tokorowo Tsnn6-kd
nddznku,
men
come from the country of Amana, have had horns upon the forehead and
in a ship
sailing
reached Fino-ura in
(hornshill).
Yetsizen;
that
is
why
the
people
call
that place;
Tsunoka
asa, a
Ameno
yamitdru dsa,
ceased.
in
spoken language; yanda

tanomini maitta, I have
morning when the rain has

beg you.
fail.
Watdksd
oo-tsi
come
it,
to
^-^ J$^
3/^?$<'2,
si-mas 'td, I have understood
I shall not
Remark. The perfectum praesens in
tari,
formed from transitive verbs, as
Ake, to open: Tsug)i, u, to pour in; Ir)e, uru, to make to go in, remains
transitive even
iretari,
though expressions, as Tova aketari, Tsiyava
tsugitari,
Fiva
because they are found translated: the door has been opened, the
fire
tea
has been poured, the
has been put in
'),
seem
to plead for the
passive signification.
fire,
Opposite to the subject, isolated by va, door, tea, or
stands as predicate: one has opened, poured, put in.
1) Japanese
and Dutch Dictionary, by the Prince of Nakats.
222
80.
it
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
80.
The form- word ..dri, ..6ru, 6reba,

i,
deflecting,
when
in deflecting verbs
takes the place of their verbal element
expresses the continuance in the past,
or the praeteritum praesens.
Mds)i, u, to be; Masdri, has been.
Er)i, u [to be distinguished from Er)i, u, that as a substantive verb
means
to choose]
old- Japanese
is
a variation of ar)e, u (see
96), and, just as cm,

,
is
indicated in
by
Eri
is
the closing form
era the form of the substantive or
attributively used
ples:
noun; erame, eramu, = eran, the form of the Future. Examthe flower fades;
Fdna sib6mH^
Fana
sibomeri, the flower has faded; Si-
bomdru /ana, a flower which has faded.

born.
Um)i, w, to bear;
Umeri, to have
Kisakino umeru ko, the son that the Queen has born; Kisakino umeran
ko, the son that the
Queen
shall
have born.
or attributively
is,
Remark. The eru used substantively
particularly with
(
the nondeflecting verbs in 0, superseded

(thus Akesi, Aketaru or Akerisi),
by
esi
81), etaru
78) or erisi
because the form Akdru already exists as
a variation of Akuru, thus, as participium praesentis.

If
it
be admitted that, behind

ellipsis
its
eri as I
suppose, the form Keri
82)
is
hidden,
and thus that Masdri, by

which
it is
has arisen from Mdsikdrt, with the meaning of

signification
is
equivalent,
then
clearly explained
by the origin
of the form.
Application of this rule.
..ki becomes ker)i, u.

Kiki, to hear;
Kiktri,
Siki, to spread;
Sikdri,
Yuki, to go;
Saki, to open,
v. int.
Yuktri,
Sakdri,
^
1
Iki, to live;
IMri,
Kdk6ri,
Kate, to write;
. .
si
becomes
^=f ^.
ser)i, u.
Nasi, to make be; Nasdri,

Nok6si, to
r
J|J
Yaddsi, to lodge; Yddose'ri,

Utsttsi, to
jffi
make
stay behind, to post-
remove; UtsusJri, |||
pone; N6kos4ri,
^3^^.
here
is
Terdsi, to make shine; Terasitri, ffi
Remark. The
verbs,
seri noticed
it is
arisen from
si,
the termination of factive

ser)i,
and
is
eri;
to be
distinguished
from the derivative form

eri.
which
a fqsion of the Kwa-konosi and
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
80.
..tsi (= ti)
Tdtsi, to stand up;
becomes
ter)i, u.
Tatdri,
Kdtsi, to overcome ; KaUri,

t
Mdtsi, to watch;
Mdtsi, to take;
Matdri,
Motdri,
Utsi, to strike,
beat
Uttri,
'.
Fandtsi, to let loose; Fdnatdri,

. .
vi becomes ver)i , u.
-f
Ivi, to say, to
be called Iveri
;
Nivovi, to smell, v. int.', Nivovdri,
Omdvi, to think;
Omoveri,
Avi, to meet;
Tovi, to ask;
Avdri,
Tovdri,
Sttagdm, to comply, to suit;

Sttagavdri,
I-
Naravij to learn;
..mi becomes mer)i, u

Stimi,
to reside; Sumdri,
r
SUsumi, to advance;
.<
Sidzttmi, to sink; Sidzumdri,
Susumdri,
SVbomi, to fade; Stbomdri,
Tsttbdmi, to bud; Tstibomdri,
Kumi,
Umi,
to bail out; Kumdri ,

to bear;
Umdri,
..ri bacomes rer)i, u.
Nari,
Tsumdri, ^
Tsiri,
^? to become;
T
,
Nardri.
Tsumordri.
Tsirdri.
Komdri
Masdri,
Furi,
..er)i, u,
ij
to stick in, int. Komordri. to exceed , to fall
to accumulate
scatter;
i)
Masardri.
Furtri.
zw^r-.;
down

[7sfo?z#&)i, w,
to succeed].
Tovi-ya akindvi-ya f$t6 sUdsini
tate-tstidz'ttkdri.
Sdredd tokdro dokdroni tird-mdtsimo ari, the custom-houses and shops (of Simonoseki) succeed one another in one line. Although there are back-streets also.
[Mds)i, u, to be; Masdri, has been].
JV.
fim6no kamiva
NN
nusino
kami ya-firo-wani ni
having changed into
narite, miavi-maseri , as regards the goddess N., the
god
NN.
a crocodile eight fathoms long, has. paired with her.

tokini ndri
Amaterdsu kamiva fiddrino mi me-wo aravi-tamdvi-si

the heaven-illuminating god
is
masdru kami nari,
a god, that came into existance (ndri-masdrit) ,
when
(both the creators) had washed their left eyes.
Kova
tsueni ndri-mas^ru
staff.
(or tsu&ni narerisi)
kami nari,
this is a
god that has become a
1)
To be
distinguished from the auxiliary verb,
Mn-i, explained
in
US.
224
CHAPTER
Kakar)i, u, to be suspended.
VII.
THE VERB.
3
80, 81.
h J
'{ffj^,
Kami-yoni ameto
tsutsito
no avidani kakarera. fasi, the bridge (rainbow)
which in the ages, when gods allone existed, was suspended between Heaven
and Earth.
\_OTcds)i,
u, violate.]
Oranda-zin ve
tai-si
fouw6
okdsertf,
Nippon-zinva, Jatai-si
panese,
who
against
Dutchmen have
,
violated
the law.
Nippon-zimai
fouwo
okasi-tdru Oranda-zin va
*).
Dutchmen, who against Japanese have
violated
the law
[Tamav)i, M, to condescend, to grant,

persons].
German
the
geruhen, applied to princely

costly
Mikotono faki-tamaveru
hoii-ken,
sword that the prince
has or had girded on.

[Sir)i, M, to get to
know;
?Wn, he knows.
Mitsino okonavarezaru ware
korewo
I
sireri,
that the
way
is
not practised, this I have gotten to
know
(this
know).
[Itdr)i, M,
come
to (the point
any one
will reach); Itdrdru, the

it,
having got
it,
at,
having reached].
Sono itareruni oy6nde, getting at

ultra.
having reached
= reaching the non plus

reached the middle way!
[Nok6r)i, u, to be
Tsiu you sore itareru kana! oh that one had
left],
Nokdrit mono, something that

over.
is left.
Nokordru
mono or Nokori-si mono, something that has remained

81.
The form-words ..ki
(^f) or ..si (s/), grafted
on the verbal root in
or
i,
in the narrative style and in poetry characterise the simple perfect absolute,
and, like the Aorist Indie, of the Greek, express the action as completed at a
fixed
time and without continuance or repetition. Ki

si,
is
the indicative closingsi
form (= he was);
distinguished
which passes under the name of Kwa-kono

Gen-zaino
si
and
is
to be
from the
(page
107), the form in which the verb
appears as noun substantive or even as attributive (as participle, = been); kerne,
kemu, ken,
the future (= shall or
may have
=
been).
Ake-ki, Mi-lsi, Yuki-ki, ^4n'-ki,
aperuit, vidit, ivit, fuit, he opened, he saw,
he went, he was there.

.4fo-si, Mi-eit
Yuki-si, Ari-si, to have opened
it,
to
have seen
etc.
it,
having
gone
etc.,
or, attributive, the
having opened, the having seen,
1) The Treaty between the Netherlands
and Japan. t858.
Art.
V,
al.
1 ,
2.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
81.
'
225
Ake-lzen, Mi-ken, Yuki-ken, -4n'-ken,

will
aperuerit, viderit, iverit, fuerit,
= he
have opened, have seen, he will have gone, have been.
The
action
defined
by the Kwa-ko no
is
si
is
one, perfect or completed, with

closes the
relation to the
period, that
defined
by the predicate verb which

by
si is
sentence.
preterit;
With
relation to a present, the time indicated

it
thus a simple
,
with relation to a preterit
becomes, logically, our plusquamperfectum
with relation to a future on the other hand our futurum exactum.
Remark. The elements
ki
and
si
are
verbs which signify
coming and
going and with

compound
verbs.
the precedent verbal root, on which they are grafted, form
Ari-ki and Ari-si thus
mean
the arrival and the departure
of existence; forms which express the idea of having been.

pression:
Compare the ex-
Nous venons
de
le
dire
J ).
In the pure Japanese

2f
(ldi,
it
style the ki
of the past tense

e. g.
is
found explained by
= io come), or
also
by
^,
Kaheri-ki, 6^-^ 2J"v*> he returned,
and
mutates with nu and tsu (see

As
substantive verb with the
84, 85).
etc.,
meaning of come, Ki has the forms of Ku, Kuru, Kite

occurs
whereas
Si with
Sivi-ne ,
ears,
the
meaning
of
go away
sterilis);
is
in Sinî, u, uru, die; Siv)i, iru, to be dead;
whence
dead rice
deaf.
(Oryza
Me-sivi,
dead to the eyes,
blind;
Mimi-sivi,
dead to the
Derived from Si,
the continuative form Sar)i t w, to go away.
Ken, old-Japanese Kemii (=

JSjj
shall
have been),
is
indicated in writing
by
(Kan)
and
- -
by Japanese
scholars themselves
2 ).
explained as a word
that
brings the past into doubt"

Examples of the use of Ki
as closing form:
rBJ
-l
ft*
^H
h
i
1ft?
"""*-
K no m
mi wo
Kamis
%
,
fasirano kamiva mina fttdri garni narl-masite , mi
f^Pi
Jfp
Jjiftlf
^*^
^jft
kdkftsi
tamavi ki, these three Kamis were solitary

their persons (themselves) concealed.
fij/"
and kept
1)
Here,
is
to
be remarked what
is
mentioned by The Notitia linguae Sinicae of Premare , by
J.
o.
BRIDGMAN, page 54, about

2)
^
3
lai
and
> t*
d>
k'iu.
//%
^-
^^
Wa-ffw
Sitoori,
under Ken.
15
226
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
si as
81.
a)
in Examples of the use of the form
noun
substantive:
said (of it),
Ko-zinno iveri-aimo samo arinu ben,
also
what the ancients have
must have been of

say.
this nature.
Iveri, continuative
past form of Ivi, Ii, to
_
1.
Samo, = Slkdmo,
so, in this
manner.
is
As noun
substantive the form in si

or
declinable, thus:
also
Ari-siva, the having been,
what has been. Ari-simo,
what has
)
been (subjective substantive proposition).

nari
si
Nokorisi kavikono siyau

the reason
('^^
asiku
mo
kono y%e naran, this
may be
why
the silkworms remaining
have become bad of nature.

2.
there has been. Ari-sini, 3. Ari-siniva, 4. Ari-site, while
5. Ari-si yori
kono kata, since there has been.

Ari-sini yorite or yotte, while, or as there has been.
,
6. Ari-si-yu6, Ari-si-kara, 7.
8.
Ari-sikaba (= Ari-si-sikaba)
whereas or since there has been.

,
Motomefor, read,
sikaba,
Yomi-sikaba
Narai-sikaba
Mi-sikaba
),
as
one has sought
learned, seen. Ari-sika-tomo , though there has been.

9. Ari-si nari,
it
has been there.
10. Ari-si koto ari, Ari-si to ari,
it
is
fact (koto) that there has been.
Ari-si to kaya, it
b)
may be
that there has been.

si as
Examples of the use of the form in
noun
adjective:
Nokori-si kaviko, the remaining silkworms.
Sari-si Fotdke, the departed
Buddha. Sar)i, u, to go away.
Kono tanewo motome-si

are rare.
fit6
mare nari, people
who have procured

reino koto, the
this
seed,
Kan-kiwo
sinogisi (or sinogittau)
manner
in which people have kept off the frost.

. .
N.
ga norisi
"
fund, the ship in which N.

take-si ta
is
had
sailed.
"
Ame
furazu
"
fi-no kasanareba,
mo,
"
maki-si fatake
mo
asa gotoni sibomi kare-yuku, field,
when
there
a repetition of not rainy days, then not only the burned

fades,
but also the
sown plough-land
and
and
dries
up every morning
it
becomes more faded
drier every day.
Sikdruni Ten no kakoni ya ariken, he will thus
have
stood
under Heaven's protection.
The Kwa-kono
si
shows
itself also
in both the words Figdsi, pron. Fingdsi
1)
By
this, is
what RODRIGUEZ page 66

la
line
7 from bottom says explained: ,,Le conjonctif a encore une

les verbes,
forme particuliere a
longue ecrite, c'est sikaba, que Ton ajoute aux raclicanx de tous
fifc
comnie
molome sikaba, yomi sikaba, narai
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
81, 82.
227
and Nisi, = East and West, FVngdsi being a contraction of Fmo-mukdi-si kata,
the side on which the sun has come to meet, and Nisi an abbreviation of
Vm'-si kata,
F4no
the side to which the sun has gone away.
82. ..ker)i,
(= ki-|- eri,
= has been), the
deflecting continuative
form of
ki (=was), characterises the perfect present tense. Forms of inflection, the same
as those of eri, thus:
Keri, Kesi, closing-form, = has been.
K6ru, form of the verb, used

or having been;
. .
.
as substantive
and
adjective,
= the having been,
Keru
nari, has been.

it
Kerebd, as, when, since
has been.
it
Keredomo or Kerutomo, although

Keran, commonly Ken,
shall
has been.
have been.
e.
Keraba,
g.
if it
has been.
it
Kerdku, adverbial form, = as has been,

Keraz)i, u, negative, = has not been.
li-keraku, as
has been said.
ATI, there
is;
Ari-Jd, there was; Ari-keri, there has been.

is
Ideographically keri, keru
expressed by
>5J^ ~j"
phonetically by Jj|, the

Jj^
name
of a bird ; that cries
gM gdri and therefore is called Keri in Japan.

and
stki (pp.
~T
J||J
stands for Kereba.
The
tive
adjectives in ki
105
107 and 109), which form a continua-
present in kdri, instead of kari assume keri for the form of the praesens
perfectum.
Taka)ki, ku, high;
4
Tdka-kdr)i, u,
possible;
is
high;
Tdka-keri, was high.

Be-keri,
Be)ki,
leu
(Ijf"
),
Be-kari,
is
possible;
is
was
possible.
Nd)ld, ku,
(^^),
without, ..less, Na-kdri, there
not;
Na-keri, there
was not.
Distinguish:
Urdslsd kayiri nasi,

-
= the joy
is
boundless;
kagiri nakdri,
- ;
ia
continually boundless ;
nakari-keri,
kagiri
nakeri or nakesi,
= was boundless
kagiri
= has been continually

is
boundless.
Since this distinction
confirmed by the Japanese spoken and written lan-
guage, as will be seen by the following examples,

opinion of those
J
we
hesitate to agree with the

,
who
declare kari
and
keri to
be identical. Nevertheless
is
we
leave the spoken language of Ye"do full right to use keri, where kari
meant.
1) K.
BKOWN, Grammar, XXIII.
20.
228
CHAPTER
vii.
THE VERB.
82, 83, 84.
Examples of the use of these forms.

[Ydsukii light, easy].
Nippon
sei
vd tsudzukd ndku ki-teu suru koto ydsu-
kdri kdri, the unmolested return of the Japanese army was easy.
\Nari (Nare), to become].

her soul transforming will
[Sir6ki, white].
Sono rei-kon ke
site
kaviko-to
narikeru
to
kaya,
have become a silkworm.
Sei-nei
to
Ten-wau mumare nagaranisite mi kusi
sirokari
kereba,
Siragano Ten wau

his birth, they
nadzuke tatematsuru, as Emperor Seinei's hair was white at
have called him Emperor White-hair.
[Tsiisaki, small].
Mayu
is
tsiisakereba,
ito
fosokusu, if the silk-cocoon was
too small, the thread

[Asiki, bad],
too fine.
te-ire
Kore yori
asikereba, notsini iro-irono
yamam
to nari,
it
as
from that point, the treatment (of the silkworm) was bad, afterwards
gets
to different diseases (different diseases arise).
\Yor6siki, good].
Ano kodzukaino
J
),
tsiitdmega yordsikerebd, watdk&siwa na-
gdku tstikde-masoo
I shall keep him.
t6 tim6i-mdstt
= that
servant's services having been good, I think
Nanu-ka
to depart
tatsu-besi
to
ari-kereba,
mina-mina yorokobi isami-keri, as we were

full
on the seventh day, every one was

. .
of joy and courage.

. .
83.
tari-ki,
. .
tari-si, fat
si,
. .
tari-ken;
te-ki,
te-si, fut
. .
ten.
By graf-
ting the form- word ki,

tari-ki,
keri
on the continuative form
tari
79) the forms
= he was
being; tari-ken, = he shall have been;
tari-keri,
= he has
been, are obtained.
The poet supersedes
tari-ki,
tari-si,
tari-ken
with te-ki, te-si, ten, also
Om6vi-tesi and Tsikdvi-tesi are considered to be equivalent to Omovi-tarisi (having
thought) and Tsikdvi-tdrisi (having sworn)
).
Wasuraruru
"
miwoba omovdzu;
"
"
tsikavi tesi
3
Fitono inotsino
osikumo aru kana!
).
I do not think of myself as being forgotten; oh! the charmingness of the
life
of the
man who
has sworn (love) to me, exists
still!
84. [..id],
nu, future nan; [nuri], nuru, nureba, future nuran.

*ro,
Ni, a deflecting auxiliary verb of time, come, by aphaeresis, from
tnu
1) E.
BROWN'S, Japanese Colloquial

Siwori, unter Tesi.
N.
689.
3) Hiyafai-min,
2)
Wa-gun
N.
38.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
84.
229
-
to
go away
),
and expressed in the old written language, by
(to
go or pass away)
grafted
on the root of a verb by which

,
its
termination
fuses with %nu into enii,
and the termination

or of an action,
i,
i.
with %nu into

e.
inii, implies
the
passing
away of a condition
the action
first
coming
to an
end. Whereas Ake denotes the

Akete-oru
to the old
opening" as an action
beginning, and
continuance in the opening," Ake-taru
to have opened:"
AMnu proper
written language, denotes

it
the ending of the opening." Sidz&mi, to
sink;
Sidzuminu,
sinks away,
it
goes away into the depth. Fate, disappear;

disappears.
(see
Fi
iri
fatinu, the sun sets
(and)
Iri, 68).
to go in, appears here as
coordinated, in the indefinite root-form
The
rule
on coordination
excludes the use of the root-forms ni and nuri; since, however, they form the
basis of further derivatives, they
must be
first
brought under notice here.
SYNOPSIS OF INFLECTED FORMS OF THE AUXILIARY VERB Ni,
Nu, =
TO PASS
OR GO AWAY.
230
CHAPTER
Vii.
THE VERB.
84.
The
auxiliary
verb Ni,
Nu, Nuru
(to
go away)
is
distinguished from the
substantive verb
Ni
is,
(to be)
in-as-much as the latter has the appositive definition

it
what
something
1.
before
in the form of a noun. (See
100. L).
Remark.
Attention must be paid to the three forms of the future nan, nuran
their derivation, as it appears in the synopsis, the logical result
signification there noticed:
and
is,
niken.
From
that they
must have the
and
this conclusion is
confirmed by the definition which the

1.
Wagun
Siwori gives of the three forms.

i.
Xfenva mi-raiwo kakete ivu kotoba nari,
e.
Nan
is
a word used with a
view to the future.

2.
Ranva gen-zaiwo utagavuno
kotoba wan',
i.
e.
Ran
(= Aran)
is
a word which
brings the present into doubt (should

3.
it
be?).
i.
Kenva kwa-kowo utagavuno

the past into doubt (should
kotoba nari,
it
e.
Ken
is
a word which brings
have been?).
it
Remark
passes into
2.
Since r
-J*9
n by assimilation becomes nn, Owari-nu (=

&"%
,
ends)
Owannu,
being the auxiliary verb nu
(^*
5?
with a view
to this example, called
Owannuno
Nu
or the
Nu
of Owannu.
Instead of Ari-nan (there shall or

also occurs for
may
be), in the dialect of
Yamato Ara-nan
euphony.
ni,
Examples of the use of the auxiliary verb
nu.
\TSn.~\Fatovatdkanitiwardte Sjakson-no fudoMro-ni tdbi-iri nu, the dove, pur-
sued by the falcon , flew into S'akya's lap.
Soreyori Sado ve tsuki-nu.
Mata zyun
fuu arazareba,
ni zyu fi-meyo tou-riu-su, thence they

,
came
till
to the island of Sado.

after the
As again
there
was no favorable wind they stayed there
20 th day.
Umi-nite kazeni aterare, kwan-gun riwo usinavUte, Zin-muno

>/L
mi
iroje
sannin
Z^.v yVv)
at
sea,
tok6ro
dok6ro nite use-tamavinu, as they were overtaken by

lost the
wind
and the government's troops

were
lost
advantage, Zin-mu's three
elder brothers
at different places.
Kami-agari-si masi-nu, he (the
prince) has gone on high (died). Agari, going up; Si, do.
Ko-zinno iverisimo
so.
samo an'-nu
besi, also
what the ancients have

set-loo
said, will
have been
[Nuru.] Yau-sanwo
besi, it
(^J>
>fcf) no waza kok6roye-nwo.
fito
mo
arinu
may be
that there were people,
who
considered the breeding of silkworms
a murderous occupation.
Flsdsiku kai-dei ni fanberi-vxan. aida, > during
my
long stay at the botton of the sea," the beginning of a speech by the sea-god, when he showed himself before the other
gods.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
84, 85.
or:
231
[Nan.]
(
Midzukara matsurovi-sitagavi-n'&mvi,
Midzukdra mdtsur6vi-ndmu
oneself 1 ).
^y
Jjjl?
^CA)
ne
w iH
come under subjection of
The poet,
instead of Matsi-nan, he will wait, uses
Matanan
also.
[Naba.]
it
M'mava
fikare-nabs,, asiki mitsinimo iri-nu besi, if the horse is led,
may have
turned into even a bad road.
[Nureba.] Fide-yorimo Tsiyau-zen suddniyabure-nureba,, sadamete Dai-Min yori

sukuvdn-kotowd
at
last
om dnhakdrite
Fide-yori considering that,
when Tschao-sien
should
have been brought under subjection, help would certainly come from
China
[Nuran.] Furuki way a iku-yo /0-nuran? the old stone house,
how many
ages
may
it
it still last?
~fe
Jjj
^ ^ J^. From
jffi
the Chinese translation annexed,
appears that by fe-nuran the future (may

fiit.
last) is
intended
whereas by fe-niken
the
exactum
(shall or
may have
lasted)
would be
indicated.
The
verse,
e.
poet, instead
g.
of nu, uses yuku
(^7),
= goes, probably
to
fill
up
his
Mdkisi fatdkemd sibomi kare yuku, even the corn land, where one
has sown, goes to fade (and) to dry up.

85.
.
.tsu, tsutsii
(^
);
. .
tsur)i ,
u eba
,
future an, an auxiliary verb
of time
proper to the Yamato dialect and the narrative style, and as such,
it
grafted on the root, as well as on the future form of a verb,
expresses the
going
away
of an action, or of a condition, and characterises the past time absolute.

z )
Tsu, tsuru passes as a variation of nu, nuru

of a proposition tsu (or mostly dzu, of the districts from Owari to
(84). As
predicate closing-form
dialect
^*) is in use
s
by preference, in the
Yedo
).
Tsutsu, as a doubling of
tsutsu
tsu, implies the
repetition
,
(iterative form), om6vi-
being made equivalent to
om 6vitsu-om dvitsu
tsuru,
thought and thought.

shall
Tsuri, continuative,
= has been;
= having been; tsurdn (tsurdmu), =
have been.
In the old rebus-writing tsuru lurks under the character )^, which means
tsudzuru,
to
sew to; Mi-tsuru, to have seen,
is
denoted by
J^ )^
Kiki-
tsuru, to have heard,
by
^ $&.
Most common are the expressions "XTe î
1)
Nippon-ki>
is
2) Tsuru
to ivu,
i.
also considered as a modification
of te-aru.
>,Te-aru, teare" tco isudzumete ,,tsuru, tsuri*
e.
contracting Te-aru and te-are , one says tsuru, isure.

p.
\.
Wagun
Siwori under Tsuru,
3;
Wa-gun Siwori, under Tsu. Vol. 16.
recto.
32
CHAPTER
vii.
THE VERB.
85.
SJ*
litsu, said;
fy~
y
,
Mitsu, seen;
^^ ?
Kikitsu, heard;
,J|
:?,
omdvitsu,
thought;
Hj|ff
^,
Kurdsltsu, become dark.
Examples of the use of these forms.
4u
ê
^^
___.
fffl
.,d I
=
-
% ^0 7
, .
|| . II*'
Kova
keqare ^
wo nikumi-tamavu mi-tama
,
ni yorite ndri
-^
it"
"
masitsii , this (goddess) has arisen

fr
as
an emanation
tP-t-
1^^
* ne
spirit detesting uncleanness.
Remark. In the same author, instead of nari-masitsu (- has arisen),

maseri, nari-maseru
nan, and nareru nari alternately occur. (Compare
80).
Inuru
tosi
NN.
of
ni tovaresi koro, kasikono fuu-doioo kiki tsu,
when,
last
year
inquiry was
made
NN.,
I heard of the
manners and customs of that country.
Kono Kamino mi
of this
yuite,
sudzi simoni sirusitsu or also sirusdri,

(it)
as to the pedigree
Kami, one has made mention of
below
).
Dasa
kikite,
yosasi tokoroni
Ten-wauno sono ts&mawo tsukavasitsvra. koto wo
tasukdwo moto-
mento omdvti*), when Dasa, going to the place of his destination, heard, that
the
Emperor had had
his wife sent to
him, he begun
to think of seeking help
(for her).
Fotot6gisu
"
ndki tsiiru kdtawd

"
"
ndgamureba,
3
).
Tdda dridkend
tsukizd nokdrerti
If I look towards the side,
where the cuckoo has
called,
Then, there only the moon has remained shining by

Nokordru fdnava
H
"
clear daylight.
kevu
mo
tsiri
tsutsu,
Waremo
The remaining
ukitaru
yowo
sugusi tsutsu.
flower, has been strewed to day (leaf for leaf).

life
Oh
I too
have passed the floating time of
(step
by
step).
Fuzino takd-neni
yukl vd furi tsutsu.

it
On
Remark.
for
the high top of the Fuzi

writing,
tsutsu
of,
is
has snowed (repeatedly).

expressed by
III.
In
frequently
^,
2).
a sign
used
Nagdra, - in the midst
while
(Chapter VIII.
Probably some
35, p. 145.
identify this tsutsu, with the dzutsu,
at a time, treated in
1) Sudzi, the object of the transitive riruri, to
mention,
is,
by inversion, placed before the verb.

-
2) Nippon-*, 14, 12.
3)
|J
-^
Hiyaku-nin issu,
N.
81.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
86.
233
86. SYNOPSIS OF
THE INFLECTED FORMS.
234
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
86.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
87.
235
CAUSATIVE OR FACTIVE VERBS IN Si OR Se.

87.
The causative verbs, which denote a causing to take place
or a cardrink),
rying out of the action, such as our raise (make rise),

are formed
drench (make
san
by means of the
deflecting verb si, su, future

i
(^^),
= to do.
In nondeflecting verbs in e or
this
si
is
suffixed to the root,

isi
,
by which the
derivative forms esi or isi (or sometimes instead of
osi
and
usi) arise , whereas

(or
in deflecting verbs their termination
at the
same time passes into a
some-
times, for vocal harmony, into o, see
76), by which the derivative forms asi
or osi are obtained;
e.
g.
Yuki, to go;
-
Yukdsi,
make
go.
Noki, to go back;
as continuative
Nokosi, to
make go
back.
The
verbs,
which have ori or uri
form
is
(see
88), have osi or usi as their causative form. In
103 Si, to do,
treated as a substantive verb.
Sometimes nondeflecting se, suru, future sen, takes the place of

passes for a syncope of sim)e: uru, future
Ivase, have say,
S)i, u.
Se
88.
en,
^ff, = have
Manyo
do.
siu,
See
Kikase, have hear, are at least in the
explained
The following may

1.
serve as examples of the derivation of causative verbs:

,
Kdy)e, eru,
to return,
v.
i.]
Kayes)i, u, to
v.
tr.
make turn back
to return
In Yedo: Kairu, Kaisu.
2.
M)i,
N)i,
iru,
a
,
to see;
Mis)e, eru, uru, to

Nis)e, eru, uru, to
imitate.
make make
see, to show.
3.
iru,
~, to resemble;
resemble, to
4.
5.
6.
Yuk)i, u,
Ugok)i, u,
Yukas)i, u, to
make
go.
to
3% to move,
,
v.
i.
Ugokas)i, u, to move,
v. tr.
make move.
Nom)i,
u,
to drink;
Nomas)i, u, to give drink (Fitdni mi-
dzuwo, water
7.
to somebody).
tr.',
YdsUm)i, u,
;^, to rest, v.
i.;
Yasumds)i,
u',
also e, uru, to rest, v.
contracted Yasunz)i, u.
8.
Si,
^,
5
i
to go
away;
Sas)i, u,
^f^ ^f^
make
to
make go away,
to send, to dispatch (a messenger).

9.
S>', u,
^,
to do;
Sas)e, uru, to
do. Ne-sase, to
make
10. Kudz)i, uru,
J))j .^,
to fall
descend.
Kudds)i, u, to
v.
tr.
make
fall
to precipitate
Kuddri,
^f
go from above to
below; a line of Japanese writing.
236
11. Av)i, u,
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
87.
to unite,
v.
i.',
Avas)i, u;
e,
uru, to unite,
v.
tr.
12. ToZ)z, M,
13. Asob}i,u,
to soar, fly;
Tobas)i, u, to
make
soar or
fly;
jJI^, to play, to ramble.
Asobas)i, u, to
to please.
make ramble,
to
amuse,
14.
Ni
to be ; Nar)i, u, to be continually.
Nas)i, u
ffi
,,
to
make be
to produce.
15. Nas)i, u, to
16. Nar)i, u,
make;
to sound,
v.
i.',
Nasas)i, u, to
Nards)i, u, to
Terds)i, u, to
make
produce.
R||rj\
make
sound.
17. Ter)i, u, 18.
)}f^, shine;
^dz)i, u, to
make
shine, to illuminate.
Dzi
),
yj î =
,
come
Das)i, u, or ^dds)i, u, to
make go out
off.
out of;
19.
Fiinewo Vddsu, to make a ship

burden, load. Nor)i,u, to be
start.
Ni, ^Hf
Nos)e, uru,
^j,
to
make
ride,
to
a burden; to ride, go in a carriage;

20. K)i, uru,
carry, to convey.
2J*,
to come,
to get up, to rise;
Kos)i, u, to
make come.
21.
Ok)i, iru,
Ê^,
Ok6s)i, u, to raise.
22. Nok)i, u,
JH,^, to go back, to re-
Nok6s)i, u, to
make go back;
^f
to
cede, retreat;
23.
24.
Ots)ij iru, uru,
leave behind.
^^^
to
to fall;
Otds)i, u, to Ov6s)i, u,
make
fall,
to
fell.
Ov)i, uru,
tf\
wax, grow;
to bear (on
J^
^
j.
to
make wax
/
or grow.
25.
Ov)i\
(0)i, u),
^^,
Ov6s)e, uru, or 06s)e, uru, (4J#, obsol.

,
the back);
26.
to burden; a charge.
Uruv)i, u,
JH!
to get moist; to descend;
Uruvos)i, u, to moisten, quicken.

Or6s)i, u, ~TC
27. Or)i, iru,
a
'
to
make descend
(z'
riwo, to throw out the anchor).

28.
Or)i, u,
,
to dwell;
to clot;
Ords)i, u,
i,
^ Jg,
make
f
,
to
make
dwell.
29. Kor)i, u,
w, to
clot; to kill,
^f.
to
Kor6s)i, u, to kill;
30. /, to
Korosds)i, u, to
Tos)e, uru,
send.
to
make
kill.
go away. Yor)i, u, to be going
make go away,
away;
31. Tstifyi, iru, uru,
fr|,
to get ex-
Tstikus)i, u,
to exhaust, to con-
hausted or consumed;
sume.
2
Remark. If we do not, as Japanese etymologists
),
reduce Nasi (= to cause
1)
The root *p
of
is
preserved in the family
name
*
J
[jj
J K
,
ni
yama, =:
sunrise mountain.
The change
2}
into
is
very
common.
Wagun
Siroori,
under Nati.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
87.
237
but derive
it
to be, to give existence to anything) to
Na (^*), = name,
is
from
Ni, = to be, the soundness of such a derivation

analogy of the Latin factivum facio
,
pleaded for, not only by the

fio , or the Sanscrit bhd-
which comes from
vaydmi derived from bhu, to be; but the Japanese causative verbs themselves
concur in supporting
it.
Thus we are of opinion
also , that Asobasi (= to please) is

l
a causative form, whereas the Japanese philologists

Asobi-{-masi
could agree,
see in it a contraction of
(^^
if
^p
b e pleasing oneself; an opinion with which we
the passive form Asobasare,
= be
pleased,
an ordinary expression
of politeness, did not

logical necessity.
make us suppose a
causative Asobasi (= to please), as a
The
is
causative verbs derived from intransitive verbs have the object,

active, in the accusative before them.
castle shine, enlightens
it.
which
made
Tsnkiva
sir o wo
terdsu, the
moon
makes the

Tsitsi
korewo nasi, ko korewo n6bu
),
the father originates
it,
fly.
the son con-
tinues
it.
Kimi takawo
tobdsti,,
the prince lets the falcon
Is-sekiwo
motte korewo tstikuri nasi-tdri, one has
made
this out of
one stone.
Tomiva
dkuwo
ur&vdsi, tdknva
-
mi wo
ur&v6sti,
),
riches moisten (quicken) the house, virtue,
the person.
okdsti
4 )
,
Zin-siyavd saiwo mdtte mi wo okdsi, fu-zin-siyava mi wo motte saiwo
the
humane man
push
uses his fortune to exalt himself, the
inhumane man
his person to
his fortune higher.
Midare, sidzumarazaruwo yasunzi otdsu,

Sekt-siwo
he quiets and subdues those, who behave disorderly and unquietly.

yasunzilrw ga gotdsi
5
it
is
as if
one quieted a suckling.
Kimi ni tsukdyuru
it is
tokiva stinavdtsi tndtsiwd tsukusu,
when
(I
my) prince
serve, then
i.
with
is
all
my
be
life.
Kotobawo
tsukiisu, to
exhaust his language,
e.
say
all
that
to
said.
-* *
t' 3
~^nff.
Iraf^ ~2
i/
~&
t
he does Sono kotobawo tsukusu koto wo dzu (pron. ddzu)*), / /

'
_H^>*
fll^ n0 ^
e^
ne ôes n0^ succee d in) exhausting his reasonings.
1)
Wagun
Siwori, under Asobasv. Tamato Kotoba, II. 42,

13.
r.
2) Tschung yung 4)
S) Dai Qaku.
VI. 2.
Dai Qaku. X.
1.
20.
5) Ibid. IX. 2.
6) Ibid. IV.
238
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
88.
CAUSATIVE VERBS IN Sime.

^fff
^ X
>v
^|^
i; ,
Ge-dzi-suru kotoba.)
88.
The
causative verbs in sime denote that an order, or in a less

is
com-
manding tone, inducement

are
given to do an action or realise a condition. They

si,
i.
formed according to the same rule as the causative verbs in

si
e.
the
causative
or
se is
superseded by the verb Sim)e, u, uru, ureba, gerund Simete
(contracted site), future
Simen,
to charge,
^^ ^^
1
'.
Ake, to open;
Tairag)e, uru, to subdue;
Ake-sime, to
,
make open.
,
Tairage-sime to order to subdue to
make
subdue.
. . .
s)e,
uru, do (termination of verbalized
se-sime, to charge to do, contrive that
Chinese words);
Nasas)i, u, to have made;
Ye-sas)i, u, to cause to get;
one does, have done.

Nasa-stme, to order one to have made.
Ye-sasime, to contrive to have gotten.
Ari, there
is;
is
Ard-sime, to order that there be.

not;
Nakari, there
Nakard-sime, to order that there be not.

Mdtswrd-sime
si
,
Mdtsuri, wait upon, to worship;
to order to worship.
When
Sime unites with the causative verbs in
a sincope takes place: from

1 ,
Kavdsi -\-sime comes Kavdsime, to have sent back; from Yukds~i-\- sime
sime", to
Yuka-
order to let (him) go.
Kuniwo
tairage-smiu , he orders the country to be subdued.
Tsukaviwo kave~itsu-
simu, he orders the ambassador to be sent back.

kusiki
Kava-kami korewo mite,

(
onna narito omovi, tddzusdvete is-syuku

is
-^ TjjâT^') se-simu, Kava-
kami, seeing him, he thinks that he

hand, and charges him to stay the night.
se-simen
to
te:
a beautiful maiden, leads
him by the
(
Yase-kiwo nivakdni
sei-teu-
ffi
-^| ^)
koydsiwo tsuy6ku-sti bekardzu, to
make
lean trees grow quickly,
one
may
not manure too strongly,
o
.
=>
ufi*
=7
i/*y*X
Ondregd mi wo tassento hossiirebd
II
^"^ *&y ^ ^b 5?
*
Mddzu
ta-ninwo tasse-sime yd.

,
Will you advance yourselves
7
*.
^rst
let
oiiliers
nelP themselves forward.
CHAPTER
Fit6ni yeki
VII.
THE
VETIB.
88.
239
(^>)
am-siniurut0($ sen-itsi (^fp
t6 su, to
manage that
there
be
much advantage
for others, I consider the only object.
KUvandkiwo kiru
koto nakard-sime, order that the
chopping of mulberry-trees do not take place!
Kami wo
mdtsuri, to worship a
Tor)i,
Kami; Kami wo matsurd-simu

to
he gives order to
it
worship the Kami.
u,
take;
Tord-svme, to have
taken.
Sore
takava karini motsivite, toriwd tord-simuru

is
tori nari, the falcon is
a bird, that
used for the chase, and (by which) people have birds caught.
Fakdri, to
consider; Fdkard-sime, to charge to consider.
KUmdosowo
utsU kotowo fakara(hostile)
sime
*)
tamavu
the
Emperor has
it
taken into consideration to beat the
Kumaoso.
Ni,
sime,
to be; Nas)i, u, to
make
be; to produce; Nasdsi,
make produce; Nasd-
charge to have made. He,

third.
who
orders, charges a second person to have

is
something done by a
That then
the reason,
is
why Nasdstme
it
plays so
important a part in the courtly style;

a prince gives order, to take
teiwo nasdsimeri t6 dri,
it is
it
the same as if
were said that
measures
that something be done.
Kaku-
(said) that the
Emperor N. has given
order, that
the wrestling games be held.

SM,
Tsurugiwo sadzukete, Ten-kwauwo korosdsimento
handing him a sword, he will have the Emperor murdered.
Remark
1.
The
is,
object,
which precedes the verb in sime in the Accusative,
Dative or Local,
as appears
from the examples quoted, the object of the action

ordered. If the latter
is
ordered, not the person
who
is
admitted into the sen-
tence then the old style allows him, as a remote definition, to precede in the
Accusative, e.g. Sukunevro fakdru kotowo ok6navdsi,mu

to hold council.
(the prince) orders
Sukune
The new
style uses the
turn of phrase:
by ordering Sukune he
has council held," and supersedes simete (ordering) by the syncopated form site;
thus Sukune wo
site
(= simete) fakaru-koto wo okonavdsimu.
Ten-wau Nunaki Iri-
fimewd
sit6
N.N. kamiwo
mdtsurdsimu, the Emperor charges the Lady Nunaki
and has the god N.N. solemnly whorshiped.
sai-sini tsukavu matsurdstmu ? liCtlT Ten-kano fttdwo site 2 ~fc v people of the realm are let pay their respects at the
.
.
3
),
the
feasts.
I)
Not fakarisime,
as in the original state.
2) Tschung-yung
XVI.
240
CHAPTER, VII. THE VERB.
88, 89.
Seu-zin
1 ttdrti,
w6
if
site, koktt-ka wo
osame-sunurebd
of
sai-kai narabi
MfcJfcJ
I
&
^ A
'*
( -jj^
).
one
let
man
mean
character govern the
country and people, calamity and misfortune rise to the top.
jflfoo
2M
flr?
i) wo
to-wi
wo
. .
t/e-sasimen fa?n^, to
manage
that one gets

osd-
the foundation of a long

murtt,
life.
JV.
wo
tsukavasite
Idzumono Oho-y astro ni
tokdrono kan-takdrawo tadasdstmu , (the Emperor) sends N... and lets the
is
Kami-treasure be inspected, which
kept in the Great chapel of Idzumo.

lets
Tamim
takavesi
uyuru koto wo osivdsimu, he (the Emperor Shin-nung)
the
people be taught ploughing and planting.
Remark
site
2.
Site,
simdte, is also superseded

to...,
,
by mei-zite
(ffjj
^T)
M..
or reito ivu
.
('&i
^^")
= giving order
with a precedent Dative.
Dai-siyau-ni mti-zit4
lets
N. .wo
Utdsimu
giving order to the general
named M. he
^^"
N.. be beaten
s/j.
(battle
be given him).
fffclT^v ^
^Y
^t3 ^
# /^
2^7
(the prince) giving order to the people, lets silkworms be bred.
THE PASSIVE FORM.
89.
The Japanese language

which answers to
expresses the idea of
to be rewarded" by an
active form,
get reward" and by means of the nondeflecting

which signify the
passive verbs,
verb e
(^î
to get, appropriate) forms derivative verbs,
appropriating of an action coming

thus
,
from without. The Japanese
in nature and form
are derivative active verbs ; therefore mention can be are
made only of the manner in which they
derived, but, by no means
of
passive forms of inflection, for e follows the nondeflecting conjugation.
According to their derivation the passive verbs are arranged in three

I.
classes:
1.
i
All deflecting transitive verbs in

is
can become passive, when their verbal

e.
element
superseded by e, u, eru, uru,
g.
YaJd, -Y^, to burn; trans.

Kiki,
Saki,
Yake
1 ,
^jr, to be burned, to burn

>r t
oneself.
*
,
to hear; to tear;
KiU, %
Sake",
to be heard, to sound.
f-=^f,
yr>r, to be torn.
1)
Lai Gaku,
3..
23.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
89.
241
3
Um-i,
2?
s.
to read; to bear
,
Tome, 3
bring forth
;
;*
to be read.
2.
Ume
Are,
*?
to be produced or born.
to become.
Arij
79,
~jr
to exist;
to be;
v.
fa\
7
~j~
-',
Nari,
Nare,
Ore,
7re,
^,
to become. to break, mfa-.
On,
E/W,
tf
9, to break,
]
)t
^,
2? )
to sell;
}
$> i^, to
be sold, to be for
to be made.
sale.
Tstikttri,
??
), to
make;
Tstikiire,
>?
v,
2.
The nondeflecting
,
transitive verbs in i, chiefly monosyllabic, attach e to

,
their root-vowel
either with or
according to the dialect of Yedo

2.,
without inter-
position of the y.
The writing has x,
v,
2.
>i
forms, which are fre-
quently confounded with -^,
^
Miye, 2.X (Miyu,
Miydte,
2. 2.;
Mi, i,
(Mirti, Mitd), to see.
Miyuru, i
3- 1^;
X 7-
Miydtari; or Jf{)e, w, wnt,

visible, appear.
6<e, etari),
become
7,
(/rw,
^ n^;
tie,
^y'ji, to shoot.
Iye,#3~(Iyu,#-3-',Iyuru,#-3-iV',Iyete,
#:c
7-), to
get a shot, be shot. Thence
lyu-sisi, a shot stag.

JVz',
(Niru,
>v/),
to boil; fa-ems.
JWye, ^=x (Niyu,
^ i; Niyeru, i=x V;
boil;
Tsyawo
mrti, boil tea.
NiyUru, ^Z-n/', Niyete, ^17-),

mir.
Niye-yu
boiling water.
Remark. If a nondeflecting verb followed by the verb e (= to get) remains

in
is
its
radical
form in
i,
the
retains
its
inherent signification of get;

i.
it
equivalent,
however, to the expression: get something done,
e.
the
being able to realize; thus Mairi-yenu (or in the spoken language Mairi-ye-
masenu
^j?o: T^X)
)*
cannot come.
II.
Some
deflecting verbs in
have &ye or 6ye for their passive form, being

i,
the verb e suffixed to the root in

or,
after the
i,
by strengthening has become a

This form comes from the old
on account of vocal harmony, has become

is
o.
Japanese, and
considered particularly elegant.
1)
Shopping-Dialogues, page 17.

16
242
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
89.
Ivi,
Siri,
-f
to say; to be called; Ivdye,

,
-f
^x,
or Ivae, to be said or named,

to
jSJf
gj|
2/y
to
know;
Siraye
),
^>3:,
to
,
become or be known.
existing.
.
Ari, 7'J, to exist;

Kiki,
Ardye,
^
,
to hear;
7>x, Kikdye, % 3 x
)t
become
to be object of hearing, ffi [^]

voice.
Thence Koy6, the sound,

Omdvi,
(timdi), to
think; Omdvoye",
t^>^
Jyf
^gj^
.
(timdoye), to be
thought of or
cogitable.
Inflection, regular: Kikoy)e, u, uru, ete, etari etc., e&a, future
rmm
(= wrw
+ aran)
become
thus Kikoyuran
to avoid
Kikoyen
which too much resembles the ne-
gative Kikoyenu, not to be heard.

loud.
Kikoyeken
(j^
^ ^ ^),
it
will
have
Remark. The substantive forms Ivdyuru, SirdyftrU, Kikdyuru, Omovoyuru,
mean
that which has been said, called, heard, thought, Ardyuru, that which
has gotten existence, that which appears, and exists. Used attributively, they
are equivalent to our passive participle of the past time. Sirdyeru
mono
is
what
has been brought to knowledge
Kono mi fasirano kamivd
ivdyurii Save no
kami ndri, these three Kamis are the so called Leading-gods.

no kanega kokomade kik6yu (in the spoken language
that temple
is
Itik 6ye-mdsu)
,
Ano
tera
the bell of
to be heard here.
Ardyuru mono fU6

,
Hotdke
the things
people, Buddhas that exist,
- all the things, people
etc.
The forms quoted, Ivdyurn, Sir ay uru, Ardyiirn agree

Chinese expressions:
III.
perfectly with the
Wr
gjf So wdi,
is
The most usual

I
derivation of passive verbs

ete etc.,
effected
by means of the
is
nondeflecting verb Ar)e, u, eru, uru,

the
is
= to become, which by which

its
suffixed to
substantive form of a transitive verb,
weak termination u
elided; thus:
Ake, to open; Akdru, opening; passive Ak6ru-\-dre
Akerdre, to be opened.
Mi.
to see;
Miru, seeing;
Mirn
-{-are
= Mirdre,
to be seen.
Fiki, to draw; Fiktt, drawing;
Fiku -\-dre = Fikdre, to be drawn.
1)
The etymological dictionary Wagun Siwori,
vol.
37
p.
2 recto
sire.
splits siraye into si
and raye, declares
raye as a lengthening of re,

does not say.
and siraye as a lengthening of
What
the lengthening means, the author
CHAPTEE
this rule the
VII.
THE VERB,
89.
243
According to
passive verbs following are formed.
Nondeflecting.
Ag)e, eru, to hoist, raise,
lift;
Agerar)e, u, uru
etc.,
to be hoisted.
Wak)e, eru, to share;

Tat)e, eru, to erect;
Wakerar)e
u, to be shared.
Taterar)e, u, to be erected.
At)e, eru, to touch, hit;
Aterar)e, u, to be touched.
Sadam)e, eru, to define;

Sim)e, eru, to charge, to
Ir)e, eru, to receive;
let;
Sadamerar)e, u, to be defined.
Simerar)e, u, to be charged.
Irerar}e, u, to be received.
J, Iru, to shoot;
Irar)e, u, to be shot.
Deflecting.
/, u, verbal element, to be;
Ar)e,u, uru, to get existence

Nar)e, u, to become.
to become.
N)i, u, to be;
Nag)i, u, to throw anything forward
at its full length.
to
Nagar)e, u, to stream. Kava, fata nagdru, the river, the banner streams.
Knsdwo
nagu,
mow
grass.
Nuk)i, u, to draw out;

Kog)i, u, to burn, scorch;
Nukar)e, u, to be drawn out.

Kogar)e, u, to be burnt. Nasar)e, u, to be produced.
Idasar)e, u, to be produced.
Nas)i, u, to cause to be, to produce;

Idds)i, or Das)i, u, to bring to light,
produce
Kndds)i, u, to drop; trans, to

Os)i, u, to press;
let fall;
Kudasar)e, u, to be dropped, to descend.

Osar)e, u, to be pressed.
Kor6s)i, u, to cause to clot; to
kill;
Korosar)e, u, to be
killed.
Watds)i, u, to set over; trans.

Fanas)i, u, to loosen; trans.
Otos)i, u, to
Watasar)e, u, to be set over.

Fanasar)e, u, to be loosened.
Otosar)e, u, to be felled.
make
=
ti),
fall;
to fell;
;
Fanats)i
(tsi
u, to loosen
Fanatdr)e
u,
to
be
loosened
to
be
banished.
Uts)i, u, to beat;
Utdr)e, u, to be beaten.
Mots)i, u, to catch hold of;

Iv)i, u, (li, lu), to say; to be called;
Motdr)e, u, to be held.
Ivdr)e, u, to be called.
Ov)i, u, to pursue;
Ovdr)e, u, to be pursued.
Kdv)i, u (Kai, Kau), to change, barter;
Kavdr)e, u, to be or
may be
changed.
244
Kttv)i, M, to eat;
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
89.
Kuvdr)e, u, to be eaten, to be eatable.

Usinavdr)e, u, to be lost.
treat,
Usinav)i, w, to lose;
Ok8ndv)i,
w,
to
act,
perform,
Ok8navdr)e, M, to be treated, performed

or committed.
commit;
Yob)i, u, to call,
Yobar)e, M, to be called.
tie;
Musub)i, u, to knot, to
Musub6
(not bd) r)e,u, to be tied, to be
knotted together.
Yom)i, w, to read;
Yomdr)e, w, to be read.
Umdr)e, M, to be born.
Um)i, w, to bear;
Nom)i, M,
z,
to drink;
Nomdr)e, u,
Urdr)e,
M,
to be
drunk, to be drinkable.
M, to sell; M, to chop, to cut;

M, to
to be sold, to be for sale.
i,
Kirdr)e, M, to be cut.
Sirdr)e, w, to be
know;
1.
known.
Remark
Has the Japanese
passive verb a potential force? Implicit, yes,
but not explicit! Just as our expression:
vegetables that are eaten," includes

its
the idea, that they are eatable, so the Japanese verb, especially
attributive
form, may, in the idea of the speaker, have a potential force, and Kuvareru
= a turnip being eaten, may mean that it is an eatable one. Compare the Sanscrit Amltab'a, - immensa vita, unmeasured and unmeasurable life.
into,
Thus when the proposition

sold cheaper than those
Cloths imported from foreign countries , can be

*)
,
made
in Japan"
translated into the Japanese spoken

yori, gai-k6k& kara watarimas'ta
language
is:
Nippon de tslcuremasta tarn-mono

2
tarn-mono wa yasiiku urare-mas'
),
it
declares, that cloths,
which have come from
foreign countries, are sold cheaper, than cloths which are
made
in Japan, and
the Japanese text has a fact in view, that includes the possibility, whereas the
English
can be sold" speaks of the possibility merely.

Wakdri-masdntf,
,
Not understanding any
thing" the Japanese says:
I don't understand it; not being
able to understand
it,
he says Wakdri deki-masdnti.

gives to the predicate verb the
Remark
2.
The language of courtesy, which
passive form, although logic requires the active (in treating the forms of courtesy,
1) R.
BROWN,
Colloquial Japanese, p. 8.
N.
60.
2)
Why
not rather:
Gai-koku kara watari-mas'ta tarn-mono wa Nippon de tsiikure mafia tarn-mono yori
yasuka ware-mas'.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB.
89, 90.
245
we
shall discuss this question further), gives a passive
form to intransitive verbs
also.
Verbs of that character resemble the Greek Middle voice, or even the Latin
shall not
Deponent Verbs; names, however, with which we
embarras the Japanese.

e.
To
the passive verbs derived from intransitive verbs belong,
g.:
/,
iri,
iru()jlj^), to dwell, stay; passive
Irarje, uru.
Mair)i, u
(^^),
(JH^),
to enter;
Mairar)e.
Aruk)i, u (^pJis^J*), to step;

Ner)i, u
to sleep;
Arukar)e.
Nerar)e.
Wak)i, u(ffi%), to become divided;
Wakar)e, uru, to be divided.

first
Remark
3.
Our method
of deriving the passive form,

R.
made known
in
1857, and afterwards (1863) adopted by Mr.

original Japanese method, according to
BROWN, does not agree with the
which
for ages a verb
Raruru
(i.
e.
Rar)e,
u, uru), has been imagined
and been inserted in the
dictionaries of the country,
as equivalent to the Chinese verb
^? p t
ON THE GOVERNMENT OF THE PASSIVE VERB.
90.
1.
The
its
object,
which
e.
suffers
g.
an action,
is
subject (Nominative), and the
verb
passive,
predicate,
MidzU ug6kasdru,
the water
is
brought into
motion.
2.
The verb
remains
passive
as
is
considered impersonal and the object undergoing the

to
action,
object
the
action,
in
the
Accusative,
thus
MidzUwd
ugdkasdru.
3.
Compare
112.
its
The verb
passive stands in
substantive form and has
its
complement,
(the
as a genitive, before it:
Midzuno ugdkasdruru, the becoming moved

is
move-
ment) of the water, or even that of the water, which
moved, which gets
movement.
4.
The
object,
from which the action proceeds, precedes as complement, chani.
racterized
by the termination
If
or
by
no t&mdni, = in behalf of, for the
sake of
no object
is
mentioned, the passive form

v.
may
also include the
idea of the Greek verb,

5.
medium, or the Latin
reflexivum.
its
The
definition of the material,
from which any thing derives
existence
or origin, assumes the genitive or even the ablative form in
yon
or kara.
Examples of the use of the passive forms.

Midzuvd ftgdstyd nagdru, the
river flows eastwards.
S$ri&n6 de
wd
itr6-
246
masenu, for this price
tiri
CHAPTEE
VII.
THE VEEB.
90.
it
is
not sold
*).
Watdkusi kono sindwo sond ndddndewd
masdnu, I do not
is
sell
these goods for that price.

Umdretartf,
Kdvlko umdre-tari, the

silkworms hatched.
dkondvardru
i,
silkworm
hatched.
or Umaresi kaviko,
Sirusaretaru mono,
miydtdri,
exercise;
it
things
made known.
Kono
mitsi sakdnni
t6
seems that this
way
is
much
practised; Okona)vi, vulg.
to practise;
Mi, miru,
to see; Miye, to appear, seem.

is
Wau-ziva
idaki tortte,
ma-
nukaretari, the prince

to
taken into the arms and saved (from the

sisu,
fire).
Manuk)i, M,
draw
out.
is
Asdgdvo asani umdrete yubeni
the morning-face (the flower
of the winds)
#ra/, to bear.
born in the morning and
dies in the evening,

is
Umdre from
sent to his
F$t6wo moto-kuniye tsukdvasaru, = the man

besi
to
own
country.
will
(
Mikovro tsukdvasaru
Ziyau mon
nite
(
sata ari,
it is
reported that the prince
be sent.
^j
v
|
^ v)
wo
seme ydburdruru toki , tou-siya

is
~J$
Si ^0
fusdgu nari
when
the gate of a castle
broken by assault
it
is
shut by means of a scythed chariot. Yabur)i, u, to break.

it is
Mukdsiva takawo
migini suesaresi to nari,
a fact, that formerly the falcon trained to sport was
made
perch on the right hand. Su)e, uru, to roost; Sues)i, u, to

u, to be
set
make
roost;
Su6sar)e,
up, placed high.
Toga-ninno kubiwo kiru, to cut a
criminal's throat;
Eubi wo
kiraretaru (or kirareta)
mono, one whose throat
is cut.
O
'
Aku-fuuni fanatarete tsdku-gan-si-taru yosiwo tsin-fao-zu, the
^9
JL
f-^-*"
report has been spread,
that
(the ship) has been set adrift

shore. Fanatsi, set free.
if
Y
Hbfir*,
T
2
by an
ill
wind and driven on
**x ?
Fttdni tasinameraru
he
is
vexed by others,
V^" '
^^
"
'
A ^
\/f
}f J f
BR
i-"-l
)7 , /
= Fyto ni
is
nan-giwo serdru, =
killed
difliculty is
caused by others.
Ten-wauni korosdru, he
by the emperor.
bite.
Kam)i, u, to
Inuni kamaretdrU fit6, a person bitten by a dog; Kazdni ordru take no ko, a young bamboo cane, which is, or
can be, broken by the wind.

ni yadowarete,
fore (the
ta-sftki,
Koreni
y6tte
fi-youni idzu.
Mata
fiyaku-siyqu
k&sd-kari, ine-karite, do-minno
mononi
avi onazi, there-
Bonzes of Corea) go out at day-wages.

fields,
And
while they, hired by any
one,
plough the
mow
grass, cut rice, they assimilate themselves to the
husbandmen. Yadov)i, u, to
hire.
Fatova takani ovdrtte Syak'-sonno fudokdro
1)
Shopping-Dialogues, page
4.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
90, 91.
247
lap. Ov)i, w, to
ni tobi-irinw, the dove pursued
by the falcon, flew into S'akya's
pursue.
last
Mimana
tsuini
Sinrano tameni forobosdru, the
state of
Mimana
is
at
demolished on behalf of (= by and for) Sinra. Forob)i, w, to perish; Fodemolish.
robos)i, w, to
dies.
Fono tamdni
yakarete sinu,
burnt by the
fire,
he
^ fe
HMC TEL
ffi
tyfy
ffi.
Yak)i, u, trans, to burn.
& =/= ^2
32*
O *
Kono
sai(J
fit6
kanardzu onino tamdni madovasarento ivaku.

that
it
is
that,
man
will
certainly be
misled by the devil.
_7S*
Êife
XE
yv
f?~
Madov)i, w, to err, to wander; Madovds)i, w, to make err;

Madovasar)e, u, to be brought so far, that one errs or wan-
Sivo-nawano kori nardru sima, an island caused by the clotting of sea-foam.
Kova Fino-kamino
the Fire-god.
tsino nareru nari, this (spirit)
is
produced out of the blood of
THE NEGATIVE FORM OP THE JAPANESE VERB.
91.
I.
Theory of the Derivation.

an action or
object,
In the negative sentence, the Japanese language attaches the negative to the
predicate word.
It
denies that
state exists; but it does not
deny
the
existence
of the
subject or
is
while the action or state, in which
both are concerned,

thing." Therefore
si (see
it
existing as positive, as in:
no one comes; he hears noi
unites the negative element, n, with the verbal element

i
or
$/,
98 and 103) and thereby gets the forms n -h

as ndzi or dzi;
= Ml and n
+- si
is
= ZI, j
pronounced
two root-forms, of which the former
proper to the
spoken, the latter to the written language.
These terminations, in nondeflecting affirmative verbs, are immediately added

to the root (Ake-zi,
7^" ^, Mi-zi, L ^), whereas

Yukdzi,
in deflecting ones in
[fc S?,
i,
this
at once mutates into a (Yuki, to go,
^^ ffi
2.
not to go).
Ni
and
zi
follow the deflecting conjugation,
while the closing form
X nu and
X* zu, at once serve for the substantive
and the attributive form. The Nigorifrom
mark
so necessary to distinguish 2.
a
.
#X
#X
(to
make go)
is
frequently
omitted
1)
For instance, in the
official
publication of the Treaties concluded with Foreign powers.
248
CHAPTER vn. THE NEGATIVE VERB.
91.
The root-form
conjugation,
is
ni,
which we are obliged to adopt as the basis of the negative

ne.
not in use and, in poetry, appears to be superseded by
EXAMPLES OF THE FORMATION OF NEGATIVE VERBS.
Affirmative.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
01.
249
II.
INFLECTION OF THE NEGATIVE VERBS.
Synopsis of the negative forms of inflection, compared with the affirmative.
YUK)i, -u
(deflecting), go;
YUKAZ)i,
-u,
not to go.
250
Omovanu-{-te
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.

tf *t /^
91, 92.
>f
,(
ffij )
passes into
r%
8m8vdde,pj:. 8m6vdnde,nok thinking.
Ardnu-}-te(^
jfij )
7>r",
.^racfe,
,
pron. Jrawcfo, not existing.
Sa (= stka) ra/2M-j-te(^^n5)
&mu-|-te
^ > 7% Sardde
t'7%
-Swfe,
pron. Sarande not being

,
as.
. .
(^P^
M)
pron. Se-nde, not doing.
Om6voy6nu-\-te
^ ^ ^-^ 7",
Omdvoydde, pron. timdvoydnde, not

being thought.
CONTINUATIVE FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE VERB.
92.
1.
The written language supersedes the termination
zi
by
zar)i,
u,
which
is
considered a fusion of zu -\-ari.
Akezi, not to open,
becomes Akezdri,
Mizdri,
7 ^1f 9> n
2.^9? no*
t t
ê opening.
Jlfm, not to see,

Yukdzi, not to go,
to be seeing.
Yukazdri,
i#^f >J>
^ty*
l
not to be going.
Masdzi, not to excel,

Stkdzi, not to be so, as
Masazdri,
Stkazdri,
not to be the better.

continually not to be so.
2/^^9,
The forms
for the
moods and tenses are the same
as those of ari; thus: zar)i, w,

si,
uni, eba, edomo; Future an; Condit. aba; Preterit zari)ki,

kereba, keredomo; Future keran, ken; Condit. keraba.
2.
keri, kern, keruni,
The written language
attaches ar)z, M, to the negative gerund zi-de

(
and
opposes to the affirmative form Ake-te-ari, to be opening
78) the negative

ar)i,
form Ake-zi-de ari, which, in the spoken language, passes into Akeide
to be in the not opening.
3.
u,
The spoken language

ar)z, M.
uses
its
negative gerund
. . .
nu-de in connection
with
Akdnii-de ari,
7
2.
tr
% 7* 7
9,
commonly pronounced
as
Akende ar.
Minfi-de ari,
X 7^7
Minde ar.
Yukande ar.
Yukantt-de ari,
z-XZy?*),
common
Preterit
From
Minde
will
this
derivation arise the very
Minu-de
arita, pron.
atta, has not been seeing, and the Future Minu-de aran,
Min-de aroo,
not be seeing.
4.
The poet supersedes the negative termination nu with naki,
nai, naku
(- without, see page 108); thence
Ave-naku = Avenu, without daring; Omova-
naku
),
= Omovanu, without
thinking.
1)
Might not these be forms, connected with
107. 2.?
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
92, 93.
251
The
dialect
of
Yedo
alike,
and that by preference, uses nai (= nasi, naki,
without) and the thence derived continuative form Nakdri and Nakeri, as negative auxiliary verb,
and supersedes Akdnft, Minti and Yukdnu with the forms AkeMi-nai, Mi-nakdr)i, u:
nai, Ake-nakdr)i, u;
Yuka-nai, Yuka-nakdr)i u, = to
,
be without opening, without seeing, without going. Thence t^Yukanaide for Yukdzuni, without going.
With
the derivative form nakari the negative verb follows
the affirmative conjugation, as appears from the examples following:
Ake-nakdrebd
as
if
one one
it
is
without opening. without opening.
Mi-nakattdrabd
if
one has not seen.

,
nakaraba,
is
Simava-nakatta kara
;
as or after
one has
Deki-nakareba
as
does not issue or
not finished from Simavi (vulg. Simai),

to finish.
proceed.
nakereba
as
it
was without
success.
TsUkd-nakatta
one has not applied
from
nakaraba,
if it is
it
successless.
Tsuke, to apply.
nakeraba, if
was
successless.
De-nakatta, he did not come out; from
Mi-nakdtta, he was without seeing.

kara,
seeing.
De, deru,
Toba-nakatta
soar, to
,
to
go out.
as
he was without
did not fly; from Tobi, to
fly.
The
written language opposes to the forms TsUke-nakatta and Toba-nakatta the

i.
forms: Tsukeru koto nakatta and Tobu koto nakatta,

flying did not happen.
e.
the beginning and the

it
Compare Sore
futd-tabi kitdru koto nasi,
does not hap-
pen
(nasi), that
he appears for the second time.
POEM OF THE FORBIDDING IMPERATIVE.

93. 1.
The Forbidding Imperative
consists of the substantive

ne) or
form of the
affirmative verb, followed
by the forbidding na (- Lat.
more emphatically
nayo
*)
Compare
69.
Akeru, the opening;

S&ru, the doing;
Wasururit, forgetting;
Tatdku, striking;
Nasdrtt, making;
Akerund or Akeru nayo, don't open!

Surund, don't do!
Wasur&rund
don't forget!
Tatdlcttnd, don't strike!
Nasar&na, don't make!

see;
Kiku, hear; Miru,

/Sw,
Kikuna, don't hear; Miruna, don't
see!
doing, from Si;
Suna
(^^)
3
.
do not!
1-3
n/
"j-
Wagun
Sitoori.
Compare
96.
252
2.
CHAPTER
If the idea of
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
93, 94.
continuance
is
associated with the forbidding, then, instead

:),
of na or nay 6,
Nakare,
,
f# ^
The
(fyj
the imperative
is
mood
of Nakdri,
= not
that
to be
92. 4)
is
used.
action which
characterized by nakdre as one
may not
be, precedes as subject proposition characterized by koto (= thing);
thus:
3.
not doubt! Utagau-koto nakdre (tyl^jk.}, let the doubting not be!, for:
The forbidding proposition begins with

its
Na
(= Lat. ne), the predicate verb

69).
being in
affirmative root-form, followed
by so (compare
Na
Na
iviso, say not.

i
$fj gjf
gjf
atasi tokdroni
so,
go not elsewhere.
Na yurusiso, grant not! Na motomeso, n'acquerez

=
it
^ H|
pas
*).
Nd
nakdrisd, pron.
Na
nakdssd, not without!
must be!
Nakdr)i, w, to
be without
4.
The forbidding becomes a wish
(optative),
when
so is superseded
by
kasi
(= Lat. quaesdj.
Na
ivi kasi,
may he
not say!
Politeness does not allow a person bluntly to use the imperative to his equals
or superiors. Instead of
Miruna,
see not, expressions such as
Mi-nasdr&nd, or Mi-
nasdre-mdsftnd,
let there
not be seen, are used.
JSJamaina,
=
to
let it
not come
shall
under notice,
is
superseded by
kamai kudasdruna*)', forms,
which we
return in our illustration of the language of courtesy. Appendix to Chapter VII.
FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE PRETERIT.

94.
1.
The negative termination mi becomes nanda,
~Y
&".
Akdnu, not to open;
Akenanda, not to have opened.
Ddnu, not
to
go out,
Denanda, not
to
have gone
out.
Samdnti,, not to
awake;
Samenanda, not to have awake.
MinU, not
to see;
Minanda, not
to have seen.
Yukdn%, not to go; MasdnU, not

to be;
Yukananda, not to have gone.

Masenanda,
or, in the vulgar language of
Yedo, Masinanda, not to have been. Mi-masdnu, not to

Tsure-datsite
see;
Mi-masenanda
not to have seen.

J0J {i|f).
modorananda, they have not come back together (>j^
Afodori, to
come back.
Fin wo sirananda, he has not learned to know poverty
(>P 9$ j^)2.
Sirii to learn to
know.
The spoken language of Yedo uses the forms Ake-nakdtta, Mi-nakdtta,
I)
RODRIGUEZ, pag
56.
2) Shoppinff-Dialoffues, p. 21.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
94, 95.
253
derived
Yuka-nakdtta, = was without opening, without seeing, without going,
from Ake-nakdri, Mi-nakdri and Yuka-nakdri. See

3.
93. 4.
The written language employs

continuative
..zari)ki, si, keri etc., the preterit of the
negative
form zari
92. 1).
Osikarazari si tn6tsi
the
life
which was not agreeable.
Osiki, agreeable.
FORMS OF THE NEGATIVE FUTURE.
95. 1.
de-ari,
The spoken language, which employs the continuative forms Akdnu92. 3.,
Minu-de-ari, YukdnU-de-ari, cited in
makes use of the future

,
of an, thus arau (TJ^jj*) or aroo, and says: Ak6nu-de-arqu
Minu-de-arau
Yu-
Mnu-de-arqu
2,
he will not be opening, seeing, going.
1)
The written language employs ..zaran,

(
^^ ^
the future of the con-
tinuative zari
92. 1), or, instead of zaran, ,.zu to
nan, ..zu
mo
aranan (com-
pare
75. II, 3),
and forms from
Akezari
the future Akezaran, or Akezu to nan, not to be about to open.
Mizari
Yukazari
2)
Mizaran, or Mizu
to
nan, not to be about to

to
see.
Yukazaran or Yukazu
nan, not to be about to go.

.
The written language, moreover, has

elision
a negative future in
,
.mazi, *? &,
from which by
of the z, the vulgar form mai, ?^f

91. II).
has arisen (comp.
Yukazide and Yukaide,
Ake-mazi,
vulgo Ake-mai, shall not open.
Mi-mazi,
Yuku-mazi,
Mi-mai,
Yuku-mai,
see.
go.
be.
is
Aru-mazi,
Aru-mai,
From
to the
these examples
it is
evident that, in nondeflecting verbs, mazi
joined
root, and in deflecting verbs, to the attributive form.

is
Since the power to indicate the future,

lie
not to be sought in zi, but must

signifies
in
ma,
I consider this the substantive
ma, which
room, space,
used
also with regard to time,
as
it
appears from the expression: Ikariwo ordsuma,

as there is not even (wo) time (or oppor-
mo
ndkit-sitd,
kazdni makdsete yuku,
tunity) to cast out the anchor, they abandon themselves to the

on.
wind and pass

as it appears
The action now,

is
for
which there
is
is
no time or opportunity,
from the example,
something that
not yet happening,
or has not yet hap-
1)
Hiyaku-nin,
N.
50.
254
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
95.
pened (Mi-rai), but no real future.

to
With regard
elliptical
to the negative
form
zi joined
>),
ma
is
it
may
be considered as an
,
form of nasi (n-\-si=nzi,
zi,
or
what
more probable a fusion of the negative element n with the

or
si
(
derivative
form
siki, siku, sisi
16)
(n -{- siki =
ziki ,
^^)
it
only denies, that time or

,
opportunity for something exists, and consequently mazi too
is
properly a present.
The Japanese custom of passing masi

Inflectional forms of
for
mazi must therefore be disapproved of *).
Mazi, vulg. Mai, are: the adverbial form mdzikttvd, vulg.
maiknvd, and the modal mazikini, vulgo maikini, maini, no opportunity being;
mai
toki, if,
or as, there
is
no opportunity; mai tomo, even
if
there
is
no opporto be,
tunity. Tenses
keri,
and moods are expressed by the auxiliary verbs nari,
and
have been. Mazikinari (A Maina); Maziki nar)eba; -edomo, -edo; -aba (A
Ma-
zikinara); Maziki nar)au ,
A-o,
-oo.
Maziker)i,u,
(A
Maiker)i, u); Maziker)eba;
-edomo; Maziken.
Examples
When,
of the use of the negative forms.
as it will appear
from some of the passages following, not only the
subject, but the object also, or even the appositive definition of a negative verb ,
is
isolated
by va,
A wa
or
mo,
it
is
intended to bring out the negation with
more emphasis.
[Root-form.]
Ame
tsutsi flrdkesi yori
kono kata ^mdno told fod6 dai-fei-ndru

figdsi
koto arazi; nisiva Kikai
Yak&no simaydri
Oslyuno Sotoga-fdma made gao-
reino y&ki-toddkazdru tokdromd nd$i, since the development of heaven
and earth
a state of peace so general as at present, has not existed. the Yaku-island,
To
the West, from
which belongs
Osiyu,
there
is
to
the region of ghosts,
to the farthest shore
of the Eastern
the
not even one place, to which the authority of
Government does not

Firdkesi, preterit
of
reach.
to
Krdke ,
open
itself,
is
to unfold.
coordinative.
Arazi, negative root-form,
not exist,
used here because, the connection of the sense
Todokazdru, attributive negative form of
TodoK)i, u,
reach to.
site"
Sdnd moto middretd,

utsuu-site ,
sikyustte
7),
osamdru mdnftvd &razi; sono atsuusurU tokdrono mono

tokdrono
sono
utsu-surit
mono
dtsuki koto
imdda
kore"
&razu
while
(Dai Gaku,
= something (mdndvd), of which the top
is
regulated,
1)
Mr. HEPBURN,
as a future
differs
in his excellent Japanese English Dictionary 2e edition p.

affix
197, on defining ,,ji, 2/,
Jf\
negative
to verbs expressing doubt or uncertainty, ,,Kilaru
mazi, vulgo mai, will
not come",
from our analysis of mazi.
The Japanese themselves however do the same.
CHAPTER
the root
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
95.
255
is
in disorder, does not exist; neither,
is
that,
which has been made
thick, thin, or that
which has been made thin,

"
thick.
"
Yoke mugura
sigereru
y ado no
sabisikini
1
Fito koso miyene "
akiva Id-nikrri
).
In the
solitary
cell
where the plant Mugura has sprung np luxuriantly no,
body
is
to be seen;
Autumn
has come.
Aki, autumn; light Ted!
Miyene, the negative root-form of Miye , to appear.
[Closing-form.] Ki-sinno tdku-tdru koto, sore sakdn ndru
Korewo mite mizu;

spiri-
korewo
kiite
K&azu; mononi td-siU nokdsu
bekar&zu.*),
how abundantly do
tual beings display the powers that belong to them.
We
look for them, but do

all
not see them;
we
listen to,
but do not hear them; yet they enter into

Classics.
things,
and there
is
nothing without them." LEGGE. Chinese

see,
Vol.
I.
p.
261.
Mite and Kiite, gerund of Mi, to

concessive
and Kiln, to hear, for which

are
used.
in another edition of the teit the
forms Miredomo and
Kikedomo,
Bekardzu
may
not,
from the adjective Beti
(page 109,
N.
T'
73).
^7
tu
Pi
îpi'*
O
/
Sono kiyo-riu-bano siu-ini mon siyouwo

Ide-iri zi-zai-ni-su besi
3
3tr ^
Jji 3
) ,
around
this
abode shall
IT/I
^'
.
-?
neither gate
nor fence be placed. In going out

in, people shall be free.
and coming
o
*j$
$1/7 f^D ^
tri
Y
lil
Yama-nakani kuro-kino go-siyowo

motsivi,
tsukuri, ken-yakutoo
^
2/
*
f-
/'I 3
Wr^
^
IT
Pb t
' "
tamiwo rau-se-simezu.
4 )
,
in the building of a
/fl
7â
^
'
palace of barked timber in the mountains (the prince)
SxK
"/
g_
^V
i-
cons i(i ers economy

J
J
and does not permit the people
to
/f^
drudge.
[Substantive form.]
$fc^ '^
ifc
"til^
~f-
*
2?
Wawwo
ara^w
is
5
)
,
w?aw
ârazaruva se-zdru nan, a<aoac<in4m

,
i^
^/
^* ;ix
the king's not exercising the Imperial sway

it,
ix^r^ i/"^*'
because he does not do

^
not because he
is
not
^^
Tarazdru,
^
îi
ê
the not being, the negative substantive form of tari,
te
an, $78.
II.
Atarastru,
the not being able, from Atdvi.
1)
hermit's farewell,
N.
47 of Hiyaku-nin
1.
itsu.
Tahe mugura
is
Gotfiow
ttryonm THUXB.
al.
2)
Tschung-yung or the Mean, XVI.
of 1868. Art. II 3) Netherl.-Jap. Treaty
10.
II. 4) .ZWp/HWt o dai itsiran, Vol.
1. r.
39th king.
5) Meng-ttst,
Book
I,
Pt
I. J 7.
256
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
95.
Mitsino okonavdrezajTu , ware kordwo

l
sirdri.
is
Tsi-siydva kordni sugu; gu-siyava

(literally
:
oyob&zft.
that the path (of the

this I
Mean)
not walked in
the not being

it,
walked in of the path),

stupid do not
know. The knowing ones go beyond
and the
come up
to
it.
Okonavarezaru , not being practised, from Okonav)i,u,

v. to overstep,
to practise.
Sug}i,u, iru, uru, nondeflecting
go beyond.
Oyobdzu or Oyotdnu, not to reach, from Oyo&)i t u.

nite nwrazu-site, fi nite
Sira-notova urusi
mo kogazaxuwo
ivu nari, concerning
the so called pale arrow shafts,
people understand by them, such as are not

fire.
daubed with varnish, nor burnt with

Nur)i, u, to daub.
Ko<f)i, u, to barn.
Sinserarezaxuwo omonbakarazu
(~J$*
^^
'jpi )'
waa^
is
incredible
is
not ta-
ken into consideration.

Sin-i)e, uru, to believe.
Omonbakar)i
u, to ponder.
^
2.
y 7 Ha fb*K ^ J^'f
T*T
=eb.
Ip.
3%
Mt.
#>
Watdkusi kareqa sono koto wo ds6rez\mi surunowo mi-tdi

atta,
^ fa W
^ =
is
monode
should like to see
him do
that business,
undaunted.
Osor)e, eru, nondeflecting, to fear.
^?
"M*
[Attributive.]
Onordni sik&z&ru monowd tomotd suru kdto nakdre, make not a
person,
who
not your equal, your mate.
Sikazdru, continuative form of Sikdzu, and this from Si)i, u, to equal.
Kono riwo
sir&z&ra. fttd,
someone who does not know

is
this law.
Mata
sezdru
sir&z&ru tok6ro ari, there

is
what one does not yet know.

well.
Mata ydku-
tokdro an' 2 ), there

know.
what one does not yet do
Sir)i, u, to
Yoku-s)e, uru, to do good.
Sezi, not to do; thence Sezar)i, u.
Yurano
to
wo
"
wataru funa-bito
"
"
kadziwo tave!
3
Yukuyemo sirsam
Skipper, sailing over the
kovino mitsi kana
).
mouth by Yura,
let loose
the helm!
it
Oh!
it
is
the
way
of love, that does not
know
whither
}$?$>)
goes!
koto, a matter
A
so
Meni
miydnu, kutsini ivarenu fodo ki-meo

that
it is
(pj'^
na
uncommon,
not to be seen by eyes, nor to be spoken by any mouth.

it
Fitoni sirarenu yauni suru, so to act that

tteni
be not remarked by others.
[Gerund.] Takava
sokonezu-sit& , akuni sokonuru
mono
nari,
- the hawking-
I)
Tschung-yung. IV.
2) Ibid. XII.
3) Hyaku-nin,
N.
46.
CHAPTER
falcon
VIJ.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
95.
257
is
something (mono) that
suffers
no harm by hunger, but is spoiled by
surfeiting:
A
goods.)
Faravdzfrsite tori-age mdsu-mai, without paying I shall not receive (the
Nedanga
kavar&zii sit6, while
no change in price takes

1
place.
Kun-si yowo nogarete, sirarezu-sitb ,

the world and unacknowledged,
Noff)i, u, to
ktiizu
),
the superior
it.
man,
retired
from
is
not grieved at
push back; Nogdr)e, eru, being drawn back.

to be
Sir), u, to learn to know; Sirar)e ,
ttr*
to be
known; Sirarezu, not
known.
Kui,
nondeflecting verb, to be grieved at.
[Time-defining Local.] Kokdro arazareld, mite mizu, Mite kikdzu, ktirdute,
so"n&
adzlvdiwd sirdzu*),
when
the
mind
is
not present,
we
look and do not see;

taste of
we
eat.
hear and do not understand;
we
eat
and do not know the

I.
what we
Compare LEGGE,
Kun-si iru
Chinese Classics. Vol.
p.
232.
artte (dtte),
t6 sitd,
zi-t6ku-sezdru koto nasi. Ziyau-{ni
simowo
sinogdzu. Ka-ini
arite,
kamiwo fikdzu. Onore'wd
taddsiu-sfte',
fit6ni motomc-
zareba, sunavatsi itrdmi nasi;
Kami Tenwo uramizu. Simo
fltdwo togamezIL
It does
Karuga yu&ni Kun-siva yasiikini wite motte me'iwd mdtsu*).

that (koto nasi) the superior
not occur
man having
once entered on a fixed position, does
not continue to be himself. Is he in a high situation, he does not contemn his

inferiors. Is
he in a low situation he does not try to pull down his superiors. Recti,
fying himself and seeking for nothing from others, he has no dissatisfaction. Since
he
is
not averse to Heaven, which

are below him, so
self-preservation.
is
above him, and does not abuse the people,

always contented and abides his destiny.
the not remaining what one
is,
is
who
is
the superior
man
Zi-toku,
Zi-toku \sezdru koto,
the subject to
.
nasi
(is
not).
Sinogazu, from Sinog}i, u, to turn

local of
off.
Fikdzu, not draw or drag, from FIt)i,

for,
Motomezareba , the time-defining
Motomezari, not to seek
and
this
from Motom)e t
ttr*.
Manabazaru
koto ari, korewo
O
iffeu'
manandeyoku-se*arQba t
razareba,
J&T
tffi^'
tffit-'
>f?
^ azu
Tovazaru koto ari, korewo tovute
5^^
jjh
x"
3
ffi %"
4dth
ifft^
^ azu *)
^^
it
happens that he has not learned someit,
HB
v-
^t
\^-f
thing,
and when he learns

of
,
does not
become
*lt
9
v/l"J
^ master
he (the superior man) does not disconhe has not examined something,
after the examination understand
it
ft
nue
it.
Is it that
<T
^ and might he not

it,
he does not give
up.
tobdsu, at the time of the
[Concessive]. Mi-karino toki
/aarazumo takawo
let fly
princely
hawking the falcon
is
even without design.
1) Tschung-yung.
XL
2)
Dai Gaku.
VII. 2.
3)
Ttcktmy-ymg. XIV.
4}
Ibid.,
XX.
20.
17
258
Takardzumo
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
95.
fakardzu-site mo from faMr)i, w, to consider, to design.
Nippon
is
nite irisi
zenniva ar-aâredomo , mare nardzu, = although (this coin)

it
not a coin cast in Japan,

Irisi. preterit of lr]i,
is
not rare.
u, to cast, to found.
>;
Kokoro makotoni korewo
mot6mebd
iiitdmo,
(of
mo-
/& ^ \,f*^
7
-v$irx
7*-^*
1^
ffc
c
v-3^FE
^
-^
r>
y
[ '
n
~^
c=
tdmurebd),
atardzn. t6
'
t6okardzi;
sikdu1
^X
?
-t
V-'
"TIC^ ^
"W h
MC T
i?*
tmdda kdwo ydsVndu kotowd mandnde. o

sitd notsi tdtsugu (of kd-surii)
-^ Z
=?
monovd ardzu
),
^^f
if
(a mother)
it
aims in uprightness of heart
tSfi
îx^Ff *&^
,
^^
at
(towards the fulfilling of her motherly

,
duty)
then even though she do not hit

girl)
,
it
she will be not far from
it.
There never
has been (a
,
who
,
first
learned to bring up a child , and then married afterwards.

to,
Atardzu not
to hit
not to answer
,
from Atari. Tookardzi, root-form, to be not
far off,
from Tooki (p 108).
Nippon tsuu-you
kin-gin to gwai-koku
*,
iv
y&Z^
ty\&
no kin-ginva motsi-yuku koto kurusiT,
a ^ 4& 7 ^K^ ffifc-^
-^
rt
S3 ^ =
^
~BT -v aE^
ix
'
karazM. to
ledomo
Nippon
ton-sen to
kwa-heinikosirayezarukin-ginvamotsirri
yuku
*.
bekarazu
silver
2 )
,
Japanese
current
4K1-
&
*.
^B.^"
(not
and foreign gold and
silver, the export (of it) has
no
diffi-
culty; but Japanese copper

silver
money and uncoined
made
into coin) gold
and
may not
be exported.
Siyau-bai-'itdsu koto
kumsikardzu tomo (or

3
to
Iddomo),
Nippon
kin-si no sina-
mono vd
articles
siyau-bai-^tdstt bekardzti,
= even
if trade
has no difficulty , concerning
which are forbidden in Japan, in them no trade may be driven.

sei- ( jjfl
it
Nandziga
if
^) sitimo,
it
sei-sezu.
tomo kareva yahari korewo sum

,
de arau,
you forbid
or forbid
not he will yet do

it is
it.
Mata
sarddem.6, even if
not
so. Sdri,
contracted from Sikdri (page 109
N.
71); to be so.
[Future.] Otoko asdkoni tsuru tokiva

at that place, will get
uwowo dzu
to
nan
),
a boy,
if
he angles
no
fish.
1)
Dai Gaku, IX,
2.
2) Franco-Japanese Treaty of the 9 Oct. 1858, Art. 3) Ibid., Art
XIV,
al.
4.
VIII,
al.
1.
4) Nippon o dai itsi-ran, Vol. I, p. 11.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.
95.
259
fr
* 7
^ ^
**
W*
g9
>g^ ? = Ûl =
Nandzino kuni waga-kunino tamtni yoMrdren

wi arii-mazi, it will not last long, before
koto ftsdstki
b^_^ 7
\
your country will
^
=
fc IX//I h
be subdued by mine.
Yuku-suyt âwaru-maziio sei-gon
(^?
v)wo
tatsuru, koto,
the taking of
an oath, that in future no change

"t*
>J
shall take place.
4g v ^
y
?
* /*
:?
/=! /=!#
.-i
.
#
jg
-
K ^*
Kavi-katano ku-denwo obdye. hon-foowom6tte

yqu-iku-seba
Tzarz
1
,
naka-naka zi-son-zi oru maziki
J*P^
t^ Wi E&7
7
),
if
one observe the oral communica-
tion with regard to the feeding (of the silk-
^v
worm) and
rear
it
according to
my
pre-
scriptions,
it
will then probably not
happen that one

is
suffers
harm.
for
On-ki-dzukdi-nasdru maziku soro, there

i.
(soro)
no occasion
your care,
e.
don't care about

it
it;
don't trouble yourself.
A
&,
Kdku-betsu tai-zt-td kotoni
mo
ndru-mai,
-fc
will be
,
no matter of extraordinary importance.

an abbreviation of
3.
ft
ife
^^ T
Tai-zi-ta koto, a matter of importance.

to
>u
If
we take
#* instead of
we have
do with a fusion of 7*
n/. Compare page 67, line
[Suppositive].
Kino
on a
He tomarite
tree,
orizaruniva (or orizaru kuse araba),

off (or:
when
(the falcon) stays
and does not come
when he has
the bad habit
of not coming
off).
Fokowo onzunba
if ttydsti, bdsi,
(or
onzaruniva), itsu-mademo ye wo kawdzu-site, hanahdda

,
(the falcon) does not come off his perch, one must, without baiting,
let
him
suffer terrible
tsugi,
hunger,
tsugi,
lydwo
pressions
tokuwo
te-wazawo tsugu rui naradeva, moteivizu,
if
the ex-
are not such
as:
to
propagate a family, to propagate the good, to
continue some trade, then (the character

Naradeva,
^,
equivalent to tsugi)
is
not used.
f 7 T*^,
the isolated gerund of
Nardn*, not
to be, used aa suppositive form.
Most fit6wo
osorete
midzuwo nomazunba,
in case (the falcon) shunning
men,
does not drink the water.
The negation of a negation
involves a strengthened assertion;

is
e. g.
Gqu
(-&^ "^)
no yuki-toddkazdru tokdromd ntm, there
not one place, to which
the authority of the Government does not reach. See page 254.
1}
Yo-san-fi-rok ,
Tart d'elever
les
vers & soie au Japon par

i. J.
OUKKAKI MORIKOUNI, annutc
et public par
MATTHIF.U BONAFOUS. Ouvrage traduit du teite Japonais par
HOFFMANN.
Paris 1818. j 22.
260
CHAPTER
VII.
THE NEGATIVE VERB.

for
95, 96.
Sirazunbd aru-bekardzu (]^

i.
~flfj
~^\
y$ -^)
,
Sirdzunivd aru bekardzu,

to
e.
in the not
knowing
one
may
not be
= one ought
it is
know.
Fagemi tsutomezumba aru-bekarazu waza nari,
an occupation in which one
may
not be without zeal and diligence,
i.
e.
in which zeal and diligence are of
the most importance.
Faru akiva yasezunba aru bekardzu, in spring and in autumn

falcon)
(the
hawking-
must
be lean.
Yas)e, uru, to
is
become
lean.
In the oral language the use
very
be).,
common
to
of the time-defining local
...ne ba, followed by naranu (not to

yauni itasaneba, naranu
one
(in the
express the
necessity." Sa-
Yedo
street-dialect;
it
Sayooni si-nakeri ya narane),

Seneba,
must
act so.
Ide-tatsi
Seneba, naranu,
must happen.
naranu
koto, the
necessity.
smeba naranft
de atta, he was constrained to depart.
Fit6va Tenyori ukuru tokdrono negumiwo ari-gatdkaranoba, naranu,

be thankful for the benefits he receives from Heaven.
man must
Ari-gataki, adj., thankful.
VERBS EXPRESSING THE BEING, THE
BECOMING AND THE CAUSING TO
BE.
96. Ar)i, u, deflecting continuative verb, derived from I (= expire

signifies
go away),
1
being continually in a departing movement, to exist, to be
).
Its
inflectional forms are: Ari, the root- and,
by exception
),
the predicate closing-
form (= there
is);
Aru, the substantive form, which
is
also used attributively.

is.
Comp.
11.
Arite, Ariteva, pron. Atte, Attewa, gerund, being, or as one

is;
Areba, there or as one
Aredomo, although there
is;
A ran, A
gotosi
Arau,
jtfc ),
Aroo
be
if
(T^ô 7n30,
future, there will be;
Aran
koto
kakuno
(^ $fl
it so!
(the termination of an oath).
Ardba (= Aran
4- ra'-h va), conditional,
there is, might there be.
Preterit.
Ariki; there was.
Arisi, substantive
Arisi-ytf,6,
Aritar)i, u,
Attari, Attaru, Atta, has
and attributive form.
been.
whilst there was.
1)
The Japanese themselves seem not

between
,,
*
to
know, that they have
continuative verbs, nor that there
is
a connection
cation of
2)
and
art.
They
see, as it appears
from the Wa-gun Siwori, in Aru a mere modifi-
/O
Naru,
to become, Lat. fieri
By
,
this exception they prevent a confusion of the closing

is
form of Ari with that of Are
to be-
come)
which
Aru
likewise.
CHAPTER
Arisikaba, whilst there was.
VII.
THE VEBB
ARI.
96.
261
Attareba, as there has been.
Attaredomo, though there has been.

Ariken, there shall or
Ariker)i, u, contin. (see
may have
been.
Attaroo, there will have been.
82) , have been.
Attaraba,
if
there has been.
Negative.
Ardz)i, u,
1.
Ardnu, not to be,

definition,
91;
Arazdr)i, u, contin., not to be.

as subject, the definition
it.
Ari has the
what
exists,
where
thing exists, as Local terminating in ni, before
Ftt6 ari,
man
is;
Artt fit6, any one being.
Itsini fttd dri
7Jj
there are people on the market-place; Fit6 itsini ari
(^ ^
^ ^),
country
"ffj
),
people are on
the market-place.
Kin-kwa-san kai-tsiuni
dri,
the Kin-kwa-san (gold-flower

ari, in that
mountain)
is
in the sea.
Sono kunini itsutsuno tandtsU-mono
the five sorts of grain are
met
with.
Ninva kudamonono
sane no &tsini drU

/Sot-
mono
nari, the pith
is
something being in the middle of the kernel of fruit.
vaini ari, being in prosperity, having luck.

need.
Bin-kuni
ari,
being in poverty and
Dai-Gdk&no mitsivd mdi-tdkuwo

dri',
alctrdkdni suruni dri; tamitoo ardtani
suruni
si-sen ni todomdrttni ari
),
the
way
of the Great Study consists in
illustrating
it
illustrious
its
virtue,
it
consists in renovating the people (in bringing

it
back to
2.
primitive state!);
consists in resting in the highest excellence.

is,
The
definition
where
a thing
followed by the subject, that exists,
also occurs
without the characteristic of the Local.
lf|*
$pf
2Jv $#/
TJC^
Mono
hon-batsu ari; waza siu-si art
),
things have
^ -W^
-"W^
ro * an<*
*P
affairs
have end and beginning.
Conthe
li-
ceived as subject,
Mono and Waza

As
stand for
Monova and Wazava, and

and a top
etc.
teral translation should be:
to things, there is a root
Con-
ceived as local both definitions stand for

3.
Mononiva and Wazaniva.
The spoken language

it is,
characterises the definition, in
what
a thing exists,
ar*,
= what
this is
by de,
de-ar',' at
Yedo da.
Sorewa yoki sake de
or sake da,
good wine.
4. If this definition is
an action or a
state, expressed
te
by a verb,
72).
it
is
put
in the Modal characterized by the termination

to be in the opening, to open.
5.
or de (see
Akete ari,
If
it
is
a quality, expressed by an adjective in ki, as Takaki, high (see
I)
Dai Qaku,
1.
2) Ibid,
3.
262
9.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERBS ARI, ARE.
96.
B. 1), the spoken language uses the adverbial form in ku.
Tstikiga takakti,
aru, the high-standing (the culminating) of the moon.

6.
By fusion of the
adverbial
form ku with
10,
ari, kar)i,
u,
is
produced. Takakdr)i, u,
continually to be high.
7.
Compare
82.
If the definition consisting of a subject
and
ari
(FU6
ari, people are) prece-
des a substantive as attributive (or relative) quality, the subject of aru becomes
a genitive definition, and as such generally characterized by no or ga.
Fitdno
aru
itsi,
a market-place on which are people.
Irono (or iroga} aru kumd, colors
having (colored) clouds.

. .
.
Yoki nw6i aru

expression for
.
ki,
. . .
wood, that has a good

to
smell.
ari, the
to ari,
an
elliptical
is
ivu ari, or
to
omovu
saying or the opinion
that.
Nanukani
tatsu-besi to arikeri, the
meaning,
intention, saying was, that

Especially,
we
should start on the ninth day.
Chinese substantives are made adjectives by the addition of no
aru or gaaru;
ga+aru
in the spoken language passes into garu.
Sai-tsi
^^), understanding;
Sai-tsi no
aru fit6, an intelligent man.
Yekki
^*),
10.
8.
mirth; Yekkiga aru koto or Yekkigaru koto, a merry business. Compare
page 114, Remark.
The negative Araz)i, u, = not
to exist, just as the affirmative

i.
Ari, has
the definition, in
which
it,
thing does not exist,
e.
what
still
it is
not, in
the Local in ra before
mostly, for the sake of emphasis,

it
isolated
it is
by
not.
va.
Reini ardzti
(^
& i Z *
jjjfl)?
is
not polite; Reini va ardzu, polite

so
it is
Stkanva (= Stkaniva) ardzu (~^ $<?)

utm
rl"T
.
not.
fit6 fasirdno
r> ?
^-
ill/
l*-Lf
Yaso Kami. Kova

Oho-kuni-nusi no
mi-nard ardzu.
as.g
^1
_
Kami no
ani-oto no
Kami-
dJ#
^
:
",'
3
-tut
-^
tQ-tei
waosw nari, Yaso Kami or the eighty

This
is
!/
superior beings.
not the illustrious

call
name
of
of one person.
Thus people
the row
Kamis of the
9.
elder
and younger brothers of the Kami named the Great Land-Lord.

is
The Passive Ar)e, u, eru, =to become, come into existense,
more
particularly proper to the written language.

nari,
Kova kegarewd
motsi usindvu kami
Mi fana wo
aravi-tamavu tokini axe-masi-tsu, this (the goddess of the falling

looses dirt.
stars) is a
Kami, who takes and
She was (masi-tsu) produced

Ore
is
(are),
when
Tcane),
(the gods of creation) cleansed their noses.
called
Ara-kane (= Are).
as being considered metal in its primitive state

style
Ufa -fe
Remark. G6-zar)i, u. The courtly epistolary
and the spoken language,
CHAPTER
instead of simple Ari,
VII.
THE VERBS GOZARI
ORI.
96, 97.
263
make use
of the more ample Gk>-zari or Gro-zari-masu,
sounding, in a quick pronunciation, as Gozai, or Gozai-mas', in writing expressed

3
by
flip
H*
^f
?)
Go-za-ari, which
is
equivalent to the expression:

it
i.
to have
the honor to be."
Courtesy employs this word even where
is
e.
not suited.
Like Ari,
it
has the complement of what a thing consists,
what
it is, if
substantive, in the Local in de, if an adjective in

(or u, page 106) before
it.
- -
H,
in the adverbial form in

is
ku
Soreva nanide gozaru? what

is
this?
it is
Nannoon.
dokide gozari-masu ka? what o'clock
it?
Hirude gozari-mdsu,
,
A
it
Andtadewd gozari-masdnu ; watoMsi

myself.
zi-sinni itdsi-md&ta
it is
not you; I did

is it
Go
ki-gen yortisiu gozari-masti, ka? your disposition
well?
is it
well with you ?
= how do you do?

no change at
all.
Ai-kavdru gimo gozari-ma&dnu
so as ever,
literally: there is
97.
Or)i, u,
deflecting coutinuative verb, derived

reside;
from
i (-f )
or
wi
seat, to sit,
means dwell,
It is preceded
having reference to a living being, that

definition of place,
can remove
itself.
by the
where anything dwells,

is,
as also of the condition or of the action, in
which anything
te).
as Local or
gerund with the termination ni or de (sometimes

spoken language makes use of ni or de
Conjugation, regular: Root, Ori
In definitions of place the
indifferently.
(^
^)-
Closing-form, subst. and

,
attrib.
form
if
6rii
pron. or', he dwells
the dwelling.
Or)eba
edomo
aba
as , although ,
]
he dwells.
Ori)ki, si, keri etc. has dwelled.

is
Gerund. Ortte (X
,
^), pron.
Otte,
which in writing
expressed by
;t
7^
dwelling; thence the Preterit

-
Oritar)i, M,
Otta
(X ? 2).
Ordzu,
A
is
Ordnu, not to dwell;
0ro*)t',
M,
^ %3
place.
>
m ake
to dwell, to place;
Ordstm)e, M, eru,
to order to
castle.
Samitrdiwo sironi ordstmit, order
given to place soldiers in the

- -
Passive form, used in speaking, Ordr)e, w, eru.

deatur," for pray
sit
Sdk6ni orard, = >Atc
se-
down, in speaking
of Ori.
is
to one superior.
Examples of the use

Utsini
ortt,
or ori-mdsti,, he
fire.
within,
is
at
home.
orisi
Fino sobani
Jrfl,
he stays
at the side of the
Sinra nisino Tcunini
yon, since the (people of)

6rti J ),
Sinra has dwelt in the western parts.
Kun-si koreni
the superior
man
1)
Tschung-yung. X.
264
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERBS ORI,
OSI, I, IRU.
97, 98.
stays there in (in virtue,

si'rti,
1
as in his element).
nestles,
it
Oruni
flitd
sono 6ru tokdrowo

it is
),
when
(a bird
some where)
knows the place where
at
....
home.
H~it6no kimito ndttevd, zinni ori, hitdno sin to ndttevd, ke"ini ori,
Jr-ft 2
kuni-tdmi t6 mazivdrebd, sinni
),
when he
(the noble
man) becomes the
lord
of others, he rests in humanity;
when he becomes
;
the minister of others, he
rests in reverence (towards the prince)
if
he has to do with the people of the
country, then he dwells in uprightness.
Here we have a succession of three
propositions of which only the last has the predicate closing-form oru, whereas
in bot the preceding the indefinite root-form ori
is
used.
Tabe, to eat; Tabete orA, to be eating.

site
Tabes)i, u,
make
eat, feed; Tabe-
6rft,
to be feeding.
Nom)i, M, to drink; Nonde

be knowing.
6rtt,
to be drinking.
6rit (
Siri, to
know;
)>
Strife ori-mdsu, to
s its
Fanawo
mite zasite
5g[
~$t ? jfe
is
ne
beholding flowers.
Karega ima-yquni kimono
kite
6ru, he
it
dressed in the fashion.
Mottewa ore-domo fitoni misdnU) although he has
with him, he does not
let others see it.
The
which being derived from the root causative Os)i, u, (|Jpf^)> pron. 6ssu,
I (JHf 'O, nas the original signification of to seat,

includes the idea of our print,
e.
make stay some
where,
g.
M6ktini inw6 6su, to print a mark in
wood; Kamini katdtsiwo

maintain the throne.
presses,
dsti,,
to print a figure
as
on or in paper; Kurdiwo
it
6s&, to
Employed
a substantive,
refers
to
something that
and characterises the word Ndzumi-6si the mousetrap as something that

mouse, and makes
it
presses the
stay.
98. 1 (#), Ite, Iru, nondefl. auxiliary verb,
= to be in,
a variation of Or)i, u.
3
Y7C
^
"mf
"f
Y #fl ^ %
3-
^S \/
\
Kun-siva ydsukini
ite motte
mdiwo matsU
),
the superior
man
is
quiet and calm , waiting for the appointments (of
'^T* J^"
Pi 1
it
Heaven).
Dzu-kinwo kaburazuni
iru, to be
without ha-
ving a covering on the head.

or
Tsikdra ndku narite iru,
Tsikara nqo natte oru, to have become powerless.

root
i
The
=
or
wi
(J^
^) seat, occurs in compounds as. Tori-wi or Tori-i^
bird-seat, the
name of
certain doors, which are at the entrance to Japanese
temples.
Kurd-i
(^g),
from K&rd, saddle, thus a seat raised as a saddle,
a throne.
Nawi
or Nai, the old- Jap.
name of earthquake; from wa, =
dis-,
1)
Dai Gaku
III. 2.
2) Ibid. Ill
3.
3) fschung-yung. XlV.
CHAPTER
Vll.
NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN
I,
IRU.
99.
265
and
i.
I-su,
seat-nest, the chair

I-ziri, bed.
on which one
2/),
sits
with the legs crosswise. ft/a,
I-toko, seat.
Iy6 (A
in Eastern Japan
contracted yd,
the house.
I-tsi,
seat- way, the market-place.
NONDEELECTING VERBS IN
99.
I.
As
,
these,
to be
,
with respect to their conjugation, are connected with the

they are placed here
!
verb I, uru
).
The conjugation of the nondeflecting verbs
in i
266
CHAPTER
VII.
NONDEFLECTIN'G VERBS IN
I,
IRU.
99.
Mesiitdni,
Mesdita, has
become
blind.
Mimi-si)i, ifg^ 1
yu, iru, or yuru,
ite,-\X) be ear-dead or deaf,

3.
K)i,
2J*,
,
to come. Imperat. iyo, oyo, oi, in Sikok ei;

,
Gerund
ite;
Fut. en,
old-Jap.
4.
6mu
on
oo
?
oozu
oozuru ; Negat. 6nu
at
Yedo anu.
I-ki,
-^^
^^
^
= go and come;
to breathe, live (>fc). Ik)iru; Ike-iru,
^g
^,
5.
to be living; Fut.
A
to
Ik)iu; Causat. ds)i, u, to
make
live, to enliven.
De-ki, yj
5J*
come out
ite;
of,
to precede, to be produced, to be
achieved; Lat. procedere. Deki, iru,
Fut.
iu; Negat. inu, vulg. dmt. Caus.
Dekas)i, u, to produce; thence Dekas mono, a product.

6.
A variation of Deki is 1de"ki.

v. i.,
Tsuki, jgjf^. to come to the end, to consume,
to get exhausted or
consumed. Tsuk)i, iru; Negat. inu, not to become exhausted; Causat. TsuMs)i, u,
to exhaust, to
is
consume; Pass. Tsukar)e, uru, to be in a
state of exhaustion. It
?
to be distinguished
7.
from deflecting Tsuk)i, u,
^^
sue"
^P
to
come
to.
Oki,
Ê^,
to rise, to get up, se lever.
OTc)iru, uru, ite, ita; Fut.
iu;
Causat. 6s)i, u, to
8.
make
rise, to raise, to establish.
Sugi, pron. Su-ngi,
j^^,
contracted from
+ ra + Id,
to
go
ite.
(ki)
on
the top (of anything), to rise above, to surpass, exceed. Sug)iru, uru,
6s)i,
Causat.
u.
9.
Pi,
10.
Ni, ||
^=
u
,
,
dry. Firu, to dry, v. n. to ebb. Sivono
firu told,
=
itari;
at
low water.
to be like, to resemble. N)iru, ite,
ite
ari
Negat. izu, not
to be like; Causat. is)e, u, uru, eru, to
make
to like; to imitate. Nise-mono, imitation.

ite, itari;
11. Ori, ~fC^, to descend.
Or)iru, also uru;
Fut. in,
iu; intosu,
to be about to descend; Negat. izu, izar)i, u, not to descend; Causat. Or6s)i, u, to
make
descend.
12. otsi,
i-mdsft;
^^,
to fall
down.
tits)i, ite,
itar)i, u,
ita;
Closing-form Ots)u or
Attributive iru,
also
uru,
(dtso'ru isi,
a falling stone); Fut. in,
iu;
Condit. iba; Negat. izu. Causat.

13. Mitsi,
14.
Ot6s)i, u, to
make
ite.
fall;
to
fell.
^^, to be Kutsi, ^^, to rot;

afraid.
filled.
Mits)u, uru,
Negat. Mite'nu.
ite.
v.
i.
to wither. Kuts)iru, uru,
15. odzi, 'jt^, to be afraid. $dz)u, iru, also uru. Causat. Od6s)i, u, to
make
any one
16. Fadzi,
iy6;
^^
7$*, to blush, to be ashamed. Fadz)i, u, uru,
ite;
Imperat.
uru, to
Adverb, urdkuvd; Adj. Fadzukdstki, timid. Causat. Fadzukdsim)e

blush, to shame.
make
17. Karab)i,
-?,
iru, i-nuru, to dry, v.
i.
Kara, halm; Kar)e, uru,
to dry up.
CHAPTER
18.
VII.
I,
IRU.
99.
267
Kabi,
*
1||2
5
mould. Kabiru, to grow mouldy: metaphorically: to be grieved.
19. Sab)i, uru, to rust; metaphorically: to be solitary 20.
and
still.
Wab)i, iru,
also
uru,
ite etc.
fU^,
intercession, to intercede, to excuse.
21. Nob)i, iru, ite, $1
^
to
to stretch, to be extended. Nob6r)i, u, to be
stretching,
v.
L, to
go
aloft,
to ascend.
Kevurino nob6ruwo miru, to see the

rise of the
ascending of smoke.
Fino nobdri, the
sun.
Yamani
nobdri, to
go
aloft
on a mountain,
ascend a mountain. Fact. Nob6s)e, uru, to
make
stretch, or ascend.
Tsukaiwo Miyakoye nobosete, despatching messengers up to
Miyako.
wheel.
Yaid-mono wo
Nob)e, uru,
v.
kurumani nob6su,
tr.,
to
work up pottery on the
potter's
to stretch, to extend, to raise.

ite;
22. Kobi, $ff ^, to flatter. Kob)i, iru, uru,
Imperat. iyo; Fut. in,
tt2.
Fitdni kobiru, to
flatter
men.
23. Korob)i, u, uru, corruption, decay, to pass toward destruction. Causat.

ds)i,
u, to cause to decay.
24. Pokorob)i, u, uru,
^g 3
to
î to tear, to burst,
intr.,
to rip as
a seam,
open as a flower bud.

25. Forobi,
"f
$j&,
become destroyed,
u, to
to perish. Forob)i, u, t'-nu; Fut.
imu, in,
destroyed.
iu.
Causat.
6s)i,
destroy. Forobosdr)e, uru, to be ruined or
26. Fotob)i (not Fitobi), iru, uru,
^,
to soften,
v.
i.
Causat. Fotobasi, u,
to
make
soft.
27. Purub)i, iru,
uru,
"jjf
^,
to get old, to
grow
old (old, opposed to new).
II.
Transitives.
28. K)i, iru, ite, Fut. in,
&iu, ^j|*,
for.
to put
on
(a dress).
29. Kovi,
$Ho A
Koi, longing
Kov)i, u, iru, uru, to long after, to
love. Causat. Kovos)i, u, to cause to love, to attract one's love; Kovdrtki, char-
ming, amiable.
30. M6tsii,
^J 1
I, to use, to employ. Motsi)i, u, iru, or yuru
(x v);
),
ttor)t,
u (#$**)
).
Fut. Motstyn; Condit. iba; Negat. izu or tnu

v.
i.
(^*X
warX a;
Pass, irare, to be used, to serve,
We
consider Motsi)i, uru the continuative

of, seize,
form of Mots)i, u, (fj|), to take hold

M6tte (Jj[ I)
is
use,
of which te Gerund
of relation, with. Some, alequivalent to the word expressive

also
though incorrectly,
write
-tf to
*f7
etc.
The
predicate closing-form
a passive (to be used, to be of use to) perhaps from generally passes for
268
CHAPTER
Vll.
I,
IRU.
99.
the analogy of the

shoot). See
form with
the derivative lyu (to get a shot), from
(to
89. 2.
On
its
account of the important part, which this verb plays, some instances of
use follow here.
Kordwo
surtt
monovd
t6kn,
kordwo mdtsi-uru monovd stdzukd nardbd, sundvdtsi
sai tsundni tdru 1 }, if those
which produce them, are quick, and those which use

Sono riyau-tanwo
tortte
them are slow,
riches will ever be sufficient.
(A
totte),
sono tsiuwo tamini motsivu'*), he takes hold of the two extremes (of good and
bad) and employs the

nisite
Mean
of
them in his government of the

3
people.
Gu
midzukdra motsiuru koto wo kondmu

self (his
),
being ignorant he
is
fond of using
or,
his
own
own judgement).
Omae korewo nanini motsiiruka?
more
this?
politely:
Andta korewo nanini

jf^ô
~"^J,
motsii nasdriika? for

Ite,
what purpose do you use
31. I,
shooting Iru,
to shoot at, to hit.
Matowo
iru, to
shoot at a mark.
Tori wo iru, to shoot birds. Yumi-iru, to shoot with a bow.

sisi
( fiff
Passive, lye, lyu, to be shot. lyu

32.
^^
shot meat, venison.
Mukui,
^^
1-
reflecting; 2. retaliation, retribution.
Muku)i, yu, yuru,
to retaliate, to retribute; Negat. izu, izari, not to retribute.
The recent orthosiri,
graphy
A^to
97
is
erroneous.
Inuva on wo
retaliates
ata
wo mukuu, the dog knows favor and
wrong.
^
33. Ab)i, iru
7
(not uru),
'^^
to
shoot with bath-water, to splash, to
squirt, to cast water
up or
out. Yu-abiru, to sprinkle
anything with
warm
water,
to
wash
it.
from
this
t squirt cold water. Since, as appears V^j^ ?|C|^ expression, Abiru has the word water for its object direct, it cannot
Midzuwo
abiru,
mean
to
wash oneself or
to bathe. to see. Imperat. iyo;
34. M)i, iru,
^s
Gerund
ite;
Pret. itari,
ita; Fut.
visible.
m,
iu;
Negat. izu,
inu. Pass, iye, iyu, to appear; irare, to
become
Compounded with mi,
to see, are:
35. tlr&-m)i, ite, u, uru,
^?i
to see backwards, to be disgusted with...
Fut. imu, in,

36.
iu; Negat. izu.

Ju
Kangam)i,
iru,
.iH^s.
frfr
^,
to look in the glass; to consider.
37. Kaheri-m)i, iru,
|||;>2-> to look back.
1)
Dai Gaku. X.
19.
2) Tschung-yung VI.
3) Ibid.
XXVIII.
CHAPTER
VII.
NONDEFL. VERBS IN
IRU.
99, THE VERB NI , TO BE.
100.
I.
269
THE FOREGOING NONDEFLECTING VERBS IN I, ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY.

Abi
.
N.
33.
270
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB NARI
TO BE.
100.
II.
such).
Kono
siu
( -=fc
y?) ni
om6-muki-keru to nan
suffix (= zo) is
*)
lie
will
have been con-
verted to this sect.
mere emphatic
it
nan
in expressions as kaze
no otoni
nan
ari-keru,
has been the sound of the wind.
On
to kaya.
See
Addenda
N.
V.
54 lines 16, 17 the verb Ni here treated
Ces
trois
is
Remark. In KODKIGUES' Elem.

words: ,,De ,
Site
is
mentioned with the

substantif."
nite, site, Etant.
mots s'emploient quelqefois au

103.
lieu
du verbe
the gerund of S)i, u, uru, to do. See
II.
Nar)i, u, (-{^^), deflecting continuative verb, derived from

I).
Mi
(= to be,
100.
It is
immediately preceded by the definition, of

it is. Inflectional forms, the
what the subject

Ari
(
consists, or
is
what
same
as of
96):
Ndri
the root- and, though by exception, the closing-form also;

is
Naru,
the substantive form, which

Causat. Nareba; Fut.
also used as attributive.
Gerund
A Na ( 12), Narite, A Natte;
Naran,
Naroo; Condit. Nardba, in the spoken language

76).
generally abbreviated to
1.
Nara
(see
Nariis used
is
as
closing- form
in:
T6kuvd moto ndri; Salvd
sue"
ram' 2 ),
virtue
the foundation; fortune the top.
Fino fikdri akirdka ndri, the sun-
light is clear.
2.
Naru
is
substantive
in: Katdtsino
madoka ndruwd Tenni
atari,
and no
keta (or kaku)
ndruwd Tsini narau, =
that the shape (of the Chinese copper

its
money)
tation
$jp
is
round, answers to the heaven, that
opening
( jspj
is
square,
is
an imiHe?i-
of the earth.
Ame
T))
,
ndruva in-yauno
is
ki ndri
'^^
^^
'
*
HE
-fy
that which
rain (= the rain)
is
an emanation of the
tellural
3.
and
solar principle.
is
Naru
attributive
in:
Mata
ki-n&ra.
mayuwo
tsukuru kdiko dri, there
are also silkworms, which

4.
make yellow
cocoons.
serves to derive adjectives from sub-
The
attributive
form Naru,
A Na,
stantives
and adverbs. (See
12, "page 115). lydno katavara naru haydsi, a wood
at the side of the house.

5.
The Gerund Nartte,

I),
,
Ndtte,
is
generally superseded by Nite and Ni-sitd,
100,
probably to prevent a confusion with Narite, = giving sound, or
with Narite =
arete ,
= becoming,
Kokoro-bd.se makoto nari. Kokoro-bdse
ma-
1)
Nippon
o dai itsiran.
VII. 46
recto.
2)
Dai
GaJcu. X. 7.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB NARE, TO BECOME.

the will
is
100.
III.
271
koto TO. site, siMu-siti notsi kokdro taddsi
*),
truth.
The
will being true,
the heart
6.
is
then
rectified.
The negative Naraz)i, u

by the
fy J
&) = not
,
to be,
is
avoided and, as a
rule, superseded
it is
analytical
form ni-arazu or ni-aranu.
Waga
kotoniardzu,
not
my
business. (See page 162. 8).

its
7.
Nari, with
inflectional forms,
particularly its closing-form,
is
in the
written language, used periphrastically also, to lengthen or round off a period,
and
is
preceded by the predicate verb proper in
its
substantive form.
101).
The spoken
Examples:
language of Yedo uses Mas)i, u for the same object (see
Kono tokiva
comes
kaiko
amdre-ldzuru ndri, to
it
is
at
that time that the silkworm
out. Ide, Idzuru,
come
out.
-- Kdiko samusdni tavezu, si-suru nan",
the silkworm cannot bear frost,

grass for food.
if
is
it dies.
Kmdwo
kuvdsu naraba,
if
one gives
Andtano hooni so-bok&ga arimdsn nara, sorem6 kai-mdboo*),

will
you have sapan-wood, I

cheap, I will take
III.
it.
buy
it too.
Ydsui nara, tori-md$oo
if it
kai nasaru nara, if
you buy.
fieri, the passive
Nar)e, u, eru, uru

(
(J|J()t),
is
= to become, Lat.
of JW,
to be
100.
I).
As
there
homonymous Nar)e,
u, eru, which being formed
from another root Ni, means to be boiled, become tame, the form Nare, when
it
means
to
become,
is
not employed, but
now
generally represented by the

definition,
active
form Nar)i, u, and the immediately precedent, appositive
what
or
how
any thing becomes, has to show by
its
inflectional termination to, ni
or the adverbial
ku (9, page
111), that
Nari
is
not used with the active signi-
fication of to be,
but supersedes Nare, - to become, in stead of which
Na-
rar)e, u, eru, the passive of
Nari,
the
(to be) also is
met with.
substitute
for
Observations
concerning
use
of Nari,
as
Nare, = to
become.
1.
The
apposition,
what any
thing becomes,
when
it is
some thing concrete,
characterized
by the
suffix to.
Ame
kdrite
yuMt6ndru,
the rain, congealing, becomes snow.
Ttn-T*ino
*eJn5 )
in*) atataka-ndru tokiva
ameto nari, samitki tokiva yukito naru
(or mint wart)

it is
the accumulated tellural matter of the heavens and earth,
when
warm,
be-
1)
Dai Gaku.
5.
4} '
yv
^ -Wl * *All
\--
>
2) Shopping -Dialogue i , p. 40.
3) Ibid. p. 87.
I.
R^ nji ^ Kzx
>
5) Kanra-oaJki Inn-moo dsu-i.
7.
recto.
272
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB NARE, TO BECOME.

becomes snow.
100.
III.
comes rain, when
it is
cold, it
Since they are coordinate, the

to) nari,
former of the two propositions closes with the root-form (ame
the latter
with the closing-form (yuki

Tsi-ki nobdrite (nobdtte)
to)
naru. So, likewise, in:

kuddrite'
Kumova
san-stnno ki nari.
kumdto ndri, Ten-Id

and
rivers.
ame to naru nari 1 ), clouds

rising
are the exhalation of mountains
The exhalation of the earth
becomes clouds, the exhalation of the heavens descending becomes rain,

rally: is
or, lite-
becoming
rain.
Motsiiru tokinbd, nezumimo tordto nari; motsiizdru
tokinbd, tordmo nezumito naru, if one
make
use of
it (if
one attach value to

it,
a
it),
even the mouse becomes a tiger;

tiger
if
one attach no value to
then even the

noble man)
wakarete
ndri'taru
becomes a mouse.
Fitdno kimito ndtte vd, zinni 6r&

,
), if (a
becomes a prince over others
he has humanity for foundation.
Kava
to
futdtsu to naru, the river divides into two branches.

nari, this has
2.
Kore naravasi
become a custom.
ni; a con-
The apposition, what something becomes, characterized by

-w ^
struction peculiar to the classic language.
Kunitsu kami om'na (onna-) ni narite

the god of that district became an old
''
Igfc
ffjj
^) mitstni mukaveri
to meet (him)
3 )
,
woman and came

( jj
on the
), this
way.
is
Kova
toriid narerisi
kami nari
~jfe
J^
ffi
)$
jjjljj
-(fjj
a god changed into a bird. Narerisi, the attributive form of the preterit of
Nari, (compare
this (kami) has
80
line 16).
Kova Fino kamino mi-kabanem

fire.
nari-maseru nari,
become the corpse of the god of
If ni were superseded
for the
( jffl
by
no (thus kabaneno), an existence from the corpse would be meant,

writer says of another kami:
'{fa
same
Kova Fino kamino
tsino nareru nari
^ J^
iiDj
this
^s
a production from (has arisen from) the blood of the fire-god.
Nami kazdmo
Ken-go
3.
(
tawoyakani narite..., also waves and wind becoming softer...

,
ffi
:7
*)
ni
naru koto
becoming sound.
is
If the apposition,
it
what
its
something becomes,
an adjective in
Td
9.
B.
page 105),
stands in
adverbial form in ktu

iro akalsn
,
Kara-kane fitrulsu
alloy of copper
narite sono
naru nari, the Chinese metal (an
and
silver)
growing old
his color
becomes
red.
Aritaru mono
no ndku. naritaru koto, the annihilation of a thing that has been.
1)
Kcuira-gaki kin-moo dzu-i.

14.
I. 6. verso.
2)
Dai Gaku.
III. 3.
3) Nippon-ki.
13 recto.
CHAFrBB
VII.
THE VERB NASI, TO CAUSE TO
BE.
100. IV.
273
4.
The material from which any thing becomes,
is
put in the Ablative or
Genitive, characterized by yori or by no.
Midzuyori naru mono, something that

tsino
arises
from water.
Fino kamino
fire,
nardru nari,
it
has arisen from the blood of the god of

.
.
it is
an
emanation from the blood.

5.
The
definition,
by what
a thing becomes,
if it is
a verb,
is
put in
its
root- form before
Nan.
kori-nardru nari
j|
Kono simava sivo-awano

^ $fc
6.
^^
^ft"'* Jffj IT t/fc
5 >^ /
^M
and
to.
iii
this island is
a clotting of the sea-foam.

e* vrird),
Nari, employed impersonally (without a subject, as in Germ,
preceded only by an appositive definition
what
it is
to be, characterized
to) the second
by ni or
Ni-gwats ni nareba
dzukani naru,
it
= when
it
becomes (comes
(or
month.
Si-
grows calm.
Mayuni
Mayuto) nareba, itowo toragtmH, as

Notei'ni tro-trono
cocoons become formed, one has the thread taken from them.
yamdito ndru, or naru-nari, afterwards

IV.
(
.
Jj
arise all sorts of illness.
1.
Nas)i, u, deflecting causative verb,

o
= to cause to be; to make

(
HI
ft
J
ft), from Ni, =
to be
100.
I).
Fu-senwo nasu
ness in others,
),
to produce evil.
F*it6no zin-saiwo ndstt, originate clever-
make
others
grow
clever.
(
Kortwo
93. 2.).
to
ndsti, bdsi,
this
must be done.
cala-
Kordwo ndsu
mities
2.
koto nakdre, do this not!
Tenno nasdru wasawai,

nasu, to
which heaven has caused.
A. wo B.
make B. from A.
Koreva
Nasaz)i, u; Nasazar)i, u, negat. not cause to be, not produce.

best,
nasazdru
3.
as to this,
one ought not to do
it,
this
may
not be done.
Nasas)i, u, causat., to
make
produce.
4.
Nasasim)e, uru, cause that one makes be, give order that one makes, to
bring about.
5.
Nasar)e, u, uru, become produced or done, to happen. Imperative Natdre,
let
there become done, sounding in the popular language of Nagasaki Nahdri,

too
2 ).
Nahai and Naherri
The
use,
which courtesy makes of the passive Nasar)e, u, wru,
will
be
illus-
trated in the
Appendix
to this
Chapter
112, page 312.
1)
Dai Gaku. VI.
2.
s.
Mr. H. 2) Observation by the late
DE SAINT AULAIRE,
interpreter for the
JapancM language.
18
274
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VEEB MASI, TO RESIDE.

deflecting v., to
101.
101. Mas)i,
u,(^*^,),
abide, reside, originally 1mds)i, u,

spot, or with reference to time,
from tma, abbreviated
ma (^^), = space,
s)i,
while, interval and
u, to be active, do.
Gerund Mastte, by
elision
Maite
also; Pret. Maser)i, u, Masik)i, eri,u; Masita, Mas'ta; Fut.
Masan,
Masoo, pro-
nounced as Masoo
(see
(see
page 209, line 12). Negat.

is
Masdnti, instead of MasariA
page 248).
In the epistolary style Masi
superseded by Moos)i,u,
^^X,
and
so-
^^X, ^^X. ^.
1.
Vide Addenda n. VI.

style
In the elevated
Masi supersedes the commoner Ar)i,

by the
u, to exist,
Or)i, u, dwell,
and just
as it, is preceded
definition of place,
where
mething
a kami
2.
is,
in the Local. E. g.
Kova
Oki tsu miyard mdsu kami nari
'), this is
dwelling
is
in the chapel of Oki.
Masi
used as an auxiliary verb,
when an eminent
subject
is
spoken
(
of,
and
is
preceded by the verb with which
it is
connected in the root-form
a) Pre-
sent or b) Future), or also

a)
c) in the Gerund. Examples: the Kami enlightening all around, Ama-terdsft Kami,
is also
called
Ama-
terdsi-m.&Bu
[.
.
Kami.
A.
.
ni-mdsu.~\
.
va B.
Kamino mi fava ni-masu A.

,
is
the mother of the
Kami
B.
8
).
(Ni, Nite, to be, see
100.
1.)
Tamayori-fimdno mikotova
is
Kamo
of the
no mi oyano
ancestors of
Kami ni-masu
Kamo.
),
Her Highness Lady Tamayori
the
Kami
[..nari-mdsu.]
Konomifasirano Kamiva mina fit6ri-gami nari-masite mi-mi-wo

,
kdk&si-tamdviki
selves hidden.
4 )
,
these
three gods were gods standing alone
and kept themthis goddess
Kono fimdno gamivd

.
Kamini mi-aui-mas6ri,
80).
sttd
has matched herself with the god N.
(See
Kono simavd
^
.
.
ye to
umi-maseru nari, this island (it)
(the gods)
,ljjj^-
have produced
attributive
80).
as
an
after birth.
Ma-
J^^
%
-
JtfJ* h
ffiJ
3& n
seru,
-
the
(See
form of Maseri, the preterit of
r
rf.
[.
masi-mdsti, ,
= to be being.] Ten wau N.

.
N.
no miya ni masi-masu , the emperor
is
residing in the palace
Buts zinva fttdno negavini yotte ka-go-(
*
J||U
fffl^)
5
si-mdsi-masedom6, sonomi
although Buddha and the
(^t
;jfp )
kavi-katani orosoka nareba, ikagava sen?
spirits
assist,
complying with the wish of men:
if,
in
1)
Kami-yono mi-sudzi.
2) Ibid.
3) Ibid.
TIL.
4) Ibid.
5) Too-san fi-rok.
1 1
recto.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB MASI, TO ABIDE.

is
101.
275
the rearing (of the silkworm) one

.
negligent, what will
it
avail?
Siyuk-ke
sukke)no nozdmi masi-masi-keredomo ,

(i.e. to
teitsi
yurusi tamavdzu, he
wished to quit the paternal house not grant

b)
[.
.
become a monk), but the father did
it
him.
amasi.]
is
By
grafting masi on the form of the Future,

is
am,
. .
an, by
which amasi
gotten, a periphrastic future
formed. /Sm)t, wru, to go away;
Indtsi sinamasi 1 ), life will perish. See

c)
75. 5.
Masi in connection with a gerund, used
as well in the elevated style as
in the polite conversational.
Kono Kamiva Susanowono

this
mikototo teticdrawo
auasete m&si-tamavu nari
),
Kami
wrestles with the
moon-god Susanowono
mikoto,
literally:
is
he
is
(masi) measuring his strength etc.
Korevoa yaburete
imdsu*), this
torn.
Fit6 maruni ik&ra faitte ymdsttkd*), in a bale,
how
much
goes in it? Fa-ir)i, ^

is
(^-f),
to enter.
There
no verb of which the and as

it,
polite
spoken language makes a more frequent
use, than Masi,
grafted on the root-form of verb, generally has to exit is
press the inflectional forms, whereas the verb itself to which
added remains
unchanged,
in its root-form, a knowledge of the conjugation of this auxiliary
verb will be found without any other. The forms, which are in use in the spoken
language, are limited to;
Mdsu,
Mas',
is is
is,
being.
Maseba, as
it is. it is.
it
Mdsuka?
it?
it
Masedomo, although
not? Masiyoo,
Mdsuna?
3/aloo,
if it is.
will be.
Mase, imperat. be!

Masite,
Masu-nara,
Masita,
A Maste, A Masta,
gerund.
Masdnu,
Maseng,
it
is
not.
has been.
H.
The forma maszru, maszreba, maszredomo, quoted by Mr.

maseba, masedomo, I have neither found
with Japanese.
in
BROWN, Grammar XXIV,
for
MATH,
any original Japanese writing, nor observed in conremtioiu
To what
dialect
do these forms belong?

,
From
the Shopping-Dialogues
published by us, which particularly come under

it is
notice as a faithful representation of the polite language of Yetlo,
obvious
that
Masi
is
used as the final word of a proposition indifferently whether the speaker

is
or the person spoken to or something else,
the subject of
it.
Thus
it
may,
1)
Wagun
Sitoori,
under Sinn,
2) Eami-yono mi-tiuin.
4) Ibid. p. 34.
24. 3) Shopping-Dialogues, p.
276
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB MASI
101, SORAI
102.
without the speaker's attaching any importance to

the proposition, and express our
please" just as
it,
be used only to
as
round
off
little
have the honor."
Examples of the use of

Shopping-Dialogues.
Mad
in the spoken language, borrowed from the
Kono fttowa darede

yaide ari-masu, he
is
is
ari-mastika,
this
man
who
is
he? Watdknsino
tsuki-
my
it
bosom-friend.
Andtano
. .
nawa
.
nanito ii-masiikd?
your name
called
.
.
.
what
called?
Watdkusino nawa
to
ii-mdsn,
my name
is
(S.-D. 19).
Sinawo miru-kotowa deki-mdsuka? The seeing of your goods

place? (deki-mdsuna? cannot
it
can that take
take place?) Deki-mdsu,
it
can take place. (S.-D. 23).

this place?
Andtawa
too-sono
fU6de ari-masuka? Are you an inhabitant of
Watdkusiwd too-sono monode ari-masu, I
am someone
to
of this place. (S.-D. 20).
Kono nedanwa
(S.-D. 34).
ikura si-mdstikd? the price of it
how much
does
it
(amount) ?
oo-tsi si-masita,
have understood you. (S.-D. 41).

itdsi-masoo ,
to
Miyoo-nitsl
Go
hen-too
morrow
I will give
you an answer.
(S.-D. 39).
Watdkusiwa korewo zonzi-mase'nu

Firu-mayeniwa mairi-ye-mase'nu
Rok-kinni atari-mdsuna?
Is
,
do not know
it.
(S.-D. 26).
before noon I cannot come. (S.-D. 17).

J
not that about six pounds? (S.-D. 8)
).
Watdksa hanaJidda Go dza-ma
^
(
3jf
^g s^ fj
"*)
de gozari-masen kd?
Am
not your disturber? Don't I disturb you? the ordinary question of anyone
who
unasked pays a
visit.
102. Samurav)i,
u (^p A_7
^|
*
'(pj
closing-form Soro,
'|/Q O
ô>
is
ê
^|), also Savurav)i,u, A Sorai; ig i n old- Jap. î Sa-mo?
ravi, from save, at the
side,
by, and moravi, guard. As noun Samurai (A Sorai)

the old general
answers to our
guarde" and
name
for people
on duty at the
court of a prince.
Used
as
an auxiliary verb in the written language,

it
particularly in the episto-
lary style,
If,
is
qualifies the
being as a serving being and humiliates the speaker.

of which the predicate verb
acts, is the speaker
is
therefore, in a proposition,
Soro, no subject
named, the unnamed, who speaks or
not the person spoken
1) Page 29 of the original edition:
new familiar phrates. Nagasaki 1859.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB SORAI.
102.
277
to,
and we assign to those propositions the I or

following
is
We
as subject.
With regard
to the use of Soro the

1.
to be noticed:
is,
The
definition,
what
a thing
when
it is
a noun, precedes in the Local,
characterized
2.
by ni or nite,
de (not do)
is,
>).
The
definition,
how
a thing
expressed by an adjective in
aotdtoi soro 7
( *
\sS*^^
Pf
fa",
is
placed
?
in
ite
2 ).
adverbial form in ku.
Kakuno
(
An^fljf* 7vt J 4&*) 1^^ Iff

),
it
is
so
I
Mausi agu-bekn
I shall
s)
soro
= ~Pj"
^ f __t ^
it.
it
is
possible that
mention, =
-
make mention of
Naku
soro,
,
= Nasi,
is
there
is
not.
Go-za soro
*
(jptjl^ J|j
nite
$%),
Gozari-mdstt
it is
it
(See
96,
p.
263,
line 4).
3.
Sa-yoo
go-za naku soro,
not
so.
Soro, as
an auxiliary verb, expressive of humility, grafted on the rootis
form
of a verb,
appropriate to the familiar,
as well as the official

ori-soro, > I
form of
writing.
Fino sobani
am by
5
the fire"*).
),
yy
Tj{IJ ^f
Yordsiku
On
agdri-soorde, eat heartily
literally:
may your
deo
rise
be good!
Kyoo-go mamdrft-beki ka
ai-tate-soro
3.
tame, to appoint the articles to be
Bu-sata
it.
itdsi-soro tokoroni, while
JLr
3^"
^^
make no mention of
one draws UP a
to.
Deo-ydk&wo tori-kivame
-Sasi-yurusi-sorOi I
^D ^?\,^T?
4.
50ro '
treaty.
agree
In negations as Agezu-soro,
do not raise,
Motomezu-soro
do not try
is
to acquire,
Ivazu-soro, I do not say, in deviation from the rule, zu
used
instead of zi, the root-form. If soro be grafted on the negative form of the
spoken
language, the forms Agdnit -\-soro, Motom4nu-\- soro
7t'anfl-f-oro, are obtained,
which forms may fuse into
>*Xtr Agezoro, Motomezoro, Ivazoro t and are to
be easily distinguished from the affirmative forms Age-soro, Motome-soro , /trt-oro.
Thus
if
in RODRIGUEZ fiUm. page 71
line 10,
it
is
said
with
regard to the
oro," then
negative form:
motome-zoro
,
cependant on dit aussi motome soro, wazou
(sic)
ivazoro are meant.
1)
Here the example

notice.
cited in
RODRIGUEZ
lem. page 71 line 12: ..CbrisUm nite
oro," chrutitnussuui,
comes under
2) See page 109
n.
70.
8) Beki, see
pge 109 n.
73.
V. 55 recto.
4) Nieuw verzameld Japansch en Hollandsch woordenb. door den ?ort van NakaU. 1810. 5) Ibid. II. 40 verso.
278
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VEBB SORAI.
102.
SYNOPSIS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL FORMS OF SAMURAI; A SOORAI,
SORAI, TO BE.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB SORAI.
102.
279
Future.
Periphrastic Future.
Fut
preterit.
Concessive.
Soravan zurumo
A Soro zurumo
Sorobeke-
Soravan zuredomo ASorovanzuredomo
redomo
A Soro zuredomo
Conditional.
.
Soravaba
Soro-
vaba
Soravan ni woitewa
A Soro ni woitewa
Optative
Soravan monowo
A Sorovan monowo
NEGATIVE CONJUGATION.
Present.
Future.
Root-form.
"Soravazi], not to be.
Closing-form.
Soravazu
)*
Sorovazu,
it
is
not.
Soro maziku soro
will not be.
Soro koto maziku soro.

Subst.andAttr.
Soravazu,
Sorovazu, the not being,

not being.
Substant.
iso-
Soravazuva, the not
being.
lated.
Gerund
Soravade,
Sorovade.
Soravazu site , not being.

Time
defining
Soravaneba, when
it
is
not.
Local.
Concessive.
Soravanedomo, though
it
is
not.
S6ro mai keredomo,

migJtt not have been.
though
it
Conditional.
Soravazunba
if
it
is
not.
Soravazuba
Maziku soravaba.
Maziku soravaba, if
not be.
it
should
I)
The regular
the deflecting verb Stfraci negative form of

easily
is
SJracasu.
but the
puken Iwnowfce tut*
for it,
Sdrovazu, and Sorovazu which are more
the towel* pronounced, ou account of the rule, that

yllable.
of the subordinate syllables adapt themselves to that of the principal
280
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB
SI,
TO DO.
103.
103. S)i, u, uru, (jjj^^

elucidated this verb , so far as
87,
I. it is
x o &,
it
vulg. -ft),
to do.
As we have
already
is
used in the formation of causative verbs , in

other relations.
here noticed only in
its
The root- form
Si occurs in
compound nouns,
1.
as chief word, indicating the person,

it is
who
is
employed with something, in

etc.
which case
equivalent to our termination er of tiler, potter
Kavard-si,
= a brick-maker; Mono-si, =
Lat. opifex, maker; I-mono-si, metal founder; R&su-si,
medicine-maker, physician; Nu-si (contracted from Nuru-si), japanner, Si being

generally explained by
2.
it is
fjjjj
I/,
master; or
as definitive
member
before the chief word, as in Si-goto, occupation, where

-ft
2^,
generally indicated phonetically by
and even by
~^^,
with the
signification of
which characters the pure Japanese root, Si, has nothing to do.
Thus
Si-goto
is
met with under the form of fj"

fljw 'ft
/
^
if*?'.
is
Soreva idzurega
si-waza ka?
yoo,
(^
JH ^ .*) wn ose
>
business
this?
'ft^'fH^?
Si-
manner of doing; ft 2x lf, Si-hoo, manner of acting. Si-kata, ^SL^~jj\, manner of handling, also yfit 2x }f|o form of doing, gestures; Teniteno si-kata,
with the hands.
Si-te,
gesticulations
^j^^ ^*^, - work-hand, the hand, the
person that accomplishes a thing.

3.
The root-form
Si further occurs in
compound verbs
is
as
an adverbial
prefix,
to imply that the action expressed
by the verb,
done, as a definite act, and,
in
itself,
includes
all
the activity of the subject. Examples:
Fundwo
= the place
das)i, u, to clear a ship
(compare page 236 n. 18).
Ftindno dasi-ba,
for the clearing of ships.
j? $#/ ft ^
fr)e,
ffl
!'*'
^j^~, Sono fund no si-dasi-bano mindtonona, the name of the port at

ship
is,
j&f; which this
'
or has been,
-fr y^.
5
actually
cleared.
uru, to take in, to take up;
Si-ire ,
the taking in , as exercising a calling , the buying in , purchase

/
of merchandise.
oneself busy
(
^t
2x
j^î
Si-or)i, u, to be busy; Mono-si-or)i, u, to
keep
with one thing or another.

va sudeni fai(
Nippon
,
ni
dite
yebumi no
si-mairi
^ -ff*
-f)
^
7
seri *)
in Japan coming up to the image-
trampling has been already abolished.

Si-utsi,
the deed.
^
ff*
Si-fardi ,
the payment.
1) Franco-Japanese Treaty of the
9 Oct. 1868, Art. IV,
al.
2.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB
81,
TO DO.
10S.
281
yr ^ JJLT'
"ft
Si-tate,
erection, making.
fife
'
Si-toge ,
perfect accomplish.
fhsx ]]f,
II.
Si-naosi, polish.
is
Acting as verb,
plays
,
<S){,
nondeflecting.
On
its
account of the important

use should be preceded by a
part
it
it is
advisable that the explanation of
SYNOPSIS OF THE CONJUGATIONAL FORMS.
Nondeflecting.
Deflecting.
Continuative.
Root-form ....
Imperative.
.
SI
TO DO.
[Sur)i, U, not
in use.]
..81, form- word of causative
. .
Seyo, Sero, Sei, Sesai, do.

Su.
Stiru.
verbs, aa
Aim, to make
Closing-form
be; ..teyo, imperative;
Subst.and Attr.
Terminative..
.
Sum,
doing.
to
nt, closing-form.
Suruni,
doing.
Local
Suruni, by doing.
Suruni va.
Seba.
Concessive ....
Sureba.
seba.
Suredomo,
Surutoiedomo,
if one
do.
. .
Gerund
Site.
sit\ doing.
PRETERIT.
Closing-form
.
Seri, did.
Sl-tari
Sita, has done. ..sltar)i,
u,
..slta,
has done.
Substant.
and
Seru, the having done.
Sl-taru,
Sita.
Attributive.
Sesi.
Sesini, when one did.

Sesinari, has done.
Sesikaba, as he did.
FUTURE.
Sen,
&,
sJiall
do;
ASe6z)u,uru,
..su-be)ki, ku, si,
(p.
A
Senzu.
Seo,
109 n. 73.
104).
NEGATIVE.
Root-form
. .
.
Sezi,
&,
not to do.
[Sezari,
contin.
282
CHAFfEE, VII. THE VERB SI, TO DO.
103.
Nondeflecting.
Deflecting.
Closing, Subst.
Sezu,
Senu.
Sezaru.
and Attrib.
Gerund
Sezuslte,
Sede,
CAUSATIVE.
have done. ..sas)u,

. .
sas)ete, etari,
A eta,
Fut. en,
tin,
Aeo. Con-
uru, ureba, ure-
domo. Neg. Sasenu.

-
Se-sim)e
(^
2/), u,
uru,
.sasim)e, nondefleet. <

let
charge to do; Ger. Se-
do, have done.
slmete ,
contr.
Sestte ;
Fut. Sesimen.
PASSIVE.
Serar)e, u, uru, nondefl.
..sar)e,
u,
uru, be-
become done.
. .
come done.
saserar)e ,
uru
^-^
Serarezu,
order
is
given to do.
Serarenu,
negative, not to be done.
Compounds with
1.
Si.
S)i,
u, uru (to do)
is
used to derive verbs from Japanese nouns;
e.
g.:
Kari, hunting; Kari-s)i, u, uru, to practise hunting; Firano farani bari-so.,

people hunt on the plain of Firano.
alone in the evening.
,
Tada fi-knrdni &<m'suru

as a (married)
to
ivi,
koto,
,
hunting
Yome-iri - the entrance
woman
marriage.
Onnava,
imdda yome-iri-sezoxiLwo dzyo ("^^3)
sndeni yome-iri-sita,TU.
to ivu
is
l
wo fu
7
(
$1$
iVUt
Yome-iri-sitQm6 fu-bo yonde

yet
mummd
as wife,
as to the
woman,
she
who has not
made her entrance
called dzyo (maid),
1) Kasira-gaki kin-moo dzu-i. IV. 2.
r.
CHAPTER
she
VII.
THE VERB
SI,
TO DO.
103.
283
Also
if
who
has already made her entrance as wife,
is
called fu.
she has
been married, her parents say, calling her musume (daughter).
In the same
way, by means of
si,
verbs are derived from:
Yome-tori, to take to wife.
Kami-agari, the rising as Kami, the decease of
a prince.
river.
Katsi-watdri
a ford.
Kavawo
katsi-watdri-suru, the fording of a

horse's
A Mumano
this
kasiraga ftgdst-su,
the
head faces the
east.
Ono-ono rdsiya Jigasi-su, each turns either to the west or to the
east, every
one does
side the
or that.
is
Kono katani mukdite tane-maki

Mainai serardzu, he
is
sezu,
- towards that
sowing
not done.
not bribed.
is
Kono
ne-
danwa
of it?
its
{kura si-mdsuka (or ari-mdswka, or kakdri-mdsiika)? *), what
the price
*),
Go zume
si-mdsu,
it?
it
is
five taels.
Sono katawa doo Bi-tnds& kaf
form
2.
a.
how
is
Chinese words also are verbalized by means of
si (
êir number
is
legion.
Examples:
Rai-si, to come.
Rai-teo-si, to come to court.
s^,
Rio-koo-si, to travel.
Za-si, to
sit.
Tai-si, to be opposite to.
TVuu-m, to go through...
^
2^,
Fai-si, to greet, salute. Fai-si, to abolish.
You-i-si, to provide...
/,
FoM-n-, to be attentive.
it',
Rau-si, to weary.
Rei-si, to order.
Si-si, to die.
2xi
to be hostile.
',
to arrive.
TMku-gan-si, to land.
Zi-si, to allure
with bait
Tas-si, to
make known.
un-
(ijS^)'
uru,
Zi-serar)e, u,
Tes-si, to penetrate;
allured
with
bait
derstand.
(bribed).
,
Gas-si, to
fit,
agree.
Zai-riu-si, to keep abode.
Nes-si, to be hot.
Sis-si, to lose.
Kiyo-riu-si,
Dziu-si,
;$
b.
to dwell.
Bos-si, to sink.
*/,
Dziu-sai-si,
verbalised Chinese words some,
Of the thus
by way of exception, have,
z)i,
u, uru (&,
X, X*^)
instead of
s)i,
u, uru.
The impure
t resulting from
preceding n, occurs in:
1) Shopping- Dialogues
page 3. 34.
2) Ibid. p.
1 1.
284
to
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB
SI,
TO DO.
103.
,?, An-zi,
remark
(to
distin-
*;
Kan-zi, to
affect,
stir,
excite
guish from 2fr-*x
An-zi to
?5,
??,
the feelings.
bring to
f, *?
,
rest.)
Ken-zi, to
offer.
San-zi , to scatter.
Gen-zi, to appear.
11!
v i/i
Go-ran-zi, to please to see.

1.
??,
Gen-zi, to lessen
to diminish.
7,^1 Ten-zi,
to
make
revolve;
iff
jj,
Zon-zi,
1.
to maintain;
2.
to transform.
?>,
2.
vulgo, to think.
H&E
x>
Kassdn-zi, to be hand to
(tekito,
Ron-zi, to discourse.
Soo-ron-zi, to converse.
,
hand
;,
with the enemy).
pro i/*/
?j,
Gin-zi, to sing.
&oo-zi
to
come
forth
grow
to
:,
Son-zi, to suffer damage.

2as)i,
it,
produce.
?^,
to injure.
Foo-zi, to reward.
Oo-zi, to answer to.
:,
Mei-zi, to give order.
^>,
Examples of the use of Chinese-Japanese verbs

Ken-bun
in
si.
(J^v
|^j
^) suru
koto wo kakitomeru, to note

it
down what one
sees
and hears. If suru be superseded by seru,

seen and heard (remarked).
far
%/
means
to note
down what one has
Fino
tooki tsikdkiwo ron-zu,
= people speak of the
and near (of the distance) of the sun from the
earth.
A
yfe
jffc J?
^jB
^^
X, /Soo-tsi-ai-mas'ta, I have understood!

it,
= very
well.
A
desire.
^H
'
^"^^^ î
Soo-si-masoo , I shall do
I shall satisfy
your
Ffodsiku sue-okite
fanasazareba
dsi tsukdrete
yamaiwo
siyau (/ql t)zu, if the hunting falcon be kept
long perched, and not
let fly
abroad, his feet get exhausted by weariness, and
he grows
sick.
Sore takava tsundni nessuru (|î^ ^)i yueni sei-midzuwo kondmu

falcon,
mono
water.
nari,
the
because he
2^r * t ^
is
continually
hot,
is
very fond of fresh

all
|tF
f,=
-^ ^
^ %*/?<. %-?7, charging
people (the
emperor) has silkworms bred.
Fitransi-k6kuno fltd Nipponni

Sit6
kio-riu-(^^
1
^
if it,
$,)
seva (read seba), sono fit6-l>1t6wo Nipponni
nengoroni dtsukdvu besi
),
the French remain in Japan, that people (they) will be treated well.
Remark. If the accomplishing of a thing, instead of the being occupied with

is
to be expressed, then itas)i,
u (f*|?
x), to
accomplish,
is
used instead
of
si,
both in Japanese and Chinese words. Itdsi has arisen by syncope from
Vtardsi,
which
is
the causative form of%tdr)i, u (J3|f*),

signifies the
= has gone (whither he

of an action.
would go) and as such
accomplishment
For the
1)
Franco-Japanese Treaty of 1858. Art.
I.
al.
2. Ibid.
IX. 2. XV. 1, 2.
CHAPTER
rest, the
VII.
THE VERB
SI
TO DO.
103.
285
spoken language seems to use

si.
Vtdri also,
merely for euphony, as being
more harmonious than the simple

-4"f
Examples:
>*
rt
Nippon-zin Fransi-zin yorino laku-zaiwo faravdzttsttt
m-
W
'
2/
3
/
5^
-fa
suppon
itasltarii tokiva,
Nippon
best ),
1
yakit-
\\\^ a )
4
CI
*
xn.
^ * ^-70 X * w 8t? as
A
/^ft
mn
9'
K*8it fardi-kata itas&su
when
Japanese,
without having paid their debts to

flight,
Frenchmen, have taken

authorities shall
the Japanese
^
^
?
4db
wU
^c:
make inquiry and make them
paySoo-bai-itasu
koto
kurusikardzu
),
trade
it
^
p
2/
not unwelcome,
-rjl^
-^
-f
M.
-r
it
will not be thwarted.
A Miyoo-nitsi
A Go
yoo
soo-dan
itdsi
Go
hen-too itdsi-masoo
(tasi
to
morrow
I shall give
you an answer.
it.
tasi-
ttdsi)
masoo
I shall
speak with you about
A Sa-
masoo, I shall do
III.
so.
A 0-itoma
4 itasi-masoo, I shall take leave of you ).
ON THE GOVERNMENT OF
an object
is
S)i,
U, UTU, TO DO.
When
sitive,
1.
this verb has

it
direct, in the accusative, before it, it is tran-
but when not,
intransitive.
[..wo
su.]
The
definition:
what
a person does, stands, as object direct,
in the accusative.
Examples:
Kareva naniwo sitaruka? what has he done?

*"
ijjj
Ware korewo
not
sezu
(?^
Zin wo
J^ ^
,
5
) )
i
do not do this
,
this is
my
business.
suru mono
^ ^^
leaf,
^jf J)
one who practises humanity.
Tedz&kdra
wo
torite
(totte)
ko-gaiwo si-tomauw, = with her
own hands
(the princess) plucks
the mulberry
and
practises
the nourishment of children (the breeding of
silkworms).
2.
[.
.ni su.]
The
definition of the
state or of the quality, in
which one
is
engaged
or is (intransitive), or in which one causes a thing to be,

(transitive), provided it be a
what
one makes of a thing

in ni, the
noun,
. .
is
put in the Local

. .
form
ni-s)i, M,
6
).
wrw, sometimes mutating to
n-)t, whence
nz)i
proceeds
From
the Gerund nislt6 the form nite arises, by syncope.
1) Franco-Jap. Treaty. Art.
XVIII.
al.
1.
2)
Ibid.
VIII.
1.
3) Shopping-Dialogues , p. 39.
4) Ibid. p. 41.
it
5) Ttck*g-y**g. XI.
&} The z
in nzi
I have observed
myself,
is
so softly
pronounced
that one think* he
bean
nyi
instead of nzi therefore even
RODRIGUEZ
in
lem. f 29
has adopted the written-forra M.
286
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB
SI,
TO DO.
103.
Examples
a.
Si, with
an intransitive
signification.
1-nakdrani
site
(or nite) Mdsi tsu

,
besi ( ^jf
yfcarw,
ffll
ifei )
>
one
mav
do
it
while sitting.
Fa
roku-sai ni site
the leaf, being in the sixth year, dries up.
Zai-wi ku-nen nisit6 (or
nite)
Ten-wau fou-zu, = being in the ninth year of

yotsu kado nisttd, sue togaru,
his reign, the
Emperor
dies.
Nomi
the fruit
is
quadrangular, and pointed at

ari,
the top.
Kono simava mi
fitotsu
nisttd omo yotsu

is
omo
gotoni
na
ari, this
island (Slkok, or the four countries)
one and has four faces; these have each

bdsi,
a name.
Tatsi-tokdroni sitd mdtsi tsu
Tff "fc
fflj
^=f
ia
'
Banding
the point of departure he must wait.

sakini suru tokiniva) fitdwo sei-su, leads the others
Saki, the point. Sakirizuru tokinva (=

is
when one
at the point
(is
the chief), one
(^
j||J
$j
A*)'
Fito fakoni nangin irini si-masuka? l ),
how many pounds

pounds
in.
shall I
put in a chest? Fyak-kin irini nasdre, put a hundred
Roono katawa doo si-mas&ka? the shape of the wax

sitd,
how
is it?
Atsukavini sureba, musi tsiisdku
mayumo
tsiisakiwo tsukuru*),
by overSika
feeding, the (silk)worm will remain small and also
make
is
small cocoons.
like a horse
3
va
is
m&mano
smaller.
gotdku
ni sitd seo (//JN^) wart,

iro ki ni sitd,
the stag
,
much
nagasi
and
,
Yama-inu va
fou siroku
wo
tail.
the wild dog
being yellow of color has white cheeks and a long

b.
Si, with a transitive signification.
Makoto, truth. Sono kokdro basewd
makotonisu, he makes his meaning truth.

shine.
T6k&wo akirdkani
su, he lets virtue

,
Motowo fdkdni
4 )
,
sltd,
sudwo
ntsi-ni surebd,
tamiwo arasovdsimete
ttbdvu
,
koto wo fodok6sft
if
one excludes the root (virtue) and includes the top (fortune)
strife,
one teaches the people
and rapacity.
Futokdro, bosom,
heart.
Korewo
side.
futokdroni si-tsubesi, one ought to take this to heart.
Omote, face, front

-
Nisiva gavawo omoteni su, on the west one has a river in front.
level ,
(
Tairdka,
dri
5
)
smooth.
Ten-ka wo tairaka ni
surfr
koto va
sono kuni
wo osdmurn ni
2p
~|^ ~%f yj^
^ [^
the
making
his state.
the whole empire peaceful and happy
depends on the government of

Te-honni suru, set for example.
Meateni suru, to
set for aim.
Dai-setsu
(y^
~wJ)
suru, to consider im-
1)
Shopping-Dialogues , p. 11.
2)
The
inversion:
mayumo
tsivtald instead of Isiisaki
mayumo
serves to bring ont tsiisaki (small) with
3) Kasira-gaki. XII. 5
r.
4)
Dai Gaku. X.
8.
5) Ihid.,
X.
1.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB
81,
TO DO.
103.
287
portant.
Atatakani sum, to warm.

clear.
Komakani sum,
to
make
fine.
Tsu-
mabirakani suru, to make

sider lightly, despise.
-- Karo, light (of weight); Karonzi, to conto consider weighty.
Omo, heavy, weighty; Omonzi,
To
be distinguished from Karokusi, Omokusi, to make light, to make weighty.

Sora, empty; Soranzi, to learn by heart.
or amarizu , to think zweet.
chest into the bargain.
-
Ama, mead,
sugar juice;
l
Amani
*,
Fako wa
Oki-tokei
soye ni site kudasare

fltdtsti soye ni
please to give the

*)
,
wo
si-ma&oo
I will give a
time-piece into the bargain.

3.
e.
[..kusu, ..usu.] If the definition of quality
is
an adjective in
ki
9),
g.
Nagaki, lang,
w, uru,
its
adverbial form in
ku
(
(or merely u) is used to unite with

,
)z,
and the
so
formed compound
Nagaku-si)
as long as there is
no
object direct, expresses the

it
mere carrying out of the idea of the adverb, and, as

is
appears from the examples quoted,

is
equivalent to the predicative closingdirect is involved, then the verb
form Nagasi, =
)',
long;
if
however an object
u has
its
transitive signification (the causative
form
se-su
se-simu seems to
lurk behind
it).
In the example quoted at page 269: Tsuriwo y6k&-su^ he handles

is
the angle well, yoku

handle.
a.
a modal definition of the transitively used
)',
u, to do,
With an
nagdku
intransitive signification ..ku s)z, u, uru appear in propositions as:

sitd
Wo
tooku tobu koto atavdzu
s )
,
he (a certain bird) has a long

sitt,
tail
and cannot
fly far.
Da va
legs.
kubi nagdku
dsi takasi, the
camel has a
kit**** no he
long neck and high
Sonoke un-kqu (|S.v
j?*)
sXte
close,
yorimo atataka nari;
ndtstivd suzusi*), his hair is

it is
warm and
and warmer
even than the hair of the fox; in summer
cool.
[TtUkdki^ near.]
differs
A., va
B..
ve tsikdkusite
C..
to koto-nari,
A., comes near B.. and
from C..the lips are
{Usuki, thin. Karoki, light.]

thin
(if
Kutsibiru usuvu-slte, kotoba kar6u-su,

light.
- -
if
the tong
is
smooth), the word weighs

wildly.]
fierce
[Araki, rough, wild;
Arakusu, act wildly, behave

kotowo konomu, the emperor,
like.]
Ten-wau
ftmdre-tsuki ardku-site
JUowo kor6*v
\Got6ki ,
by nature, was fond of killing men.

are acting in this way.
- -
Kakuno
gotoku sureba,
when people
[Forf&i,
easy.]
Nokordzu
kai nasdru nurd, yas&ku-stte age-ma$oo*), if you
buy the whole
8) Ibid. p. 39.
)
3) Kasira-gaki XIII.
11.
r.
Ibid.
XII.
9.
r.
p.
36.
288
stock, I will let
CHAPTER.
VII.
THE VERB
SI,
TO DO.
103.
you have
1. to
it
cheap.
[Naki, not existing.

fail,
Nakusu(&
~Y^^
1.
pron. naosu),
be wanting, to
2. to
think paltry (of no value).]

is
YaM.su
koto nakusite,
2.
Kami no
tdsukd ari, medical treatment failing there

su,
God's help.
b.
Fit6
wo nandomo nau
he considers others as of no value.

s)i,
With
a transitive signification ..ku
u, uru
is
found in propositions
as:
[Takaki, high.] Me-atewo takaku

one's intention.
sum, =
to exalt one's aim, not to give
up
[Fikiki, low, humble.]
Me wo
cast fikikusite utsubukite miru, to
the eyes
downward and look below.
[Taddstki, right, upright.] Sono
mi wo
osa-
mento hdssuru mono va mddzu sono kokdro wo taddsiu-su Sono kokdro wo tadasiusen to
hdssuru
mono va mddzu sono kokdrobase wo makdto

first
ni su
1 )
,
who
ever will
govern himself,
first
makes
his heart right.
He who
will
make
his heart right,
aims at truth.
[Mattaki, whole; mattaku- (mattau, mattou,
mattoo) su,
to
make whole,
/
to perfect.]
^|f"
Zinwo suru to va sono kokdro no

Aj)
tdkttwo mattou
sum
yuen nari
is
^ fH
$f
$ ^^
^ ^ i&
^ne practice
of humanity
the means to perfect the heart. -- [Toki, quick, ready.]

it
Korewo
make
tokusu, he
does
stki,
quickly.
[Atsuki, hot.] Atsuku or Atsuu suru, to

besi,
hot.
[Suzulet in the
cool.]
To wo firaki suzusiku su
[FttdsVki,
you may open the door and

sort.]
coolness.
- one-ish, of one
Koku kawo
fttdtrtusu,
he makes
the country and people conforming to one mode.

tsiu-k6ku
[Qn&Xfet, identical.]
Tomoni
wo ondziu
sdzu ,
not having the middle kingdom in common. Tsiri wo
ondztku sdnu, not having the dust in
common, not
staying at the same place
with anyone.
[Fukdki, deep; Katdki, hard, fast.]

it is
Newo
fukqusi, fozowo ka-
tdku suru kusd nari, =

stalk hard.
4.
a plant, that shoots
its
roots deep,
and makes
its
[to su.]
The appositive
definition,
is is si
what
a thing
is
made, whether in
fact
or in imagination merely,
characterized
by the
particle to,
= to,
(see
page 70. V). If an object direct

has reference to the object and
mentioned in the proposition, the apposition

has the transitive signification of
if
make
(to),
take for, consider as; on the other hand
no
direct object is
mentioned in
has the in-
the proposition, the apposition has reference to the subject, and

transitive signification of: to
a.
si
be actually.
Appositions referring to the subject
we have
in sentences, like:
1)
Lai Gaku, IV,
4.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB
SI,
TO DO.
103.
289
Fito to site kau nakivd (or naki monova) tsiku-sauni k6tondrazu, he
who
is
human
being and
as a
is
destitute
is
of
filial
love, does not differ from the brute;
or: he
who
human being
devoid of etc.
Avadsino simavd ena to
site
umi maseru
nari,
the island of Avadsi
arose (at the creation of the Japanese

to
archipelago) as an afterbirth.
Fosi otsuru
ivuva fosini ardzH. Fito no
me in
fosi to suru norm, concerning the assertion, that stars fall, they are not stars.
Only
b.
for the eyes of
men
do they appear as
stars.
Appositions referring to the object
we have
in sentences as:
it
Onoreni sikazdru monowd tomotd suru koto nakdre,
may
,
not be that (you)
make any one who

,
is
not as your
subesi,
self
(who
is
your
inferior)
(to)
your fellow.
Kono fan wo dai-itsito Fan to su ( cipal).

= Te-fonni
Remark.
this rule
must be considered
as the first (the prin-
x
l?7
b)'
make
(to)
rule,
consider as a rule.
su; meateni su.

1.
The
object that
is
taken for anything,
is
found as object
still
governed by a separate active verb, which most frequently gives the way in
which
it
is
made.
...
Tenwau
...
fimewo
(to)
tatete
kisagi to si-tamavu, the
emperor
...
appoints Lady
consort.
and makes her
consort. = the emperor takes
Lady
for
Remark.
to
2.
Much
used
is
the formula: A., wo motte B..
to su,
he makes A..
B.., considers A., as B.

1
.,
has A., to B. -
Waukiwo motte
tsitsitosi,
Bu-
wauwo motte koto su

Kuniva riwo motte
),
he has Wang-ki for father and
Wu-wang
for son. -
8 ri to sdzu; giwo motte ri to sw ), a government does not
make advantage
pass as advantage;
find
its
it
considers justice as advantage. Or: a goit
vernment does not

justice.
advantage in advantage;
finds its
advantage in
Rito suruni giwo mottesu*), to use justice as being advantageous.
^ ij ^ *m- Ten-sinwo ^ -iÂ^ _ _H8 ^'

I
miruniva, sono siyu
to
suru tokorotco motifsu*),
to judge of a foreign minister, people take as stand
him
y
*S*
V whom
?
he makes his host (him in whose house he
stays).
P
Remark.
3.
By
the omission of site instead of

,
.to site,
we meet with
to alone.
to
Yuru yuru,
loitering,
hesitating,
to
by degrees.
Yuruyuru ayumi,
go step
for step (slowly).
Yuruyuru
suru, slowly, by degrees to do.
Yuruyuru
1)
Tschung-yung. XVIII.
II.
2)
Dai Gain. X.
88.
") IWd. IV. 5.
4) Meny-tsze, Lib.
Cap. HI. $ 45.
19
290
to site (or
CHAFFER
VII.
THE VERB
SI,
TO DO.
103.
Yuru yuru
to)
fappoo
(/V ^7
frog)
it
spreads gradually in
all
directions.
5.
If the
appositive
is
definition,
what any
thing
is it
made
is
(to),
and that in
imagination,
verb with
s)i,
or without complement,
etc.
put in the closing-
form followed by to
u, uru
Kakuru
nasi
to
is
koto nasi, there is
no want.
is
su,
people think, that nothing
$&^ %jk^ ^ Kakuru A Kore yori ndwa wanting.

'
koto
nai,
there
nothing that surpasses that.

it.
Kore yori ttwa nai
to su,
people consider,
that nothing surpasses

to
Itari,
come
to.. Itareri, is to
come
to..
Ware
itareri
su,
I think to have
come
to
the extreme,
have reached the topmost.
Faru-aMva kagewo
(spring
best.
tattomi,
fuyuva Jinatawo
is
yosi tosu, in the

is
warm
season
autumn) the shadow
prized; in winter the sunshine

yosi to
thought the
for the best,
Tada fikureni kari-suruwo
sum
nari, people think
it
to
hunt only in the evening.

6.
[en-, in-, an- to stu]
The
definition expressed
by a verb with or without

is
complement, to
what purpose
= he
a person
is
occupied,
put in the Future
followed by to s)i, u, uru; whence the forms: ..en to su, ..in to su, ..an to
su
00-,
iu-i
oo to su)
is
busy about
. .
he
is
about to
. .
he
tries to
. .
Lat. in eo est ut, id agit ut. These forms are equivalent to the Lat.
verbum medi-
tativum (moriturio), and, as
it, is
express an effort towards something.
Kassen ni yukdn to su
he
about to go to battle.
Yebisu
domo no ni
fi wo
fandtte mikotowo yaki-korosanto
sum
toki,
mikotono faki-tamaveru fou-ken midsu-
kara nukete, moye-kitaru kusawo nagi-faravu,
when
the savages setting the
field
on
fire
tried
to
burn the prince, the sword which the prince had girded on,
and mowed the burning grass away.
unsheathed
7.
is
itself
[..to site,
= ..to
te.]
Instead of the gerund to

130. 48. Examples:
3
site
the syncopated to te
often
met
with.
Comp.
Kono
aidani, Fayatomo sedo to

is
te
sivo faydsi,
between them (between the two

is
banks) there
taka,
the strait of Hayatomo, and the stream
rapid.
Kono foM Koorai
Yezo-taka, Riu-kiu-taka to te, kuni-gunini ari, moreover there are, since
THE falcon of Corea, that of Yezo, that of Liu-kiu are met with, (falcons) in every
country.
Kono sekiwo Fotokeni
nitari
to te,
Buts-zqu-sdki
to
mo
ivu, people
1)
In our opinion, to estimate to, rightly as
it is
here used, what has been said at page 70
respectin g
Filo tova,
must b
observed.
CHAPTER
call that rock,
VII.
THE VERB
SI,
103. BESI
104.
291
because they think that
it
resembles a Buddha, the Buddha-image-
rock.
Ine'wo tsumide
(A
tsunde), siro to site ... tatakqvu, he heaps
up
rice-
balls to a fort
and
fights.
Yase-kiwo niwakani
sei-teu-
($%
trees
;M 5) *0-Wnto
grow, they
te koyasiwo tsuyoku-su bekardzu, to
make meagre trunks of
may
not be too strongly manured.
rt
= jB ^
Ii8
Wf ^
%
&t*
"Tit*
Go kokuno wauva Nipponwo semen to te w-nianno m'n a z ^y uwo wa tdsu, the king of the country U, intending
to
_g~
?
*
BesI,
"3L.y
make war on Japan, sends a
force of
many
tens
s
104.
of thousands thither.
may, can,
o
shall; Beki, adjective, B^k&, adverb possibly,

'jit pLf o
/yii*>
7fT expressed in Chinese by j J

I.
jfi
2j\ sj-\
"
o
| .|
& ^J
||F HpJ
Derivation and signification.

(-^), after the old
Be
Zr-^t
form of writing A-^,

as
mube (pronounced
is
as
mbe),
also
ubd and
2?
urnd (pronounced
i)
mme),
in
Japanese dictionaries,
JE
i
called a
If,
word of assent
although
and made equal to the Chinese
*).
this definition of the idea is practically sufficient,

is
still
an investiga-
tion of the origin of Be,
required,
it
must be sought
in the exclamation
m, which,
= our
yes.
as our hem, implies that a person understands something,
and in he,
The
original form,
m-M,
according to the rule of euphony passes, in
pronunciation, into mbd, expressed in writing by -^, for which
we
write be,
whereas in the month of a Ye"do gentleman
it
sounds clearly as mbe.
The
old form
still,
A^s, Mube, occurs
as a substantive with the signification of

1
consent
in expressions as
Mube
nari (sC^jtf 9)4 ji P> granted,

it is
= one has
not be;
the liberty to do, one
may
do; Mttb6 nardzii,
not allowed,
it
may
whereas
it is
-s:
(be),
occurs as a substantive in the every day expression Su-be nari,
it is impossible. possible, Su-be nasi,
The forms derived from the

adjective, bdki,
i.
root
Be: the predicative
><&(,
the attributive
and the adverb, bdk&, thus include the idea of may, and of can,
e.
no external cause preventing the doing of a thing.
A command
to do
=
1)
lated
-jt
with
*i|p
^ ^x
#$'),:
Formerly the Chinese word ffjj (= content)
WM
trans-
Ube or Ume.
i ..Suitable,
2)
proper,
fit,
becoming; ought, should."
MEDHUMT, CKuute and Englitk Dictionary.
292
is
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB BESI
MAY.
104.
something
Japanese,
not included in
it,
and we do
injustice to the politeness of the
if
we
give to this
word the
signification of our
one must, you
must, you shall." The

of
idea of
consent on
the one side does not include that

at its strongest, only contain
obligation on the other (must), and can,
an
inducement.
II.
Be
belongs to the root-words treated in
9. I. B.,
of which the so called
adjectives in ki are derived.
In accordance with the rule given there, Besi and
Beki in the old-Japanese and in the popular language are superseded by the
syncopated form Bei (Iff ^) and the adverb Beku by Beo
"*
("flf|"$?o
"Pf
JSI
7
)
>
and that particularly in the countries

1
east of the Fakone-pass , whereas in Sinano
Mei (Iff^) is said, instead of Bei ). With regard to the inflectional forms, they cannot be
by a systematic synopsis. The writer confines himself
actually
rule,
better elucidated than
to those forms ,
which have
come under
yet
his
notice,
refers
and with regard
to such as, according to the
may
exist,
he
the reader to the Synopsis of the Inflectional
forms of Nasi,
106.
INFLECTIONAL FORMS OF BESI, MAY, CAN.
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB BESI, MAY.
104.
293
Aorist.
Coo tin.
Pres.
Preterit.
Concessive.
Bekaredomo.
Bekeredomo.
although.
Adverbial
Bekaraku.
FUTURE.
Bekar)an,
ao,
oo.
Beken,
it sJiall
ha-
ve been possible.
Beranari,
possible
Conditional.
it
shall be
Bekuni, Bekuni
va
,
Bekaraba, if
possible.
it
be
Bekenba, if
it
if-
Bekunba
might be possible.
Bekumba.
NEGATIVE.
Be-nasi, old-Jap.
Bekara)zu,
nu.
may
not.
Sube-nasi,
it is
Su-bekarazu,
not possible.
it
is
not to be done.
U-bekarazu,
it is
not
to be obtained.
HI. ON THE GOVERNMENT OP Besi.
The verb, which, preceding Besi,

will (do) is put, either in its
expresses
its
what
one may, can,
shall or
root, or
attributive form. In nondeflecting

i,
verbs both forms are used, in deflecting verbs in
only the attributive form in
or, instead of it, in the root, in
with
nu
or tsu as termination. Examples
with nondeflecting verbs:

Ake-besi, one can,
may
open.
Mi-besi, one can,
may
see.
Fiyori yokiioo
mite, tandwo aê-besi. Savo-nadoni tsuri, fikage-nite &ar/:<feu-besi, if you see, that
the weather
is
fair,
you may take out the seed (of the silkworms that have been
it
put in water), suspend

divided;
on
sticks
and dry
it
in the sun.
Walcerare, be
Wakerdr%rii-beki, divisible.
is
Mi-wakerare, to be distinguished at
-
sight; Mi-wakerdruru-besi, it
to be distinguished at sight.
visibility.
Aravare, to
be
visible;
Aravaruru-beki koto,
E, Ete
(or Ye, Yefe),
U, UrU
(get)
becomes U-beki instead of Urbeki;
^^^-^y,
Ubeki mono, something one can
CHAPTER
get, something O obtainable. O
'
VII.
THE VERB BESI,

it
MA.Y.
104.
Sesime. have
done;
Se'simii-be'si
instead of Sesi-
murbesi, one can have done.

kurbesi.
bdsi,
Tas&ke, help, save; Tasuku-besi instead of Tasutdstiku-
In a legend S'akya speaks to the falcon: Nandzi kono fatowo
spare this dove.
The
falcon answers:
Ware kono fatowo
tdstikdbd,
ware
uvdte si-su-besi, if I spare the dove, I shall die of hunger.
Examples with
deflecting verbs:
^^
*~
Nari, to
.
be.
Kono sima kanarazu Okino-sima
naru-besi, this
Si. to do.
^
uc.
island will
beki
undoubtedly be that of Oki.
Su-
("Pff "lij)?
feasible. Su-beki koto ari, there is a possibility
tyfc
of
doing
(this).
Onna kono tewazawo
su-besi,
women
work
here
ought to do such work.
Korewa onnano
su-beki tewaza wan', that is a

is
which
women
can or ought to do. Su-beki (being able, or about to do)
conceived in an active sense, whereas the genitive onnano precedes as attributive

definition.
Tomoni
ivu-besi
(IjJ* Jilt ^=f ),
people
may
speak with one another.

it
Nivakdni fusegu-beki yaumo nakereba, Kavatsiye nige-yuku, as in the hurry
was impossible
to offer resistance, they fled to Kavatsi.

,
Koreva nasazdru
,
bdsi,
with regard to this

regard to this, one
it
may remain
not do
it.
undone.
Kore va nasaru bekarazu

allows, that something
with
not
may
The former
happen.
-
may
happen
"FT
the latter forbids that

)
"'
it
Tsumabiraka ni su-bekardzu
( ~j$*
cann
make
it
clear.
The terminations nu and tsu occur in

Ari-nu-be'si ,
it
deflecting
bdsi
(
verbs,
e.
g.
Ari, to be;
i
may
llj"
or can be.
-- Iri-nu
or shall
l*f
to.
,A)> one mav 8

(Ivi (li),
'
Itdrinu-Msi
gj?),
one
may
come
- -
to be called;
,
Ivi-tsu-bdsi , it
may
or can be called.
Tana-kok6roni megurdst-tsu-be'si
one can
make
it
run round on the palm of the hand.

tsti
I refer both terminations not to the closing-forms
and WM, treated in
84
and 85, but
to
^^ nu
^T
(a variation of no)
and
^^
tsu,
which, as characteristics
of the attributive
relation,
are derived from the old language. See page 67.

is
IV.
l.>
The
ability to
o
do any thing
7j
o
expressed by Y6kiis)i, u, uru, to do

,
good
j|||
go
jjjjj o
Negative Yokuse)zu
Yokusenu. Prom the ex-
pression:
Uru
is
koto wo
y6kusu^-~L
am
able to get,
it
appears that the definition
what one
able for, precedes as object in the Accusative.

e. g.
Also used adverbially Y6ku expresses the ability to do anything,

bdkdtte
sikaustte
Omon-
notsi
jffij
y6ku
w,
by
.
reflection is
I.
one able consequently to attain

2.
(his object),
jg
||
Dai Gaku.
CHAPTER
VII
THE VERBS ATAVAZI, AHETE.

zin-zin ydkii ftt6wo ai-si, y6ku
104.
2 '.'".
w>=
*"
*\>
/#
~
*
"
Tada
flt6wo nikrimu
koto
g*
wosu
^
),
the
humane man
-
alone
is
able to love others,
"
c
'.
'"
â ê
th er8
a
Sei-zin to tedomo,
if
mata yoku-sezaru
still
to-
HE ?
2.
^
l^ti
^
k6ro ari
),
even
he were a saint, there would
be
something that he could not do.

to do a thing
koto
is
The inability
is
expressed by Atavaz)i,
W >p"
- -
Lat. non valet,
- Uru
atavdzu,
- the
acquisition
is
is
not brought about.
Atdvi, of which Atavdzu
the negative form,
composed of Ate, = equivalent,
and
av)i, u,
to
fit,
or,
after the
Wagun
Siwori, from Atekavi
(^^
^ft)
to take the place of a thing, as an exchange, and means, substantively used,
the value
(\j[_k)
of a thing; thus, as a verb, to be of value, to

considers the treatment,
be worth
(Lat. valere).
The Japanese language

_
and not the person
treating, as that
^m
^pf'
9w
which is not of value, or cannot be brought about. 7 ^ are yamu koto atavdzu 3 ) = that I (halting B& ^ 2t T 5c
'
half-way) should rest,
is
not brought about, = I can not
rest.
- -
Ken wo
mite
siri-
aguru koto atavdzu, agdte sakinzUru koto atavazdruvd

zdkuru koto atavdzu
,
m&
ndrf.
Fu-senwo mite
*),
sirizdketd tdosdguru koto atavazdrA va ayamdtsi nari
to 868
an excellent
to
man and
is
not be able to raise him; to raise him and not be able
promote him,
fate.
To
see a good-for-nothing
and not be able to remove

is
him, to remove him and not be able to put him away, that
a mistake.
Kore wo
motsiite tsukusu koto atavazaru
mono aran
*)
= that
this (principle)
be
fr
m^
exhausted by the application, will be something impossi-
Jfr ~
^t" ^ M.T -^
To dare,
is
vdzu,
it is
not possible, that (a thing) do not perish.
V.
expressed by Ahete, Aete (Ij^cO, the gerund of

-
Ahe or
ê
koto-
Av)e, u, uru, = to answer to...

dares not attempt
it.
AMte
atardzu
(_^^
tyL^
it.
-Sy
Ahfa
AMte
kotowari-ivu , he dares judge of

it.
wari-ivdnu, he dares not judge of
Tarazdru tokoro areba, ah&e MUotnezunba

suffice (if
ardzu
(the
if
there
is
any thing that does not
he comes short of) , he

- -
man
of character) does not dare not exert himself,
he dares not be ne-
gligent.
1)
Dai Qatu. X.
Dai Qaku. X.
15.
16.
2) Tsekuny-
u^. XII.
t.
3) Ibid.
XI.
XIII
S.
4)
5) Tichung-yuny.
6) Ibid
296
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB TASI, DESIROUS.

or Ali6nu
105.
Remark. The negative
AMzu
^
- -
j|
joined to the root of a

it is
precedent verb, means the not accomplishing of an action;

to Fatasazu
(
\S
made equivalent
Tori- ,
**
J& #)
*/
not to accomplish.
Omoi-
Im-
Nagare-
ahdzu or ahdnu, mean: not continue meaning, saying, taking, flowing.
VI. That an action or a state
is
fitting, or
is
as it should be,
should be.
it.
is
expressed
it
by Too-sen
tar)i,
(^^
one
is
$f$
v#
'))
*s
as
Joined to
definition
are
is
also the ideas, that

fitting,
fair).
obliged or even entitled to
The
what
precedes as
substantive proposition,
and
is
characterized
by
koto
is
(af-
Oitdruwo
uyamau
koto
too-sen
tari,
that
age
is
respected,
as
it
should be.
^^
Aui
Nippon
-J^
sei-fu yori
f&ne-bune ni ... yaku-nin nori1
V
,
,p ^
*
3
'Pt
A J\.
:
kumasuru koto
toosen taru besi
), it will
be proper that
on the part of the Japanese government custom-house

jlS
C
officers
be placed on the ships;
or,
after the official
translation
the Japanese government shall have the right ... to place.
105.
I.
The desiderative
verbs.
Desiderative verbs are formed

quality
by grafting on the
root of the verb, the

ki
word expressive of
(see
Ta, = desirous.
(ideographically
Belonging to the adjectives in

expressed by
to
page 109 n. 69),

has
all
Ta
^,
=
is
phonetically by
j^?)
stantive
the inflectional forms
common
them, thus Taki, the subdesirous;
and
attributive form,
desirous;
Tase, predicate,
to
Tdku,
adv.
The spoken language, which according

Taki and
-J?^,
II.
suppresses the k and
the s, supersedes
Tasi by
Tai (^-^, for which
is
improperly
written), and Tak& by
Taw,
to
Too, for
see;
which inadepts
also write
27.
Mi-
Mi-taki
(A
Mi-tdi),
desirous
Mi-tdsi
(A
Mitdi},
he desires to see;
5
"
Mi-tdku (A Mi-tau, Mi-tao, Mi-too), adv.

takuba, if he whishes to
see.
Mi-taku
(or
^Qlt^JjL^ Mi-too) mo
JjL
ncti"*),
|^^
he will not
even
see.
From
to do
(
the adverbial form Taku or Too, by means of the verb S)i, w, uru,
103),
is
derived Tdku-si or Too-si, to desire; gerund TakusiU or Too-sitd,
1)
Regulations by which the Dutch trade in Japan shall be carried on. Art.
is
II.
2) This
the ,,tomo nai, je ne veux pas," occurring in RODR. Eiem. pag. 54
56
line 4.
CHAPTER
in the
VII.
THE VERB TASI, DESIROUS.

elision
105.
297
spoken language passing by
into Taku-te or Too-te,

tra,
desiring;
Takutewa or Tootewa, the gerund

Tootemo, though he wishes.
isolated
by
if
one desires; Takutemd or
The
adv.
Taku or Too
is
further used in compositions like Taku- or Too-gozais
ri-masil, is desiring;
Taku- or Too-omou, or omoi-masil, -
desirous thinking,
desires,
Taku-omoote zVw,
Taku-omoote ori-masu, roundabout polite form for:
I desire ;
II.
Tdkti-zon-zi-mdsu , = I
am
desirous ; Mairi-taku-zonzi-mdrii , I will go.
Continuative forms.
10, to the adv. Taku or Too
-\-
1) If according to
exist ,
we
join the verb .4ri,

-f-
to
we
obtain the continuative form Taku
dri or
Too
an',
'J
i
which in proto
nunciation, and in writing also, passes over to Takari,
^*#
= continually
be desirous. Inflection, the same as of

Pres.
An
96).
Mi-taku cm, Mi-too

,
an', Mitakar)i, u, is desiring to see.

,
Gerund. Mi-taku-arite
Mi-taku-dtte
Mi-too-dtte, Mi-takarlte,
,
Mi-takatte.
Concess. Mi-takuwa aredomo, also

Condit.
Mi-tai-keredomo
,
though he
desires to see.
see.
Mi-taku-ba, Mi-takereba, Mi-tai-naraba

Mi-takaroo, he
if
he desires to
Future
Pret.
may
desire to see.
see.
Mi-too atta, Mi-takatta, he was disiring to
Mi-takatta keredomo, though he has desired to see.

Fut. Perf. Mi-takattaroo
,
he
may have
desired to see.
Derivative verbs of this stamp are:

Kiki-taki, desirous to hear,
f^j]
|^|do
,
Ure-taki,
thetic.
desirous to
mourn, = sympa-
Yuki-taki, desirous to go.

Si-taki
(^^ KC?)'
desirous
to
'
Nemu-taki, desirous
te sleep, sleepy. -
ready.
Si-taku- (si-tg,u)-suru
to
N4mu-toi,
I will sleep.
Nemu-
be ready.
Itdsi-taki,
(
taku nasi fc? JfcJ),

desirous
to
not
(A Nemu-tqu wai), I am Ware mata nemu-tak* sleepy.

nai (vulgo nemu-tQU
bring about.
Manabi-taki, desirous to learn.
mo
mo
not),
also I
am
not sleepy.
-
Nttnu-ttua ,
Nomi-taki, desirous to drink.

Mede-taki, desirous to love, in love.
106.
I.
sleepiness.
Wa-tokB*i, = selfish;
the
action
is
I.
The leaving off of an
expressed.
u.
by
.the deflecting transitive verb
Mak)i,
From
Alee, to
open,
Mi
to see,
Yuki, to go, are derived by means of Maki: Ake-maki, Mi-maki, Yuka-maJn,

to leave off opening, to leave off seeing, not to go farther.
From
the examples
298
given
passive
it
CHAPTER
Vll.
THE VEUBS MAKI, YAMI, SIMAVI.
106.
appears, that, just as in the forming of the continuative, factive and
forms,
the
weak
of the
deflecting
verb undergoes a strengthening.

roll,
Mak)i, u means to roll up; thence the substantive, Maki, a
or
is
Makirolled
mono, a thing that
is
rolled.
roll
of writing, that has been used,

roll
up again. Thence, improperly: Sitawo maku, to

speaking,
stringless
up the tongue,
i.
e.
cease
grow
speechless.
Itonaki koto wo makite ziwo titdvu, he lays the
harp aside and sings a verse.
Joined to a verb with the signification of ceasing to do what the verb expresses, Mak)i,
is
expressed by
j||.
to refuse, to retire, thus
^
more
JH,?'
Mi-maki, to cease seeing.
ffl^? iSJLî Sira-maki, to have done with a thing.
_^t* P^ S _JH,7
1^1
Ullf
Hfc^T'
Kika-mdku
f6s$ki,
,
desiring not to hear
of.
$C
>
Mdtstiri-koto wo kikamaku fdssu
he wishes to hear no more of business.

Diet.
A
or
as
quite
different signification is given to this

-=?*^)
,
word by Mr. HEPBURN, Jap. Engl.

which the
final
1872.
,,MAKU
MASHI
(-=?ô
an ancient and
now
obsolete affix to verbs, for

coll.
is
now
substituted,
Mi-makuno
II.
hossiki
=
(
minto hossuru, or
mitai, desire to see."
Yam)i, u
.
A)I into-, to
become
quiet, to come to
,
rest, Lat. quiescere;
to leave off
Kaiko k&vd wo kuvi-yamu

off
the silkworm leaves off eating. -
Kftvdwo furi-yame, leave
strowing food on the floor (to feed the silkworm).
Yami,
III.
as
we
see,
with the root of a precedent verb forms a compound verb.
Simav)i, u,
Sima)i, u,
** phonetically expressed by
^t^^t*
more espe-
in
my
opinion, a distortion of Sttmdvi, to retire to rest, perch as bird, thence
improperly to
cially to the
have done with
a thing, to
leave
off. It belongs
spoken language, and generally has the complement of the action

in the gerund in
site
te
one leaves
off,
or de
sometimes also in the verbal root before

,
it.
Si-gotowo
(so)
simdi-masoo
I shall finish
my
work.
Watdk&siwa sono
siyo-
motsitwo mohdya yomi-simavuta
(A
simoota), I have read this book through-
out.
Kareva kunde simoota, he has

he
will
left off eating,
= he has eaten.
sufficiently
Kunde
fermented
simaute aroo,
beer.
have eaten.
Waki-simquta sake,
Imada waki-simavdzu
1
,
ni oru sake, beer that has not sufficiently fermented.
Kunde stmae
to sell out.
nonde simad, leave off eating and drinking.

ya-stydkti
Uri-naraute simau,
simai nasare mase,
may your
supper be ended! =
1
take your supper at
my
house! the action being represented as finished
).
I)
Compare what
A.
REMUSAT
in
rflem.
de la
Gramm.
Chinoise
352 says concerning
tiao.
CHAPTER
VII.
ADVERBIAL FORM OF THE VERB.
107.
299
Simavas)i, u, causat., to
vaseyo, let
make
leave off...-- Watdkusini mddz&iute-sima-
me
first
have done speaking.

pass., to
Simavar)e, u, uru,
(finished) letter.
be finished.
Kaki-simavaretaru soo-kan, a written
107. The adverbial form of a verb, as characteristic of modal propositions,
Kke: as one thinks, as one says,
is
.a-siku,
slki,
.a-slkuva, =
.a-ku,
. .
a-kuva.
16, 2),
Of the
page 121
,
verbals derived by
means of
siki into
..like, treated at large in
some by changing
is
siku assume an adverbial character.
From
Omdvi, to think, to mean,

means. This
.
obtained Omovdslktt, - probably, as one thinks or

si is
is
the axiom. As nevertheless the

. .
oistku,
is
suppressed, for shortness,
a-siku passes into
d-ku; from Omovdsiku
formed Omovdku and with addition

is
of the isolating va, Omovdkttvd, = as one means. The same
good
of:
is
^
Iv}i, u, to say, to
be called; Sini ivaku (ffi^'
as
it
said in
the odes, according to the odes.
Nori-tamdv)i
(
or No-tamdv)i, M, to bid, enjoin,
command; Si no nori-tamaedku
-3^
^y
=
so
it
3L /%
^) =
>
according to the master's sentence , as the master says.
Negdv)i, M, to wish;
so,
Negawdkuba, sa-yoo yorom, =
as I wish,
it is
good
should be according to
my
wish.
F<fe)
t
as people say. Mqus)i, w, to say; Mausdku,
u,
now
F6u)i, u, to
desire;
Fosdku (gfc
V?),
as people desire, as people will.
have said. Iverij has said; Iverdkuva, as people

Ivikeri, has said; Ivikerasi, it is as if people
had said (compare

Sen-zi
18); 7ri-
keraku
(^^
it
Jfc$
^^),
as people have said.
(*jt
}*
^ *) "'
"*
rqkuva, as
has been said in a proclamation by the Mikado.
to fear; Osordktiva Osor)e, uru, old- Jap. also Osori,
(^
'*), as it is to
be feared, as I fear; a polite way of expressing doubt.
= as JVan, to be; Nardku (= Nardtiku),

substantive form,
see .
e.
it
is,
preceded by a verb in the

-
g.
Kiku-nardku, as one learns.
Miru-nardku,
people
-Utagavu-nardku , contracted C/ta^ptw-ntf*, Tvu-nardku, as people say.
probably.
Nardku
adv.
is
declared to be a contraction of
Mm
(to be)
and Kaku
(= Stkdku,
so,
compare
17)
')
and, while
it is
said that
Naraku must
41
verbs.
111.
v-
IR|
8F
&
?M yu
' i "*"
or Ki ^ Ul" Uou of lhe
51 v
300
be
expressed by g
CHAPTER
or
VII.
THE VERB MERI.

-A-
108.
ft
*t"
"*-
"f"
j|,
people write p|j
gft^ c
>^^>^|o
sisi,
W^
S&2
Remark. The derivative form s?H, elucidated in

si,
is
16, predicate
contracted
(
which in connection with
ari (to be) passes into ard-siki
and
ra-siki
18),
also joined to verbs to express
doubt
).
Consequently Keri (- has been,

is
82)
passes
into
Kerdsi,
it is "
it
is
as
if
it
had been; Ki-ni-keri (=
come,
84) into
is
Ki-ni-kerasi,
as if it
were come.
Akiva
ki-ni-keri
is
),
the
autumn
it
come.
if
Fdru
the
sugite
ndtsu ki-ni-kerasi*), the spring

(already) coming.
passing
away and
seems as
summer were
108. ,.,meri,
it is as if, it
seems, an old-Japanese
is)
derivative form,
4 ).
which,
as
it
is
said,
resembles Nari (=
but expresses some doubt
It
follows the indicative closing-form of a verb.
Yebisuno kamino koto yoni samazamani ivu-meri

of the
),
with respect to the history

it
God
Yebis',
people speak about
it
in the world, as
seems, in
diffe-
rent ways.
Tsigiri okisi
"
sasemoga tsuyuwo!
"
"
6
inotsi
).
nite
Avarel
kotosino
is
akimo inu-meri
Oh dew
autumn of
to
of the sprig, that
planted with promises! In
my
life,
Alas! the
this year, as it seems, passes
away (without seeing the promise made

(
me
performed).
be.
Inu, from In)i, u, uru, to go away
84), not a nega-
tive
form of J, to
As belonging
Akdnu-meri
(
to this category are cited: ?)

f$J
(
^g
)
,
it
seems to become day.

(
Nagdru-meri
it
0f
Fatdnu-meri
j||
-^ ),
it
is
as if
it
flows
away
as if
perishes.
This form
pret. pres. of
is
to
be distinguished from
TsuJ)6m-4ri , Nasdsim-dri, being the
Tsubdmi, to bud, and Nasdslme, to order to be made (see

shall
80),
as
also
from ..nameri or ..nanmeri,

100.
I.).
have been, Future Perfect, of Ni,
to be (see
1) Siikost utagavu kotoba nari.
Wagun-Siicori , under East.

3) Ibid.
2) Hiyaku-nin,
N.
47.
N.
2.
4 ) -f'J
5)
tyl~ 7
^*f $J%
tiy
^^
,
^
75.
-^^9-
Wagun-Siwori , under Keri.

7)
Nimaze. II. 16 recto.
6) Hiyaku-nin
N.
Wa-gun Simon.
CHAPTER
109. Nasi, Naki,
VII.
THE VERB NASI, NOT TO

in the ordinary
(see
9, II.
BE.
109.
301
Naku,
*
manner of speaking and writing,

page 112), Nai, Mai,
by the .suppression of the

pronounced
exist
as
and k
Nau
(-f!>,
Ng,o, whence the written form Woo,
No
and No), means not to
($), not
,
to be present, to be not at hand, in opposition to

to exist.
A r)t,
nat,
u (7ft
95),
general sketch in
20,
when
treating of the derivative adjectives in

it
has already made us acquainted with this word. Here

in further particulars, concerning which
all
requires to be elucidated
the dictionaries generally leave the
student in the lurch.

I.
The root Na, of which the sound n
is
the
negative element (compare
91, I), occurs,

1.
as
prefix,
like
our un, in compounds as: Na-yami, = unrest; No-koto,
nothingness;
Na-wi
(1 #), Na-i
(:M
),
= un-seat,
,
i.
e.
earthquake; JVa-mt, the

sironi tu
un-real, the nothing; whence Aru-fit6wo nami-su
= Nai-ga
(jJ)t
to
esteem any one as nothing.

2.
as the forbidding not, followed by an imperative, that closes with so.
Na-motom6so, seek not!

iviso,
it
Na-siso,
also
Na-sizo (^f ^$)

*),
do not!
\<t-
say not!
there.
Na-nakareso, -
Na-nakasso
let it is
not be wanting! =
must be
3.
In the spoken language na

is
suffixed to the substantive
form of an
affir-
mative verb
the forbidding not, Lat. ne.
Ageruna,
raise not!
Aruna, be not!
),
Kikuna
( fljj
^
is
hear not!
Suruna, do not!
Ageraruriina, let
it
Mint net,
luna (^
see not!
*?1r), say not!
not be raised!
not be read!
Yomaruruna,
let it
This imperative
not
see.
strengthened by the subsequent yo.

,
Afiru-nayo, you shall
Wasururu-nayo
you
shall
not forget.
4.
Ha
suffixed to the substantive
form of a verb, occurs as characteristic of a

ntiti
negative question.
Man gindewa
hydku
kakari nuitfn4? for (the delivery)
of ten thousand pounds are
not a hundred days needful?

is it
Rinimo
iro-iro ari-
masu BOO na?
there are also different sorts of miles,
not so? Shopping
Dialogues p. 31.
1)
Compare RODB. 56,
line
12.
302
II.
1.
CHAPTER
VII.
BE.
109.
Nasi,
Mai, predicate: there is not.

there
is
Ato
nasi,
no
trace.
Kizu
is
nasi,
there
is
no hurt.
Urami
is
nasi, there is
no
disgust.
it.
nasi, there
1
no meaning.
Yeki nasi, there
no advantage in
Zeniga
ariikd?
naiM? are
there cents or are there
not? = Is there money, or not?
En-rio nasini handsu koto, to speak without
forethought, not to care about what one says.

2.
To bring
it
out with emphasis, the subject of Nasi
is isolated,
either
by
va,
wa, or by mo, = also, even.
Fu-s6kuwa
nai, there is
no want. is
Fit6 kotomd nai,
there
is
not even a single
affair,
there
absolutely
nothing on hand.
3.
[..koto nasi.] If the subject, the existence of which

it
is
denied by Nasi,
is
a substantive proposition,
ndsu-koto nasi
(
is
characterized by koto, affair.

,
Priori korewo
$j$ ffi
it
= that a person does

Takava kureni
this alone , does
not exist
no one accomplishes
dzune yobu tokivu,
alone.
sorete, mioo-tsoo (ty$
^5)
â ~
fU6wo
mite, os6re tonde tsikddztiku koto nasi, if the falcon has

calls
flown away in the evening, and one seeks and
him the next morning, he

it
becomes shy at the sight of people,

that he approaches.
for
flies
around, and
does not happen (nasi),

off the period
,
Tsikddzftkti koto nasi
may
for
rounding
stand
nai),
Tsikadzukdnu
>
not approach.
oes
Sari todomaru koto nasi
(A ..kotoga
pE
ne
ne stays not. -- Sikareba kaikova suzusikini masi-
) taru kotova nasi, = that however the silkworm has grown in cool weather,
this does
not
exist.
kNdnno
kotomd nai
(^
is
lf), there
is
absolutely nothing
at hand.
A Nan no A
ii-bunm6 nai, there
nothing to say.
[..mono nasi]
there
is
A Korewo
y6ku-suru mono mo nai, a person

is
who can
(do) such,
trust.
not.
Tan6simi-suru monoga nai, there

nai, there
>iyuru
is
no one people may
A Meni
za-sen
atdru
monoga
nothing that comes under notice.

nasi, chiefly those (coins) are
Ohosiku
(^^
^HE)
to
mono
wanting which
(mono) seem to be counters or model coins.

[.
.
tok6ro nasi.] Ki-suru tokoro nasi

tokoro wa nai, there
is
( x
ififfi
V/-
it 9 \
)S)f 1*"IM Hlf 1/9
) '
there
is
no support. **
A Nokoru
ni
is
no more room, = every place

nai, there
is
is
taken.
&FUo
ill
waruu yuwaruru (- ivdruru) tokdrowd

spoken by others.
nothing, about which
I)
For ga,
see
page 64.
CHAPTER
4. If
VII.
BE.
109.
303
the definition that this or that is

it
wanting,
is
predicate to a precedent
subject,
is,
for the sake of clearness,
willingly isolated
by va,
A wa,
thus
separated from the predicate.

is
Iwaugasima
ftto nasi, the > brimstone island"

tsikdra ndsi, this
without people, has no inhabitants.

is
Kono yumivd
bow
is
without strength,
5.
powerless,
The
appositive definition,
what
a thing
is
not,
is
put in the Local, cha-
racterized
nai,
it is
by one of the terminations ni, de, ni wa or dewa.

not sagacity,
it is
it
A-Rt fat niwa

it
is
stupid.
--
Sono yauni nai,
is
it
not
is
so.
..wo yauni nai,
not so as...
nai,
it is
Kore fodoni nai,

-
not so
much. -nai,
is
it
A Waga mamardwo,
no nothingness,
business;
it
it
not capricious.
Na-kotodew*
koto
is
is
even of importance.
A Waga
wa
naika?
de nai t
it.
it
not
my
does not concern me; I have nothing to do with
Waga-tomode nai,
(or Sou)
it is
not we.
it is
A Sorewa
not
so.
it
sayaude
)jj: c
is it
not so?
ASau
dew&nai,
to
(^ $P
is
J^>* $&1?
it is
'*7 &)
t\Dokode m6 sou de nai

literally:
it
ivu kotowa nai,
nowhere
said, that it is
not so,
so.
-
does
nai,
not occur anywhere that people say that

it is
not
A .Saw dewa
one
ness of that nature.
may
it.
indeed look
A Sousita kotodew* nai, it is not a busiAMwwdewa nai (^ ^fC Jjfj, one may not overlook; to. A Iwanudewa, nai (^ W^' one mus 8Pea
not
so.
*'
about
6.
[..kunai] The
definition denied
by
A Nai,
1
in the easy
manner of
writing,
is
also precedes as an adverb. -tasty.
kKono
syok-mdts
umaku
nai,
that meat
not
Umaku
nai syok-mots, distasteful meat.

is
Remark. The predicate Nasi

also,
e.
in
compound words used

i.
as
an
attributive
g.
Na-nasi-yubi, the nameless (the fourth) finger,

is
e.
the finger, whose

*).
predicate definition: na-nasi

III.
1.
at the
same time
its
adhering attribute
Naki,
ANai (^
noun
i.
-f ,
vulg.
f
it
also),= ..less, the adjective form.
Used
as a
substantive,
e.
means: nothing, and answers to Naki"

exist.
-
mono and Naki-koto,
a thing or a matter that does not

-
NaJrini
suru, to consider as nothing, to cipher away.

siront suru
(j?jj|
Fitiwo naiga
(vulg.
\L$)
^),
to consider others of
no
value.
Kore wo nasumo y*r$i. e.
nakini ardzu, = &lso that people
make
done.
this, is
not a icause-lessneas,"
it
is
not without reason that this
is
1)
See Addenda
n. IV.
304
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VEEB NASI (NAKI, NAKu).
109.
2.
The
attributive
Naki,
Wai, = paltry, in the original signification of

not
present,
i.
not
existing.
-
Naki-fUo, a person not existing,
e.
de-
funct.
Naki-mono, vulgo Nai-mono, a thing not existing, a nothing.

kiku,
to
Aru fitono naki-kotowo

Naki-ato
3.
(
hear of one's not being (his being dead).
~t"
a trace effaced.
(= without, Lat. absque, sine) Naki,
As attributive adjective
is
A Nai
has the definition, what there
not,
as a genitive
before
it,
either with or
without tbe genitive termination no or ga.
Tsuiye-naki koto atavdzu, continuance
is
impossible,
= an end must come.

Tsikara-naki
- Tsikdra-naki yumi, a powerless bow, a bow without strength.

koto, power-less-uess.
-- Ato-naki nari,
is
it
is
a thing without trace

it.
it
has dis-
appeared, = Ato nasi, there

it is
no
trace of
-- Kiwamarino naki koto nari,

koto nari, it is a matter
,
a matter without limitation.

- -
Kiwamarino aru
oki-dokoro
that has limitation.
A Mi no
no nai mono
a person without a
place in which he can settle, a wretch.

is
Tsigaino nai
yauniwa naranu,
it
not of that nature that there should be no difference.
A Fei-sei
no kok6ro-
gakega, nai,
without a
life's
exertion or care. --
Tanomini sum monoga, nai,

t^Kokdroni monoga
disfavor.
is
without anything or anybody in which one has support.

nai, having
"Remark.
no
evil in the heart,
= Urami naki, without

is
To ga nai
of the last three examples, what
said at
page 64 respecting ga
applicable.
IV. The adverbial form

k in the easy
is
Naku
(*f^), = without, by the dropping of the

~f~
manner
of writing passes to
2?
Nau
for
for
,
which
~Y
7 Navu also
,
written
sounding in pronunciation as Ngru been written. See

9. II.
all.
Ng,o ,
which noo , no or no
have
chiefly
Nani-to naku
idzu to naku
- without
anything whatever, = nothing at

1
.
The form Naku
is
used
9.
as if it
2.
- -
were the uninflected verbal root in coor,
dinate propositions. See
B.
Kake-mo naku, amari-mo
nasi,
there
is
nothing too
2.
-
little,
nothing too much.
^ -^
- -
-fc
^.
to roll
Among
Poets
Naku
-
supersedes the termination ..nu of the negative verb.
Ave-naku, = Avdnu, not to dare.

106).
3.
Maka-naku, - Makanu, not

to think. See
92. 4.
up
Omova-naku,
Omovdnu, not
the
Nakuva, A Nakuwa,
adverbial
form isolated by va,
loa, is
used
as predicate verb in adverbial propositions, with the

is
meaning ofasorifthere
t6ru-b6si,
not, failing
of.
Iki-taru kizi
nakuva,
si-taru kiziwd
failing
of a living pheasant, one
may
take a dead one (to feed the falcon).
CHAPTER VH. THE VERB NASI (NAKI, NAKu).

4.
109.
305
Nakunba, Nakumba. The

by
ra,
local
Nakunba
contracted from Nakuni, and

if
isolated
means in case of not existing,
there
is
not.
if
Mddzuone, being
dk&Xtt fetsurdvu koto naku, tonde ogoru koto naktunba,

poor,
is
tfcan?
without flattery, and being rich,

it?)
is
without pride,
how then? (what do
you think of
Compare BODE.
56.
is
This Local form
may
even close a rappositive proposition, but
therefore no
modus
conditionalis.
B
SY
f-
^^7 5Cv
-^C^
/-szyo&'wo
^
?
/N
*
HJv
5^:f
,;
J^-^ S
mitsiva an-min dai ittino keo nardba,
nitsimo
nakunba aru bekarazu,
as clothing
/%
3^
^
*
anc^ Ceding are the principal acts

-^
towards the
fail for
.Y
welfare of a people, they
may
never
a day.
5.
Nakutewa, = Naotewa,
contracted from Ndkusttdwa. See below
V,
1, NdkAsi.
6.
Naku to mo = Naku to iedom6

,
or
Naku to
= even
if
iu to
mo
though
not.
it is
said that
there
is
not, granted that there
is
not,
there
is
V. VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH Naku.
As such come under

and NdkU-ndri.
1.
notice: Ndku-si, Ndku-se, Nakdri^
Nakard&me, Nateri
Explanation.
Naku-s)i, u, uru, not to be, to be

to do (see
wanting, a
coupling of
Naku and
si,
103. III. 3), antithesis to Ar)i, u, to be present.
The spoken
language, which makes from Naku-si, Ngu-si, (lr?r ^), N$o-si, changes the gerund
Ndku-site, by syncope into Naute, Noote, and Ndkti-stteva into
Ngutewa, Nooto
wa
),
= by or through want
of, or: as there is not.

yurtisi
Examples:
ni-ordsu-bekardzu
*),
Ya-tsiuva
Nippon ydku-sioyori
naku-slto,
at
night, without permission of the Japanese officers, no goods

-
may
be unloaded.
officers
Nippon ydkH-nin
tatsi-avi
ndk&sttd
),
without there being Japanese
present.
Zin-sinno rei siru-koto arazdru-koto ndku-titte (or nau-sfte), gfkdu-sltj

ri
Ten-kano mono
is
arazdru koto nasi
),
the spiritual part of the
human
heart
not without knowledge, and so also are the things on earth not without
laws.
natural
(the
Kotoba
ndkft-slte
-
kaheri-tamavu
without
(saying)
word
king)
goes
away
again.
kdnawdnu, without money no
A Kane go, nau-tfte (or Kanega nakvtewa) success. - - A *Anohttotod ori-ori kami-irewo ndr*
-
1)
In RODHIGUFZ
al.
lem. p. 55 line 3 below,
Nbwctawa should stand
instead of
Nbttw* ,
our Vaoiewa.
2) Art. II.
3 of the Regulations by which the trade in Japan shall be carried on, belonging to the
Treaty of 1859.
3) Franco-Japanese Treaty of 1838, Art. VIII,
al.
4.
4) Dai Gain, V.
2.
80
306
CHAPTER
VII.
NAKU-SE, NAKARI, NAKERI, NAKU-NARI.

lie
109.
kusft (or nakusare-masti)
is
always losing (read wanting) his pocket-book".
Nakii-s)e, uru,
despise.
N|o-se (^">7^), contracted from Ndku-s^m)e, u, uru, = to
A
2.
Fitdwo nantomo noosuru
(^^X
n/)
mono, = a person, who does not respect
others for anything,
who
respects others for nothing.
Nakar)i, u, continuative, not present, a fusion of

92. 4.
Naku and<m,
follows
the inflection of Ari. See

boundless.
Urdstsa kagiri nakari keri, the joy has been
Kono
zeni, men-kiyo nakarisiga utsinite,

this
faya
iritaru
mono imano
yoni nawo nokoreri, of
coin there are
now
still
several copies (mono) reoff.
maining, which, while there was no permission, were prematurely struck
As
a form of the forbidding Imperative,

93. 2.
Nakdre comes
particularly under
tintirdni
notice. See
Tsiu-ziyo mitsiwo sdru koto
tdokardzu. Korewo
-ffSL
"fetff**
~J& M* i^^T* Zt JWL a

?
o
O
i/'T*
fodokdsite
negavazunbd.
whoever
is
fxtdni fodok6su koto
>Kxb
o
ift^ A&
'
nakdre.
honorable
and
kind,
^** ^â ^,$ /

-Jt-^
If
t-
^[=f never deviates far from the way (from the

ixAî T
*7
AH =
y >pl TT 1-^ X-J
r.^:
\s
T&
^.^ n'
moral law). If a person does not wish that

(this or that)
/
be applied to him, he
may
3.
not
ti
apply
it
to others!
Tschung-yung. XIII.
The Chinese word
f^|, tsu,
is
to be considered as a contraction of
~jfe tsi-yu,
- towards, and may here not be translated by

Derived from Nakdri
not,
i.
is
Nakarasim)e
See
u, uru, = to command that there be
e.
forbid.
88.
Kuvanokiwo
kiru-koto ndkardsimu,
- order
*iv
is
given that the chopping of the mulberry-trees do not

it
is
happen =
,
forbidden to chop the mulberry-trees.

inflection of. .eri, esi
3.
(
Nakeri, Pret. pres. there has not been, follows the

92. 4).
80.
Nivakdni fusegu-beki yqumo nakereba,
Kavatsiye nige-yuku, as
in the hurry there was no opportunity for defence, they fled towards Kavatsi.
Remark. The spoken language of Yedo seems to use Nakdreba for Nakdreba, thence
s>Siv6- (si6-)
kega nakereba (or nakutewd) adziwaiganai,
it is
not good without
salt".
4.
Naku-nar)i, u,
Nao-nari, Noo-nari, to become nothing, to come to

100. III.
nothing, to be consumed. See
(^
become powerless. become powerless.

sumed.
Tsikdra ndku-narite iru,
^ -
^).
Tsikdra naku-naru, to
Tsikdra nao ndtte iru, to have

is
Sakeva ndku-nartta,
Sakewa nqo-natta, the wine
con-
Urevino yumdga naku-nanta, the unpleasant dream has disappeared.
Aritaru mono no ndku-naritaru koto, the plerishing of a tjiing, that has existed.
CHAPTEE
VII.
THE VERB NASI (NAKI, NAKu).
100.
307
SYNOPSIS OF THE INFLECTIONAL FOEMS AND DEEIVATIVES OF NA)SI, KI, KU,
NOT TO
BE.
308
CHAPTER
VII.
THE VERB
JiASI
(NAKI, NAKU).
109.
Continuative.
Present.
Pret. pres.
Preterit.
Root-form
Nakari.
Nakari tari,
Nakari-si
Nakeri,
keri,
A
there
Nai-
Nakarita, Nakatta,
was
t#
,
Nakari-keri
Closing- form
.
there
Nakari, there
is not.
has not been.
Nakari-ki, there Nakeri, there was

has not been.
not.
Substant. form
Nakaru.
Nakaritaru,
Nakari-si.
Nakesi.
Nakaru wa.
Attributive.
.
.
A Nakattato
Nakaritaruni
oltewa.
Nakari-si nari.
Nakari-si.
Nakaru.
Nakesi, Nakeru.
Local, definitive of time.
Nakaru ni. Nakaru ni
Nakari-si ni.
Nakeru ni.
A Nakari tani, A Nakattanu
Gerund
Nakarite
Nakatte.
Causal form
Nakareba.
A Nakattareba.
A Nakattaredomo.
Nakereba,
there
as
not.
was
Concessive
Nakaredomo.
Nakeredomo,
though
it
Nakarutomo.
was not.
Nakeru to mo.
FUTURE.
Nakar)an, ame,
A Nakarao
(Nakaroo, Nakaro).
Nakaran
z)u, uru,
,
A Nakaro z)u
Conditional
. .
uru.
Nakaraba.
IMPERATIVE.
Nakare.
Optative
Nakare
kasi.
Nakare gana.
CHAPTER
VII.
COMPOUND VERBS.
NEGATIVE.
110.
309
Nakaranu,
it
must be
there.
Nakerananarami,
p]"
^,
it
it
must have
been.
Nakini arazu, Nakinarazu,
is
not without...
Na
nakasso,
it
may
not be wanting.
REMARKS ON THE COMPOUND VERBS,

110.
The subordinate
definition,
which precedes a verb with which
it is
compounded, may
1.
be a substantive or a verb.
The
substantive
may be
its
object direct, or indirect. See
3. II. 1
and
2.
It is the object direct in
Ama-govi, Tsi-govi, to long for rain,
for milk; it is
the object indirect in Ama-kudari, descending from the sky.

II. 1.
The verb, preceding another verb

its
as
subordinate
qualifying definition,
remains in
object.
root-form.
The
chief
word of the compound governs the accidental

i-kordsi,
Kor6s)i, u, to
kill;
Fitdwo
utsi-kordsi,
sdsi-kordsi
to shoot
person dead, to strike dead, to stab dead.
To
the qualifying definitions belong verbs like Os)i, u, ffl
to press, to
do with emphasis; Osi-yar)i, u, throw away; Osi-ir)i, w, to intrude.

Uts)i, u,
~ffi%, to strike, with a blow, or suddenly; iitsi-or)i, tru, to pounce,
(
as a bird of prey Sasi,
99.
I.
n.
11); Sirowo utsi-i)de, dzuru, to
make a
sally.
^tf^, send away; Ok)i, u, place; Sasi-oki, set aside, put away; Fttowo
,
sasi-tsukavas)i
w, to dispatch
,,
any one.
which takes place
Mes)i, u,
invite, call up, qualifies the action as one
by higher command;
fit6wo tsukavasi,
has
Mesi-tor)i, u, to take
.
by order, to
,
arrest a person;
M ..ye
.
.
100
mesi-kavesi-tamavu
(the prince) sends people to
and
brought back.
>|{Ji>
Avi, Ai,
together,
Lat. con; Ai-katar)i, M, speak together; Ai-gutu,
consult together.
2.
The
definition of the particular

(as in flying
direction of an action incorporated

,
in a
compound verb
upwards or downwards)
is
not expressed in Japa-
nese, as in other languages, by a prefix or a preposition, but as the principal
part of the expression, by a verb, that
is
preceded by the mention of the action
as a subordinate definition. Leaving the indication of such

dictionaries,
compound verbs
to the
we
_
here confine ourselves, for the sake of brevity, to a few examples.

.,
Ag)e, uru,
trans., expresses the
moving upwards, Sag)o, uru,
310
the
CHAPTER
VII.
COMPOUND VERBS.
110.
movement downwards.
Tori-age, to take up, to raise.

Fiki-age, to
Sasi-age, Sasdge, to
present.
Motsi-age, to bring up.
draw up.
Mqusi-age, to men-
tion (a thing to a superior).

gari, contin., intr.
Fiki-sage, or Fiki-or6si, to
draw down.
Agari, Sa-
Tobi-agar)i, u, to fly upwards.
Tobi-sagari, u, to fly
downwards.
Fase-nob6ri,
Nob6r)i, u, to go upwards, Kudar)i, u, to go downwards.

to
run upwards.
Ir)i,
Nagare-kudari, to flow downwards.

to
u,
^7^,
go into, Ide, Idzuru,
{Jj
^, to come out.
Osi-iru, in-
trude.
Faye-iru, to grow inwards.

Ir)e, uru,
Otsi-iru, to fall into ...
Faye-idzuru,
Idas)!,
to sprout out.
trans.; Ot6si-ire, to
make a thing
fall in..
u,
causat.
Tori-idas)i, u, to take out of.
Koni)i, u,
mas)i, u, to
yA,?,
intr.,
to
go inwards. Kom)e, uru,
tr.,
to bring in.
Ko-
make go inwards.
to swallow.
Fino teri-komu, the shining in of the sun.
Nomi-komu,
TTtsus)i,
Kugiwo (Kusabiwo)
utsi-komu, to drive in a nail.
u, ^j?%
to remove.
Fakobi-utsusu , to transport.
Kaki-utsusu,
to write over again, to copy.
Kaher)!, u,
kaheru, to
fly
{j||;>,
to turn back,- Kahes)i, u, to
make turn
back.
Tobi-
back.
Tori-kayesu, to take back.

to
Mav)i, u,
||E,
move
in a circle.
Mi-mavi, to look around.
Mavar)!, u, continually to go round.

Mavas)i, u, to make go round.
Tori-mavasu, to turn round.
Tsuk)i, u,
Nagare-mavaru
to flow round.
Fiki-mavasu, to draw a thing round-about.
^^,
,
intr.,
= on,
to.
Kisini tsuku, to come ashore. --
Fune
ga okani nagare-tsuku
Tovor)!, u,
the ship drifts ashore.
A A
To6r)i, u,
|^*,
)
to
go through, to
fire.
pass.
Fino nakawo
to-
voru, to go through the midst of the
Nagare-tovoru, to flow through.

Ovi-to6su, to drive through.
Tovos)!, u,
To6s)i, u, to
make go through,
'
Ovi-to dsaretaru , driven through.
Matowo
to
i-to6su, to shoot
through a target.
Watar)i, u,
watdri,
to
cross
$^#,
to
pass,
go from one
side to the other.
Kavawo
river.
a river.
Kavawo
katsi-watdri, to
wade through a
Tobi-watari, to fly over.
Watas)i, u, to make pass over, to carry over.

to transport people to the office.
Tsir)i, u,
Yaku-soye fitowo fiki-watdsu,
^t),
intr., to
spread, scatter; Tsiras)i,u, caus., spread, scatter.

all sides.
Fou-bouye
nige-tsiru,
they fled to
Tobi-tsiru, to spatter abroad.
Ovi-tsirasu, to scatter.
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OP COURTESY.
111.
311
APPENDIX.
DISTINCTIVE VERBS
AND VERBAL FORMS EXPRESSIVE OF COURTESY.
111. Courtesy in language and writing
is,
in Japan, not confined to the
priveleged classes of society; cast ages ago in distinct forms and,
we may
add,
stamped by the law,
it
has penetrated to the lowest grades of society and spread

is
over social intercourse a gloss of reciprocal respect, which
indeed not to be
found among any other people on the globe.

Besides,
courtesy in language and writing
is
not the consequence of recent
development: even the oldest Japanese historical book, the Yamdto-bumi of the
eighth century
(see
page 36)
is
characterized
by a courteousness of expression
which, the not unfrequent insignificance of the contents considered, cannot be

acquitted of extravagance.
So long as courtesy governs the oral and written intercourse of a people, the
appreciation of
its
forms belongs to the study of the language, and since
we
have treated
tion
it
in the chapter on the Pronouns,

also with
we
are obliged to
fix
the attenits
on the verbs and verbal forms
which courtesy gives gloss to
language.
The
1.
chief features of the Japanese courtesy are:

polite
The
speaker distinguishes the conditions and actions of persons

^*-
beyond him by the honorary prefix $Pvo* ^n or 0- S66 P*^6 2. He does not say or require, that another person, whom he
himself, should do
places above
any thing himself, but says or requires only, that the action
really
be done,
i.
e.
he places the passive form as predicate to the subject, that
performs the action.

3.
He
considers not only persons of higher station, but even his
own
equals
as being in a higher position,
and with the actions of others connects the idea

gives that of ascent.
of descent, whereas to his

4.
own he
He
is
in proportion as he scrupulous in the choice of synonimous verbs,

less exalted style.
wishes to express the same idea in a more or

teach him to distinguish the degrees.
Letter-writers
312
112.
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
112.
To
satisfy the
demand, which represents the person beyond the speaker
not as acting himself and thus as not immediately coming in contact with persons of lower station, the active form of the predicate verb
said, simply superseded
liarity
is,
as
it is
has been
the pecu-
by the passive form, without
and here
of the expression,
introducing any modification in the construction

90. 2).
1
of the original active proposition (compare
Examples:
Karuno Oho-kimiwo
mavu)
,
dai-sini sadameraru
(instead of saddmu, or sadame-taprince.
(the emperor) declares the Great-prince
Karuno hereditary
-
Zin-mu
nitdruwo
Ten-wau arutoki takaki okani nobdmte, kono kunino
katatsi akitsumusini
mile, fazime'te Akitsu-simato nadzukeraru (instead of nadzuku),
Emperor Zin-mu,
once climbing a height, seeing that this country (Japan) resembles the light-insect
(the dragon-fly)
,
first
gave
it
the
name
of Light-island.
L. va
M.
ni
N. no
kwanwo
the
sadzukeraresi (instead of sadzukesi) to ari, people say, that L. has given
office
of an N. to
M.
Naniwo
iwasare-mastta ka? what have you said?
Iwasare from Iwasi, make say, and this from Ivi, to say.
Much
in use are the honorary passive forms:
1.
Serare, 2. Saserare, 3.
Na-
sare, Nasare-mas)i, u, 4. Nasaserare, 5. Arasare,

serare.
1.
6.
Irare, 7. Irasare, 8. Ira-
Explanation:
Serar)e, uru, pass, of S)e, uru, to do, to
2
effect.
Yamato-Take sibaraku
tou-riu-seraru
(instead of tou-riu-su)
(
Yamato-Take
fj|p
stays there
some time.
Kei-ko Ten-wau Siganite fou-gyogyo-si tamavu)

,
*
Jj$
3) seraru (instead of fou-gyo-su or fou-
Emperor Kei-ko
- -
dies at Siga.
N. no Oho-kimi
N. wo
If,
kau-zi(
seraru , seraru
3
Great-prince N. dies.
)
,
M. wo
,
kiri-korosi ,
ru-zai-
^ j^
^g >& )
^fp ^ )
se's'i-
(the king) sabres

it
M. down
and banishes N.
instead of seraru ,
to kill
me'rdru, were used,

2.
would mean, that the king gives order
and to banish.
Saserar)e, uru,
it it
is
effected that
one does; from Sas)e, uru, to make
do.
The
action runs, as
were, over three wheels, by which a person of high

Go-beo (jifp^
station
causes an inferior to have a thing done.

ken-zi-saseraru (or ken-zi-sase-tamavu)
,
JH^)
ni
may u wo
the prince has cocoons offered in
the ancestral temple.

3.
Nasar)e, uru,
(see
^^ J^^
100).
^ e done, from Nasi, make
exist,
and
thia
from Ni, to be
Naniwo nasaruka? what
does your honor?
1)
Nippon o-dai
itsi-ran.
II.
8 verso.
2) Ibid.
3) Ibid. II. 6 verso.
CHAPTER VH. VERBS OF COURTESY.
112.
313
in
the familiar style of speaking and writing as an auxiliary verb grafted on

it
the root of another verb,
makes known, that the action which
is
done, pro-
ceeds from the person spoken to, or even merely from another person than the
speaker.
Examples from the spoken language:

tsuke"
Say'oo nard,
nasare!
ndsare!
if it is so,
give
it
me!
- -
Kosikakeni
kake
sit
may Your
Korewo
sitting
kasi-
on a chair happen, = take a
seat.
kake nasare,
down.
(0
tsukd) nasare, lend (give)

- -
me
this.
Korewo Goydtumiu&\
ran nasare, please look at
this.
Yoku
rest!
ydsumi
notare"!
vulgo
may Your good

do
rest
happen! = good
Dokorit
stimai
nasartka? where
You
live?
it
kai nasaretemo,
yanie nasaretemo, kono Xy&oa deki-masenH ,
you may buy
or not, there ends the matter.

if
Nokorazu
kai ndsarH nard,
yasulm-siU age-masoo,
you buy the whole stock,
I will sell it cheap.
Roo
wo
kai-nasardnuka? dont you buy wax?
Nasare-mas)i, u, the same as Nasare, only more round-about, vulgo Natari-
masu
also (see
101).
Naniwo
,
nasare (vulg. nasari)-masuf what are you

it.
doing?
Go
an-sin nasare-mase
depend on
Watakusino mausu kotowa

I
wakari nasare-masuka? do you understand what ka? will you do so?
say?
Sa-yquni nasare-ma**
kamai nasare-masu na! take no pains! -- S%k6simo

it. f\'"i<
kamai nasare-mastina, don't trouble yourself about; don't care for

mitsiwo
are
ide nasare-mase,
go
this
way.
Idzureye
ide nasarc-nuu&f whither
you going?
Idzure yori
Ide nasare-masttaf
whence do you come?
Douzo
4.
fairi nasare-mase, if
you please, walk

t
,
in.
is
Nasaserar)e, uru,
|^ %, ^jlb* J^
effect
care
taken that a thing
is
done
or made; the passive of Nasase, have made, and this the causative form of
to
AW,
make. The action or the

5.
here runs over four wheels.
Arasar)e, uru, pass, of Arasi, to have be, and this from Ari, to be.
Dorega
like?
sukide arasare-masii ka? what
is
there of your desire?
what do
you
Araserar)e, uru, vulgo for Iraserare.
ko-aama \kagadt. ara*frare-ma**i

is
how
is
your son?
Sotite
okHsamawa Vkagade araerare-ma*u? and how
your lady?
6. Irar)e,
uru, to be placed in the condition of dwelling, paw. of /, Iru
(JSi)
7.
to dwell, be
somewhere, stay
(see
98).
Anata traruru toMrowo eon-
zi-masdnu, I do not
know your
dwelling-place.
Irasar)e, uru, pass, oflrdsi,
make
dwell, thus to be placed in the condition
814
of
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY*
112, 113.
making dwell, =
stay
to be (somewhere).
little
Mo
sukosi irasare-mase (low language
irasai masi),
longer.
Yoku
irasare-mastta ,
you are well placed,
= you are welcome.

you been
this
Sate, fisabisa ikagade irasare masu,
come on, how have
long time.
Ikagade
irasare-
(vulgo irasai-) masu?
how do
you do?
8.
Iraserar)e, uru, to be placed in the state of dwelling,
to be.
Go
ka-nai
samawa ikagade
fen( *J^, i
iraserare (vulg. irassai)

,
masu? how are your family?

be near the
fire
A Kuwa
fire).
jjs^) ni iraserare-mase
(
(come near the
Itsi bet
rai
-^
J^|)
J^jJ^
^^)
ikagade iraserare-mastta? since our
last separation,
how have you been?

00 %" % Tamai, Tam)au, oo, JMa^ ^ !5nr H /
to a higher sphere.
,
113.
I.
Tama)vi, vu,
&f^ *tj 9
to bestow,
grant, give, when the giver belongs

nese themselves reduce this word to
Although the Japa,
Tama
-R ^
= jewel
5
we
take
it
for a
compound of the
old Tabi,
J
- to give, and Avi,

literally: to confer
'JEj*u
to meet. Thence;
Mono
wo motte fitdni tamavu
),
something on a person.
îfcp
^fl^Sv = ^^^
comes to
his
Rokuwo
so-sinni tamavu, (the king Zin-mu) grants in-
servants.
,
As an
auxiliary verb grafted on the root of another verb
it
characterizes the
It is
action as proceeding from a
higher person, whether
divine or princely.
expressed by j$j^ and phonetically by

or
fo
Jff,
answers somewhat to the

is
please"
have the goodness" used by courtesy, German geruhen,
however, at least
in tales, rightly left out
by the
translator.
Examples
Tedzukara kuvdwo
leaves with her
torite
ko-gaviwo si-tamavu, (the princess) plucks mulberry

feeds silkworms.
own hand, and
Sono
notsi
Tauyori takawo
ken-ze sikdba, Mi-kariwo moyovasare, sô-teowo tordsime-tamavu,
when
afterwards
falcons has been brought as presents from China, (the Japanese prince) caused
hawking
to
come more into fashion; and had

Tor)i, u, to take.
all birds
caught.
Mayov)i, u, to
naru, N.
,
.
come
into fashion.
JV.. tatsimatsi mtindsiku
dies
suddenly.
Iku-fodomo ndkU kano feme" m&ndsiku nardse-tamavu

dies.
immediately
after, that lady (a princess)
1) Nippon-ki.
2)
Nippon o-dai
itsi-rdn.
CHAPTER
vil.
VERBS OP COURTESY.
113.
315
fodo-ndktt fou-kivo
is
%>
K
-f
jL x
&, >3
rt
tt 7 JP-V
Kun-tsiu
.
nite
mi mi wadzuravankwrttd
(the
/*t
rhf *
M
>7
T -
si-tamavui),
.
prince), while he
with the army,
is
taken unwell and dies shortly
after.
*t~ _
Old writers hare To6)t, w, = to give, instead of
Tamavi
verned
a ).
also; thence:
Osame-tabin
toki,
= when N.. go-
For further examples

from the top.
II.
see
page 230
p.
line 11
1.
from the bottom.
p.
239
1.
p.
274
1.
20.
290
9 from the bottom.
Tamavar)i, u,
Tamauri, Tamor)i, u, the continuative form of Tamavi,
which however supplies the place of the passive form Tamavare, = to be granted,
not in use (compare Nari as substitute for Nare,
also as
100. HI), and, like Tamari,
an auxiliary,
is
joined to the root, or to the gerund of a verb.

Jj^z
Kore Tenno tamavdru wan,

ven.
J^j"
ifL
'
^^
it
**
a P*68611 * from Hea-
Ko-zi-kini Izanagino mikoto yori Amaterasu Ohon kamive

tamavarisi koto
mi kubi-tama
wo
wo
iveri, in
the book of antiquity
is
mentioned , that by
(the god) Izanagi a necklace

mestte go ini dziyo-
was presented
to the goddess of the sun.
Kore wo
(3L
him
:'*
tfc= ^5t1T) serare^ ...no nawotamavari, (the king)
inviting
him
raises
to the fifth rank
and confers on him the name of
. .
Nuno
fonwo
san-bydku-tan
...
wo Hdku-sai kok-wau
NN.
ni tamavari
(j|f|)*
ya zyu-man
silk to
ni tamavu, (the Jap. prince) gives three
hundred pieces of
NN.,
a hundred thousand arrows. king of Petsi, and presents (his minister)
TTke-tamavar)i, u,
Uke-tamdri
(^ ^),
3*
JJ'*'
to
have the honor to receive

*)
-Tsiy6k&wo uke-tamavari (from a superior), or to hear.

the king's orders.
I have
to receive (^jffc jfif ),
A
I
(
Go
i-ken (^JJ
-St) wo
uk-tomvatta or tamotta,
to
had the honor
to receive
your advice.
Sak*-ya yukiga fori-nuuHto

it
uke-tamavari-mastta,
have had the honor to hear, that
has snowed during

I
the night.
Go
sa-u
^
$]J
^* ^
^) uke-tamavari-tdkti zoixi-tnd**,
wish to
have the honor to hear, how you do.

mavari-keri,
Ka-roo (jj
^?)
ftnJtoo idasite to-
we
the honor, that the secretary (of (skippers are speaking) enjoy
the governor) has our ships cleared.
Muizuwo nomateU
tamor*,
= have
the
goodness to
let
me
drink fresh water.
1)
Nippon o-dai tin-ran,
I,
I.
10.
8)
**-g** Siwori, under
3)
16.
316
114.
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
114.
By
Matsur)i,
the speaker expresses the most
profound respect
As
conti-
for the object,
be
it
a person or a thing,
that he speaks of or to.
nuative form of Matsi

jf|[
jfllfi)
(^jf^),
= to wait (compare page 218), Mdtsuri

to
(^f
re-
means
continual waiting, solemn attendance,

mdtsitri,
show
spectful
tstiri,
homage. Thence Ten wo

mdtsuri,
Tsiwo mdtsuri,
to heaven,
/JitJ"f
~^tiî
ênwo ma~
Kami wo
people do
homage
to earth, to ancestors,
itself. it
to
Kamis," by celebrating
feasts to their
honor, Mdtsuri, being the feast
As
qualifying auxiliary joined to the root of a verb, Mdtsuri unites with
the idea of reverential homage.

koto atavdzu , serving
One
is
says: Futdrino kimini tsitkavuru
(A
is
tsukoru)
two masters
tsukavu
(
impracticable.
More
J
respect
to
shown by
prince
the expression
Kimi ni
tsuko)
mdtsuru koto
serve
my
with respect.
2
z. ~
Zo-teini tsuko-mdtsttru, to serve the Most

).
_4s* "
High
reverentially
When
tomo tsukamatsuri-masoo
take leave of you,
,
the
excessively
polite
speaker says to his equals:
I will
accompany you, or
itoma tsukamatsuri-mdsU
we may put down such
politeness to his
own
account.
The
rule requires Tstikai- or Tsukae-mdtsuri, yet this, for ease in pronunciation, passes
into Tsuko-
(?%?)
^pj;
or Tsukd-mdtsuri. Tsukd-matsttri soro

,
\JL
vh)'
,
Tate-matsiiri ,
right.
to
offer
respectfully and solemnly
from Tate
set
up-
Kono
toki ama-bito
fardkano uwowo Ten-ioauni tate-matsuri
si
koto cm'
), it
appears that, then, the divers solemnly presented a redbellied fish to the
peror.
Em-
Deva-kuniyori kavikowo kavu mono wo tate-matsuru
4 )
,
from the country

(to the emperor).
of
Deva persons, who breed silkworms, are solemnly presented

Tsusima yori sirokane wo tate-mdtsuru
5
from the island of Tsusima
silver is
presented (to the emperor).
ffakftsaino tate-matsureru te-f$t6, artificers,
whom
Hakusai had presented

Tate-matsuri
is
(to the
king of Japan).
as a qualifying auxiliary, to
joined to the root of a verb,
characterize the action as respectful, solemn.
Onna
besi
e
OTl
^^)wo Yamato
I
Take no Mikototo mausi-tatematsuru

call
your name
must
respectfully
( tp ^ ^si ^.^^^ Yamato Take no Mikoto (compare
1)
Tschung-yung XIII.
dai.
r.
I.
2) Ibid. XlX.
21
V,
2) Yamato nen 5) Ibid. II. 29
4) Ibid. III.
r.
6) Ibid.
I.
22.
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
115.
317
1
p.
228
line 8).
Ten-wquwo umdni
tasuke-nose-tote-mdteuri, Kavatsive nige-yuku
),
they respectfully help the emperor to mount a horse and escape to Kavatsi.
It is in earnest,
not in irony,
when
the historian says:

a )
,
Makowano
nriko uka-
gavi
kitdrite
Ten-wquwo
kills
kor6si-tate-mdtsiiru
prince
Makowa,
steals
in and
respectfully
the emperor.
Tate-matsurar)e , uru, the honorary passive, honoring, in the eye of the

speaker
,
also
him who
respectfully offers or presents. If in the preceding

,
example
tate-mdtsurdrtt
were used, instead of tate-mdtvuru
the speaker would
show
his
respect towards the murderer.
The
ticular
states
and occupations
to the qualification of
which courtesy pays par-
attention,
and the expressions of which, to be properly appreciated,

also,
5.
must be understood
are: 1.
Being, existence;
6.
2.
Doing;
3.
Seeing,
Showing;
4.
Saying;
Giving;
Going
and Coming.
Explanation:
115. BEING.
1.
The spoken language, which

it
leaves the use of JVari, to be, to the book(
language, instead of
3.
6.
uses 1.
Mad
101);
2.
Ari
96);
Ari-man
101);
102);
On, Ori-masi
Fanberi and
6.
7.
97); 4. Gozari, Gozari-masi (p. 263 /2m.); 5. Soro
Moosi.
Fanber)i, u, Pamber)i, u,
â^JJ
'^9,
it
of old
is
^^9,
means wait
upon
style
(^
by
pa
),
stay or be
somewhere (Ê),
expressed in the epistolary
(wait upon), and declared as equivalent to Somurovi,
Swot
102).
A. B. sa-uni fanberite
(*
~fa*
ffi'%
?)
mdtsHri-kotowo tori-okondvu, (the
and left (of the sovereign), carry Ministers) A. and B. taking the places right
on the
affairs of
government.
Yumiva Zin-dai
yori fanberi, the

line
bow has
existed
from the time of the gods. Compare page 230

7.
3 from the bottom.

respectful ; 2.
u, Maus)i, O
Moosi,
f.? ^* S ^ |.f, *s
word
is
is
1-
to
show oneself
^,to
its
mention. The
way
in which this
used, requires the distinction of

it,
two
significations, although
no attention
)
paid to
by the Japanese, who use but
one Chinese sign
for both.
In the former
verb also,
it
signification,
as
definitive or as defined part of
a compound
is
qualifies
the action as
submissive, respectful: AfytMt-wfe
to receive respectfully;
show oneself submissive. The Uke-mqusi on receiving to
1)
Nippon o-dai
iisi-ra*.
2) Ibid.
318
root
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
116, 116.
Man
seems to be the same as occurs in Mqu-k)i, uru

(
(^
^|
l|IJ)i
)
,
to
come
to
court in solemn procession , Mesi-mguko- (not ka) simu
^J
to send for a
person to court, and in Mairi, to

think that this Mausi,
Matt?'
(
make a solemn
entry.
Japanese philologers
placed after the root of
a verb, frequently passes into
101)
).
Yamdto Takeno Mikoto

kuni made yuki-tamqvu
2
Ise Dai-zin-Guu yori fou-kenwo mausi-ukete,
Surugdno
),
prince
Yamato Take
receives
respectfully from the
temple of the Great Spirit at Ise the precious sword and departs to the country
of Suruga.
Kaki-tome-mqusu bekiya
( ^jf>
^
,
llj"
Ep
if I shall
it
take a note
so,
of it?
respectful
Sa-yqu naraba
leave of you;
wakare moosi- (= masi) masu, as

the
is
I take
ordinary expression for our: Farewell!
Oriwo
motte
On
tsikadzukini nari-mousi-taku-zon-zite
tada ima-made yen-in mqusi soro,
wishing for an opportunity humbly to come in contact with you, I have only
delayed
of
it till
now.
speak.
is
fandsi-mousi-soro fit6
wo mi-mousi
soro , I see the
man
whom you
116. DOING
1.
expressed by
(
S)i, u,
,
uru, to do
103), Si-mas)i, u, to be doing
101).
stately
2. Itas)i
Itasi-mas)i ,
to accomplish (p.
3
284 Rem.) more

,
than
Si.
3.
Asobas)i, u, the causative form

is
of Asob)i, u (j$f;>>), to play, to be
amused (Saru yedanl asobu, the ape

the honorary passive Asobasar)e,
playing
(
among
the branches), and further

*
uru
^^ ^ y
)'
take pleasure in any
occupation , are used both for the qualification of what persons of rank do. See
page 237 line
5.
is
A Go
Korewo
Id-gen yoku asobasi-soro , His Honor's disposition (cast of mind)
good.
aso-
obosimesi asobasi-soro,
|i|
Your Honor means
this.
Kono fooye On-ide
M4
^
T'
.11 11, It
basaru beku soro, literally:

,
may your
house.
outgoing be to this
noki asobasare!
for.
please
come
to
my
*
^"
pl ease t
go back (or out of the way)!
1)
MASU go-bini
to
so
it
tsukete ivuva ofoku
MAUSUno
riyaku nari.
Wa-gun
Sitoori,
under
Mow.
2) Tamato nen
3) According
,,Inisiye
this
yori,''''
dai. I. 22. v.
the
Wa-gun Siwori, Asobasu
is
contraction
of
it
iM^V 4^ ^ /\ *Trr
\J
Asobi-masu.
adds, ,,Ki-nin kotowo nasaruruwo kaku

of noble persons.
iveri"
is
an old custom to designate by
word the doing
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
117.
319
117. SEEING and SHOWING.

1.
Mi, Mite, Miru
99 n. 34), to
see.
Sinawo miru kotowa deki-masAka?

I see ships
can I see your goods?

in the distance.
Watdkusiwa kdsukdni funtwo rot-mo*u,

it really
Do
they say for

i.
in
Yedo Watakusiwa kaskani /uniga
mie-masu or mieru?
2.
e.
the ship comes in view.
Mis)e, eru, to show.
Sun^kowo
mise!
),
let
me
see a desk, or in
the
more round-about language of Miyako: Bun-kowo Go ken (ÎjJ^
Jf,
*e
kudasare mase.
3.
Pai- (Hai-) ken,
^?
j^^,, to look on with respect, with interest
Kore wo fai-ken
4.
itdsi-masu , or fai-ken tsukamdts&ri-soro , I have the honor to see
it
O meni
kak)e, eru,
B-jl*
-S*^' =
bring a thing under Your
Honor's notice, to show a thing..

shall I
5.
nitsi
Naniwo
meni kake-masoo &?*), what
show Your Honor?
O meni
kakar)i, u, = to appear before His or

4
Your Honor's
eyes.
Afiyoo-
meni kakari-masoo
),
to
morrow
call
I shall
come under your
notice, I shall
let
myself be seen by you, I shall

5
upon you.
Tadaima fazimete
notice,
mem
=
it is
kakari mastta
),
it
is
for the first time that I
come under your
for the first time that I have the honor to see you.
6.
Go-ran (^tp 3
^
^
),
the glance of a noble person.
-Go-ran-z)i, u, uru, to honor with a glance. Ten-wguno on fava sou-ziyyu
wo
ik-ken Go-ran-
^)
?,) zite ,
kok6ro yoku , waran-tanuiru

prior,
the
mother of the emperor, and

smiles.
at the first glance
upon the
becomes glad of heart
In the familiar
his equals, to
style of
speaking and writing the speaker applies Go-ran to
show them
respect.
Kore wo Go-ran-zerare or Go-ran nature, please

,
look at
this.
Naniwo Go-ran nasdr&kaV), what
are
you looking
at,
what do
you wish to see? the shopkeeper asks

itte
his customer.
NanicU gozari-ma*&kal
Go-ran nasare, go and see what

118. SAYING.
1.
it is.
The
idea of
saying
is
expressed by
Iv)i, u, I)i,
is
u (-^),
Ii-mas)i, u.
.
Anatano
.
.
nawa
nanito ii-rmuu&af
is
what
-- Watakusino nawa your name?
to tt-rooau 1 ),
my name
...
1)
Shopping-Dialogues, p. 23.
8) Ibid. p. 8.
3) Ibid.
p.
T.
1.
4) Ibid.
p.
18.
5) R.
BROWN,
Coll.
N.
p.
1048.
1.
6) Nippon o-dai itn-ra*. II. 16
8) Ibid. p. 19.
320
2.
3.
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
118.
Nori-tamav)i, u, to order,
Osiy)e, u, uru,
when speaking
î P ron
-
of the master (see
107, p. 299
1.
15).
^^^
to
ossiy)e, n,
Uru, to teach, to communicate
a thing (faow. kotowo)
a person by teaching, places him
who makes
the
communication
above him,
who
receives
it.
Wareni
(not ware wo)
osfyeyo
= teach me or communicate to me, sounds modest; Andtani ( ^J$^), 3jfc^ osiye-mdsu, = I teach you or communicate to you, is considered presumptions.
Tamini
takahe'si
uyuru koto wo osiyestmu
),
(emperor Schin-nung) has the people
taught ploughing and sowing.

4.
O6s)e, uru,
^*,
to charge (fctowo kotoni, a person with anything), see
87 n. 25. Thence the passive 06serar)e, uru,

structed.
^j?
i"^l> to ^ e cnarged, in-
To
a superior one says:

inferior:
. .
Anatawa
sono toorini ooserare-mas'taka? have

Oose-tsttk)e,
,
you spoken so? to an

(ffl
"f*J")i
Omae
sono toorini ittaka?
uru
speak to, to address
Thence the honorary passive 06se-tsukerar)e uru,

oose-tsukeraruru aida, as or since
(s.
&i
rr
TT
Nipponye to-kaiwomo
129,
n. 46)
We
(the sovereign speaks) have given orders to sail to Japan.
Tonoit.
sama korewo
5.
oose-tsukerareta , the master has said this to us, or charged us with
Kikas)e, eru, = Kikasime, to

kiki
make
people hear, from Kiki, to hear.
A no
katani
nasard, learn from him, ask him.
Kikastme, old- Jap. Ki-
kame!
^*
f^f
let
me
hear!
tell
tell
me! speaking
to a
nobleman. -
Watakusini
kikase nasare! let
me
hear!
me.
Watakusini
kikase nasaru kotoga dekiii
mdsttka? can you

to tell that
tell
it
me?
Fttono kokdroyeni naru koto wo

others.
kikaseru koto,
which tends to the interest of

<
Kik6-sim)e , uru ,
f||l *%
^5
,,
>
to let hear.
Kikosiines)i, u, [M! ? -??

6.
to let hear, inform.
Maus)i, u,
^^ ^, A Moos)i,
u, to speak respectfully to one's superior, to

o
mention, declare; expressed ideographically by -j^
pf
said as
^
to
^|
^^
)^f
o
,
^ ^
if it is
=y
2
.
).
It has the definition of
what
is
an Accusative
and
a Substantive objective phrase, this with the particle
before it, whereas
the more distant object, to
who in
or
where one
mentions, as Dative or Local
Jap. Encycl. vol. 103.
r.
-jgy
g^
^
-*&
l=?
2)
jJ=
Wa-gun Siwori under Matuu.
7
r\
3^1
*s
'f
CHAPTER
VII,
VERBS OF COURTESY.
118, 119.
321
00-
precedes.
teini
Tsubusani sono koto wo mausi-soro, I mention this minutely.
mausu,
1
Jff |
T^}
2
,
_|f jg|
as as
^ ^
to
^^
God __ Butj ni
^wite wwu-
sa&w
),
f r r?
..
Q %
ff =
)'
he speaking to Buddha says.

the emperor) says. -best to
Mawsi-tamavakura,
T&\,
yatstiko
W^?,%
to
(the prince
Nagaku Nipponno
narite,
midzuki-monowo sadzuku
maosu, he declares that he will
always be the servant of Japan, and pay tribute.

nanito moosi-masft ka ?
If
3
A
is
Sorewa Nippon dewa
what
is
this called in
Japan?
grafted, it is expressed
Mausi
is
used as a root, on which another verb

is
thereby, that the action

to define; Mausi-sadame,
ag)e,
confined to the
speaking
or saying, e.g. Sadame,
ivi-sadame, to define with words; Age, to raise; Mcnui-
uru,
Moosi-ire,
^ _t ^^
,
to
say towards above, to communicate to a superior;
proposition to one's equal.

,
Nandziye
(or
Nandzim) lo-kanwo
Yaht-ninye
motte moosi-ire-soro
I have the honor to inform

it
you by
letter.
mausi-tassu-besi , notice shall be given of

If
to the officers.
it
Mausi
is
grafted on the root of a verb

soro
(
stands for
3/os)i',
M, 4|J
is
101.
Age-mausu or Age-mausi
as
^ ^|)
of the epistolary style
the same
Age-masu, to
offer,
of the colloquial. See
Addenda
n<>.
VI.
119. GIVING.
1.
As from
is
courtesy the speaker places the person addressed
above him, even
if
he
his equal, he qualifies his
own
giving as an
upward movement, and

down
the giving of another as a
downward one:
he uses Ag)e, uru, to reach uplet
wards, in opposition to the honorary passive Kudasar)e, uru, to be
from on high, to descend (page 243

it
line 22),
and since from this distinction
appears
who
gives, the speaker or the person spoken to, the express mention
is
of a pronoun in connection with these and similar verbs

the following examples show:
superfluous,
as
A
= the
Dai-kin wo
age-wos# kara, uke-tori-gakiwo ktiddsare
),
after I
have paid
you the price give
me
a receipt.
Dai-kinwa
to
agerar^nti. (or agerare-matenti *) ,

,
price will not be reached
upward
,
you by me = I
you give
will
not pay the
price.
Dai-kin wa tadatma
Mdasdru ka f e )
will
me
the
money
for the goods

(it)
immediately?
Tadalma ktidasaru kotowa deki-masenukaf), cannot you give
1)
Mausaku,
see $
107.
p.
2) Nippon-lei. Vol. VII. 14

14.
r.
3)
6)
Ibid. p.
MOWN,
Coll.
N9
366.
13.
4) Shopping-dialogues,
5) Ibid. p.
13.
13.
7) Ibid. p.
21
322
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
119.
me
immediately?
Anata-sama yori kudasareta kane

it is
itsi-pu
mo
tsukaiva itdsi"
masenu, of the money given by Your Honor

writes
2.
it
a Japanese grisette
who
have not yet spent one bu.
Sasag)e, uru, (from Sasi, to show, and Age, to raise),
^ ^
o
^,
holding a thing up, to present to a person in a higher station.
Sinrano tsnkai N.N.
kitatte
mitsnkiwo sasdgu
),
N.N., ambassador of Sinra
comes and solemnly

kitsunewo sasdgu
3.
2
),
offers presents (to the emperor).
Tanbano kuni yori k&rdki

is
a black fox from the country of Tanba
offered (to the emperor).
Kudasare, joined to the root or to the gerund of a verb, characterizes the
action as one proceeding from the person spoken to. It sounds
more courtly than
Nasare
100. IV. 5).
kai
kudasare (vulgo kudasai), or kudasare-mase, or

.
kai nasare! please

.
to
buy.
3
The chapman: San-byakume

)'
de kudasare!
\^
W? H
i),
~T*^*
pl ease to
pay 30
taels!
The buyer: Ni-bydkume de agemasoo,
I will
give you
20
taels.
Doozo
mioo-nitsi
ide (^jfj)*
|ij T*)
kudasare! please to
please to
5
come to-morrow!
Tsikadzukini
nari (^tfj* J^JM)
kudasare!
approach him, = allow

take no pains.
me
to
present
him
to
6
you.
)
,
kamai kudasaruna
Mo
sukdsi ne-masite kudasare
please to set the price some7
what higher.
it
Gok' yasUku-site kudasaru nard, nokordzu kai-masoo
), if
you give
as cheap as possible, I will

Remark. For Kudar}i, u
see
buy
87
all.
10.
N.
4.
Tsiik)e, uru,
^5
1
to add to, expresses the idea of giving, without any

it
boast.
In
tstike
nasare! please give
me! Ts&ke has reference

spoken
to.
to the speaker
and the honorary passive Nasare

r
to the person
5.
Torasim)e, uru, also Toras)e, uru. That the expression:
to give order
is self-evident.
to take" places the person ordered beneath the one who orders
-j
**n
>"
-zr n
WL-r
*&?
~ >
R^
Fyak-kwanni
tamavu
tablets,
8 )
,
zin, gi rei, tsi, sinno
fudawo
torastmete
mono wo
the emperor orders the assembled officers to take

justice etc. is
t*?*s
on which one of the words humanity,
written and thereby bestows gifts.
1)
Yamato nen-dai.
III. 3 v.
2) Ibid. III. 4
r.
3) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 38.
4) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 19. 7) Ibid. p. 36.
5) Ibid.
p.
21.
6)
Ibid. p. 38.
8) Yamato nen-dai. III. 6 v.
CHAPTER
6.
VII.
VERBS OP COURTESY.
120.
323
to send a thing to
Yar)i, u,
it
$U^,
to cast, throw, send (fttoni

receiver.
itsipu
mono wo,
some one);
message.
humbles the
Tsukaiico
yari ncuare, please send
me
Kono mononi kane
yare! give that person one bu!
120. GOING and COMING are expressed by

1.
Mair)i, u, solemn entry, to enter (a palace or temple) in solemn procesfj! to
son.
procession,
A ^~A
o
^~S%-
From Mad, Man,

M, to enter.
to
walk in
hold a stately procession, and
ir)t,
The
by
definition:
whither one
goes or
where one
enters, precedes, characterized

1
y,
or
ni.
Ten-mu unadzuite 0-maeve mairu

His Highness (the Mikado).
),
prince Ten-inn, yielding, waits upon

. .
Kau-raimo
Go
tsin
^
($JJ
^ J)
nt mairite
/-
fuku su
2p 7
ffi %)
al so *hey
of Corea come into the imperial
camp and
submit themselves.
In the familiar
tari, to
style of speaking
and writing Mairi
is
nsed instead of Ki-
come,
if one's
own coming
to the person spoken to is
meant, even
is
if
one
is
on an equality with him.

it is
If the
pronoun of the
first
person
wanting,
by Mairi
spoken
to.
indicated that the speaker
means
his
own coming
to the person
),
A
to
Watdksa sinawo mini

look at
(or
(or kai-mononi) maitta (^jî*
I have
tsurete
come
to
you
to buy) goods.
A
come
Watdksa kono fltdtoo
maitta, I have brought this
man
with me. (Shopping-Dial. 18).
Firu-maye
niwa mairi
2.
ye-
(^f
-f
1
^jp
if it
)
masdnii, I cannot
before noon. (Sh.-Dial. 17).
Mairar)e, uru,
occurs,
is
used by the speaker, instead of A/otri, by
way
of an honorary passive, from respect towards the person

3.
who
comes.
Mairas)e, uru, cause to enter solemnly, cause a thing to enter solemnly,
i.
e.
to send a thing to a person in a high station, to offer a thing solemnly.

o
iH Ati
h
1
/ivlA
lUc-
The giver humbles
himself, and raises the receiver.
4.
Mairasar)e, uru vulg. Marase, (passive of Afot'rcm), to be admitted with
solemnity.
An
excellent
example from RODR.
105: S.
Joam Baptuta Jt*u

-- Here by
Christoni JBaptismawo
sadzuke-mairasareta or Sadzuke-tatemateurareta, 8. J. B.
to
was solemnly admitted
the administration of baptism

is
to
J. C.
Mairi the giver of the baptism
placed
beneath the recipient, whereas the
passive form mairasareta expresses the respect of the

5.
speaker towards
and
the giver.
Ide, Idzuru
|fj
to
come out
of, to appear,
Nippon o-dai tin-ran.
II.
page 4
r.
1) I*m*to N*-4ri.
I.
T.
324
6.
CHAPTER
VII.
VERBS OF COURTESY.
120.
Agar)i,
u (_t#0,
to
come up,
rise, are applied
only to a person beyond
the speaker.
The former points

is
to the beginning, the latter to the duration of
the action. Fino ide
sun-rise,
ide (f^J^ HJ-r)' ^he rising, the appearing
of persons beyond the speaker, His or
Your coming,
you or he comes.
ide!
ide
nasaru
( trjj
jpT
= Your
or His rise takes place,

or,
i.
e.
Yoku
ide nasare,
ide nasarei
or nasare-mase,
abbreviated,
Yoku
be welcome!
kasi! oh that he came!
Dokoni
ide nasaritka?
whither are you going? -
Kono mitsiwo
ide nasare-mase ,
go
this
way.
Idzuku ye (or Idzuku yon)
ide nasare-masu? whither are
you going
(or
whence are you coming)?

go with me.
Ori or Iri
(
Wa-
tdkusi to 'issoni
'^ p)y^ = )
ide nasare-mase,
ide also takes the place of the auxiliary verb Ari,
96, 97,
98), in connection with a precedent gerund.
Tastkdni
strife' (site)
ide nasareide
mdsnka?
*),
do you, or does he
know
it
it
certainly?
see!
--
kiwo
tsukdte, mite
nasare!*), fix your attention on
and
Atsirani matte
ide nasare! 3 ),
wait there!
nasare,
i.
Akariwo motte
ide nasare, bring a light.
agdri
($Q*
\^ #*)
e.
may
your coming take place, says a merchant for: come in! (Sh.-
Dialogues
1).
Taken in an ample
sense,
by another's coming the speaker understands a

e.
meeting, a concession to the speaker's wish,

offer
g.
Sake wo age-masooka?
may
you sake?
Ari gdtoo, no
rise?
for:
thank you.
Nazeni
agari nasardnukd?
= why do you not
why
don't you concede,
why
do you refuse?
(Shopping- Dialogues 21).
Agarasar)e, u, uru, to be raised, from Agarasi, to make

Agari, to
rise.
rise,
and
this
from
The
passive form, for honor's sake used in deference instead of
Agari; also Agaraserar)e , uru.

7.
Makar)i, u, evidently a continuative verb and as

off
(
think derived from
Mak)i, u, = io leave
106), means a continual leaving off of work, i.e. to
have furlough (Hd. Urlaub) or vacation, to be out of service for a time; to
go on furlough
4 ).
It
was formerly used
for people in service,

It is expressed
who
o
left
the capital
to go elsewhere for a time,

1f
1*0
on a
visit.
by
j||
ffi
-^
JH
î
an(l
must be distinguished from Makar)e,

u.
eru, to be sent
away, the
pass, of
Mak)i,
1) R.
BROWN, CoU. Jap.

to
N.
14.
2) Ibid.
N.
34.
3; Ibid.
N.
36.
4)
MAKARU
va koto sumile sono ba wo sirizoku koto nari.
CHAPTER vn. VERBS OF COURTESY.
120.
325
l
J&st 01 9 W^
33L+,
= "T^
Yamdto firm mikotovi makari-mousi-tamamte ivaku

visit to
),
(prince
JJK$
TdP-Q.
g Yamato take) paying a

<[/
(the priestess)
Yamato
fime
_Pf> I
^.^
T-^
IT
( a ^ I se )
says...
Watakusiwa omaeno katani makarau,
or makari-masoo , I shall come and visit you.
When
Aru
the
chapman
says : Sono ne de
wa makdri-mastnu =
,
for that price I will for that price.
not come to you, he declares that he

tok6roni makdri-aru, to be
is
not willing to
sell
somewhere on leave, to be somewhere; to be there

Bu-zini makdri ari-mastl, = he finds himself
for a time, but not definitely.
for a time at ease, it is well with him.
That Makari
is,
at the
same time
used for
to die" will, our derivation considered, not appear strange.

it
Placed before another verb
seems to unite with
it
the idea
of furlough,
on a
call
visit
only for a time."

to
Mioo-nitsi makdri idzu
beri,
possibly I
may
just
on you
8.
morrow.
Makari therefore
j|t
indicates discretion , politeness.

t fle
Tsika-dzuk)i ,
&
>
come i n ^
neighbourhood.
Fii.ru tomoriini
tsikd-dzuku, the night

dztiki,
moth comes
in contact with the lamp-light.
Thence Tttkd-
an acquaintance, one known.
tsikddzUkini nari-maail, I
become your
acquaintance, I
make acquaintance with
you.
tstkddziikini nari-mastte yoro-
kobi-mdstf,, it is agreeable to
me
to have
is
become acquainted with you.

u, uru, or
The going out
of the Mikado
called Mi-yuki-s)i,
,
^jv
^
nari.
Giao-gao-s)i, u, uru, or Giao-gcio-ari
to spread
happiness in going; on the

*"
other hand the going out of the Tai-kun was expressed by $|)
J^ T O
}
Ten-wau N. kunini giau-gau-su

Ten-tsi
bori
a )
,
the emperor repairs to the country of N.

arite,
Ten-wau aru-toki yama-sinaye giau-gau

s
kaheri tamavdzH.
Tenni no-
tamavu ni ya?
),
the emperor Ten-tsi once went into the mountains and
did not return. Should he have gone to
Heaven?
16. 1) Nippon-ki VII.
r.
II. 10. 2) Nippon o-rfai iiti-ran.
r.
3) Ibid. II. 4
T.
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
121.
As
the relation indicated by conjunctions, in which propositions stand

is
to one another,
either a
coordination
or a
subordination, Grammar
Consequently
dis-
tinguishes
coordinative and subordinative conjunctions.
we
arrange the Japanese conjunctions as follows:
A. COORDINATIVE CONJUNCTIONS.
I.
Copulative conj.
..mo.
II.
7.
Disjunctive conj.
Aruiva.
III.
Adversative conj.
[tera.
1.
Mo, ..mo,
11.
Mottomo.
2. 3.
Mata, ..mo mata.

Katsu, Katsuva.
8.
Matava.
..ka.
12. Nagara,
Na
(Nga), GaSlkasi.
9. ..ka,
13. Slkasi-nagara,
4. Oyobi.
5.
10. ..ya, ..ya.
Sava-ive.
14. Sari- (San-) nagara.
Narabini.
Kanete.
..yara, yaran.
6.
15. Yavari.
TV. Conclusive conj.

16. Kono-yiieni. Sore-kara. 17. Sorede,
V. Explanatory conj.
yotte.
Koreni
21. Kedasi.
Soredewa, Soowa.
22. Tadasi.
23.
18. So site, Sogote.
Anzuruni.
19. Sate. 20. Sunavatsi.
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
121, 122.
327
B. SUBORDINATIVE CONJ., GOVERNING THE ADVERBIAL PROPOSITION THAT PRECEDES.

I.

31.
24. Tokoro, Baso.
27. Setsu.
28. Migiri.
Ma-ma.
35.
Notst
25. Tokoro ni,
32. Avida. Aida. 33. Uye.

34.
36. Yori.
37. Kara, ..noni.
38. Made.
A Tokoro de.
26. Toki.
29. Utsi, Hodo. 30.

II.
Ma.
Mave, Maye.
Conjunctions of quality and manner.

b.
a.
Comparative,
41. Got6)si, ki, ku.
Proportional conj.
39.
Toorini.
40. Yauni,Gani.
III.
a.
42. Fodo, Fodoni.
Conjunctions of causality,
used in the notice of an actual cause.

44. Kara.
45. Niyotte, Aida, Tsnki, Tsuite.
'.
43. Yueni.
b.
Conjunctions used in the notice of a possible,
e.
a future and thug
an uncertain cause (Conditional conjunctions).

46. Naraba, Nara, in connection with Moslkuva, Mosiva, Mosi.
IV. Conjunctions of the purpose.

47. Tame*ni.
48. Tote.
V. Conjunctions of concession.
49. ..mo.
50.
52.
..
55. Slkamo.
..tomo.
53. Slkaredomo, Saredomo.

54. Soredemo.
56. 57.
Somo-8omo.
51.
..domo.
Mamayo.
The
relative comparative of propositions. 58. ..yoriva musiro.
Explanation.
A. OOORDINATIVB CONJUNCTIONS.
Copulative or oodrdinative conjunctions.
suffix,
I.
122.
1.
..mo, 'fa*, adverbial
= too, also, Lat. que, quoque, cha-
racterizes {he
word which precedes,
either subject or object of the proposition,
as added to, or
made equivalent,
this:
j
to another subject or object already mentioned.
Kore,
Korem6,
this too,
even
this.
this,
him; KorewomA, him
too.
328
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
122.
As
suffix to
an interrogative pronoun
it
contains
all
that
is
included in the
interrogative, as individuals together.
Dare, = who? (Lat. quist)
Daremd,
= whoever
(Lat. quisque). See
page 102. 131
It characterizes the concessive proposition. See
n.
50.
..m6, ..m6, = both., and.., as well., as also.., not alone or not only,
but also..
abate,
Kazdmd namim6
sidzttmardzu,
still.
= both wind and waves do not
= neither wind nor waves become
2
\)
TT*
7 Avugi
?
Oogi) va ,
Ziyun tsukuri-tamdvu
iveri 1 ),
it,
to
m6
mata Bu-wau
it
is
3S
^
-|
tsukuri-tamdvu
that (to)
t6m6
- concerning
the fan,
said
'
JEO'
f^
Schun has made
as also that (to)
Wu-wang
has
EE?
2.
made'it.
Mata,
^#
junction
= too,
5#i=twig, something that is double; as adverbial and, moreover (sono uy<[), likewise, or also, unites
Andtano kinu-mono mata momen-mono
2
con-
both
coordinate names, and equivalent propositions, and refers to the word or proposition, that
follows
it.
it-tan no
naga
fabawa ikura ari-mdsukd?

your
for
silk-
),
what
is
the length (and) breath of one piece of

3
and cotton-goods?
is
Ke-oriwa kane-zak mata kenwo motsii-mdsu

used as also the ken (an
ell
woolen goods the iron foot
of 6
feet).
Mata
_^y
refers to the predicate in propositions like: (^f^fl)

*jL
* ^ >#
^v
t
Mandnde
tokini
korewo narau mata yordkobasikardzuya? *), to learn

practise
it
a thing (and)
continually,
is
this not agreeable too?
..m6 mata, = likewise.

:p
If the subject as well as the predi-
cate of a proposition is
made equivalent
,
to the subject
and preis
7 ^ _, j v ^ ^
,
dicate of a precedent proposition
the sameness of the subject
expressed
adv. mata
by the
suffix
mo, and that of the predicate by the
(^^); thence
fasirano
the formula ..mo mata..

kdkusi tamdlki, also (mo) both
Kono futd
kamimb mata... mi-mi wo

likewise (matd)
these gods kept themselves
concealed.
Compare page 225.

its
At
the beginning of a proposition
Mata
points to the equality of
contents
with that expressed in the preceding proposition.

sa-too ari-mdsu nard, sore wo kai-masoo ),
s
Mata
(^)
andtano fooni
I will
= and
if
you have sugar,
buy
it.
1) Kasira-gaki.
VIII.
1.
2. r.
2) Mopping-lHaloffuet , p. 33.
5)
p.
S) Ibid. p. 28.
4) Lun-yu, Cap.
40.
VII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
12&.
329
3.
Katsu,
H.ff, isolated by va or
wa
also
Katsu va, Katsu wa,= and also,
moreover,
Lat. quoque, continuative conj., characterizes the proposition or the

it,
part of the proposition that follows
as
an addition to the precedent

1
clause.
^Hv TcS^-EL*
i^l f
come
J|lt
Kon-sin katsu Soo-fon' ), friendship and trade. P*l!f jftY*
H.-y
T&,>
Fadzi
artte
kdtsU
Ma'ru 2 ), people
grow ashamed and
to perfection.
Katsu mata,
,
H. ^]>, moreover
also,
than so much the more.

,
Katsii-katsu = moreover and moreover all and all. ^ = reach to, as conj. to and with, inclusive, unites two 4. Oy6bi, 2fc *,>
objects
removed from each other, comprising the

is
series of similiar things
between
them. It
synonym
62.
of
.ra itdru
made or
..yuki-tsttkite,
coming
to..,
and
of Made-m.6. (See
n.
26).
shall
The
abroad,
stipulation
is
that
Japan
appoint consuls
al.
and commercial
4, by:
agents
expressed in the Treaty of 1858, Art. I
5.
Narabini,
substantives
l|fi
joins
7 -, besides, also, from Narab)i, u, to place oneself next, b and propositions. - - Morokosi narabini Ban-goni dzuu-turu
mono, a person versed in the Chinese as also in foreign languages.
Nippon no
kome narabini Nippon no mugi
),
Japanese
rice
is
and Japanese
met with
e.
wheat.
At
the beginning of a proposition Narabini
g. in Art.
Vll
al.
of the said Treaty, containing the stipulation:

injured," after the building of churches
6.
is
And
these buildings shall not be
conceded in the previous proposition.
Kanete,
^^
ffi)^
5J|^*>
a * *^ e
same time, gerund
of Kane, to take
with or together, to comprehend, comprise, embrace, characterizes an apposition.
N.N., Bungono kami kanete Nagasaki Go-Bu-gioo, N.N., prince of Bungo
and governor of Nagasaki.

II.
Disjunctive conjunctions,
between propositions that reciprocally exclude or may supersede each other.

123.
separates,
1.
Aruiva, Arttiwa,
J^
contr. of dru ivu ca,
as
someone says
),
with the signification of or, or also, substantives and propositions
of 1858, in the beginning. 1) Netherl.-Jap. Treaty
&M*JW,
II. 3.
S)
Tmty.
11.
19.
4)
7W
'
830
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
123.
J
which may take the place of each other.

at this date or earlier.
Kono
figiri aruiva sono i-zen
nitemo
),
Aruiva repeated has the power of exclusion.

sono i-zen, either at this date, or earlier.
7.
Aruiva kono
figiri, aruiva
Matava, Matawa, the mata
isolated
is
by va, = or also, then well. The

the Treaty Art.
I.
or" in
consul or consular agent"
^ X*-
rnatava.-- ft j
#*
^ WEÛ"^ #"' #? Av,

2
expressed in
al.
Nippon ki-kwan matava i-ninno yaku-nin

commissioners.
),
Japanese
officers
of rank or also
kaki ka?,
Andta wa Egeres mata va Oran-mo-zi wo
do you
write English or Dutch?

9.
. .
ka
*
,
||ft
Jfjf o
as suffix
e.
and pronounced with emphasis

g.:
original
characteristic
of the direct question;
F$t6kd? a man? Arttka?
is
there?
Aril there
is!
In alternative propositions repeated
as a suffix, ..ka, ..ka, takes the place

. . .
of
our disjunctive either.., or.., Germ, entweder.., oder

to6ku-site siru-koto nasi,
Yamaka? Kumoka?
far off I cannot
= whether mountain? or cloud? being
know
it.
Soreka ardnuka?
tell
(^
JJJJ
Jj$)>
^s
so
ig
no^ so ?
4 ).
Sore
ka, koreka koi to iye!
that or this (one or the other) to come!

its
Remark. In
lity
my
opinion, ka gets
disjunctive
power from
its
original qua-
of an interrogative particle. Sore and kore are thus characterized by ka as

is
it
undetermined points of interrogation. Besides the alternative question:

or not?
is
so
expressed by two coordinate questions, of which one as well as the
other closes with the interrogative particle ka, thus Sa-yoo de dri-masiikat Sa-
yoode ari-masdnu ka? =

stuff?
is
it
so?
is
it
not so? The question: Is
it silk
or woolen
sounds in the spoken language: Kinu-monode dri-mdsUkdl ke-oride dri5
mdstlka^
is
it
silk
stuff?
is
it
woolen
stuff? If this alternative question is

to
put, without any modification, dependent on the subsequent
8m6u
(= to think or
that), or of to tovu (= ask if), the expression is obtained: to
think that,
ask
if
it
is
silk
or woolen
stuff.
Thus, when ..ka, ..ka answers to our
dis-
1)
Treaty. XT.
1.
2) Ibid. IX. 6.
3) Shopping -Dialogues , p. 14.
The
original
has Okakika
for
kaki-mdsuka.
coi to iye, die
4) Compare
COLLADO,
p.
59
line 7
from the bottom. ,,Pedro ca luan ca
quod veniat
Petrus vel Joannes."

5) Shopping -Dialogues , p.
16.
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
123.
junctive either.., or..,

alternative.
it
is
because the questions themselves are disjunctive or
Since OdTcata means
for the
most part, in general"
(see
page 175 n. 44),
Odkata sayoode gozdri-masoo , odkata sayoode gozdri-mdsti-mai of course also means
In general
to say:
It
it
may be
so, in general it
it
may
may
not be so," for which
we
are used
may be
so, in general, or
is
not." Consequently the disjunctive
character in those two propositions
not expressed by Ookata, but by the mere

1
antithesis of the propositions themselves
).
10. ..ya, *Y, disjunctive but not exclusive suffix

et;
),
= or, and,
Lai. t*/,
w,
Taya sonova fttrubitdri
garden or (and) field has become old, in the spofitrubita.
ken language: Taya sonoga

kerchief or (and) hat.
Dzu-kinyd kdsawo
nu/ru,
to take
off
Stbayd 8d6rowo motte sekiwo tstkuru, to make mats of

Fandsiyd wardu koye, noises of talking and laughing.
underwood or thorns.
Also ya
is,
just as ka, properly the closing particle of a question, it

is
may be
simple or disjunctive, and as that about which a question

this
put,
is
uncertain,
particle
is
also called ivayuru utagainoya,
i.
e.
the so called ya of unceris it
tainty.
Ano fltowd
kitdr&yd?
is
he coming?
3
Slkdr&yd, inayd*
so or
not?
Mikado fei-anni mdsttyd? inaydf
),
is
the
Mikado at
his
ease or
not? = how does the Mikado?
Asa yuvuni
oyani kau-kau
"
(3$
ff$)
"
fUowd
Kamiya Fotokeno He who early and
megumi aru
ben.
late does his duty towards his parents,
Shall have the grace of the gods and of Buddha.
Yara, properly Yaran, = Ya -faran, =
if
there shall be? -if
arau yara, watdkusiva uiagaute JrS, I doubt

koto yara sirarezu,
it
is
Mr. N.
it is.
will
tamaga k*rude come. -- Idxurcno

. .
not
it
known what matter

a
Flt6 yara fnto-Joo
yara
iranu 4 ), whether
is
man
or a brute
do not know.
III.
Adversative conjunctions.
(improperly
expressed
124.
11.
Mottomo
though,
adversative or
al^C^t), though, M6tUm6 properly concessive conjunction, originally
by
1)
2)
Compare
R.
WROWN,
Coll.
Jap.
Ti-
LV.
line 3
from tbe bottom.
Pf ft
;> *~
/ Rfl '**
4h,
raff** Sivori, under
7*
3) Xiffo*-**.
XXVI.
9.
4) Borrowed from
COLLADO,
pag. 60,
332
CHAPTER vui. CONJUNCTIONS.
124.
^),
= with
(this)
also, modified for vocal harmony Mottomo,

=.
is
put,
my
opinion, elliptically for Sore wo mdttemo,
with
all
this..
though, on the
other hand.
An
example:
O
vl ^
Gun-yoono so-butsv a Nippon yakft-sono fokdve urU-be-
/C
^
*
\.
w
fiJr-
-IfL
kardzti,.
Mottomo
j&$- >| h\3? S.i/ ^
r/f
^ z
gwai-koku-zin tagaino tori-fikiva sasi1
J\\V
ffl 3
kamai-arw koto
^
mm
/
4f f* $
'
),
munitions of war
may
be sold
fo-
HI
Jill
^^
y
.
ê
J aP anese
* a^ e
government
fr
exclusively.
That
^
i-
^
1:
re ig ners
sucn
om
On 6 another will not, howMotte as

of
it
'
T?'^. -=*-
**
ever be
noticed.
By
appears from this

proposition
as
is
^
.
^L
conceded.
example,
are
the
contents
the
suffix
previous
resumed whereas the

following
mo stamps them
antithesis,
That
the
proposition
Mottomo contains an
the logical consequence of the concessive character of the previous proposition.
Compare
74.
The Japanese
are accustomed not to distinguish the

to the old
conjunction
of writing pro-
Mottomo from the adverb Mottomo, according

perly
manner
M6tom6 and
(see
,
ideographically
expressed
by
jg
or
^Q
utmost
by
eminence"
racter
page 134) and

it
also express the conjunction
Mottomo by the cha-
^Q
by which
it is
has become a stumbling-block for

official
many
a translator.
As
a proof
necessary to cite the
Dutch translation of the above men-
tioned article:
Oorlogsbehoeften zullen alleen aan de Japansche regeering ver-
kocht worden EN
paling."
-
om
dezelve aan vreemde natie'n te verkoopen

article
is
2
is
buiten deze be-
Of another
also
in which the description of the tedious
manner
.E7
*j-
of examining goods
;ix
followed
by:^Q^(p|^'^^^[^^P B
shall
'
55
;/,
i.
e.
the examination,
however,
take place without any
extraordinary waste of time, the Dutch translation drawn up by Japanese interpreters has
EN" (and) instead of however, whence
it
appears that they, misled by
the Chinese character, have misconceived the force of the conjunction Mottomo. 5'^^ Remark. The Mottomo occurring in Go motto mode ari-mdsu (WI 3
*^
^R^^^ X
),
You
are right)
as
of the everyday colloquial language,

is
is
evidently
the adverb used
a substantive, and the phrase, which
elliptical,
means:
what you have
said is incontestable.
This expression
is,
by the by,
also con-
1) Treaty. II.
8.
2) Art. III. al. 5 of the Ki-soku or Tariff belonging to the Treaty of the 18 Aug. 1859.
p.
13.
CHAPTER vni. CONJUNCTIONS.
124.
333
nected with a particular shrewd hero of antiquity, one Mr. Mottomo (^ft),
who
1
had applied
to
himself the
name
of
^j$ ^g
',
Doo-ri,
i.
e.
right, reason
).
We
leave this as
12.
we
find
it.
Nagara,
vulg. Gatera, abbrev.
Qa, = in the midst
of, whilst, properly
a word expressive of relation, arisen by syncope from sake of euphony has taken the place of
Naka
$
|||
gara, which for the
Naka
kara
Ffl),= from the

a person
midst, and has a verb

the midst of sleep , not
sells,
:
in
its
root- or attributive form before it Ne-nagdra, in
as long as
one
sleeps.
I-nagdra uru-mono
is
who
sitting; Motsi-yukite
uru mono on the contrary, a hawker. Umare nagarard

is
sonavareru mono, something inborn. Nagdra

o
to be distinguished
from Nakara
Pjl),
= the
half.
Fino nakara, noon.

is
If the subsequent proposition
an antithesis to the antecedent, Nagdra

e.
is
? $* y
equivalent to: nevertheless, yet,

tstiri-kotowo
g.
So-fukuwo ki-nagdra mayet he
-t
W? ^
=. ^
kiki-tamavu
though he wears mourning,

Kono kuni Dai-Afinni
it
attends to affairs of government.
twulzuki-
&
nagdra, kisa ardzu, this country, though

vertheless)
borders on China, has (ne-
no elephants.
.-1/vV-ga,
.-lr/V-nagara, though there was..
The
antithesis is
more emphatically expressed by Nagdramd.

itself
The spoken language, which contents

Ndrit-ddke
(if possible), also retains
with putting
Nd
in the place of
simply ga (at YeVlo nga) of Nagdra, to which

3
).
the force of
but has been
justly attributed
It is put, like
Nagdra,
at the
end
of the concessive proposition.

4
Ano
katava kokfoozasiva yordgiugozari-mastag*,
matsigai-masta
13. SlkasI
though
his intention
it is
was good
so,
yet he has
made a mistake.
nagara, = since
mostly simple SUcasI,
$f j. (0*
followed by a
it is so, exhibits the previous proposition as conceded,

,
and
is
sentence containing a statement
which must be of value equal
to or
more than the
antecedent proposition. It
is
equivalent to:
although, though, yet, howeTer

I
nevertheless.
Deki-mdsii. Sikasi
sdre*), yes;
Sinawo mirft-kotowa deki-mdg&ka? can
see
your goods?
(^^)
($)
kokoni te-hon-girega ari-md** kara , kordteo Go-ran na-
however
as I have patterns here, please see them.
Ob-gain <<;i
slkasi fikage yosi;
amdri sam&sava
asiri;
motion* do-ma
I}
Wafftm Sivori, under Mottomo.
8) Niffom
o^n
tW-ri. IL
T.
3) R.
BROWN,
Coll.
Jap. LV. LX1I. 9.

23.
*) IWd- P- *1-
"*
>
B) Shopping-Dialogues, p
334
1
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
124, 125.
finatamo yosi
too
),
in the breeding (of silkworms) on tubs,

injurious, however as
shadow
is
good, but
much
cold
soon as (the silkworms) are brought out

is
of doors and fed there, sunshine also

14. Sari-nagara
good.
or
San-nagara ($$Y)rV9<>
,
SIM'
is
vul S
^$$)'
bv
syncope for Sikdri-nagdra = since

sition,
it
is
so, is
put at the beginning of a propoequivalent to:
which contains an
antithesis,
and therefore
although
it is so,
notwithstanding, nevertheless. The
antithesis is
more decidedly
is
expressed by Sari-nagara md or Sikasi-nagaram6.
San-nagdra
phonetically,
but not ideographically

15. Yavari,
$jff
indicated by
[||J
,
*^*
still.
f\ $f$
however, yet, nevertheless,
A Nan-
dziga sei-sitemo,
forbid
sei-sdztt
tomo, kareva yavari sore wo surudearau, whether you

it
him
or not, he will do
nevertheless.
IV. Conclusive conjunctions,
preceding the proposition, which expresses a consequence.

225. 16.
The
adverbial expressions formed with ..yueni,

yue'ni, or also
.kara and ..niyotte:
Kono yudni) Karuga yudni, Sore

fore.
Sore-kara,
simply with Yudni, there-
kSoreda kara,
Soostta kara vulgo Soosite kara,
thence, then.
Koreni
it is so,
ydtte,
Soreni ydtte, therefore. Sikdruni ydtte, or Sdrfoni ydtte, since
therefore.
129,
Further elucidation follows in

17.
dai-zi
N.
43, 44, 45.
A Sorede,
^
,
^*,
Soredewa,
kike !
2
so, thus,
I
then, =
ni ydtte.
affair
A Watdkusi
of importance
,
na koto wo tdssu
listen!
sore de
communicate an
thus
l^Soredewd kai-masoo
),
then
(as it is so) I will
buy
it.
ASoowa,
panese
,
a contraction of Stkdkuva, Sikauwa, so, or in the opinion of Ja-
of
~fa
'
^
?JH
>7
Sa-yau-wa.
^
^f-
7^ ?
=?*')
^^55,
Soowd makdri-mase'n&
so I cannot consent to it,

5.)
so
it
is
not to be done. (For Makdri compare page 325, line
18. Soo-slte, vulgo So-site,
jîs
also
Z^L^
ffil
r^
Sosste
written,
contr.
from Stkau-site, = since
it is
it.
so, thus, then. See Shopping-Dial,
page 15. Comp.
A Soo
si-masoo , I shal do
1)
Yama-mayu
kai-foo fi-den.
I.
I.
iij
Shopping'-Dialogues ,
p.
10.
3) Ibid. p. 3.
CHAPTER
19. Sate,
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
125, 126.
335
according to
as the
Sateva, so, thus, a fusion of Sikdrtte, * * &T some, also of
$|
ft
fljj
&&*, = (this)
(5oo)
beingso,
which
faj
meaning goes, comes
to the
same thing, placed

if
at the beginning of
proposition, expresses a
consequence, even
the idea, from which the conse-
quence flows,
etc.
is
not expressed as in: >So then the day approaches, on which"
Sate
is
expressed by
^^
for
sometimes also by
vocal
4%
20. Siinavatsi, modified
harmony from Sundvo-tfi (IP 11

*
itf S& IF?. **U
) *
= the right way;

tively:
adverbially: right, directly (Germ, geradenvxgt) , conjuncis
consequently,
placed at the beginning of the subsequent proposition,

It is also used
which expresses the consequence.

/-\
with the power of ritMicft,
Sen-kou-stirti
tok6row6
WZ>a, tfinavdtsi miuini fo&ari

follows (if one
'), if
one
knows what precedes and what

and
effect),
knows the cause
then one
is
near the path of wisdom.
$r
year of Ansei, consequently (or viz) the year 1858
s
).
V. Explanatory conjunctions.
226. 21. Kedasi,
^,
= namely, for, though, Lat. warn, at the begin-
ning of a sentence, which explains the proposition preceding, mostly giving a

reason.
Yun-dzukawo
nigirito fvu.
Kedasi tana-kok6roni nigiruno tok6ro nan,

which
it is
the hilt of a
bow
is
called nigiri (hilt), it is the place at
held with
the hand though.
The shade
of doubt ascribed to Kedasi by some philological Japanese
is
with
justice, not admitted
by
others.
definitions,
22. Tadasi,
^9^*, = properly, devoid of other
forsooth,
ia
placed at the beginning of a proposition, which explains a preceding assertion by
a particular circumstance and generally confines
it
to that.
It is to
be distin-
guished from the adv.

taddsi gulden nari,
Tada, only
silver
(see p.
176 n.
66).
i.
Ygu-ginni
e.
MyaJiit tnot,
European
two hundred Jfot,
guilders.
23.
Anzuruni,
^T^^^-,
= in
my
opinion; Remark, precedes
that,
which the writer has to remark on the saying or another.
1)
Dai Gaku,
3.
2) Neth.-Jtp. Treaty.
Art
XL
al.
6.
336
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
127.
B. SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS, THAT GOVERN ADVERBIAL PROPOSITIONS.
I.

J
j^/f
?
127. 24. Tok6ro,
or Ba-so,
= place,
it
answers to our adverbial

sinuru tokdrode watd1
conjunction of place
ktisimo
where
(see
page 97).
&Andtano
diest,
mata asokoni sini-masoo, where thou
I too will die"
).
Mina
mina
ing,
nige-sarisi tokoronivd (or ba-sonivd) fitdri tatte-oru, alone to
remain standa patch of
where
all
have
fled.
Kavi-tatento omdvu tokdrono do-ma?),
ground, where people think of breeding (silkworms).

25.
it is
Tok6ro ni
A Tok6ro de
characterizes the attributive proposition

is
by which
preceded, also as an adverbial definition of time, and
equivalent to: whilst,

,
as.
Mina mina yorokobu
tokdroni,
sonoyo nivakdni oo-kaze fuM-kitdri-keri
whilst everyone (on board)

arose,
was
full of gladness, in that night a storm suddenly
= every one was
glad, as a storm arose etc.
SikdrtL tokdroni, as it is
so, it being such.
26. Toki, of,
B^:, time; Tokiva, Tokini, Tokiniva = Tokinva,

Mono-kuu tokini monogatdri
sdzu,
at the time
when.
is
at the time of eating
(when
one
eating) one does not talk.
Find kasd dru tokivd, fiddri; tsukino kasd

to idri,
dru tokivd, san nitsino utsi ame-furu

dry,
three
people say that the weather becomes

it
when
days
koto
,
there
is
a sun-hood (a circle round the sun), and that

there
is
rains within
styu-fo nado
when
a moon-hood.
Sono tate-mono wo
...
sum
s
aran tokiniva, Nippon ydku-nin korewo ken-bun

it
sftru koto
etc.,
tau-zen taru
officers
bdsi ),
when
shall
happen that people repair buildings...

them.
Japanese
will
have to look
after
if it
Sore wo sftrund; sayooni ndru tokiva semerareruzo,

so,
do not do that!
happen
then you will be blamed, = do not do

e
it,
other-
wise you
masita
4
)
,
will be etc.
E^Yedo
to
yukimasita toki RokU-go gawani midzuga masithe water in the river
when
went
Yedo
Rokugo was
high.
27. Setsii,
|[[f |>,
division of time. (See page 158).

5
Taddsi idzureno kaze

)
,
nitemo kiravu nari; mottomo no-gaino setsiiua kurusikarazu
properly one must
avoid every wind; at the time of the breeding (of wild silkworms) in the open
fields
however,
it
does not matter.
1) R.
BROWN.
Cott. Jap.
LVII.
LVI.
2)
5)
Yama-mayu
fi-den. III.
..
1.
3) Neth.-Jap. Treaty. II. 7.
4)
I.
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
127.
337
The
rest of the
words expressive of relation, which define time are used in

i.
the same
way
its
as Toki,
e.
they are preceded by the proposition governed by
them in
attributive form. If they occur with a
gerund preceding, they then
belong, adverbially, to the subsequent principal proposition.

28. Migiri,
3fl|,
= street-cutting
fig.
),
paving with flag-stones, also the
stones of a staircase;
step,
space of time.
Synonym
of Sfau (n. 27).
Fund no
tstydku-kanno migirini, on the arrival of the ship.

j^J
29. Utsi,
|, Utsiwa, Utsini, within; while. See page 188.

[on-siro no]
AF#om
ori-masita
utsi ni ,
kwa-zi ga ari-mastta
at YeVlo.
*)
there
was a conflagration
[in the palace], whilst I
was
30.
Ma, Rlj^,
1.
space, interval; 2. opportunity.
Ikariwo or6u ma mo
naktl-site,
kazeni makasete yuku, not even having had time to drop the anchor,
they drifted before the wind.

31.
Ma-ma, f^^
as
^
>
Ma-ma ni,
1. at
every place, wherever;
2.
on every
occasion,
often
as,
every time that.
Repetition of
Ma
(see
page 54), sy-
nonym
of Aida-aida.
Ko-tsi matava siya-tsiwo forite (fotte) 1 ma* mam ki-tekiwo

soils,
uru koto an, at the digging up of old
or ground on which temples have
stood, rare stones are frequently discovered.

as the bell is struck.
Kane wo
titefl
ma-mam',
any thing
as often
is
Mono wo
t6r&
ma-mam,
as often as
taken,
Tabi-tabini,
K ^
=
as often as.
Tabi-gotoni,
>_-.
Goto ni
?3
J:
Ya wo
fandtsu tabi-gotoni (or
Ya
no tobu gotoni) koytwo

flies).
o/*uru, to call out at
every shot of an arrow (or so often as an arrow

32.
Aida,
|Hj,
while. See page 189.

186.
p. 187.
).
33.
34.
Uye, _t5> above, upon, on. See page
Mave, Maye,
stte
]|jf
X, vulgo Mai, before. See
>
Watdhuino katru
matron*
),
maeni
simae, get
it
done before
come back"
A > Watdktoiwa
I
maim
I shall finish sigotowo sit4 simai-maloo,

first
my
business before
business.
return"
properly: I don't come; I
shall
have done
my
1)
or Mi-gin t contracted from Miitino kin, way-catting,

,
M wme
y, from Mint-tin,
"tor-
cutting
is
on In rainj because the row of flag-stones laid at short distance* from one another to step
wmthcr
called Migiri.
Wa-gvn
Sitoori,
under Migiri.
2) E.
BROWN,
CoU. Jap. LVI.
3) Ibid.
K.
161.
Ibid.
LVI.
338
35. Notsi, 36. Yori.
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
127, 128,
^4>
after. See page 187.
f > since.
Ame
tsutsi
firdkesi yori kono kata, since heaven
and earth have developed themselves.

tokdrowa firake-masita
37. Kara,
f*
^jgg
-j-
A Mairi-masita
(vulgo masite) yori, dno
),
that place has been opened, since they came.
Q
O
-
|?,
after, see page 72.
Watakusi-niwa yomenu kara, tsuu-ziit
XHI
katani tanonde. naosi-te morai-mastt . I cannot read
and thus
MB,
-M* %
^ t
*/ ^=1 ,* PR)
^* ?
^
Oil*
I shall request the interpreter to translate
it.
A
me
,
Age-mdsu
please give
-4r*
ss
âra uke-tori-gakiwo kudasdre, after delivery by
a receipt. Vulgo also with a gerund preceding.

(for tabeta)
--
Tabdte
*Eîx
38.
kara yuki-masita
he went, after he had eaten.
Made, J^f-,
II.
to, till. See page 192.
Conjunctions of quality and manner.
128. a.
Comparative
conjunctions, equivalent to: like, just as, so as.
39. To6rini,
^$
,1
>
in the
way, on the passage
of...
(see
page 191),
ffl
according to , in the
way
that , properly a word expressive of relation.
^'
15
Ifii??
'
R&ino to6rini, according to the law.

have acted according to your direction
Andtano osfyuru
(as
todrini
itdsi-mdstta, I
you
prescribed).
of,
40.
Yguni, AYooni,
3
).
^|^=,
obsol. Gteni,
in the
manner
in the
way
surfc,
,
that, so that, as if to do as others
Omdvuyau, the meaning.

it.
Fltdno suku yauni
would gladly have

to
Kaviko kuvd ni fanarenit yau ni su-besi

its food.
people must go
work
so, that the silkworm be not removed from
&Fit6-bit6no osoreru yooni okonai-masita, he behaved

of him"
4).
-t-l*
so, that people
were afraid
3*
J'2^
3*
3*
^/
_t_^
41. Gk>t6)si, ki,
ku,
fij ^9-i
-to -^
$W5
^ e like...
(see
page 109 n.
7), is
equivalent to
tion before
it,
to be as if,"
as complement.
when
it,
used without a subject, has a proposita-
Akuw6 kondmu monovd wazdvaiwo mandku;
toveba fibikind otdni o6-suruga got6si, whoever loves evil, draws upon himself
adversity; it is, to use a comparison, as if the echo answered the sound.
Mosi
sa-yauni yomu-beku naraba, in case one must read
so.
Mosi sa-yauni yomu-
bekiga gotdkti naraba, if one ought to read so (which the speaker doubts).
R BROWN,
Coll.
Jap.
LVII.
etc.
2) Ibid. LVI.
3) Comp. page 85
Dono yau
and 131.
4) H.
BROWN, LVII.
CHAPTER
b.
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
128, 129.
339
Proportional
so
conjunctions, which express a proportion as: in
propor-
tion to, how,

42.
much
the.
in proportion to, for so far as, so
Fodo (A Hodo), Podoni, jgf., = much as, so much that. Comp. page 131.
as
I
Tsikarano oydbu fodoni, for BO far
my
am
strength reaches.
A
as
Watdkusi va kiu-sdktl-m-tai fodo

..va ..to ivu
tstkareU oru,
.. is
so tired, that I long for rest.
fodono kotoba rum,

001*),
word that says
so
much,
. .
Ptsdstki fodo ooi

i.
(kHtodni hodo
= much
in proportion to the long lasting,
e.
the longer, the better.
A Ooi
hodo yoi 1 ),
the more, the better.
Flsdsi-kereba ftsdstki fodo 061, the longer, the more.

yoi, the sooner, the better.
Haydkerebd haydki fodo
Areva nomeba, nomft fodo

is.
kavakiga tsuydku ndrti, the more he drinks, the more thirsty he
Warera kono
simani
arisi
fodo, as
long
as
we were on
this island.
Saru fodoni, f||/t-^|* =, arisen by syncope from Stkdr&fodonij =

as
it is
for so far
so, is placed at the beginning of a sentence. Sari-fodoni is also
met with.
III.
Conjunctions of causality.
129.
a.
Conjunctions of propositions, which notice an actual, past or
present cause.
43.
of,
Yue, $fcz, now commonly written
2.-*.,
= cause; Yueni, for reason
because, as, whereas, while, with an

is
attributive definition preceding,
which
sometimes qualified as a genitive by ga.

atdrti,
Sore Nippon-gdkuva
TVt'uit
kwan6
tsiyori figdslni
ytidni Nit-t6ut6
lies
t'rfi,
the country of Japan, as

it
from the middle kingdom (China)
towards the east,
bean
the
name
there
of the (country) to the east of the sun.
Ten-kani kfda-mono
cxU-u,
den-fataw6
sokondvu yiteni fitdni kariwd osive-tamdviki, as many animals were upon the earth
and did damage to the lands, he

Ten-kani midz&
kdsiva kinuni
odsi ytteiii,
(a certain prince) taught the people hunting.
as rivers are
on the earth in great numbers.

zi ito-fcnwo
3/iB-
mono wo
silk;
kakisi yftdni,
kamito ivu
kakeru*)^ formerly
ia
people wrote on
thence the character indicating paper (|ft)
combined
with that indicating

tdttosito
it
sii,
silk (j).
its
it
Ydma
takakigd yUeni tdttokardzu; ki <ir&tc6
m6tU
on account of
height, a mountain does not deserve honor; thai
bears trees, that
makes
deserving of honor.
FtM
koretdrugk
yfem
tdtto-
1)
H.
BBOWM, LVII.
8) Kuira-gaki. VIII.
r.
340
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
129.
tsi
ar&w6 mdtte
tdttosi t6 su,
a person
is
not respectable on account of acquired
bulk; having understanding, that makes him respectable.
Compounds with Yudni, placed

proposition:
as illative conjunctions at the beginning of a
Kono yueni,
^/
Afc?' = there fore.
Kono yudni kun-sivd mddzu
tdkuni
ts&tsusimu 1 ), therefore the philosopher applies himself particularly to
virtue.
kSore
yfte'ni,
^ $?
f r such reasons,
therefore.
its
Karttga yueni, by apheresis for Sikdrugd yueni, = on account of

so, since it is so, therefore, thence, Lat. ergo,
is
being
placed at the beginning of a

series of propositions prece2
proposition,
ding.
which contains the consequence of a

the"
Kdr&gd yueni kuniw6 osdmuru kotovd

of a country depends
wo totonouruni <m
),
therefore
the
management
44.
upon the management of

an
his
own
house.
Kara, {Jj^
|||
= from,
Lat. ex (see page 71), as
illative
conjunction
it
peculiar to the spoken language of
Yedo,
it
characterizes the proposition
go-
verns as the cause,
from which
the subsequent proposition flows.
The verb de-
pendent on Kara
is
used as a substantive.
at
Te-hon-girega dri-mdsukara, korewo
Go-ran nasare 3), as patterns are

hodo 6s6i kara
to
,
hand, please see them.

4 )
,
&Kon-nitsiwa yo-
mtyau-nitsi kaheri-masiyoo
as it is late to day, I shall return
morrow. Os6i stands for Os6ki of the written language.

5
Fosiwa
tai-soo to6%
kara, tsiisdku miye-mdsu

distant.
),
the stars seem small, becauee they are more or less
Kara
is
also used
with the signification of after, especially when

Kan-ben-si masiyoo kara, watdkusind sinamo
it is
preceded by a gerund.
dasdre
e
kai ku-
),
after
you
7
)
,
shall
have thought of
having eaten
it
,
it,
please
buy
my
goods.
A Tabete
,
kara yuki-masita
after
he went. Fane wa iwa ni atatte kara

struck on a rock.
sidzumi masita, the ship sunk after
Compounds with Kara, placed

a proposition:
as
illative
conjunctions at the beginning of
Sore kara,
-^
vulgo Soreda kara, thence.

Soo-sita) kara,
ASoosite (properly
ASoosite, So
site,
thence, then.
H.
then.
I)
Dai Gaku. X.
6.
2) Ibid. IX. 5.
8) Shopping-Dialogues, p. 23. 6)
p. 39.
4) Ibid.
7) R.
p.
41.
5) B.
BROWN, LVII.
BROWN, LVI.
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
129.
341
-
45. ..niydrite, old-Jap. ..niyote, vulgo ..niydtte,
&
it
\ *r* T
I B9 ^*
T
ttt
P
ite
4Ft
KJ
'
gerund
of...
of yon,
= preceding from.., having
its
foundation on.., because
It is preceded
by the causal proposition, which

suffix ni.
governs, in
substan-
tive
form with or without the
--
Kamin6
ktiddrind
Avadzino gima
y6ri
Sadond sima made ya sima mddzu umi-maseru kuni

'),
ndrttni yortte
lines
Oo Ya-
sima-kuni t6 {vu
the eight
isles
mentioned in the preceding

>
beginning
with Avadzi and ending with Sado are called the

as they constitute the land first produced.
yotte
Great land of eight isles,"
Fiydku-koTcUw6 uyuru kototco y6ki-tu

to
mono wo tsukuru mono wo Nou-nin
ivu
with respect to his ability

is
(y6kusu) in cultivating the hundred (-
all)
kinds of grain, the producer
called
Nou-nin (husbandman).
Compounds with
of a proposition:
..ni ydtte,
as illative conjunctions placed at the beginning
Koreniy6tte, Sore ni ydtte, therefore, Lat.

Slkarii ni y6tte , or Saruniy6tte,
as
it is
igitur.
so,
for
such reasons, therefore,
consequently.
Remark.
..ni ydtte is, in the official style, superseded

(
by the words expressive
of relation Aida, = between, while
62 n. 14), and Tsuki, Tsukito, Tsuite,

have come under our notice, in which
line 14.
= respecting
both words
b.
63. B. 3).
At
least, places force.
must
have causal
Compare page 320,
Conjunctions of adverbial propositions, which indicate a future, possible
cause (Conditional conjunctions).
We
local,
may
not pass them over in silence, because they are suggested by others
exist.
although they do not really
We
have alone to do with a time-defining
and thus
if,
with a view to the spoken language, we confine ourselves to

,
Nari, to be, with the form Naran-tokini

simply Naru-tokini,
= when,
it
shall be, for

it,
which also
- when
it
is,
is
used, or, instead of
with the suppoaitiTe
form explained in
,46.
76, thus, to stick to JVart, with

if it
Naraba, ANara,=
shall be;
it
is
preceded by a substantive or by
if
a verb in the substantive form.

it
J tSa-yoo ward, or Sort nara, kai-maloo ),
is
so,
then I
shall
buy
it.
If the speaker intends to say: as it
is
so, then he
takes
Nara
for a contraction of Nareba.
/try mayenivxi
1)
Ko-si kei-dzu.
I.
p.
,
4
p.
r.
Kanra-yM.
IV.
3)
Shopping Dialogues
4.
342
warn, firugoni"
1
CHAPTER
I can't
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
129.
).
come before noon.
In the afternoon then."

2
,Nokordzu
I will sell
nasare.
price.
kai nasdru nara, ondzi nedande age-masoo

at (?*) the
if
you
will take all,
them
same
price.
3
l^Nokordzu
all
fei-kin
nedande
kai-
Yasui nara, tori-masoo"

If
it is
),
= Buy
the pieces at one and the same
cheap, I will take
it.".
is
If the
mere
possibility
or probability of the statement

is
insisted on, then,
in addition to Naraba, use
made
of the adverb:
if.
Mdsikiiva, or simply Mosiva, Mosi, = in case of,

~7j
$R
^*. =
,
^ Man-itsi
one against a thousand.
Its place is at the
beginning
or
even after the subject of a subordinate proposition, whereas the predicate verb
of that statement, if
is
it is
not attributively connected with toki (as Naru-toki),

toki
put in the suppositive form (Naraba) or occurs as the gerund. Mosi stkdru
in case
in case
it is it
t?a,
so;
is
^^fflSjfrrti Mosi
sikdrabd, if
it
might be
so;
Mosi
stkd-
ritej
so.
As Sikuva
va (see
this
is
evidently the adverbial form of Siki,
..ish,
..like, isolated
by
page 109
n.
71),
only
is
mo
of Mo-siktivd,
remains as the nucleus of
compound.
If this
mo
a variation of the
is
ma
( |j|f "*)
actually
exit
plained at page 130, M6-s%kuvd

is
equivalent to the Latin veri-similiter ; if
an abbreviation of
timdi,
= thought, then M6si-kuvd means probably, likely,

or cat?
peut-etre.
Inuka nekoka? dog?
Inukat mosikuva
nekoka*?
a dog?
or perhaps a cat?
Ni-nusi mosi korewo inamu tokiva*), in case the owner
of the goods refuses such.
Mosi
ta no kdku-zin so-seino
5
)
,
takawo gen-suxu toki
va
Oranda-zin mo dou-yau ni siyo-seraru Msi
if
the
amount of the import
duty be lowered for another nation, the Dutchmen shall be placed on a like
footing.
Mosi
6 )
gi-deu-(deo)si gdtaki tokiwa, sono zi-genwo

,
...
sei-funi mesite styo-
tsi-sesimu bdsi
if
such
may
be
difficult to
determine
this
it)
question shall be
settled.
brought to the knowledge of the government and (by
be
Niinisi no
gata minato, mosi sono minatowo aki-gataki koto arava (read ar aba),
kata nite betsuni fitdtsuno minato narabini mttrawo
... aku-be'si 7 ),
Nippon
the port of Nii-
gata
in case a difficulty might arise about opening this port, a harbor and
shall
town
be opened elsewhere on the West-side of Nippon.
Mosi siyau-zen
1) Shopping-Dialogues, p.
17.
2) Ibid., p. 36.
5)
3) Ibid. p. 37.
6) Ibid. II.
al.
4) Neth.-Jap. Treaty. III. al. 3.

7) French-Jap. Treaty. III.
al.
Ibid. III. al. 7.
9.
5.
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
130.
343
san kin i-ziyauwo motd-watarabd
),
in case a merchant vessel might import

si-sai arlte,
more
fon-
than three pounds (of opium).

siyo tori-kayesi
Mosi yo-gi naki
kono Id-gen
t*iu
sumazu domo, deu-ydkuno omJm&kiva kono

might be some
trifling
ki-gen yori tori-okondvu-
6&i
),
if
there
matter, which cannot be avoided, the

if
spirit of the Treaty shall be acted upon, even
the ratification of the document
(containing the Treaty) within the fixed term shall not have taken place.
IV. Conjunctions of the purpose.
130. 47.
of,
is
Tam6ni,
Jj5 =
of Tam4,
purpose, aim, end,
for,
on behalf
properly a word expressive of relation (see page 292

it is
n.
24), and has,
when
ga, as
.
. .
used as a conjunction
the verb in
it.
its
substantive form with or without
suffix
of the genitive, before

3
Ki-sdkH wo siyun-riu-sesimuruga tamtni
siyo-riki-su best
in order to have the rules followed , aid will be given.

Tsutsi suna yeni
Uru tamni,
for
sale.
fukaranu tam, kazdtco Krptw Wri,
take care to shelter the place from wind, to the end that earth and sand be not
blown on the food
(of the silkworms).

is
The verb dependent on Tamdni

nitive
put in the future with or without the geis
termination r/,
when
the attainment of the object
considered as
still
belonging to the future.

this clause, there shall etc.
Kono
okitewo katdkusen tameni, in order to carry out

sttgdtano yori-asiwo mtruroo, kokorono
Kagamiva
ktyoku-tsiy6kuwo taddsi aratameng* tamd nart,

object
rectify
is
= with regard
is
to the mirror, its
not alone to see
if
the countenance
beautiful or ugly, but also to
and reform the wrong and the right

tite,
(i. e.
the moral nature) of the heart.

attrf,
48. Tote, the syncopated t6

to do.
of to, = to, and
the gerund of *), u, urn,
Preceded by a verb in the future

the object, which
still
..ttsu means
to be active to carry out
belongs to the future. (Compare

est,
i.
103,
6.
7.
page 290).
to tttt
Motomen
Motomen
to
to
su
te,
is
thus = acguisitunu
he
is
about to get;
Motomen
or
to
being about to get,
e.
for the purpose of getting.

traf<frtt,
~ Siu-^/u
fou
mono fu-zino gKsuriwo motomentote Nippon vf

to
a certain Siu-fu
came
Japan
to search for a
remedy against death.
1)
Neth
-Jap. Treaty.
III. al.
5.
TWd XT. at
3) ""d. VIII.
al
f.
344
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
131.
the
The spoken language supersedes Motomen by Motomeo expressions: Motomeo to sum tokoroni, on the point of
is
(see
page 209), thence
acquiring; Motomeo to
to te,
sum mono, some one who

may
acquire.
on the point of acquiring; Motomeo
that he
V. Concessive conjunctions.
131. 49.
.
Mo, ^J;*, =
also, properly an adverbial postposition (see
122),
put after the predicate verb of a subordinate causal proposition, it characterizes it, as one granting that something is real or possible, whilst the state-
when
it is
ment thus conceded

it
is
limited or revoked by a proposition immediately following
(adversative proposition).
The verb dependent on mo,
as
it
has been already
noticed in
74,
is
put in the substantive form with the local termination
or
also in the gerund.
Akuruni mo,
Aketemo,
Miruni mo,
Mite wo,
it
Yukuni mo.
YuTdte
(A
Yutte) mo. koi nasaretemo,

it
Ika-yquni ndsitemd, however
be made. -,
yame
nasaretemo, kono uytwa deki-mastnu

further.
*)
you may buy

it.
or not; I cannot go
I don't care; take it or leave
50.
..tomo,
FE,
also, with a verb preceding in
its
substantive form. Akuru2
tomo, Miru-tomo,
Yuku-tomo.
Idzurdno kdtaydri mairu-tom 6

come.
contr.
it
does not
matter from which side he

51.
. . ,
may
dom6, K-t = ndom6,

Akeba
from
ni, Local,
is
and
tornd.
Comp. page 207.
Opposed
a fusion
to
>r rt ,
the fusion of Akeniva,
Akedomo
7?
K*,
likewise
is.
of Akenitomo,
and opposed to Arebd

there
is
is
Aredomd, = though there

it is
From Aranedomo, = though
not, and Saranedomo, = though
not so,
come Arademo and Sarademo. Compare 258. 52. ..ied6m6, = though it is said,
vious appositive definition characterized
t
though
it is
called, though..,
with a pre-
by
to.
See page 208.

koto nakare!
X TTV
^
|>
^Cfr
ÎKp
ffi&X
jj
T6mut6 Wd8m6, mddz%sikiwo wdsururu

Tdttositd
^-1.^
Udom6, iydsikiwo wdsururu
koto nakare.
^ r
J
^^ C
j?*.
t Though you are rich, do not forget the poor! f * Though you are honorable, do not | ^^f forget low people!
.
1)
Stopping Dialog
p.
39.
2 ) French-Jap. Treaty. III.
13
CHAPTER
en
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
131.
345
<t*i-,M no gdktniva
f -J&ir
Jg|^
-^^ uno
,
ko-ganew6 t*umfit6
is
Wom6,
though gold
heaped up to the amount of a thousand

to
^
-*
i8
not
^^
one
^'8
"tody-
..
kotowom6
>),
**' t0 *idom Ai
.-kotova bxsttt nazdr* btoi
though
5
53.
cessive
this also be granted, it
may
not certainly happen that...
Sikaredomo,
#,
syncopated Saredomo, =
so, root
(see
thongh
page 109
it is no.
8O , the con71).
,/u>,
form of Sttar)., u, = to be
Soredemo, = also then, the modal of Sore, = such, followed by antithesis of the conclusive Soredewa (see page 334 n o.
54.
]?).
FWno gen-*# rfi}|, naru, slkamd kortni tagaute, twu-sezdrasimlt*), to oppose men, although they are accomplished and wise, and not allow their advancement.
56.
55.
Sikam6,
= but; abbreviation of SikarMomo.
Somo-somo, ^jj
*),
),
= or
explained by the Japanese themselves
as concessive
concedes the antecedent statement, however introduces an adver-
sative clause. It
means properly
so as so as,"
*ltt, see
is
a fusion of
no. 18)
SUamo, and
this
of StkdkUmo (just as SoAte of
SIMM
page 334
and stands with
the adversative force of Taddsi (see page 335

no.
no.
22) or of Sikd*i (see page 333
13).
Some Japanese
etymologists think Somo-somo an abbreviation of Sor*,no
sore mo, others of
Satemo satemo, which, so far as the meaning goes, approaches
our derivation.
In the beginning of a speech

as
it
serves to
announce that which

it
is
to be said,
an opposition of other opinions. In
this quality
is
stamped as an introwill
ductory word
(f|
fZf/ ^?,
Fat-gono kotoba), and

it
approach most
nearly to an expression like:
However
may
be"
5
).
-tui
g^ x
^
-
^^
Korewo motomurukaf Somo-somo korewo atavuru

â?
6
(atooru)
to
),
does he strive for it? or does one give
it
him?
1) Neth.-Jap. Treaty. II. al. 6.
2) /)
O^hi. X. U.
moreover."
3)
y>^,
particle denoting or, either: also a
commencing
particle at
lj
MKDRUMT
,
and English
5)
Dictionary.
sense
4)
to
3S. ^ /
to
*&
it
The
we
assigu
Somo-umo
does
not agree
with
that attributed
in
ooKHKiwrncN
Yaponsko-Eusskii Slowar.
6)
T.U.I- u u
10.
346
3.%
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
131, 132.
;ftjj^
\
13 #
j?
...
^ Y v
'
/Sfc'-ro
kiyoo wo tovu. Si no no-tamavaku,
Nan-foon6
ktyoo kiyoo
said,
nil ir
.
E&t
*^
7
â ^ foku-fauno ktyoo ka? somo
somo nandziga
The Master
3.
"i/^v^
^ *^
â?
),
Tsze-lu asked about energy.
^
57.
^r/
Hffiv
\7_j
5*R^
Do you mean
the energy of the South? the energy
(fct
of the North? or your -3P-^ x^

in case
it
own energy?
attributed to it of * enthis
>**\
Mamayo,
2 )
occurs with the
meaning
core que, quoique"
for in
Japanese writtings I have never yet met with
word,
(see
it
must, to have a concessive force, be reduced to the form of
Ma-ma mo
however
Howto
page 337 n. 31) modified for the sake of euphony, and thus mean
often," being equivalent to Toki-tokimo or Tabi-tabimo. The expression:

ever often he tries
it,
he does not succeed in
it,"
would thus be equivalent
Kokoro-miru mamayo deki-masdnn.
Remark. The
suffix
mo
gives to all the conjunctions definitive of place and
time, or properly words expressive of relation, cited in

i.
127, a concessive force,

rela-
e. it
characterizes the antecedent proposition
which the word expressive of
tion governs, as concessive, while the subsequent proposition comes out with an
adversative force
3
).
The
132. 58. Musiro,
relative comparative of propositions.
^*x, =
in preference, rather, Lat. potius, as an ad-
verb
it
is
put at the beginning of a subsequent proposition , to the contents of

is
which preference
given above that expressed in the antecedent proposition. As

is
starting point of the comparison the antecedent statement
characterized by yoriva.
Next
in
to
Yuku yoriva yukdnuga mdsu, p.
it is
better not to go than to go," cited
Remark,
131,
is
Yuku
(or
Yukan, Future) yoriva musiro yukunayo!
rather
is
do not go, than go! Whereas the state or action, to which the preference
given
may
be represented as one commanded or future, the state or action of
the antecedent proposition
may
be a present, or likewise a future one, as appears

Ill, Pa-yi,
from the following saying of Kung-tsze (Lun-yu, Cap.
4), of
which
we
give three Japanese translations, which
lie
before us.
1)
Tschung-ynng , X.
1,2.
2) RODRIGUEZ
signifies
83.
(besides).
3) According to
OOSCHKEWITSCH Yap. -Ross, slowar, Mamayo
Wprotschem
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
132.
347
I.
II.
3
!
As
to festive ceremonies, be rather sparing than
extravagant; as to mourning, be rather grieved
than pay attention to observances."
In the translation
position
;*",
and 2 the subsequent pro-
is
taken as Imperative, in 3 as a wish,
As
7
jd\
*
A
if
in the Future, whereas in 1 the antecedent proposition

is
conceived as Present, in 2 and 3 as
Future.
*
In Mr.
j.
LBOOE'S
excellent version
of the
\ Chinese
text this
it is
passage runs: >In festive ce-
iv
m nines,
better to be sparing than extra-
vagant;
in
the
ceremonies
of mourning,
it
is
better that there be deep sorrow than a minute attention to observances."
Remark.
1.
Japanese etymologists see in

see
3/uat'ro
a variation of Mori
(i.,
1
= in case
of,
129 n. 46), and explain ro as an

its
auxiliary word"
);
an
explanation that does not preposses us in
favor.
Should not AAtriro much
rather be equivalent to the syncopated form of Masu-siro (^j^-/ ^teaO, and thus
mean >more price"
or
higher value"
2
).
Used as an adverb, a word with

to our
this signification, at least
more than any other, would be equivalent

to the so called auxiliary
it
>by
preference."
With regard
word
ro, the
Wa-gun SiWn
tro.
e.
teaches us, that in the eastern Japan
supersedes the termination
In Japa-
nese Dictionaries the signification of
Sou-si-tai
and Kau-ri-tai,
i.
to desire to
do so or so (see
105),
is
given to Musiro and y
(nt'ng, willingly); it is plain

is
that the writer aims at the optative proposition, which
introduced by Afutiro.
,
Remark
rather,
too.
2.
The spoken language supersedes Musiro with Naka-nakan\ = almost,

willingly, rather; and makes use of other expedients
and Nenyoroni, =
Si-sen yoriwa naka-nakani nokoraau snte-oken^ I will rather give

die.
up
all,
'),
than
Watahmwa
is
yuku yori yulri-masdnu fooga yororii
to
*on-n'-w4*i
I think, that it
better not to go, than go. I would rather not go.
Fttowo
nidti to om6i~natare! Suffer gai-suru yoriwa fitdni gai-seraruruga
wrong rather
than do
it"
);
literally:
think, that
it
is
better to be injured by others, than
to injure others!
1)
Wa-gun
Sitcori,
Coll.
under Afmiro.
Jap.
ft)
Compare Naiya
tiro,
worth nothing,
109.
I.
I.
3) R.
BROWN,
N.
419.
4) Ibid.
NT
873.
348
CHAPTER
VIII.
CONJUNCTIONS.
132.
ALPHABETICA
Aida ... No.

Anzuruni
Aruiva
.
.
32.
23.
7.
....
Baso
24.
.A.
3D ID IE 3ST ID
I.
SIGNS IN JAPANESE BOOKS. [Page 11]. ON ARBITBARY GRAMMATICAL

WA-ILAN SAN-ZAI DZU-E, (After the Japanese Encyclopedia
VoL
15.
17 reno).
A
chin.
a period single complete sentence,
is
called
^J
?
,
Ku,
chin.
Riu\ clauses
and sentences, which we are used

Teu.
to separate with
commas
are called
gj
Tou,
The
.
sign,
which
like
our
full-stop.,
indicates
the close of a period

'
ia
the
or
the right of the last character, placed at the side, to

characters, but
fa
less to the right
The same sign placed between two
more or
the place of our of the supposed diameter of the writing-column , supplies
comma. fa
point
to
the
it.
character right of a
-&
-) is
used to
mark
it,
to fix
-
the attention on
a word This mark corresponds to our underlining of
the spacing in print.
In Japanese school-books a tube-shaped mark

at the side of, or
j]
and a pin-shaped
are used
|
(&%
mes
^
(
5|
the Ku,l,i-yu-l.;ti between the Chinese characters. The former, on the left of Yearred stroke is
)
or tube-shaped
placed
I*,
jzp
Dai-hei),
on the right of the names of functionaries
and
f|
ttU
between the characters of the
as a coupling-sign
names of books.
The
latter, the
red stroke, appears on the left Bari-siyu-Uki or pin-shaped
350
ADDENDA.
of the names of things, on the right of those of places and as a couplingsign
between names
of persons of antiquity.
characters,
To couple Chinese
coupling-sign.
If
the
are
Chinese sign
to
(Kukn)
is
inserted as a
these
characters
be read according to the

its
Chinese
pronunciation (Koyd), the coupling-sign has

racters, or even
place on the right of the cha-
between them, but somewhat to the right of the diameter of

)\\
the writing-column.
)\\
)\\
(Sen-tsiuni).
^|
(Kan-won).
On
or
the contrary, if the translation (Yomi) of these characters

is
is
required
if
given, the coupling-sign
then placed to the left of the characters, or
it is
inserted between them, to the left of the diameter of the writing-column.

)\\
)\\
)\\
(Kava-nakani).
qfy
(Mono-gatari).
$
If,
iff
$3
(-)
=j
!
The
with such combinations transposition-signs (Kaydri-ten) are used besides,

=\
they unite with the coupling-stroke
see page 32, 33).
distinction
whether
diameter
the
coupling-stroke
is
to
is
the
for
right or to the left of the supposed
of the
writing-column
the reader of a Chinese text that

as it
is
to be translated into Japanese, of
much importance,
makes known
to
him,
where he has to use the Koyd, and where the Japanese word (Yomi).
There are books for the use of schools, in which
this difference is carefully
is
attended to, whereas in other works not a single coupling-sign
to be found.
left,
The
difference
between the coupling-sign placed on the right, or on the
of
the supposed diameter has not been, to

of the
my
knowledge, noticed by any student

till
Japanese
language, nor was
it
discovered by myself
late
(1871).
&jk,
it
When,
Td-hiti)
in 1864, I published the Chinese text of the
Grand Study"
(^
with an interlinear Japanese translation, I was unacquainted with
and the coupling-signs have not always been placed in accordance with the rule
here treated.
Whoever
could suppose, that a mark, apparently so insignificant,
should have an underpart to play of so
much
importance.
ON QUOTATION.
The quotation in Japanese writing
above the words quoted.
If the
is
indicated
by a rectangular hook placed

the
writer inserts the quotation in
midst
ADDENDA.
of what he
is
351
relating, he closes the quotation with to (See

. .
7,
V) which
is
used instead of
to ivu,
= says
that.
(Compare
is
74 pag. 208.)
If the sen-
tence closes with a quotation, then to
omitted.
o
J ^
\ L.
**-
^
^
*>
>
K
>
C
71
t
^
i'mz
waravi
Ima
saran
to
hossu" to, tatgi-wakarekeri , the gentleman laughed:

,
I will
now go away"
(said he)
arose and
went away.
II.
[Page 21 line 12.] ON ACCENT.

in Japanese words
is
The accent
made by a
slight elevation of the tone

syllables
it falls
upon the accented

on the
lables
first;
syllable; as a general rule, in
words of two
in words of three syllables on the penult; in words of four syl-
on the anti-penult.
But the accent always
falls
upon the
syllable that
has a double or prolonged vowel sound; as Ikd (Ikoo), Yosatd, li-katem, /i-foukeru,
Yn-mesi (Yuu-mesi).
In words of two and
like syllables, the accent varies;
thus
nose,
Hdna, a
it
flower,
has the accent on the

last.
first syllable;
and in Hand, the

is c.
falls
upon the
In
Has{, a bridge, the accent

it
on the
final
syllable,
and in Hdsi, chop-sticks,

p.
falls
upon the
first."
j.
HEPBURN, Ja-
panese-English dictionary, 1872.

Additional remark.
Ihetdka;
is
it
XV.
falls
In polysyllabic words the accent

it
on the penult,
In words of
an #, then
falls
on the anti-penult, Musdtftne.

if it
three
the
syllables the accent falls

f.
i.
on the penult,
belong, bnt being short on
first,
K6tabi, TdtsttgH, Ydsuri, Ydbtiri.

first,
In words of two syllables the

If both are long,
is it is
accent
falls
on the
if
the last syllable

first
is
not long.
not pointed out, but in this case the

dodri the accent falls
and principal rule
admitted.
In
on the penult.
III.
[Page 30, 31.] ON CHINESE DIALECTS.

three dialects, those of
The
Hdn,
U and
Tang, mentioned and
elucidated at
352
ADDENDA.
30 and 31, are, according to a statement, since come to our knowledge,
scholar
,
pp.
from a Japanese
the
the
),
the dialect of
Hang-chow
( jfig
(^
$\)i
Capital of
,
province
Che-keang
that of Fnh-chow
jty
Capital of Ffth-keen
also called
and
Official language
-jlj',
Kwan-yin), by others,
Kwan-hwa,
is
or the
Mandarin.
more
correct instruction in the Official language
extremely
rare, the
so, as both the other dialects are generally in use.
As
this statement furnishes a satisfactory
answer to the question concerning
the presumed historical value of the Chinese dialects extant in Japan,

.
we
con-
sider ourselves required to quote the original expressions of this statement also.
"l
T
ffl
r
*
*H
*
;
-4r
'J
ma
IV. [Page 107, 3
a.]
REMARK ON
-si.
The
is
predicative
-si
of the
adjectives
if
in
-ki,
if their root is
monosyllabic,
also attributive used in
compounds,
the quality expressed by
them
is
to be
considered as from the beginning in the object existent.
Ne-nalsi-kusa
is
a herb which the speaker finds, and declares to be rootless,

is
whereas
Ne-nasi-kusa
is
a herb which
is
generally stamped rootless.

as:
The
same
distinction
to be observed in
compounds,
Na-nasi-yubi, the nameless finger, the ring-finger.

less
Me-nasi-tsigo
the eye-
child,
,
viz.
the child
who
plays
<
blindman's
f"t
)
,
buff.
Ne-nasi-goto ,
a rootless
word
a false rumour. Tosi-fito
( î|)
as a personal
name.
1)
l/y jjji ylyl

in
Jg>
Si-iei
kai-kwan,
I
round
to elucidate the four tones,
by Kav-mon Sen-set,
1804; reprinted
1858. Preface, p.
verso.
ADDENDA.
V. [Page 250,
a
92. 1 after line 10.] Remark. If zar)i, u,
is
353
preceded by
substantive
in the Local, or by an
adverb
in hi, it stands as a substantive
affirmative verb,
and
is
a fusion of the emphatic particle zo and ar)t, u. Thus

for
Fdnani
zarikeri
stands
Fdnani zo
arikeri,
it
- a
flower has
it
been; SdmUku
zarikeri, for
Sdmukuzo
arikeri,
cold has
been.
VI. [Page 270.] REMABK ON ..to kaya.
To
the term to nan,
(it
may
be that), approaches to kaya, an expression,
by which no
categorical certainty
on the part of the speaker, but a mere
pri-
vate opinion of his
own
is
introduced.
its
To kaya
has a substantive, or a verb in

Ari-si
to
substantive form before it

it
Aru-tokaya,
kaya, Aran-to kaya,

it
may happen,
it
may have
happened,
it
may
be, that
will happen. Also here to is used elliptically for ....

is
to ivu with which a quotation
designated, whereas the origin of kaya, the

is
exponent of a facultative utterance,
to be traced in the interrogative particles

viz.,
it
ka ya ("Pf
^)
may
it
(can
it)
or not,
may
be that
Saka-dzukiwo toreba, sake wo omovuto kaya.
In grasping a wine cup, one

kuvi-keru to kaya. It
may
as
well think about wine.
Motsiwo
torite
may
be,
that he took this cakes and has eaten them.
Takava Morokosi Go Teino tokiyori

it
siyau-Cy^t)
seri to kaya.
Hawks
for
hunting have been presented, as
seems,
since the period of the Five
Emperors of China.
to
Ogami-tamavite utsusi-tamavi-keru
copied (the godly being
writer,
kaya.
Adoring, as
it
may be
-
said, he
who made
the
his
appearance before him).

says categorically,
An
other
who mentions
same
fact,
Uttun-tamavcri, he
has
copied.
VII. [Page 276, 315, 320.] EEMAKK ON
Masi
by the old form MaosH, u,
is
In the epistolary
Maus)i, u,
style Jf<u)t, w, is superseded
*t?^
-*vis
^7Sô
pron.
Moon, which
wrongly expressed by
this
&.
It
has the complement of
what
it.
a thing consist*, and
being a verb,
the verb in the root-form before
Bu-sa-ta
silence, I
(% T
ty*
= Silence has been, jft*) watMtta,
via. I
preserved
have been slack (or negligent) in writing and visiting = Su-ao-ta Udri
ADDENDA.
mdsita.
tanomi mausi masu

(
there
is
a request to
,
You =
, ,
tanomi masi-masu.
it
Deki-masu
to
pj
),
DeJci-mausi soro
it
shall
happen
goes
it
is
coming
soro,
it
an end
be.
(it will be finished, or be ready).
Masi-besi, - Maosi-beku
may
hanasi mausi-mastta fitowo mi-masti, I see the

hanasi mausi soro fttowo mi-masi soro.
man
of
whom you
spoke, =
IR,
Page 157 Page 158
line 8
fr.
bottom. For:
ifc
Read:
A^
line 7
fr.
bottom. For: 1873 Read: 1875.
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
OF JAPANESE WORDS, TREATED ON IN THIS GRAMMAR.
'-
-aran,
-arame,
verb,
termination of the pe212.
A,
adv. of place
79.
riphr. future
-aba, (-eba, -iba), verb, terminations A6)i, iru, verb
215.
268.
84.
Aranan,
Annan
.................. ...............
......
for
880.
aranan, neg. verb, termination
213. 258.
Ada, pronoun
Adzuma,
Aranu (-niaranu
naran)
.......... 27L
Inuerart),
SIS.
125.
Aga-tsuma
88.
Arasar)e, torn, Araterar)e,

pass,
/(=
Aga
for
Waga
83.
of courtesy of
Agarasar)e, uru, verb of courtesy

Agaraserar)e , uru, verb of courtesy
Agar)i, u, verb of courtesy
324.
-arasi (-an),
A ran ........... derivative termination .......
324.
324.
Ag)e, uru, verb of courtesy
321.
83.
Agimi, Agi,
Ago,
Aga-kimi
Aga-ko
83.
Ah)e, Av)e, uru, Aete, Ahete, verb
295.
Ahezu, Ahenu, neg.
verb.,
An ........ 214. Ara:)i, u, neg. verb ................ Arazu (-niarasu for narasu) ......... Are, Arera, pronouns ......... 85. 80. Ar)e, *, em, passive verb ........... verb .......... 114 125. IBS. Ar)i,
Arnu, Aroo, future of
,
,
25S.
202.
103.
202.
200.
Fatasazu
.
....
296.
art, (-iri, -vri, -Nn), contiu. verbal trrniinatiou-
Aida, word express, of relation

Ai-tai, adverb
189. 337. 341. 178.

180.
Ari-teim, adverb
Aru-fif6,
......
181.
97.
Akeno ton, adverb

-a-ku, -akuva,
pronoun .............. 9.
-a-siku, -va, adv. term, of
Arnica, conjunction
299.
180. 180.
.......
179. 180.
verbs
Aru
tokini, adverb
Akuru
fi, adverb
Asatte, adverb
................ ..................
Akuru ton, abverb

Amatuiku, adverb
an,
(-en, -iti, -on, -tui), causative vrrb. ter-
178.
136. 140. 174.
minations
....................
verb,
terrain,
pas*,
235.
Amari, adv. of degree

amasi,
future
anki,
-oiiti,
forming adjetivi. 121.

.
-an-masi, form of the periphrastic

213. 275.
AtobaMr)e, uru,
of oourtoy of Jnttui
818. 818.
81.
178.
an, verb, termination of the future
209.
88. 108.
88. 104.
Anata,
Ano-kata,, pronoun
AuM ...... .................. Atdko, pronoun At6k6*i, adverb ........

Atabat)i, M, the caus. form of
.
Ano, pronoun.
180.
Amur*
ni, conjunction
886.
Art, adverb
180.
356
INDEX.
Page.
Page.
Asu-made,
Asuta,
Atavaz)i,
,
180.
180.
negat. vert
-+- av)i, v, verb.
. .
.
Dani, adverb
176.
interr.
Dano, Tano, Dono, Tono,

Dare,
Tare, interr.
jron
85. 88.
295.
215. 295. 146. 143. 187.
82.
pron
Ata)vi, u ==. ate
Dare-mo, pronoun
102.
interr.
Ateni
for dzutsu
Dazo,
=.
Darezo,
pron
88.
Ato, ordinal numeral
-de, (-nite), (-nde), suffix of relation. 61. 70. 173. 185. -de, -te, verb, termin. indie,
Ato, Atoni, word express, of relation

Atsi, pron. of place
the gerund.
202.
De-k)i, iru, verb

-do, do-me, suffix of iterative numerals.
.
266.
143. 144.
Atsira, adverb
178.
95.
Am, A
Avida
Ai, Ai-tagai-ni, expression of reciprocity
Do, To,
adv. of place, prefix to interr. pron. 79. 97.
Aida, word
expr. of relation
....
189. 176.
Doki, Toki, space of time
163.
80.
Ayamatte, adverb
-dye, -oye, verb, terrain, indicating the passive.
.
Doko,
interr.
pron
241.
Dokoni, Dokoni mo, Doko ye, Doko yon, adverbs, 177.

-domo, -tomo, conjunction
-domo, -tomo, plural
suffix
207. 344.
57.
B.
Ba, noun forming
-la, va,
expr. of relation
190.
60.
Donatd,
= Dono +
pron
kdta, interr. pron.
...
85.
wa,
isolating suifix
Don
bo-don, adverb
interr.
177.
85.
85.
Bai,
suffix to
numerals
144.
Donna,
Dono,
Bakdri, adverb
176.
interr.
pron
San,
suffix to
numerals
suffix
142.
58.
Dono-kurai ooki, adverb
174.
Sara, plural
Dono yau,
Doo,
interr.
pron
85.
Ba-so, conjunction
-baya,
336.
Doozo, adverb
182.
=.
-m(-n) -\-haya, suffixed to a future. 214.

ube, time,
si
Dore,
interr.
Be, mule,
Be)Kt,
=m
pron
88.
-\-
he
291.
127. 215. 291.
Dore-dake, adverb
174.
174.
82.
Ben,
M,
Dore fodo, adverb

Dotsi,
interr.
Kata, word
express, of relation
190.
176.
pron
Betsuni, adverb
Dotsira, adverb
Do-tsutsi, interr. pron
178.
82.
Bi, Chinese numerative

Bi-gan, equinoctial
(5)
151. 158.
53.
7.
feasts
Doude
(Ikade)
interr.
pron
101.
85.
Bo
Bu,
and Fin, prefixes expr. of gender
Dou-)si, site, sita, interr. pron
Bon-zi, the Brahmanical writing

negative prefix
1 percent
-dla,
tari
220.
67.
129.
-dzu, -teu, gen. particle
Bu,
Bun,
147.
163.
-dzu, -tsu,
suffix to
numerals
145. 232.
a space of time
of length
Bun, measure
E.
167.
42.
-e,
Bun-siyau, epistolary style
u,
em,
uru;
-y)e,
u,
era,
uru,
verb,
D.
Da, Ta,
-da,
termin. passive form

-e, he, ve, ye, suffix of multiplying
240. 241.
numerals.
144.
adv. of place, prefix to interr. pron. 79.
97. 67.
-e,
he, ve, ye, dative
and tenninative parti61. 67. 185.
de
am,
for
na (nda),
verb.
genit. part.
cle -e,
ei,
-da,
-fa,
-tar)i,
u,
term,
of the past
imperative form of verbs
199.
tense
220.
for
-eba, (-iba, -aba), verb, termin. conditional. 206. 215.

-en, (an, in, on), verb term, future
-er)i,
Daga, toga,
Dai,
Dare
(tare)ga, interr. pron. 82.
88.
209.
. .
prefix of
numbers
Utsi,
142.
express,
u, eba,
Dai, Nai,
verb, termin. praet. praesens
222.
word
of relation 188.
-eru, (uru, iru), verb, termin. substantive form. 201.

-eri,
Dai-icsi ni va, adverb
177.
177.
88.
ar)i,
u, continuative form
107.
Dai-ninivd, adverb
-daka, for de dru-kd
-esi, (isi,
osi, usi, asi), causat.
form of verbs. 234. 235.

.
-esi,
etaru,
end, form
of the past tense
Dan, Tan,
Dan-dan
Chin, numerative (10)
152.
174.
ni, adverb
INDEX.
857
or in the dialect of Tedo
H.
Page.
Fu-i
t, adverb.
177.
Fuiii, Chin, numerative (20)
153.
1"0.
Fa, Wa,
Jap. and Chin, numerative 149(6). 151(4).

.
Fun, a silverweight
Ftiri, Jap.
Fadz)i, uru, verb
266.
(7)
numerative (16)
149.
Fai, Hai, Chin, numerative

Fai, Hai,
151. 181. 319.
Furub)i, iru, uru, verb

FitrH-koto; Yamdto-kotobd ,
Ha, Hei,
adverh
267.
old Japanese
.
85.
88.
Fai- (Hai-) ken, verh of courtesy
FXru-koto-bumi ; Ko-si-ki, a Jap. book
Fami, Jap. numerative
(4)
149.
FVru-kotono ban, a Jap. book

Fu-sinni, adverb
88.
ls_>.
Fana-fdda, Hana-Mda, adverh

Fanber)i, u, Famber)i, u, verb of courtesy
.
134.
.
317.
Fu totum,
adverb
176.
139.
Fasira, Jap. numerative (1)
148. 143.
174. 179. 152.
Futari, numeral
Fit-torite,
Fatsu, Fazime-no
adverb
181.
153. 87.
Faydku, Faydu, Fay60, adverb

Fei, Hei, Chin, numerative (12)
Fei, Hei, adverb
,
Fuu, Chin, numerative (25)

Fuu-to-ki, a Jap. book
181.
193. 129.
-go,, -ffa,
-go,
Fete, word express

Fi, neg. prefix
of relation
G.
(nga, na), gen. particle 61. 83.
Fi, adverb
F)i, iru, verb
181.
no index of the subject

(for tiagara), conjunction
lea-si kdktt,
84. 188.
266.
178.
888.
88.
Fidari ni, adverb

Fiki, Hiki, Chin, numerative (3)
Ga-gen
a Jap. book
151.
53.
Fin, So, prefixes express, of gender

Fira, Jap. numerative (10)
Fira-gdna-gaJci , Firo-gdna , a form of writing. 6.
Ga-gen siyu ran, or Miydci-koto-alstimc , a Jap. book

-gana -kasi , exclamation expressing the optative.
-gara, plural suffix
.
3S.
149.
22.
900.
57.
Firuni, adverb
Fisa-bisa, adverb
Fisdsii ato, adverb
Fisdsikii
,
180. 179.
-gara (kara) koso,

-yarii,
= ga
yori va
184.
-\-
aru, addition to Chin, substan-
179.
179.
tives to
form adjectives
363.
59.
adverb
-gata, plural suffix

Gattira, conjunction
Fit-dziyoo, adverb
181.
96.
53. 137.
888.
Fito, (Aru-fito), pron. indef.
Ge,
Si/a,
word
....
180.
148.
Fito, numeral
Fitori, numeral
Gc- (ziyoo, (tin, ge)

G<--d:i
139.
no kotobd,
Imperative mood.
of
199.
Fitotsu, numeral
Fitotsti ni, adverb
133.
176.
Gcki-tokit-suru,
in
transposition
Ch incur words
reading
Fit-zen, adverb
-fo, -ho, -vo,
suffix of
181.
Gen, Kan,
A\da, word expr. of relation
189.
numerals
139.
Gen, Geni-geni, adverb

Oat-sat,
Gttstt,
1M.
198.
Fodo, Fodo
ni, adv. of degree, conjunction 131. 339.
Present tense
TtilJki,
Fodo-fodo, adverb
175.
Grata,
month, notation of tune. 159.

verb of courtesy
.
Fokd, word
188.
178.
Qiao-gao-t)i,
uru
(-art),
836.
75.
143.
Fokd-ni, adverb
Fokorofyi, uru, verb
Go, honorary
prefix to Chinese
words
267.
(9)
Go, Sat,
Go,
after
and before
. .
Fan, Hon, Chin, numerative

Too, H6o
(for kata)
152.
Notti, word express, of relation
187.
189.
190. 267.
267. 175.
G6kH, a measure of capacity

Goo, a measure of length
Goo, a measure of capn>
.
Forob)i, u, verb
Fotob)i, iru, uru, verb
167. 168.
169.
Fotondo, adverb
Fotori, word
Goo, a weight
Go-ra*-a)i, u, uru, verb of courtesy
190. 170.
128.
819. 887. 888.

80.
Fots, Hots, a silverweight
Gotoni, conjunrtinn
Gotti/)ki,
Fu,
neg. prefix
site, adverb
ku,
',
conjunction
dialect
Fu-do
182.
Go-won, a Chin,
358
INDEX.
Page.
Gozdri, Gozari-mas)i , u for Ar)i,
263.
74.
Iro-irono, expression indicating the plural
...
55.
9.
Gu, pron. of the

Guru-guru, adverb
Gururito, adverb
1st
person
Irovd, the Jap. alphabeth

-iru,
(-erii,
178.
.
-uru),
verb. term, of the substan-
178.
.
.
tive
form
201.
181.
-osi,
-usi), verb,
Gwai,
=. Foka, word
188.
5.
Isasaka , adverb
-isi, (-asi, -esi,
Gyoo-sio, a
form of writing
termin. of the 235.
H
I,
See F.
I.
causat.
form
Issai-no, expression indicating the plural

V
....
56.
Is-siu, Is-su-gin, a silver coin
172.
Wi,
Ori
verb, roots of the contin. verbs,

.
An, In,
Is-soni, adverb
Itarite,
175. 178.
106. 217. 260. 263.
=
word
Itatte,
word
195.
4 for
-Jd
and
-si,
adject,
forms of the spoken

112.
Itds)i, u, verb Itdsi-mdsi
284. 318.
language
/, Iru, auxiliary verb
I, Iru, verb
-iba,
Itatte,
express,
of the superlative
....
.
134.
264. 268. 215. 206. 323.
Ito, Ito-ito,
word
express, of the superlative
134.
Itsi-ban. Itsino,
words express, of the superla135. 175. 130. 181.

162.
(aba, eba), verb, termin
tive
Ide, Idzuru, verb of courtesy

-ide for -zite,
Itsi-bunva, adverb
Itsi-dan, adverb of degree
Itsi-dziyoo, adverb
in the dialect of
Miyako ....
language
for
249.
-ide
an,
form
of
the
spoken
-zi-de-ari
250.
79.
Itsi-pu, Itsi bu-gin, a silver coin
Idzu, Itsu, interr. pron
97.
Itsu de mo, adverb
178.
178.
Idzuku, Idzuko, Idzuko ni zo (Idzttkunzo), Idzuku

ni kd (Idzukunkd)
81.
Itsu
Tea,
adverb
Itsu mo', adverb Itsuni, adverb
178.
Idzukun zo, adverb

Idzure, Itsure, interr. pron -iedomo
fix
(to),
178.
89.
suf-
176. 177.
178.
319.
Itsuniva, adverb
Itsu zo, adverb
lv)i,
to ivu
domo, conjunction,
208. 344.
182. 101. 102. 101.
130.
interr.
u, I)i, u, Iimas)i, u, verb
liya, liya-iiya, liye, adverb
lyd, lyo,
Ya, Yo,
lya-iya, adverbs express, the

131.
tta, Ikade, Ikaga, interr. pron
comparative
Ikan
for Ikani, interr.
pron
lya-nagara mo, adverb

lydsiku mo, adverb
176.
175.
Ikani-mo, adverb
Ika-yau, Ika-sama,
Ik)i, iru, verb
pron
101. 266.
53.
E.
Ka, adverb
of place
79.
Ikka, ikkdno, numeral

Ikkoo, adverb
179. 174.
139.
Ka, Chin, numerative
142. 150(2) 160.
Ikura, adverb
IkX-tari
Ka, Nitsi
(Zitsit)
161.
89. 98. 202. 330.
-ka, interr. suffix
Ima, Ma, noun, adverb

Imdda, adverb
.Ima,
274. 178.
178.
Ka,
Sita,
word
....
186.
-ka, in Nagasaki-dialect for Jd termin. of the

attrib.
made, adverb
ni,
178.
adverbs
178.
adject
106.
derivated
Ima
Ima yon,
-ka,
term
of adjective
from nouns
116.
61.
Imdsi,
qualifying pron. of the 2th person
...
74.
subst
-ka, improperly used for -ga
-in, (-an, -en, -on), verb, termin. of the future.
209.
179.
82.
Inisiye, adverb
Kab)i, iru, verb
267. 269.
152.
Ippai ni, Ippan ni, adverbs

I-raiva, adverb
Irar)e, uru, verb pass,
175.
179.
Kaherim)i, iru, verb
Kai, a Chinese numerative (14)

Kai-sio, Sin-zi, Sei-zi, a form of writing
of courtesy
pass,
313.
of
...
5.
Irasar)e,
uru , Iraserar)e , uru, verb
Kak)e, uru;
courtesy
-iri,
313. 314.
-ori,
Kamdsiki,
tives.
.
Kakan (Ome
ni),
verb of courtesy. 319.
Sikd-mdsi-siki , termin. of adjec.
(-ari,
-uri), contin. verbal termin.
217.
124. 125.
INDEX.
Kan,
559
= Aida, word
189. 225.
Keta, adverb
Ketnte, adverb
Ki, honorary prefix
180. 181.
76.
-kan for ken, kemu,
suffix
Kana, Kana-monzi, Kana-gaki, Japanese writingform

5.
-*i, termin. of adjectives

-*', -ri, verbal
t,
105. 110.
Kanarazu, adverb
Kanete, conjunction
181.
329.
termin
72.
284
in., verb
2M. 27.
53.
Kangam)i, iru, verb
269.
84.
80. 61. 71. 185. 334.
Ki and Mi, for Ko and Me, word* fxpra*. of

gender
Kikat)e ,er*,ime, KHotim)e, MTU .
verbs of courtesy
Kano, pronoun
Kan-wx>n
-Tcara
,
a Chin, dialect
Kiionmafc
suffix express,
of relation.
820.
to.
.
338. 340.
Karab)i, iru, verb

-kara (gara) koso,
267. 134.
30. 86.
Kimi, pron. qualifying the person spoken Kin, a weight

Ki/niu, adverb
74.
169. 180.
=.
yoriva
Kara-koto, Chin, dialect
Kioo, adverb
Kitsid-M, Ktint*, adverb expreanng the
180.
Kare, pronoun
-kar)i, a,
tives
mptrUtire. 1S5.
-ku
ar)i, u, terrain, of adjec-
Kitto, adverb
h'iu/ii,
18L
179.
153.
107. 113. 262.
adverb
-kari for -keri in the spoken language of Yedo. 227.
Kiyatu, Kiak, Chin, numerative (15)
Kdru-gd yueni, for Sikdr&ga ytieni

Kasanete, adverb
-kasi,
tive
340. 177.
Ko,
adv. of place
79.
80.
Ko, noun
A", Me,
sufliies express,
-gana,
exclamation expressing the opta200. 252.
of gender
52.
:.
'.
Koban, a gold coin

Ko6)i, int, urn, verb
-kasi,
=
,
-kasiki,
termin. of adject
124.
81.
l'78.
M7.
80.
178.
92.
Kdsikd
Koto, pronoun
Kokomi, adverb
Kokdro-dfO-tara
Kdnkoni, adverb
Kasira
Kdsoko
Jap. numerative (3)
148.
81.
Kdsiko
Kokn, space of time

KOHO, KoMO-kafa, pron
Kou-nitti, adverb
168.
84. 104.
Kata, word
190.
Kata-gata, adverb
177.
k.
180.
87.
180.
Kata-kana, k k.-gaki,
writing
k.-momi, a form of
6.
KOHO, for Koreao
Kono aida
adverb adverb
KdtakH, Katdv, Kdtoo, adverb

Katani, Katawarard, adverb
174.
178. 829.
176.
KOHO
fforo,
Kama hodo, adverb
Katsu, Katsv va, conjunction

Kdtsti-gdtsu, adverb
KOHO
i-ffo,
adverb
176.
. . .
Kumnuff, adverb
Kdtsii-mata, adverb
176.
Ktmo tok6ro*i, adverb.
178.
KdtsH-te, Katie, adverb
175.
85.
o
KOHO yueni, conjunction

Kore, pronoun
Kau-si,Kdo-si,
o
<
Ka-yau-ri
Kavd
for
Karevd, pron. demonstr
88
192. 863.
X2.
Kore kara, adverb
179
i
Kavari, word express, of relation
<>r<-
ni yottf
rnnjunrlioii
S41.
Kaya
Korv6)i, urn, verb
i67.
167.
42.
69.
(-/'o)
Kaytri-ten, marks of going backwards

Kdzti-kdzil-no
,
Kot
a measure of length
Ke,
expression of the plural

.... ....
65.
Kofooa,
verb
,
Sita, word
181.
885.
Koto-f6tok*
rxprcttion of thr plum)
Kedari, conjunction
-keki, -koki, (-ke, -ko), terrain, of adject.
.
Koto-gttok*
adverb
171.
119.
Knfitmi yoftmni, adverb
Ken, a measure of length

-ken, kemtt, verbal termination
167.
Kotti, pronoun
Kitfjtira
,
225.
180.
adverb
...
pronoun
87.
Keo
adverb
ru,
,
Kova,
for Korftra,
-ke)ri,
form of the past tcnie
222. 227.
Koc)i, iru,
*r,
verb
....
360
INDEX.
Koye,
Won
Page.
4.
29.
36.
Mata, adverb and
conjunction. 133. 177. 328. 330.
Ko-zi-ki, Furu-koto-bumi , a Jap. book
Mata
itsuniva, adverb
177.
316.
Ku,
a Chin, numerative (6)
151.
Matsi, Mdtsuri, verbs of courtesy
-ku, adverbial termin.
106. 173.
Mattaku, adverb
Maus)i, u,
175.
317. 320. 353. 190. 178.
relation.
.
Kudasar)e, uru, passiv. of Kudasi, verb of courtesy
A Moos)i, u, verb of courtesy.
321. 322.
4.
(2)
Mavari, word expressive of relation
Kun, Toku, Yomi

Kutsi, a Jap. numerative
Kuts)i, iru, uru, verb
30.
Mavarini, adverb
148.
Mave, Maye, word expressive of
187.
38.
266.
174.
Mavi, Mai, Melodramatic and Epic poems.

Maye-kata, adverb
Maye-ni, adverb
-mazi,
Kuvd-si)ku, u, adverb
179. 178.
Kwa-ko, =.
Praeteritum
198. 220.
153. 170.
Kwan,
a Chin, numerative (19)

silverweigth
mai, neg. verbal termin. of the future. 253.

-mazikiivd, -mazikini
Kwan-me, a
-mazi (A -mai),
kini,
(A -mai
M.
Ma, = Ima, noun
Ma,
Ma,
a Jap. numerative (12)
253. 274. 337.
149. 187.
maini) -mai-toki,
-mai tomo, -maziki

254.
144. 162. 170.
nari, negat. verbal terminations
Me,
Me,
suffix of ordinal
numbers
= Monme
and Ko,
suffixes^ express, of gender
Me, noun
prefix
Me
....
52.
Ma, Man,
130.
175.
Mei, instead of
Mei(Eei-~)site,
Bd
Mabarani, adverb
(Sesi, Sekf)
292. 240.
52.
Simete
Mada, adverb
Made, word
178.
Men,
instead of
Meno
express, of relation. 71. 192. 329. 338.
Men, Chin, numerative (22)

Meo, a^space
of time
153.
163.
Madzu, adverb
Mai, a
silver coin
179.
171. 152. 337.
express, of relation.
Meppoo, adv. expressing the superlative

-meri, verb, termination
135. 300.
75.
Mai, a Chinese numerative (8)

Mai, conjunction Mai,
-mai
= Mave, Maye, word Mai = Mavi =

-mazi
Mi, honorary
prefix
187.
38.
Mi, pronoun Mi,

instead of
89. 91.
Ma,
prefix
130.
253.
Mi
and
TLi, instead of
Me
and
Ko
52.
Mairar)e, uru, Mairasar)e, uru, verbs of courtesy. 323.

Mair)i, u, verb
Mî, iru, verb
268. 319.
323.
324.
Midzukara,
reflective
pron
89.
92.
Makar)i, u, verb
Migini, adverb
Migiri, conjunction
178.
Mak)i, u, verb
297.
181.
182. 337. 346.
6.
6.
337.
92.
Makotom,
adverb
Mi-mi, pron
Makotordsiku , "adverb
Mina, adverb
Mi-rai,
express, of the plural
.59. 174. 198. 208. 319.

.
Mama, Mamani,
Mamayo,
conjunction
Future tense
conjunction
Mis)e, uru, verb of courtesy
v-kdna, a form of writing

yov-siu, a Jap.
li,
Mitari, triad
139.
book
Mits)i, uru, verb
266.
adverb
181.
n,
= Amari
,
Miyavi-koto-atsame , or Ga-gen siyu-ran, a Jap.
140.
86.
9.
book
Miyoo-dsa, adverb
38.
Maro
Maru,
Tsin, pronouns
little
180. 180.
ring indicating a modification of sound.
Miyoo-tan, adverb
Miyoo-getsti,
,
Masdni, adverb
Masi,
182. 212.
adverb
180.
= Jww,!pronîndicating
the person spo74.
Miyoo-go-nitsi, adverb
180.
180. 180.
ken to
Mas)i, u, auxiliary verb
Miyoo-nen, adverb
Miyoo-nifsi, adverb
213. 274. 353.

133.
Masi, Masdri, Masdreri, verb
Miyoo-nitsino dsa, adverb

Miyoo-nitsino firu, adverb
180.
180.
Masi, inaccurate form for Mazi
254.
Mdsu-mdsu, adverb expressing the comparative. 131.
Mi-yuki
s)i, uru, verb,
of courtesy
325.
DK
Pig*.
X.
361
Mo,
instead of Ma, (page 130)
342.
conjunction.
I
-tta,
-mayo,
-ma...
to,
forming the forbidding

251. 801.
-mo, -mo -mo,
-mo-mata,
suffix,
imperative
102. 133. 206. 254. 302. 327. 328. 344. 346.
Nado, expressing the

Nagdra, conjunction
plural
59.
Mo,
prefix
130.
282. 888.
149.
.
Mo-haya. Mo-hayau, adverb
179.
Nagare, a Jap. numerative (19)

Na/iai, Nafidri, NaAerri, instead of N**drt
Momo
(Tsi,
Yorodzu), numeral
139. 140.
171. 169.
96. 38.
278.
96.
Mon, Sen
(Zeni), a copper coin
Nat, noun substantive

Not,
Mon-me, a silverweight
Utti,
word exprew. of
of relation
relation
188.
189. 177.
Mono, pron.
Mono-gatan,
indefinite
Naka, word
express
historical narrative
Ndkabdva, adverb
Naka-naka-ni,
Moo, a silverweight
170.
=r
Mtuiro, conjunction
847.
175.
178.
forbid-
Moo, adverb
Moppara, adverb
Moro-morono, expression of the plural
Mori, Mosiva, MonkHvd, conjunction.
.
.
179.
175.
56.
Naka-naka, adverb-.
Nakani, adverb
Nakdre, imperative form, continual! ve
ding
-nakari, -nakeri,
neg.
215. 342.
149.
252.
Moto, a Jap. numerative (5)

Motri)i, iru, yuru, verb
267.
181. 192. 289.
su-
Nakar)i,
Na)ki, km,
verb,
ri,
auxiliary verb.
251. 806.
Nakm
-f-
ari
Motsi-ron, adverb
Nai, verb
127.
808806.
250.
806.
58.
Motte
-naki, A-JKIJ, -makm, instead of
Nm
verbs,
Mottomo, Motomo, adv. expressive of the

perlative
Naku-nar)i, m,
134.
331.
Nakm
)e, torn,
Nami,
expression of the plural
Mottomo, conjunction
-ma, verbal tennin. of the future
Mitte,
tibe,
-nan (-zu to mam), negat verbal, termin

-nan (-mi mam, -to mam)
....
SIS.
208.
291.
259. 269.
178.
time
Nana-meni, adverb
-nanda, negat. verbal termin
MMdni,
lation
adverb
-aft,
176.
252.
99.
MuK)ai, -am,
Mukoo, word
express, of re-
Nandoo
189. 178.
instead of
interr.
Nami
to
w*
Nando,
pron
99.
Mukaini, adverb
Mukaite, Mukavite, word express, of relation
.
Nandote, Nami to te, instead of Nami to JUi,

interr.
195.
pron
expreae.
99.
Mvkarite, Mukatte, Mukavte, MQkoote, word

Nand:i (Nammdn, Na-mot*i), pronoun

195.
the person spoken to
.74.
pronoun*.
.
mkdri,
MWcdsiyori, adverb
. . .
179.
195.
Nani, Nam,
Nam,
interr.
98. 99.
101.
174.
Mukite, Mvite, word
Nami-fodo, adverb
Nani-gari, Namt-kmre, Nami-kon, interr.
Muku)i, yuru, verb
268.
176. 148. 181.
174.
prooou. 100.
. .
Munariku, adverb
Mtine, a Jap. numerative (2)
Nani mar*, Nami mato,

-nanmeri, -mamtri
etc.
interr. proa.
100.
69,
Muron, adverb
Mtua-miisdto, M&idto, adverb
Nanno,
instead of Nami-mo, interr.

to,
Na* ton
pronoun
proa.
100.
Sam
nm
to,
Namto,
interr.
Musiro, conjunction
346.
99.
Mu-ydk&ni, adverb
176.
Nao,
Now,
adverb expreat. the comparative.

.
.
.
181.
-nara for -marata and -mania.
215. 270. 841.
N.
N,
negative element
-naraba, conjunction
Narabi, noun sobitantive

247.
42.
191.
Narabini, conjunction
naramit, maram
,
829.
. .
.
Na, noun, (nomen)
marami, verbal termin.
218.
Na,
Na, Na, Na,
a negative prefix
a negative interr. suffix
instead of
128. 301. 301.

114. 270.
61. 67.
NaraM)i, m, verb
...
verb
.
.
27L
271.
270.
271.
Nar)e,
m, mm,
Naru,
terrain, of adjectiv.
Nar)i. m, verb
variation of
No
m Nar)i, m, used instead of Nar)t,

(Oymari, verb of courtesy
Nd,
instead of Ndril-ddke
838.
***.
362
INDEX.
Page.
-naru, termination of adjectives
114. 270.
177.
O.
0, On, honorary
0,
a. Japanese,
Ndni-dake, adverb
Naru,toki-ni, .==.
Nas)i, u, verb,
Naran
toJcini
341.
verb. 236. 273.
prefix
75. 198. 311.
==_ni
Naute, o
+ si,
A
causat.
numerative (7)
of gender
149.
Nausi, Noosi, o
Noote,
=.
Naku-si,
305.
99.
and Me,
-oba ,
suffixes express,
,
...
51.
53.
Nakusite
-woba
(wo
+ va)
suffix
indicating the
Nazeni
Nazo,
instead of Nan-se-ni
accusative
62.
,
Nanzo
100. 248.
Obitaddsiku
adverb
.
181.
90.
-ne, neg. verbal termination
Odore, a variation of Onore, determin. pron.

Odz)i, iru, uru, verb
Oite(-ni dite),
-neianaranu, expression of necessity

Negavdkuvd, adverb
260.
182.
154.
266.
.
. .
word
193. 194.
Nen, Tod, Tose, year

Nen-goo,
Okeru, verb
Ok)i, iru, uru, verb
Oki-zi,
yearnames
Naka
naka-ni,
157.
266.
Nengoroni,
Musiro
176. 347.
333.
Teniwova, Teniwa, Sutegana, Jap. de43.

indicat-
-nga, conjunction
-ni,
nominations for particle
-nu from
(ni
iri)i,
u, auxiliary verb of time 229. 230.
0-mdye, 0-mde, 0-mdi, honorary pron.

ing the person spoken to
Ni
i),
Nife, Nan, verb, to be in
...
269. 247.
76.
.
103.
319. 187.
52.
-ni, -nu, neg. verbal termin

-ni, suffix express, of relation.
0-meni-kak)e, eru, ar)i, u, verb of courtesy
61. 68. 173. 185. 193.
Omote, word
N)i, iru, verb
266.
9.
On,
instead of
Ono
Nigoreru koye, impure sounds

Nigori , the points indicating tbe impure sounds.
-on, (-an, -en, -in), verbal termin. of the future. 209.
9.
Onari, verb of courtesy

Onaziki, adjective
325.
91.
Nin, a Chinese numerative (1)
150. 347.
5.
Ning
Chinese,
sio ki
Musiro
Ono, Ono-ono, pronoun

Onodziikdrd, pronoun.
89. 91.
89. 93.
Nippon
or
Yamdto bumi, a Japanese book.

coins of relation.
.
29. 36.
Nipu, Nisu, gold

Nite and Ni-Ate,
Nite,
172.
61. 70. 185.
Onore, pronoun
Oo-kata, adverb
.
89. 90.
.
.
-nite, -de, suffix express,
175.
Narite
270. 285.
160.
Ookini, adverb expressing a comparative.
131. 175. 181.
Ni
site.
Ooki tokiva, adverb
Nitsi (Zitsu),
-ni
Ka, day
-ni
Ookuno, Ohokuno, expression indicating the plural. 55.

06s)e, uru, verb of courtesy
Ooserar}e, uru, honorary pass, of 06se
320.
yorite
yote,
-ni yotte,
conjunction.
334. 341.
-no,
suffix express, of
320.
the genitive. 61. 66. 135. 142.

149. 267.
.
.
Ore,
Ora, variation of Are, subst. pron. 86. 91. 103.

numerative (8)
149.
No, a Japanese numerative (11)

Nob)i, iru, verb
Ori, a Jap.
Or)i, u, verb Or)i, iru, uru, verb
193. 263.
266.
Nokordzu, adverb expressing the plural

Nori-tamav)i , u, verb of courtesy
Notsi, word express, of relation. Notsi, conjunction
. .
59.
175. 320.
-on, (-ari, -iri,-un), contin. verbal termination. 217.

Ori-fuzi, adverb
Ori-ori, adverb
187.
338.
181. 181. 264.

-isi, -usi), caus.
Notsi-hodo , adverb
180.
178. 180.
.
Oi)i, u, verb.
-osi,
Notsini, adverb
Notsi-notsi, adverb
(-asi, -esi,
verb, termin.
.
235.
121. 174.
320.
-osiki,
-asiki, verb, termin.
forming adjectives
Nozokite, Nozotte, word

-ns)i,
193.
Osi-ndbate, adverb
u, uru
285. 294. 229. 250.

,
Osiy)e, uru, verb of courtesy

Os6kii, Ostiu, Osdo, adverb
Ottir)i, u,
-nu instead of -no

-nu, -nan, -nuru, verbal termin.
174. 179.
133.
Otdveri, verbs
-nu de ar)i, u, negat. verb, termin

-nva,
-nzi,
Ots)i, iru, uru, verb
266.
179. 179.
ni
+
,
va,
suffix
69.
Otte, adverb
Otts'ke, adverb
==
nis)i
u, uru, to do, to be
285.
Owannuno nu
230.
INDEX.
,
363
!**
.
-dye, -aye, verb, terrain, indicat. the passive.

Qytibi, conjunction
241.
329.
San-dai kdlm-nki, a Japanese book

Sdn-nagara, conjunction
T
38.
Ml
.
.
Oydso, $y6sxo, adverbial expression
....
142. 151.
Sao, Soo, anit of the measure* of capacity.

Sappari, adverb
168.
Oydso, adverb
175.
181.
P.
Pioo, Tawdra, a measnre of capacity
168. 168.
Sara ni , adverb
Sore domo, conjunction
Sari-nagdra
,
177
Sart-nayara nuf, conjunction.
HI HI
339.
Pu, Tsubo, a
superficial
measure
Sard fodoni
Pu
(Itsi-pu, Ni-pu), gold coins.
........
172.
SdrHni yotte
Satdg}^, uru, verb of courtesy
SattLka, adverb
8S4.
R.
-ra, suffix expressing the plural
HI
18L
56.
Sate, Sdtecd, conjunction
HI
153
178.
181.
Rai-getsu, adverb of time
180.
180.
Safin, a Chinese numeraire (23>
Rai-nen, adverb of time

-ran,
Saye, adverb
Sayoo, adverb
-aran,
-arame, verb.
term,
expressing
the periphrastic future

-rasiki,
212.
. .
Sazo, conjunction
-*<?,
HI
-nm)c,
ttrm,
aranki, rdtka, term, of adject
Rei- (Mei-)rite,
125.
-tttrtt,
-ten;
t,
verb,
ter-
nte, nmete
240. 168.
164.
mination
Se, a superficial measure
Stti
885.
HI
168.
Ri, measure of length
Rin, a space of time

Rin, a measure of length Rin, a silverweight
Rin, Wari,
and Siyo, notation of time
163
5.
167. 170.
Sei-zi, Sin-si, a
form of writing
....
171.
Sekki, a space of time.
158.
Bu
147.
153. 172. 199.
Sen (Zeni, Man), a copper coin

Sen, Go,
Sen-dai
teri
in
148.
36.
Riyoo, a Chinese numerative (18) Riyoo, unit of old gold coins

-ro,
before and after

fon-ki, a
Jku-xi
Japanew book
to
-yo,
an exclamation
(causal,
-f-
erf)
dutinguish
from
Ron-ndku, Ron-nau, adverb
181.
the derivative form ter)i, w (a fusion of the
kwa-kono
and
s.
Seftit, division of
-to,,
m)
.
.
HI
158. 336
time
substantive form of
(ki, ku)
107.
Sttfstt-tettit,
adverb
181.
SaV)i, uru, verb

Sai, adverb, prefix expressing the superlative.
.
267.
135. 168.
169.
-tt,
-tn
-tan (-J0), termination of
eaont
270
verb*.
.'.i
S)i, M, KTM, verb

-tt,
Ml.
818. 800.
Sai, a measure of capacity

-Sat,
-tut
a weigth
Si,
}', Chinese
exprcMinn* indicating the gem58.

.
Sai-tiyoniva, adverb
Sai-zen, adverb
177. 179.
der of birds
Si,
Ifa/fe, expreoive of the superlative.

), termin
184.
Saki, Tsugi (Ato,
Usiro)
148. 187.
-', (Oen-sai no
adjective
-ti
of the praedkatire
Saki, word express, of relation

Saki-goro, adverb
...
.
.
..
106.
107. 884.
.
HI
180.
180.
(Jfirm no n)
ki,
818. 814.
Saki-hodo, adverb
-,
(KtM-tono
888. 884.
HI
17.
265.
179.
Saki ni, adverb

SdkU-geftH, adverb
Sdlril-nen, adverb
178. 180. 180.

180.
180.
to.
.
Si, a
Sf)i,
muare
of length
.
in, tan, verb

,
adverb adverb
exprett. of relation
.
SdkK-ziti, adverb
181. 191.
Santa, pron. expressing the person spoken
74.
55.
Si-dai,
word
Sama-samano, expression
Samtiravfi,
liary verb
,
indicating the plural.

,
SidsiUMni, adverb
174
845.
Savilrao)i,
Sored,
Son,
auxi-
Stta wJ, conjunction

SiJttre
276279.
177.
36.
domo, conjunction
ni yotte, conjunction
,
Sa-ttdku-tomo , adverb
SHar*
Sikati
San-bu fon-nyo, a Japanese book
conjunction
HI HI HI
364
INDEX.
Page.
-sikd-siki, terrain, of adject
124.
333.
Soo-sitd Teara, Soo site kara, conjunctions
334.
Slkdsi-nagdra , conjunction
Sikasi-naffdramd, conjunction
Soo wa, conjunction

Soo-zi, a
334.
6.
334.
form of writing
Sikdto, adverb
-siJci,
181.
110. 119.
Sore, pron
87.
terrain, of adject
Sore da kara, conjunction Sore de, conjunction
334. 340. 334. 345. 334.

88.
Sikirini, adverb
-siku, adv. terrain
179.
299.
298.
Soredemd, conjunction
Soredewa, conjunction
Soregdsi, pronoun
Simav)i, u, Sima)i, u, verb

Sim)e, uru, verb, terrain
Sin,
reflect,
235. 238.
93.
.
pronoun
Sore kara, conjunction
334. 340.
Sina-zinano , expression indicating the plural

Sin-zi, Sei-zi, Kai-sto, a
55.
5.
Soreni yotte, conjunction

Soro-soro, Soro-soroto, adverbs
Sosite, Sosite kara, conjunctions
334.
form of writing ...
174.
334.
Sita, word express, of relation

Sitagdtte,
186.
Sitagaute, Sitagoote, word express.

195.
So-so, adverb
178. 189.
178.
82. 87.
56.
.
of relation
Soto,
word
Sitdni, adverb
-site,
178.
Sotoni, adverb
Sotsi,
simete
240.
pronoun
poetically for Soreioo
-site (*'-)
and nite,
su,
=r
narite
,
270.
suffix
Sowo
-stu, siyu, sit,
siu-dzyu,
expressing
58.
Su, expression of the plural

-su,
the plural
Siu-i,-
-zu,
tsu
67.
word
Siv)i,
190.
Subete, adverb
174.
179.
1
Sf)i, iru,
yuru
265.
166.
168.
Sudani , adverb
Sudzi, a Japanese numerative (9
)
Sty a feu, Sdku, a measure of length

Slydkii, saint, a measure of capacity
149. 178.
Sudzi-makdvini, adverb
Suff*)i,
Siydku,
sdk', a
weigth
169.
iru, uru, verb

,
266.
179.
.
.
Siyo and Set, notation of time

Siyo-siyo, adverb
163.
178.
56.
Suguni, adverb
Siigurete, adv. expressing the superlative
135.
Siyo, expression of the plural

-siyu, su, suffix for
Sui-bun, adverb
175.
175.
.
sort-numbers
144.
55.
Sukdburu, adverb
Sukdsi,
adv. expressing the comparative
Siyu, siyu no, expression indicating the plural.
131. 175. 181. 175.
So, adverb of place

-so,
79.
Suku-nald told, adverb
emphatic
suffix
199. 252. 301.

of numerals
Suku-ndku md, adverb
-so, -so-dzi, terrain,
139.
Suku ndku tdmo, adverb

Sumdvi, r=r Simavi, verb
177.
298.
174. 167.
Soba, word express, of relation
190.
178.
80.
Sobani, adverb
SoJco,
Sumiyakdni, adverb
Sun, a measure of length
Sunavatsi, conjunction
pronoun
Solco-moto,
Asoko-moto, pronoun
81.
335.
So&ti, a Chinese numerative (26)
154.
Surd, adverb
Sutegdna, Teniwova, Teniva, Oki-zi, Jap. denominations for particle
Suzi-kaini, adverb
177.
SokH-zini, adverb
179.
345.
76.
Somo-somo , conjunction
Son, pron., honorary prefix
Sdndta,
43.
178.
=.
Sono
kata, pronoun
84.
84.
T.
To,,
Sono, Sono-moto, pronoun
Sono fokdni, adverb
177. 180.
179.
Da,
adv. of place, prefix to interr. pron. 79.
97
296.
314.
Sono notsi, adverb Sono told, adverb

Sono tokdroni, adverb
-/a, -ta)ki, ku, si,
desiderative verb
Tabi, an obsolete verb
178.
Tabi, Tabi-me,
suffix to
numerals
....
143. 144.
Sono
iie
ni adverb
178. 153.
181.
Tabi gotoni, conjunction

Tabi-tabi, adverb
337. 181. 337.
Soo, a Chinese numerative (17)

Soo, adverb
Tabi tabini, conjunction
INDEX.
-
365
Ta-lun, adverb
182.
176.
179.
Te-mdye, Te-mai
Te-mee, Temae-tama, Tematindicating the person spo-
Tada, adverb
sama-gata, pron.
Tada ima, adverb

Tadasi, conjunction
ken to
-te-mo,
75. 103.
335.
=r
Site-mo,
mo
Oki-si,
102.
Toga, Daga,
interr.
pron
82.
Temtoova, Tenita, Stttegana,
Japanese
42.
79. 97.
Tagamni, Ai-tagaini, expression of reciprocity.

Tai-gai, adverb
95.
denominations for
Particle
175.
for
To, Do, adverb of place
Taino kotoba, Jap. denom.
noun
43.
To and Ye,
distinction of the
names of the ten165. 168.
Tai-sauno, Tai-teino, expressions indicating the

plural
series cycle
55.
To,
Tomdtti, a measure of capacity
Tai site, word express, of relation

Tai-soo, adverb
Tai-tei, adverb
195. 175.
-to -to
191.
. .
-to, suffix express, of relation

-to,
61. 70. 185. 190.
175.
. .
Takari
tote,
to nte
289. 290. 291. 343.

177.
Taku-ari, Too-art, contin. verb.
297.
175.
To-kakH, adverb
T6ki, Doki, a space of time
Told,
Tak&dnni, adverb
Takv.-ta.nno, expression indicating the plural.
.
168.
S36. 189.
.
55. 80.
Tokini, Tokittiva,
7Wuw, conjunctions.
.
Takusi (Tain), verb
Toki MI yotte va, adverb

Toicitoo
tit tutu,
Tamasakani, adverb
174.
the changing of the hoars
166.
Tama-tama, adverb
Tamavdr)i,
courtesy
v.,
177.
of
Tofcdro,
Tokorode, Tokdromi, conjunctions
886.
97.
ATamauri, Tam6r)i, u, verb
Tokoro, noun substantive

315.
TokV, Kttn,
Yomi
.
4.
. .
80.
Tamavfi, u,
tesy
Tama)i,
v.,
Tamoo, verb of cour314.
Tomdya, Tomai, a Jap. numeratire (18)
149.
-fdmd, -vuf, concessive suffix, conjunetion. 206. -tomo, -domo, expression of the plural
844
57.
Tame, word
195.
Tameni, conjunction
Tan, Dan, a Chinese numerative (10)
Tan, a
superficial
843.
152.
Tomo kakumo, adverb
177.
176.
.
Tomom,
adverb
measure
interr.
168.
Tonari, word express, of relation
190.
Tdno (Tono), Dd-no (Dono), Donna,

pronouns
Tare, Dare, Dore, interr. pronouns
-tar)i,
tives
Tono, DOMO, (Tamo

85. 88.
Da HO),
interr.
pronoun
88.
Tonto, adverb
174.
dialect
Tbo-M, Kara-Mo, a Chin,
80.
u,
=.
te
ari,
terrain,
of
adjec-
Tookn, adverb
Todri, word express, of relation
178.
114. 116. 219.
19L
888.
-tar)i,
u,
ta
da,
dla, verbal terrain.,

220.
Todrini, conjunction
Too-tcn-tar)i ,
,
auxiliary verb of the past tense
verb
215. 296.
the past tense. 228. tan)ki, si, ken, verb, terrain, of
Todte,
Tomrite, word express, of relation. 198.

194.
Tankdni, adverb
Tasinde, adverb
Ta-siyo, Ta-lo, adverb
174. 181.
Tootcva, word express, of relation

Too-st*, adverb
176. 178.
181.
Tordnm^,
HTM, Torat)a, tarm, verb of courtesy 822.
of TateTate-mdttitrar)e, urn, honorary passive
Ton, Tote, JVM,

817.
-tote, conjunction
year
154.
mdMlru
Ta(e-mdtitir)i,
,
848.
verb of courtesy
816.
58.
to
tt
mo,
-to
SM
t*
mo;
-fota,
to
Tatri,
suffix
expressing the plural
UWM
Ttttewa, tattoo*
70. 10S.
Tatsi-matri, adverb
Tail-sen, adverb
179. 181. 168.

61. 178. 185.
tooteta
198.
198.
Totont, word
Tti
Tawdra, Pioo, a measure of capacity

-te, suffix express, of relation
(Homo, Y6rddtm), numeral tti, -tm t (dsi), termtn. of numerals.

noon,
suffix
140.
189.
.
-to, -de, verb, terrain, of the -te ari, -te
gerund
terrain
208. 218.
98.
Tti, ttira
of pronouns
80. 88. 187.
on,
-te in, verb,
Ttikd-dtikami, TJU*~foro t adverbs
179. 825.
178.
Te-dzti-ltara,
pronoun
lnka-dt*k)i,
verb of courtesy
-te)ki t -si, ken,
tan)ki,
ri,
ten
228.
adverb
366
INDEX.
Page.
Page.
Tsin,
Tsito,
Maro, pronouns
Tsitto, adverb
186. 176. 158.

143. 189.
TJtd, lyric
poems
'
.
38.
.
Utdgavurakiiva, adverb
Utsi,
TJtn,
182.
188.
Tsiu, Setsu
word expressive
Tltsini,
of relation
Tsiu, Ziyoo, Ge, numerals

Tsiu,
Utsiwa, conjunction
337. 178.
= Naka
Utrini, adverb
Tsiu, adverb
178.
Uve, Uye, word
186. 337.
178.
Tsiyau, Ttoo, a measure of length
167.
168.
. .
.
Uye, conjunction Uyeni, adverb
Tsiyau, Tsoo, a superficial measure
Tfiyao,Tsoo, a Chinese numerative (11).

Tsiyau-do, Two-do, adverb
Tsiyoto, Tsiotto, Tsdito, adverb
152.
V.
-vet,
175.
.
179.
-wa, -la, isolating suffix. 60. 61. 106. 131. 254. 302.
-e,
Tso, a Chinese numerative (16)

-tsu,
-tsu,
153.
-ve,
-he, -ye, suffix expressing the dative
and
a suffix express, of relation
...
61. 67. 294.
terminative
-ve,
-e,
61. 67. 185.
termin. of numerals
-tsutsii; tsur}i,
138.
u.
-he, -ye, suffix of multiplying numerals. 144.
-tsu,
u, variation of n)i,
,
231. 232.
Tsubo,
Pu,
a superficial measure.
168.
w.
Wa,
adverb of place
suffix.
Tsudzuru, verb
Tsugi, Saki (Ato
,
231.
Utiro)
79. 60. 61. 131. 254. 302.
143.
179.
.
.
.
-wa, -va, -la, isolating
Tsuini, adverb
Wa, Fa,
a Japanese
numerative (6)
149.
Twite, Tsukite, word express, of relation

Tsuk}e, uru, verb of courtesy
Tsuki, Tsukite, Tsuite,
Tsuki, Getsu,
194.
322.
Wa, Fa,
a Chinese numerative (4)
151. 267.
80.
Aida,
Wab)i, iru, uru, verb
-ni
yottek\.
159. 266.
Wa-dono, pronoun
WadzuTcani, adverb
Gwats\
month
175.
83. 91.
83. 38. 38.
80.
TsuK)i, iru, verb

Tsukti or Tsukd-matsuri,
=
.
Wdga, pronoun
Waga-mi, pronoun
tsukai- or tsukae, ,
mdtsiiri, verb of courtesy
316.
Wagi-m6ko,
Waga-lmo'ko
TjtH#fo'ra&i,. adverb
Tsune-dzune, Tsuneni, adverb
174.
181.
.
Wa-gunno
siwori, a Jap.
book
Wa-mei-seo, a Jap. book
Tsusima-won
a dialect (Go-won)
30.
.
Wa-nami, pronoun
Wa-nusi, pronoun
Tsutdite, Ts'tatte,
Tsutsi,
word
193.
82.
80. 86. 103.
noun
80.
Ware, pronoun
Wari,
-tsutsu, improperly nsed for dzutsu
232. 153.
Bu, Ein
147.
174.
80. 103.
Tsuu, a Chinese numerative (24)
Waruku, Waruu, adverb

Watdkusi, pronoun
U.
-it,
Wi, I, noun substantive

200. 201.
-wo,
217. 263.
62.
verbal termin
of adject
.
emphatic
suffix
suffix
-M for ku, termin.
113.
-wo,
me, Ume, Mule, Be,

Ukegatte, adverb
TJke-tamavar)i ,
TJra,
s
..
=
,
expressing the accusative
61. 62.
m+
he
291. 176.
Wokiy , improperly used
for Oki-zi, Jap. deno-
mination for particle
43.
4. 29.
M, A
Uke.-tam6ri , verb of courtesy. 315.
Won, Koye
word
187.
Uram)i, uru, verb ...................... 269.
Y.
Ta, lya, To, lyo, adverbs expressing the comparative
Urdni, adverb
-uri,
178.
(-an,
-iri,
-on), contin. verb, termin.
217.
131.
.
-uru, (-eru, -iru\ verb, termin. of the aubst. form. 201.
ya
.ya, -yara
.yaran, conjunctions
....
331.
"Uruu-dzuki , intercalary
-usi, (-asi,
-esi,
-isi,
month
160.
Ta-bunni, adverb
Yagate, adverb
180. 179.
adjectives
,
-osi),
causat. verb, termin. 235.
Usiro (Ato), Saki, Tsugi

TJsiro,
143. 187. 178.
yaka, termin. of
117.
a Jap. book. 5. 29. 36.
6.
word
Yamdto-lumi Yamdto-kdna
Nippon-sto-ki
Usironi, adverb
a form of writing
INDEX.
Page.
367
PlfC.
Yamdto-kotobd, Furu-koto, old Japanese.

Yam)i, u, a verb
-yara, -yaran, -ya, conjunctions
35. 36.
Yoto
Icara,
298. 331. 174. 323.
-yotte,
Yoioni, Yatoye, adverbs

-yonte, word express, of relation
.
178.
194. 334. 174.
yotte, conjunction
Tara-yara, adverb
Yar)i, u, verb of courtesy
Ydsiiku,
You, adverb
Youno
kotobd, Jap. denomin
for
verb.
43.
Ydsuu, adverb
174.
180.
YUe, Ytieni, conjunctions
S34. S39.
Ya-tiiu, adverb
Yuu
and Si, Chinese expressions indicating the

53.
Ydtsu-k6,
Ydkko,
Ydtsii-kdre,
Ydtsii-bdra,
gender of birds
74.
pronouns
Yau-ni, Yoo-ni, adverb and conjunction.
.
181. 338.
z.
-zaran, -zu to nan, -z*
Yau-yaku, Yoo-yaku, adverb
179.
mo arena*,
neg. verb
Yau-yau
site,
Yoo-yoo site, adverb
176. 334.
termin
-zar)i, v,
253.
neg.
',
Yavdri, conjunction
ye, -e,-he t -ve,
terminative
suffix
verb, termin
verb, termin
250. 353.
expressing the dative and

61. 67. 185.
-zari)ki,
ken, neg.
253.
177.
Ze-hi, adverb
-ye, -e, -he, -ve, suffix of multiplying numerals. 144.
Zen,
Move, word
194.
171.
Ye and To ,
distinction of the
names of the ten155.
Zeni (Sen, Man), a copper coin
series cycle
-y)e,
Zen-zenni, adverb
Z}i, u, urn,
174.
$)',
,
urn;
e, uru,
verb, termin. of the passive
nrn
283.
nti
form
Yeda, a Jap. numerative (151
240. 241.
149.
172.
-)', M, neg. verb, termin. Zi (Itti-zi), a silverweigth

Zi-bun, pronoun
-zide ari,
947.
171.
94.
Yen,
dollar
Yen-fooni, adverb
Yi, verb, root of -yori
178.
72.
79.
neg.
verb, termin
260.
188.
119.
179. 153.
93.
Zi-gini yottara, Zi-gini yotte, adverbs

-ziki,
Yo, adverb of place

-yo, an exclamation
-nti, termin. of adjectives.
62. 199.
86.
Zikini, adverb
Yo (Maro,
Tsin), pronoun
Ziku, Chinese Numerative (21)

Zi-rin,
Yo/odo, adverb
Yo-fodo, adverb
Yo-keini, adverb
175.
136. 174.
17B. 178.
pronoun
Zifst (Nitn),
Ka, day
express, of reUtion
160. 181.
. .
Zittuni, adverb
Yokoni, Yoko-samani, adverb
Ztyao,
Ziyoo,
Uye, word
180.
Y6ku,
7<fo, adverb
174.
Tnu, Oe (Kami, Naka, Simo)
143. 167.
176.
94.
Ydkui)i, u, uru, a verb
294.
4.
Ziyoo, Zoo, a measure of length
Yomi, Kun, Tdkti

Yono, pronoun
80.
Ziyu-bunni, adverb
Zi-zen, pronoun
-zo,
84.
Yoo, a Chinese numerative (18)
152.
cmphat.
suffix
89. 98.
suffix
182. 185. 838. yori, suffix express, of relation. 61. 71.

-yorite,
so,
-to,
emphatic
301.
188.
-yotte,
word
194.
Zon-bttnnd n-dai, adverb

foro,
-yori-yori, adverb
181.
140. 174.
81.
Yorddzu (Homo, Tn), numeral
-tu, in
= nn + ton =
ttn
verb. term.
. .
877.
67.
YoronkH, Yordnu, adverb

Yoso for Yoko, pronoun
tn, turn, znran, snnba,

,
813. 814.
180. 171.
adverb
Hoffmann, Johann Joseph A Japanese grammar. Second edition
PLEASE
DO NOT REMOVE
FROM
THIS
CARDS OR
SLIPS
POCKET
UNIVERSITY
OF TORONTO
LIBRARY

File 914

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

File 914

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A

MEMBER OF THE BOYAL ACADEMY OF

published in Dutch also under the

German under the

HOMAGE TO THE LATE

FOR THE DEPARTMENT OP THE COLONIES, MINISTER OP STATE

FOR THE LIBERAL AND ENLIGHTENED MANNER

TO THE FIRST EDITION.

The Grammar of the Japanese language which accompanied with

simultaneously published in the English and in the Dutch languages,

work, not a remodelling or an imitation of any other works of that

years' study of the Japanese

It also contains the author's

observations on the domain of the

his intercourse with native Japanese in France, in

especially in the Netherlands has afforded

him ample opportunities

which have been the more valuable to him, in as much as that

most learned, as well

as with those of the inferior classes of Japanese society.

in the range of his observations,

in connection with the written language.

he has quoted from Japanese writings,

whatever their character,

himself, and trusts that

the experience of others, unprejudiced, will find that

in which he has conceived the language, and

and synthetically, he believes

be in consonance with the

language, simple and natural, and,

his daily experience confirms this,

in general outline ten years ago,

he published the Proeve eener Japansche Spraakkunst door Mr.

approbation was affixed to

by the judgment of scholars,

BROWN, who, in 1863, published the very important contribu-

Colloquial Japanese or conversational sentences

Japanese, not only founded his Introductory remarks on the Author's

method, but with

a few exceptions, followed

The Grammar, now published,

claim to completeness, ought to be

on the Syntax, the materials

which are prepared.

will be published as a separate

work, and be of small compass.

these aids, initiated in the

of the language, the student

use of the Japanese-Dutch-English Dictionary, for the publi-

Majesty's Minister for colonial affairs

out of print, the publisher

proprietor of the Chinese types,

acquired by order of the Dutch

Government, has resolved on a

The Author has found no inducement

modify the matter of this

work; only a few words have been occasionally inserted, others of

There are also some notices added, as on page 157 concerning

other additions are to be found in the ADDENDA to the book.

the same; the second, however,

which the Author

SERRURIER and w. VISSERING,

the study of the Japanese language.

the student the valuable Japanese-English Dictionary of